« Back
Generated:
Post last updated:
and all we do may be undone
I claimed this ship would work. We'll see.
Permalink Mark Unread

When she was young, she tried quite hard to avoid dying. 

It wasn't fear; even when she felt fear, it didn't push her away from danger. It was a simple calculation: if she died, then she wouldn't be able to get anything else done, and she had a lot that needed doing. 

By the time she was middle-aged, by the time the crusaders established a beachhead in Vellumis and it became clear that the Tyrant's demise could be achieved, if only the empire could retain the political will to do it for the twenty further years it would take, she no longer tried all that hard to avoid dying. The thing was that it was hardly going to stick. She'd been Fireballed and speared through and disintegrated and dissolved in acid and bitten in half and bitten into smaller pieces than that, and then they'd put her back up on her feet, usually within six seconds so as to save on the diamond. She did not prefer it, really - for one thing, diamonds were a limited resource -- but it was barely even a consideration, when judging between a few plans to win a battle. 

And then she got stronger, and for the most part stopped dying, though not because she'd started avoiding danger. It was just that Disintegrate wouldn't do it, and Fireballs certainly wouldn't, and dragons were more afraid of her than vice versa, and the only thing on the battlefield that really stood a chance was the Whispering Tyrant. He, too, avoided her. 

She appreciated it, the respite from death. She imagined sometimes that if your life and instincts and priorities and memories were only war, you would become a god of only war, like Gorum; a god of fighting Evil, in her case. She does not intend to be the god of fighting Evil; she intends to be the god of defeating Evil. It's fine if, like Gorum would rust if war ever ended, Iomedae-the-god would cease to be if Evil ceased, but it's not fine if she, a human, would be a hollow thing without an enemy before her; that's not how humans work, not when the work ahead of them is very long and very hard, not when they don't know from which directions they'll be tested. 

So being powerful enough she doesn't die every week is nice. She thinks it's easier to contemplate the future past the end of the war, when it's been a month or so since the war has killed her. 

 

But when she does die, or something, in a Tyrant-orchestrated magical explosion of unfathomable scope and scale, she's not exactly surprised or afraid. 

Permalink Mark Unread

There's an enormous explosion on a battlefield already full of them, and it flings an armored figure in unfamiliar burning livery forty feet into the air; she crashes to the ground and does not move.

 

For a few seconds; then she stands up, taking in who surrounds her and what's presently on fire and which undead need decapitating. She's lost her helmet - it's lying on the ground forty feet away, thoroughly crushed and soaked in blood - which is inconvenient, she hasn't died twice in a single battle since she was thirty but fighting without a helmet is really courting it. 

Permalink Mark Unread

This battlefield...doesn't look even slightly familiar, though some bits of it are certainly on fire. Not very persistent fires. The fighting is in a cleared pass between two mountains, and it's rocky and high-altitude and there is at this point rather little left to burn. 

No undead. No dragons. No familiar uniforms or banners. There aren't actually that many people visible nearby, though there's a lot of damage visible, scorched glassy rocks and a pall of smoke over everything.  

- not a dragon, but something swooping overhead? Several somethings, large, winged, but not dragons. Mammalian, maybe, though the wings are feathered. 

 

 

Also: these Tantaran mages who've been throwing combat spells back and forth with the Predain mages, trying to hold the pass long enough for reinforcements to be available to Gate in, are really alarmed by the apparently weirdly indestructible armored stranger who just fell out of a giant explosion that as far as they know wasn't their side or the other side's work! They're going to circle – rapid Mindspeech coordination, several of them Gate-hop fifty yards over – and raise a shield-perimeter. And then...see what the stranger does???

Permalink Mark Unread

- wow, she has no idea where she is! Are they Evil, do they look hostile, are they presently endangered by having been distracted from the war they were fighting to grab her?

Permalink Mark Unread

They are, for the most part, not Evil! There's a grab-bag of nearly every alignment, with Neutral - mostly Lawful Neutral - overrepresented. They're not not hostile, but they look, mostly, really confused. 

They're...raising an enormous hemispherical barrier over her. It's visible, shimmering slightly like a soap bubble. It does not look like any arcane spell she recognizes. 

 

After a few moments, when it looks like she isn't trying to attack, someone is going to shout to her, magically amplified, in a language she doesn't recognize at all. 

Permalink Mark Unread

She speaks a lot of languages, but this is clearly - another continent? Another planet? A demiplane someone neglected for centuries? She shouts back in Taldane, just in case they have Comprehend Languages but not Tongues. "I am Iomedae, paladin of Aroden; I have no context; it is not my intent to engage any party in these hostilities; I have healing but do not claim the protection due a healer."

Permalink Mark Unread

They do not understand her at all! It's unclear whether this makes the situation more or less concerning! Incredibly baffling things happening on a battlefield are not, generally, a good sign. 

 

...Also they should really not be standing around here, not being behind cover is a terrible idea right now, and this is definitely an unfortunately timed distraction, which would perhaps make it more likely to be enemy action if it made any sense

They've got a long-range Mindspeaker, whose first priority is to send a message to the nearest command camp asking if anyone knows anything that might possibly explain this, but whose second priority, on getting a preliminary response that no they have no idea either, will be trying to read the armored stranger - woman's? - mind. 

Permalink Mark Unread

This woman has the weirdest Thoughtsensing shields ever but they are very very good and no one is going to read her mind. (There are a lot of important military secrets in there! Being confused doesn't mean being incautious!)

Permalink Mark Unread

Well, can they Mindspeak her? Given the apparent language barrier it’s not clear how else to quickly resolve the confusion.

:Can you understand this: the Mindspeaker tries.

Permalink Mark Unread

"I have now received telepathic communication to which I intend to reply," she says aloud in Taldane, even though they've shown no signs of understanding her. 

:I understand you.: 

Permalink Mark Unread

She's answering like an un-Gifted person who is familiar with Mindspeakers but doing it in a kind of weird way. 

:Who do you work for and what are you doing here?: he asks. 

Permalink Mark Unread

:I am Iomedae, paladin of Aroden, Knight-Commander of the Knights of Ozem and of the Shining Crusade. I do not know how I arrived here and do not possess the means to return independently. I have no context; it is not my intent to engage any party in these hostilities; I have healing but do not claim the protection due a healer.:

Permalink Mark Unread

....It's very unclear how to respond to this. 

 

 

Also, it's actually a bad idea to pause on a battlefield and put up a visible mage-barrier and leave it there without moving. The mages on the other side are also not sure what's going on but the barrier is presumably protecting something and thus seems like a good prospective target for a dozen massed levinbolts at once. 

- even a concert-work barrier is not really specced to hold off a coordinated attack like that. It goes down in a crackle of mage-energies, knocking out a couple of the casters in the process. 

Permalink Mark Unread

Levinbolts and mage-energies are not really her primary concern here, especially not if she's the target. She moves shockingly fast and gets clear of the concert-work barrier, not stopping to pick up the downed casters in case they'll take that as hostile, healing herself as she does (which shows up as an incredibly bright blaze of some unusual mage-energy).

 

:Do you want to make an argument for any particular location where we could continue this conversation. Is there a neutral temple nearby.:

Permalink Mark Unread

This is way above the Mindspeaker's pay grade and he's not at all sure whether it's a good idea to evacuate a powerful stranger of unknown allegiance to the base camp, but there's going to be a Gate up any minute and they really can't continue the conversation here. If the stranger – Iomedae, apparently, which doesn't even sound like a real name – really isn't affiliated with Predain, and so far she's showing no sign of it, then it's not exactly fair to leave her standing around in danger while they consult their superiors. 

(And she's got Healing, apparently, and they're rather desperately short on Healers right now, the war is not going well...) 

:Evacuate with the casualties: he tells her. :Gate should be up in less than a minute–: And he switches to Broadsending. :- SHIELDS COVER:–: 

A very large fireball smashes into, not Iomedae, but the three mages who seconds ago were making up the part of the barrier-circle that didn't involve hiding behind rocks. 

Permalink Mark Unread

She unfortunately cannot very usefully intercept Fireballs, and should not try to draw fire if she’s supposed to evacuate with the casualties - is someone visibly gathering them in one place -

Permalink Mark Unread

Behind that tall rock, under lots of additional shielding! A group of the uninjured mages are moving forward, either to draw fire or counterattack, and covering some of the support personnel (shielded with talismans but not themselves mage-gifted) in hauling the casualties back to a location that's slightly safer for someone to be raising a Gate. 

 

The Gate goes up thirty seconds later. 

...It's fairly obviously not a Golarion-style Gate. For one, it's apparently being mounted on a hastily-assembled temporary doorway-like threshold, with two crystal-inlaid carved wooden pieces each held by several personnel. For another, it's not instantaneous; the glow appears, brightens, and it takes nearly five seconds before the spell is fully in place and the interior of the makeshift doorway flashes white and shows someplace entirely different and much less recently on fire. Recently rained on, though; the canvas tents are sitting in a sea of mud. 

There are soldiers lined up on the other side. Some of them are dressed like the people around her right now, who are wearing cloaks and jewelry, minimal armor, and not even carrying weapons save for belt-daggers; most are armored and armed with swords. There are banners, which are completely unfamiliar. 

:Go go go: the Mindspeakers sends to everyone. :Hurry - clear the way for reinforcements: 

Permalink Mark Unread

A lot of these people are in horrible pain and possibly dying, which she disprefers and can fix, so while she makes her way over to them she considers whether she’ll plausibly need the healing for anything even higher priority and whether she’s causing any problems she would let some people die to prevent.

Probably if she channels energy once everyone is within a thirty foot radius of her it will get them back on their feet for the evacuation. Her channels are in fact powerful enough that it’ll probably restore many of them to perfect health, if they are mostly down just from damage, which is what’s consistent with how she’s seen these people take casualties so far. That’s ….not a neutral act, in this war she doesn’t know anything about, and just as importantly it communicates her capabilities very unambiguously, which she disprefers on general instinct and specifically because how these people react to a random presumably not very powerful paladin of an unfamiliar god is more useful information than how they respond to one who only doesn’t make a habit of dragon-slaying because she can usually talk the dragons down.

 

She does it anyway. Her magic items will likely betray her anyway and secrecy is always a consideration but rarely on consideration her preferred way to operate. And channeling energy when there are dozens of badly wounded people around is just usually better than not doing that if they aren’t actively trying to kill you.

Permalink Mark Unread

This will in fact restore everyone to perfect health, including the two mages who took the brunt of the fire-blast and were previously unlikely to survive long enough to reach the Healers' tent at all, though they were of course being retrieved anyway because Urtho's army doesn't just leave people behind to die. 

 

Everyone is also SO SO SO INCREDIBLY STARTLED, and kind of alarmed! The Mindspeaker on this side doesn't ask her what that was, but only because it really would be bad to delay the reinforcements, though they're suddenly much less short on uninjured mages. 

(The previously-badly-injured and now incredibly confused people are going to be rushed through the Gate anyway because they have no idea what just happened and whether the not-Healing will stick or is some kind of ruse.) 

 

It takes thirty seconds or so on the other side for one of the non-Mindspeaker mages to get the attention of one of the camp Mindspeakers. The woman immediately heads over at a run. 

:What Gift was that?: The overtones in her mindvoice are of shock and awe. 

Permalink Mark Unread

:I am a fairly senior paladin of Aroden.: she says dryly. :am willing to do more of them, on your word that those restored won’t return to the battlefield sooner than they would have otherwise or once I have more knowledge of the war.

Permalink Mark Unread

It's fairly obvious from the woman's face that that does not answer her question at ALL. 

:We do have a lot of injured people: she sends, somewhat faintly. :I– you should talk to someone in command, probably, General Judeth can...tell you more about the war... Er, follow me: 

 

The camp continues to look deeply unfamiliar, not just in the banners but in the layout. Also the fact that quite a lot of people are walking around with visible injuries. The mood is...not a happy one. 

Permalink Mark Unread

She can make them all impervious to fear, full of righteous conviction, but that's not exactly something you throw around randomly when you don't even know if they should be full of righteous conviction. A lot of people are full of righteous conviction and shouldn't be.

 

Visibly injured people aren't that surprising, if it's been a hard few days of fighting, but it's information. Guesses: maybe the army, or the continent, or this entire plane, doesn't have any clerics. Maybe all the gods are Evil, or like the Evil ones at home don't offer flexible healing. She was surprised by the channel; maybe they simply don't have it. Maybe they don't have the Positive Energy plane nearby so channeling doesn't work - would hers still work, in that case? Maybe today's but not tomorrow's? - reason to conserve the channels just in case. 

They are not doing well in their war, that's obvious. But they're - not guarded around a powerful newcomer, honestly quite unsuspicious - so they do have the concept of a paladin and can verify that she is one, or otherwise don't expect their enemies - maybe the war is between different species? - to be able to imitate a friend. 

She follows. One might expect that the fifty pounds of metal she appears to be wearing would slow her down, but it doesn't.

(It's mithril, and also if it were fifty pounds it still wouldn't slow her down.)

Permalink Mark Unread

They've noticed her impossible apparent strength and fitness, among her several other impossible traits, including having survived whatever explosion flung her forty feet in the air (despite the fact that, while she's wearing some items that show up to mage-sight, none of it looks like standard physical shielding and she is not visibly herself a mage.) 

 

They wind through various muddy tents to a larger, also-muddy tent, with guards at the entrance. The guards are somewhat more suspicious of Iomedae, but mostly just inspect what she's wearing and conclude that she really doesn't look like she's from Predain. (The workmanship on her armor is better than anything they've seen, and Predain's industry is almost universally worse. Besides, if Predain had someone impossibly tough with impossibly powerful not-Healing, they would have heard about it by now.) They are allowed in. 

The Mindspeaker, whose name is Calli, bows addresses the General in Mindspeech so that she can include the stranger as well. :General Judeth. This is Iomedae. She appeared from nowhere at Korbast Pass. Claims to work for, um, someone called 'Aroden': ('paladin' is not in fact a word in Tantaran and the Mindspeech concept didn't really translate) :and to be Commander-General of the Knights of Ozem. has some kind of Healing...not-Gift...and offered to Heal our people either if we promise not to send them back to the battlefield sooner or if she learns more about the war. I think we should tell her about the war, if she - might be willing to help -: 

Permalink Mark Unread

General Judeth is a tall, hawk-nosed woman with short blonde hair. (And neither a mage nor a Mindspeaker.) 

She nods to Iomedae. "Welcome, Iomedae of the, er, Knights of Ozem. I confess I have no idea where Ozem is, or how far you hail from, but - you must have heard of Archmage Urtho?" 

Permalink Mark Unread

(Calli will relay.) 

Permalink Mark Unread

"I have not heard of Archmage Urtho. At this point, I suspect I may be from one of the stars in your sky. It would have been a powerful spell, to have sent me that distance, but I think my people would have been in touch by now, were I anywhere on the world I started on, or anywhere accessible from there by a Plane Shift."

Permalink Mark Unread

"You - what - where– ...nevermind, later. What questions would you need answered, to be willing to help us? I realize you don't have any context, and - it's easy for anyone to say their side is in the right, but..." Shrug. "Predain needs to be stopped, and the fact that we're less willing to commit atrocities means we're losing ground." 

Permalink Mark Unread

"I have a spell that ensures that no one within its reach can speak a lie. It doesn't change one's answer, or oblige one, but it stills the tongue from speaking one they knew was wrong. It can be subverted, but not trivially. Would I have your permission to cast it?"

Permalink Mark Unread

General Judeth looks at her for a long moment, hard and level. 

"You may," she says finally (and gestures for her guards to be watching with mage-sight, if they aren't already, which they should be.) 

Permalink Mark Unread

Zone of Truth. 

 

Iomedae can throw off the Whispering Tyrant's spells more often than not; throwing off her own is utterly trivial. She doesn't, though, as a courtesy, and watches everyone else closely; she can usually see if they throw it off or not, and even better they usually assume she can.

Permalink Mark Unread

Neither General Judeth nor Calli even know they're supposed to be trying to throw something off! The mage-guards are on alert for a spell, and will notice something unexpected happening and try to resist it, but they're not particularly advantaged at this. 

 

General Judeth has failed to notice anything happening, and waits politely for Iomedae. 

Permalink Mark Unread

"The spell is in effect. Please tell me about your war, your aims, your enemy."

Permalink Mark Unread

General Judeth will do that! 

 

Predain is Tantara's neighbor, to the north. While Tantara is one of the more prosperous kingdoms in the region – and certainly one of the most magically advanced, home to Archmage Urtho – they've historically been a peaceful country. They aren't used to waging war with their neighbors. 

Predain was, until recently, poorer and more backward - and more violent, with frequent internal conflicts and succession crises, but they had never been organized enough to fight Tantara until Adept Kiyamvir Ma'ar rose to become one of the King's top advisors, and rapidly advanced Predain's industry and mage-education as well as pushing expansionism. 

They started off conquering the smaller city-states and landholdings to the north and east, and Urtho was initially hesitant to advise any response to the King of Tantara. Adept Ma'ar had been among his best students, once, decades ago now. Urtho never wanted to end up at war. But Predain kept gobbling up territory, and sooner or later they were going to run out of room, or tire of conquering the cold rocky land to their north and look for richer pastures. And whatever Ma'ar wanted - the man did claim in his letters to Urtho, which were friendly on the surface, that he was interested in an alliance with Tantara - the King of Predain clearly had his own ideas for their country's future. 

Also, under Adept Ma'ar's guidance, Predain was making some very concerning policy changes. The country had fewer mages trained well enough to do the massive concert-melds required to raise bridges and towers, but Ma'ar was too impatient to wait for that to change in its own time, and so they legalized blood-magic and began a program of executing convicted criminals for power in order to do infrastructure projects. They instituted standard mage-compulsions, made them part of the oath of loyalty and service for their Guard. They started breeding mages, paying Gifted women to bear children with Gifted men who often weren't even their husbands. 

 

Diplomatic communications failed to persuade Predain to stop conquering its neighbors - which at this point had included an actual kingdom, if a small one - or turn away from their various horrible policies. The the King of Tantara was alarmed, and eventually Urtho had no more reassurances to offer. Tantara's intentions weren't to fully conquer and annex Predain, just to secure their own border and find a more persuasive route to getting Predain to stop conquering everything in reach, because clearly polite letters from a former teacher and mentor weren't convincing. 

 

It went wrong almost from the beginning. For all his flaws, no one could argue that Adept Ma'ar wasn't a brilliant strategist, and he was far more willing to be ruthless than Urtho could countenance in his own army. Even with more, better trained, and better-shielded mages, in many battles Tantara ended up overwhelmed by weaker mages bloated with blood-magic. Adept Ma'ar was apparently even willing, in some circumstances, to order his own people to Final Strike in order to turn battles around. Urtho had gryphons, but Adept Ma'ar carried out his own frantic Great Working and made his own flying species, the makaar, less intelligent but far more violent and bloodthirsty. 

And then he conquered the capital. It happened in a single night. He used an artifact of dark magic, called a dyrstaff – smuggled into the Palace, the spell it bore wove its way into the minds of everyone within range, and overnight while they slept, cast a spell of escalating fear and panic. Nearly everyone fled in incoherent terror, and in the morning, Adept Ma'ar was able to Gate his own forces in, nearly unopposed. The King was evacuated in time, barely, but the frantic rescuing force had found him cowering in his own wardrobe, and he wasn't a young man. He never recovered his wits after the shock, and died a few months later. 

 

Urtho - a peaceful man, who spent his life teaching students - was left as their only remaining leader, and he's starting to run out of ideas. 

Permalink Mark Unread

- that does sound like a serious problem! She's correcting, mentally, for the obvious ways that a people tell their own story, but several of the concepts being passed along through Telepathy here are in fact quite bad. Running your government on mind control: quite bad. Executing prisoners for magical power you can use for infrastructure projects: quite bad. ...she can think of her allies of hers who'd venture a full-throated defense of it, of course, but they wouldn't actually do it, because down that slippery slope lies -

"Do I understand correctly that using, uh, blood magic, in combat, is very useful, a substantial strategic advantage, but that a taboo on it existed prior to Predain's rise?"

Permalink Mark Unread

"Yes." General Judeth ducks her head. "They - don't use captured prisoners from our side, for it. Apparently the mage-soldiers have compulsions against doing that, and against - mistreating them - Adept Ma'ar seems to think it's quite humane of him. But they'll use their own criminals, or - ask for volunteers, and of course you wonder how voluntary it can really be..." 

Permalink Mark Unread

" - that's actually promising, though, if there are laws of war they are still abiding by - do you know which ones -"

Permalink Mark Unread

"Is it? Urtho says that Adept Ma'ar has always done whatever he wants - whatever he can justify to achieve his aims - and when you're lucky, the thing he wants isn't the most horrible thing you can imagine. ...There were debates, when he was a child, there's a story that he tried to convince the other pupils you could prevent the city guard from raping helpless women by compulsioning them against that – to be clear, we don't even have a problem with that, Predain did. But he's never respected any of our laws just because they were the law, only if someone could - win an argument using logic." 

Permalink Mark Unread

“The question is whether he’ll respect a parley so we can talk, or peace terms if he signs them.”

Permalink Mark Unread

Shrug. "He might. He's certainly kept offering parleys to Urtho, he's still writing to him even now. I've asked Urtho, Urtho...doesn't really expect him to keep his word. He would probably keep to peace terms if he agreed to them at all, I'm sure he'd rather be spending all those dead convicts on bridges and not explosions, but - he'd only accept if they were favorable enough to Predain - they're winning -" 

Permalink Mark Unread

“Yep, that’s how that goes. We probably first have to change that they are winning. But the aim has to be a negotiated peace, eventually - does the King have a more moderate candidate successor -“

Permalink Mark Unread

"We think he wants to appoint Ma'ar as his successor. I don't know that we'd be better off with any of his sons. Though it - might be that he wouldn't be a problem, if Ma'ar were no longer in power." 

Permalink Mark Unread

This has occurred to her too. A lot of things have occurred to her, actually, but that's certainly one of them. "Is there some respected neutral party that could guarantee everyone's safety for a parley - some other kingdom, a temple order -"

Permalink Mark Unread

"There isn't really another kingdom with enough military force to step in and guarantee anyone's safety, that cares to intervene in this or that both sides have pre-existing relations with. And - I think temple orders must be one of those customs that Adept Ma'ar doesn't care about because no one ever brought up a sufficiently logical argument in debate class for why it matters. Urtho said he never liked religions or saw why anyone would worship gods. He's - he doesn't slaughter the people or anything, he's given the peaceful monastic orders in cities he conquered safe passage to evacuate, but we know for a fact that he's gone on and taken over the temples to turn into barracks. So I'm not hopeful." 

Permalink Mark Unread

"Do you have a secure avenue to talk with him remotely."

Permalink Mark Unread

"Urtho has a communication-spell. It's not secure - worse, it's theoretically trackable and could be used to target an attack, not easily but he's - very very good at magic. Urtho's been blocking it. Ma'ar - has been sending letters - but we certainly don't trust we have a way to reply that would only reach him." 

Permalink Mark Unread

"Can you tell me about Tantara. How it's governed, who it educates, how its soldiers are conscripted, which persons can travel if they choose -"

Permalink Mark Unread

She can tell Iomedae about Tantara! 

 

It sounds like a reasonably Lawful place. Fairly standard hereditary monarchy, though King Leodhan had no heirs, he would have appointed someone if his death had been any less unexpected. Major kingdom-wide decisions and new laws are passed with the approval of a council of nobles - most of them currently vanished, either dead or in hiding, after the incident in the capital - and an appointed set of ministers, not necessarily of noble birth. A court system run mostly independently from the Crown, with regional judges elected by the local populace. 

Urtho's Tower educates any and all Gifted children who come to it - not just mage-gift, but other Gifts like Healing and Mindspeech and rarer ones like Fetching or Farsight or Mindhealing. There are even classes for the un-Gifted, and merit scholarships. Kiyamvir Ma'ar arrived as a penniless illiterate orphan and was offered a place in the Tower with no questions asked. 

(Iomedae can read between the lines that away from Urtho's Tower, education is far more haphazard; some lessons are offered at temples, but a more thorough education is mostly only available via private tutors to children of wealthy or noble families. And not everyone Gifted, has the resources or the wherewithal to make it to Urtho's Tower in the first place.) 

They started out with a volunteer army. Conscription for mages and for Mindspeakers, anyone between age fifteen and forty-five with at least a Master-potential Gift or a Mindspeech range of at least a mile, was phased in only a month into the war. Conscription for Healers started six months later (early on they had plenty of volunteers, and casualties have been much lower among noncombatants.) They've now started conscripting un-Gifted troops as well but...probably too little too late. 

...When it's not wartime, anyone can travel anywhere they like? Unless you count convicted criminals, maybe, who usually serve sentences doing agricultural labor, the death penalty was used very rarely. You couldn't, like, wander into the Palace or into Urtho's Tower without being stopped and asked to state your business, but would rarely be refused if your errand was innocent. Towns can and do vote to evict troublemakers, but it has to be really quite a lot of trouble caused before it's worth the hassle. 

Permalink Mark Unread

Slavery, serfdom, subpopulations where things are a bit more complicated (the bird-soldiers?), any of the other wide range of things societies sometimes turn out to be doing and not thinking of as a bad thing necessarily? The Zone of Truth runs out, which she doesn't indicate and also doesn't much worry about; her current assessment is that if Tantara is founded on lies, this woman doesn't know them, and that she believes herself to be spending the lives of her people in desperate defense of the most prosperous, Lawful and Good place in her world.

Permalink Mark Unread

Slavery is illegal, and being caught dealing in slaves - which does sometimes happen - is one of the few capital crimes. It seems like they probably have de facto serfdom, though not of an incredibly oppressive variety. 

The gryphons are Urtho's project. He loves them like a father, and ensures that they're provided for, and breeds them as part of his continuing work on perfecting the species. The gryphons weren't made for war, Urtho wouldn't have done that, but maybe because the base species used were predators, they're well suited to it, psychologically. Nearly every adult volunteered in the first weeks of the war, and plenty of juveniles tried and were turned away. 

 

General Judeth does indeed seem very sincere in her defense of Tantara's virtues, and genuine in her terror for their future. 

Permalink Mark Unread

"I'll do another channelled healing. It's a thirty foot radius, you can really pack people in, it'll work so long as they're not actually dead yet and unless they're very experienced soldiers it should restore them to full health. - maybe even if they are very experienced soldiers, I don't know how that'd work in another world. In the long run you'll want a specialized building built with multiple floors, if you only have me to channel, but first we should find out if I even get my channels back tomorrow, I'm uncertain. 

After that I would like to meet Urtho. I do not want to see Tantara conquered; I do not know yet how best I can avoid that."

Permalink Mark Unread

General Judeth smiles at her, tiredly but with deep gratitude. "We can probably get everyone in the Healing tent into a thirty-foot radius, and some of the walking wounded. And there's going to be a message-Gate at sunset, we can send you through to the Tower with an escort. ...Is there anything we need to be careful of, about the healing? If you're really - from another world," which is something she's barely interacted with, it's too strange and too abstract and everything further away than tomorrow morning's deployments and supply-missions feels too unreal to matter, "then is it possible it'd have strange side effects for us? Do people need to rest afterward?" 

Permalink Mark Unread

"They shouldn't. It's dangerous to the undead -" it's clearly an unfamiliar word - "corpses animated to serve a controlling mage - and it doesn't break curses or restore lost limbs or address poisoning. I can do those things but not for everyone in a thirty foot radius and not until we learn, tomorrow, if my channelling returns normally here. 

It is, of course, sometimes hard on soldiers, to be nearly killed and then restored to perfect health to be thrust out again into the battle. Not because the magic can't sustain them, but because what we risk in war is a thing that the mind never really entirely comes to grips with. When I can, I give people the rest of the day off, at least until they've gotten accustomed.

I had one more question. You mentioned Ma'ar was aggressive in using Final Strikes when he was losing. How - serious of an explosion is that, at what distance does it kill a civilian."

Permalink Mark Unread

General Judeth nods along. "We won't send anyone whose injuries were serious back out until tomorrow. It's not like we were expecting to have them back on their feet for days or weeks."

 

And she frowns. "It depends on the Gift-potential of the mage. A Master-level Final Strike will kill anyone unshielded within a radius of - call it a hundred to three hundred yards, depending on the exact grade of potential - and might badly injure un-Gifted civilians up to half a mile away. Close-up - which it usually is - it'll kill even well-shielded mages. A powerful Adept can take out everyone in a mile's radius. If it's on a dry or windy day, and you get really unlucky, the forest fires afterward can take out half your troops."

She says it bitterly. It sounds like it's from experience. 

Permalink Mark Unread

 

- she looks genuinely startled, by that.

 

Then she takes off one of the rings on her finger and puts on a different one from a - inbuilt jewelry-chest in her gauntlet, apparently. 

" - Evasion," she says, as if in explanation. "There is no spell with such power at home. Even with the ring I'd rather not test it, but - if I were your enemies, if they have good intelligence, that's what they'd try."

Permalink Mark Unread

Judeth blinks and looks startled at the jewelry-chest-gauntlet, then shakes herself a little. "Doubt they know enough about you yet, but - yes, if you agree to help us, I imagine it'll be rather conspicuous." 

 

It'll take about twenty minutes to get everyone packed into the Healing tent who can possibly fit in a thirty-foot radius. In the meantime, General Judeth is happy to answer any of Iomedae's remaining questions that come up, it's not like there's anything higher value for the war effort she could possibly be doing. 

Permalink Mark Unread

She has so many questions! Most of them just in the spirit of a fellow professional, how are the units organized and trained and what are the current strategic objectives and what can they do that Predain can't, and if she's probing for inconsistencies with what she heard earlier, well obviously she's doing that, but it's not as if the questions aren't interesting and important in their own right. Iomedae likes her work. It's sad work, not work one should be full of glee about, but a deep abiding joy in a job well done isn't misplaced on a battlefield, and the Shining Crusade has stretched on, at this point, several very educational decades. 

Permalink Mark Unread

Judeth is clearly very competent, if somewhat harried and overwhelmed (and it does show that she's had only a little over a year of experience with real war and not multiple decades.) But if her strategic thinking isn't as sophisticated as Iomedae might hope for, at least she knows her people and their locations and resources and logistics very very well. 

They have pretty solid logistics and supply chains. Gates are much better for that than Teleports, and even Master-level mages can raise them, if not as far or for as long a duration. Tantara is also possessed of the world's finest permanent Gate network, which you would THINK would be more of an advantage than it is but Ma'ar is very good at plotting forward strikes to capture termini; the network is secured by particular passcodes or keyed to individual mages' signatures, and Urtho can shut the captured Gates down from a distance and make them unusable, but it's still eating away at their supply chain capacity.

Urtho very reluctantly did a destructive shutdown of the permanent Gate-terminus in Jerlag Pass, recently; it's around as big as explosion as an Adept's Final Strike, and might act to dissuade Ma'ar from being quite so cavalier about dropping small strike parties on their Gate-depots, but it still cost them another node in the network. 

Permalink Mark Unread

And he doesn't sound like the type to necessarily consider that a bad trade for a strike party. "Were you contemplating surrender?"

Permalink Mark Unread

"I brought it up with Urtho when we last met. He...thinks Ma'ar would want his Tower, and that it's - unacceptable for him to end up holding that much power." She makes a face. "Not that I know what he's planning on instead. It's very well defended, but - he'll still capture it by force sooner or later, whether we surrender or not." 

Permalink Mark Unread

A powerful archmage probably has a lot of tricks up his sleeve. She does not make this observation. Working with powerful archmages gets fraught if people keep pointing out to you that they could be contributing more. "Predain hasn't proposed terms?"

Permalink Mark Unread

"Not through formal channels here. If Ma'ar proposed anything to Urtho in private communications, Urtho didn't think enough of it to pass it on. You can ask him, I guess." 

Permalink Mark Unread

She nods.

It is as a general rule a bad idea, to have your most powerful wizard the commander of your war effort. They're two very different skillsets. She has not actually seen anything to suggest to her that Urtho is the exception, but she's not arriving at any judgments yet, beyond that Tantara's conquest would probably be quite bad; she can live in several possibilities at once. Maybe Urtho's incompetent and the situation is retrievable. Maybe Urtho is incompetent and the situation is not retrievable. Maybe Urtho has some backup plans that aren't a terrible idea. Maybe Urtho has some backup plans that are a stupendously terrible idea. 

She's uncertain in her assessment of the other side, too, but it matters less. Ma'ar is for all she knows well-intentioned; he wouldn't be the first person to put a ruthless expansionist dictator in power and provoke a bloody war with the best conceivable intentions. What matters is whether he'll offer terms she can accept while he's in fact winning the war, and whether it's safe to try to talk with him, and 'aggressively breaking most of the taboos around warfare' is probably the second-worst sign available on that front, behind 'has outright betrayed a parley in the past'. She's not unkillable. The obvious thing for him to do, if she comes to him to talk and says 'I can make this war winnable for Tantara, so let's talk terms' is to, you know, kill her and go back to winning his war.

If not for the explosive attack that kills everyone for a mile around she'd honestly just chance it. He can attack in a parley; she can fight her way out. It's great when you can offer people the benefit of the doubt because the worst-case scenario is that they betray you and the next ten minutes are very bloody and very tedious. 

There's no Resurrection here. She'd asked, though she'd guessed it already from their bafflement at her powers and the circumstances under which Tantara's king had died. The worst case scenario is that she dies - which probably isn't that inconvenient for her personally, her own people will resurrect her back home, if that can be done, and it'd be surprising if a Miracle alongside a True Resurrection couldn't do it -

- but does mean that Tantara loses, in this case to a Predain in the worse half of possible Predains. 

And if she doesn't tip her hand like that, she can probably win it for them. 

 

 

She holds out her hands to the assembled crowd and does another channel. 

Permalink Mark Unread

People are awed and almost pathetically grateful. General Judeth shoos them away from flocking her to thank her; it’s not like she even speaks the language.

 

She can get some more information from General Judeth on Predain’s known resources and standard tactics and recent victories. They’ve won most engagements so far, and chosen the ground for most of them, because — well, Judeth doesn’t say it explicitly, and clearly has great respect for the man, but Urtho isn’t a military leader. He hates war. Since the King’s incapacitation and the weeks of ambiguous chain of command while it looked like he might still recover, their side of the war has mostly been waged reactively. 

Ma’ar is clearly good at what he does, and apparently a popular leader; his people are very loyal to him.

 

 

And a couple of candlemarks later, the scheduled Gate goes up. General Judeth dispatches an escort to take Iomedae from the Gate-depot to Urtho’s Tower. Urtho should be expecting her.

Permalink Mark Unread

Taking over command of a military front from a wizard who is no good at it is something Iomedae has done four times before! That doesn't bother her at all, and usually makes everyone involved happy. She's not going to announce intent to do that, though, obviously, she'll just ask enough strategy questions that if she were in charge tomorrow she'd be clear on what tradeoffs she was making. 

She isn't bothered by the healed people, at all. She beams at them and asks her translator how to say 'it is my honor' and then repeats it over and over again. There are many many people in the world she is too busy for, but not one she is too important for; it's not a difference you want to lose sight of, and then on top of that one should really try extraordinarily hard not to be too busy for people who you might ask to die for you. 

And then she'll go through the Gate-depot to Urtho's Tower. 

Permalink Mark Unread

Oh, it's beautiful. 

Permalink Mark Unread

It IS! They walk from the Gate-station into the gardens, with winding cobblestone paths and gorgeous marble statues. There are children and juvenile gryphons playing together, and members of some third nonhuman species – lizardlike, shorter than humans, with domed foreheads above their snouts and jewel-bright patterned scales – are bustling around tending to the flowerbeds and watching the children. 

There's little sign of the war, here, save for the fact that there are very few (human) adults in young adulthood, and the handful she sees are visibly crippled. There's an open-air market, also manned by the lizardfolk, but it's almost deserted. 

 

Urtho's Tower rears up over them, an elegant spire in a flowing, almost organic shape, with shorter secondary towers around the base. It must be hundreds of storeys tall. As they approach along one of the winding paths, they fall into its shadow. 

And then in through a door – one that opens almost seamlessly out of the white stone – and into an echoing antechamber. The lizardfolk stationed at doorways and bases of spiral staircases are carrying weapons. They don't seem very happy about this. They call out cheerfully to Iomedae's guards, in whistling voices. 

There's an elevator that must be powered by magic. The elevator chamber is large enough to fit multiple adult gryphons, and feels very empty with just Iomedae and the three human mages sent as her escort. 

The elevator rises, effortlessly carrying them upward. 

Permalink Mark Unread

She does not communicate with Aroden directly very much; it's expensive for Him, it's temporarily incapacitating for her, and they're on the same page anyway. But she does think, as they're walking through the gardens, as they're floating up into the tower, that this is a place He would really, really like, and that if some power other than Tar-Baphon is responsible for her landing here, if there's anything to be done besides win a war from an unwinnable position, she suspects it'd be worth telling her what that is; and she lays out clearly in her mind what the answers might be, in god-terms, seen through the web of futures, so that it would be relatively inexpensive to gesture at one. 

There's no answer, which is fine. Honestly, if she's out of His reach here, that's also fine; she'll dearly miss the healing, but most of what she is isn't anything Aroden gave her, and in the long run it was always going to be necessary to be a god in her own right.

 

She marvels at the surroundings, points expressively at beautiful bits of architecture, waves to the children. It's - a nicer place than she expected, honestly. Tantara is a surprisingly nice place - she'd say suspiciously nice, but her gut actually doesn't point that way. Some places are very nice, some powerful wizards are Good. 

She is continually detecting Evil. It's always good to know that kind of thing, imperfect as it is.

Permalink Mark Unread

(Some of the soldiers on the battlefield read as Evil – not all by any means, somewhere between 10% and 25% – but she's hardly detecting anyone Evil here.) 

 

They disembark from the elevator on a floor that, per the view from the windows, is at least two hundred feet up. Some of the lizardfolk guards cheerfully escort them down the hallway, knock at a large ornate door, and wait to be acknowledged. 

Permalink Mark Unread

Urtho's office looks exactly like the stereotype of a brilliant if absentminded wizard's workshop. The walls are set floor-to-ceiling with shelves, full of books. Practically every surface is covered in piles of notes, and there are elaborate half-completed magical projects on various side tables.

His desk, however, is cleared save for a map, held stretched out with some kind of mage-artifact focus as a paperweight on one end and a cup of cold tea pinning down the other. 

 

Urtho rises. He, too, is the perfect stereotype of a brilliant wizard. Tall and storklike, with long silver hair falling in tangled waves, and intelligent blue eyes, alight with curiosity, set on either side of a beaky nose. 

"Iomedae of the Knights of Ozem," he says. He doesn't bow; he's way too excited for that. "I hear you come from another world and have different magic!" 

(One of his hertasi is a Mindspeaker, and will relay for them.) 

Permalink Mark Unread

Ah, this kind of interaction. She smiles warmly back at him. "I do! I would demonstrate it for you, but I fear in this world it might be a scarce resource. I do have magic artifacts you can look at, designed by craftsmen who are experts in magic as it is practiced in my homeland."

Permalink Mark Unread

He wants to see all of her artifacts! He has so many questions about her world's magic!

What are the different kinds? Is crafting-magic a different kind from whatever she can do or just a different educational specialization? Is it something people are born with, like Gifts? What is learning it like? Do people vary in how powerful they are and if so how powerful is she? 

Did she know there were other worlds? How did she get to this one? Has this sort of thing happened before? Does she think there's a way for them to get from here to her world so he can talk to other people there? 

 

(It's pretty clear from his manner that Urtho has managed to mostly forget about the war, per se, in his excitement about encountering the magic of another world.) 

Permalink Mark Unread

Iomedae possesses, in the jewelry-box in her gauntlet, an extraordinarily powerful ring of protection and two paired rings which allow her to take half the damage dealt to someone else (or vice versa, but that has rarely been useful) and a ring of freedom of movement and a scarab of protection and eight pearls of power (two first circle, two second circle, two third circle, two fourth circle) and a strand of prayer beads and a stone of good luck.

She makes absolutely no representation that the jewelry-box is where she keeps most of her magic items.

 

She is additionally wearing boots that allow her to move and react much faster, a ring that makes her need no food and little sleep, a ring that lets her dodge attacks wholly undamaged (she's not sure if it'll work against an Adept's final strike), a headband which enhances her clarity of thought and her force of will, a necklace that makes her more heavily armored, a mantle of spell resistance, a belt that makes her tougher, stronger and faster, the gauntlets which in addition to containing a jewelry box only she can access make it much harder to part her from her sword, and armor which is enhanced to be more durable, resistant to different kinds of magical attacks, capable of shapeshifting to better defend against different kinds of physical attacks, and makes it very difficult for attacks to hit a vital point. 

She makes absolutely no representation that this is all that she is wearing. 

 

Few of the items are hers; they are the Empire's, invested in her for the war's duration, and she is not willing or able to give them away, though she'd lend them at need. 

 

Most paladins are less powerful than her. Actually, to her knowledge all paladins are less powerful than her. There are people more powerful than her, such as Tar-Baphon, the lich necromancer she's been battling these last few decades. She's going to need some help to seal him away for good. Geb and Nex, the two wizards who famously scarred the world with their thousand-year war, were also more powerful than her. (Of course, she could kill any of them if she could get into range to fight them face to face, but not being idiots, none of them would risk that.)

 

Her magic is gained through prayer and meditation, learning to communicate with a fragment of Aroden's will and ask it for what she needs to achieve her aims each day. Other magic is gained through study; you have to be clever, for that, cleverer than she was at fourteen when she was contemplating how best to fix all the problems in the world, and though she's now clever enough to learn it (at enough expense, cleverness can be purchased, and it was worth the purchase) she's been very busy, and prefers to work with allies. Likewise she could perhaps have learned to craft, but didn't, because it's time consuming and there was a lot of Evil to defeat.

Yet other magic is inborn, or contracted-for with a powerful entity, or arises spontaneously one day for no reason; there are many powers about Golarion and few see fit to explain themselves. 

Permalink Mark Unread

Urtho is captivated! He wants to spend the next week inspecting and asking her questions about every single magical artifact she showed him. He's never heard of paladins, and he has so many questions about Aroden – Aroden is her god? Is it common for Aroden to grant magic directly to people who pray to Him, in a way that - neat and predictable? It isn't here, the gods sometimes perform miracles through Their chosen people, or give Their priests and shamans advice, but...it's rare. Certainly none of them, not even the Goddess of his Shin'a'in people, are providing any miracles to help Tantara win this war - 

 

- he will reluctantly put aside his several thousand questions about her magic and ask if she has other questions about their war, which is a far more tedious topic but also kind of pressing. 

Permalink Mark Unread

She does, yeah. She wants to confirm what Judeth told her, as diplomatically as possible, and then she wants to humbly suggest that she has run some wars herself and might have advice that could be of aid to Tantara.

Permalink Mark Unread

Urtho can confirm everything Judeth said. Including that Adept Kiyamvir Ma'ar was his student, decades ago – an unusually brilliant and talented young man, but frighteningly ambitious, and not very moved by other people's scruples. He got...subtler...in showing his ruthlessness, as he grew up, but clearly he never really changed his mind. 

Urtho tried to convince him to stay at the Tower; he worried that returning to Predain, notoriously violent and corrupt, would only encourage the young man in seeking power by force. Ma'ar refused to be convinced. It was his homeland, he said, and the people there needed his help far more than anyone in the already-prosperous and flourishing kingdom of Tantara.  

It's clear that Urtho feels badly about the war. "It blindsided him," he admits. "I don't know how he could have been surprised, after so many years of ignoring my warnings, but - he was."

 

He will absolutely take the advice of an expert! Advice sounds incredible! 

Permalink Mark Unread

Great! She thinks he should ask for a three-day ceasefire. 

Predain almost certainly will not grant it. They're winning, and they must suspect Urtho has some resources they don't know about, and giving him time is just strategically unwise from their perspective. But they don't, it sounds like, actually have very good intelligence out of Predain, and sometimes you get lucky and there are events behind the scenes you don't know about, or perhaps Ma'ar still thinks of himself in such a way that an appeal for a temporary peace from Urtho will go over well with him. The fact he keeps writing letters is a little bit of a good sign, though there's also the obvious interpretation where he tried to keep Tantara at ease with all Predain's violations of the local norms of war, and conquests, until Predain was powerful enough that appeasement no longer seemed necessary.

And there is also the possibility that Predain will agree to, and then break, the ceasefire, which would be very informative.

She wants the three days to reorganize and figure out how to make the war winnable, obviously, but she also wants it because if they manage it, then that's a tiny bit of trust, from which perhaps enough further trust could be built that she could go meet this Ma'ar face to face and tell him that Urtho has new allies and he needs to start thinking about peace on terms acceptable to Tantara.

She also wants to figure out the intelligence situation? Who are Ma'ar's spies within Tantara? Can Tantara's spies be asked to take more risks inside Predain? She needs to understand more of the dynamics at court in Predain, and she needs to have a good channel through which to spread information about her arrival back to that court. 

She also wants to talk to some of the prisoners of war Tantara is holding, and maybe try to negotiate a prisoner swap for the same reason - little pieces of trust - as she wants to try the ceasefire. Has that been attempted, how did it go?

Permalink Mark Unread

...Ma'ar might grant a ceasefire. If he does, Urtho thinks it would be evidence that he thinks he can make the extra time work to his benefit as much as theirs. He seems to have very good intelligence on Tantara – not surprisingly, maybe, because he studied at Urtho's Tower, and for all that he was a prickly, troubled young man who made himself hard to befriend, he clearly did find some allies there. While Iomedae hasn't revealed many of her powers visibly in public, Ma'ar is very clever, and might be able to learn more and prepare better in that time than Iomedae is expecting. 

 

On Tantara's end of things, they didn't even have a diplomatic representative in Predain in the leadup to the war, and they had relatively little merchant trade; up until the last few years, when Ma'ar finally succeeded at clamping down on local banditry, Predain's trade roads were very unsafe. And Predain is...ethnically culturally different. Urtho will admit, with a faint flicker of embarrassment, that many of his own people are prejudiced against their northern neighbor. It is, relatedly, difficult for Tantaran spies to pass unobserved in Predain. Their best intelligence came from gryphon flyovers, but Ma'ar must have figured out some kind of ward-system to detect them even when Urtho provides the scout parties with covering illusions and shields. Right now they have a few low-level spies in Predain war camps, working as cooks or whatnot, but none of them are Mindspeakers and that means reports back and forth are costly and dangerous to pass along. 

He does know that many Predain citizens, including the captured prisoners - who Iomedae is welcome to try speaking to, though he thinks she'll be lucky to get any cooperation - see the war as an entirely unprovoked and unjustifiable threat to their kingdom's survival, and Tantara as an untrustworthy negotiating partner. 

Permalink Mark Unread

Not surprising. 

She thinks the ceasefire is worth it even though Predain will presumably only accept it if it's to their advantage. You can't build trust without risking anything. It does seem very likely that Ma'ar will use the purchased time for spying, but that too doesn't have to be a bad thing; she wants Predain to believe that Tantara has some game-changing new options, though ideally they wouldn't know her exact location or that she's the full extent of the new options. They're going to have to believe something has changed for a negotiated peace. 

Is mindreading routine enough around here that it's unworkable to turn some of the prisoners and send them back as spies?

Permalink Mark Unread

Urtho seems dubious of this plan but...sure, he's not willing to risk the communication-spell but he can try to send a messenger with a letter. Ma'ar probably won't have an envoy murdered. It's not the...kind of person he wants to see himself as...and, well, he probably genuinely doesn't want there to be a war. It's just that he probably isn't going to accept peace terms that include, say, Tantara getting to have any say over his country's laws on using blood-magic to build aqueducts, and Tantara is kind of not okay with them continuing to do that. 

 

Predain has fewer Mindspeakers than Tantara, but Urtho suspects that Ma'ar is quietly recruiting them as mercenaries from elsewhere, and making very efficient use of whatever number he has. Spies who can pass, ethnically and culturally, as Predain natives might not garner enough suspicion to warrant a routine Thoughtsensing check, if they're in low-level positions, but he wouldn't want to confidently bet on it. He would be very impressed if Iomedae can manage to turn anyone; everyone they've captured so far seems to think the sun rises and sets with Adept Ma'ar. 

Permalink Mark Unread

Well, Tantara's not going to get terms where they can ban blood-magic in Predain, realistically. Tantara should try for pre-war borders, and then she'll go over to Predain and see what can be done to get them to cut it out with the blood-magic. It does seem like a horrendously bad idea to her, and a situation well worth addressing, but it does not seem likely to work out as part of the peace terms for this war which Tantara isn't winning. They can throw it into their demands but she wants Urtho to have realistic expectations here, and those are that pre-war borders would be very good news. 

Permalink Mark Unread

Sigh. Urtho doesn't look happy about it, but she is clearly the expert on this and he's not going to argue. 

 

What are her spying abilities. Do any of her incredible magic artifacts give her some abilities to get better intelligence on what Predain is doing and how their King - who presumably is the one who has final say, not Ma'ar - is thinking about the war? 

Permalink Mark Unread

Not really. She can send someone with the ring that splits injuries between them and they can communicate that way, but the rest of the tools she'd use for espionage she unfortunately does not carry on her person during combat, and paladins don't generally get spells for deception or illusion. Deception and illusion are very useful but so are knowingly not dealing in them.

She thinks that the thing to do is turn some of the prisoners, which she really expects to be possible; it seems like Tantara might be at a disadvantage at it, what with having started the war and what with the history of mistrust and discrimination. She is hoping that she can offer, instead, a perspective where a war of conquest in Tantara serves Predain's people not at all and it's in their interests to help her get a peace that leaves Predain strong and independent but inside its pre-war borders and done with all the conquering. She'll know more once she's spoken to them, though.

Permalink Mark Unread

Urtho can arrange it, then. It's going to be another Gate; the prisoners aren't kept anywhere near his Tower.

They don't have any mages, at least not above very weak Master-potential; mages are difficult to capture alive at all and even more difficult to hold securely. Ma'ar, of course, does it with compulsions. 

Permalink Mark Unread

Then she will go and meet Tantara's prisoners of war. She'll need an interpreter, which is seriously inconvenient for something like this, but it seems worth attempting anyway.

Permalink Mark Unread

It's going to take another couple of candlemarks for Urtho's people to make this happen, by which point it's getting dark; it seems like they don't have to take important visitors to see the prisoners very often. 

 

The Predain prisoners are put up in what looks like hastily erected and equally hastily converted troop barracks, guarded with permanent mage-barriers. The conditions aren't amazing – it's further north and much colder than the region around Urtho's Tower, and the building is not perfectly airtight and is heated only by wood fires – but it looks like they're trying their best to provide amenities. 

The prisoners are clearly a different ethnicity from anyone else she's met so far; they look much closer to Chelish, actually, with dark hair and eyes and olive-tanned skin tones. Most of them are young. They all seem terrified of their captors, and of her. 

 

Iomedae's escort asks if she would prefer to speak to someone high ranking? 

Permalink Mark Unread

How about they tell the prisoners that she is a powerful agent of a distant god, here to try to negotiate an end to the war, and wants to talk to them to understand what the people of Predain would desire from a peace, and then ask if anyone is willing to speak to her. 

Permalink Mark Unread

The prisoners are SO SUSPICIOUS. That doesn’t make any sense and is almost certainly some kind of trick to get them to give away information about Predain’s strategy and what if she’s a Thoughtsenser.

It’s not like any of them know very much about Predain’s strategy, especially not current information. It’s also the only even slightly interesting thing to happen in months. And…if it’s real, somehow, then it’s not like the war is one they chose, and (since the prisoners are given approximately no updates) for all they know they’re homeland is losing it.

 

They confer among themselves in the Predain tongue and eventually send forward a representative. She is young and sharp and quick-tongued, and so so suspicious, and not intending to volunteer any information including in her thoughts until she’s gotten some better idea of who the powerful stranger is and who her god is and what she WANTS.

Permalink Mark Unread

Iomedae likes her immediately. "First off, tell her that since I'm relying on the interpreter she should not assume you are not lying to me about what she's saying, though I don't think you are, and I also will find it difficult to substantively protect her if you don't like what she says to me, though if she thinks we'd have a significantly more interesting conversation were she to be subsequently released to her own people I will figure out how to get that done. Because of those constraints I am not going to bother asking about anything sensitive or especially related to the war. But I have never been to Predain, I can't safely go right now, and if I'm going to arrange a peace I need to know what I'm trying to protect. So I just want to know - what no one here would have told me, that everyone knows back home."

Permalink Mark Unread

This is not at all what she was suspecting. She blinks suspiciously at Iomedae. 

 

"Ask her why some foreigners' god even cares," she says tightly. "None of the gods ever did anything for us before." 

This is relayed. 

Permalink Mark Unread

"Well, Aroden used to be human Himself before He ascended, so He's a bit less useless about confusing things. Though to be clear with you, while He empowered me, I don't think He's paying any attention here and I don't think He can, it's too far away. am doing this because I want the war to stop, and I'm using Aroden's magic because He gave it to me to use as I saw fit."

Permalink Mark Unread

She is pretty sure that gods that used to be human are not a thing and that story is some additional layer of baffling ruse. It doesn't really matter, though. 

"Why do you care?" she spits back. "If you're from so far away." Most people want to suck up to Urtho. She's not quite bold enough to say that part out loud. 

Permalink Mark Unread

"Mostly I find as many people I like when I'm travelling as I do if I stay at home. I wouldn't say that it's all of them but it's enough."

Permalink Mark Unread

It's just words, of course. It's probably still some kind of trick. But - how dangerous a trick can it possibly be, if she's careful not to even think about what little she knows of their strategic resources? ...And there's something that feels oddly nourishing, about being asked just to talk about her homeland and why it's worthy of protection. 

 

 

Predain was always poor. While Tantara was lucky, in its climate and its terrain and its gods and of course in having Urtho, Predain was always a country too hilly and dry for good farmland, with a corrupt nobility, and warlords and bandits on three out of four borders. They had little to offer in trade and so the caravans passed them over. Some of their best and brightest had gone to Tantara before and trained under Urtho, Ma'ar was hardly the first, but - no one ever came back. Why would they, when they had found such greener pastures. 

But the people of Predain were always tough, and determined, and ready to work hard as soon as anyone offered them a way for hard work to actually build a better future. And Ma'ar was the one who offered that, when he left behind the wonders of Urtho's Tower and came back to found mage-schools and train engineers and soon they had aqueducts to bring water to their crops, and soon enough after that Ma'ar was advisor to the new young King, who was certainly better than their last King, and had the strength of will to actually enforce their laws and make their roads safe rather than trade bribes with the rest of the nobility. 

And Ma'ar brought them, not wealth - not yet - but stability. Ma'ar bought them a country where none of their children would starve, and if some of that price was paid in blood, well, who is Tantara to talk. They have thousands of mages, and did they ever offer their aid to help Predain build aqueducts to water their crops, or roads to transport their goods, or even just their weather-magic, no they did not.

Urtho is one of the most powerful, and wealthiest, men in the world. He could have chosen to help. He thought that Predain wasn't his country and wasn't his problem, and he even tried to convince Ma'ar not to go back, because Predain was backward and he would be unhappy there, which when you think about it really sounds like believing Predain doesn't deserve to be helped. And then Ma'ar came back to his people anyway, and she remembers it, remembers when he came into power and she learned that there would be a scholarship for her to go to school, because Ma'ar knew that if they were to be strong as a country, all of their best people would need to be educated, even if they had grown up as farmers. She went to the capital, and she didn't need to fear being raped or having all her coin stolen by the corrupt city guard because now in order to sign up they needed to agree to compulsions not to do that, and she learned to read and figure and keep a merchant's books and for a few brief years she thought her children would have a future that was better than the childhood she had known. 

And for that Urtho started a war. 

Permalink Mark Unread

Predain was conquering many other countries, its neighbors. That has left her worried that part of what made Predain great, to its people, was that its borders were expanding, that it will not seem satisfactory if it is obliged by a peace deal to stay within them.

Permalink Mark Unread

They weren't conquering countries! All right, fine, the tiny Kingdom of Avalle might arguably be counted as a country, but they'd been through three different Kings in a decade and were constantly having civil wars and they didn't do anything to stop the bandits who would fling around blood-magic, which even if it wasn't technically in Predain territory was plenty capable of wrecking their weather. And everywhere else was stateless territory, or landholdings ruled by bandit warlords, and their children were starving too and their people were dying of pointless violence.

She knows people from the recently-'conquered' lands. Half of them were more or less voluntary annexations though of course it's complicated when there's no one leader who speaks for the people in a region, or when their closest thing to a leader was someone everyone would be happier to see dead. But certainly everyone she's met is glad to be a citizen of Predain, even if it was very frightening at the time and they might wish some of the details had gone down differently. 

She has no idea if the King would be willing to sign a treaty that they can't expand. Mostly they just want secure borders and she has little context on the strategic situation there (and is carefully not thinking about the few pieces she does know that might still be relevant a year later.) 

Permalink Mark Unread

Iomedae would make a lot of inferences from that, if she were thinking through what attitudes about conquest in Predain are and how much they reflect the attitudes of its leadership versus what they found it convenient for their soldiers to believe, but she's not doing that right now. People can tell when you're carrying their words off to sweeping conclusions, unless you dissemble, and she can but generally doesn't. She's just trying to make sense of this woman, her world, what she'd want from a peace. 

"Have you met Ma'ar? Do you know people who have worked closely with him?"

Permalink Mark Unread

She hasn’t met Ma’ar.

She knows people who've met him. They say he’s brilliant, of course, and he’s very cautious and very competent, and sometimes it's frightening to work with him, not because he ever punishes his subordinates for innocent mistakes but because - they say - he's always ten steps ahead of everyone else, and he holds his people to very high standards (even if they say he holds himself to even higher standards) and he's not shy about clearly informing you of all the mistakes that he thinks you made. 

He cares, though. Even people who haven't met him believe that, and the friends of hers who have met him came away believing it even more strongly. He believes that Predain deserves everything that Tantara already has, and no one was going to swoop in from outside and give it to them out of the kindness of their hearts, and so if they were ever going to have that, someone would have to fight for it. And lots of people could have fought for it but Ma'ar is the person who did. 

not alone, of course, he's surrounded himself with competent dedicated allies, but - she's pretty sure no one would have had enough hope to really try to change anything, if not for him. 

Permalink Mark Unread

How do people in Predain feel about Tantara? It was suggested to her that people in Tantara don't think much of their northern neighbors.

Permalink Mark Unread

Well, Tantara seems like a nice place to live, for the people lucky enough to have been born there? ...Or lucky enough to study there. Ma'ar apparently thought very highly of Urtho right up until Urtho started a war. 

She's not sure about the gryphons. They say Urtho is a peaceful man but the gryphons are bloodthirsty and seem to take joy in murdering Predain's people and they're terrifying. But the gryphons aren't anyone else's fault except Urtho's. 

 

(Mostly she hasn't really thought about it. Tantara was a distant fantasy that didn't matter to anyone's real life, and then they were an existential threat, and there was never really anything in between. She doesn't say that, though.) 

Permalink Mark Unread

Then they can talk about other, lower-stakes things. What was the school she went to like? What would she buy if she were very rich, after the war? What foods should Iomedae try when there's peace and she can visit Predain? What songs do they sing? What gods do people pray to?

Permalink Mark Unread

She liked her school! She doesn't really have any points of comparison, but her teachers were clever and seemed like they cared and they didn't treat her worse because she was a girl. 

She would buy...land by one of the rivers, probably. Not for herself, she never wants to be a farmer again, but she has younger brothers and cousins, and it would make her grandparents happy. She would buy a pile of those shield-talismans, the cheaper low-powered ones that won't hold off an attack with a sword but will save your life if a tree falls on you, she'd buy fifty and make sure her whole family had them. If she had anything left she'd buy - nice clothes, probably, she's never really thought about it before. 

She doesn't have strong opinions about food, but her favorite dish is catfish wrapped in burdock leaves with blackberries for flavor and baked in a ground-oven. 

 

...She's never prayed to any god. She can't think of anyone she knows who has. 

Permalink Mark Unread

Is there anyone else here she should talk to? Is there anyone the guards treat particularly badly?

Permalink Mark Unread

...The guards treat them fine? It's not comfortable, here, but they don't seem to single anyone out for especially bad (or good) treatment.

Probably no one else is going to want to talk to Iomedae. She can try, if she wants.

Permalink Mark Unread

If they don't want to, she's not going to make them. 

"Thank you for speaking to me. I'll try to come back within two weeks. I hope I'll have news for you then." It's a good habit, to limit the odds of retaliation against anyone who spoke to her, and (if they set this all up in a hurry when she asked) to force them to keep it this way. She doesn't expect either, in this case, but it's not the kind of thing to only be careful of when you expect it to be a problem.

 

The next thing she'd like to see is the writings of Kiyamvir Ma'ar, if Urtho has them.

Permalink Mark Unread

Urtho (or more accurately, Urtho's hertasi secretary) keeps a file of all the letters that Kiyamvir has sent him since departing the Tower, and is happy to provide them to Iomedae if she has a way of...reading...them, given the language barrier. If necessary she can have a Thoughtsenser to "read them out loud" in Mindspeech? 

Permalink Mark Unread

It's very inconvenient, but she would like them just read to her in Mindspeech. The man's character is just very important to what kind of peace talks and ultimate settlement will be possible and will be lasting, and she has...mixed impressions, so far, to put it mildly. 

(It seems implausible to her that Ma'ar did not realize he was racing to the brink of war with Tantara. Not impossible; little is impossible. But by all accounts the man is a military and strategic genius, and those tend to be people who track the threats to them and the people they pose a threat to; it is a stretch, to imagine he did not contemplate the risk of angering his larger and much more powerful southern neighbor whose archmage was sending him letters forcefully condemning his behavior. And there's an obvious explanation for why he'd put about that he had been shocked by the invasion; Predain can then be unified in terror of the unprovoked aggressor, and in their own righteous grievance at being invaded. (Their own invasions don't count; those countries were poor and volatile, and their residents grateful. Sure. Iomedae, again, is uncertain - but she doubts it. She has not met that many grateful conquered peoples, no matter how dramatically the conquerers improved on the previous rulers. She has met many more conquered people who will anxiously profess their gratitude.)

His intelligence on Tantara is reportedly excellent. And yet he missed their growing dismay at him, their plans for a war? Possible, of course, that his intelligence is excellent now after having been incredibly deficient before the war; or that the now-dead king successfully sowed misinformation about his intent. But more likely, he knew how frightening his actions looked, and knew when Tantara began preparing for war.

He wanted his country to be prosperous. Entirely reasonable; she has no reason to suspect it of being a pretense. ...it's hard to extend as charitable a lens for the conquests. If your country is desperately poor and your only concern for its prosperity, why spend its gold on toppling its neighbors? Why repeatedly aggravate your only candidate trading partner with blatant violations of all their taboos on the use of human sacrifices?

He seems genuinely popular. He also runs a lot of his military on mind control. Efficient and ruthless, fitting her previous impressions; advantageous for his personal power, obviously; an ugly precedent, absolutely. Plenty of those being set. And when someone openly uses a lot of mind control you should often assume they subtly use a lot more mind control than that. 

The King wants to appoint Ma'ar as his successor, rather than his own sons. Sure. (Again, it could be. Nothing is impossible. Some things are better explained by extensive use of known mind control powers than by other things.)

He is probably not Lawful. The blood-magic is a bad sign; it's obviously one of those bright lines nations maintain because the alternative is to maintain much, much larger standing armies in anticipation of the other side's ability to convert conquest into more military power into more conquest into more military power, depopulating areas as they go. She's glad magic doesn't work that way in her home world; it'd be a fucking nightmare. Expropriating temples is a much worse sign; that's not the behavior of someone who anticipates doing any international diplomacy, or attracting external investment. (Though it might, actually, mean much less than it would at home; the gods seem less interventionist, and their churches less crucial as institutions.)

Urtho doesn't think they can trust a parley and Iomedae, if she closes her eyes and tries to see the world the way a god would, all the possible futures ahead of her... doesn't think she can trust it either. The man evidently has the places where he draws a line; everyone agrees he treats prisoners well, everyone agrees he keeps his soldiers on an unusually tight leash when sacking cities. But she has no idea which are the places where he draws a line, and whether a parley would be on the right side of it.)

Permalink Mark Unread

They’ll provide a hertasi Mindspeaker to translate letters for her.

 

There are several hundred of them, over a period of almost twenty years. It’s pretty clear that they make up half of an ongoing conversation, referencing content presumably in Urtho’s letters, which he didn’t keep spare copies of. 

The tone of the early letters, when Ma’ar would have been a young man, are serious and earnest and clearly seeking Urtho’s advice and approval. Ma’ar talks mostly about his magical research rather than his politicking, though reading between the lines, it’s clear that he was already advancing rapidly in Predain’s government. When he mentions the political side at all,  he mostly seems to find it tedious, a necessary price for accomplishing the things that actually excite him.

Later on, his letters are full of statistics, as he introduces various social programs in Predain. They’re training mages in weather-working; he has a table of figures estimating lives saved, a cost-benefit analysis comparing it to other efforts he’s considering. Again, he asks Urtho’s advice.

There are sections that must be following up on arguments or criticisms brought up from Urtho’s side; it’s pretty hard to follow, with the amount of context he’s missing, but overall the tone on Ma’ar’s side is one of friendly debate rather than genuine deep conflict. It continues to be clear that he respects Urtho and looks to him and also does not at all take any of his claims on faith.

He has tables of figures about the blood-magic, too, upper and lower bound estimates on how many children didn’t starve because their region had aqueducts and canals and roads for transporting goods, how much the life of each criminal bought for their country’s future. He goes into the compulsions less, but mentions the safety improvements in major cities, and how bandits convicted of non-capital crimes can be released safely with much lower risk of repeat crimes.

In the letters leading up to the starting date of the war, he does, in fact, in almost every letter, provide repeated earnest reassurances of Predain’s friendly and non-aggressive intent toward Tantara, and that he considers it in no ways in their interests to try to invade. The actual arguments he makes are oddly, well, non-political. Tantara is a beautiful and prosperous place, he writes. We have no desire to see that compromised, and are grateful to be so lucky as to have Tantara as our neighbor.

 

 

In his first letters after the war, he doesn’t seem angry. I understand why Tantara has acted as you have, he writes, but I think both of our kingdoms are paying a high price for outcomes that are not even what we wanted. 

He does, indeed, suggest parleys, offers locations they could meet on neutral ground, precautions they could take. From Iomedae’s perspective the offers are oddly underspecified, as though there doesn’t exist any standard language for negotiating those terms. He acknowledges, a little, the constraints both of them are under, in their respective positions as advisors and not themselves rulers, but he seems to mostly see this as a question for him and Urtho to resolve to their own satisfaction before presenting a solution to their respective Kings.

It’s perhaps unsurprising that Urtho didn’t feel reassured. But it certainly seems like Ma’ar is trying. 

And even in those final recent letters, he still addresses Urtho as ‘teacher’ and ‘friend’.

Permalink Mark Unread

She stays up very late into the night, listening. (Trying to learn the language, trying to check that the hertasi isn't editing on the fly.)

 

There are still lots of possibilities, of course, but fewer, with twenty years of letters to hand. Not all that many people can successfully maintain a pretense for twenty years; the ability to speak like you hold values you no longer care about at all degrades, for most people, in time.

A very long game, or, more likely, a man who earnestly believes he's doing the right thing.

 

Which is not not a dangerous kind of man, especially if it goes hand in hand with being not persuadable that he is doing the wrong thing.

And war changes people, makes them more ruthless and more dangerous, often makes them start inventing rationalizations for breaking the rules that once meant a great deal to them.

But -

- a man she'd be willing to risk meeting face to face, she thinks, if the ceasefire is granted and sticks. 

Permalink Mark Unread

She sleeps.

Permalink Mark Unread

She wakes before anyone else and prays to Aroden and finds nothing in response. Which is not the biggest problem in the world - the pearls of power mean that she should be able to keep her existing spells indefinitely - but there's no similar convenient mechanism to get more healing.

 

 

And no advice, which she could genuinely use. 

 

It's not surprising. Aroden is, in the scheme of things, a new god with small reach. (She tries Abadar and Erastil and Sarenrae, in case either of them are present here, but if they are they don't think it's worth responding, which would be unsurprising even if they're here.)

 

Permalink Mark Unread

Urtho will make himself available to meet her whenever she wants. He spent most of the evening repeatedly drafting and discarding letters to Ma’ar requesting a ceasefire. He would appreciate Iomedae’s counsel, now that she’s had a chance to learn more about the situation.

(He’s also very curious to hear how the conversations with the Predain prisoners went, and whether she’s still optimistic about turning any of them to send back into Predain as spies.)

Permalink Mark Unread

They mostly don't want to talk to her, which makes some sense; Predain seems suspicious of the gods. She thinks she can get there in time, if they have the time, but plausibly too slowly to be at all useful. She was going to go back today or tomorrow with some gifts for the woman who talked to her, which should get some more of them to consider talking to her. 

 

She is happy to help draft a request for a ceasefire. She doesn't know the local conventions but apparently there are fewer of those here than in places where you sometimes need an airtight same-day treaty with the fucking church of Asmodeus.

Permalink Mark Unread

…Yeah, it kind of hasn’t come up. Tantara hasn’t had a war in living memory, certainly not in Urtho’s own lifetime. Urtho would deeply appreciate Iomedae’s help in drafting a letter.

Permalink Mark Unread

Tantara requests a ceasefire, beginning in two days' time at sunrise ("do they have the same calendar system?") and lasting three days, until sunrise again,  unless further communications should extend it ("normally I'd aim for much longer up front, but we're calling a ceasefire with your country half-occupied and so we're going to need to push the lines back and I don't want to give them much chance to settle into them.")

The proposed lines of disengagement are such and such and such and such ("are all of those absolutely unambiguous?") ("you want to include a map on which they are brightly labelled?") ("the likeliest way this fails if they agree to it and are trying to keep it is that you do not have the same maps") ("can it be a river? even if it's a river well into territory Tantara controls, no one can pretend they accidentally wandered across a river") ("you can mention that this is where we think the front is, but it's not the line of disengagement because it's where we think the front is, it's the line of disengagement even if we're entirely wrong and the front's somewhere else"). Both sides will withdraw their troops five hundred paces from the line, where it's not a river, and restrict aerial activities within six thousand paces of the line ("people will pull so much shit about where in the air they were".)

Neither side will engage in forward movement into areas on their side of the disengagement lines, where they're in fact drawn wrongly and not at the front. 

The proposed prohibited activities are such and such and such and such ("can you think of other things they might do that would be easy to misinterpret as a prohibited activity? you don't want to forbid them Gating their soldiers out, bored hungry soldiers on your territory are going to be a problem.")

The provisions for monitoring of the ceasefire are as follows. Tantara puts these names forward for their side and Predain can have as many. Monitors will be here, and here, and here, and possessed with lines of communication to both sides. Uses of magic permitted to the monitors are as follows. Civilians can make reports to the monitors of unauthorized activity of which they were the target. ("All of the proposed lines of disengagement are in Tantaran territory, does that mean all the locals will speak your language?")

Tantara represents that there are no military forces operating under Tantaran banners with which the Tantaran government is out of contact ("really? are you sure?") and no mercenaries employed by the Tantaran government etcetera etcetera etcetera ("anyone else who works for you who could kill any of them?")

Permalink Mark Unread

That's so detailed and specific! Urtho is really impressed! He has a lot of questions about why she wants to bring up particular points or phrase things carefully in particular ways. 

He's going to have to look up answers to specific questions, and in many cases fail to find them in his piles of notes and have to dispatch one of his hertasi staff to go track down the relevant map or the reports from his commanders. It's also pretty clear that paranoia and contingency-planning in case of unlucky miscommunications is not a skill that comes naturally to Urtho. 

He can confirm that they don't employ any mercenaries. All military units should have either Mindspeakers or mages powerful enough to use the long range communication-spell, so they really should be in contact. ...He can order more frequent reports in, if Iomedae thinks that's a good idea? Obviously he needs to have updates passed to all units anyway, to communicate that the ceasefire is being considered. 

 

(He does express, a couple of times, that Ma'ar will probably find all of this - carefulness and specificity - quite reassuring.) 

Permalink Mark Unread

Ma'ar should, because it's necessary to make sure they only end up slaughtering each other if someone actually expects to gain by it and not just because it's the tragic default. (And if it also communicates that someone careful and competent has picked up the war on Tantara's side, she's fine with that at this point.) She is happy to explain every single clarification and specific wording in her proposal, though nothing in it rests on specific wordings, so long as there is no interpretation of the wording that means something completely different, and everything important in it is said three different ways at least.

 

More frequent updates are a very good idea while there's a ceasefire under consideration. If there's an accidental or small-scale breach of it, learning about it sooner makes it more likely it doesn't explode into a full-fledged collapse of the temporary peace.

And if there's a large-scale breach of it, she wants to be immediately ready to take Tantara on the offensive. She will be mindful that mistakes and miscommunications and breakdowns of the chain of command are very common, but she is also acutely aware that Ma'ar, recalculating as he inevitably will be, may well breach the ceasefire to try to mount an attack decisive enough even she can't win from there, and she is committed to not letting him. She would much much rather avoid this fight and has, if that fails, no intention of losing it.

Permalink Mark Unread

And, yes, it makes a lot of sense that they want far more regular updates; they can't maintain that indefinitely, it wears out the Mindspeakers and the mages, but he can order hourly communications including overnight for the next...five days, it sounds like? Or until something else changes, one way or another. 

She should talk to his generals about making sure Tantara is ready for an offensive. Urtho can arrange a meeting for later today. 

 

He's - a little worried that Ma'ar isn't going to be the first person in Predain to learn of their ceasefire offer, and while obviously Ma'ar has most of his army mind controlled to be loyal, Urtho...still isn't sure if all of Ma'ar's subordinates actually want to end the war. 

Permalink Mark Unread

Probably not. They should send the message through many different channels. If the communication they get is that Ma'ar wants to offer the ceasefire but is countermanded by his King, or that Ma'ar offers the ceasefire but does not control the units in a certain area, Iomedae will.....assess how tactically convenient that is for Ma'ar and then figure things out from there.

 

 

Her plan, if the ceasefire is betrayed or not agreed to, is an offensive, which she doesn't think would possibly win except that its first element is Ma'ar's assassination.

Permalink Mark Unread

In those societies where assassination of military generals isn't against local custom (and it often is, since nobles set local custom), it's a very efficient way to solve a war. You kill one person, instead of tens of thousands; it doesn't depend a whole lot on the character of the one person whether that's a good trade (though for various other reasons you generally want to do it only to people who are unusually terrible, or a little terrible and unusually good at it). And this mess is clearly the product of the decisions of one specific person much more than most wars are. Both his supporters and detractors seem to agree that Predain is unified because of Ma'ar, that it began its expansionist phase because of Ma'ar, that the neighboring fiefdoms fell so quickly because of Ma'ar, that the loyalties of its soldiers are substantially to the person of Ma'ar. Urtho's efforts to communicate Tantara's growing hostility were entirely through private communication with Ma'ar; she suspects, based on what she has seen of the man and read of the letters he has, that they were somewhat incompetent, as efforts at diplomatic communication go, but they were also the letters of a mentor to his student, begging him to change course, and seem to have moved Ma'ar not at all on either level.

"Ma'ar is a strategic genius and a geopolitical complete idiot" is among her hypotheses, but far more likely is "Ma'ar knows what he's doing". He soothed Tantara for long enough to build his forces, then provoked them into war by conquering all his other neighbors and conveying only the least credible of reassurances. Tantara invaded, his people unified against their (racist, domineering) enemy, he killed the King and seized the capital, and now he's winning. Urtho said Ma'ar had impressively good intelligence in Tantara; Ma'ar probably has even better intelligence than Urtho knows, because that's not an area in which one shows one's full hand while winning comfortably. So he knows that she is here, she should assume, that the call for a ceasefire is from her. If he's smart and ruthless and possessed with only his own idiosyncratic scruples, he will probably try to kill her, and it probably won't work. 

And she should probably try to kill him, and it probably will work. 

It's not a perfect solution. There will probably continue to be a war, afterwards, with trust between Predain and Tantara even lower; she'll win that war, she's sure of it, but it'd be much much better to avoid fighting it. And the people of Predain, whose self-conception does seem substantially caught up in being the people of Kiyamvir Ma'ar, will be bitter in a fashion that will persist long into the peace. Killing people rarely discredits them.

(She could descend on him from the sky with a spectacular light show and angel's wings, kill him with a fiercely glowing holy sword, and then give a speech about precisely which elements of his behavior Heaven does and does not approve of. She does not hesitate to speak for Heaven, not when she knows full well what they'd say if they bothered being more interventionist.

But they're not a god-trusting people, the people of Predain, and she fears they'll interpret it as the rich and indifferent powers that always neglected them coming once again to kick the ladder away...)

The alternative is to beat him on the battlefield. That...might work or might not. She doesn't know how to effectively make use of the local kind of mage. She'll have to learn very fast, but she has a lot of flexibility this world hasn't yet witnessed and she can plausibly win most fights singlehandedly. Maybe they'll figure out fast how to counter her; maybe they'll figure out fast how to actually successfully assassinate her, but she's not easy to counter and she's not easy to assassinate. (She wishes she were more sure whether a Final Strike would do it.) Ma'ar is, probably, not an idiot; he won't make concessions while he's winning, but he might well make concessions once he's losing. Or he might get more desperate; he hasn't started using prisoners and civilians in captured territory for blood power yet, but he could. He knows that Tantara's grievance is with him particularly, he can't expect to survive defeat; he can do a great deal of damage in the course of slowly losing. 

 

Yeah, she doesn't like that plan. 'Push the extremely smart extremely ruthless mage with a spectacular number of options for atrocities when he's desperate, to the point of desperation, by beating him on the battlefield' does not sound like a plan that ends with a negotiated peace. It sounds like a plan that ends with her assassinating Ma'ar in a month when the costs are far higher, or being killed herself. It could go well. Iomedae does not, for the most part, make plans that could go well but whose default trajectory is to go spectacularly badly.

She is - has been from the second she arrived here - looking for ways to get that negotiated peace. Maybe they'll agree to the ceasefire; maybe they'll agree to extend it in three days. Maybe they'll agree to a prisoner exchange. Maybe she'll be able to build enough trust fast enough to meet the man face to face. 

But the default plan - as it has been since about twenty minutes after she arrived here - is to assassinate Kiyamvir Ma'ar, or die trying. (And presumably get raised back on her usual battlefield. She does not at all believe herself to be outside Creation, not when there are completely normal looking humans going around slinging Fireballs and Lightning Bolts. Her death would be a major loss to Tantara, to this world, but not to her.) 

She thinks she can do it, if Urtho has some way to stop the man from simply fleeing. Tar Baphon himself couldn't beat her in melee, and Kiyamvir Ma'ar does not have Time Stop. 

Permalink Mark Unread

....Urtho doesn't like this plan.

He's pretty unhappy about it, actually! He thinks assassinating people is generally an awful thing to do and also, well, he...still cares about Ma'ar, and - feels sort of responsible, for Ma'ar having lost his way. 

 

 

He's not going to argue with her conclusion, though. It seems pretty clear that Iomedae is an expert in war, and Urtho isn't, and never wanted to be, and has been incredibly out of his depth for the last year. 

...He can't exactly prevent Ma'ar from Gating himself out of a situation he doesn't want to be in? You could probably do that with compulsions, theoretically, but as previously noted, Predain is comfortable using compulsions and Tantara isn't. 

Permalink Mark Unread

She commends their taboo on mind control and does not intend to violate it, but there's in fact no other way to stop people from Gating? At home you could Dimension Lock and locally bar interplanar transit.

 

(It might be worth trying anyway, depending how long Gates take.)

Permalink Mark Unread

.....There is not a known method to block Gating out of a particular area, no, that doesn't even seem like the sort of thing that could work in principle. At best you could maybe block Gating in via particular Gate-techniques, but even that is mostly theoretical, not a known kind of wards. 

Most mages need at least five seconds of uninterrupted focus to Gate. Ma'ar is....unusually good at Gates and unusually fast at casting in general. 

Permalink Mark Unread

She is absolutely unsurprised by that; it was obvious already Ma'ar was by far Predain's most powerful mage, obvious since it was explained to her that it was an artifact of his personal make that took the palace in an instant. 

 

It might not be worth trying, if he's too likely to just leave, and certainly raises the threshold at which it's worth trying, though if he betrays the ceasefire with an attack in full force she's in fact not sure she can win a war against him from there without hundreds of thousands of deaths. A war with a desperate blood-power using mage does not sound fun.


Hopefully he will agree to the ceasefire. If he does, and it holds, then she'll go and speak with him, and end this whole thing peacefully. 

Permalink Mark Unread

...Yes. Hopefully. 

 

Urtho will finalize a draft letter - it's much longer than most of his previous attempts, and doesn't end up sounding much like him at all - and dispatch it for one of his mages to carry to the nearest Predain camp. 

Ma'ar probably won't receive it until late tonight, if not tomorrow morning. What are Iomedae's priorities in the meantime? 

Permalink Mark Unread

Getting ready for if the ceasefire is refused, or fails. Where are Tantara's forces, and where are the most promising locations for an offensive? What are their numbers like? Where do they have the most information about the movements of their enemy?

Permalink Mark Unread

...Urtho feels very unsure about promising locations for an offensive, but he can get her some maps and logistics reports and spy-reports (and another hertasi Mindspeaker to translate them to her), and arrange meetings with some of his other top generals. 

Tantara's troops outnumber Predain's, and Tantara's mages even moreso outnumber Predain's mages– or at least they did, at the start of the war, but Tantara's casualties were much higher, he'll need to track down more recent reports if Iomedae wants exact details. 

In terms of Predain's movements, they have a lot more information about the un-Gifted troops - Predain doesn't have a permanent Gate-network, and so large-scale people transport is much more costly - but small strike teams of mages can be wherever they want to be on very short notice, and can often shield their movements against scrying.

Permalink Mark Unread

Then Iomedae will sit down with whoever is willing to consult with her and start asking a lot of questions about what would go wrong if she did an offensive like this, an offensive like this, an offensive like this....

Permalink Mark Unread

Urtho's generals - at least the specific ones Urtho put her in touch with - are, overall, more cautious and paranoid than Urtho, and better at taking into account the sort of strategic considerations Iomedae takes for granted. They have lots of specific information and counterarguments to her suggested plans. 

 

(They do, for the most part, come across as very young, and very inexperienced, in a way where if they were in Golarion, they would probably have gotten themselves killed or at least run into serious problems much earlier.) 

Permalink Mark Unread

She is delighted to work with them! She will workshop the plans for the invasion, and also hear them out about how they assess the odds of turning things around, if Ma'ar lives and if he dies.

Permalink Mark Unread

....They don't trust Ma'ar. He's scary and has no scruples and - well - it's not that he's smarter than Urtho, who is the most brilliant mage in the world, but he's - sneakier and more ruthless and willing to take advantage of any opportunity. Urtho likes him, because Urtho likes everyone, especially his students. But Ma'ar isn't his student anymore, and hasn't been for decades, and they're pretty sure Ma'ar doesn't hold to nearly the same level of - scruples based on loyalty and friendship - that Urtho wants to. 

 

(They don't outright say that they think the odds are better if Ma'ar dies. It's pretty strongly implied, though.) 

Permalink Mark Unread

Hopefully they will reach a peace agreement. 

Permalink Mark Unread

They're not very hopeful. They're happier about workshopping lots of potential invasion plans with her, taking advantage of capabilities she hasn't yet demonstrated in front of a lot of people, and thus might still have a chance of catching Ma'ar by surprise. 

Permalink Mark Unread

Ma'ar's reply reaches them early the next morning, via an unarmed, un-Gifted messenger arriving on foot at one of Urtho's outlying camps. (And additional copies trickle into other camps with additional messengers over the ensuing candlemark; Ma'ar, too, wanted to make very sure that Urtho received this message.) 

 

 

He agrees to the ceasefire at the specified time and date. He's attached his own copy of the map they've been referring to, with a few differences marked boldly; the main difference is that, for a particular river suggested as a front, Predain actually has a concentration of troops on the far side of the river already. 

He cannot promise that there aren't other smaller units in pockets deeper in Tantara, probably in these general regions, and he promises to make very sure that word of the ceasefire reaches them by the time it's in action but he cannot promise they will still be where he thinks they were last. It's not impossible that he'll fail to reach one of the parties, if they lost their comms-mage or Mindspeaker at some point more recent than their last report in. 

Also, for this other section of river, while he's content to consider it the dividing line for ceasefire purposes, Urtho should perhaps be made aware that it is currently a dry riverbed and not going to present much of an obstacle to anyone crossing it, though it's still probably hard to do by accident

Of the list of prohibited activities, he rejects Urtho's proposal that camps at the front should only be able to set up passive wards and not ones that bite. His people are going to be feeling very nervous and paranoid and anything that makes them more nervous is going to drastically increase the odds of a miscommunication leading to a breakdown in the ceasefire. He agrees that magic for communication and scouting purposes, like the communication-spell and scrying, should be allowed. 

He would like to specify that camps on rivers will be cleared to use magic to fish in said rivers, which is going to be important because in a few cases their re-supply plans involved foraging on land on the other side of said river, and an army holding still is going to have a much harder time feeding itself. Predain relies less on Gates for supply logistics than Tantara does; they don't have enough mages with the range or the power to hold a Gate open long enough. 

Predain does have some hired mercenaries. Reputable companies, this list, and it shouldn't be a problem but he does want to note that they're not integrated with the main army chain of command. 

He proposes his own list of monitors. He promises that all of them speak very good Tantaran. These three are also Mindspeakers – and powerful enough to reach the un-Gifted, if Urtho is willing to agree to that, which Ma'ar is not taking for granted. 

 

 

He is deeply grateful that Urtho is willing to consider this de-escalation, and hopes that they'll be able to negotiate further from here. 

Permalink Mark Unread

"- promising, I think. I don't think we need to pick a fight about the camp wards. I suppose you'd rather have them fishing than living even more off your locals. I want to separately contact the mercenary companies, actually, that's a good source of information on whether the man can keep an agreement, can you write in the response that we'll be in touch with them? And then let's review the lines very very carefully and imagine at each spot what, if a fight starts, it'd start over - a ceasefire is a very difficult command situation to navigate, your men evidently trust you and I believe we can achieve this but it's going to be tough on them and we want to set them up to succeed."

 

Permalink Mark Unread

...Urtho had not really thought to be worried about that! Should he be worried about that? He maybe actually wants to send Iomedae back to meet with his generals directly, at this point he trusts her sense of who's likely to start fights over what much more than his own sense (which, though he doesn't admit this out loud, is mostly internal flailing right now.) He can arrange Gates for her, and send her with a hertasi Mindspeaker escort and translator. 

 

General Korad is in charge of the First Army, or more accurately the rear camp near the Tower, which isn't anywhere near the front but is heavily involved in organizing the Gates for supplies and replacement mages or Mindspeakers or Healers for units that suffer casualties.

General Micherone commands the Second Army, here on the map, near the river which is apparently not a river after all. Urtho has a very high opinion of her, and she keeps good troop discipline.

General Polden commands the Fourth Army and...apparently completely failed to notice a bunch of Predain troops on the near side of the relevant section of river, which seems like it might indicate a problem? 

General Shaiknam commands the Sixth Army, which previously had the largest concentration of nonhumans, especially gryphons, but the gryphons had a grievance with General Shaiknam and are now their own separate unit under the command of Snowstar, a Kaled'a'in mage, and assigned to the Second Army under General Judeth. He additionally has the unfortunate trait that he doesn't respect mages very much and, relatedly, most of the mages under his command dislike him strongly and Urtho probably needs to make provisions to have them reassigned between the other armies, except that it's a terrible idea to leave them without mages in their current strategic position. The Sixth was recently able to retake Stelvi Pass, here on the map, when under the command of a different general who is unfortunately now dead, so they're also near the front, though at least Ma'ar hasn't informed them of any irregularities related to that. They are in an unusually awkward position in terms of supplies because the Stelvi Gate was shut down when the pass was initially taken by Predain, and have also just lost their gryphon wings and have limited access to mages. 

General Judeth commands the Fifth Army and Iomedae has met her already. She's here on the map. They're on the front, still just barely hanging onto Korbast Pass, and they're currently rather desperately short on Mindspeakers to stay in communication. The remaining gryphon wings formerly allocated to the Sixth will be catching up with her soon, though in light of the ceasefire, possibly they should reconsider major gryphon movements? It spooks the Predain army. 

General Movat commands the Third Army, is...fine, if not brilliant, and is apparently some distance back from where Ma'ar thinks his closest units are. However, the Third Army has the complication of containing all the worshippers of Vkandis Sunlord, who especially hate irreligious Predain and one gets the sense this feeling is mutual. 

Permalink Mark Unread

Iomedae is going to spend the day introducing herself to these people, hearing them out, admiring their work, humbly suggesting advice, problem-solving where it's welcome, emphasizing relentlessly that keeping the ceasefire is a necessary element of Tantara retaking its territory which she intends to help it do, and emphasizing just as relentlessly that while actual betrayal by Ma'ar will be met with his immediate destruction, a few idiots from Predain causing trouble in violation of the ceasefire is leverage for further negotiations not grounds to immediately start shooting back. She cannot solve literally all command problems today but she can try to make sure they won't explode during the crucial three day window and she can try to lay some groundwork to work with these people in the long run (she might instead replace them but you don't start diminishing your effort on someone you have not actually already replaced.)

Permalink Mark Unread

They are, for the most part, happy to talk to her!

General Micherone makes a very good first impression. General Movat also does, actually, despite Urtho having apparently been less impressed; he's an intensely thorough, diligent, careful-thinking man, and has the best documentation of any of Urtho's generals on his forces and their logistics. He's on good terms with his Vkandis-worshipping mage units and doesn't expect trouble from that side. 

General Korad seems more optimistic about Tantara's situation than is really warranted and is thus unhappy about some of the conditions of the ceasefire seeming unnecessarily favorable to Predain - he has a bit of a snit about the fishing thing, those are Tantara's fish! - but he's not going to be near the front, and he's definitely very much on top of the work he actually needs to be doing, of making sure Tantaran forces are fed and supplied. 

General Polden seems overwhelmed and harried, and doesn't actually make a lot of time to talk to Iomedae, despite the fact that the unexpected presence of troops much closer than he was apparently aware of does seem like a major source of potential complications. 

General Shaiknam, on the other hand, is very polite and helpful, and immediately sets aside a full candlemark to speak with her. He assures her that after the separation of some of his 'problematic' units, he's confident in his troops' discipline, and they also shouldn't have to worry as much about hotheaded young gryphons daring each other to flout the aerial activity restrictions. Gryphons are awful. 

 

 

The day passes. Nothing else explodes. 

Permalink Mark Unread

Luckily she can also work nights. Time to start drafting the proposals for peace talks. Not face to face at first, they can both send some representatives and see how that goes, but there should at least be people in the same room authorized to sign a sufficiently favorable deal. 

Also, time to meet some gryphons? And any representatives of the lizardfolk, actually, if they have an independent command structure. And she'd like to scrounge up some gifts she can bring with her when she returns north - blankets, food, that kind of thing - and write a very simple-language guide-to-deescalating-less-than-full-scale-incursions for each of the generals, recapitulating what she said in person.

 

And then she'll sleep.

Permalink Mark Unread

The gryphon leader who everyone agrees she should talk to is currently leading a scouting party and will need to sleep after that but can meet her tomorrow morning. 

The hertasi will send a representative immediately! They're so helpful! The lizardfolk are entirely in noncombatant roles – they cook and do laundry and provide a lot of the non-magical medical care and are involved in caring for the gryphons, who need considerable help with their grooming and other personal hygiene since they lack hands.

Iomedae will also quickly learn that the hertasi, too, are a created race, though not by Urtho. A mage shortly before Urtho's time wanted a servant race. Whether creating one was ethical is not something the hertasi really address, but they seem very happy with their situation. They're also incredibly gossipy and can tell her so so much about the various generals if she likes, though it'll be overweighted toward their romantic lives. 

Permalink Mark Unread

Iomedae wouldn't herself create a servitor race but she's hardly going to feel distaste around them. She's so happy for their help! She'd be delighted to learn about the generals, though not as much about anything they might've thought was between them and a lover; in her culture, that's private. She is more interested in what sorts of things they like and are good at, who on their staff really likes them and who just puts up with them, whatever happened between Shaiknam and his gryphons if the gryphons gossip about that, etcetera. Are they interested in things of Golarion? Dishes? Hairstyles? Fashions?

Permalink Mark Unread

....They will reluctantly restrain themselves on the romance gossip, just, see, people's love lives are usually the most interesting thing about them. 

General Micherone is from a wealthy noble family and well-liked by nearly everyone. General Judeth is well-liked by everyone competent and diligent, and has also left behind a string of people with grievances; she holds her people to high standards and isn't shy about dressing them down if they fail to live up to her expectations. General Polden is discussed with fond exasperation; the hertasi are clearly covering for many weaknesses in his organization and thoroughness. General Movat, on the other hand, is adored by his hertasi, if not necessarily all of his human staff. General Shaiknam is, approximately, liked by everyone whose regard he cares about and disliked by literally everyone else; he's also highborn and, in the hertasi's honest opinion, much better at the politicking side of things than the military strategy side, and more concerned about his future career and promotions than about the people under his command. 

He seems to...not fully think of gryphons as intelligent people? Which, unsurprisingly, the gryphons hate. Gryphons are also not, well, particularly subtle or sophisticated in their politics, and so General Shaiknam's charm is wasted on them. 

They would like to hear EVERYTHING about Golarion! But especially the fashion! They love fashion! (From the way they talk about it, it sort of seems like they enjoy dressing up their favorite humans as though playing dolls.) 

 

 

In the morning, a messenger from Ma'ar arrives, alone and unarmed, and waits five hundred paces back on the far side of the dry stretch of river. She's a Mindspeaker, and can relay that she has instructions on how Urtho's people can contact the commanders of these several mercenary units, if they still want to do that. 

Permalink Mark Unread

They do. Everyone who has ever worked with Ma'ar in any capacity, really. It's not as if he'd have stopped paying his mercenaries midway if he still had gold for them, but there are other signs, sometimes, of a person's character. 

 

She'll try to get those conversations set up, and she'll bring her gifts back north to the prison and explain that the ceasefire has been arranged and should go ahead in the morning.

Permalink Mark Unread

A couple of the mercenary captains are willing to exchange letters. One is willing to send a delegate in person; one is willing to hold a conversation at range via a Mindspeaker relay. 

 

The Predain prisoners are so suspicious and do not really believe her about the ceasefire being a real thing. They're also pretty hesitant about touching the gifts. This is probably some kind of very confusing trick. 

Permalink Mark Unread

It is not a high-trust culture, she's getting the sense. She won't dwell too much on it; she doesn't need them to believe her. Everyone is alive and well and there are no obvious indicators they've been mistreated since she left?

Permalink Mark Unread

They seem fine, yeah, including the woman who spoke to her earlier, and who currently seemed to be focused on reassuring the other prisoners. She does, eventually, seem to decide that the blankets are probably safe, and gets one. 

 

Conversations with mercenaries can be arranged for later in the morning. For now, does she want to meet with Skandranon, the lead spokesperson for the gryphons? 

 

(The ceasefire should now be in effect. She has yet to hear of anything going terribly wrong.) 

Permalink Mark Unread

She'd like to talk to the representative for the gryphons, then, yeah. Though she'd like Urtho to interrupt her if anything even slightly weird happens.

Permalink Mark Unread

She can get a Gate to his location, then! 

Most of the gryphons are brown with various markings, but Skandranon's feathers are glossy jet black. On his hind legs, he towers over her, and his beak is as wide across as her entire torso. 

He speaks perfectly comprehensible Tantaran, albeit with a sibilant accent. The hertasi will translate for him without difficulty. 

 

He says that he is honored to meet such a skilled warrior as he understands Iomedae is, and would like to someday hear tales of her exploits in battle, but will (reluctantly) put that aside until after they've crushed Predain. What does she want to know? 

Permalink Mark Unread

What the gryphons are like, what they have contributed to the war, what they want from the peace, how they like Tantara, whether they're appreciated, whether they understand why there's a ceasefire and will respect it, and then they can absolutely talk about exploits in battle, it's good to get to know the people you're working with, though she's concealing most of her capabilities from Predain's no-doubt-numerous spies.

Permalink Mark Unread

Gryphons love flying and love fighting (and, if Skandranon is a typical example, definitely love bragging and showing off.) He comes across as brash and impulsive and very high on bravado, compared to the humans she's met. 

Gryphons like Tantara! They especially like Urtho, their creator, who is brilliant and always treated them well except for that one thing where he kept it secret from them how females could become fertile to breed, because he wanted executive control over all their breeding choices. Skan stole the spell from him, though! And he apologized! So they're all friends again now. Some people don't appreciate gryphons. Those people are idiots. Everyone who's not an idiot thinks gryphons are great, since they are. 

 

Skandranon is...honestly very dubious about the ceasefire, because Ma'ar is a horrible person and is probably going to break it in the first candlemark, and he's really annoyed about the restrictions on flight, but he has been given clear orders and General Judeth is not an idiot and does adequately appreciate gryphons and so he's willing to listen to her. 

And then he'll brag about his exploits in battle! Gryphons do, in fact, seem to be unusually bloodyminded and violence-seeking, if Skandranon's rather gruesome and gory stories are a good example to go on. He's so excited about it, though. He bounces. 

Permalink Mark Unread

Well, it's not like she can't match him for stories, warning him in advance that she's changing some details so it's harder to guess things about her. 

 

(If some of her soldiers are gryphons, she will learn to be a good commander to gryphons; people aren't all the same, but they all matter, and there would be a place in a good world for all of them. And it's not as if there aren't some terrifyingly bloodthirsty people of any race you care to name.)

Permalink Mark Unread

The gryphons are definitely going to get along with her, if she appreciates them like that! Skandranon warms to her very quickly. 

 

 

And then it's time to talk to the mercenaries. The relayed-Mindspeech conversation is the most useful, but they all give the same general impression. 

They like Ma'ar. He's not perfect, but he's straightforward – Predain folk are in general, no tricky diplomacy, they'll just talk straight with you – and he tried hard, at the beginning, to be scrupulously honest about what he would be asking of them and what he could realistically offer in return. They haven't always been paid on time, and sometimes were paid in-kind when they were expecting coin, but he warned them this was likely to come up, and offered to pay more upfront such that they would still be happy about the deal. The contracts don't pay as well as they would usually look for, Predain is poor, but Ma'ar is a genius with magic, and offered to kit them out with specialized shield-talismans and camp wards and other protective artifacts. Not just as loans for the duration of the war, either, they can keep the stuff. 

He has very good situational awareness and 'street smarts', but he's in some ways inexperienced in large-scale inter-state war, facing a well-organized army. He's certainly inexperienced in diplomacy and not very sophisticated at it, and one could argue that his decisiveness occasionally verges on rashness. The implication is that he's leaning rather hard on being a genius at magic, and while he's certainly not as good as Urtho, he's better at coming up with creatively ruthless approaches to win battles with clever use of obscure spells or artifacts rather than with numerical superiority. He hates killing people if he could put compulsions on them instead, which is...nonstandard, to say the least. 

But he doesn't give them stupid missions, and he does respect their expertise and seek their advice. He's not careless with their lives; a lot of kings and generals would rather put mercenaries in the most dangerous positions rather than their own people, but if anything Ma'ar does the opposite. He always listens to their disputes with his decisionmaking and to their grievances, and he even demoted one of his commanders after they registered complaints that the man was impossible to work with. 

 

 

(And meanwhile, reports from Urtho on 'any weirdness': General Polden was late on a scheduled report, but Urtho had his people follow up and it seems like everything is fine and their timekeeping was just unreliable. General Micherone's people found some apparently-starving Predain civilians in the woods and are honestly very confused about how they got there and why and would like advice. Some young gryphons were giving each other dares and kiiiiind of violated the 'six thousand paces' rule but were ordered back before they actually got close to the dividing line. Nothing else unexpected has happened; Ma'ar's side is being very very scrupulous about the aerial restrictions.) 

Permalink Mark Unread

Yeah that's a unsurprising amount of complexity. She really does not like the idea Predain is ....putting....civilians in the woods in Tantara? How does that happen by accident?? They should feed them and write a letter communicating displeasure and the desire that this kind of conduct by Predain be addressed in the eventual peace settlement, but not saying anything that might be interpreted as 'deal's off' or even 'we're on edge more than you'd expect'.

 

Do gryphons want gory stories about the unnecessary breakdowns of ceasefires and the innocent people who died horribly as a result.

 

 

She revises the draft letter proposing peace talks, in a location of little strategic utility that both sides can Gate to.

 

Permalink Mark Unread

Yeah the random civilians in the woods are utterly terrified and don't speak any Tantaran and even once they found an interpreter who speaks (terrible) Predaini, they're not being very forthcoming about how exactly they ended up there. It could at-all-plausibly have been on foot, maybe because something happened to their farm – which is plausible, the gryphons have, uh, sometimes diverted their scouting missions to go terrorize random farmers in Predain's territory, they're not supposed to but what can you do about gryphons. And it's the region where the river isn't actually a river – it sounds like it was diverted upstream for some kind of war-related tactical reason six months ago, with the result that the main channel dried up and stopped being a water source for everyone relying on it – so they could theoretically have wandered the whole distance from Predain territory without a Gate or a military escort. Though it's certainly weird and worrying. 

 

 

Gryphons loooooooooooove gory stories! They are (especially the very young ones, who come across as maybe equivalent to a human fourteen or fifteen-year old in maturity) perhaps less sold on the goriness being a bad thing than one might hope. 

She can get lots of advice from Urtho's generals on the peace talks draft letters. Morning turns to early afternoon. Nothing explodes. 

Permalink Mark Unread

She will work on both the plans for the attack and the plans for the peace, then.

Permalink Mark Unread

Nothing explodes. 

 

 

Until around sunset, at which point one of the Mindspeakers will very very urgently contact Iomedae – at this point, actually before she alerts Urtho.

General Judeth's camp is, uh, apparently...surrounded...by Predaini troops? Including several hundred of them, a couple of infantry units, who were definitely approaching them from behind and must have cut through quite a lot of Tantaran territory, presumably on foot because no one detected any Gates at any point, but it's pretty unclear how they possibly got past the line without being seen, it's been very closely monitored via scrying and nobody reported anything suspicious and it seems pretty hard to miss several hundred people marching. 

Can Iomedae please advise???? 

Permalink Mark Unread

 

 

 

Well. Fuck. 

 

Iomedae's advice is that they Gate her in immediately.

Permalink Mark Unread

They will do that! 

Permalink Mark Unread

General Judeth is CONCERNED! Half of her mages aren't even here, they're at Korbast Pass, and a lot of the mages she does have here are the ones rotating off because they're exhausted! 

She is, however, already organizing everyone she does have who has enough in their reserves to scry - not a high-powered spell - and the gryphons are in the air. 

 

She's really confused! As far as she can tell the Predain troops don't include mages; their structure is somewhat different, mages operate in smaller specialized units rather than being integrated into the main army like Tantara mostly does things. Maybe the plan was to Gate the mages in on top of them but you'd have expected them to time that for before her scouts noticed the problem.

Maybe the plan here is just to engage them here so that they won't be able to send reinforcements to the pass, and they're doing a more conventional approach there? But they were definitely respecting the ceasefire lines on that side, and - still are? As far as scrying can tell? 

 

They are at this point almost certain that Ma'ar isn't personally here. 

Permalink Mark Unread

It seems quite plausible to Iomedae that she is the target, here, either because Ma'ar means to kill her or because he means to see her capabilities in more detail before he decides whether to keep playing by the ceasefire rules or not. Though of course it's also possible that Predain is in internal disarray, or some truly stupendous misunderstanding has happened.

 

"Get the monitors here as well, from both sides. Tell them there has been a ceasefire, they are in violation of it, and that they are commanded to immediately surrender."

Permalink Mark Unread

General Judeth will send that order immediately although she is kind of worried that their position here is not very defensible if the mages do join in the fight, which is the only plan that makes any sense on Predain's side - maybe they just mistimed something, coordinating the exact timing when the infantry units had a long march and may not have Mindspeakers with them is the kind of thing that can get fumbled, though in that case presumably Ma'ar is watching via scrying and will rectify the mistake quickly. 

Permalink Mark Unread

Exhausted Tantaran mages are holding a massive barrier-shield around the camp while a lot of people who were interrupted in the middle of eating supper or napping very hurriedly don armor and organize themselves. There's an awkward standoff. 

 

 

The first of the Predain monitors can be contacted and transported in within three minutes. She's very sure that these units are NOT supposed to be here and in fact does not have the slightest idea how they could have GOTTEN here or under whose orders and they should, in fact, have known perfectly well about the ceasefire. She's a strong Mindspeaker and can find the minds of the unit commanders and demand to know what in the world they think they're doing, without actually having to venture outside the barrier-shield. 

 

 

....Uhhhh. They're claiming they had orders from Ma'ar to march through Stelvi Pass and surround this camp? 

(She's very confused, and she is so incredibly scared and mostly not showing it.) 

Permalink Mark Unread

- the obvious implication there being that General Shaiknam was turned and works for Ma'ar and wow Judeth is FURIOUS about that and - this is not good this is very very not good, his units were the closest reinforcements and it sounds like she cannot expect help from that direction -

 

 

- what does Iomedae advise that they do. 

Permalink Mark Unread

"Tell them to lay down their weapons immediately."

Permalink Mark Unread

The terrified Predaini monitor will relay that in Mindspeech. Maybe Broadsending that to everyone, she's going to give herself backlash really quickly trying to hit several hundred people but this seems IMPORTANT. 

 

 

Scrying-report over the next thirty seconds: there is definitely some confusion out there but for the most part weapons are not being laid down. 

(There is an angry gryphon scout party circling above their heads, which perhaps makes letting go of one's weapons seem significantly less appealing.) 

Permalink Mark Unread

"Order to gryphon wing, they're to stand down get back inside the barrier–" 

Permalink Mark Unread

...someone just shot down one of the gryphons. 

 

The rest of the gryphon wing is very angry about this and they are super not going to stand down. 

 

 

The Predaini monitor is still repeatedly Mindspeaking everyone she can reach telling them over and over to lay down her weapons and her head is pounding and she is pretty sure that she's going to die here.

Permalink Mark Unread

She could have prevented that, if she'd done this sooner, but she's thinking. 

She can wait. Try to negotiate some more, try to herd them back towards their own border, try to get a direct line of communication with Ma'ar. 

That goes well, if this is really some unfathomable misunderstanding.

That goes badly, if this is an intentional provocation, or  -- and this is what she fears more -- a distraction. Ma'ar wants Urtho's Tower, Urtho said, and must never get it. She has no trouble believing that. She has some trouble believing that the betrayal of one of Urtho's generals, the sudden presence of hundreds of troops advancing on Tantara's positions, is unlucky.

Shaiknam. Acting in confused self-interest, or mind-controlled?

 

 

 

The cost of erring in one direction is hundreds of thousands of lives. In the other - 

Permalink Mark Unread

"I am going to disable or kill every soldier holding a weapon outside this camp," she says to the monitors, her voice very precise, and to Judeth, "keep the monitors alive."

 

 

Permalink Mark Unread


And then she draws a sword that glows terrifyingly brightly and moves too fast to see -

 

- except in that the light (dancing across the woods outside the camp) leaves a confused afterimage on the eyes -

 

- which insist that some of those strokes of light must've been there at the same time as some of the other ones. 

 

 

None of the injuries would be lethal in a place with Golarion healing. She's not even sure that's a kindness, but it's an option. 

 

Permalink Mark Unread

It's not a fight; none of them can scratch her. 

 

Permalink Mark Unread

......Wow. That's - actually the most terrifying thing General Judeth has ever seen. 

 

 

(WHY isn't Ma'ar Gating mages in? This doesn't make any sense -) 

Permalink Mark Unread

This is the worst thing that could possibly be happening and the Predain monitor does not for one second believe that they're going to keep her alive. 

 

:I'm going to: she manages to squeeze out to General Judeth, :try, to contact, Ma'ar, if he's, in range -: And probably be useless after that, she's already verging on backlash, but - 

 

 

- reach - 

 

 

He's not close. He must be several hundred miles away. It's maybe the furthest she's ever Mindspoken anyone and it hurts and it feels like stretching out her arm until the bones and ligaments threaten to come apart, and her fingertips just, barely, brushing her goal without finding purchase - 

Permalink Mark Unread

It's been less than five minutes since General Judeth's warning went out. The troops on-site do not, in fact, have Mindspeakers, and a certain other message was still making its way to Ma'ar. 

 

He feels the feather-light brush on his shields, and reaches back, flinging his own strength in to stabilize the connection - how far is that...? 

:What: 

Permalink Mark Unread

The monitor is, at this point, barely clinging to consciousness as well as barely hanging onto the Mindspeech link. She isn't especially coherent.

:Did you - order - this...?: 

Permalink Mark Unread

:Did I order what. Where.: 

Permalink Mark Unread

She can't remember the placename of where they're supposed to be. What's the general's name, she can't remember that either...

:Camp. Woman. Blonde: 

 

...the connection fades out and the monitor collapses in a heap. 

It's been about twenty seconds since Iomedae headed out with a sword. She's disabling people at a rate of about one per second. The gryphons are going after some of the rest. 

Permalink Mark Unread

...That narrows it down to two places it could be. Probably. Ma'ar can scry both of them in the next ten seconds.  

Permalink Mark Unread

Permalink Mark Unread

Think. 

 

Is the situation retrievable. 

 

- probably not. It doesn't matter what went wrong - though the obvious guess is obvious, he should have put a compulsion on Shaiknam and risked it being detected, the man is not reliable and thinks far better of his own judgement than is warranted and probably thought he was being incredibly clever - but either way it's too late to undo. 

His people are dying over there. 

 

 

If he sends in his mages, there's - no way back from this. If he...does nothing...then maybe no one except some defenseless foot soldiers gets hurt, and maybe the Tantaran side and their mysterious terrifyingly powerful ally will be confused enough to hesitate - 

- but General Shaiknam was making a bet, that Ma'ar would see a fait accompli and wouldn't be able to bring himself to watch his people die while he did nothing, and...he cannot, in fact, bring himself to do that. This is his fault, not theirs. 

 

Can he get them out

Permalink Mark Unread

....Not all of them. He's too slow, too little too late, and fifty of his people are already down, dead or dying, and - 

He can't, actually, bring himself to give up on saving anyone. For strategic reasons, partly, it's going to spook the rest of his people and convincing everyone to go for the ceasefire the first time was hard enough that he doesn't think he can do it twice. But also something more fundamental than that. They're his people. They thought they were following his orders. He can't just...wash his hands of that. 

 

 

What are his options. 

He can try to send a messenger clarifying that he didn't intend this and General Shaiknam acted without orders. The problem is that it's too slow; if he sends an un-Gifted messenger to their side of Korbast Pass, the message absolutely won't reach General Judeth fast enough to save any of his people – even if she believed it, which he wouldn't in her place.

(Implicit, not a thought he has time to fully unpack: if the foreign stranger slaughters several units of his infantry, regardless of how much this is obviously their fault, the King is approximately going to consider this proof that the ceasefire was a ruse.) 

He can remain at a distance but try to get orders to his people directly, to stand down. That might work. It probably won't. The monitor on-site probably just knocked herself unconscious, so he's lost his best point of contact. If he were one of those soldiers, and had two conflicting hard-to-verify information sources on what Adept Kiyamvir Ma'ar had ordered, he probably wouldn't believe the one that said 'drop your weapons while under attack in enemy territory.'

 

 

He can send in mages in force, and play into General Shaiknam's hands, and destroy any chance of the miraculous ceasefire sticking. And maybe without accomplishing anything at all, it might just mean sending more of his people into a doomed battle; it's not clear fifty mages could hold their own any better against...that, whatever that is...

 

 

...he can go in himself, alone, and give the order to surrender directly, in Mindspeech recognizable as coming from him, and - what - Gate out as many people as he can...? And if he only does that, only shields himself and evacuates who he can, if he very clearly doesn't attack, then – well, it's a violation of the ceasefire order, but not much more of one than what's already happened, and it might still preserve enough confusion that, even if he gets himself killed, the situation is still - retrievable from there - 

(He could Gate someone else in, that's the non-stupid thing to do that doesn't involve massive personal risk, but it's nearly as escalatory, and will take much longer because he'll need to actually pick someone and explain it to them, and it's - condemning them to a near-certain ugly death -) 

 

 

(The war stopped being winnable as soon as a powerful stranger landed in Tantara. That's - not an option, anymore, and if anything he's relieved to have it off the table.) 

Permalink Mark Unread

Until now, he would have been confident that he could win any one-on-one fight, or at least flee one he was losing. He's - very much not confident he could win this one. 

Doesn't matter. He has yet to think of any other option that leads to even a chance of something other than escalating back to full-scale war. 

(It depends what the stranger wants. He's not sure. But it seems...plausible, at least...that what she wants is for there to stop being a stupid pointless wasteful war. It's not such an odd thing to want, even if the King was far from sold on that theory.) 

 

 

If his soldiers die, it's forever, but that's not true for him

 

Breathe. 

 

 

 

Gate. He aims for half a mile away, in the forest; he doesn't need to be able to see people to reach them with Mindspeech or magic. 

Permalink Mark Unread

Gates are rather spectacularly visible to mage-sight. Judeth is alerted within less than a second. 

 

She needs a Mindspeaker to relay to Iomedae right now that that's Ma'ar. 

Permalink Mark Unread

Ma'ar is not a powerful enough Mindspeaker to Broadsend to a crowd, and he doesn't know everyone well enough to target individual minds. He could try the powerful stranger directly, but - what reason does she have to believe him, at this point? 

 

The commanders and lieutenants, then. 

:This is Kiyamvir Ma'ar. General Shaiknam acted without orders. You are in violation of the ceasefire stand down lay down your weapons surrender NOW follow evacuation-Gate protocol: and then the next person and then the next and he's shielding himself as thoroughly as he can. 

 

- and most mages can't project a Gate-threshold more than twenty yards from themselves, but Ma'ar can distance-cast it at a mile, and he knows exactly where those clusters of minds are. A Gate goes up. It's been about five seconds since his Gate in. 

Permalink Mark Unread

If Iomedae can't directly detect Gates or minds lurking in the woods, it's going to be more like fifteen seconds before a Tantaran Mindspeaker manages to relay the message to her, though possibly the visible Gate - as far away from her as Ma'ar could manage - is a hint. 

 

Also she can observe, in the first five seconds, that some people are laying down their weapons, now, even the ones who aren't sprinting toward the Gate. 

 

Far from the majority, though. 

Permalink Mark Unread

She can directly notice the extremely powerful spell not with magic but with situational awareness and ludicrously good vision. Gate. That's what Judeth had expected, Gates in with backup, but the backup is very badly timed. Ceasefire definitely broken, then, with the two possibilities that this is a conventional attack (this badly executed? when they had the advantage of surprise? doesn't fit, doesn't make sense) and that this is a suicide attack aimed at destroying her, which fits a whole lot better.

 

She pauses in killing everyone who still holds a weapon and sprouts angel wings. The spell also gives her truespeech and invulnerability to most insufficiently powerful magic, and she's going to need it. "Get out," she yells at the gryphons in their own language, "I fear a Final Strike -" 

- and is anyone, in fact, coming through the Gate - she'd really rather go through herself and hit them before they can time their attack to crossing the threshold, but for all she knows the other side is in Predain and she's not going to break even what looks like a very thoroughly betrayed ceasefire -

Permalink Mark Unread

Ma'ar can distance-cast a Gate-threshold but he can't do it from five hundred miles away and he can't hold two Gates at once. His entry Gate is up for less than a second and he dives away from where it landed even as he's casting the new threshold among the troops and Mindspeaking, and the talismans he's wearing shield him against nearly every known form of Velgarth detection magic. 

No one is coming through on the other Gate, the one that's close. No one is even visible on the other side, just trees. (He put it in a random rural location, no point in leading the powerful stranger to somewhere important.) 

Ma'ar himself is, however, going to be on the Tantaran side, in the woods about half a mile away, for however many seconds it takes him to Mindspeak all the commanders and lieutenants, and then for as long as he has before the powerful stranger tries to kill him, in which case he is intending to abandon his evacuation-Gate and drop a horizontal thresholdness Gate under himself and if anything he hopes she'll follow him then at least she wouldn't be here 

Permalink Mark Unread

One of Tantara's Mindspeakers reaches for her. 

:Farseer says it's Ma'ar. That way: Vague mental sense-of-direction and distance. :Shielded: 

Permalink Mark Unread

Ma'ar is here. The one who is holding that Gate, though he isn't at its other end. Its other end hasn't yet been identified. His people are scrambling for it. No one has stepped through in the other direction.

That makes no fucking sense. 

 

 

She genuinely has not been this confused in a long time and generally when this confused she would stop killing people but - there is the very likely possibility that this is adversarially orchestrated, the being this confused, and sometimes you have to start trying to win the position you're playing instead of standing there paralyzed by the puzzle of why you're playing this position. 

 

He is in Tantaran territory he agreed not to enter, Gating troops around, after they attacked on what they said were his orders. 

 


She casts a spell for additional speed that'll add to what the boots give her. The angel wings propel her off the ground and up towards the griffins. And from there - he can't be far - 

Permalink Mark Unread

Not that far, no, though he's at least trying to crouch out of sight in the underbrush - the Farseer got a glimpse before he raised more shields, and the gryphons haven't yet gotten word that he's here at all, just Iomedae's shouted warning; they're flying away rather than toward him.

 

His hiding place and shields are probably not enough to evade Iomedae's situational awareness for very long. 

He's still not doing anything except holding that distant Gate-threshold, and privately Mindspeaking one person after another - 

 

- she's coming toward him, he can sense the presence of her mind, it's very bright even if her shields are impassible. That's - good in that she's no longer killing his soldiers, bad in that she is presumably here to kill him and he's barely had time to get anyone out yet but he can't hold a Gate and effectively defend himself at the same time, and if she kills him then the Gate goes down anyway, and...probably the Tantaran general won't slaughter his soldiers wholesale if they've surrendered... 

 

If and when the powerful stranger gets within fifty or a hundred yards of him, depending on how fast she's moving, he'll drop the evacuation Gate and try to raise another Gate here and get out. And then Mindspeak her and surrender, probably - but he would actually rather she follows him through and he can do that far away from here. 

Permalink Mark Unread

Moving: very fast. Also: calling out an unfamiliar word that causes chains of light to lash up from the ground around him and bind him. 

 

He's not in fact visibly Evil. Another small note of confusion, though what it adds up to in this cacophany of confusion is just -

"Surrender," she says, in his native language, "I've killed no one who did," and then she's descending sword-first.

Permalink Mark Unread

He's not, especially, evaluating whether or not he believes that claim, just - whenever or not it's better to die here and probably wake up somewhere else or - find out whatever happens next with a powerful stranger whose motives he knows very little about - 

 

 

He can't move and he's not going to have time for a Gate and - he's very well shielded, she might not be able to kill him instantly, he could try to fight, but that would definitely be crossing a line that can't be un-crossed and, besides, he's pretty sure it won't matter to the end result at all - is she even going to give him time to surrender, he's not trying to fight but Mindspeech isn't instantaneous especially when one is distracted and terrified. 

:I surrender: he sends as fast as he can, and is pretty sure he's going to die anyway. If she kills him slowly maybe he can at least say that he didn't intend this to happen. Maybe he can - he's never really thought that begging or pleading helped but he would, for Predain, she - probably wouldn't kill more of his people because he begged her not to - 

Permalink Mark Unread

The sword is, in fact, already through his magical shields and halfway into his ribcage, which just means she pulls it out and does an immediate Lay on Hands. (It will also dispel all his magic artifacts. She is not sorry.)

"Don't move. Don't use magic." Are they alone, is there anyone else in the woods here -

Permalink Mark Unread

Ma'ar is intensely confused about whatever extremely fast sequence of events just happened to him and whether he is, in fact, dying right now, and he's not incredibly processing what she's saying but he isn't going to try to move or use magic anyway. 

 

 

There does not appear to be anyone else nearby. 

Permalink Mark Unread

The Tantaran Mindspeaker is trying to reach her. :What's happening -: 

Permalink Mark Unread

:I have a mage here. He surrendered. I don't know if he's actually Ma'ar. I am really very confused right now. Can you urgently check if there are simultaneous attacks anywhere else including back at the Tower.:

Permalink Mark Unread

"We've been scrying obvious places. Nothing at Korbast Pass, nothing outwardly obvious at the Tower though a strike team could have Gated into it in theory, the other camps on the front look quiet. No one's alerted us of anything." 

Permalink Mark Unread

This is relayed. 

Permalink Mark Unread

...He seems to still not be dead, which at least implies 'dying slowly', he should - there was a thing he was going to do if she gave him time - 

 

Mindspeaking is very hard right now, for some reason, but speaking out loud sounds harder. Ma'ar is kind of having trouble breathing and he can't tell if it's because he was just stabbed with a magic sword and is too far in shock for it to hurt or if he's just terrified. 

:Did not order this: he manages. :Shaiknam acted unilaterally. Please - do not hurt any more of them - please -: Is that enough begging. 

Permalink Mark Unread

 

I cannot actually stop him from Gating out except by stabbing him if I notice a threshold, she advises Judeth. Also, please call off the rest of the gryphons. I do not at this time expect the soldiers to be reinforced, and that means I don't think they're a threat, and if I'm wrong and they are a threat I'll handle it. 

 

 

"Are you Kiyamvir Ma'ar."

Permalink Mark Unread

(The Gate went down when Ma'ar got stabbed with a magic sword and the soldiers are so confused and terrified and also kind of a lot of them are lying on the ground with grievous stab wounds. It...sort of seems like a good idea to surrender whether or not the Mindspeech warning was really Ma'ar.) 

Permalink Mark Unread

"If you stab him nonlethally or give him a moderate head injury, most mages can't concentrate enough to Gate through that and even if it's Ma'ar it'd at least slow him down." The Mindspeaker can relay that. 

And General Judeth will repeat the order to the gryphons to come inside the barrier-shield and STAY THERE, and every single mage who isn't literally incapacitated with exhaustion or already busy holding said shield is now going to be getting orders to scry this very long list of potentially-at-risk locations which she's reeling off as fast as her tongue can form words. 

Permalink Mark Unread

Still not dead. This is distantly surprising. 

:Yes: 

Permalink Mark Unread

"Are there simultaneous attacks anywhere else." The glowing chains have vanished by now, they're a short term thing. It's just her sword at his throat and his own apparent conviction that she can do anything.

Permalink Mark Unread

All of his shields are down - and it's not like they presented any obstacle to the sword before, either - and she can move faster than he can form thoughts. He really wants to Gate out, actually, but this is clearly doomed. 

(He probably could Final Strike - there's no visible cue for that until it's happening - but why. It's just a way to die anyway and incidentally murder the rest of the soldiers he came here to try to save - he wonders about the stranger's healing, if it's too late for everyone she injured...) 

 

:No: 

He needs to think, orient, and he should probably try to communicate something about how he very badly wanted the ceasefire to work and just also couldn't actually watch from a distance as Shaiknam's absurd stupid decision got several hundred of his people killed, and coming alone was - clearly - a terrible idea but seemed like the best option out of spectacularly awful set of options. Words are still hard, though. 

Permalink Mark Unread

"Are any of Urtho's other generals actually working for you." She doesn't have a Zone of Truth up, and it wouldn't work on Mindspeech anyway. She's just trying to - even if he's lying - arrive at one account of why recent events occurred which isn't mostly made up of observations that don't go together.

Permalink Mark Unread

:Not - fully, like Shaiknam. Have an agent in Polden's camp, can slip false information or orders, he - usually falls for that. Shaiknam's second-in-command and - one of their top mages - are also working for me. That is all. ...Discussed this plan with Shaiknam, letting our units through on foot to circle behind the Fifth, he was supposed to wait on my order and I - very clearly countermanded it. When the ceasefire letter came: 

Permalink Mark Unread

"What were you expecting would happen, here, when you raised the Gate?"

Permalink Mark Unread

The honest answer is that he had about three seconds to think and very large swathes of missing context on her abilities and was mostly choosing from a limited set of options based on instinct. 

 

:Thought you would probably kill me: And that he would probably come back, somewhere else, almost certainly very inconveniently and too late to turn the war around, but. :Hoped if I - came alone - you would be uncertain enough of our intentions not to mount an immediate offensive, to - investigate first. ...Hoped I would have time to order my people to surrender. So you would not slaughter everyone. So it would - maybe still be recoverable. ...Wanted Urtho to end the war. Most important thing. Thought you - might be a ruse - but worth gambling. To end the war: 

Permalink Mark Unread

He signed a ceasefire agreement and then Gated into Tantara's territory in the middle of it because someone else had ordered an attack he hadn't authorized and he could only order his people to stand down at close range?

It's absurd, but she's not actually sure it's more absurd than any other explanation of events she tried to piece together. 

 

"Right," she says. "Well, Kiyamvir Ma'ar, I am Iomedae, paladin of Aroden, Commander of the Knights of Ozem, and I'm holding you on suspicion of" being a terrifying baffling disaster "Gating into Tantara's territory in violation of a ceasefire agreement which I have been charged with negotiating and maintaining. To whom in Predain should I communicate your capture or begin negotiations surrounding your release?"

Permalink Mark Unread

He...is kind of failing to be able to think about that right now. This was supposed to be the part where she killed him and he woke up somewhere else. 

 

Come on. Focus. There has to be an obvious answer to that question that does not actually involve needing to complete any thoughts... 

:The King: he manages, uncertainly and nearly ten whole seconds of silence later. 

(Which is going to go disastrously but this was - basically guaranteed to be a disaster from the moment the idiot Shaiknam decided to– no, in fact he did just straight-up disobey Ma'ar's orders, though in fairness he thinks of himself as a mercenary agent and not actually loyal to Predain. At least it might not be a disaster that ends in the powerful god-worshipping stranger - Iomedae, paladin of Aroden, whatever that's supposed to mean - flattening his country and undoing decades of work. 

...It's bothering him that he still isn't sure if he should have just let a few hundred people die and sent a letter. It feels like it wouldn't have worked but the situation he's in now is ridiculous.) 

Permalink Mark Unread

Does he seem to have anything wrong with him (he really shouldn't, after the Lay on Hands) or is he just in shock because he's terrified?

Permalink Mark Unread

Seems like the second thing. He is pretty clearly not at all trusting her claim that she's never killed someone who surrendered to her, is expecting to be stabbed to death any minute now, and is perhaps kind of disoriented by the fact that she hasn't done this yet. 

Permalink Mark Unread

It makes sense that you wouldn't really have that institution, at all, in a world where you can't prevent a mage from Gating. It's deeply inconvenient how he's definitely going to escape on her the second she is no longer standing over him with a sword. But -

- it's a chance to talk face to face. That's what she was building towards.

 

"I'm interested in Predain withdrawing its troops from Tantara's borders."

Permalink Mark Unread

Ma'ar is having to put in enormous willpower, ongoingly, to suppress the reflex to panic-Gate out. If he does that then she will stab him and he will die and that would be an even more ridiculous way for this to go. 

It's very unfair of her to try to have a strategic conversation with him while she has a sword at his throat, but - this is, in fact, what he wanted. He...will try. 

:I want credible assurances that Tantara will stay out of our borders. And - compensation of some kind for the farms they destroyed in their initial attack and later gryphon raids. We - have a much harder time feeding our population with the land and growing season we have, and it has cost us far more than it cost them: 

Permalink Mark Unread

Thaaaaat sounds - far better than Tantara could reasonably have gotten if she wasn't here, and she can of course conquer countries on her own but in this specific case that doesn't seem like a reason to push too hard for a peace Tantara likes better. For a more lasting one, maybe. 

"I, too, want Tantara to stay out of Predain," she offers. "They want you to stop using human sacrifices for infrastructure projects and mind control to run the military."

Permalink Mark Unread

:We have a great deal of infrastructure we need to rebuild, or thousands of people are going to starve this winter: Flatly. :Does Tantara have a better idea for how to supply the power for that. They are welcome to send mages if they want us to have alternatives.:

 

He takes a couple of careful, even breaths. 

:And - you are welcome to talk to as many soldiers as you like, but - I am confident that eight in ten of them prefer the situation where they and their fellows agree to the oath of service compulsions – and you can check that they are action-affecting compulsions only and not volition-affecting It improves unit cohesion and trust, and I am not very willing to weaken our military capabilities until I have more trust that Tantara is not going to invade us again as soon as they think they have the upper hand: 

Permalink Mark Unread

"I don't want anyone to starve this winter. It seems to me - if this war is indeed unintended by Predain - that no one in Predain has the diplomatic skill to make it credible to anyone else that they will only violate important taboos of enormous military relevance for infrastructure projects that save thousands of lives and not for conquests."

Permalink Mark Unread

'While pinned on the ground with a sword at his throat' is perhaps not the time to debate the extent to which blood-magic is or is not actually taboo in all of the many, many places in the world which are not Tantara. 

 

It doesn't matter, anyway. This isn't a discussion where they will trade logical arguments; he's being held prisoner by a woman who serves a powerful foreign god, who carries a sword that can apparently pierce any kind of magical shielding, who can move fast enough to kill fifty trained soldiers in seconds. She can dictate whatever terms she feels like. 

Who, from all his spy-reports to date, seems to actually want the war to be over? And he continues not to be dead. She is apparently willing to negotiate with the King for his release. Whether he could have talked the King around on the ceasefire with logical arguments is unclear, but backed by the threat of a foreigner who could singlehandedly annihilate them, it's...simpler. A lot of things are simpler that way. 

 

:I think we could commit to using no blood-magic for the duration of peace talks: he allows. :Use that time to negotiate a more permanent agreement: 

Permalink Mark Unread

"Thank you. It is not my desire, at all, to leave Predain impoverished, or unable to defend itself. But building a durable peace is very difficult and it will require both sides to give up things that are very important to them, things that will be very possible to arrange for when more trust exists."

Permalink Mark Unread

He's so tired. 

:I am impressed that you talked Urtho into this: he sends. 

(Urtho isn't someone who will respond to arguments of the form 'the foreign stranger will flatten you if you don't do what she wants.' He's - principled - and usually that's a good thing.) 

Permalink Mark Unread

"Urtho wants peace too. Do you have any questions for me?" She's really hoping for Mindspeech contact again soon to get another clarification of the situation everywhere else; she misses having Telepathic Bonds with all her key people.

Permalink Mark Unread

Urtho could have indicated at literally any earlier point that he wanted peace, Ma'ar doesn't say. 

 

:Do you actually have a line of communication with our King: 

Permalink Mark Unread

The Tantaran Mindspeakers on site are extremely busy and overwhelmed trying to get long-range communications out to other sites and ground all of the gryphon scout-parties that were further out when this happened and relay orders that General Judeth is barking out as fast as she can. They're kind of assuming that if Iomedae needs to talk to them urgently then she will in some way indicate this

 

One of them will contact her another ten seconds later, though. 

:What's happening? Is it Ma'ar?: 

Permalink Mark Unread

:Yes, it seems to be. He says that he didn't authorize this and Gated in to tell his people to stand down. We're still trying to salvage the ceasefire. Updates from elsewhere?:

 

"We do not have a line of communication with your King at this time. I am planning to send the monitor and some of your captured troops once things have calmed down, but if you have a better suggestion I'm listening."

Permalink Mark Unread

There are in fact no signs of attacks elsewhere. They are having some trouble convincing gryphon scout parties to land and stay there while this is sorted out. They've been in touch with Urtho, who was initially very panicked at the suggestion that she might be about to kill Ma'ar and wants her to try to avoid doing this?? Also he wants to know if there's anything he should be doing, right now. 

Permalink Mark Unread

Is the Predain monitor okay? She tried to reach him at what must have been a really absurd Mindspeech range, and managed a couple of brief exchanges and then dropped out of contact, which usually indicates a Mindspeaker pushing themselves past the point of backlash into actual unconsciousness. 

Permalink Mark Unread

"I don't know. I'll ask, and we'll get her medical attention if she needs it."

 

She would like Urtho to stay in communication with his people and assure them that Tantara still respects the ceasefire and peace talks are planned. She is not going to kill Ma'ar; he surrendered, he's her responsibility now, she won't let anything happen to him. They'll probably have to let him go in the next few hours, but she wants to make sure there isn't another surprise coming, first, and to get a better sense of the man. He's been circumspect so far.

Permalink Mark Unread

Urtho will do his best.

...His people want assurances that Iomedae can come and protect them if they do end up under attack. Is that going to be in conflict with Ma'ar being her responsibility? If he's not badly injured, and maybe even if he is, he can probably Gate out given a couple of seconds to do it in. 

 

 

(The Predain monitor is in fact unconscious and is now being transported to the Healers' tent. The Healer who briefly looked at her in Judeth's command tent thinks that she'll be all right and will probably regain consciousness soon – it's harder for non-mages to cause themselves serious backlash damage – but she's certainly not going to be any use for sending Mindspeech communications for probably the rest of the day.) 

Permalink Mark Unread

Yep, if there's an incident anywhere on Tantara's side of the line she'll either let Ma'ar go or render him unconscious and then go defend Tantara.

 

"The monitor who contacted you is unconscious, on her way to Healing, the Healer who looked at her thinks she'll be all right," she reports to Ma'ar.

Permalink Mark Unread

He relaxes. Slightly. 

:I want to contact the nearest camp on the Predain side with Mindspeech: he sends. :To verify that Tantara intends to keep the ceasefire and to make sure someone is dealing with General Shaiknam. Do I have your permission to do that: 

Permalink Mark Unread

"Dealing with him how."

Permalink Mark Unread

:I am not sure because I have no idea where he is right now or whether he has faked other orders from me. I would rather manage this myself but I do not expect you to trust me if I give my word to go and come back. By default I would spread the message that no one is to obey orders from him, and then send a team of mages to hold him until things have calmed down. ...They are not going to kill him: 

Permalink Mark Unread

Right, because Ma'ar's people can hold mages prisoner, with compulsions. 

"I think it would be good to tell everyone not to obey him, but I do not want you to authorize an operation to get him while he remains on Tantara's side of the lines unless there's reason to think his next move will be immediate and much more dangerous. I will probably release you in the next few hours, but I don't want to ask an oath of you that I indeed don't expect you to keep."

Permalink Mark Unread

Ma'ar does not believe for a second that she actually intends to release him in a few hours. Why would she do that. 

He thinks. 

:...I think that he wanted to corner me into sending in our mages in force. I am not actually sure why or what he was thinking. Ten percent chance his next move, when he realizes what happened instead, is to panic and do something incredibly stupid. If you have a channel of communication with the other Tantaran camps then you will likely learn of it before I do and - be able to respond as you see fit. Maybe a...thirty percent chance? that his plan had a second half but it is not immediate or catastrophic. If I have your permission I am going to try to reach my nearest camp with an update now: 

Pause. 

:Do I have your permission to tell my people that they can capture and hold him if he crosses onto our side of the lines?: 

Permalink Mark Unread

"Yes, absolutely." Probably Urtho's people should be going to take the man down now but Urtho's side can't capture mages - ugh - well, everyone's alerted, sometimes it's better to wait on high alert than to rush into a fight -

Permalink Mark Unread

He'll use the communication-spell. It's detectable and it's not secure, but he has Iomedae's permission and, in this particular case, isn't conveying anything that he needs to keep secret from Urtho's side. And he's a much stronger mage than Mindspeaker; using Mindspeech at that range for a lengthy conversation will wear him out, and he might need that Gift functional later. 

Permalink Mark Unread

...His commander at the nearest point behind the Predain lines is so freaked out! Does Ma'ar need a rescue team??? 

Permalink Mark Unread

No! Absolutely not! They should stay exactly where they are and not make any unexpected moves and try very very hard not to spook Tantara any further. That's the most important thing by far. Ma'ar will be fine. 

 

(Ma'ar is not at all sure he'll be fine, actually. But Iomedae is clearly - experienced at navigating this kind of thing - and probably doesn't want the war to re-escalate, and so all he can do for now is trust that she isn't going to do anything that will inevitably cause that, such as killing him and then not communicating anything to his people about why.) 

Permalink Mark Unread

Iomedae is doing another round of communication with Tantara's people about where everyone is and what is going on and how to react if anything concerning happens and what should be done about Shaiknam, to whom they have not yet communicated that the assault failed or indeed has yet started. The man should be limited in spies who can report on that to him, what with how they'd have to know he's a double agent. 

She nods curtly at Ma'ar when he's done with the communication spell. "Is there any other context you think it's important for us to have from you, or for you to have from us?"

Permalink Mark Unread

She apparently has a way to speak his language now (?????) and Ma'ar has finally managed to get his physical terror under control enough that he can speak normally. He'll save his Mindspeech energy. 

"...I am not sure what context you already have on - this region more broadly and the recent history. Urtho's telling of it may not include everything that I think is relevant. You are from elsewhere but I am not sure how far away, or how - different - it is there. ...I have never heard of your god or your religious order and I think I would find it easier to know what to tell you if I knew more of your...goals...in intervening here."

Permalink Mark Unread

"I want a stable peace with prewar borders. It doesn't sound like either Predain or Tantara can capably administer the other and it doesn't sound like the prewar borders were the product of or cause of recent previous conflicts. I want, if it's possible, to maintain the geopolitical equilibrium that is low on mind control, mile-wide suicide explosions, and human sacrifice, because I can imagine the geopolitical equilibrium that is high on those and I don't like it much. I want everyone fed and clothed and safe and with many routes by which they can serve those things they believe in or care about or are indebted to. I want to try to set up political relations so that if there has to be a next war it won't immediately turn into an existential threat to both countries and everyone involved will know how to deescalate it."

Permalink Mark Unread

"...It might be useful context - which I am not sure whether Urtho would have mentioned - that the strength of Tantara's taboo on compulsions is actually quite unusual and possibly unique on this continent. And the extent to which their use in Predain is governed by laws which are actually enforced, and they are restricted to official, voluntary oaths of service or criminal penalties, is also somewhat unusual. In the Ceej Empire, for example, it is commonplace for nobles to have their house mages place compulsions on all of their servants - or sometimes secretly on their rivals' servants. I...am not necessarily opposed to making compulsions illegal except in very rare and specific circumstances - like, for example, preventing mages from Final Striking, there is not really another way to do that - but if you are used to a culture where that is already the case, that is not actually the balance we are in right now. Even if Urtho sometimes forgets to - clarify that not everywhere in the world is Tantara." 

Sigh. "I think I would be in agreement on everything else." 

Permalink Mark Unread

"It makes sense that it is commonplace in many countries for people to be placing compulsions on all their servants and all their rivals' servants, but I disapprove of it, and would work quite hard to avoid it becoming the case in any place where it is not so at present. And to bring it to an end in places where that is how things work, though that's often much harder."

Permalink Mark Unread

"Mmm." 

He's not really sure what else to say. He still doesn't really understand Iomedae as a person, why she's doing any of this, but he tried asking and he's not sure how to ask differently to get a more useful answer. He would obviously like to know a lot more about her capabilities and her resources and whether she has allies who will be joining her soon, but equally obviously, she has no reason to tell him those things. 

He'll...wait, and hope nothing else explodes. 

Permalink Mark Unread

"I spoke to some people from Predain, prisoners of war, about what they wanted from the peace. They spoke very highly of you."

Permalink Mark Unread

...He's not really sure what to say to that, either. It's - a good sign, probably, that Iomedae sought to hear out both sides? 

 

"Do they have any of our mages alive, that you know of?" he says, dully. "We do not have - lists of names - not for the last six months." He's been sending reports with lists of prisoners, very diligently. 

Permalink Mark Unread

"I'm sorry; I should have ensured that was done." It's not really about the specific thing but about reciprocating whatever effort-at-not-being-as-terrible-as-possible you see the other side putting in, where you can. "I'll get you a list, probably within two days. I don't think they have any mages strong enough to Gate; they don't have a way to hold them."

Permalink Mark Unread

Ma'ar closes his eyes for a moment. Strange, how he already knew exactly what her answer was going to be, and yet somehow it still hurts.

He knows exactly how many of his mages didn't make it back from battles. It's...a lot fewer, at least, than the number of Tantaran mages currently held on the Predain side, but given their lower population and much lower number of trained Adept-strength mages, proportionally it's probably a much greater loss even before you take into account that the Tantaran mages are mostly still alive, and will be rejoining the country's productive capacity as soon as the war is over. 

 

 

 

...the war is going to end. It seems nearly certain, now, and the only question is how messily, and at what cost to Predain. 

It's...still sinking in. But it's still a better outcome than he could have imagined, three days ago. 

"Are you going to wish to speak to the prisoners we are holding?" he says, quietly. "We have more of them." Thousands, in total, it's been a serious drain on their supplies but you can't exactly decide to stop feeding prisoners of war once you've committed to holding them alive, even if your own peasantfolk are starving. "...I would actually like to arrange a prisoner exchange for the gryphons as soon as possible, holding them is - fraught." And they eat SO MUCH FOOD. He's been trying hard not to mistreat any of the prisoners including by underfeeding them but they don't have an unlimited number of large livestock to slaughter. 

Permalink Mark Unread

"I'm not sure it's a good idea for me to travel within Predain right now. One of the things I have been working on is a prisoner exchange, and I'll speak to them once they return. No one has alleged that you mistreat your prisoners." She's mostly trying to keep her voice calm, steady, hard to read, but she sounds approving, at that.

Permalink Mark Unread

Nod. Ma'ar, too, has been keeping his voice very level, his expression flat and his body language controlled. "What would you need to change, or be demonstrated, to feel safe traveling within Predain?" 

Permalink Mark Unread

"Mostly I think I'd need it to not be overwhelmingly in your interests as you might reasonably perceive them to try to kill me. You probably couldn't, but you could cause a lot of death and destruction trying."

Permalink Mark Unread

"....I really do not think it is at all in my interests to kill you. Even if I expected it to work, which I do not. You convinced Urtho to offer a ceasefire." 

Permalink Mark Unread

 

"...in a war you were winning."

Permalink Mark Unread

"In a war I did not choose and have wanted to end since the day Tantara invaded." He says it very quietly. "And even winning it was - costing us more than we could afford. More than it would have cost Tantara in the long run, in many ways - at least if you look at material resources only, I am aware that war causes...other kinds of damages that are harder to measure." 

 

He closes his eyes. "I am aware you think I am either very evil or very stupid, and I cannot even deny the latter, so much of this war was stupid. Just. You are not from Predain, or Tantara. I am getting the sense that wherever you are from is...better...and that you have much to teach us, but..." He doesn't know the words to say it. "But I think maybe you are assuming - common knowledge, shared history - that your homeland takes for granted, and ours...does not." 

Permalink Mark Unread

"I almost certainly am. I can think of specific things, I can try to correct the right amount for all the unseeable things in between the specific things, I can try to correct too much about as often as I correct too little, but if you suspect me of being wrong I suspect you are right. ...it is very hard for me to make sense of Tantara's account of events in Predain if you didn't want a war."

Permalink Mark Unread

"...We made mistakes. made mistakes."

Pause.

"I think there are other aspects, where - our cultures are very different, right, even in addition to the language barrier, and so words or actions are interpreted differently. I think we should have set up more channels of communication, and sooner. If I - knew what I know now - I would have realized this was going to be a problem worth heading off. I should have tried harder to establish a diplomatic presence in Tantara, and encouraged them to send their own diplomats as well – the issue is that we do not really have diplomats as an institution, historically..." 

He lets out his breath, a little. 

"- If you have specific confusions I can maybe tell you what I think was misread." 

Permalink Mark Unread

"Why invade a neighboring kingdom?"

Permalink Mark Unread

"I am guessing you mean Avulle? Nowhere else that we expanded into was really under an existing state. Avulle does count, they had a king, even if their total population was well under a hundred thousand. ...I could justify it on humanitarian grounds but I do not expect you to find that convincing. They were an ongoing threat to our border security and a slave-trade hub where some problematic bandit gangs would sell children they had captured from our farms and their use of blood-magic was not regulated in any way and was causing droughts on our side of the border." 

Permalink Mark Unread

"I am curious what makes you say I probably won't find the humanitarian grounds convincing."

Permalink Mark Unread

Because no one ever does. 

 

"...Words are cheap, right? People can say whatever they want about their motives, and know that I - consider it important to be honest - but how would you know and trust that? Whereas for purely strategic incentives, the same considerations apply whether or not you personally care about children starving and being sold into slavery." 

Permalink Mark Unread

She nods. "Many people say their conquests are for the good of the conquered. - they admittedly do not usually send child mortality statistics."

Permalink Mark Unread

"I can say quite confidently that conquering Avulle reduced child mortality even within the first year, and probably improved literacy within three years though this is hard to judge since they did not have records of that before."

He shrugs, insofar as he can while still lying on the ground with a sword at his throat; he's considered trying to promise that he isn't actually going to Gate out if she lets him sit up but it didn't seem like the highest priority.

"Of course, that is a different question from whether they are happy to be part of Predain now - I think that is mixed - or consider their own lives to be better off. And also a different question than - whether something of great value was lost, regardless of who mourned for it. Probably something– probably very many things were lost that are impossible to measure but were precious to someone. I...personally think it was almost certainly something that I would weigh less heavily than dead babies, but - still." 

Permalink Mark Unread

"I'm not going to tell you I would never do that. I'd be more careful, I'd have more allies, I'd be much clearer with all my neighbors about what the provocation was, but I might also have done it, if I didn't see a better way."

Permalink Mark Unread

It must be nice to consider 'just having more allies' to be among your options This is not a helpful line of thought. 

 

 

He's so tired. That is also not a helpful thing to keep noticing. 

"I can certainly in hindsight recognize many times when I could and should have been more careful. ....I think that being clear with our neighbors about the provocation would have been - harder - because of the communication issues I mentioned and. I think Tantara– no, I think Urtho specifically, is...not very good at recognizing the problems that happen outside his country's borders, and–" 

 

He stops, because, one, this is probably not at all a useful tangent to go down, and two, it's very hard to talk about and he doesn't actually feel like he knows the right words.

Permalink Mark Unread

"He seems very oblivious," she agrees cheerfully. "A lot of this is his fault as well. - I think he cares about you and wishes you well, for what that's worth, though there are some failures of execution in his efforts at that."

Permalink Mark Unread

The cheerfulness is so confusing! Ma'ar has no idea how to parse this interaction now and he's trying very hard not to react to it with panic, or to show any of his reaction, but he visibly tenses. 

 

(And if anything it makes it worse, or at least makes it hurt more, that Urtho cares about Ma'ar personally, when he doesn't understand and doesn't care about the rest of Predain's people, the ones who weren't his students, who weren't brilliant and articulate in his presence once, and he never considered their struggles to be his problem -) 

 

He takes a deep breath. 

"I think he has a...particular philosophy. About mages, I doubt he would extend it to you. But he believes - that power is inherently bad, that it corrupts, and we already have one kind of power and should not seek other kinds. Political power, obviously, but also just - trying to affect the world in too many ways, or with too broad a scope. 

 

...I disagree with that." 

Permalink Mark Unread

"Hmmm. I think the claim I would make which sounds sort of like Urtho's, which is maybe built off the same things Urtho noticed in himself and the people around him which made him say that, would be -

 

There are many people who are deeply motivated by doing the right thing, and who are sincere in their intent to get in power so that they can do the right thing. They don't all agree on the right thing, but many of them are pointing at fragments of what I, myself, seek for the world. Peace and safety. Good harvests. No more dead children. No more dead adults, unless they're ready to go on to Heaven or wherever else they choose. Love and compassion and generosity and strength and determination and hard work. The destruction of evil and the redemption of evildoers. 

So with all these well-meaning people around, the question is, why aren't things better? And you could give a thousand answers, but certainly one of them is that humans are not made of stone, are not angels and are not archons. We have bad days. We make mistakes and then it hurts to think about the mistake so we never think about it carefully enough to learn how to not make it again. We lose things that in a better world no one would ever have to lose, and those wounds heal, but they don't heal back to the way they were originally. We learn habits that permit us to keep going in the world we've made for ourselves. Habits like killing people. Habits like not thinking too much about people. This is not inevitable, but it takes great skill to avoid, and moderate skill even to notice if you're not successfully avoiding it. 

And we are, in significant part, the people who surround us. When we are not very diligent to do otherwise, we believe their flattery and crave their approval. We want to be liked. We want to believe in our own importance. And all of this is much worse if you are, in fact, important, if the words people have to say to convince you you're far more important than anyone else can be completely true. When you're in power, you're busy, there are immense demands on your time, it's hard to know who to trust and it's unhealthy and exhausting to be alone. And the people who surround the powerful have their own agendas, and the more power you have the more people have tried or are trying to be in your inner circle, and the more likely they are to be deeply unusual, deeply manipulative, and fairly dangerous.

So, if you could, you might distribute power; you might give no one the authority of an Emperor or a King. In practice I haven't seen anyone get that working very well. You might try for weak Kings who answer to many factions; in practice that doesn't work very well either. Or you might just try to find a King of exceptional virtue, and surround him with advisors of exceptional virtue, so he can think clearly despite all the pressures against it and get things right more often than not. In my experience that one works only if the gods are doing a lot of the work. It's a difficult problem, if you're building a nation. If you are, as an individual, deciding whether to seek power, you have a different difficult problem, and it's not as if everyone who says 'I'm better than the other guy' is wrong.

But if a country's most gifted mage and strategist came to me and said 'should I also seek to rule my country?' I would, in fact, counsel him not to, even if he was very virtuous, maybe especially if he was very virtuous, unless he was also very very careful, and had friends and allies ready to embark on this journey with him, and had already thought about how much damage he could do if power changed him, or changed how people reacted to the way he'd always been."

Permalink Mark Unread

All of this seems very very important, both in terms of actual information and advice that he badly needs and, separately, wanting to make a good impression on the powerful stranger -

 

- and it's inconveniently difficult to focus. because of the handful of notes of confusion near the beginning, that aren't quite serious enough for him to interrupt the person holding a sword to his throat but that's a high bar and he is maybe mostly not coming to that decision because he's very tired and decisions are hard. 

(other faint side-notes of disagreement - he doesn't think that he craves the approval of the people he works with, actually, it's– he's not natively good at noticing that kind of thing, and it feels like such safer and more solid ground to focus on tables of numbers you can measure, though he's aware that this is not how everyone works, if it were then he would have much better numbers on so many different things...)

...and then there's the second note of confusion, around the concept where "the gods are doing a lot of the work" and - where is Iomedae from, it seems so incredibly alien - 

Permalink Mark Unread

Calm. Focus. 

"- I appreciate your counsel," he says, mostly on reflex. "I - there were some words you used there that I am not familiar with and it seems important. What is Heaven, and what are angels and archons?" 

Permalink Mark Unread

"In my world, souls, on the death of their body, go on to judgment, and from judgment to a next life that reflects the way they lived this one. This is totally unsatisfactory, obviously, since some people get bad next lives, and I do mean to fix it, but there are a lot of gods who like the current system. 

I don't know if this is true here. I have been presuming it might be false. I doubt that we are outside the Creation in which souls are called to judgment, because I have the ability to see a glimpse of that judgment when I look at people and that part is working fine. But your local gods might be doing something unusual; it's a wizard who'd be able to tell the difference, and I'm not one, and I've prayed without response to the gods I am familiar with. 

Angels and archons are beings that humans can grow into, in the next world, and they possess a sort of internal clarity such that it's not true of them that a lot of sad things happening would permanently change their outlook and values, and such that they would never betray their word or their aims. I speak to them frequently; seeking their counsel solves some kinds of problems with being a mortal surrounded by equally confused mortals, though also mortals shouldn't actually try to approximate being an angel or an archon except under very unusual circumstances."

Permalink Mark Unread

 

 

 

 

 

 

“- As far as I am aware, souls in our world do not go anywhere in particular or continue to - have experiences - after death.”

 

Ma’ar is pretty sure he has emotions about this. He is also definitely going to put off figuring out what exact emotions those are until some later point when he has pen and paper and doesn’t have a sword at his throat.

Permalink Mark Unread

"That is possible, but it'd be a bit surprising given that I can still see how they'll do at judgment. If souls here are meant to go to judgment and the local gods are interfering with that, we'll have a bunch of difficult choices ahead of us, but it also seems quite likely to me that souls here do go on. I'm sorry I can't yet provide you with either more certainty or a better arrangement."

Permalink Mark Unread

Ma’ar so confused and so tired and those continue to be unhelpful thoughts to keep noticing. 

 

- he still has no idea how to respond to it. 

“I suppose you should find a way to - test your theories about what the situation is here,” he says faintly.

Permalink Mark Unread

" - yes, definitely. After the war we can sit down and talk about the options."

Permalink Mark Unread

….Ma’ar is, again, running into the problem where he is failing at finishing any thoughts or producing any response he can put into words. 

He’ll just - lie on the ground and wait. He’s starting to distantly notice that he’s cold.

Permalink Mark Unread

He's probably scared. She doesn't actually know what that's like but she can make the inference. She'd - like to give him a slightly better understanding of who she is, but you can't do that by starting conversations people don't want to have. She will think about approaches to the traitorous general, and leave him be. 

 

"The spell I'm using to understand you is going to wear off in a few minutes," she says after a while. "It's all right if you want to save further questions for later - I expect there will be plenty of time - but if there is anything else you wanted to know, it will have to be Mindspeech."

Permalink Mark Unread

...Ma'ar would very much like to better understand Iomedae. He's been trying and bouncing off thinking of specific questions to ask. 

(He's also scared. This mostly doesn't seem like one of the more important aspects of the situation.) 

 

"- Noted," he says, when she addresses him. "I - think I have very many questions but they are mostly - abstract." Hard to talk about. "And not necessarily urgent." 

Permalink Mark Unread

"They're urgent insofar as I would like you to feel comfortable sitting down for peace talks in which I am participating."

Permalink Mark Unread

"...I would have said that I am more motivated than you to show up for peace talks, because– because Predain is my country, and Urtho was my teacher, and - I am still not entirely sure why you...care...what happens here, when I am sure none of it can possibly harm you or your god's interests. Whether I am comfortable seems - beside the point - it seems more relevant whether you are comfortable." 

Permalink Mark Unread

"Every person starving or dying or killing or suffering, anywhere, is a place where my interests are threatened."

Permalink Mark Unread

Permalink Mark Unread

 

 

 

 

"....If you actually mean that, then I - I want to be your ally - but I suppose this runs into the same difficulty where it is easy to say you want something and if you were clever and had good intelligence on my past work then you would know exactly what to say to cause me to feel that way." 

Permalink Mark Unread

" - I would not, actually, have predicted that that was specifically the right thing to say to you. It's not - even a thought original to me, back home, though I am generally regarded as unusually serious about it."

Permalink Mark Unread

“I already had very many questions about your homeland and now I have more of them.”

(Probably. He isn’t sure what the questions are, exactly, he needs more mental space to unpack all of that and it continues to be hard to think, in this situation. He’s less filled with the constant desperate urge to Gate out but he’s still scared.)

Permalink Mark Unread

"Many things here remind me of it. Politics isn't the same everywhere but it has distinct similarities everywhere. Your mages aren't precisely like any spellcaster I've seen but the underlying magic they're using might well be similar. You don't have - paladins, the specific kind of god-intervention that enables the work I do in my world - and I claim you're worse off for it, but of course one might argue that I would think so."

Permalink Mark Unread

“- The last part might be the important difference? I - am not sure I have ever heard of god-interventions here that were actually - helpful on net.” 

Permalink Mark Unread

"Huh. Not all of Golarion's gods are helpful, and I need to murder some of them, but there are some who run - banks, soup kitchens, orphanages, hospitals, and there should be some actually useful ones coordinating the defeat of Evil, but the one who used to be doing that is incapacitated. ...I am planning to replace Her."

Permalink Mark Unread

Permalink Mark Unread

Ma'ar wants– well, several thousand things, at this point, but most urgently pen and paper so he can try to keep better track of this conversation, which seems like plausibly the most important conversation he's ever had (though he is of course instinctively suspicious, but - halfheartedly, at this point...) 

Also he's going to have to switch back to Mindspeech soon, probably, when the spell runs out, and also that's a reminder that time is still passing and he has a hundred other responsibilities and very little idea what's going on in Predain with his commanders - probably he would have heard from Iomedae directly if anything were on fire - 

 

"I - was not aware gods were the kind of entity that could meaningfully run banks," he says, faintly. "Or that - mortals could replace gods - I am not even sure what that would mean." Though the concept of wanting to do it is perhaps one of the most impressively audacious things he's ever heard. 

Permalink Mark Unread

"Some of our gods are formerly mortal. It changes you, and many of the details of how it works are secret, but I'm reasonably sure I'll be able to get the end result I want, presuming I return to Golarion at some point or am able to redevelop the method here." And the spell drops out on her; the wings vanish. Her sword stops glowing.

 

Permalink Mark Unread

.....Which would be the ideal moment to try to Gate out, if he were going to do that. 

 

Ma'ar still doesn't anticipate very high odds of success at Gating out. Probably even without the spell, Iomedae can still move very fast, and even the non-glowing sword can kill him given his complete lack of any magical shielding. Also he surrendered to her, which is in some sense an implicit agreement not to try to escape. 

Maybe more to the point, he doesn't want to Gate out. Everything he's spent decades working toward is back in Predain, but - it's not, quite, true, that everything he cares about is there. 

 

Every person starving or dying or killing or suffering, anywhere, is a place where my interests are threatened, Iomedae said. 

 

He still doesn't really believe it but mostly because it seems too good to be true. 

Permalink Mark Unread

He closes his eyes again. 

:Do I have your permission to contact my people again and obtain an update on what is happening: 

Permalink Mark Unread

It hasn't escaped her that he could now try fleeing. She wouldn't kill him if he did, but she's - definitely taking it as a promising sign, if he doesn't. :Go ahead.:

Permalink Mark Unread

He'll do that. Since he's using the communication-spell, this mostly involves lying still with his eyes closed. 

 

 

A few minutes later, his eyes fly open. He doesn't sit up, or otherwise move, but it's taking a lot of restraint. 

:- General Shaiknam is not where we expected. Apparently he is much further into Tantara at one of the Gate-stations. I am not sure what he is planning but I am confused and that is worrying: 

Permalink Mark Unread

That does sound like a more urgent problem.

 

She - doesn't know what she makes of this man, but if he's lying, about wanting peace and good things for all people, it's more adeptness at lying than either his enemies or his friends have ever attributed to him.

 

:All right. I'm releasing you. Gate back to Predain, don't cross the lines again. Which Gate-station is Shaiknam at.:

Permalink Mark Unread

...That is not how he was expecting her to respond but it - doesn't seem like a bad sign, at least? 

:Jerfast: He can send her a mental image of a map, and an approximate direction and bearing, though after a moment he remembers that she probably doesn't use Gates and he doesn't actually know what her plan is for getting there. 

He wants to - offer to help - but that is probably not, actually, going to be reassuring to her right now. So he'll sit up, very carefully with no sudden movements, and start raising a Gate-threshold – unscaffolded, but otherwise a normal, doorway-shaped one, maximally unsurprising. 

 

(The other terminus is in a deserted forest. It's in Predain, but he really shouldn't trust Iomedae far enough, yet, to lead her directly to a place that matters.) 

If she doesn't object he's going to, also very carefully, stand up and walk through. 

Permalink Mark Unread

She's going to head back in the other direction to pass this along to General Judeth. She doesn't look back.

 

Permalink Mark Unread

The mage-barrier around the camp is down; it eventually seemed redundant, when no mages were Gating in to attack, and the Predaini soldiers, weapons abandoned, are huddled up in a tight circle around their injured and dying fellows. They're trying their best to provide field first aid but they don't have any Healers with them and General Judeth has not felt quite secure or generous enough to send any of theirs over. 

Permalink Mark Unread

She has two more Lay on Hands or one more channel and no way to get them back. She's not going to use them on this.


It does hurt. Always will, hopefully. 

 

She flags down the first Tantaran Mindspeaker with Ma'ar's news. 

Permalink Mark Unread

They don't know what to make of that or whether it's supposed to be bad but they'll direct her toward General Judeth while immediately relaying the news ahead to her! 

 

Judeth is also not really sure what to make of it. Within the new Gate-network security restrictions imposed since the war, the Jerfast Gate is one hop from Urtho's Tower - whereas most of the Gates anywhere near the front aren't - but it's otherwise not important. She can send word to block Shaiknam's access to the Gate-network, if Iomedae is worried, but she's genuinely not sure what to be worried about

...a scrying-check thirty seconds later confirms that Shaiknam seems to be there with a relatively small party. Apparently no one at this minor local Gate-station was warned about his betrayal; his presence there seems to have gone unremarked. Judeth can also have a message passed to change that, but - he's by far the highest-ranking military commander at the site, and his mage-retinue outpowers the on-site guards by an order of magnitude. 

Does Iomedae want to be Gated there herself to figure out what's going on. 

Permalink Mark Unread

Yes, she does. She is in fact worried about Urtho's Tower; is there a way to make those gates not one hop away while she''s figuring this out?

Permalink Mark Unread

Possibly Urtho knows how to do that? Judeth certainly doesn't. She can add that as an urgent message to be sent to Urtho personally, though.

And she can very quickly organize an escort of a dozen Adept mages to accompany Iomedae there. All of them have Gate-locations within the Towert itself; that way, even if there's a fight at Jerfast, if Iomedae learns the Tower is in danger then probably someone will be able to transport her there instantly. 

They'll be ready to go within thirty seconds, which is not long enough to receive any response to the frantic messages now being dispatched to the Gate-station guards. 

Permalink Mark Unread

:I would consider it a personal favor if you got some Healing to the soldiers from Predain: she says, and then off she'll go.

Permalink Mark Unread

They'll Gate her to Jerfast. 

 

 

General Shaiknam has apparently not been warned yet that anything is wrong, and also was very clearly not expecting Iomedae to suddenly arrive. And apparently gave some kind of contingency-orders to his people, because one of his mages immediately starts raising a Gate (unscaffolded, not on the permanent terminus.) 

Permalink Mark Unread

Angel wings, glowing sword, "No," she says to the mage raising the Gate, in the language she definitely didn't speak when they spoke yesterday.

Permalink Mark Unread

Is she actually magically preventing him from completing this Gate, because having the terrifying otherworldly stranger threatening brandishing a glowing sword at you does not seem like a reason to want to stay where you currently are. 

Permalink Mark Unread

She will kill him if he doesn't stop. She does not have a bunch of clever non-sword ways of stopping people, here.

Permalink Mark Unread

In that case he is not going to complete the Gate because he’s very rapidly dead.

 

General Shaiknam…is apparently going to try to run away, on foot, which is possibly an even stupider response here.

Permalink Mark Unread

Iomedae can fly faster than he can run. (She can also run faster than he can run, but flying is more intimidating.)

"None of the rest of you yet stand accused of betraying Tantara," she says fairly pointedly to Shaiknam's escort, and then lands in front of Shaiknam with the sword at his throat.

(Her sword arm is actually pretty sore at this point but she will literally never admit this to anyone.)

 

Permalink Mark Unread

He trips and falls, hard, and looks up at her with a startled, frozen, and incredibly undignified expression. He has possibly just literally wet himself in terror. 

 

(She's going to have to try harder than this if she wants answers from him about what's going on, though.) 

Permalink Mark Unread

She has absolutely no idea what Tantaran norms for interrogations are, does not want to accidentally blow right past them, and does blame this man for fifty-three people she has maimed or killed so far tonight so she is angry with him and not hiding it. 

"If you help me limit the damage from whatever idiocy this is, I will try to keep you alive. If you don't, I make no promises. Where were you going, what are you doing."

Permalink Mark Unread

General Shaiknam's plan is probably not going to succeed anyway, at this point, and he is almost certainly not going to personally benefit from it like he hoped, but Iomedae has yet to make a convincing case that it benefits him to tell her what the plan is. 

 

...He doesn't want to die, though. Then he definitely won't benefit. 

"- I'll help you for a reward. More than just keeping me alive." 

Permalink Mark Unread

"What do you want."

Permalink Mark Unread

He could negotiate for something much better if he had more time, but - in fact they're kind of on a time limit, if he wants to actually give Iomedae the side of the bargain she's apparently asking for. 

(General Shaiknam, unlike Ma'ar, is not at all suspicious that Iomedae has an ulterior motive here. She's just like Urtho. Wants everything to be beautiful and happy and perfect, isn't necessarily that careful about how she gets there but it's not surprising, for her to want to save Urtho from an inevitable and horribly painful death. ....Not that she knows that's what she's saving him from, yet, of course.) 

 

"Two hundred gold." (He's giving her a standard weight in Tantaran terms, which should hopefully translate.) "And a Gate to the capital of the Ceej Empire." 

Permalink Mark Unread

She looks over his shoulder at his entourage. "Any of you in the mood to speak up for just the Gate and not the gold?"

Permalink Mark Unread

Apparently not, or at least not in the first ten seconds and presumably she's not going to wait around longer than that. 

 

(They're mostly pretty scared of Shaiknam, and know almost nothing about Iomedae, and also two hundred gold is an absurd number to think about and this entire situation is very confusing.)

Permalink Mark Unread

"This man," she says calmly, "intends to escape a traitor's fate by telling me what plans he has in the works. But that is a deal I would rather cut with you. If you tell me what is going on here, I will protect you. He won't. You'll notice none of his demands were of safety for any of you."

 

It's worth the seconds, she thinks. It does a lot less damage to peoples' expectations about what they can get away with, to cut deals with all their underlings.

Permalink Mark Unread

This is a much better pitch! Given this pitch, Commander Garber, who is (he thinks) the only other one who knows what the plan is, and who is well aware of Shaiknam's....traits, as a person (which to be very clear, he would not necessarily have described in any negative terms before this past week) - is perhaps willing to speak up. 

 

"He sent Mage-Officer Conn Levas through the Gate five minutes ago. To assassinate Urtho." 

Permalink Mark Unread

Hopefully Iomedae's local mage escort doesn't in fact need orders, at that, to start Gating to the Tower or contacting Urtho themselves, but if they do need those orders she will TELL THEM TO DO THAT RIGHT NOW. Which gives her a few seconds, while the Gate goes up, to decide what to do about Shaiknam -

He is a mage. He's Gate-capable - not quickly, but sufficiently so that Tantara cannot realistically hold him for an extended period. He's probably much much less dangerous with the treason known, but it wouldn't be absurd for him to have five more plans like this one up his sleeve, or more allies he expects to arrive -

- the commander could be lying, but her gut says that he isn't, and the look of horror on Sheiknam's face says that too -

 

"I think I should kill General Shaiknam," she says to her escort, "but I'll hear objections."

Permalink Mark Unread

Her escort is– well, there are a dozen of them and they vary widely in the extent to which they've ever interacted with General Shaiknam, and how they feel about the military leadership or about the nobility, and at least half of them did not previously have strong negative impressions of the man.

But. "A mission to assassinate Urtho" is a pretty awful betrayal, that should obviously be stopped, and - none of them are especially inclined to argue that Shaiknam definitely wouldn't have done that. Certainly none of them are going to get in the way of Iomedae's sword on his behalf. 

There are no objections. There is instead some very rapid back-and-forth on who has Gate-locations where and which one is closest to where Urtho is most likely to be working -

 

 

Within ten seconds there will be a Gate up to a Work Room door in a hallway on the fifth floor of the Tower. Urtho could be in any of these several locations which are being very rapidly relayed to Iomedae by multiple people talking over each other. 

Permalink Mark Unread

Iomedae was most interested in objections of the form 'someone had an implicit expectation she wouldn't do that' or 'there's a law about that which arguably applies', but she knows full well that even if that's the case people can't necessarily produce it under crisis when most of their thought is quite obviously and correctly going towards finding Urtho and stopping the assassination attempt. 

Ultimately, she thinks that multiple people probably die if this man is free, and that, if this choice of hers is openly known, it will point people at an accurate understanding of her and what they can expect of her, and that no one who got her here will wish they hadn't.

She decapitates the man in a single clean stroke, says to Garber, "you're free to go, but if you stay I'll arrange for your safety", and then rushes through the Gate, looking for Urtho.

Permalink Mark Unread

(There might have been any remaining implicit expectations that she wouldn't do that, right up until the point that she went and killed-or-maimed fifty Predain soldiers after - at least visibly - thinking about it for less than five seconds. Nobody is surprised.) 

 

- the mages with her are frantically searching as well, flinging out communication-spells aimed at both Urtho and several of his hertasi secretaries who should nearly always know where he is, and simultaneously they're coordinating to scry the top ten places where he's most likely to be, at this time of day, in the Tower... 

 

 

They have an answer within another ten seconds.

...It's not a happy answer. Four of his five top hertasi secretaries are impossible to find by any magical means. The fifth is cowering in a closet. Urtho himself is not answering the communication-spell. 

Scrying shows him in the throne room. It's not very high resolution because the throne room has partial shields against Velgarth scrying. They cannot actually tell if he's there and alive

It's down three floors and six hundred yards this way, or they can Gate her there if she wants? 

Permalink Mark Unread

Gate's faster.

Permalink Mark Unread

They'll raise a Gate. Five seconds, give or take. 

Permalink Mark Unread

Urtho is sitting, not on the throne proper (he didn't even want a throne room in his Tower!) but in a comfortable armchair, one of a set of four arranged neatly around a low table, off to one side of the ostentatious throne that some of his mages probably had a lot of fun designing. 

He looks alive, and at least approximately conscious, but he's not registering their presence at all. He's instead staring into space and twitching. 

Permalink Mark Unread

Two more lay on hands, or one channel, and then she won't have magical healing again until she dramatically alters the local god situation.


She steps forward and presses her hands to Urtho's face and heals him. This will, as it did with Ma'ar, probably dispel a bunch of his magic items. It also might or might not work, depending what was done to him.

 

"Please start searching the Tower for the assassin, if you haven't yet."

Permalink Mark Unread

They were searching the room already, mostly because of the potential ongoing threat to them and to Iomedae, but they'll spread out, and more importantly start trying to scry Conn Levas and reaching out with the communication-spell to summon help. There aren't very many mages actually in the tower, but there are lots of hertasi who can join in the search. Though very plausibly the man isn't in the Tower again; the clever option here would have been to immediately Gate out. 

Also they're going to work on getting a Healer here as fast as possible, but 'as fast as possible' is probably still going to be at least thirty seconds. 

Permalink Mark Unread

Urtho gasps in a deep breath, his eyes going wide and struggling to focus on her face. He reaches for her, but clumsily, like he's not exactly seeing her body where it actually is in space. 

(He isn't. The healing instantly cured all of the damage already done by the poison now coursing through his veins, and the resulting agonizing pain is - at least temporarily - at bay, but he's still wildly hallucinating.) 

"Is Ma'ar -?" he tries to say, slurring the words.

Permalink Mark Unread

"Released. Uninvolved in the assassination attempt, I think. He warned me that Shaiknam had moved unexpectedly."

Permalink Mark Unread

"Oh. 

 

 

- is the ceasefire still...?" 

Permalink Mark Unread

"Holds. I think we can get Predain to withdraw to pre-war borders, too."

Permalink Mark Unread

"Oh. Good." He's still trying to grab onto her, as though she's the only solid thing in the room.

His breath catches and he shivers, abruptly; the hallucinations are worsening again, the room dissolving into distorted rainbows. 

Permalink Mark Unread

Someone is raising a Gate. "We need to get him to the Healers, can you carry–" 

 

Someone else, interrupting: "- found Levas on a scry, he's - basement, I think, still in the Tower -" 

Permalink Mark Unread

"Can you Gate me there once we get Urtho to healing?"

Permalink Mark Unread

...They're kind of worried about Gating directly to him - the mage raising the Gate will be vulnerable, having a Gate struck directly with a powerful combat spell can kill its caster, and the man might be desperate enough to Final Strike if cornered.

Someone can rush through the Gate to the infirmary ahead of her, though, and start raising a Gate to the hallway over? They've seen how fast she can move; it seems pretty unlike Mage-Officer Levas will have enough time to flee. 

Permalink Mark Unread

That works. 

 

She picks up Urtho to lug him through to the infirmary.

Permalink Mark Unread

She is immediately swarmed by very worried hertasi! They direct her to a bed. 

(The other mages follow her through as well, and spread themselves to the corners of the room, coordinating to raise shields.) 

 

The next Gate-threshold is up but the mage casting it is holding the half-complete spell; it's very draining to do that but they don't want to give Conn Levas any more warning than absolutely necessary; he'll finish the destination threshold once Iomedae is ready to go through it. 

Permalink Mark Unread

Urtho seems to object to being put down; he clings to her, if not very effectively. It's unclear if he's especially aware that he's doing it, or really aware of his surroundings at all. 

Permalink Mark Unread

She needs to go kill the assassin before he succeeds at whatever else he's attempting in the Tower. Urtho's healers can do more for him than she can anyway. "Be strong," she tells him, and pries him off her, and goes.

Permalink Mark Unread

.....Uhhh the Gate is ready to go but Conn Levas is...not visible on scrying anymore? It seems likely he just went into a more thoroughly shielded area of the Tower? 

 

Probably he went through the very heavily reinforced door over there. 

Permalink Mark Unread

Is it locked?

Permalink Mark Unread

Not anymore! 

It opens on a narrow stone staircase. 

Permalink Mark Unread

She's worried that chasing him will encourage him to do something reckless, but also he doesn't yet seem to know they're after him and his default plans are probably also very bad.

What you want for this is stealth, which paladins don't have. 

"Evacuate the Tower," she says to the mage who Gated her in, and then she goes down the stairs.

Permalink Mark Unread

Evacuating the Tower - even just alerting everyone in the Tower that they need to evacuate - is going to take a while. There are kids here. There are the gryphon and hertasi nurseries. 

It would be really good to know what Iomedae thinks is going to happen but she seems to be in a hurry. And does not seem to be encouraging anyone to follow her. 

They'll sprint back through the Gate and snap it down, and - getting Urtho out is the first priority here, though moving him isn't ideal and nowhere else is as safe as the Tower. (As the Tower usually is, at least.) 

 

 

The stairs go down a while and then there's a hallway. She can't see Conn Levas, he must have already turned that corner ahead, but she can hear his footsteps, now breaking into a run. 

Permalink Mark Unread

Which means he can probably hear her. The corridors are too narrow to fly, but with the boots active she's still probably faster than him. "Can we please talk," she calls ahead. "Urtho survived, Shaiknam is dead, I don't know what you want here but you should probably change course."

Permalink Mark Unread

She is, indeed, faster than him. He must be anticipating this, because he stops running. Waits, arms folded, for her turn to the corner. 

 

"There's a way to win the war," he says, his voice casual. "Thought you might like to know it." 

Permalink Mark Unread

"Win for who?"

Permalink Mark Unread

He raises an eyebrow. "Who do you think? They're going to keep being a thorn in our side as long as Ma'ar is alive. We need to break them. And we can. Urtho says such fascinating things when he's delirious and doesn't know who he's talking to." 

Permalink Mark Unread

"I captured Ma'ar earlier today. I expect we'll have all of Predain's soldiers out of Tantara within a week. You were trying to serve your country; you didn't in fact kill Urtho; this is salvageable, but not if you keep doing stupid things."

Permalink Mark Unread

He smiles, thinly. "It sounds like we might be in a position where we can - arrange to mutually benefit." 

Permalink Mark Unread

"I'd like that." Mostly I'd like you to be out of this vault in which probably some ancient horror is sealed, this isn't my first wizard tower.

Permalink Mark Unread

He leans against the wall, tapping his foot. "I'd like a duchy. A nice one. And your word that you won't interfere in my business, if I don't interfere in the capital." 

Permalink Mark Unread

"I have been here for four days. I don't know who Tantara's existing dukes are, or how I'd go about replacing them. I'm sure I can figure something out, but I'm not going to make promises until I could at least name a duchy."

Permalink Mark Unread

"Plenty of nobles went missing after the palace was captured. I'm sure you won't even find it inconvenient to arrange something." 

Permalink Mark Unread

Just keep him talking. "Are you going to interfere with a peace with Predain?"

Permalink Mark Unread

"Hmm. I reckon we could come to an arrangement, on that. ...I'd want your oath that you'll prevent any of them from coming after me. They're a violent and untrustworthy lot, if you haven't already noticed that." 

Permalink Mark Unread

"I don't know how far that's in my power, but as far as it is, yes, certainly. I'm - confused. Sheiknam betrayed Tantara to Ma'ar. He was working with you, but you don't work for Ma'ar, I take it. Playing both sides?"

Permalink Mark Unread

He waves a hand, lazily. "I'd have taken a duchy in Predain, too, but after Ma'ar responded like an idiot to that opportunity we gave him, it wasn't looking so much like a good place to put down roots in. Seemed like I might not even get the gold he agreed on. It's nothing personal." 

Permalink Mark Unread

"You think he was being an idiot? If he'd Gated the mages in, I'd have killed them too. You weren't giving him an opportunity for anything except, I guess, to see what I could do, which is actually what I originally thought you were aiming at."

Permalink Mark Unread

"I mostly meant managing to get himself captured. Don't know what he could possibly have been thinking." 

 

 

 

Elsewhere, one of the hertasi mages who does know what Urtho keeps in his basement has been frantically trying to reach her and failing because the shielded section blocks even the communication-spell. They have no idea what's happening down there and can't even scry to check if she's in the middle of a fight that no one but her could survive, and it might be a very bad moment to joggle her elbow, but this is important...

The mage will let himself in through a different door, and from there - staying on the very top step of the stairs - a Mindspeaker can reach her. 

:You need to keep him away from Urtho's Work Room at any cost. And absolutely do not let him Final Strike. There are weapons in there that could destroy the whole Kingdom: 

Permalink Mark Unread

Isn't that fantastic. She wishes she was more surprised.

:Acknowledged:.

 

"He's a puzzling man. I think he thought I'd kill him. I don't know what he thought was worth that. I do think he's the only person who can pull Predain's forces back to its borders without months more fighting, though, and there'll be a lot more left of Tantara if we end this faster. 

So - you gave up on Ma'ar. Why poison Urtho, at that point?"

Permalink Mark Unread

"...Oh, that part was never Ma'ar's idea. Shaiknam wanted him dead. Probably figured he could wrangle being Tantara's next king, with Urtho out of the picture – doubt that would've worked out for him but he paid up front, so didn't matter to me either way. And the man's a smug hypocrite with no common sense, he had it coming." 

Permalink Mark Unread

“And this adventure here, did someone pay for that in advance or is it improvisational?”

Permalink Mark Unread

"Shaiknam would have paid me if I got him a way to heroically crush Tantara's enemies – he could've spin that into taking the throne without even trying. But it sounds like you'd be amenable to paying me not to tell the next-highest bidder what's down there, and it's the same to me either way. Is that right?" 

Permalink Mark Unread

“Shaiknam is dead.” Because she decided she didn’t think she could afford whatever he’d do next if I let him go, so it is interesting to learn what that would have turned out to be. Usually you never know, when you make those calls.

”The thing I am willing to pay you to do is to leave this place and not interfere in the peace efforts.”

Permalink Mark Unread

"What sort of terms are you intending to get us? I wouldn't see any need to interfere if the terms are going to be favorable to my business interests." 

Permalink Mark Unread

“I’m not clear on your business interests or why I’d be interfering with them. I’m not going to let you sell Urtho’s weapons to the highest bidder.”

Permalink Mark Unread

"Well, if you're getting me a duchy, I don't want to be spending the first decade getting it back in shape. I think they should be responsible for dealing with any infrastructure damage they caused. And cleaning up the blood-magic residue." 

Permalink Mark Unread

"I will ask, though I get the sense Predain is quite poor. Why do you even want a duchy? Is there someone you're trying to impress?"

Permalink Mark Unread

"Who wouldn't want a duchy? And I'd never have to take orders from bloody Urtho again." He's tapping his foot. "Do we have a bargain? If what you want is me out of Urtho's basement, I'd be delighted to Gate myself out. I don't want you following me." 

Permalink Mark Unread

"I absolutely want you out of Urtho's basement and will not follow you if you Gate out. If the deal is that I won't have you tracked down and killed absent further provocation substantial enough to justify that on its own, and I'll ask around about whether I can get you a duchy, knowing you'll try to sell Urtho's weapons to the highest bidder if I fail, then we have a deal."

Permalink Mark Unread

"All right. Deal." 

He raises a Gate. The other end is in a nondescript field. He aims an ironic salute in her direction, and steps across. 

Permalink Mark Unread

She nods evenly. Waits long enough to make sure he's not immediately Gating back in for Urtho's workroom.

Permalink Mark Unread

He doesn't seem to be doing that (though if he were Gating directly into a shielded Work Room she wouldn't necessarily have any idea.) 

Permalink Mark Unread

Then she'll race up the stairs and get back in contact with Urtho's people and demand to better understand this 'weapons that could destroy the whole kingdom' situation IMMEDIATELY please.

Permalink Mark Unread

...They don't know very much. Urtho is the only person who has more detail than 'the room exists and there are multiple very very dangerous experimental weapons in it.' 

The Healers are working very hard to get him stabilized and lucid, but it looks like Conn Levas had somehow gotten his hand on miranda thorns – an obscure and invariably fatal poison. It might not be invariably fatal with Iomedae's healing but Urtho is not currently very able to answer questions. 

Permalink Mark Unread

Right. Okay. Iomedae wants the very very dangerous experimental weapons moved. Possibly dismantled, definitely moved. Right now, because it sounds like Levas could gate in and steal them?

 

(She'd have killed him, except she was worried he'd Final Strike and she'd been told that could destroy the Kingdom.)

Permalink Mark Unread

They can go and see if Urtho left any kind of written instructions specifying whether the weapons can be moved safely and if there's a safe way to dismantle them. Taking very powerful magical artifacts through Gates always risks some kind of interaction. If they don't feel comfortable moving the weapons until Urtho can okay it, they can at least mount a very thorough guard? 

Permalink Mark Unread

Sounds good. She can heal Urtho again; it’s her very last Lay On Hands, so it’s not an amazingly appealing solution, but if the healers think it’s needed she can do it.

Permalink Mark Unread

The Healers are...not more than 70% sure that Urtho is going to survive. Certainly he's likely to be lucid much sooner if Iomedae can heal him again, though they're not sure if she has anything more effective at actually getting the poison cleared out of his body? It looked like the thing she did before healed all organ damage it had already caused, and just having that again would definitely help, buying them more time to work on it with Urtho relatively stable, but it doesn't seem perfectly efficient. 

Permalink Mark Unread

Unfortunately she isn’t the kind of paladin whose touch heals poison because she had people for that, back home. She can heal him and at least get him lucid to ask superweapon questions?

Permalink Mark Unread

Urtho still looks pretty awful, ashen-pale and shivering.  They've got him bundled up in heated blankets with about eight Healers arranged around his bed. 

The second Lay On Hands helps more, though, now that the Healers have made some progress on clearing the poison from his system and suppressing the hallucinations. He opens his eyes and this time actually manages to focus on Iomedae's face. 

Permalink Mark Unread

“How do we dismantle the superweapons?”

Permalink Mark Unread

Urtho can speak in reasonably coherent sentences, though it's halting and clearly costing him a lot of effort. 

 

Most of the weapons should be stable taken through a Gate; these two shouldn't be transported that way but can be moved overland on a floating platform he designed for that purpose. He also left detailed instructions for disabling all of the weapons but he admits it's a complex and fraught process that he hadn't really intended to delegate to others. 

Permalink Mark Unread

Okay. What do the two that can't safely be Gated do.

Permalink Mark Unread

One of them more or less opens a one-sided Gate directly into the Void, instantly draining all of the magical energy out of the area. The design concept wasn’t even originally conceived of as a weapon - he was musing on ways to clean up blood-magic residue or similar - but it turned out to be impossible to control the process. (The weapon also requires a living channel to initiate it, he couldn’t figure out how to replace that with artifacts, and it would inevitably be fatal for them.)

The other tears open a temporary planar rift into the Abyssal Plane and uses the energy released to drag through several million Abyssal demons and bind them in construct-bodies. Urtho…admits this one doesn’t really have any purpose other than for violence, he mostly just got caught up in testing whether the idea would work.

Both involve complex planar manipulations and shouldn’t be moved through Gates, which are themselves planar anomalies. He thinks they would remain stable but they might not. 

Permalink Mark Unread

The thing is that all wizards are like this so she can't even be disappointed. At least he didn't test them on any villages to see if they worked as well as they were supposed to.

 

Does he have a backup secure location for them to be hidden at.

Permalink Mark Unread

Nnnnnnnnot really but he can suggest some options that are at least thoroughly shielded against scrying and other search-spells, and that no one else will have Gate-locations to. 

Permalink Mark Unread

All right. She proposes that the two un-Gateable ones be moved within the tower while preparations to dismantle them are accelerated, it being too easy for something to go wrong on the open road or for their location to be tracked, and that all the rest be Gated to a sort of secure place where at least if they go off there are not very many people around.

 

 

She promised not to try to bring about the death of Conn Levas but she does rather hope that there are other people thinking about that; she'll say nothing of him aside from noting aloud, as she promised she would, that he has requested a duchy in exchange for not selling the superweapon locations to the highest bidder; are any available?

Permalink Mark Unread

He requested WHAT? He was otherwise planning to do WHAT???? Urtho thinks he should absolutely not get a duchy!!!! 

Permalink Mark Unread

(Someone else will quietly inform her that there are, in fact, several duchies currently unclaimed.) 

Permalink Mark Unread

Iomedae proposes that they think about which duchy if any would be suitable for a while, like at least long enough to move all the superweapons.

Permalink Mark Unread

They....will do that. And get to work on moving the superweapons. 

Permalink Mark Unread

Urtho is available if she has further questions or wants to talk strategy, but he's pretty clearly flagging at this point. 

Permalink Mark Unread

He can rest. Iomedae's got some peace talk proposals to draft, and also wants to talk to the monitor from Predain as soon as she's recovered, and still needs to stay in touch with everyone to make sure the ceasefire hasn't broken down anywhere else, and she wants to take a look at the superweapon guard precautions and make sure they seem adequate.

Permalink Mark Unread

The ceasefire is holding. Not comfortably, and she can quickly discern that the Predain commanders on the front are incredibly tense and stressed and one unexpected twitch away from panicking - and it's continuing to be unfortunately hard to prevent the gryphons from pushing the boundaries of the official restrictions. 

The monitor is stable, and she's now conscious and mostly lucid (though she's on a lot of painkillers). She would be happy to talk to Iomedae, but cannot currently use Mindspeech and probably won't be able to safely use her Gift for days; they can provide a different Mindspeaker to hold a conversation out loud and relay back and forth for Iomedae in Mindspeech, or she can use her translation magic thing? 

Permalink Mark Unread

She is very limited in her spell access, unfortunately. A different mindspeaker-interpreter is all right with her as a solution.

Permalink Mark Unread

Then they'll arrange that and Gate her in. They have the monitor in a private room, with the window very thoroughly curtained and no source of light. Backlash is very unpleasant. 

She's eager to see Iomedae, though, and can manage with some effort to express her very emphatic and heartfelt gratitude to Iomedae for managing to prevent the ceasefire from falling apart, and her willingness to help Iomedae in any way she possibly can.

This is relayed to Iomedae in Mindspeech.

Permalink Mark Unread

She was absolutely expecting to be yelled at for killing her people, but she doesn’t need it; she reviews her decisions whether anyone confronts her about that or not. She just wants to communicate that they’re going to send the monitor home to Predain soon to give Predain an account of Tantara’s actions, and to answer any questions the monitor wants answered for that.

Permalink Mark Unread

(She's pretty upset but it wouldn't in a million years occur to her that it's the sort of thing one could be angry about. Anger is for things that weren't reasonable, that violated what a sane person with a moral sense would think was appropriate, and Iomedae's reaction is just obviously what someone would do when faced with, not just an attack, but one that was breaking a formal ceasefire agreement.

...She's a little bit angry that Iomedae didn't heal them but that does not seem useful to bring up.) 

 

People are going to want to know that Ma'ar is all right, obviously, and Tantara's account of exactly what sequence of actions Iomedae took when Ma'ar Gated in. Also they're going to want clarification of the extent to which Iomedae's response should be considered as a Tantaran operation, or not – is Iomedae better thought of as part of their command structure or as a largely independent actor who chose freely whether and how to respond to their call for aid? Does Tantara intend to police Iomedae's behavior - she's hasty to clarify that she doesn't think Iomedae will do anything unconscionable, but if she did, would Tantara consider it under their remit to stop her or punish her for it, and do they...actually have any way of doing that...?

They're going to want to know her plans going forward for peace talks. And whether she has any intention, after the war, of trying to prosecute Ma'ar for war crimes or something. 

Permalink Mark Unread

Ma’ar is all right. He Gated out. She did, actually, stab him as he surrendered, but she healed him the instant she heard the surrender, and he should be in perfect health.

When he Gated in and she got an alert that he’d arrived, she sprouted wings and flew towards the bearing. When she was close she shouted at him to surrender. She then instructed him not to move or use magic and held him at swordpoint while communicating with the Tantaran leadership. Eventually he told her Sheiknam was on the move and she released him. She didn’t ask for any promises and he hasn’t made any but they discussed intent to set up peace talks.

She is an advisor to the Tantaran government and has represented to them that she’ll defend them if they are attacked during the ceasefire. She’s not in their command structure and is generally cautious about committing to take orders from anyone. She does not think anyone could stop her if she were out of line. At home there are people who wear paired magic items with her that would let them kill her at need, but she doesn’t trust anyone here that much yet. She will not retaliate for complaints and will generally pay costs associated with her actions but doesn’t expect them to trust that yet. 

She wants a durable peace. She doesn’t know Ma’ar to have been accused of any war crimes?

Permalink Mark Unread

The monitor was under the impression that Tantara is incredibly mad at Ma'ar for - well, kind of a lot of things, but especially the fear-artifact that took the palace, even though in her opinion it's pretty obvious that it meant much lower casualties in the operation. She's pretty sure that Tantara is going to want Ma'ar removed from power, which nobody in Predain is going to be very on board with, and...she isn't actually sure how countries that were at war and then stopped being at war via a negotiated peace treaty rather than via one of them eventually conquering the other tend to deal with disputes like that? 

Permalink Mark Unread

- it's fair enough to guess that in this case the answer is 'what Iomedae thinks should happen, happens', but she's not intending to be heavy-handed with the peace talks; the two nations are going to have to live next to each other and do diplomacy themselves in the future, after all. It seems like Ma'ar is very important to Predain and they're unlikely to be willing to concede to his stepping down from power, and while Iomedae has her reservations about the man she doesn't think he's a danger to the peace if it's achieved. And she'll tell Urtho that Tantara having started the war has less grounds for the complaint that Predain then waged it. Both sides can agree on not using fear artifacts in the future, if they decide they collectively would rather such weapons be barred.

She's not big on vengeance, really. It is an understandable human impulse but not one that's safe to indulge, if you're as powerful as she is, and so not one she experiences much anymore. 

Permalink Mark Unread

(The concept of two countries agreeing on banning weapons and then actually not using those weapons is very alien to the monitor. Does that ever work. It doesn't seem like the sort of thing that should work.) 

She should probably know what sort of timeline Iomedae is thinking on - at some point they'll presumably have to move from 'extending the ceasefire' to actually having various people meet for peace talks but she has no idea how long that sort of process usually takes? Is it more like days or more like months before Iomedae expects them to get to 'officially definitely not at war anymore'? 

It would also be nice to know how optimistic she is on, for example, Tantara being willing to send Predain food once they've retreated from the occupied areas, many of which have crops in them right now that Predain was relying on harvesting in order to avoid a lot of people starving this winter. 

Permalink Mark Unread

She is hoping to hurry, days not months. War is bad and ceasefires are fragile; the sooner it can end, the better. She hasn't yet spoken with Urtho about Tantara sending Predain food, but Ma'ar mentioned it as a concern and she'll try to get it done.

 

Nations do, sometimes, make agreements and then keep them. Not if it's overwhelmingly against their self-interest, usually, but self-interest is complicated and things can be lastingly better than they'd be if no one was playing by the rules. A paladin like Iomedae would be stripped of her powers by her god if she gave her word and broke it, which paladins all appreciate since it means they can more credibly promise things. 

Permalink Mark Unread

Ma'ar would keep his word, if he gave it. Countries...don't really seem like the kind of thing that can give their word or keep it? But it would be neat if it could work. 

She thinks that's all of her urgent questions. Presumably Iomedae has plans for staying in contact with Ma'ar, who is likely to have a much larger number of much more specific questions? 

Permalink Mark Unread

Yes, she's planning to send this letter with the monitor which includes a bunch of proposals for better lines of communication. 

 

She is grateful, for the monitor's service; she suspects that it saved many lives, and she hopes it will help speed the war to an end.

Permalink Mark Unread

That's good. 

(The monitor is kind of intensely running out of energy for speaking, at this point.) 

Permalink Mark Unread

Then she'll leave her be, with the letter, and go worry about superweapon security some more. (Why are wizards. Seriously. Iomedae is genuinely unsure if she'd be like that if she was a wizard and this is part of why she isn't.)

Permalink Mark Unread

Back in Predain, Ma'ar is alternating between obsessively checking in with the mages he's put on scrying and communication-spell duty to make sure they're in continuous contact with all the camps on or near the front and will find out instantaneously if something goes wrong with the ceasefire – and Gating between those camps, to talk to his commanders face to face. He leaned on them very hard, yesterday, wrangling everyone into agreeing to the ceasefire at all. Now he has to convince them it's still a good idea and things are actually going fine and well even though Iomedae just murdered a bunch of their people. 

 

Predain, as Iomedae has already noted, is not a high trust culture. It's not a culture where, even internally - even among respected leaders who work closely together - it's generally possible to come to a negotiated agreement on, for example, banning a certain kind of dangerous magic, because obviously you can just use the dangerous magic anyway and will if it's in your interest and the only way to realistically prevent that is by force. It's a culture where more often than not, disagreements are mediated by means of public duels. Someone deciding to, instead, deal with a disagreement by threatening their counterparty's family is being relatively subtle

The process of causing anything to happen in an orderly way does not look very much like normal diplomacy. 

Ma'ar doesn't exactly have a single strategy here. He knows all of the people who work under him, and they're not all going to be persuaded by the same arguments – and basically none of them will consider his character assessment of Iomedae to be a compelling argument. Iomedae will obviously do whatever Iomedae feels like doing, and historically when very powerful people had a chance to do that, it has not usually gone well for Predain. 

So he's, instead, leaning on the argument that Tantara knew they were losing and it was only a matter of time - not even very much time - and really, 'prewar borders' is hardly sacrificing anything that matters to Predain. It's not like they were the ones deciding to conquer Tantara for the extra land. It's not even clear it would be net good to hold onto the occupied regions; it's a completely different case from previous occupations, because the people of Tantara, one, don't speak Predaini or understand anything about how Predain works, and two, don't want to be ruled by their conquerors, which means they'll cause problems. Occupying a bunch of Tantara was an inconvenient cost toward their actual goal, of getting into a position of enough leverage that they could demand...exactly what Urtho is offering them right now for free. 

(They'll probably have to avoid any expansion on other borders even if that doesn't make it into the official treaty, but they don't exactly have the capacity for expansion right now anyway. Give it five years to rebuild, and that's plenty of time to negotiate on that point.) 

And he thinks he can get them better terms than that, even. It's in Tantara's interest to send food, because otherwise there will be desperate starving farmers turning to banditry, and Tantara is weirdly terrible at many aspects of war, which will probably also translate to struggling a lot with border security if pressed. Predain is used to this, their people are tough and prepared; Tantara has no idea what they're doing. 

Iomedae does know what she's doing, of course, but her loyalties are to her foreign distant god, not to Urtho. Ma'ar doesn't see much reason for her foreign distant god to want to help Predain, but also not much reason for them to want to harm Predain if Predain is minding its own business. Which is all they wanted in the first place. 

 

These are the explicit arguments. The implicit case – which might actually be the more important part – is that Ma'ar is calm and relaxed and has all the relevant information at his fingertips and is very clearly in control. He goes from camp to camp, sharing a drink with the commanders (and discreetly not drinking most of it) and demonstrating, in every way he can, that the (current) situation is still stable and they're not (currently) in danger. 

Permalink Mark Unread

Ma'ar's commander along the empty river bed deep inside Tantara is not among those most satisfied with the proposal that they give up all of the land they've conquered at such cost. It's theirs now; if the Tantarans don't like it, they can run south to within the new borders of Tantara. If Predain has better farmland, it'll be richer and stronger next time Tantara decides to pick a fight for some stupid reason.

He trusts Ma'ar, and he trusts that Ma'ar is in control, but he thinks Ma'ar was always too conciliatory with Tantara, and that if Tantara doesn't learn a lesson it'll do this again as soon as the god-woman wanders off to do something else.

Permalink Mark Unread

Ma'ar agrees that they need to ensure the eventual peace terms are such that Tantara will badly regret picking this fight, and refusing to give back the land would definitely accomplish that, but so would plenty of other things. They have other leverage – for example, the literally thousands of Tantarans they're holding prisoner, many of them mages. Tantara is already going to have some very bad problems just in terms of their treasury; Ma'ar certainly has no intention of paying back any of what they looted from the palace and capital city to pay their own war expenses, and if anything thinks he can make a case that Tantara owes Predain recompenses for their war expenses and infrastructure damage – they probably can't get it paid out immediately, but leaving Tantara in a position of having to pay it in the future also weakens their ability to quickly rebuild their military strength. 

There are a few things that will make Predain much better able to protect itself even if Tantara weren't badly weakened, which it will be (and of course Predain is also suffering, but their people were always better at enduring and rebuilding, and he is confident that they'll recover faster.)

The main point he wants to negotiate hard on is that Tantara does not, as part of the peace treaty negotiations, get to demand that they rewrite their laws on the use of compulsions. They probably will offer to stop using blood-magic at least temporarily – a good idea anyway, there were a lot of war casualties and they need to be rebuilding their population, not killing a bunch of it. But if Predain can imprison mages, and Tantara can't, then that's a much more significant advantage than having some poorly-integrated farmland currently inhabited by peasants who hate them, that would seriously strain their resources to integrate more fully. 

Permalink Mark Unread

- well, that doesn't sound too bad. The god-woman doesn't care about the compulsions? 

Permalink Mark Unread

The god-woman isn't fond of compulsions but is amenable to arguments that, given what the Ceej Empire gets up to, Predain's tightly enforced laws aren't exactly crossing a line, even if they would be in her homeland, which has different laws and practices around mind control. 

Also she is definitely amenable to the pragmatic arguments; she clearly hates the fact that she doesn't have a way to hold mages captive or prevent them from Final Striking her, and compulsions are a way to achieve that and in fact the only realistic way to achieve that. She didn't like it better that Tantara just...didn't take mages alive. 

Permalink Mark Unread

 

He doesn't see why the god-woman is even helping Tantara instead of Predain, the country that was invaded here, and he doesn't trust her to be reasonable about things instead of to push more whenever she sees weakness, such as them withdrawing from Tantara because she said so.

Permalink Mark Unread

Ma'ar doesn't actually think it makes sense to frame this as a situation where she's helping Tantara instead of Predain. Tantara was the side losing the war, and obviously benefits from instead coming to a negotiated ceasefire, but Predain was the side that didn't want to have the war; they weren't the ones who had to be pressured into agreeing to a ceasefire.

Tantara wanted a lot more than they're getting, as part of said ceasefire agreement; Predain will probably make more concessions later as part of the actual peace talks, but so far the only actual concession, aside from agreeing not to cross the lines on the map, is avoiding blood-magic – which they don't need to use anyway if they're not under attack, and if they are under attack then that would mean Tantara violated the ceasefire and all agreements made as part of it are off. Given that Tantara got their hands on her first, and started out telling their side of the story first, this should have given them pretty good chances of getting what they wanted, if she were in fact more sympathetic to them than to Predain. 

 

...Also, Ma'ar is not going to go around announcing this, because Tantarans are crazy about this sort of thing, but Iomedae - who is not crazy about this sort of thing - thinks he could probably kill her, if he wanted, and Ma'ar is pretty sure she's right. He does not currently want to, because Predain is getting a pretty good deal. But it is, in fact, something both of them are aware of, what his options are if it stops being the case that Predain is getting a good deal. 

Permalink Mark Unread

 

 

Well. That's all right, then.

 

(It's not hard to believe Ma'ar could kill even a god-woman. He's Ma'ar.)

Permalink Mark Unread

Ma'ar is glad they're on the same page! 

He of course wants to know immediately if Tantara does anything that looks even sort of like violating the ceasefire. He doesn't want them to actually engage unless Tantara is very clearly actually attacking and their people are actually going to die or get hurt if they don't defend themselves – but if, say, gryphons are doing fancy aerial maneuvers only five thousand paces from the line, he definitely intends to test Iomedae's willingness to be scrupulously consistent at enforcing the lines for both Predain and Tantara. He currently expects she will. If she didn't, that would...also be very good to know. 

 

And then he'll move on to the next camp. 

Permalink Mark Unread

Certain concerns come up over and over. His commanders are worried that any de-escalation will parse as weakness, that Tantara will be tempted to press; Ma'ar repeats over and over how Tantara, from their side, is probably not feeling at all in a position of strength. He brings up the fact that Predain still has a lot of options to ruin Tantara's day, which can be very quickly executed if Tantara breaks the ceasefire. 

They're worried that Iomedae is taking Tantara's side. He repeatedly clarifies that he doesn't think that's a very accurate way of looking at it, and includes - in the hushed-aside tones of sharing a secret - that he's pretty sure Iomedae thinks Urtho is an idiot with incredibly unrealistic expectations around war. Also the fact that he could kill her, if she screwed them over badly enough to warrant that. 

They're worried that Urtho doesn't have good control of his troops and in particular the gryphons, and cannot actually promise that they'll behave themselves. Ma'ar repeats over and over that this may well be true, but Iomedae is entirely capable of keeping gryphons in line, and his current impression is that she'll be just as furious with Tantara as with Predain for violations; if he ends up asking her to enforce the lines and she doesn't, that too will of course be very good to know and Predain will react accordingly. 

Their use of magic behind the lines isn't restricted. Ma'ar can buy significant goodwill by arranging for Gates with supply deliveries and extra Healers and such – it's a somewhat unsustainable pace, their stores of food are in fact very low and the number of mages who can Gate is limited, but he does want all the camps on the front at peak readiness in case anything goes wrong – and it's a pace he can sustain for a week, and meanwhile conveys that he's confident and not worried about Predain's resources. 

 

He returns to the capital with his reports, and has a differently frustrating meeting with the King. It's very late by the time he finally sits down to draft a letter for Iomedae. 

Permalink Mark Unread

In his letter to Iomedae: here are some of Predain's hard requirements, and a separate list of Predain's more negotiable preferences, on locations for initial peace talks. Here are people he would consider sending, under various different criteria, for example if Tantara wants to restrict initial meetings to only include un-Gifted people. Here are the security precautions he wants his people to be permitted to take; here are some proposals for how Tantara can verify that Predain's delegation is doing that and no more. 

He sends the letter off with a messenger, and drags himself to his private rooms, and tries to sleep. 

 

 

 

He's exhausted and his head hurts and he feels half out of his body, as though he's nothing but a set of clothes and a theatre mask over hollow air thrumming with a levinbolt waiting to be flung. He's been pouring all of his strength into appearing to be in perfect control of the situation, and he doesn't feel in control at all. 

There's something incredibly surreal about being stabbed, healed, questioned at swordpoint, and then wandering into a conversation with implications that feel like they should change everything. He hasn't really had a chance to think about what those implications are; it all happened in such a short number of minutes, and then he was thrown right back into the metaphorical battlefield of convincing his angry and terrified people that Tantara is probably going to stick to the ceasefire and Iomedae is probably going to punish Tantara's violations just as sternly as Predain's.

He's in fact a lot more sure than that, that Iomedae will try incredibly hard to get Predain a fair deal – that she wants their kingdom to flourish just as much as she wants Tantara to, and given their different starting points, this is going to end up benefiting Predain more. But that's not a motive that makes sense, to most of his people, and he's not even sure it makes sense to him. He feels incredibly confused, which is almost worse than being scared. 

He doesn't sleep well. 

Permalink Mark Unread

She doesn't sleep well but that's fine, she doesn't need much sleep. She is overseeing superweapon relocation and deconstruction and writing up her own list of suggestions for locations for the peace talks and for lines of communication,plus telling off gryphons about near-misses with respect to the treaty rules, which will put Tantara in a worse negotiating position for the peace talks by making them look untrustworthy and incompetent. She'll send the proposals and Tantara's summary of the previous ceasefire violation with the Predain monitor back to Predain in the morning. 

Permalink Mark Unread

(The gryphons mostly think that she's being very annoying, and that the aerial-activity restriction was a stupid rule to begin with.) 

 

By morning, Urtho is doing much better – he's still very weak, but no longer actively hallucinating, and he can hold a normal conversation. He's available to meet with Iomedae whenever is convenient for her. 

He mostly wants to know her current impression of Ma'ar. He was too out of it yesterday to even think to ask, but she ended up meeting him face to face, and must have gotten a much better sense of - where he's at, right now, and how he's thinking about the war. 

Permalink Mark Unread

She feels more optimistic than before she met him. She is very confused by the night's events but her best guess is that he Gated in to tell his people to surrender, and she's not sure that was a sane or reasonable thing to do from his perspective but it's a decent one, it's a strong sign he cares about his soldiers and is not the type to conveniently whatever his internal motivations only do things that serve his personal power. They didn't have a very in-depth conversation under the circumstances, but he claimed to approve of the idea that she cared about people everywhere, and she thinks she believes him, based on his letters.

 

Her current assessment of him is that he is from an intensely paranoid low-trust culture and what conceptions of honor or decency he possesses he had to build himself, which makes him unpredictable in contexts where she'd like to have someone predictable but is very different from having deliberately decided to discard Law because it restrained him from things he felt like doing. She thinks she trusts him to conduct a peace negotiation in something resembling good faith so long as events don't conspire to put a lot of pressure on him at home, which is actually a lot to ask of a person; peace negotiations are painful and frustrating and call on virtues that war has often actively trained out of people. She thinks he wants a peace. She expects that if Tantara is willing to feed Predain this winter then they can reasonably hope for pre-war borders and a moratorium on blood magic, though of course there will be lots of bumps along the way. 

Permalink Mark Unread

He shouldn't have had to build all of that himself, because whatever his childhood was like, he did spend years in Tantara, surrounded by people who do know about honor and decency. Urtho - remembers initially thinking that Ma'ar had understood that, because for all his paranoia and lack of trust in anyone else, he did seem...thirsty for it, eagerly drinking in all the ways that a place could be better than Predain. And then, later on, it maybe seemed like that had been just a pretense, and he understood but never actually cared or was driven by it. Iomedae...sounds like she thinks some third more complicated thing that Urtho doesn't really understand yet?

And it seems important to understand, because even though Ma'ar is not the ruler of his kingdom, he is in an important sense its real leader, and - to the extent he trusts anyone in Tantara, that person is Urtho, and so regardless of whether the talks are actually conducted by the two of them meeting face to face, it's ultimately still between the two of them. 

Permalink Mark Unread

- her guess is that Tantara's conceptions of honor and decency are conceptions for a high-trust society, rules that make sense to live by if the people around you do, and broadly don't function well as rules about how to behave when the people around you don't share them, and therefore were not a complete answer for Ma'ar to the question of how he should act in Predain. One shouldn't sink to the level of whoever is around them, of course, but honor and decency have two parts, how you understand yourself and how you are understood. If Iomedae abides by the rules she abided by at home, which were considered honorable and predictable at home, in a place where they made her terrifying and unpredictable to the locals, then that wouldn't be doing the right thing. 

Permalink Mark Unread

Urtho still feels pretty confused, but...maybe less than before? And Iomedae's last point is making him wonder if, given that he knows Predain is a place that works very differently from Tantara but doesn't himself feel like he understands how they're different, if there are any specific things Iomedae expects that Tantarans might do in good faith but would come across as terrifying and unpredictable to Predain? 

Permalink Mark Unread

That seems almost certainly true. She doesn't know exactly what all the things like that are, but some things she picked up through the interactions she's had with people from Predain include that assurances of good intentions are not at all reassuring to them, next to descriptions of concrete incentives to not hurt them; that they are very attuned to signs of being held in contempt or disrespected, and expect those; that most things people say to them seem to be probably some complicated game they don't know and don't trust. 

Permalink Mark Unread

That makes sense. He'll reconsider who to send for talks based on that, and plausibly Iomedae should also talk to them beforehand?

It's a bit hard, because obviously it doesn't help to treat the citizens of Predain with contempt, but it's...sort of hard to genuinely respect people who are very clearly lacking a lot of things that Tantara considers a key part of being competent adults, like "not responding to accidental insults with threats to kill your family." 

Permalink Mark Unread

Cultures like that are very bad for the people in them and often the people who have to interface with them! It's not exactly a matter of being an adult or not an adult, though; if the best way to deescalate and keep the peace is with being credibly ready to defend your interest with violence, then adults will do that; it'd be foolish not to and then have a lot of unnecessary violence happen because you failed to be credible. 

Permalink Mark Unread

It feels sort of like an inherent contradiction, for 'being ready to do violence' to be the best way to avoid violence? Urtho isn't going to argue about this, though. He is very grateful for Iomedae's advice and hopeful that with her help this will go well. 

Is there anything else they should talk about now? (It's been a longish conversation for him and he's starting to look droopy again.) 

Permalink Mark Unread

Well, there's not a lot of violence when Iomedae is around, because people know that if they start it she'll end it. It's kind of like that.

 

She doesn't think there's anything else important, and wishes him a swift recovery. 

Permalink Mark Unread

And Iomedae can keep working on the superweapon relocation project - which is going much faster than the deconstruction, Urtho is planning to meet with some of his top mages later today to see if they can get to a point of being comfortable doing it without him present, but they're not hopeful - and exchanging messages with Predain on locations for peace talks, which seems on-track to be finalized for tomorrow. 

The Predain monitor is safely home and has met with Ma'ar and added her part to Iomedae's summary of what happened with Predain's troops – who are still currently in Tantaran territory, the badly-injured ones in the infirmary at General Judeth's camp and the uninjured ones in a temporary camp surrounded by mage-barriers and stressed-out Tantaran mages. They're working on proposals to get the Predain troops to not be there anymore, at least everyone stable enough to transport (which is really all but half a dozen, most of the very badly injured casualties didn't make it.) 

She can talk to gryphons. Talking to gryphons continues to be a fascinating communication exercise; the gryphons are an insular culture, and a very new one, and feel very different from the rest of Tantara. They are, for example, pretty sure that looking competent is mostly about doing really impressive aerial stunts. 

 

 

 

- around midday there is an urgent Mindspeech message from one of Urtho's people. Can she come to the weapon-storage location right now they can arrange a Gate to wherever she is. 

Permalink Mark Unread

This is not even that unexpected but it is SUPER BAD. Yes absolutely.

Permalink Mark Unread

They'll get her a Gate. 

 

One of the weapons is missing. It's a pretty straightforward one – it mostly just causes a very large very violent explosion. 

One of the guards on duty was also missing. He was pretty highly trusted (thus, being here at all).

The only other thing that stands out about him is that he is one of the worshippers of Vkandis. 

Permalink Mark Unread

- possibly it is past time that Iomedae sat down with some priests of the local gods. She was told that their priests were not at all like priests at home, but. Nonetheless. It seems maybe very important that she understand Vkandis's interests in this war. Can anyone arrange that.

 

Aaaand she's going to put up some Protection from Energy (fire). Just, you know, better safe than sorry. She really dislikes having no healing and only those spells she can call back with a Pearl of Power.

Permalink Mark Unread

They can arrange for her to talk to a priest of Vkandis, sure, though the temple priests who will be available aren't exactly involved in directly commanding the mage-units fighting in the Third Army, and also gods...do not normally take direct interest in wars, or at least don't clearly communicate Their direct interests in wars such that, for example, Their followers steal superweapons?? This is actually really weird and no one was expecting it. 

They can also arrange for her to talk to a high-ranked shaman of the Kaled'a'in people, who worship the Star-Eyed Goddess and also live in close proximity to Urtho's Tower. 

There are also other temple orders worshipping other gods, that are less present in Tantara – Bestet the Battle-Goddess (their temple order is mostly restricted to women and trains them in military disciplines, but they weren't very involved in this particular war), and the Twain (a paired god and goddess, or possibly two such pairs, or possibly just one pair with alternate aspects), and the Nameless God of Eternal Flame whose temples are very definitely not involved in this war, they're extremely pacifist. 

Permalink Mark Unread

Good for them. Iomedae is not remotely a pacifist but she thinks it's good for some people to be so.

 

Before she goes to those meetings, she wants to write Urtho a lot of notes on the peace talks, such that there's a chance they don't collapse if the Church of Vkandis stole a superweapon specifically to use on her, which doesn't seem that improbable, and she wants to talk to Urtho and ask him if he happens to possess defenses against his superweapons. Or anything that'd improve her reflexes, that amounts to the same thing.

Permalink Mark Unread

Urtho is DEEPLY ALARMED about this series of events and willing to talk to her immediately! 

He doesn't have anything that can improve her reflexes - he actually had no idea that was possible with magic, he might vaguely recall reading about Mindhealers who could do it but it'd be the work of years for them - and also would not, uh, really expect that to help if the worshippers of Vkandis really have stolen that particular weapon. It's a very very large fireball.

He can definitely load her down with every single variant of shield-talisman he's ever designed; they don't fully stack, but they provide different angles of protection. 

 

...Also, she's worked with gods in her world before, right? Does she have any idea what the goal might be, here, if it's actually related to Vkandis and not just something one of His priests did on their own initiative? Urtho has never heard of gods intervening like this and it's very concerning. 

Permalink Mark Unread

- so, Vkandis wanting to kill her doesn't seem absurd, right, if He's opposed to her goals. Gods do try to arrange the death of their enemies for pretty much the same reasons anyone else does that. She doesn't know much about Vkandis's goals and his followers may not either, it's not as if he couldn't lie. The Church of Asmodeus lies about everything and one of Iomedae's major side projects is countering that on Golarion with a lot of proof that actually their god sucks and their afterlife sucks. 

It also seems possible that Vkandis just thinks Tantara shouldn't have custody of the superweapon and He should? There are countries where Aroden would order one of his people - not Iomedae because she's a paladin - to steal a superweapon, if there were one lying around.

It also seems possible that Vkandis can see something about the weapon which Urtho doesn't know. It might be much more dangerous than expected or something. 

And then there's the possibility that Predain arranged this - the assassin claimed not to have been serving them, but he could have been lying -- and this is Ma'ar's work, eliminating Iomedae as he will have noticed he needed to.

 

Anyway, Protection from Energy is a lot of fire resistance, and she can put Resist Energy on top of that for some more, and Urtho's talismans will probably mitigate it further, and she'll grow the angel wings again for the associated magical protection. It will very likely be fine. 

- and if it isn't, here are some notes for Urtho on the peace talks, and her sincere desire that he reach a peace no matter how stubborn and intransigent the other side is being. 

Also, now that the superweapons are no longer secret from at least some of their enemies, it's probably worth explicitly telling Ma'ar that the superweapons exist; she thinks it'll make him more cautious and inclined to keep the ceasefire rather than less so, plus if they get suddenly used in Predain she'd rather have warned him.

Permalink Mark Unread

And is her thinking that if this was Ma'ar's explicit plan (not that this seems likely, even to the extent that Ma'ar made friends at the Tower it generally wasn't with anyone seriously religious) then telling him won't matter because he would already know? All of the rest seems fine, and Urtho is aware that he isn't very good at the paranoid kind of strategic thinking and probably Iomedae is ten steps ahead of him but he did want to check. If Iomedae still thinks it's overall the best plan to tell Ma'ar, then Urtho can definitely send that message. 

Permalink Mark Unread

Yes, that's right. If this is Ma'ar trying to kill her, then he already knows of the superweapons and nothing much is lost by telling him; if this isn't, then her best assessment of him remains that he's well-intentioned and will be more cautious if he realizes that it's not, in fact, true that he was on the brink of winning the war so much as on the brink of motivating Urtho to desperate actions.

Permalink Mark Unread

....That makes a lot of sense. 

 

(Urtho had...perhaps not thought through explicitly, in much depth, what exactly he might do if pushed to the brink of desperation. The thoughts he's now inevitably drifting toward are - not pleasant realizations.) 

 

He wishes her the best of luck in figuring out what actually happened and how to mitigate the danger. He is, as always, incredibly grateful for her help, and wishes he could help more but he's still not well enough to leave his bed.

(He does not quite reach the point of expressing, in actual words, an apology about having been the one to build all those superweapons in the first place.) 

Permalink Mark Unread

The Kaled'a'in shamans are easiest to contact from Urtho's Tower. Several of them are available to meet Iomedae on short notice. 

Permalink Mark Unread

The Protection from Energy is once per day, so she'll go into this one without it. These aren't the people expected to have the superweapons anyway.

 

She is honored to meet them, apologizes for not having arranged it sooner. She arrived only a few days ago and wanted to help Urtho end the war before it worsened. She'd be very honored if they could tell her about their god and any interests of their god in Tantara that she would, if she can, ensure are protected in the peace.

Permalink Mark Unread

Silverhorse is the clan leader of the Kaled'a'in clan Taylesederin (which translates, roughly, as "the people of the hawk.") Ravenwing is his junior shaman and apprentice.

Lionwind of clan k'Leshya is willing to join them – he's of a different clan, but he happens to be available, and is a Mindspeaker, weak but strong enough to translate. 

They too are deeply honored to meet her, and would have many questions about her god if it were a better time for it, and they're eager to help in any way they can but it isn't usually the way they would think of it, that their Goddess has interests in Tantara, as opposed to in Her people. Can Iomedae perhaps be more specific? 

Permalink Mark Unread

Well, Iomedae is going to try to negotiate a peace. She thinks this peace is in the interests of Tantara's people. But in her world, a god might be concerned specifically for their own religious orders, for a sacred site, for secret matters they don't want to tell her about, and so might prefer the war's continuation under certain circumstances, or might be unhappy that she was steering the peace. It - strikes her that recent events have been oddly timed and not served the interests of any of the involved humans, and sometimes that means the hand of something larger. So the question that concerns her immediately - with it understood that she also desires to grow to know them, and the teachings of their goddess, and plans to set aside much more time for it when the immediate emergency has passed - is whether she has given some offense, and whether some of her plans make their Goddess nervous, so she can fix that, and whether there are important interests of the Goddess which her work touches, so that she can do it better.

 

 

(Iomedae really dislikes most gods. Concealing this when engaged in religious negotiations is one of the main uses she has for dissembling. She doesn't know that this Goddess isn't perfectly lovely and doing Her best within Her constraints, aside from that they never are.)

Permalink Mark Unread

Silverhorse will take the lead in speaking, though Lionwind has to translate for him. 

 

Their Goddess does not communicate often with Her people, or clearly. They're definitely not used to gods, uh, expressing opinions on international politics? If that happens regularly in Iomedae's world, that's - well, different. 

There are some things they can, nonetheless, infer: the Star-Eyed Goddess is concerned about Her people, and among them the Kaled'a'in clans, and since the Kaled'a'in are based in Tantara, the war and its effects on Tantara are probably relevant to Her. Given that, it would be kind of surprising for Iomedae to have given offense, since she is pretty clearly taking Tantara's side in this war. 

...If Iomedae isn't so much taking Tantara's side (which there have definitely been whispers of, not that Silverhorse quite says this out loud) – if Iomedae is pushing for a peace agreement that leaves Tantara making significant sacrifices that would end up affecting the Kaled'a'in people, then that...might be the kind of thing that She would be opposed to, yes. 

- or, you know, She might have any number of other concerns that aren't even visible to mortals. Gods are powerful and mysterious and they aren't really used to understanding the why behind the (rare) visions and other sources of direction granted to them. 

Permalink Mark Unread

Gods are indeed powerful and mysterious. It sometimes serves Aroden to communicate His reasons, if the situation is unclear to Him, so that She can follow his aims not just His instructions, but it is rare even on Golarion to speak that much to a god, and there is a special technique to make it less costly to the both of them.

 

Iomedae's intent is to make sure Tantara gets all its territory back in the peace treaty, and while this is a major concession compared to the current lines and will therefore require some other concessions, she does not expect the eventual peace to involve Tantara making significant sacrifices that would end up affecting the Kaled'a'in people, certainly not as much as the war must have affected them. 

Permalink Mark Unread

Then probably that's all right? 

Their Goddess might also be nervous about, well, future changes? Iomedae is clearly very powerful and clearly intends to change a lot of things - like the fact that Tantara and Predain are at war, which obviously needs to be changed - but it...might not be clear to the Star-Eyed Goddess whether Iomedae, after that point, intends to stop changing things. Which she can do faster than most people because she is so powerful, and powerful in a different way than anyone else in this world.

And that's...well, sometimes even changes that are for the better, in some sense, if you're looking at it from a bird's-eye view, are - still very disruptive and hard, for the actual people living in towns and villages and clans, in a place like Tantara? And their Goddess cares about those people and their communities, and might be concerned about possible effects on their future. 

Permalink Mark Unread

- yeah, of course. That makes perfect sense. For what it's worth, and she understands why they wouldn't trust her word, she has no intention of running around Tantara making changes, once the war is over and the peace secure. She has no right. She's better at war than anyone else, but that doesn't make her better at other things, and if she was listened to about those other things it'd be only because she's very dangerous. That's not how a place like Tantara should work; she wouldn't really have bought peace, if she'd brought that. She will share the history of her world and its priorities, so that people can take up its suggestions where they seem good. But - Tantara seems good to her, and she has no desire to bring confusion and fear and disruption to places that don't want it. She will probably leave, once there's a durable peace - she is needed in her home world -- but if she is unable to leave, she will still endeavor to tread very lightly, to share what good her world has to share so that people can take it or leave it.

And if there are people who want to follow Aroden, here, or form their own order of the Knights of Ozem, she'll try very hard to make them what the Knights were at home; people whose word can be trusted, whose friends check them in their errors, whose neighbors feel safer when they're home, who anyone can turn to for protection.

The gods empower paladins because there are evils that need fighting, but they strip the power away should a paladin ever break their word, or do evil. It is indeed not a thing to take lightly.

Permalink Mark Unread

...If she's not in too much of a desperate hurry, they do, actually, want to know some things about Aroden. The things she said about His Knights sound - good, albeit very different from the Kaled'a'in - but it sounds like the gods of her world operate rather differently in general.

If she thinks that someday people in Tantara might want to follow Aroden then that seems like a rather important confusion to resolve – and something where they can relay the answer to their Goddess, maybe, if that ends up seeming important. It's costly to contact Her directly and they do it rarely but it's definitely the sort of thing they're considering. 

(And, implicitly, the traits of Iomedae's god seem like an important piece feeding into how far they should trust Iomedae herself.) 

Permalink Mark Unread

"Aroden was human once. He was a great archmage, kind of like Urtho in some ways, but his home civilization was destroyed in a foolish and unnecessary war, and he had to rebuild from nothing in the ashes. He had learned the secret to never aging, and lived thousands of years, becoming wiser and more powerful, seeing how not just people but civilizations could grow in wisdom and power, destroying the occasional demon lord who reached out from the Abyss to try to damage the human civilizations he was building. Eventually, he learned of the Starstone, a powerful magic that had been formed in the destruction of his home civilization, which would make anyone who touched it into a god. He raised an island from the sea that became a thriving city, and built protections around the Starstone so that only the right people could make their way to it (though it's mysterious what makes someone the right person), and then he became a god. He is understood on Golarion as the god of humanity, civilization, our growing in strength until we are something that can set right the horrors of our world. 

Golarion's gods seem to operate more directly, but I don't know if it's a difference in gods or in worlds. Aroden hasn't gifted her spells or powers since she arrived here, so it seems entirely possible that the god-negotiated-agreements of this world bar Him from doing that, and that here He is like the local gods, and will act in the same ways. It also seems possible that He isn't here at all and it's too far away from Him. Tantara is a place he would rejoice in, I am sure of that, whether or not He can see it."

Permalink Mark Unread

....They were not previously aware that mortals could become gods! That's - fascinating, and kind of disturbing actually, and they're wondering if there's a way to check if it's possible here. It...sounds like kind of a bad idea, honestly, if it's not yet possible here then they suspect their Goddess would really not want Iomedae to find a way to make a Starstone. 

Other than that, Aroden sounds fairly reasonable, probably. It seems unlikely that their Goddess would object to Iomedae just on the grounds that she served Him. 

 

- should they ask their Goddess to try to reach Him? It might not work, obviously, or the Star-Eyed might see something they can't that makes it a bad idea to attempt, and it would probably take a long time even if She did try, but it's not obviously impossible. 

Permalink Mark Unread

Iomedae would be very grateful, if that were possible. She misses Him, of course, and it'd solve a lot of other problems if she knew some things that she'd know for sure if He was here.

Permalink Mark Unread

Silverhorse will try to petition Her, then, and convey what Iomedae said about Aroden and the request to try to contact Him.

 

Does she have any other questions, or is there anything else they should talk about right now? 

Permalink Mark Unread

The superweapons. She's worried about that and would like the Star-Eyed's counsel, if it's available.

Permalink Mark Unread

They don't personally know anything about the superweapons and will need to include that in their petition to the Star-Eyed Goddess, though it certainly does sound important to know. 

 

 

- actually. Silverhorse is not sure if this is related, and even if so, whether it has anything to do with their Goddess' work in Velgarth, but...Urtho did mention. At some point. That he had a 'backup plan', if Ma'ar ever seemed close to capturing the Tower. That...might...be related, though if so it's hopefully obviated now. 

Permalink Mark Unread

She thinks that's related, yes. Urtho had powerful weapons. One of them has been stolen. The others will be dismantled, probably, now that Ma'ar can be stopped without them. 

 

She does not say that she was told they could destroy the Kingdom. Some things are better not to spread.

Permalink Mark Unread

They will alert her as soon as they've learned anything more; Silverhorse needs to travel to the Moonpaths, in the spirit world, and call for the Star-Eyed's attention, and this might take a long time, if She's busy. They wish her the best of luck. Hopefully the Star-Eyed will be able to contact Aroden once She knows to try; being in another world and out of your god's reach sounds terrible, and even moreso if They are a sort of god who can actually communicate with you and give you access to magic. 

 

 

Urtho's people have now managed to locate a priest of Vkandis willing to speak to Iomedae! He's a very old man who administers the temple in Ka'venusho – the name for the densely-inhabited region sprawled around Urtho's Tower, which isn't exactly a city but isn't exactly not a city either. He isn't a mage and is not involved in the military chain of command and he's not sure if he's ever met the particular guard who went missing along with a weapon, but he can tell her about Vkandis in general. 

Permalink Mark Unread

That sounds great and she's absolutely going in with the Protection from Energy up, and using the Pearl of Power to briefly speak the language again.

Permalink Mark Unread

She is ushered to the temple - the mage-escort Urtho sent to stay with her will do a short range Gate rather than walk, it seems like they might be under some time pressure here.

It feels much more formal. (The shamans just met her in a random room in Urtho's Tower that happened to be available.) The temple itself, though not a large building, is covered both inside and out in kind of a lot of gold, along with elaborate artistic woodcarvings and paintings. The elderly priest, who walks with a cane, meets her at the door wearing an equally elaborate set of gold-embroidered robes and an impressively overwrought hat. 

He welcomes her warmly and suggests that they go sit down and have some tea. And he can tell her about the history of the temple order and Vkandis' historical miraculous interventions - most of which were not in his lifetime - or she can start with any pressing questions she has? He has been told that a mage-soldier who was also a follower of Vkandis is suspected of stealing a powerful magical artifact of Urtho's but doesn't have further context on what Iomedae is worried about. 

Permalink Mark Unread

Mostly she wants to learn about Vkandis and His faith here so she doesn't inadvertently inconvenience Him in the course of her work on the peace deal, though also she is indeed wondering if there's an explanation for the superweapon theft.

Permalink Mark Unread

The temple order was founded a long time ago, and has a lot more formal continuity and political remit over all of its followers than, say, the loose agglomerations of clans who follow the Star-Eyed Goddess and each have their own shaman. The priests have a ranking by seniority, though they don't currently have a high priest, he was one of the people who vanished when the capital emptied overnight and they haven't had a chance to convene all of the regional priests and appoint a new leader. 

The people of Vkandis are required to follow certain religious laws, which in some special cases may supercede the secular laws in an area; this is especially true for mages, and is why they negotiated a different arrangement in Urtho's military than the other mages; they're all assigned to the Third Army under General Movat, and are in separate small units led by priests. 

...If the superweapon theft was indeed somehow prompted by a vision from Vkandis – which the old priest does not categorically deny is possible – the fact that he has no inkling of it would be a major historical departure. Priests have received visions, before, that gave them advanced warning of certain dangerous political events, or even prompted them to take sides in military conflicts. But this is something where the temple order would usually operate as a unified body, meaning that there would have been meetings about it. 

- of course, this is also a historically unusual situation. They don't have a high priest to make final decisions, and conditions have been...chaotic, at the front. It might be more analogous to some historical cases where Vkandis intervened on an active battlefield; the most stark of those involved setting most of the enemy side on fire. 

Permalink Mark Unread

That makes sense, and would work similarly at home; it is better when a church can be unified in acting. Is there anything that can reasonably be done to learn if this was an intervention of Vkandis?

Permalink Mark Unread

It sounds like possibly he should personally travel out to the front to meet with the priests leading the mage-units of the Third Army? Since they cannot realistically come to him. 

If it was an intervention of Vkandis then he is certain there was a very good reason for it. 

Permalink Mark Unread

Of course. Given the urgency, perhaps they could go now?

Permalink Mark Unread

It sounds like maybe they had better. Though he's going to need a few minutes to pack some of his things, in case they end up being there a while, and delegating the various daily temple duties to his apprentices. If Iomedae can arrange someone to Gate them, and an escort because the front is potentially dangerous, he can meet her and leave in half a candlemark? 

Permalink Mark Unread

That works, though her translation spell will have run out. She'll get a Mindspeaker as well as an escort.

Permalink Mark Unread

Urtho dictates a letter to Ma'ar. 

It's terse and to the point; he doesn't have a lot of energy to spare. In the past, he had various research projects that he ran in secret, since they were potentially very dangerous and ought not be broadly known. Some of them succeeded. The list of successes includes these sixteen weapons.

One of them is missing and likely in the custody of either the Vkandis-aligned military units of the Third Army, or maybe just a rogue mage, they're not sure. Iomedae is investigating. 

The thing it does is to temporarily create an temporary channel between the high-energy Elemental Plane of Fire and the lower-energy Elemental Plane of Water; the energy gradient results in a powerful flow of mage-energies that could in theory be tapped, except that the channel is unstable and lasts only a fraction of a second, and there's a significant bleedthrough into the Material Plane. Thus: very very large fireball, he estimates about fifty times the energy output of an Adept's Final Strike. (This is a sufficiently big fireball that he decided it didn't even have a real military purpose; he later made smaller prototypes, using a narrower channel or a different planar differential to try to get something stable, though the best he managed is that they produce smaller explosions.)

The weapon looks like this but will unfortunately not be detectable to mage-sight, because like many of his projects, its stored mage-energies are fully contained with no leakage and so it doesn't show any magical signature to be detected. It's small enough to be concealed, though it's also heavy enough that it would need a wagon to move it unobtrusively. 

He urges Ma'ar to be careful and alert for anything suspicious, and promises that - assuming Ma'ar wasn't involved in, say, bribing one of Vkandis' worshippers to betray Tantara and bring the weapon to him, which Iomedae is going to be investigating among their other theories - Predain will not be held at fault if the weapon is detonated and affects Tantara's side of the lines. He wishes he could give better advice. 

Permalink Mark Unread

Permalink Mark Unread

This is, of course, absolutely terrifying news. 

 

 

In the near term, it's terrifyingly because there are, in Ma'ar's opinion, two obvious goals for an intervention: to kill him, or to kill Iomedae. Neither of those has very good implications for Predain. The second one, of course, also has rather bad implications for Tantara. Unfortunately he's not sure if that makes it any less plausible. It's not at all clear if the gods care

He's so tired and this is too many things and he wants it to stop

 

And there's the dull, sinking realization that, from the beginning, he was making a mistake. It's not exactly that, in the months and years before the war when Urtho was sending increasingly emphatic letters, he ever explicitly had the thought that if Tantara started a war then Predain could finish it. But it...would have altered his priorities substantially. He would have been much more proactively worried about avoiding war, and - well, he would have updated that Tantara was much more likely to see war as a viable path to make Predain stop doing things they didn't like. 

He didn't see it coming. Why not? 

He failed to see a lot of things coming, and in hindsight, his diagnosis is that he was mostly just moving too fast. It felt like an emergency, and of course he took the time to make contingency-plans for all the risks he was tracking, but he just...wasn't, really, tracking what the combined picture of Predain's activities would look like to Tantara, even when it was far away from them and affecting other people. He hadn't seen them care much about problems outside their country before. And so when they did express displeasure, he - wasn't really sure what to do about it. It was a confusing observation that didn't fit his model of the world, rather than predictable observation that indicated the start of a very bad trend. If he had read different history books – if he had made time to travel more, to learn the history of other countries with unhappier and more tumultuous pasts than Tantara – he might have been able to extrapolate that trend out to its conclusion, and react accordingly. But he was young and stupid and moving too fast and he didn't stop to ask the right questions. 

...He thinks this was a different problem, though. It's not that he didn't think to ask the question "if Urtho has superweapons, what does that imply for Tantara's relations with Predain." It's that, even if he had, he would have confidently predicted that Urtho, one of the most pacifist people he's ever encountered, wouldn't have superweapons in his basement. 

In some ways it's an even more frightening realization, that he would have misjudged the man's character so deeply. What else is he missing?

Permalink Mark Unread

It means, obviously, that maintaining the ceasefire now has even higher stakes, which is the last thing he needed. 

 

...it means that even if the Vkandis-worshippers do choose to violate the ceasefire and use their weapon on Predain, the actual contingency-plan he made for a very badly damaging attack – an immediate all-out offensive on the Tower – is the last thing Predain can afford to do. Probably what they ought to do is unconditionally surrender. 

He might be able to make that happen, if he's alive. ...Realistically the way he would make it happen would be via so much mind control, which is also not a great option because Iomedae would be very unhappy, but it's not she should prefer if the King overrides Ma'ar, possibly by having him arrested for treason, and tries to advance on the Tower anyway. It's just that both of them are bad options. 

If he's dead, then his people will move on the Tower, which still contains Urtho, and another fifteen weapons, and - he doesn't know where that path ends. But he's pretty sure it's an ending that burns down most of both his and Urtho's life's work, and leaves two countries in ruins. If not worse than that. 

If Iomedae is still alive, maybe she could respond by – well, at that point the only realistic way for even her to stop it would be to assassinate his commanders, or outright slaughter all of his forces. 

If Iomedae dies, then....he doesn't, at that point, especially see any way to steer aside. 

Permalink Mark Unread

They're not there yet. Iomedae is investigating. They might still be able to get the situation back under control.

But he has the unsteady, falling-into-quicksand sense that most of the moving pieces are no longer under his control, and they're pieces he didn't see coming and so he doesn't even have contingency plans, and he hates it so much, he wants to - go back, do it over, be in a different version of the world that makes more sense than this one. What a stupid unhelpful feeling to be having. 

 

What can he actually do

Tell his people to be on alert, for all the good that does. (It might make things worse, if it results in a lower threshold for assuming enemy action, the ceasefire spiraling out of control, a pointless war and Urtho, cornered, with fifteen weapons to resort to in sufficient desperation - and he would be that desperate...) 

He wants to be notified instantly if any unauthorized Gate is detected behind Predain's side of the lines, and he wants a strike team ready to instantly scry the site and Gate in. Actually, he also wants a pause on most non-urgent authorized Gates. They can live without supply deliveries and personnel movement until the crisis is over, and he doesn't want any confusion. 

If they detect a Gate on the Tantaran side of the lines, but within (brief mental calculations) twenty miles of Predain's territory - which means more or less "within the range of Adept-sensitivity mage-sight at all" - he doesn't want any kind of offensive response but he does want the site scried, and the monitors ready to urgently relay warnings to the Tantaran monitors if it looks like the mage Gating in is a priest of Vkandis, or has an object meeting the weapon's description, or if anyone has a wagon with them even if it's an otherwise nondescript and unsuspicious wagon. 

Permalink Mark Unread

It's all he can do. It's probably not going to be enough. Ma'ar isn't sure he trusts the deep awful sinking feeling that he's still missing something, still stumbling in the dark (and isn't that a new emotional experience, he doesn't like it at all) – that things are spiraling further and further out of control, that if the situation is still salvageable at all it certainly won't be by his doing... 

He doesn't have time to sit down with pen and paper and think through all of the things he's missed so far, and he definitely doesn't have time to have emotions about it. Later. Survival first. His thoughts feel like they're trapped in a tunnel, like he's lost in the fog with no direction-finding spell and can only see what's metaphorically within a foot of his face and if he was about to walk off a cliff he wouldn't even know. ...That's an emotion and he still doesn't have time for it. 

Focus. Relay orders. Survive, first, and eventually the crisis will be over, one way or another, and if one way or another he's still around, he can pick up the pieces then. 

Permalink Mark Unread

Urtho's people can provide an escort of a dozen Adepts for Iomedae, unless she wants fewer than that. And a Mindspeaker, of course. Maybe two Mindspeakers, just in case. 

 

The elderly priest hurries. He's leaving the temple and his junior apprentices in some chaos, but he's ready to go within twenty minutes. 

Permalink Mark Unread

Iomedae wants the escort to understand that she thinks this might be a plan to assassinate her, but if they want to come given that, she's happy to have them. She appreciates the priest's haste. 

Permalink Mark Unread

Urtho's mages are aware of the risk. It seems important. And Iomedae is clearly very good at what she does, but she doesn't have scrying, or the communication-spell, or the ability to Gate. 

The priest looks....kind of overwhelmed and terrified, actually, as they line up for the Gate to General Movat's camp. (They're actually doing an unscaffolded Gate from well away from the Tower, and intending to arrive in the woods just outside said camp; if there's an assassination planned, this makes it slightly less likely that the assassins will immediately realize Iomedae is there – and if they do, it'll be much less likely that the bleedthrough of an explosion will compromise either the Tower or the arguably-even-more-precious linked-up permanent Gate network.) 

Permalink Mark Unread

Mitigating collateral damage from superweapon use is one of her leading priorities right now. The other is being very alert to occasions to fling herself out of the way of a very big Fireball. Her assessment is that this is more likely than not not an assassination attempt, and if it is one likely to fail, but that's still more probability of success than she likes would-be assassins to have. At home it's a risk she'd take unhesitatingly (and she'd decline most of the escort) but at home dying is substantially less costly.

 

There's still nearly two hours left on the Protection from Energy; she intends to leave before it runs out.

Permalink Mark Unread

One of the mages raises the Gate. 

The random patch of woods is quiet and peaceful. Iomedae's escort is already scrying ahead - five of them at once, checking different areas - and they haven't yet spotted anything concerningly out of the ordinary but they're very tense. 

The priest takes a deep breath, squares his shoulders, and starts walking toward the camp. He's not used to moving in forests and is clearly having a bit of a hard time with it. 

Permalink Mark Unread

One of Iomedae's magic items gives her Freedom of Movement at all times. Under the circumstances she's not sharing, but she'll walk slowly with him and slash branches in his way, and ask as they go what religious requirements there are for mages who are followers of Vkandis.

Permalink Mark Unread

There are requirements for daily dawn and noon prayers, which can be waived in exceptional circumstances but just 'being out on campaign' doesn't count as exceptional. There are weekly religious services on their holy day, which should be administered by a priest and require certain supplies (incense, a shrine) even in the field, again unless circumstances are exceptional. Followers of Vkandis should not be asked to conduct offensive operations on holy days and are restricted on some uses of magic, though it's allowable to defend themselves if necessary. There are religious laws on appropriate use of magic; this generally overlaps with Tantara's laws and the usual practices for military mages, but the temple order made a judgement call that it was best for mage-units to be commanded, or at least accompanied, by priests above a certain rank in the temple. (There was perhaps a rapid effort to train and promote more priests to the relevant rank.) 

...The priest does catch his cane on a jutting root at some point, and will probably fall unless Iomedae can quickly steady him, but other than that, they're able to make steady progress toward the camp. They don't yet have a clear view, but it doesn't sound like a commotion is happening. 

Permalink Mark Unread

She can absolutely catch him, probably before he’s even really stumbled. 

Permalink Mark Unread

Then they'll reach the camp without incident, though the priest is very out of breath by the time they finally clear the trees. 

 

There is in fact no sign of an active crisis, but the camp is very much on high alert; there are sentries stationed practically every few yards, and even though the Gate was immediately detected and one of the mage-escorts also immediately reached out with the communication-spell to confirm their arrival, several of the sentries nearby are very startled and somewhat alarmed to see a group of people coming out of the forest. 

The priest is still trying to catch his breath, but he holds up both hands. "I am here - with Iomedae - to speak with the mage-units - about an urgent problem." 

Permalink Mark Unread

Iomedae will not particularly attempt to look not dangerous - that’s just dishonest - but she will do what she can to look non-threatening. 

She is not out of breath.

Permalink Mark Unread

The tents belonging to the units of Vkandis followers are very easy to spot; their tents are a different color, a deep red (rather faded now), and bear Vkandis' standard, a stylized sunburst. Most of the mages have cloaks bearing the same sunburst, and it's easy to recognize the priests assigned to each unit, since they also have hats (less elaborate and more practical than the senior temple priest's).

Not everyone is at the camp – they're contributing quite a lot of sentries, who are spread out around the periphery of the camp – but everyone who is by the tents is reacting quite strongly to the approach of the priest with Iomedae, whose regalia must mark him as especially high-ranking. By the time they reach the tents, at least thirty people are lined up at attention. 

The senior priest with Iomedae is mostly managing to look calm and in control, his impression only slightly ruined by the fact that he's still puffing and out of breath and his robes are disheveled from the forest trek. (He is still, in fact, pretty terrified.) Urtho's mages fan out around the two of them, though Iomedae in particular probably needs protection less than anyone in this camp. They are not managing to look calm. 

 

The priest takes a few breaths. Holds out his hands, relaxed and open at his sides. "Who is in command here?" 

     One of the priests with the hats steps forward. Bows. "Captain Ashuat. We are honored by your visit, Your Holiness. What matter brings you here?" 

"- A very serious and concerning matter. Some men of your Thirteenth Platoon were on detached duty in Urtho's Tower, correct?" 

     "Yes. What about them?" 

"I need to know who was in command there, and if their contingent had any - special orders. Particularly orders directly concerning the interests of our Sunlord. When did you last receive a status report from them, and what were its contents?"

     The other priest frowns. Doesn't say anything. 

The older priest looks over at Iomedae. 

Permalink Mark Unread

Iomedae is sizing him up in turn. Is it his job to kill her and if so what was he told about why.

Permalink Mark Unread

After a few more beats, the priest steps forward. He meets Iomedae's eyes; he's still frowning slightly, but does not otherwise appear tense or especially worried. 

"I have no desire on my own behalf to quarrel with you, Iomedae, servant of Aroden. But I speak for Vkandis Sunlord, and for the future of Velgarth, when I say that there are many things you do not understand, and that your intervention in this world is unwelcome. We would like you to leave, and swear an oath that you will never return, and that your god will not send others in your place. If you depart before dawn tomorrow, we need not fight at all." 

 

 

 

The elderly priest is staring at him, his expression more one of blank shock than horror or fear. 

Permalink Mark Unread

 



“I will make such an oath if Vkandis will give His - to Aroden, or to the other gods of Velgarth as they can confirm to their own followers - that this is in the interests of the people of Velgarth, and not because He is willing to do them grave harm if I remain here.”

Permalink Mark Unread

The younger priest clasps his hands behind his back. He still doesn't look worried, just mildly irritated. 

"It is our Sunlord's right and remit to react as He sees fit, and certainly I have no power to stop Him. I would recommend you trust that Vkandis knows what is in the interests of His people, and accept His offer. It will not be open forever." 

Permalink Mark Unread

 

"I know very little of Vkandis. His church is made up of wise and good and generous people, but the only action I know to have been His is the theft of a dangerous weapon with which He now threatens me. Many gods desire the good of their followers, but not all of them do, and that Vkandis is one who does is not something I can trust in. If He is, He can say so. This is a reassurance that He ought to be eager to provide, I think, so that I may depart in peace, and Aroden does not feel compelled to send this world more help."

Permalink Mark Unread

"I think your Aroden cannot actually reach us here, right now. I am sure you would be welcome to speak to the followers of other gods about Vkandis' intentions. I am also sure He is not the only god who is concerned about your presence here, simply the fastest to react." 

Permalink Mark Unread

"If all the gods active here are of accord that I should go, and at least one of them credible in serving the people who worship them, I will. It appears to me that this war would have pressed on until either Predain took the Tower and triggered a catastrophe of a scale that destroyed the whole kingdom, or Tantara triggered one to stop them. I think a peace is the best route to stop that, and I fear for that peace if I leave. But the gods can see farther than I, and it could be, that it's better for me to go.

I can't abandon this peace off the word of one priesthood, even one I regard highly, because in my world of origin there is a god, called Asmodeus, who wants the obedience of humans only because he is flattered by possessing slaves, and hopes on death to capture their souls so he can torment them and reshape them into evil beings. He is a monster, and yet his church can tell whatever stories they like about him, and chooses not to tell that one. I do not suspect Vkandis of being any such kind of being -" his priests are mostly not Evil, which is a good sign - "and I'm sure that, from what you know of him and his faith, the idea must seem absurd, but it's the sort of thing I absolutely have to rule out, before giving my word.

 

I should further point out that while I will depart if that's what is best, the theft of the weapon does not incline me towards departure -- if anything, the opposite. I would depart far more readily were all the superweapons dismantled, and I feel some responsibility to see that done. If the thing you ask is in the interests of the people of Velgarth, there is no need to threaten me, and if it's not in the interests of the people of Velgarth, then no risk to my person would make me willing to bind Aroden to an oath to abandon them forever."

Permalink Mark Unread

The priest sighs. (He still looks remarkably unworried, for someone having this particular conversation with a person who has demonstrated all of the terrifying powers that Iomedae has recently.) 

"I wish you would listen. I think it would have gone much better, that way; the risk is not solely on you. But if your god's precepts - or simply your own stubbornness - bind you not to consider the path that avoids conflict between us, then I am not sure we have much else to talk about. ...You have until dawn to reconsider." 

Permalink Mark Unread

"It will take longer than that," she says patiently, "for me to confirm with the other gods of Velgarth that it is in the interests of the people of Velgarth for me to depart."

Permalink Mark Unread

The young priest does not really seem to consider this his problem. 

 

(The elderly priest is making a small, stifled upset sound. The shock is probably not doing him any good; his face is grayish. He looks like he wants to say something and is not succeeding at making words happen.) 

Permalink Mark Unread

You know, all right. Iomedae is going to make him nearly incapable of feeling fear, for the next few minutes. It's hotly disputed if the way she does this is even magic; she just meets his eyes and smiles steadily.

Permalink Mark Unread

His eyes widen, and he blinks at her in obvious surprise, but then takes a deep breath and stands straighter. "Mage-Captain Ashuat, this - plan, if you can even call it that - appears to me to be a grave mistake. Are you that certain you understand our Sunlord's will better than the elders of the temple?" 

     The younger man looks back, levelly. "The judgement of the temple elders is not the same as our Lord's will. You know that as well as I do. In an emergency, we cannot be paralyzed waiting for the priesthood to convene and debate – we must act." 

"And I know the litany says that in troubled times, we must act decisively with courage on our convictions. But I think you are wrong, and what you're planning to do risks far, far more than could possibly be worth it." 

     An untroubled headshake. "I disagree. I think that our Sunlord sees further than either of us can." 

"This is a matter that the temple must discuss. You can't just - act unilaterally." 

     "On the contrary, it is the only thing I can do." 

"It's– you could get thousands of people killed, and - did you hear the story of what happened with the Fifth - it might be for nothing. Do you think you have any chance of surviving this? How can that be worth it?"

    Shrug. "If we die, it will be serving our Sunlord's will. He knows what needs to be done." 

The older priest takes a step forward. Looks earnestly . "Is there anything that would change your mind? If I convene the elders now? If I petition our Sunlord to send a vision and explain what He really meant?" 

     "You can do as you see fit. I know my part in this. I knew she would come to argue, and suspected that she would be stubborn and refuse any offer of mercy, even threaten our Sunlord in turn. So it is already too late to be undone." 

 

 

 

 

The elderly priest turns, abruptly, back to Iomedae. "I don't understand why this is happening or - know the true will of Vkandis, but surely it cannot be this. I think I need to convene the other elder priests of the temple order. I don't know if it will...do any good...but this - isn't all right. I'm sorry." 

Permalink Mark Unread

"I understand. I am not angry with you, and I do not name Vkandis my enemy from the idiocy of one of his followers. Go now, with one of my escort who can Gate you, and convene them as urgently as you can. And I'll send just as urgently for the envoys of the other gods, so that if it is necessary that I depart from Velgarth I can learn it."

Permalink Mark Unread

Urtho's mages are coordinating amongst themselves. They should...split up, probably? Half can go with the senior priest; if he wants to get the representatives of every major temple in every city, he's going to need a lot of Gates. 

 

They're not sure what else needs to be done but probably something? For one, it seems like the mages of the Thirteenth who were at Urtho's Tower, and presumably involved in the weapons theft, aren't even here – it's very confusing, they're not sure if that group already had orders when they were relocated, or if they received some sort of divine revelation directly from Vkandis and chose to act on it and pass a message back, or if the priest here also had a divine vision, he was - sort of talking like someone who was that sure?

But either way, it means the weapon isn't here, and they have no idea where it actually is or what the actual plan is for the threat that they've apparently set in motion and intend to carry out tomorrow morning at dawn. 

Permalink Mark Unread

"I think that General Movat and Urtho should be informed of this subversion of Tantara's forces, not by Vkandis, whose high priests wisely reject this and whose council is rapidly assembling, but by a set of people claiming to represent Him; and Predain, of course, needs be informed, lest they take the detonation of the superweapon as an action of Tantara in violation of the ceasefire."

And she turns back to the young priest of Vkandis. "I would, if it's possible, much prefer to minimize collateral damage, and so I will identify a location far from any Gate-terminuses or other hazards, and uninhabited, where I will spend my time from sunrise to high noon tomorrow and on subsequent days, taking no further precautions against assassination than I take the rest of the time, including taking my sleep during those hours if I sleep. I'll cordially request that you try to kill me, if you're so inclined, during those hours."

Permalink Mark Unread

A couple of the mages will rush off right now to inform General Movat, who will likely want to talk to Iomedae before she Gates out of his camp. They'll get a communication-spell message routed to Urtho with the highest urgency. After that, they...want to arrange for Iomedae to speak to the followers of other gods who might be able to request urgent divine advice? Normally getting divine revelations is not a thing you can demand on a schedule, but normally the followers of gods aren't stealing superweapons to try to threaten the most powerful defender of their country into abandoning them. 

(Urtho's people really quite badly don't want her to leave. They don't want a large swath of one or both countries to be destroyed either! It's a serious dilemma! ...They should, uh, probably clarify whether she's intending to park herself in an uninhabited region of Tantara or of Predain. Tantara...plausibly does not actually have any uninhabited regions large enough to contain a fireball that big, though they can perhaps try for a very frantic evacuation. Predain might but will also be very upset about it.) 

 


The young priest inclines his head in response to Iomedae's statement, but doesn't seem to consider it necessary to reply. (There is not, in fact, at this point a way for him to even pass that request on. They weren't being idiots; he has no way to contact the handful of mages responsible for the final, critical execution of this operation. They have a plan for tracking Iomedae, though, and when the deadline passes they're probably not going to be dawdling.) 

Permalink Mark Unread

Probably it should be out in the middle of the ocean, unless there's a local merfolk population. 

Permalink Mark Unread

They do not as far as they know have a local merfolk population, although this is, uh, definitely still risking some major devastation on the inhabited coast, explosions at sea still cause waves even if they don't set everything on fire. Does she need a boat? Is she just going to swim? They'll do their best to work something out - and assuming she doesn't have a way to get herself there, they can get someone with a thousand-mile Gate range who can also do blind unscaffolded Gates using just a bearing - but Gating to the middle of the ocean is not really something they've had reason to do before. 

 

General Movat is ALARMED and does, in fact, want to talk to Iomedae immediately. Also they should probably send a message via the Predain monitors as soon as possible, before Ma'ar finds out via his spies or some other route, which - sounds like it would give him a worse impression of Tantara's intent to cooperate on preventing a disaster here. 

Permalink Mark Unread

Yep, contacting Ma'ar should indeed be a very high priority here, for exactly that reason plus the possibility he has some additional ideas what's going on. She can probably swim all day but would prefer a boat and will, at any sign of a Gate, actually take off flying, so hopefully most of the explosion doesn't actually move the water. It can be a small boat. Probably should be a small boat. 

Permalink Mark Unread

They'll do a short message to Ma'ar just so they can get one out FAST, and work on a longer and more thorough report to follow it – it would be nice if they could give Ma'ar literally any other information on the known movements of the mages involved in the actual weapons theft, a question which is hopefully being investigated right now. 

General Movat is not, uh, really sure how to secure his camp against mages who might be able to drop a superweapon through a Gate at any moment, there isn't a level of alert that feels high enough for that, and he is not incredibly confident that the cultists with the insane plan are going to stick to agreements they made, such as waiting until dawn tomorrow. He would feel more comfortable if Iomedae were not here for very much longer, though he does want to take the time to ask if she's ever been in an even slightly analogous situation and can advise him. 

Permalink Mark Unread

She has attracted the opposition of Evil gods before, and some of them have tried to have her killed. Some even succeeded, back when she was weaker, but the gods' servants can return the dead to life in her world. She has never encountered this sort of thing, with a church itself divided on assassinating her and telling her about this to her face, and isn't sure what to make of it, but getting out of here sooner rather than later sounds like a good idea. 

 

Gods sometimes don't care about human life. Even if it's useful to them to pretend they do, so their churches serve them, often they only care about their own things and are willing to cause immense human suffering to have it. It's a possibility to keep in mind, though so is the possibility Vkandis doesn't want this at all or at least directed them to minimize collateral damage by warning her first. Her only advice is to not assume that because something is grand it is good.

Permalink Mark Unread

That's...good context to have, that in her experience gods sometimes want things other than what's best for Their followers' – and that They can lie about it.

It's not really clear what to...do...about the fact that maybe Vkandis really does want her gone, and really did send a specific assassin without working through His temple hierarchy, and wants this for reasons that have nothing to do with the wellbeing of Tantara and instead have to do with obscure incomprehensible god goals. If it were happening through the temple order they could at least negotiate about it. 

 

Iomedae can get a Gate back to the Tower now. They are very urgently grabbing the senior matron of a rural temple order and attached girls' school dedicated to Bestet, and are hopeful about having a representative of the Nameless Everburning Flame by the time Iomedae is done with that conversation, and also Urtho wants to speak to her directly. 

Permalink Mark Unread

Understood. Also if there are any ways to make her hard to magically track, that might slow down attackers until she's out of the Tower and on to somewhere safer for others.

Permalink Mark Unread

The best option there is probably to get her behind the Tower's shields as quickly as possible – and one would hope that the assassin is unlikely to try to explode Urtho's Tower even if Iomedae is there, especially since she has nearly sixteen candlemarks left before her deadline. Urtho will have ideas for what other artifacts to give her, to make her hard to track once she leaves the inhabited areas, but without permanent shields they cannot realistically make her impossible to track, just inconvenient. Especially given that, who knows, maybe Vkandis can directly send a vision revealing her location. 

The first short message to Ma'ar should now be en route. The Predain monitor briefed on it is pretty furious about it, and definitely unimpressed with Urtho's efforts at security, but they probably aren't going to start assuming that Urtho let this happen on purpose. 

Permalink Mark Unread

Urtho is now (kind of) recovered enough to be sitting up an armchair in his office. He's rigid and white-lipped with - whatever range of very understandable emotions he's having right now. 

What does Iomedae think he should do

Permalink Mark Unread

Well, it'd be nice if he could help get the rest of the superweapons deconstructed, but Iomedae actually suspects that between her innate abilities and the large number of shield-items of Urtho's she is wearing, she'll be fine. She's hard to injure and much harder than that to kill. 

She's more worried that the cultists will try for Ma'ar, or for Urtho himself - it's hard to predict what people behaving that erratically will do, and taking out either of them probably collapses the peace if that's someone's objective. 

Permalink Mark Unread

His people are ready to go ahead and dismantle two of them (...Urtho looks actually kind of distressed about the prospect, but he's not going to argue that they shouldn't, with everything happening right now). The remaining thirteen are going to be - harder, and riskier, and Urtho wants to be present and able to direct the work. He's concerned that trying to push himself to do it sooner, when he's still not fully recovered, will actually increase the risk. 

 

He's considered having the Tower evacuated, but he actually thinks it's relatively safe; it seems unlikely that even an insane man would target them here, and many sections of the Tower are very difficult or impossible to Gate into directly. The problem with evacuating is that there isn't really anywhere else; they could spread people out between towns and villages, so there's less of a concentration here, but that requires thousands of Gates and they just don't have the personnel, not with everyone on high alert at the front. 

He's also very worried about Ma'ar's safety, much more than his own, but - isn't sure what he can do to help. He certainly can't invite Ma'ar to the Tower. 

Permalink Mark Unread

Yeah, that sounds both very complicated geopolitically and like it'd make the Tower more of a target. Iomedae thinks she could protect Ma'ar from assassination only to a limited degree and only by giving him the Ring of Evasion, which might be fine - in recent training exercises, she in fact was managing the same result without it - but is a major risk to take when it's not a training exercise and when she's probably a likelier target. And which may still be insufficient to let him survive the blast; you do have to have some way of partially mitigating the damage yourself for the Ring to do the rest.

 

- thinking that through out loud, though, she's actually inclined to give it to him, if Urtho would be comfortable with that.

Permalink Mark Unread

Can she explain to him again what it actually does? Ma'ar probably can significantly mitigate the damage to himself – he's just as good at shields and talismans as Urtho himself, if not better – but would be pretty likely not to survive it without additional aid. He wants Ma'ar to have as much defensive aid as possible, but - is still kind of uncomfortable giving Ma'ar any capabilities he could use offensively, that might change his assessment of whether it's worth, for example, instead trying to conquer the Tower after all. 

Permalink Mark Unread

Yep, that makes sense. Evasion is more or less purely defensive. When you successfully take defensive action against an attack - flinging up a shield counts - it amplifies it, makes it adequate whatever the magnitude of the explosion. Of course, that still would make Ma'ar much harder to take down on the battlefield, but Evasion does not affect the thing Iomedae would do, were he her adversary, which is driving a sword through him. Her sword cuts through a lot of defenses automatically as a product of the enchantments on it, and through many of the rest by virtue of doing much much much more damage than a normal sword.

Permalink Mark Unread

Urtho is a little confused about the exact category boundaries here – a sword does not seem like it should be capable of being more dangerous than a fireball fifty miles across, however magical it is and however fast Iomedae can move – but Urtho does, in fact, trust her assessment of her magic and her own capabilities. 

And - it seems like the sort of thing that would be actively politically helpful? Urtho knows his former student, and Ma'ar is going to read it as a very strong indication of good faith. It's - more meaningful to him than most things, someone taking a costly action to keep him safe. It's probably not something he's had much of, in his life. 

Permalink Mark Unread

They're in accord, then. Perhaps her location out at sea can be transmitted to Ma'ar and he can come out to get the Ring? She doesn't want to travel into Predain.

 

 

- will the fifty mile fireball do anything at all underwater, incidentally, she'd feel silly planning all these desperate things to try if she can just hang out underwater and be entirely fine. Honestly even if it boils the water she'll be fine; the worry is whether it'll cause a tsunami on shore.

Permalink Mark Unread

It will absolutely cause a tsunami on shore. It's still a better idea than anything else he can think of - they'll have warning, tsunamis don't travel that fast and Iomedae does and if she's in fact alive after the explosion they can send someone to collect her by Gate - but he's concerned that it's going to cause a tsunami even if it's mostly not underwater. 

 

Urtho wouldn't have been inclined to tell Ma'ar where Iomedae was planning to be - and it seems like a bad idea for them to be in the same place for very long at all - but it seems like the main downside risk here is if they're wrong, and the rogue mage is in fact working for Ma'ar rather than Vkandis. This seems unlikely and if it were true then plausibly he could find Iomedae anyway, just with more time and inconvience and costly use of search-spells. He trusts Iomedae's assessment of whether it's worth it more than his own. 

Permalink Mark Unread

It's a realistic possibility, but she doesn't in fact think that 'don't get found by the assassins' is very viable as a long term plan, so she'd really just as soon speed it up even if it's Ma'ar. Also maybe he'll have a moment of realization and call it off when she gives him the ring. Things like that don't happen enough to plan for, but they do happen and Ma'ar's the kind of person they might happen to. 

Permalink Mark Unread

All right. They can try that, then. 

...Urtho would be inclined to do it after Iomedae has done her investigation, spoken to all the religious representatives she can, and is already in the middle of the ocean. But it's not impossible that the threat against Iomedae was misdirection, and actually the cultists are planning to take out the capital of Predain or something – and Ma'ar is probably paranoid enough to get himself to a secure undisclosed location far away from any major cities, as soon as he receives the warning message, but fifty miles is a lot of explosion. 

Permalink Mark Unread

It really is. (What was Urtho thinking.) She'd warn him specifically about the radius; they can do the handoff later.

Permalink Mark Unread

(Well, it was really cool that it worked, and it would have been even cooler if he could have pulled off the power supply. Urtho does not bring this up. It doesn't seem helpful.) 

 

He'll make sure that Ma'ar is warned specifically about the blast radius, and that Iomedae has a plan to offer him some protection, further details to follow. 

Also it sounds like the Bestet representative is ready to meet her, if they're done talking here. 

Permalink Mark Unread

Yep. She appreciates Urtho and is grateful to be working with him.

Permalink Mark Unread

The leader of the temple and school...reminds her a lot of the older, mid-level paladins she's worked with. She's wearing drawstring trousers and a dusty and sweat-stained man's shirt, sleeves rolled up to show tanned and powerfully muscled forearms. She has a sheathed sword at her hip. She looks very annoyed. 

She's not Gifted, so Urtho can provide a Mindspeaker to translate if Iomedae doesn't have her translation magic easily available or wants to save it for later. 

Permalink Mark Unread

She indeed does not. She will convey her apologies about the short notice over Mindspeech. She is Iomedae, paladin of Aroden; she was just threatened by a priest of Vkandis who stole a superweapon, and she's trying to determine if the gods other than Vkandis have concerns about her presence here.

Permalink Mark Unread

The woman - who introduces herself as Marlana - was dragged through a Gate ten minutes ago and was informed that either Vkandis is having some kind of tantrum or else some of his mages have gone rogue for no reason. She has no context on anything Iomedae might have done to upset Vkandis or other gods. The two-minute summary she got certainly makes it sound like the gods - or Bestet, at least - should think very highly of her. Of course, the churches of different gods often don't get along, and while nobody actually has direct information on this reflecting disputes between the gods, it's not ridiculous to think it would. 

Did the priest of Vkandis say what they were upset about? If not, does Iomedae have any guesses? 

Permalink Mark Unread

He said 'I speak for Vkandis Sunlord, and for the future of Velgarth, when I say that there are many things you do not understand, and that your intervention in this world is unwelcome.' Her main guesses are that Vkandis is actually Evil, and can see by prophecy that she's going to end up killing him about it, that there's some extremely complicated situation here she's inadvertantly stepped in, and that the mages are lying and don't work for Vkandis at all.

Permalink Mark Unread

Well. Directing His followers to steal an incredibly destructive weapon in order to threaten Iomedae certainly sounds like the kind of thing that would be Evil! Maybe it's also complicated - the gods are mysterious and hard to understand and see the world in ways that cannot easily be conveyed to mortals - but "stealing superweapons" doesn't really seem complicated, it just seems bad.

Bestet is particularly opposed to men - or male-aligned gods, not that gods are exactly male or female in the usual way - threatening women because the woman in question is too powerful and it scares them. It's offensive. She's pretty sure that Iomedae will have Bestet on her side, in this, though Bestet is a less powerful god than Vkandis and may or may not be able to convey what's going on let alone intervene. Marlana is definitely more than ready to offer any kind of help Iomedae might need. 

Permalink Mark Unread

- she appreciates it. Right now she's planning to get out of town so that whether or not she survives the superweapon she doesn't take anyone down with her. 

And if she dies, she wants the peace to hold. Tantara and Predain's war is a tragedy, it's needlessly destructive, it came close to being destructive on a scale larger than that, and neither of the principles even want to be fighting it. That's the favor she'd ask of anyone who wants to aid her.

 

If Bestet can help - well, she could....really stand to have her healing back, if that happens to be an intervention available to Bestet cheaply, and she thinks Aroden or a True Resurrection from home can and will get her soul but she would be very deeply indebted to anyone who made sure it wasn't intercepted by Vkandis, etcetera.

 

Permalink Mark Unread

Bestet does not generally send visions with advice, and rarely provides miracles. She trusts her followers to use their judgement. And doesn't, per se, expect worship; Her holy texts are based on the premise that people - mostly women - will follow Her because it's a good deal for them, and unlike the church of Vkandis with their incense and ceremonial fires and scheduled mandatory prayers, practical works in the world are a far greater part of the faith than prayers and hymns and services. 

But it's said that She hears prayers, especially from women in desperate situations (particularly at the hands of men) and from women working to become strong enough to rescue those who need rescuing. Iomedae...is in both situations at once, which might make her prayer especially easily-heard, and she's certainly made waves, so it's likely that Bestet, if She is in a position to intervene at all, already knows of Iomedae's presence. Praying to her for miraculous healing couldn't hurt, even if it's in Marlana's opinion unlikely to work. And Bestet - probably would prefer that Vkandis not get His hands on a soul as apparently well-suited to Her faith as Iomedae, and can perhaps intervene if He tries something. 

 

 

...Marlana, for her part, will swear to do all she can to help Urtho maintain the peace if Iomedae dies in this stupid pointless godfeud or whatever it is. She can't promise to do it as well as Iomedae herself would, she's not experienced in international diplomacy - she runs a school where young girls learn to fight - but she'll try. 

Permalink Mark Unread

She will thank her sincerely, then, and will attempt to address Bestet. Possibly right now, this being a fairly urgent situation. Does Marlana have any further questions or advice?

 (This is considerably more brusque than she'd usually be, but she thinks it'll go over all right. Gender is not very fundamental to Iomedae's conception of the world but there is something here which is very fundamental, a kind of clarity about what power is and what it's for, and she likes it.)

Permalink Mark Unread

It seems like Iomedae is really very pressed for time and while Marlana does have very many questions, especially if she's to stay at the Tower and try to help Urtho with diplomacy, she can ask them of someone else who doesn't have a god with superweapons after her. 

Permalink Mark Unread

And Iomedae will close her eyes and look for Bastet. 

 

Most peoples' conceptions of a god are somewhat askew from the god Itself, it's an inevitability of trying to comprehend alien beings. Aroden left behind detailed records of his decisions and reasoning and people still frequently misunderstand. She does not imagine she has Bastet, but she has - a very simple and pure determination, to grow strong enough to protect everyone in the world from everything that makes them afraid, makes them helpless, makes them weaker, everything that tortures them and kills them. She has had it for as long as she can remember and she picked up a sword and learned how to do it, herself, and then when that wasn't going to be good enough she founded a religious order to teach people how to do it, and then when it became clear enough that wasn't going to do it she began to make plans for the Starstone. Things shouldn't be like this, and she will change them.

Iomedae isn't frightened; she can't be. But she is in a desperate situation, and she does feel desperate, in the sense of 'willing to expend resources that she won't get back, and expecting a bad outcome even so'. She can't dodge a fifty mile fireball. She can maybe dodge the worst of it and endure the rest of it, but a god set on killing her would possess reason to think it would work. Maybe the superweapon and then a Final Strike while she's stunned by the superweapon. Maybe some other thing as out of context as the superweapons initially were. It seems quite likely she could die, of this, and she does not know for sure what happens after that, and that's more than she's risked, well, ever. Less than she'll risk going for the Starstone, but that she'll at least have a lot to gain from. 

And that's if the desired outcome happens, if they go after her with the superweapon; they could go after Predain instead, probably nearly wipe it off the map, and she would rather die than fail Predain that badly, if she could pick one, but she can't. 

She would prefer not this and if there is anyone who can help, she does ask for their help, and promise to repay it as soon as she can conscionably do so.

 

She would ordinarily also point out that Aroden will pay for local gods to help her, once He learns from her that it happened, but for this specific god that seems like the wrong spirit.

Permalink Mark Unread

If Bestet hears her, She doesn't directly acknowledge this in any way. Which may or may not mean much; it was explicitly mentioned that She doesn't often send visions to Her followers, and even in Golarion gods often don't find it worth the intervention cost to alert someone that a prayer was heard. 

Permalink Mark Unread

Iomedae considers it entirely likely Aroden's been watching her this whole time and just hasn't said anything because she's not making any mistakes worth correcting. She continues, trying to do the thing that makes it cheap for gods to see:

 

 

Iomedae's present intent: to Gate out to the middle of the sea with a small floating platform on which she can keep a tedious overnight vigil, watching for the first signs of a Gate at which she'll fling herself away from it up into the sky where the superweapon can be most harmlessly discharged. 

 

An alternative course, which Iomedae will take (she makes the intent firm in herself, so it's a clear fork in prophecy) if Bastet indicates it: instead of the sea, to the polar north.

 

An alternative course, which Iomedae will take if Bastet advises it, confirms the safety of her soul, and further investigation suggests it is warranted (a less clear fork in prophecy, but still a substantial divergence in Iomedae's future behavior): she gifts the magic items to those best equipped to use them to fix this world, and dies here to return home.

 

She holds the courses in her mind, as clearly and plainly as a mortal can, and a mortal accustomed to taking instruction from her god at the lowest possible cost to the both of them can make this perfectly clear and the intent wholly real: there will be vanishingly few paths where Bastet indicates 'second thing' and Iomedae doesn't go north. 

 

In the absence of guidance she'll do her present intent. Further desires, if they're legible:  she would really really appreciate being restored to the state she arrived here with, seven uses remaining of her Lay On Hands ability, if that were in the power of a god. In communing with Aroden it would ordinarily be returned to her, but Aroden is far away. 

And more important than that: she knows the purpose her soul is pointed to. It is crucial that Vkandis cannot grab at her soul, before it makes its way on that course. She doesn't think in these terms, much, but it would be a violation of who she is and everything she holds sacred, for him to rip her out of the river that will take her back to her people. 

Permalink Mark Unread

She is not sent any vision or sudden sourceless-truth conviction of which path is best, but that wouldn't necessarily be the cheapest way for Bestet to get information to her, when coincidences can be nudged in Foresight more cheaply. 

 

If she wants to wait a little longer to see if some kind of sign will reach her, Urtho's people have in fact located a priest of the Nameless God of Everburning Flame who is willing to speak with her right now. 

Permalink Mark Unread

Sounds good, she'll do that.

Permalink Mark Unread

High Priestess Thaliss presides over the most famous historical shrine to the Everburning Flame in Tantara. There are temples in the cities too, of course, but the best-known sites are mostly natural geographical formations; this one has hot springs, theorized to have healing properties, and it also has a literal flame that burns from some kind of flammable gas that leaks slowly out from deep in the earth. 

Thaliss, like Marlana, was grabbed here on short notice five minutes ago and has gotten a very sketchy and confusing report from some of Urtho's panicked mages and also wants the explanation for WHAT IS GOING ON and to know what Iomedae thinks she or her god can do about it. Iomedae is probably kind of tired of explaining it, by now. 

Permalink Mark Unread

Well, at first Iomedae thought that possibly the local gods were in fact unanimously worried about the peace between Tantara and Predain she's been putting together, in which case she'd want to accommodate the worries obviously. But it sounds like this is in fact not universal. Which means what happens is that a group of terrorists claiming to be acting on Vkandis's orders are threatening Iomedae with a horrifying superweapon they stole from Urtho, and Iomedae is going to go evacuate to somewhere where its detonation won't harm anyone else but would appreciate clarification about whether Vkandis really commanded this (which might suggest He's Evil and needs opposing) or whether these people are mistaken.

 

And she can at least make sure the chosen evacuation site isn't near any holy sites of the Everburning Flame, things like that, as long as she knows about all of them.

Permalink Mark Unread

It would...be moderately surprising to Thaliss if Vkandis were alone among the gods in having significant concerns, rather than more likely to respond to His concerns with, well, stolen superweapons and terrorism. This is partly a fact about Vkandis – compared to the other gods, He acts faster, usually, and is much more likely to operate via flashy interventions in the material plane – and partly, though not unrelatedly a fact about the culture of those who tend to worship Vkandis. 

(No one is Evil, not really. This is kind of an important tenet of the church of the Nameless God. But people - and gods, probably, too - can be hurt and scared and damaged, and react to understandable fears in ways that cause even more harm, and the key mission of the church is to contribute, everywhere and in every way they can, to carving out spaces where people can heal and redeem themselves.)  

It seems plausible that there is a genuine concern, but that Vkandis' hasty solution to it will have immense collateral damage if implemented, and should be avoided if they can possibly find another way. Thaliss is deeply grateful for Iomedae's willingness to evacuate into uninhabited territory, though obviously it's unfortunate that it appears necessary. She can give her a map of all the holy sites in Tantara and south of it. 

And she can hardly promise that her god will be able to talk to Vkandis, and perhaps find a way forward that involves talking rather than enormous explosions, but - she will pray very seriously for it. 

Permalink Mark Unread

Iomedae appreciates it deeply, and if she is skeptical of the claim that no one is really Evil - well, it's close enough to true of mortals, and it is one of the most important technically-wrong things to keep in mind. 

Permalink Mark Unread

They unfortunately cannot offer her any direct help. Theirs is not a martial order, and despite the Nameless God's association with flames, it's not the 'setting battlefields on fire' kind. 

Thaliss is deeply grateful for Iomedae's honesty and her warning, though. They will probably try to evacuate their city temples, where a lot of very vulnerable people are often sheltering, and bring everyone they can to the holy sites, which are mostly rural and more than fifty miles from the Tower, the border with Predain, or another plausible target. 

And they will pray for the Nameless God to send any aid They can to Iomedae. ...To be clear they will also be making the same prayer for everyone else involved, on all sides, both because they have very little context and mostly Iomedae's word to go on for what happened, and also because one of the tenets of their faith is that 'sides' aren't real; everyone is hurting others, sometimes, and everyone is capable of stopping if given just a little space and better options. So they'll pray for the priests of Vkandis as well, and for Urtho, and for Ma'ar, and anyone else they can think of, for the Nameless God to show them better options. 

Permalink Mark Unread

And she hopes that the Nameless God does do that. - maybe especially Ma'ar. He seems like possibly a particularly fruitful person to give better options, and the person who can choose whether the peace lives or dies, if Iomedae is killed. 

 

If the Nameless God happens to be a god with the same teachings, of Iomedae's own world, She could pass a message to Aroden, and He'd be very grateful, and repay Her as He could.

Permalink Mark Unread

Meanwhile, a very very long way south: 

 

Shayeen has a problem. 

She already had several hundred problems. Her problems began even before she was born, really, with the petty king of one of the River Delta Kingdoms who keeps her mother as his concubine, continuing on to the fact that, fifteen years ago, said king could not give her mother a child, and her mother decided to sleep with a random wandering minstrel from the southern reach of the Haighlei Empire. It became apparent by the time Shayeen was three that she was a bastard twice over. And then war came to the river kingdoms, as it does at regular intervals, and the man who isn't her father married the princess of a neighboring kingdom to broker an alliance. And then Shayeen's mage-gift awakened, and her life became even more complicated. 

- and now the king who isn't her father is slowly dying of a mysterious illness, and her mother, who somehow still genuinely loves him, refuses to leave, and it looks like once again the river-kingdoms are headed for war, a pointless war that will last until a new set of kings re-emerge from the bloodbath, and Shayeen wants to fix it but she's only fourteen, and a girl (not that this should make a difference to anything but it does), a bastard twice over, whose only combat training is from sneaking out to watch the boys in weapons-lessons and then practicing on her own in the attic. And so she ran away, six weeks ago, to seek a mage-school or a teacher or even just a friend willing to ride at her side.

And two weeks ago she met an old mercenary in a tavern who gave her a magic sword, which you would think would be the best possible beginning to an incredible magical adventure, except that the blade who calls herself Need cannot actually make Shayeen powerful enough to defeat an army. Not yet. And also loves to tell Shayeen that her plans are stupid. None of the ballads ever mentioned magic swords that would bully you

So they've been wandering further east, in search of a temple to Bestet, because Need thinks that Shayeen needs some formal training and to 'grow up', and that the order of Bestet - which trains women only - is a better place to do that than with a mercenary company. 

It's taking a while, because Need has some kind of Foresight to find women in trouble and they keep detouring to rescue them. Which is very exciting, and would be everything Shayeen had ever dreamed of, if not for the fact that her homeland is in danger and she had really been hoping for a magical adventure that would result in being Queen.  

Permalink Mark Unread

And now she has a DIFFERENT PROBLEM. Which is that Need is very, very loudly demanding that they go north. 

Permalink Mark Unread

Why north??? Home is south!!! The only thing she knows of that's north of here is the Ceej Empire and it sounds horrible. 

Permalink Mark Unread

Further north than that! ...Actually a lot further north but Need isn't sure, yet, who needs them or why. They need to make a stop at Urtho's Tower. 

Permalink Mark Unread

Urtho's Tower is a real place????? Need could have mentioned that SOONER. If Shayeen had known that the ballads were about a REAL PLACE she would absolutely have gone there. 

 

(The River Delta Kingdoms are an insular culture, and most of their trade connections are by sea, with the Haighlei Empire and the other coastal states. They are also not a very literate culture, or one that encourages education for women. Shayeen does not actually know how to read.) 

Permalink Mark Unread

Urtho's Tower is a real place! It's not - or at least wasn't, the last Need heard - a good place to learn how to go to war or become a queen. Need was last in the kingdom two bearers ago; it's a peaceful place, one where women are rarely in desperate need that goes unanswered by other rescuers. 

 

Or it used to be, at least. There is definitely someone in trouble and, given the intensity of the pull (it's actually quite painful, both for Need herself and Shayeen) it's important and urgent. 

Shayeen doesn't know how to Gate. Need can help her, but not with the techniques she would require to Gate somewhere she's never even been. So they have to urgently find someone who can Gate them there.

Fortunately, mercenary mages tend to have been to all sorts of places. Maybe not Tantara, which hasn't hired mercenary companies in living memory, but the Ceej Empire, which does engage in trade with Tantara. 

And they have gold. 

Permalink Mark Unread

Not that much gold! And Shayeen was saving it! Why should she spend her gold that she was saving for her homeland on saving someone four kingdoms away– 

 

 

...all right, FINE, there's a woman in trouble in an archmage's tower out of ballads. It's not what Shayeen was planning to do with her life but you can't just refuse that call. 

Permalink Mark Unread

Indeed you cannot. 

Permalink Mark Unread

Half a candlemark later, having spent literally all of her gold and promised an open-ended favor to the merchant who agreed to have his guard Gate her to the border of Tantara, Shayeen is riding up to a nearly-abandoned border posting.

She is learning from an absurdly young lieutenant that Tantara is at war. That the war is not going well. He is, uh, probably not authorized to tell her any more than that and is not at all sure he should send a random foreign woman (a random foreign child, really) to Urtho's Tower just because she has a magic sword. 

Permalink Mark Unread

Need can speak into Shayeen's mind and coach her, and has a lot more practice at being persuasive. 

Permalink Mark Unread

And so another ten minutes after that, Shayeen is awaiting approval to enter Urtho's Tower. 

Permalink Mark Unread

Urgent message for Iomedae, from one of Urtho's Mindspeakers: 

There's a young foreign girl outside the Tower. She's a mage, and claims to be from the far southern river-kingdoms, which are literally over a thousand miles away. She has a magic sword. The girl does not speak a word of Tantaran, but her sword is apparently a person and has Mindspeech. 

According to her, uh, sword, she was previously on her way - with the advice of said sword - to find a temple to Bestet and train there, so she could go try to rescue the river-kingdoms from war. But now they're here, looking for a woman in need, because apparently the bloody magic talking sword has some kind of woman-in-need pathfinding spell. Or something. 

 

Does Iomedae by any chance know what's going on here, or have any explanation for it??? If she doesn't then they're - actually pretty alarmed. 

Permalink Mark Unread

- well, probably it's a divine intervention by Bestet to answer the question Iomedae posed her a little while ago. There's a lot of other things it could be, though she's going to discard 'a coincidence' and she leans pretty strongly against 'the assassination attempt'.

She'd like to meet with them both, if that's possible.

Permalink Mark Unread

Wow. Okay. They had no idea Iomedae had requested a divine intervention from Bestet and, uh, might have liked to know that. Though honestly even if Iomedae had said so, they wouldn't have expected one to ACTUALLY SHOW UP in the form of a foreign teenager with an intelligent sword. 

They'll allow the girl into Urtho's Tower to meet with her. They're nervous about it but it sounds like Iomedae does have an explanation for this and doesn't think it's an assassination attempt. (They'll have the kid searched, first, but she came in on horseback with approximately no baggage and they don't actually see a way she could be concealing Urtho's weapon on her person.) 

Permalink Mark Unread

Iomedae requested divine intervention both of Bestet and the nameless god, and of the shamans of the Star-Eyed Goddess, the gods clearly have interests here and negotiating seems like a high priority. She's grateful for their help and sorry for worrying them, and will go meet the girl and the sword at once.

Permalink Mark Unread

The foreign girl, once ushered into a room, is waiting impatiently for Iomedae! She looks about thirteen or fourteen, and rather underfed, and is clearly of a different ethnicity than anyone Iomedae has encountered so far in Tantara or Predain. She's disheveled and sweaty and wearing travel-worn riding levers covered in road-dust, and definitely smells like she hasn't bathed in several weeks. She is, in fact, carrying a very magical sword. She is trying very hard to look brave and tough and not as overwhelmed as she feels. 

"Shayeen," she says, pointing at herself. It's getting very frustrating being in places where she doesn't speak the language. 

Permalink Mark Unread

Her sword is chattier! 

:- Yes, it's definitely you. ...Not that you really look like someone who'd need my help, but. We need to head north. I hope you have the faintest bloody idea why we need to do that. What's the problem?: 

Permalink Mark Unread

They just WENT north! Why are they having to go north AGAIN?? How much more north can there possibly be????? 

(Previously, the fifty or so miles Shayeen had traveled on foot and horseback was the furthest she had ever been from home; before that, she had never been more than a mile from the king's keep.) 

Permalink Mark Unread

:Understood. Are you coming with me? Is she coming with me? This is very dangerous, and I expect anyone who comes with me to die.:

Permalink Mark Unread

:What sort of danger? I already died once, you know, not sure if I even can die again: Her Mindspeech shifts in register, to something deeper and more rote. :Woman's Need calls me; As Woman's Need made me; Her Need I must answer; As my maker bade me. ...I don't think you're to be my next bearer, for one thing I'm not done with this one and I rather resent the interruption, but your need must be great. I am a mage and a healer and a warrior, and can offer you those protections you cannot bring on your own. ...If we're leaving her behind, I want someone looking after her and keeping her out of trouble, is there someone you'd trust with it?: 

Permalink Mark Unread

: - Marlana, the representative of Bastet's temple-order here, but I've already charged her with quite a lot. I don't know that Urtho's Tower is safe either, though if you came specifically with instructions for me to go north then quite plausibly that means the danger is indeed with me and everyone here should be fine.

The danger is that Urtho built a superweapon that causes a fireball fifty miles wide and someone has told me they intend to use it to kill me and I want to be fifty miles from anyone else they could hurt, and also I want to not cause a tsunami, and also I intend to dodge it. You may come with me, if you want to take that risk.:

Permalink Mark Unread

A long pause. 

 

:- I think she'll be safe here. I trust the temple-order of Bestet to help her find her way. ...I didn't actually know how much further north I needed to go until we got here – or what's even there if you go north all the way, never saw a map that showed it. Reckon if we go far enough there's nothing much, so - makes sense, no one in fifty miles to get hurt: 

Another pause. 

:- And I'll come with you, if you'll have me. Just for this, mind you – you're clearly a warrior on your own merits and I wouldn't insult you by claiming you'd ever need my help in any other circumstance - but here, yes. And maybe we'll both die up there, but I've been wandering this world a thousand years helping women in need, I always figured I'd go out that way sooner or later: 

The mental sense of a sigh. :I'd better tell Shayeen. She's going to be upset, she hates being left out. Especially if it's because she's too young. Not sure if there's anything you could say to her, that would help -?: 

Permalink Mark Unread

:It looks on a map like it's believed to be just very cold ocean, which will be genuinely annoying, I have no special protection against freezing right now.: Generally someone else would cast that, or she'd prepare it when she prepared new spells. :I've committed to staying there the first six hours of the day, the next few days, and taking my rest there if I rest at all. If you're a mindspeaker then you'll be able to check for underwater inhabitants, which I'd appreciate.:

:Help isn't something that people only need when they're weak, and all of your work has been helping me, as I understand it. I'd be honored to work alongside you.:

Permalink Mark Unread

:Oh, if that's all you need I can give you a weather-barrier. And check for minds in range, too: 

And Need will explain to Shayeen that they need to part, briefly, because the woman they came here to help needs to save this kingdom. But in the meantime there's already someone here from the temple of Bestet, and so Shayeen can get started on her training, which she needs very badly. The mission Need will be on is dangerous and it won't even be the interesting kind of dangerous. 

Permalink Mark Unread

Usually in the ballads, when a magic sword chooses you personally and promises to help you save your kingdom and people, they don't then haul you a thousand miles to another kingdom entirely and abandon you at a temple while they go help someone else! Why is this her life right now???

(Shayeen does not, in fact, actually want to go any further north, or be in danger from something she doesn't understand at all and can't fight and that has nothing to do with the River Kingdoms. She wants to go home. She is also never ever going to admit that particular feeling to anyone.) 

Permalink Mark Unread

Need reaches for Iomedae again, with the purely mental equivalent of a fond yet exasperated eye-roll. 

:If there's anything you would say to her, I can relay it. I can't give her solemn advice anymore, we've spent too long having arguments on the road: 

Permalink Mark Unread

:I apologize; I think it is my fault this added trip was asked of you,: she says to Shayeen. :I asked Bastet for help, and my guess is that she had very few avenues by which she could hope to provide it in time. Urtho's Tower is a good place to study, in peacetime, and we are going to try to make it peacetime. I have met Marlana only once, but my guess is that there's a great deal you can learn from her, and that you'll grow up to agree with her about more than you disagree with her about.: You want to be exceptionally careful about implying to a frightened child far from home either that there's no one they can rely on or that there's anyone they should trust absolutely. :If Need and I don't return, the people of Tantara will probably be able to give you an account of all that happened, and what a wise person would learn from it to make necessary wars go better than this one did. And if we do return, I'll bring her back to you as quickly as I reasonably can.:

Permalink Mark Unread

All right. Shayeen can do this. She intends to be a future queen and so she can't be a frightened child, and she certainly isn't about to beg Need to stay even though she really wants to

She straightens, and nods, and does her best not to look terrified. And then, with great effort, unwinds her fingers from Need's hilt, and offers her to Iomedae. 

Permalink Mark Unread

Iomedae takes her. And smiles at Shayeen in the way that makes people find it very very easy to be unafraid.

Permalink Mark Unread

That is very weird but it does, in fact, help. 

Permalink Mark Unread

And there's suddenly a new presence in Iomedae's mind, much closer and more intensely present than just Need's mindvoice. 

:Oh: 

The tone is awe. Or, maybe more accurately, the reaction of someone who hasn't experienced awe in the last thousand years and is not at all sure she approves of it and nonetheless cannot help herself. 

- then there's a sense of Need mentally shaking herself. :Later. You and I need to have a talk but we might as well do that in the desolate north. Er, do you have a plan for getting us there, because I can't do blind Gates and - I don't know what you are but you aren't a mage...: 

Permalink Mark Unread

:I am not. I was planning to ask one of Urtho's people to Gate us. Us and a small boat and something Kiyamvir Ma'ar would be able to use for a Gate-target.: She will go request that those be made ready to go, though. 

 

Apparent to Need, though probably not as obvious as the fact that she has somewhere between thirty and sixty times as much life force as a normal person: she's not frightened at all, though she assesses it as reasonably likely that she'll die. She has quite a lot of magic tucked up against the holy symbol around her neck, ready to use, and other abilities that rely on some resource she's since exhausted. She is politely sharing as much situation-relevant information with Need as she can, but nearly everything else is behind very, very good Thoughtsensing shields. If you tried to compulsion this person even with those shields down it simply would not work.

Also she's ludicrously good at wielding swords. If they need to use Need to kill anything that will be the world's most trivial task. 

Permalink Mark Unread

Fascinating. Iomedae...is not, actually, the sort of person whom Need would usually choose and bond to – though, indeed, in nearly any situation Need would be honored to fight beside her. Need was, in life, a master swordswoman with half a century of battlefield experience, and she carried those skills with her into - whatever she is now, because it's certainly not 'dead'. She can grant that skill to her bearer. 

Iomedae is much, much better than her. Need would almost be jealous, if that weren't obviously stupid and also below her dignity. And, while she isn't a mage, it looks like under normal circumstances she would have access to both magic and healing. Via...the power of her god? This is one of the things Need has many questions about. 

 

But the danger she is about to face isn't one they can hold off by wielding a sword. She has very little in the way of the simple utility magic that Velgarth mages use as a matter of course, including something as basic as a heat-spell. 

This is the first time in nearly a thousand years that Need will be walking, willingly, into a fight - if you can call it that - that she isn't at all sure she can win. 

 

It's almost refreshing. 

Permalink Mark Unread

Urtho's mages are ready to Gate Iomedae and a small river-barge as far north as they possibly can. It's going to be a blind Gate, so they aren't exactly sure where she's going to land, and once through it, she should confirm that she's not in sight of land. 

 

Ma'ar should be able to Gate to her if she's wearing one of Urtho's protective talismans; she should be the only person north of Predain with one, so it would be a unique target. They do also have portable permanent Gate-thresholds for battlefield use, but only, like, three of them, and Ma'ar is not keyed to the Tantaran Gate-network and almost certainly shouldn't be. 

Permalink Mark Unread

She can do that. She's wearing a bunch of Urtho's protective talismans. And Need will check for any minds in reach of Thoughtsensing, which has fairly impressive range. Though she's guessing from the fact Bastet told her to go north that it's the right place to be, which means not inhabited.

Permalink Mark Unread

Then Iomedae and Need can get onto a river-barge. It's tiny, because they can't afford a Gate-threshold that would fit anything bigger, but with a roofed gazebo-type structue on top that might keep out some of the elements; it's also currently looking stranded and undignified in the middle of one of the stone plazas outside Urtho's Tower. There's some cold-weather gear for her to borrow. 

Four Adepts will work in concert to build an unscaffolded horizontal Gate-threshold under them, and direct it as far north as they can reach, which should hopefully be another thousand miles. They're going to try to aim for very close to the surface of the water, but blind Gates are less accurate - mostly on the north-south and east-west bearing, it's rarer to accidentally try to Gate high in the air or deep underground, but it's harder over running water and it seems worse to overshoot in the underwater direction. There might be a bit of a fall. Fortunately Iomedae is sturdy. 

 

- there is indeed a fall of about fifteen feet, and they're smashing down onto a mix of dark water, and gray icepack and slush. The sky is overcast, the exact same shade as the ice all around them. The horizon in all directions is flat and featureless grey, save for the occasional humps of larger icebergs. 

It's incredibly cold, for about three seconds before Need taps some of Iomedae's spectacular life-force and casts a heat-spell, pending getting a proper weather-barrier up. 

Permalink Mark Unread

:All right. Er, who is this Kiyamvir Ma'ar and why exactly are we telling him to Gate here?: 

Permalink Mark Unread

:Commander of Predain's forces. I am worried that the cultists will target him in order to break the ceasefire. I don't know why they'd want that, but if they don't like what I've done since I arrived here and it's mostly negotiate the peace, one obvious guess is that they don't like the peace. If I were them I'd try simultaneously to take me out and restart the fighting. So I want to give him my ring of evasion. It might be really helpful for surviving the superweapon, but I'm not actually sure, and I do think it'll ensure he survives anything short of the superweapon. Urtho thought it was a good idea, presuming he's not behind this whole thing, and - I'm willing to bet he isn't. By all accounts he's not one who works with the gods -- an unsurprising extension of his general inability to understand the incentives and motivations of actors he can't mindread.: It's a fairly vicious insult, taken in one way, but she doesn't think of it that way. Ma'ar is an important quantity here so she's spent a lot of thought sizing him up, and now she can predict him better. :Urtho thought he'd take being offered the ring very well, and he's flatly more important to a successful peace here than I am. I don't think there's anyone else on the Predain side who will agree to pre-war borders; they're winning and Tantara has much better land.:

Permalink Mark Unread

A burst of dry mental laughter. :I see. That kind of man. Well, if he commanded Predain's forces into a war they were winning, he can't be completely useless. I'd be curious to meet him: 

Pause, while Need finishes the weather-barrier, and then a solid mage-barrier to keep out the spray of freezing water that occasional gusts of wind are flinging into the barge. It's suddenly much cozier. They can have a glowing golden mage-light to make it cheerier, too, Need has a ridiculous surfeit of mage-energy to work with now that she's even shallowly tapping Iomedae's life-force. 

:- Want me to Mindspeak him? I probably can if he's anywhere on the continent, my range is based on how powerful my bearer is and you're - something else: 

Permalink Mark Unread

: - sure. Urtho's people were going to communicate through the channels I've set up but I don't know how vulnerable those are to Vkandis's interference and the sooner the better, really.:

Permalink Mark Unread

:Of course. ...I haven't met the man, could you think about him where I can see it? Can't target him just off a name and title, but I probably could if I'd met him face to face and formed an opinion of his character, even if I'd never read his mind: 

Permalink Mark Unread

Iomedae can go through their face to face interaction in detail. He Gated in, apparently to order his men - who Iomedae was slaughtering, it's extremely difficult for her to not use lethal force here compared to at home - to surrender. She went after him, flying, using the Boots of Speed to hurry herself up, calling a litany of entanglement to pin him in place - he could probably have Gated out despite it, it wouldn't have done anything to prevent him falling through a hole in the ground beneath him, but she was hoping he wouldn't know that -

She told him to surrender, because she pretty much always tells people to surrender unless it's a situation where she somehow can't accept their surrender, and he responded, though by the time he did she was actually already in the middle of stabbing him.

When she gives her sword the Brilliant Energy enhancement it goes right through any matter that isn't living, including Mage Armor and similar force spells, and on top of that when she's actually trying to deal damage - and she was - she hits very hard. His defenses weren't adequate. She still had healing, then, so she healed him - it really expands her scope of action a lot to have healing, she dearly misses it - and then they talked. He was concerned for his soldiers. She approved of that. He was grateful that she'd talked Urtho into discussing terms, which was - surprising, she hadn't imagined that the winning side of this war particularly wanted a pre-war borders peace - but of course, sides are made up of many actors, and Ma'ar constrained by the acceptability of his preferred solution to Predain's other leadership -

- she didn't ask him for his word not to Gate out. She didn't think he'd keep it, and you can - cause people a lasting sort of injury, by putting whatever desire they have to be honorable and trustworthy that strongly at odds with their safety, by forcing them to learn about themselves that they are lying when they give their word -

- and eventually he alerted her of Sheiknam's movements and she decided to let him go at once so she could deal with that, which she should in fact have done sooner, here's her undetailed analysis of what heuristics would have outperformed her existing ones in this case, though she isn't necessarily going to switch to them off a single incident -

Permalink Mark Unread

That's enough to go off. Need also has several new questions but it can wait. 

 

She reaches, out and out and out (Iomedae will be able to feel that Need is drawing on her own life-force, though it's a tiny trickle compared to the total she has to offer) – it's in fact going to take a while to pick his mind out of an entire country, if Iomedae can't give her any hints about where he is on a map, though his mind is a very distinctive one... 

She finds him eventually, where 'eventually' is about ten minutes, so almost certainly still faster than the letter that Urtho's people would have dispatched once she was safely out of their country. 

:Are you Kiyamvir Ma'ar?: 

Permalink Mark Unread

Ma'ar is in a war-meeting with three different generals and it's really not a good time to nearly jump out of his skin. What is that. He doesn't recognize the mindvoice at all and is fairly sure it isn't human. 

:What: 

Permalink Mark Unread

:I'm Need, but that doesn't matter right now, it's Iomedae who wants to talk to you: And probably the simplest thing to do here is just to pull Iomedae into the link, like she did before for Shayeen. 

Permalink Mark Unread

:The Church of Vkandis is interfering, probably with intent to kill me, maybe with intent to cause trouble beyond that. I've written a letter, but I don't know how long it'll take to reach you. I have a protective magic item for you, if you are willing to Gate to me to get it. I don't know how much urgency there is.:

Permalink Mark Unread

:- I heard about the missing weapon. I have not yet received such a letter: Which isn't suspicious yet, turnaround times can be up to thirty minutes, but he would expect his people to hurry with a message that important, so he should probably send out orders to check on their communication-channels and make sure there are no messengers dead in implausible accidents or something. :Are you going to tell me your location, or do I have your permission to anchor a search-spell on you or your possessions?:

Pause. He seems indecisive about something.

:...Also, if you think you are the main target, will it put you in further danger to give up your protections? It is - not impossible that your death here would be even less - recoverable for the peace efforts, than mine:

(Because he'll come back, not immediately, but maybe still in time. Though Ma'ar isn't sure that's all of it. He also just, well, feels invested in Iomedae not dying.) 

Permalink Mark Unread

:I'm north of you. The superweapon has a very large radius; I wanted to be somewhere where an attack targeting me would have as little collateral damage as possible. You may Gate to me off Urtho's protective artifacts, if you'd like. My assessment is that in fact an attack on Predain by the Church of Vkandis in which you are killed would be substantially more damaging to the peace efforts, though if you're confident in whoever would end up in charge in Predain that could change things.:

Permalink Mark Unread

She didn't actually say which kind of Urtho's protective artifacts but he can make a guess, and off that plus knowing that she's to the north and presumably very far to the north, his search-spell should be able to find her within a minute. 

:- Oh. That is - a very good idea, actually, I am wondering if I ought also consider it, if - if you think an attack on Predain is likely to be primarily an assassination attempt on me personally. ...I think the ceasefire would hold for - long enough - if there were no other casualties and Urtho made it very clear that the attack had been against orders. I am much less sure it would hold if thousands more of our people were dead as well: 

Permalink Mark Unread

:If there is an attack on Predain the intent would almost certainly be to break the ceasefire, and I don't think they'd target you over another target likelier to achieve that. But I don't know. I was taken aback by this whole situation. It has multiple opposed god-interventions; at home those gods would almost always have negotiated into inaction.:

Permalink Mark Unread

:...Then I think I ought be where I can direct my people, but - somewhere not otherwise an obvious target: 

Probably. He hates not knowing, hates not having time to gather all the information that would inform that decision and carefully reason through the considerations, hates being out of control. He is mostly keeping this under control; he's scared, but it's a quiet resigned background fear, not panic. With the intimacy of Mindspeech, it does still leak through a little. 

:- Located you. Gate in five seconds: And if Iomedae doesn't warn him off, there will in five seconds be a Gate. Ma'ar stumbles, slightly, as he crosses the threshold into the boat; it's rocking gently on the water, and he's been using magic hard for candlemarks and is very tired. 

Permalink Mark Unread

Iomedae acknowledges him with a nod. She continues to not seem afraid, however improbable that is.  She takes off the Ring of Evasion (replaces it with the usual ring of Deflection), hands it to him. 

Permalink Mark Unread

He meets her eyes as levelly as he can. Accepts the ring, and examines it with mage-sight. At short range like this, he can Mindspeak Iomedae directly. :Do I need to do anything in particular to use it?: 

Permalink Mark Unread

:It should work as long as you wear it and as long as you are not wearing others of the same make on the same hand - they interfere with each other in that case. I'd offer to test it for you, but none of my magic creates the area effects it is designed to shield against.:

Permalink Mark Unread

He nods. :What does it actually do? I cannot make any sense of the spell by looking at it, or - see how it would interact with my other shielding: 

Permalink Mark Unread

:It enhances other defenses by making it the case that, if you have successfully mitigated the effects a harm has on you, it has no effects at all. If you shielded yourself instinctively in time, it makes the shield adequate however large the explosion. That sort of thing.:

Permalink Mark Unread

:That - is not the sort of thing that would be possible, with our magic, but I will take your word for it on that is possible with yours:

And he bows his head, briefly. It feels like there should be words, to describe - whatever feeling he’s having - but they aren’t coming to mind. It’s not a feeling he has ever in his life had reason to try to convey. And they don’t have time to spare.

:…I am very grateful. I will— if I have an opportunity to come to your aid, at a cost I can afford, I will do so.:

He raises his hands to start the return Gate. Pauses. :- Is the sword with Mindspeech relevant context that I might need to know -?:

Permalink Mark Unread

:This is Need, she's helping me out. As an intervention from Bastet, we think. If I survive this, she'll probably be why. If I don't you should probably someday go trawl the ocean, she might be down there with a lot of valuable magic items.:

Permalink Mark Unread

:…I see: It’s rather obvious that he doesn’t especially see. :I - plan to have someone scrying the area, if that is all right with you? I - imagine there are not very many scenarios where you survive at all but are incapacitated and would benefit from being picked up, but - I can at least retrieve Need before she has sunk very far: Pause. :…If she wishes, that is: This part is addressed to Need as well.

Permalink Mark Unread

Another peal of mental laughter. :This one knows how to treat powerful ladies who he oughtn’t offend. Yes, young man, I wouldn’t turn that down:

Permalink Mark Unread

Ma’ar nods, his expression very controlled. He starts to build the Gate.

Permalink Mark Unread

:Most things that really matter can go very badly as well as very well. If we don't speak again - be careful.:

Permalink Mark Unread

...Ma'ar is fairly sure that this advice is aimed at a far broader category of 'things that can go very badly' than just the superweapon and the potential Vkandis plot. He is equally sure that he doesn't have even a tenth of the pieces he would need, yet, to actually follow that advice. 

Well. Hopefully - he hates that word, anytime you find yourself having the thought that you're depending on hope, probably something is about to go horribly wrong and you're about to lose - but he has nothing else, right now, so. Hopefully Iomedae is as powerful as he thinks she might be. Hopefully Iomedae survives. Hopefully she...still wants to help, afterward. 

He nods to her, and steps back into Predain, and drops the Gate. 

Permalink Mark Unread

Need is, for some reason, radiating smugness. 

 

 

...The reason becomes clear once the Gate is properly down, when she addresses Iomedae, and in a rather different and more gossipy tone than she's used so far. :Iomedae, you haven't given me the slightest reason to think you're looking for a man, so do tell me to jump in a fire if you don't, but - bloody gods, girl, he's fallen for you hard. You could make him yours with hardly any effort at all. And I'd be the first to point out that most men are terrible, but he might not be. I think you could train him up rather nicely, if you wanted: 

Permalink Mark Unread

This is - genuinely unexpected! The comment, more than the fact about Ma'ar, though she's also surprised by that. He Gated in, took the ring, and Gated out mostly without comment. Most people who have fallen madly in love do more attempting to spend time around you than that. 

 

I don't know if I'm staying, she points out. And most people are worse at reasoning when they're in love. She experienced that once and promptly called a halt to it. 

Permalink Mark Unread

Another dry laugh :Most people are terrible. You'd expect loving someone terrible to make you worse at thinking. He wanted to stay. He couldn't justify it on strategic grounds, he knows he can't protect you better than you can already protect yourself, but he badly wanted to. ...Though, eh, you're right to be careful. He might turn out to be terrible after all

She'll change the subject, though. Since they're now alone in a grey featureless ocean of slush and icebergs, rocking gently in the wind but cozy behind a mage-barrier, the light fading out of the sky around then. (It's only late afternoon, but in the polar north, at this time of year, the days are short.) 

:So. You're - honestly I'm not even sure if you're human, and I can't read your thoughts beyond what you're showing me on purpose. Where are you from, how did you get to where you are, who in the name of the Twain is this god of yours?: 

Permalink Mark Unread

More comfortable territory.

 

She is a paladin. At home, that would all by itself tell people almost everything they needed to know about her; paladins work hard to make sure that they are accurately understood everywhere they might need to operate. Much of the power of a paladin order is that the gods have vouched for the character of everyone in it, and the order for its members on a finer-grained level than that. People should be able to trust paladins, not just if they are themselves geniuses and clever negotiators but even if they aren't; people should expect to be dealt with justly. And people should frankly be afraid. Paladins are fearless and good at killing things. Iomedae is really, really good at killing things, and has not shaped herself in such a way as to hesitate to resort to it when her evaluation is that it's necessary. 

 

She's from Golarion, a place that is so strange that none of the strangenesses of this world have struck her as something that couldn't be at home, a place with dozens of different kinds of magics that vary from one another more than Gifts do, and dozens of gods from Aroden, her ally and her friend, to Asmodeus, who she intends to kill someday when she's a grown up god herself. Avistan is ruled by Taldor, a declining empire that is in the background of her life mostly as a source of supplies and immense frustration, a place that feels broken on a very deep level she has no idea how to fix. She founded her own knightly order, partly to test whether everything is always broken like that or if it's possible to avoid, and it is possible to avoid. The Knights of Ozem are good. The thing that she has built to be her Church once she ascends is good. It's possible for things to be better, it's possible to give people guidance that guides them well and not badly. It's very hard, but she doesn't mind that.

 

Some people say that paladin orders make predictable mistakes in the direction of - releasing people who will do evil again, preferring inaction to blood on their own hands, being manipulable because of their desire to appear righteous. People do not in fact say this about the Knights of Ozem. There is an hourglass, in their main training hall, whose every grain of sand - thirty thousand of them - is a person dying. They turn it over ever day. It's their best estimate of the count across all of Golarion. A paladin of the Knights of Ozem repents of every one of those deaths, when they pray before sleep, not just the ones they personally caused. Iomedae has herself made estimates of the numbers across all creation. They're probably a thousand times higher. It's those that she reflects on before sleep. 

 

You have to be careful, as a human, when you lift a heavy load, to lift it correctly, so you don't wretch your back and have lifelong back problems if you're too poor to afford magical healing. You have to be similarly careful, to take on the responsibility for everything in the universe going correctly without doing yourself an injury magical healing can't fix. You have to possess, already, the compassion of the loving gods, the conviction that you and everyone deserve peace and joy and growth and comfort; you have to love people, really and sincerely, to see their flaws without turning away from them in contempt and disgust. You have to love yourself, to see your own failures clearly enough you can grow out of them. You have to have your own measure, so you don't try things you can't achieve. You have to learn the strength to do things every day that will probably fail, and hurt, because if they were to succeed they would have been worth it. You have to be ready to kill people without ever forgetting that they should have lived, that in a world where you were better and stronger you wouldn't have needed to kill them. It's hard for Iomedae and harder, as far as she can tell, for everyone else. She's watched hundreds of zealous young knights make the same mistakes, try to fling themselves into a self-destructive self-limiting sacrificial desperation that is both the logical consequence of recognizing the stakes and a totally unhelpful attitude to have towards them. She knows now how to talk them through it but not how to protect them from ever getting there in the first place. The teachings of her church, once she has one, will be first and foremost a steady accounting of all the mistakes that brilliant ambitious determined people make when they decide that the world is intolerable and they're going to fix it, and they'll make the mistakes anyway, just maybe recover a little faster.


Ma'ar's mistakes are - not the usual ones, exactly, if she indeed interprets Ma'ar as the kind of person that she is, that her knights are, the kind of person whose stubborn conviction that they need to fix everything in the world crystallizes, on contact with reality, into 'I still need to do that but it's really really hard' instead of into some gentler things. His mistakes certainly remind her of some of the usual ones, but Iomedae is in fact not the kind of person who would conquer a country and provoke a world-risking war. Cooperation is the most powerful tool available to people who want to make things better; they share aims, in a way Evil never can and never will. To want to fix everything for everyone is to have common ground with everyone. 

 

- mostly.  She has spent the last several decades of her life leading the crusade against Tar-Baphon, an evil necromancer who looked likely to take over the world. They are fairly sure, by now, that they'll be able to push him back and imprison him at Gallowspire, but it's probably years and hundreds of thousands more casualties away, and they don't see good prospects of actually killing him in a way that'll stick. (He's a lich. You have to destroy the phylactery. He's probably done at least three of 'have many phylacteries' 'have a phylactery on a space-ship soaring off into the outer reaches of the universe', 'have a phylactery that is metaphysically indestructible' 'make something that Good really doesn't want to destroy, like the key to Rovagug's vault or whatever, your phylactery' and 'make a random unfindable rock at the bottom of the ocean your phylactery'.) He's smarter than Iomedae, by a large margin, smarter even than the smartest wizards on Taldor's side of the crusade. They're going to beat him out of their world, eventually, at an unfathomable cost, but she does not see prospects of actually ending him. 

 

She does not have a lot of common ground with him. She would in the abstract prefer that he flourish, both the person he was when he lived and the twisted person he is now, but it is far outside her power to bring about in a way that protects others from him, the others matter more to her, and she would grieve very little, on ending him.

 

Once he's sealed she means to ascend. She doesn't have the details worked out, but - it does not in truth seem like the hardest thing she's ever done. New gods are weak and powerless, she can infer that that's part of the story, but she'll have a church already fervently praying for her. And Lawful Good's existing pantheon may be kind of frustrating but she doesn't think they're so useless they wouldn't intervene to help make sure she can get there and fix things up.

Permalink Mark Unread

Wow. 

 

 

Iomedae continues to be very impressive. Not a woman Need would choose – at least not now, maybe a much younger Iomedae would have called to her – but a woman after her own heart. Planning to become her own god, because the other gods aren't good enough. Need can respect that. Also paladins are an excellent concept. Bestet should really steal the idea and copy it over here, it'd fit well. 

 

Most of what Iomedae is saying is very...philosophical...in a way that Need can't quite engage with. Need considers her own goals to be very simple; she helps the vulnerable by giving them the power to help themselves. (Well, vulnerable women, but she can manage that one step of abstraction, to recognize that anyone and everyone can be vulnerable, and deserve the power to help themselves, when seen from the right angle.) But Need is not, actually, the kind of person– or sword-inhabiting spirit, or whatever she is now - that makes plans on the scale of fixing an entire world. 

Need would not especially have thought, before, that "take on the responsibility for everything in the universe going correctly" was....even in the right category of thing that an actual person could point themselves at. It doesn't just sound hard; it sounds like the kind of thing that would drive someone insane. She - all right, she wouldn't exactly have said that Ma'ar mistakes were precisely the ones she would expect from someone trying to bend their mind toward a problem too big for it, but so important it justified absolute ruthlessness, she's never really thought about what mistakes someone trying to do that would make - but it's not not the kind of mistake she expects, for someone to be in such a hurry, and so distracted by world-scale stakes, that they don't take the time to learn and pay attention to basic tactical realities. 

....She doesn't even really believe that gods point themselves at fixing everything in the universe. For one, what does "correct" even mean, surely that's a phrase you could twist to mean anything. Though maybe the gods of Iomedae's world really are different. 

Crusades against evil necromancers, on the other hand, make perfect sense to her! That's very impressive, and - the sort of thing Need could imagine being involved in, if she were in Iomedae's world. As far as she can tell, the very long list of problems in her own world don't include evil necromancers, and she thinks she would have noticed? 

 

Iomedae still hasn't said much about what Aroden, her own god, is actually like, or about what He's done aside from supporting Iomedae? Presumably He approves of everything she's done, which does narrow it down. But it comes across, that Iomedae respects him deeply, and Need is really very curious about any god that someone like Iomedae, at this point in her illustrious career, can still respect that much. Especially when He is apparently male.

Permalink Mark Unread

They've talked less than one might expect. It's expensive. They spoke enough when she was a young paladin to persuade her that Aroden was in no cases using her in a way that was not in her interests, and that he wanted her to become powerful enough to fix everything. Now she mostly just organizes her thoughts so as to be plain to him in prophecy, and lets him nudge her;  it's cheaper.

Aroden was human, too, and spent much longer human than she plans to, trying to find something that would change the game. The Starstone is the best thing he found, and it changes the game (she suspects) less than he wanted. None of the gods were formerly-human, when Aroden lived; Aroden and she relatedly differ in how much the strategies that made sense for them could rely on trustworthy deals with gods. Aroden is Lawful Neutral, but not because he thinks it's fine to hurt people sometimes or something; He doesn't feel confident that restraining himself to Good is the best way to achieve the results He wants, whereas Iomedae is quite confident that for her the advantages are much larger than the disadvantages. 

 

They both want Hell destroyed, obviously. There really aren't that many mortals or former mortals who aren't lying to themselves and don't want Hell destroyed.

 

She is genuinely looking forward to ascending and being able to really understand Aroden, not the accounts of his activities in life and not the assurances she needed to work for him but the person. She wants to - shape herself a little more than he did to cheaply speak to humans. Her strategy is more based on force of personality than His; she'll lose more if she can no longer speak to people face to face.

Permalink Mark Unread

That makes sense. To the extent anything as weird and philosophical can make sense, to Need. Aroden sounds all right, probably, or at least she's willing to trust Iomedae's assessment there. It's not clear that it even matters that much in the near term, if Aroden can't reach her here. 

...It looks like they might be here for a while, if Vkandis really does wait until dawn, which Need is not at all confident he would. But in the meantime, they might as well keep each other alert by talking. Does Iomedae have any questions about Velgarth? Or observations about Velgarth that might not have stood out to a local, that sounds intriguing too. 

Permalink Mark Unread

She wants to hear all about Velgarth! Also if she can teach Need more swordfighting technique, that sounds potentially useful when Need goes back to helping other people.

Permalink Mark Unread

Need's knowledge of Velgarth is broad and varied but it's a random and eclectic sample. She does not have a very high-fidelity memory for actual events, if they happened more than one bearer ago, and she's only been with Shayeen for six weeks. Also, everything she says is very much colored by her personal opinions, which mostly relate to how something affects women specifically. 

She can tell Iomedae quite a lot about the River Kingdoms, a chaotic collection of small city-states around the sprawling mouth of a large river where it spreads out into a delta and meets the southern ocean. They're kind of awful, mostly; women have few rights and usually aren't educated, and they constantly marry their cousins (Need doesn't actually have a logical argument for why this is bad but she doesn't approve), and they're constantly warring between themselves. 

She has some more vague explanations of other geopolitics, more distant from Tantara and Predain as well as nearby. The Haighlei Empire, on the far western coast of the continent, gets a mixed verdict; it's not a terrible place to live but it has weirdly strict customs on literally everything, and often this is bad for women, though obviously some individual women do very well, and at least they don't ban women from positions of power. The Ceej Empire does that and it's terrible. Also there's a region where the god Atet is heavily worshipped and it's terrible for women. She's pretty sure, at least, that was a couple of bearers ago and she can't recall specifics. 

 

Need would be delighted to learn swordfighting from Iomedae but she's not, uh. Very good at learning things, anymore. It seems to come of being technically dead and embodied in a sword. 

Permalink Mark Unread

Huh. That makes Iomedae sad, it feels unacceptable to her, though not necessarily in a way where she ought to try right now to fix it, which she has no idea how to do anyway. Everybody ought to get to learn and grow.


She's curious. About the Heighlei, about Atet and why He's terrible for women, about what sorts of problems Need finds and how they could be made to stop happening.

Permalink Mark Unread

(Need is a somewhat frustrating conversation partner. It does genuinely seem like there's some key lack of mental flexibility, there.) 

The Haighlei Empire is a set of multiple sub-kingdoms along the far western coast and island chains. Their main traits are, one, a very conservative legal system and culture; they can officially only change any of their very extensive written laws and customs at the time of a solar eclipse every few decades. Perhaps relatedly, their norms around the use of Gifts are very tightly restricted. Children recognized as Gifted are taken from their parents and trained in Empire-run schools, and those who fail to live up to their standards for loyalty and trustworthiness have their Gifts burned out and are sent home in disgrace. Mages are allowed to learn a range of spells, at least, but anyone with other Gifts - which they all refer to as mind-Gifts, even ones like Fetching and Firestarting that are really not especially mind-focused - is regarded with much more suspicion. Even the Mindspeakers (and those with related mind-Gifts like Empathy) who pass the stringent requirements are only allowed to use their Gift for one purpose, a particular technique that lets them use Mindspeech to detect honesty versus lies. 

 

Need isn't sure if Atet is terrible or if it's just the result of mortals running the temple order being terrible, but it's written in the laws of their faith that all mortals have a place in the world, which can be high or low, and it's religiously correct for those in higher positions to have power and authority over those lower down. And women are always lower than men, which has the predictable consequences. Also they're promised an afterlife that can be more or less pleasant depending on one's social position and how well one fit into it, but Need actually has no idea if that's...true...or just a story. 

Permalink Mark Unread

It could be true and many ways it could be true are a big problem. She'll look into it, if she survives to stick around in this world. 

 

 

She has the spell Keep Watch, which she intends to use instead of sleep, these next few days. She promised to take her rest if she rested during the hours from dawn to noon, though, so she doesn't cast it yet, just stays up late into the night talking to Need. 

 

They do rehearse the plan. With six seconds' notice Iomedae can be winged, in the air, and a hundred twenty feet away, which might somewhat reduce the force of the explosion. She's not sure if she'll have six seconds' notice. She hasn't seen anyone build a Gate that fast except Ma'ar but the people building Gates in front of her mostly haven't been trying for speed. Presumably they'll do their best to not make the Gate noticeable ahead of time. If she were them she'd actually open it above her and Need, but Need might still be able to detect the signature of a Gate opening at some distance?

 

Permalink Mark Unread

Need thinks it takes a lot longer than six seconds to build a Gate, and especially so for a Gate to a random location the caster has never seen before, without a doorway-threshold, with the Gate-search anchored on Iomedae or a magic item she's wearing. Ma'ar could do that, clearly, but Need herself can't. 

That being said, most of the time required to raise a Gate is building the departure threshold and running the search for the destination, and won't be visible to Need even given the range to which she can boost her mage-sight while drawing on Iomedae's spectacular reserves (which is a lot, it might even be enough to detect a Gate at fifty miles, but they won't be starting from fifty miles away.) 

Need does not really expect them to have more than a second or two of notice, if the attackers are at all competent at timing when they set off the weapon – and especially if they're willing to die in the process, which would simplify the timing a lot from their perspective.

But if she and Iomedae have even half a second of notice, that's enough for Need to raise maximum-strength shields. Which can be very powerful, given the strength of Iomedae's life-force, but which she doesn't want to hold all night since even Iomedae might start to get tired. 

Permalink Mark Unread

In that case, probably they should not particularly plan to flee; Need can put up maximum-strength shields when she senses a Gate, and Iomedae will cast Protection from Energy but plausibly not finish in time, and either that with all of Urtho's best protective equipment will be sufficient, or it won't. She isn't really sure how to guess. If Tar Baphon cast an Intensified Maximized Empowered Fireball at her, for some reason, and she had none of her energy protection up, for some reason, and she didn't dodge it, for some reason, that would not even come very close to killing her; if he did it three times, that would probably do it. Is Urtho's unfathomable superweapon, mitigated however much Need and Urtho himself can mitigate it, more like a single Intensified Maximized Empowered Fireball, or more like three of them? It's a question for a wizard, if it's a question anyone at all can answer.

 

Her guess is that she'll survive because Bestet's actions here don't make a lot of sense otherwise, but it could be Bestet wanted Need to meet her for reasons other than to save her. 

 

She'll think about it for a solid hour, in case there's some other consideration to think of. But if there isn't, then there isn't; something being very high stakes does not always mean it's productive to keep puzzling over.

Permalink Mark Unread

Need will do her best to help Iomedae think about other considerations! ....She is not that good at it and she gets impatient with it well before Iomedae does. 

Permalink Mark Unread

And the night passes. The sky remains overcast; unless Iomedae has a very good internal clock, it's going to be hard to tell how close it is to dawn. 

 

 

 

 

- and then, at some point when there is not yet any indication that dawn is approaching - 

Permalink Mark Unread

:GATE: 

 

 

(And Need will, of course, instantly raise every shield she can – drawing on Iomedae's reserves, which are plentiful but for this it's still enough for Iomedae to notice.) 

Permalink Mark Unread

She activates the Boots of Speed instantly, even though she's not planning to run anywhere unless Need happens to give her a bearing; she's used to combat with speed enhancement, and it adds some pleasant clarity. She starts to cast Protection from Energy. They could not in fact think of anything better for her to do with the time (and figured it would be possible to interpret as a violation of the collateral-damage agreement that she genuinely appreciates Vkandis for making if they were to make use of the fact His servants told her dawn and have Protection from Energy and Resist Energy up already.) They debated jumping into the water, but she'll sink if unconscious, and the more rapidly she's done that the more inconvenience she presents potential rescuers; they debated taking off the armor, but it gives her damage reduction. 

So she just pulls her cloak of resistance over her head and shields it with a magic gauntlet and with the other hand casts Protection from Energy, on the principle that if she finishes the spell in time it'd be convenient. 

If she were pulling off this assassination attempt, and knew her enemy to have limited expendable resources that endure a short duration only, the first Gate would be a false alarm. However, she has as it happens never found herself in a situation where her counterparty was lawful enough they could negotiate a venue for an assassination attempt but could not negotiate anything better than that. Well, there's a first time for everythin -

 

That's when the weapon's blast hits her.

Permalink Mark Unread

(Need is pretty distracted with raising every shield she can, and does not have a lot of mental flexibility especially in emergencies, and cannot actually give Iomedae a direction to run within the couple of seconds it takes before the blast reaches them.) 

Permalink Mark Unread

Ma'ar has had someone personally watching Iomedae's location with scrying since ten minutes after he left. 

 

 

- for the last candlemark, he's been doing it himself. He can't sleep anyway - he spent a while trying - and it's close enough to dawn in Tantara that, if his guess is right that Vkandis' priests are the ones who gave the deadline and will base it on their own location (and if his lower-confidence guess is right and they care about the terms they gave at all, but he's increased the odds on that, if they were to break the agreement they should have done it sooner) the attack will probably happen within this window. 

 

What does he see? 

Permalink Mark Unread

The boat is vaporized instantaneously around her, and the water boils instantaneously around the boat, and there's nothing but fire as far as the eye can see. There is no reasonable way anyone could have survived that.

Permalink Mark Unread

Oh, well, she dodged it, so that's fine.

(Need's shield, an astounding impossible wall of protection, sufficient against a hundred Fireballs, shattered at once, Urtho's talismans flaired and burned out, Protection from Energy spent itself down in an instant - whatever mitigated the explosion after that was some greater stranger thing -)

- however, all her exposed skin is now being boiled off, which is slightly less fine. She reflexively tries to Lay On Hands. There's nothing there. She puts Resist Energy (fire) up though she's not actually sure that scalding steam is Fire -

 

- and she cries out to Aroden, as she hasn't done since she was very young, as she does not in fact usually do even when dying. Don't let me be lost here, she pleads of him as her nerves one by one cease reporting boiling-steam-related-sensation -

- and of course the implicit conditional is 'unless grabbing me is so expensive it wouldn't in fact be worth it', but she is in fact not quite inhuman enough to, in that instant, mean it.

Permalink Mark Unread

Oh. 

 

Ma'ar raises a departure Gate-threshold within less than a second, and – holds it stable without finishing the search. It's draining and distracting but not quite distracting enough to make him lose the scrying-spell entirely, and - he wouldn't be surprised if Iomedae could survive that (....he would be surprised but - not very - he's not looking directly at that thought right now) but he couldn't. 

So, however desperately impatient he feels right now, he needs to wait long enough to be sure that he can survive - and, more relevantly, remain functional enough to actually mount a rescue - if he Gates into the aftermath. 

Permalink Mark Unread

 

 

 

There's a lot of ocean, and a lot of wind. The waters will cool, the steam will clear. It probably doesn't even take that long. Things are already visibly improving on the scry when the distant thunder of a massive explosion becomes audible in Predain.

Permalink Mark Unread

Ma'ar has very very good shields and a lot of additional talismans and is not even going to wait that long before he Gates himself in - 

 

- to five hundred yards above the ocean, because he isn't an idiot (and has been here before and can pull off a Gate to this level of precision) and he can definitely survive a hundred-yard fall onto water with all his shields up but landing at the center of the heat will take a higher toll. 

From the moment he's through the Gate, he's flinging his Thoughtsensing out to its full range, which isn't spectacular but should be at least five miles, and he should be able to detect even the faint signature of unconscious minds at one or two miles - if they're unshielded, but presumably Iomedae or Need's shields would have gone down well before either of them lost consciousness (and if either of them is conscious then either they'll get out on their own or they'll be reaching for him actively)... 

 

Can he find either of them? 

Permalink Mark Unread

Sure! Well underwater. 

Permalink Mark Unread

The Gate is down within a fraction of a second and Ma'ar is falling toward the water. At which point he can figure out how to get below the water to Iomedae. 

 

...He should maybe have figured out better heat-absorption shields before attempting this plan, because despite having waited until it looked less hot on a scry, this really hurts a lot - he's pretty sure he waited long enough that it's not going to kill him...

...probably...

assuming he can get to Healers after this...

Permalink Mark Unread

- actually he's just going to Gate to below the point where he can sense Iomedae's mind, partly for strategic reasons and partly - mostly - because maybe it will be cold down there and that sounds, uh, better. Than this. 

 

Gate. Down. 

 

- can he still find Iomedae's mind? Is she above him like he aimed for? 

Permalink Mark Unread

It is indeed cold, this deep underwater. Iomedae is up and to the - left? Need is - apparently right next to her.

Permalink Mark Unread

Ma'ar is a decent swimmer, and can move himself through the water by flinging repeated small fireballs to create tiny steam-explosions and shove him in the direction he wants to go. This is less comfortable than a short-range Gate but costs him less total energy, and he should have enough either way to get home but he doesn't, actually, know what sort of situation he's going to be Gating back into. 

 

:Iomedae?: he tries. After a moment, :- Magic sword?: (He can't remember if she introduced herself, and if so by what name.) 

Permalink Mark Unread

Need does not answer. 

Permalink Mark Unread

Iomedae super does not answer. Other people at -35HP are dead.

Permalink Mark Unread

It's all right. He can still sense her mind, so she's alive. He can get her out. 

...The question is to where. It's not obvious. He needs to bring her somewhere with Healers, and Predain may or may not be safe– really he shouldn't bring her to the capital of either Predain or Tantara, both would be obvious next targets, but he can't exactly summon Healers on demand to arbitrary locations and he also can't recall all of his own side's deployments perfectly– 

 

- he's reached her, or rather run into her headfirst, so fine he's Gating them to - this particular major mining town in the southwest of Predain, it's well away from the front and under normal circumstances should have a lot of Healers and even under war circumstances it might have one Healer on-site. And it's not near the front or near the capital, it's as random a choice as he can manage so hopefully   if he's lucky  neither of those are strategies but maybe Vkandis' servants won't already be there -

(he should have made contingency-plans for this - except why would have done that -)

- is Need still in Iomedae's hand or does he need to grab her separately before he raises his hopefully-not-doomed Gate?

Permalink Mark Unread

Need is absolutely still in Iomedae's unconscious grasp. Possibly Iomedae instinctively sleeps with a sword in her hand or perhaps her flesh has been welded to Need - looks like it's the second one -

Permalink Mark Unread

Sloppy underwater unscaffolded Gates aren't very precise anyway and Ma'ar is going to cast a wide threshold, even though it'll tire him out even further. 

 

- and they tumble through, along with quite a lot of very cold water, into the town square of a mining outpost. 

:This is Adept Kiyamvir Ma'ar: he Broadsends to everyone within range, which is not a very large range considering his current level of exhaustion and the extent to which all of the skin on his body feels scalded. :Require a Healer now - maximum-priority order...: 

 

He is not himself a Healer but he has basic field-Healing training because it would be stupid not to. He's not sure how useful it will be, here - does Iomedae look like she's still breathing - 

Permalink Mark Unread

Somehow....yes? Her lungs are completely full of water, but her chest is still moving like maybe this time it'll work.

 

 

Permalink Mark Unread

Moving is really hard right now, apparently, but Ma'ar manages to sit up, and he rolls Iomedae onto her side and thumps her between the shoulder blades (normally he would be more tempted to do this gently but he isn't at all, right now) and he yells again in Mindspeech. :- get Healers in now by Gate - my orders - if there's no one on site -: 

 

...and Iomedae is ridiculous, so he's going to keep poking her mind over and over, :- Iomedae breathe it's Ma'ar wake up just breathe -: 

(He's very exhausted but it's all right, he can manage not to collapse for a little while longer.)

Permalink Mark Unread

She will cooperatively vomit a lot of water (and - blood? scalded flesh?) onto the ground but she's absolutely still deeply unconscious. 

Permalink Mark Unread

That seems concerning! Ma'ar is not a Healer and really has no idea how concerning he should find that!

...he's going to switch to Mindspeaking Need repeatedly, since maybe swords are less physically damaged by the explosion that just hit both of them. 

Permalink Mark Unread

Need is not currently answering Mindspeech queries. (She relies quite heavily on her bearer's mental capacity for any kind of reasoning or strategic planning; right now she's instinctively Healing Iomedae, but not doing anything else.) 

Permalink Mark Unread

There are a couple of very junior Healers on-site and they're now running up to the...large puddle of water in the town square?? where Adept Ma'ar (looking terrible) is sitting half-slumped-over the body of a woman who - kind of looks like she was boiled in a cooking pot or something??

But she's somehow not actually dead, so they'll try to get an energy-link up and then check her with Healing-Sight, so they can send an actually-informed report when requesting more Healers. 

 

(Separately, there is a junior mage on-site sending a very panicked report to a different division, because he's been told to remain on high alert but very little else and this makes no sense and seems like something he ought to report on those grounds alone.) 

Permalink Mark Unread

 

 

She appears to have been boiled alive in steam, with severe burns over every inch of her body and also inside her throat and her lungs. There really isn't much skin left and what there is is fused to her armor or her sword. After that, it seems, she drowned. Her lungs are full of water and not coping with it well especially since they'd been scalded first. Her heart is beating at about half a normal speed but very steadily; her brain doesn't seem to yet be suffering from a lack of oxygen though that's not going to last more than another minute, and the sword at her side is feeding her Healing-energy, though it obviously has far, far too much to do. 

Permalink Mark Unread

That's extremely horrifying. Wow.

(The sword is confusing but it's not a note of confusion that has anywhere to go, and it's not killing her so it's not a priority for them.) 

They are not actually sure what to do about this degree of damage, aside from feeding her a lot of additional Healing-energy. and trying to nudge the pathways that will make her lungs react to all the water by coughing (which is also not great for her body, given all the massive tissue damage, but if she's survived this so far it's probably not worse than her not being able to breathe effectively...)

They will very firmly second Ma'ar's order that they need as many Healers as possible here right now

Permalink Mark Unread

Ma'ar is not about to ask for any Healing attention given that Iomedae is obviously much closer to dying, even though he is in quite a lot of pain and it's distracting. 

 

- he should try to reach Urtho with the communication-spell, probably. Tell him that the weapon went off, and he has Iomedae here, and he needs help. 

 

<Urtho?>

Permalink Mark Unread

Urtho would have been way more surprised - and alarmed - to hear this message at nearly any other time. 

However, it's approximately dawn in Tantara, and so he has a very good idea of why. And so hearing anything at all from Ma'ar is...good news. Probably?? Probably. 

<What> 

Permalink Mark Unread

<Weapon set off. Far north, on Iomedae. I - got her out - need more Healers urgently> 

 

....and he hesitates a couple of seconds more before giving the name of the town. This is only partly because he has to take a moment to remember what it would even be called on Tantaran maps. 

Permalink Mark Unread

Permalink Mark Unread

Urtho is incredibly confused and really this is a situation where he would prefer to ask Iomedae for advice except, well. He can't do that, can he. 

(Though he's going to relay an order to have some of his Mindspeakers try for her anyway, in case Ma'ar is just flat-out lying, but - he knows she was expecting the attack to be aimed at her. And that she was planning to offer Ma'ar the ring of evasion, because she - was confident enough that it wasn't his work - what's the likelihood that Ma'ar would come up with this story as a lie, if the attack had been his work, surely not that high...he's pretty sure he isn't being paranoid enough but if it's true then Iomedae might be dying and he can't afford to waste time being suspicious...) 

 

<We will send a dozen of our Healers to your border>

He'll specify a location. None of his own people, that he can think of, actually have a Gate-location to the town Ma'ar named; Urtho wouldn't even be able to point out that town on a map. They might have been the ones to invade, but they never made it that far into Predain's territory. 

If Ma'ar really needs this - if Iomedae really needs this - they can Gate them the rest of the way. 

Permalink Mark Unread

Predain has fewer Healers on hand, but a faster communication loop. They'll have another four on site within less than five minutes. 

Permalink Mark Unread

Permalink Mark Unread

It's all right, everything is fine, Ma'ar is definitely not in agonizing pain right now

How's Iomedae? 

Permalink Mark Unread

A person in this state should be dead, and if they somehow weren't dead they should be dying. You cannot, actually, just burn off all your skin and much of the deep tissue beneath it. It is hard to list all of the things that will immediately go wrong for you. The dying cells will release proteins and cell fragments into your bloodstream, you'll bleed internally and externally, your body will respond to the sudden biomarkers of mass cell death everywhere with panic, your body temperature will plummet without your skin to help maintain it, your fluid balance will swing rapidly into dangerous territory, your kidneys will shut down, and you will contract so many bacterial infections that even a functioning immune system would struggle to fight them off.

 

None of those things are happening. This woman has lost all of her skin to burns and the rest of her is impossibly plugging along, doing precisely what it's supposed to do. Her body temperature is normal. Her blood is normal. She is oozing a lot of fluids from surfaces that aren't supposed to ooze fluids but she's overall well-hydrated. Healers mostly can't spot early stages of infection, that's probably going to be a problem. And her heart is beating slowly and her blood oxygenation is still getting worse - she's coughed out enough water and damaged tissue that she might in principle be actually drawing some air when she breaths, but she can't be getting much oxygen with that much lung damage -

Permalink Mark Unread

The Healers think this is extremely confusing! And despite the bizarre fact that various things that should be rapidly worsening aren't, they - are not sure this is someone they can actually Heal fully back to a healthy functioning state? Even if they can get her through the immediate crisis at all, which is far from certain. 

- but, having given that caveat, they're going to try very hard. 

Permalink Mark Unread

Ma'ar appreciates it.

Also it seems like a good idea to move her somewhere that isn't the middle of the town square, as soon as she's stable enough to be moved without it causing further damage? 

(This unfortunately means that he has to stand up and move and walk. It's fine. He can do that. He is very used to not letting anyone notice that he's in pain.) 

Permalink Mark Unread

- oh, and separately he would like a report on what's been happening elsewhere in Predain. Please. 

Permalink Mark Unread

Meanwhile, there is a moderately tense and very confused negotiation happening at the border! 

(Ma'ar did not think to warn anyone else about his conversation with Urtho.) 

...it seems like probably Healers, who have been confirmed via mage-sight to be actual Healers not mages and who also aren't carrying anything magical at all, are probably not sneaking further superweapons into the kingdom? 

The general in command of this camp is much less sure than he would prefer, but - none of it conflicts with previous reports. He'll send the dozen Tantaran Healers where they're asking to go, by Gate, with another dozen mages guarding them very closely. 

Permalink Mark Unread

Ma'ar has decided very firmly that he's going to simply avoid collapsing in exhaustion until Iomedae is conscious and he can explain what happened. Possibly this is a doomed plan. He isn't really managing to think that far ahead. 

 

He follows the Healers to the administrative center for the mine, which is the only properly shielded building in the town and thus a much better location to stage than the actual Healers' center. 

Permalink Mark Unread

Reports: 

There was...some kind of attack, probably??? on the camp Ma'ar was in until he Gated out. It was not a very effective attack. The mages in question may or may not have been intending to Final Strike if and only if Ma'ar were in range...?

In any case, they're now thoroughly compulsioned and in Predain's custody and the monitors on both sides are aware. 

Permalink Mark Unread

....Ma'ar should probably have some kind of reaction to that. Something more useful than 'well, it sounds like it didn't work.' 

He'll ad-lib some words that hopefully make sense, and send them via communication-spell, and continue sitting with Iomedae in an awkwardly repurposed mine-administrator's office alongside a dozen Tantaran Healers and half that many of his own people's Healers.

He tries not to be too annoying about asking them for updates. 

Permalink Mark Unread

The Tantaran Healers are...somewhat better trained than their Predain counterparts. 

 

- they're also pretty worried about Adept Kiyamvir Ma'ar, who himself looks quite seriously injured? The one who's a Mindspeaker will make sure this is conveyed to the Predain Healers. But in the meantime, Ma'ar is at least not dying (yet), and their other patient maybe is. 

They work very hard. 

Permalink Mark Unread

Their other patient's lungs are recovering. They're still horrendous, to be clear, but she's drawing slow, shallow breaths and there are no signs of further damage from lack of oxygen. In most areas where it was ambiguous how bad the damage was, it's...turning out to be not so bad?

The patient is still not deteriorating in any of the thousand ways you'd really expect. 

Permalink Mark Unread

...It's going to be a long day. 

Permalink Mark Unread

Ma'ar's mage-reserves are in less disastrous shape than the rest of him. He can keep reacting to communication-spell messages for a while.

...A couple of candlemarks, maybe. He still hasn't slept in - over twenty-four candlemarks, at this point. This is not a very sustainable state of affairs. 

Permalink Mark Unread

...Need is far less susceptible to physical damage than Iomedae. And no one has bothered her, after Ma'ar snapped at the first couple of people who tried asking questions. She's still pretty impaired, given that Iomedae continues to be deeply unconscious, but she could in theory manage to Mindspeak either Ma'ar, or someone else, about how he's being an idiot. 

 

However, the situation is hilarious and so she's just going to keep watching it for a while. 

Permalink Mark Unread

(Urtho is very worried! He isn't quite worried enough to try targeting the communication-spell directly to Ma'ar. He will satisfy himself by checking absurdly often with the Tantaran monitors that nothing (else) disastrous is happening on ceasefire-related matters. And also being very annoying to his mages currently working on guarding and dismantling superweapons. It would be so embarrassing if another superweapon went missing and they had to go through all of this again.)

Permalink Mark Unread

Iomedae is drifting in an ocean of agonizing pain. 

She has a reflex for that. It's to cast Lay on Hands on herself. 

 

It doesn't work. She has no idea why. Maybe she's in Hell? 

Permalink Mark Unread

They don't actually have a dedicated Thoughtsenser trying to read her constantly. 

Need is a Mindspeaker, though, and directly bonded to Iomedae right now - shallowly, but less shallowly than she had originally intended, it's been a very intense few candlemarks - and her own awareness is increasing along with Iomedae's. 

 

:Hey: A (gentle) mental slap. :Focus. You're not in Hell. You're alive. In Predain, someplace, I didn't get the name. I assume Ma'ar grabbed us, given how he seems to be obnoxiously hovering at your bedside pretending he's not also horrifically injured. ...If you'd prefer he not dramatically collapse at some point, you could let him know you're conscious? Though personally I think it would be very funny and he'd deserve it: 

Permalink Mark Unread

 

 

 

 

Permalink Mark Unread


- no Lay on Hands because Aroden isn't here. She misses Him. 

 

- might be a followup attempt. She needs to recover faster, she needs to be back on her feet - she makes a motion that's supposed to be sitting up but that has no effects except more agonizing pain and a coughing fit -

 

- Ma'ar - Ma'ar rescued her - good for him, that's not a club with all that many members - Ma'ar is injured - who injured Ma'ar? Did Vkandis do that?

 


She's so tired but she's absolutely not going to fall back asleep until she's safe -

Permalink Mark Unread

:Hey. Stop that. ...Don't think it was a second attack on Ma'ar, he was just a bloody idiot and Gated in before it'd cooled down and he's not as tough as you. Though I can't be too annoyed with him, might've been a close thing that you survived at all and it's cute when a boy is the heroic kind of idiot. I'm working on getting you back on your feet as fast as I can, we've got nearly twenty Healers here doing the same, you're going to be fine:

And, somewhat grudgingly, :- Is there anything I should tell Ma'ar for you before he falls on his face in front of people who'll definitely tell his generals and his king about it?: 

Permalink Mark Unread

:Twenty Healers? I'll be fine by tomorrow even if you just leave me in a ditch somewhere! They should heal Ma'ar, if he needs it!:

Permalink Mark Unread

Technically Need could just tell some of the Healers to do that, but it's been a really boring few candlemarks and it sounds much more entertaining to just yank Ma'ar into a group-link with Iomedae. 

:Hey, idiot, Iomedae says she'll be fine and you should get some Healing for yourself before you pass out. ....Also she had some very sweet things to say. Apparently it's not very many people who've ever rescued her before: 

Permalink Mark Unread

Permalink Mark Unread

Why is this the thing that's happening right now. 

 

...Ma'ar has no idea how to actually respond. 

Permalink Mark Unread

I went to considerable lengths to cause you to not die and if you die anyway I will be so annoyed. 'm scary when I'm annoyed.

Permalink Mark Unread

He almost certainly isn't going to die permanently, he'll get better that is not something Ma'ar should let slip even when he's very tired and also very very very relieved that Iomedae is talking to him. 

(It's still kind of implicitly apparent in the overtones of his Mindspeech that he's...less worried about dying...than someone in his position really ought to be.) 

:The Healers were very worried about you!: he sends instead. :I have definitely not at any point been at risk of dying: 

But he'll grudgingly Mindspeak a few of the Predain Healers anyway and admit, reluctantly, that he may have picked up some injuries in the process of collecting Iomedae after Urtho's weapon went off in the north. And maybe it would be good to get some Healing attention about that. 

Permalink Mark Unread

- they'll have a look at him with Healing-Sight and almost instantly (though very politely) suggest that he should probably be resting in bed while they work on his burns, which are actually quite bad. 

Permalink Mark Unread

Sure okay but can he do that in this room. They made space for one temporary bed in the administrator's office, surely they can find space for two. 

Permalink Mark Unread

Need is cackling about this in Iomedae's head. (She doesn't much care whether Iomedae would rather be resting right now.)

Permalink Mark Unread

Iomedae would like her communications channel to have only important information like what's wrong with Ma'ar and whether someone's in charge right now of preventing further assassination attempts and how many people know she and Ma'ar are in the same place. Also she keeps reflexively healing herself and it keeps not working and it's upsetting every time. 

Permalink Mark Unread

....All right, fine, that's probably rude. Need will instead (somewhat grumpily) be an official communication channel, to convey that:

- Ma'ar has moderate burns over most of his body, but the main thing wrong with him is exhaustion. Unlike Iomedae, he was conscious and holding his breath the whole time and so his lungs weren't damaged. He is not really in any shape to fight right now, which isn't ideal, but he'll recover in a few days. 

- It seems like Ma'ar did manage to delegate some precautions, and also they got back a report on a (rather incompetent) secondary possible-assassination-attempt on Ma'ar, except it happened after he Gated out to try to grab Iomedae – maybe Vkandis thought he wouldn't risk himself for that – and the mages did not in fact Final Strike and are currently prisoners of war in Predain under a lot of compulsions. Need approves. 

- ....Uh, probably kind of a lot of people know that Ma'ar rescued Iomedae, given that he apparently frantically contacted Urtho directly with the communication-spell to get additional Healers. This doesn't necessarily imply the same number of people knowing that they're in the same place, but it would be an obvious inference. 

 

- this was not actually a question Iomedae asked, but no, Ma'ar is probably not very on top of strategic thinking, given his condition – so if Iomedae doesn't trust the subordinates who he would have delegated things to, then...possibly she should not be assuming that the situation is under control. This also feels like a rude sort of thing to be telling Iomedae, given her condition, but Need can only do strategic reasoning to the extent her bearer can, and so cannot just solve this on Iomedae's behalf. 

Permalink Mark Unread

Iomedae takes a mental motion that's like closing her eyes and leaning her head back, though her eyes are kind of sealed shut and her head isn't responding to requests either. :If there's  a hint of trouble here - even just an unexpected Gate - please tell me, there are things I can do.: In particular she can get both herself and Ma'ar back on their feet for a little less than two minutes, which is both not very long and long enough to probably be decisive. 

 

Someone not swimming in an ocean of pain should think about the incompetent secondary assassination attempt. Captured? Have they been interrogated yet? 

Permalink Mark Unread

Right. Need is on that. Two minutes is a plenty for people with their capabilities to handle something, even ten seconds would be enough for Ma'ar to get them out of here. - actually he could plausibly do that now even without Iomedae's intervention, it wouldn't be good for him but Velgarth mages can dig fairly deep into their life-force to cast while exhausted - it's difficult and unpleasant but Ma'ar seems likely to be exceptionally good at it. 

She'll try to get someone to give them a report on the situation with the assassins. 

 

- nevermind, actually she'll try to get Ma'ar to get a report on the assassins and relay it to them, she had been inclined to let him rest but it sounds simpler than arguing with his people, who might decide she shouldn't be here at all if they get too stressed about it. In which case Iomedae will recover anyway but won't have a means of communication, which seems rather costly in itself. 

Permalink Mark Unread

It's bizarrely harder to keep trying to function while lying down with Healers attending him, even though Ma'ar should theoretically be just as capable of Mindspeech and the communication-spell as he was before. 

 

The mages who were captured were read by a Thoughtsenser while being questioned. (It's possible to use compulsions to force someone to tell the truth, and thus dispense with the mindreading, but it takes a lot of skill and it's not standard practice in Predain.) They are in fact followers of Vkandis and part of the same unit that was on detached duty in Urtho's Tower and thus got pulled into weapons-relocation work. None of them personally received a divine vision. They instead received orders via communication-spell from their division commander - probably the same priest who spoke to Iomedae at General Movat's camp - to track Ma'ar's location. This was in itself an unsuspicious order.

At around the time the weapon was discharged in the north (or at least one can infer this was the timing) they were given orders to Gate into Ma'ar's camp and apprehend or kill him. They weren't under compulsions to Final Strike, and during interrogation didn't claim to have been intending it, but - who knows, Vkandis might have been intending to work through them directly? 

 

Ma'ar is not sure what other precautions they should be taking about the Vkandis followers. The rest of them are in Tantara and thus under Urtho's remit and he is demonstrably very bad at telling Urtho what he should do. 

(He is both reluctant to bother Iomedae when she's clearly in much worse shape than he is, and also he's overwhelmed and scared and very badly wants advice from someone who has demonstrated that they know what they're doing.) 

Permalink Mark Unread

Iomedae thinks that the man she spoke to in the war camp yesterday would ideally be arrested, but Tantara can't hold mages prisoner. She does not think it'll go over well if Predain offers to compulsion them for Tantara. Her long term preferred solution here is a sworn religious order whose members swear to only use compulsions to make arrests of mages and maybe a few other specific cases she hasn't thought of yet. But it's a long-term solution, obviously. 

In Urtho's position she'd go to the council of priests of Vkandis currently meeting, tell them the assassination attempt failed and was the cause of the shockwave they all presumably heard, and ask for their advice on apprehending the rogue cultists claiming to act in their god's name, who are very likely to be disavowed now that their plan didn't even work. Once the council of priests is moving in that direction - assuming that's the direction they move in - then she'd nudge Predain to demand a full inquiry into the ceasefire violation if they haven't done so already and authorize Predain to take prisoners in the course of that investigation, accompanied by Tantaran monitors. There should be a trial, under Zone of Truth, the priesthood should strip them of any relevant titles, so should Tantara, that should give her time to figure out something better than 'kill all dangerous mages' as an operating policy here where the correct balance of tradeoffs depends a lot on the afterlife system.

If there isn't time for all that they should be executed, though, Predain's not going to take Tantaran claims to have had nothing to do with this seriously if Tantara's top priority after accidentally giving some Vkandis cultists a terrifying superweapon is getting them off the hook for it. 

Permalink Mark Unread

(He's so tired, but Iomedae must be feeling vastly worse, and so Ma'ar cannot really complain.) 

All of that sounds like reasonable advice, that Tantara might actually be willing to follow - probably? though it won't help that the suggestions ostensibly come from Predain's leadership - and that Predain, or rather the relevant actors in Predain other than him, will find reassuring. Ma'ar does not especially need further reassurance that Iomedae is committed to helping them but others are understandably more cautious and he hasn't yet had time to convey everything to them. 

...They don't actually have Zone of Truth, here, and he isn't sure whether Tantara's courts have an allowance for using Thoughtsensing during trials. 

 

 

 

- on another note, does Iomedae think it would be a good idea for them to arrange for her to be transported to Tantara. Ma'ar isn't actually sure this is a good idea but he trusts her judgement on it further than his own.

(He is separately deeply reluctant to have her out of his field of vision but he can't seem to ground this in strategic reasoning, it's just - a feeling he apparently has, bafflingly strong for its lack of any obvious source.) 

Permalink Mark Unread

Need figures he's in love and she's probably right, she seems somewhat specialized in - well, not in that, but in something near to it. Iomedae is herself not forming an assessment of Ma'ar in those terms right now as it'd constitute a conflict of interest in negotiating the peace. (When she was much younger Iomedae occasionally regretted the fact that she'd arranged for all of the most impressive and admirable and heroic people in the world to be in her command structure, and therefore unavailable for romantic relationships. Then she met Alfirin who was not in her command structure but who was a bad person to fall in love with for other reasons like that it might someday be necessary to kill her if she turned into the next Tar Baphon. This to say - actually she's not sure why she said any of that.)

She thinks it would not be good for her to be transported to Tantara right now. It seems to have some internal divisions and she doesn't want to bet that they've all unearthed themselves already. She does want Ma'ar to be ready to Gate out instantly if she suddenly casts a spell giving him a bizarre rush of energy.

Permalink Mark Unread

Of course. Ma'ar has also very firmly indicated to his people that nobody else is authorized to Gate in, they have enough mages guarding them that additional people won't make a huge difference and it means he can assume any Gate is hostile and get them out with or without Iomedae warning him by casting the spell, if he's awake and she isn't. His plan would be to take both Iomedae and Need, plus the Healers currently touching her and close enough to fall through a horizontal unscaffolded Gate along with them, and he's not saying to where and will ideally try to mentally randomize which of a list of places it is before going there, in case that blurs it in Foresight. 

(He's also got a lot of people elsewhere on scrying duty, and the monitors are staying in close contact with Tantara's monitors and should hopefully get word to them very quickly if Urtho flags a problem such as another missing superweapon, but they cannot realistically watch everywhere and the first warning would probably still be an unexpected Gate.) 

...Does the magic sword have Foresight? If so, or if she has a direct link to Bestet, then plausibly she will know further in advance if something is wrong? Does she have a feeling one way or another, right now? 

Permalink Mark Unread

:Clever boy! ...I'm not to worried, actually. Maybe that was Vkandis' only good card to play, and Urtho really isn't going to make the same mistake a second time with his superweapon guard. Or maybe Bestet's looking out for us in other ways: 

Permalink Mark Unread

's good. She's going to try to rest, in that case, though it's a bit hard because of the ocean of pain. 

Permalink Mark Unread

The Healers can't do very much to decrease the pain but they can do a little. (Usually this would be a much more complicated Healing project, fighting not just to keep her alive through the immediate aftermath but to convince her skin to heal in a way that will result in normal range of motion, but Iomedae's body seems to know what it's doing, or something, in ways that are not at all how bodies normally work. Also, most people can only take a certain amount of Healing at all before their internal resources are exhausted, but they've already well exceeded the usual limit and Iomedae shows none of the worrying physiological signs that would mean they should ease off soon. They're just going to pour a very high rate of Healing-energy into her and see if that results in mostly reasonable things?) 

If she wants they can help her sleep with Healing directly, though it's not quite as restful as natural sleep. 

Permalink Mark Unread

She might take them up on that if it won't interfere with waking instantly if startled?

Permalink Mark Unread

She should still wake up if her magic sword or someone else Mindspeaks her, but maybe not to unexpected noises outside the building or something? 

Permalink Mark Unread

- sure, she'll chance it. Need should be VERY ALERT, here.

Permalink Mark Unread

Need, unlike humans, does not especially need to sleep and can be VERY ALERT for many candlemarks if necessary. She's going to get very bored but she'll even hold off on heckling Ma'ar to entertain herself, he should probably also try to get a bit of rest. 

Permalink Mark Unread

Ma'ar is in less pain, but he's on edge enough that he's only dozing in five-minute segments. It's better than no sleep at all, but it's not much better. He sleeps with his Othersenses fully open and - after over a year worth of accumulated combat reflexes - is confident that he'll wake up instantly to any unexpected magic or unexpected minds within his range. 

Permalink Mark Unread

A candlemark later Ma'ar gets an update via communication-spell. The elderly priest who accompanied Iomedae to General Movat's camp managed to convene the senior priesthood, though they ran into a lot of minor obstacles and he didn't yet have everyone in one place or a consensus on what to do at the point when the weapon went off. 

At this point, though, the Temple of Vkandis in Tantara has reached a verdict on Iomedae, which is that Iomedae is Tantara's ally and they fully disavow the actions of the rogue priest and mages who did this or allowed it to happen, though they recommend being as merciful as possible given how the men thought they were working to save Tantara from a threat, even if they were wrong, and the plan didn't even work.

They plan to ask the aid of Urtho's people to have a contingent of Adepts accompany them to General Movat's camp and apprehend everyone involved. The priest in question has been ambiguously under arrest and definitely very thoroughly under guard at General Movat's orders, and they don't think he's done anything but can't rule out that they failed to detect a communication-spell order he sent out. 

Permalink Mark Unread

Oh. 

Well, that's a moment when the Vkandis-followers are likely to be especially desperate. He wants them to warn him sixty seconds before the party intends to Gate to the camp, and then - probably Iomedae should be awake at that point? If he gets word that something went wrong with the arrest, he wants to Gate them out probably before anything actually goes wrong. 

If the arrest goes smoothly, then...that seems like another period of danger is over, and maybe both of them can afford to rest more thoroughly? 

Permalink Mark Unread

A few minutes later, Need will nudge the Healers and then nudge Iomedae awake. :Temple of Vkandis and Urtho's people are arresting that rogue priest you talked to before. Ma'ar wants us on alert: 

Permalink Mark Unread

Iomedae is doing much better within a candlemark. Her life-force has been growing steadily, from 'this person is barely not dead' to 'this person is in good health' (while she still didn't have much in the way of skin) and then just...kept growing from there? There's already three times as much life-force there as there should be? Her skin is starting to regrow, though it's very very delicate. When she wakes up next she's in a lot of pain but not an amount you could mistake for Hell.

 

She listens to the update mostly entirely lucidly. :Understood.:

Permalink Mark Unread

That's so weird! The Healers will bother her later to ask if she has any idea what's going on with that or how it should affect their treatment decisions. Also after this they should (very gently) try to peel her out of the parts of her armor they didn't want to move her to remove before, to avoid her skin healing directly onto the metal or something. 

Permalink Mark Unread

Ma'ar's condition wasn't nearly as bad to start with, but he's also not improving nearly as fast; the Healers are having to throw in significant work to ward off infection, and running into an expected amount of Healing-strain on his body's resources. He's finding it increasingly hard to stay awake and alert even for short periods. 

He can handle five minutes, though, of near-continuous communication-spell updates. General Movat is ordering shields raised around this region of the camp, so that the Vkandis-followers' units won't be able to sense a Gate outside. Four of the most senior priests in the temple, representing the order, are now Gating into the camp with their mage-escort. They're approaching - 

- the priest must suspect what's happening, and tries to run, but he isn't as skilled as Ma'ar at Gates and Urtho's mages are very tense and easily startled. One of them gets him with a levinbolt before his Gate-threshold is complete. He's unconscious.

...He's probably going to survive but they can worry much less about him Gating anywhere in the next few candlemarks, most people can't pull off the concentration for a Gate while suffering from serious levinbolt-burns. 

Faced with a quartet of senior priests in full regalia and looking very disapproving, the rest of the mages in his units are surrendering. 

 

It...sounds like it's just over? Maybe? For the moment. 

Permalink Mark Unread

Maybe. For the moment. 

 

She opens her eyes, which wouldn't have been possible a few minutes ago. Looks around for Ma'ar.

Permalink Mark Unread

He's a couple of feet away, on a second temporary folding bed, he asked the Healers to put it close enough that he could get both of them with a reasonably-sized Gate-threshold. He still has most of his skin but he looks pretty terrible. 

- he notices her looking for him, and rolls over toward her, wincing. :Hey:

Permalink Mark Unread

:Thank you for rescuing me.:

Permalink Mark Unread

:...Promised I would try. When you gave me the ring. You - would have done the same, for me...: He shivers :I– when I saw the explosion - thought it was too late, no one could survive that:

A very tired smile. :You are hard to kill. I am - very glad: 

Permalink Mark Unread

:That explosion came a lot closer than most things do.: When she gets back home certain people are going to mock her endlessly for ending up in a situation where it seemed like the best available option was to attempt to tank a planar-rift-tearing superweapon. :I'm - glad the war didn't go on any longer.: Maybe too direct, but if he somehow hasn't had the thought already she really does want him to grapple with it.

Permalink Mark Unread

He's had that thought. He's not happy about it. 

:...I am not sure if it ever occurred to Urtho that if he had told me that he had sixteen weapons as dangerous as - that - then I would have surrendered. ...If I could persuade the King of it, but I - think I could have: Sigh. :I - am not sure what error in judgement I was making, that I - never imagined Urtho would have done this - I separately did not think to ask myself the question, but that is - a more familiar kind of mistake - just, even if I had I think I would have guessed no. He - always spoke so strongly against violence as a solution - and would not have built those weapons even if I could, they are the sort of thing I think ought not to exist - why did he do it...?: 

(He's not really expecting Iomedae to have an answer to that.) 

Permalink Mark Unread

:Because he was curious whether he could.: Iomedae was not in fact surprised and it comes through in her Mindspeech. :Because he wasn't meaning to use them - wouldn't have been meaning to use them right up until he did, I suspect. You would've surrendered? Rather than run away?:

Permalink Mark Unread

He blinks at her. :- If I had tried to leave it would not have ended the war - I could hardly take all of Predain with me, where would we go? I - am not even sure it would have ended that we were winning it, just - meant that Predain won more slowly and messily with higher casualties, but Urtho would - still have ended up cornered and desperate -: 

And Iomedae's assessment of Urtho seems like a completely insane thought process, both parts of it, but - it doesn't actually ring false. 

Permalink Mark Unread

 

:I know some people who would make some of the tradeoffs you've made, if I weren't around to make it really not in their interests, but most of them are - not temperamentally the type to surrender for the benefit of other people.:

Permalink Mark Unread

Ma'ar looks confused. (He has no idea where Iomedae is going with this line of conversation, and is too bleary to try to figure it out.) 

:I - why would it be worth it to make tradeoffs that hurt people, if it were only for my own benefit? It, the numbers would not add up...: 

He drags a hand up to rub his eyes. :Is it better? Your world? With - someone like you, to make it - not in people's interests to do the things I have done even when they saw no better alternative?: 

Permalink Mark Unread

:I'm not sure. Depends a lot on your afterlife situation. I think my world is better than it would be if I didn't stop evil people from running mind control empires, or I wouldn't be doing that, but I don't know if it's better than Velgarth.:

Permalink Mark Unread

He closes his eyes. 

:I am glad you stopped the war. I was already glad of it, even before I knew what Urtho had built. It...would have been better, if I had understood whatever it is I would have needed to understand, to avoid it from happening at all. But.: 

He's struggling to find the right words, and only partly because his head is swimming with exhaustion. It feels important, though. 

:- but if I found out that the children who starve end up - somewhere where they keep existing and will be all right - then I think I would regret that I had been willing to trade the lives of criminals for theirs. I do not think our world has that kind of afterlives and I - do not think I regret having been willing to do that math: 

Permalink Mark Unread

:When people make mistakes the mistake is almost never making tradeoffs or doing math! It's usually that they were incorrect about the math or forgot half of the tradeoff!:

Permalink Mark Unread

:I do actually think that most of Urtho's problem is not being willing to think about tradeoffs if he considers them distasteful! Maybe you have a different assessment there: 

Permalink Mark Unread

:He probably suspects on some level that it's just a way for the best arguer around to get him to make a mistake, and he's probably right: she says immediately.

Permalink Mark Unread

:And so, what, the alternative is just not allowing debates and logical arguments about the best course of action, and doing what feels the least distasteful?: This is maybe snarkier than Ma'ar intended but he's so tired. 

Permalink Mark Unread

Iomedae is also tired, so it takes her a while.

 

 

:I think of people as having a mix of strategies to - achieve their goals and feel comfortable with themselves and not get tricked into adopting a framework that fails to capture some important parts of what Good is to them and not overstretch themselves, and most of those strategies aren't conscious because most people aren't a shape that could really bear looking itself in the mirror too relentlessly, or bear taking on problems that put one of their priorities sharply at odds with all of the others. - and that's not terrible of them, right, to adequately face the problems in the world they need to change shapes into one that handles it but that's only a little less tragic than the fact they need to learn how to kill people. 

But since people have a mix of strategies, you need to not look like a terrifyingly bad idea from any of the angles they bring to bear on the question of whether to trust you. And trying to make one of those angles - like reasoned debate - really really overwhelmingly inveigh in your favor only does so much if all of the other angles people have to look at the problem say something completely different. And yes, one of the angles they use to think is whether something feels distasteful! They're correct to do that! Some people are in social contexts where that little internal voice of distaste is the best window they have towards Good, towards doing right by other people. In some places everyone is equipped with spectacularly good arguments for the necessity of whipping your slaves and some of them have a little voice inside them that says not to and I am very very glad that sometimes they listen.

You're smarter than me. Wizards at home are a lot smarter than me. And they mostly couldn't cleverly argue me into supporting their mind control empires, though if other smart people I trusted claimed that I was in fact failing to comprehend a specific argument which would persuade me or failing to believe a specific factual claim that they were themselves persuaded of, then I'd consider that quite likely.:

Permalink Mark Unread

There are a lot of things he could say, things he wants to say, but - it's also the case that, if he takes a mental step back and actually looks at the current situation – well, he is the one causally responsible for frightening Urtho into starting a war, and Iomedae is the one responsible for ending it, and - that means that her words have more weight than his, here. Probably. It feels like it should mean that. 

And maybe Ma'ar is right, that Urtho wasn't reasoning coherently, or living up to his own ideals, that Urtho was fundamentally failing to act in ways that would achieve his goals, but - that was never under Ma'ar's control, and...he knew that you can't make plans that work on the assumption that other people will act in ways convenient to you. 

It still feels like it's incomplete, like Iomedae is taking her own world's history and mapping it to theirs in a way that doesn't quite match, but he can't pin it down and that is probably also a stupid argument anyway. It's not like he had a perfectly accurate understanding. 

 

:I think you have met different people than I have: he sends, eventually. :I - have never encountered someone who whipped their slaves, and thought it necessary to give logical arguments for why it was correct, instead of just - doing it because they wanted to and nobody had the power to stop them: 

And after another long moment (he's struggling to stay awake, and his mindvoice is sounding less coherent now), :...m'not going to argue for the compulsions. not to you. would have built Tantara, if I - knew how...: 

Permalink Mark Unread

:I believe you. I'm not upset about how Predain is governed, just about how I - imagine Predain being governed in five hundred years from a given starting point.:

Permalink Mark Unread

:...Maybe. Maybe if I - knew the things you know - that would be obvious. Whatever you are reasoning from, it is - not information I have. I suppose you probably think I should not have done anything if I could not do it right, just...: He would shrug but that requires moving. :I think that when someone's highest priority is - not being personally responsible for any bad things - it means they mostly do not try to do good things that are hard. And usually the important things are hard, and might go badly. Maybe it is enough anyway, in your world, it– to me at least it seems clear it was not going to be enough here: 

Permalink Mark Unread

 

:If you'd done nothing it would've been better for the world than what you did, I think even in expectation from the information you had. 's not the same thing as saying you should've done nothing, because those weren't your only options.

When someone's highest priority is being personally responsible for all bad things, they make a lot of really really scary mistakes. I don't - recommend it to people, not as a pure thing you'll trade off everything else for, not alone without oversight by wiser more careful people. I usually recommend instead that they be someone who others would, with full information, ally with, and that they try for things that would be considered a good idea by their surrounding society if they succeeded, or things attained by changing peoples' minds, or things attained through technological progress.:

Permalink Mark Unread

Ma'ar is pretty sure he was trying to do exactly that - and in Predain it worked, people wanted to ally with him there, he was changing people's minds about how their country ought to look and, for example, maybe that ought to include fewer duels and more official legal cases, they were making technological progress, he was trying and it wasn't enough – it feels like the problem is that nobody cared about Predain while it was poor and backward, nobody thought it was their problem when the corrupt city guard could do whatever they wanted to anyone too weak to fight back, they only started caring once Predain was stronger, because they didn't like how Ma'ar had achieved that.

- and of course that doesn't matter, to make plans that work you need to live in reality, and he made a plan that didn't work and obviously he should have done something else instead, he just still doesn't actually know what Iomedae would have done instead, in his place, that would have helped the people of Predain without frightening Urtho. He might be angry about it if he had the energy, which he doesn't, and if it would help which it clearly won't because Iomedae is right, and - wow this is stupid he feels like crying and isn't sure that he can manage to answer even in Mindspeech. 

(He doesn't say anything. He looks abjectly miserable.) 

Permalink Mark Unread

Iomedae's best guess is that Ma'ar is - trying in an unproductive fashion to add 'Iomedae wins all arguments' to his worldview, and should not be doing that, but she doesn't know how to point out the mistake or if it's in fact the one he's making. 

 

- she just peels back some of her shields. The only things not public are the disposition of her forces in Golarion and of Tantara's. 

She's still in a lot of pain, but it's obviously getting better every minute, which is satisfying, in a way; she can notice moment by moment what she's newly capable of. Her thoughts are still a little hazy but she's pretty sure if necessary at this point she could fight more or less as normal. She's worried about Ma'ar - not the injuries, those are part of battle, but the ways in which he seems to be trying to orient to everything. Everyone described him as someone who wants to win arguments about everything and he hasn't felt like he has - wanted to win arguments or believed it'd matter, and while she does think he'd ideally keep in mind the limits of argument it was not actually her intent to convey that she was already correct about everything and he had better not argue. Her best guess is that there's a - directional correction, there, obviously, but he's still more correct than anyone he's ever argued with, and the right balance is hard to hold in one's mind.

She's seen so goddamn many terrible mistakes. People grind themselves up in all kinds of ways, looking at the problem in front of them. Provoking a geopolitical disaster is worse than most of those mistakes, in effects, but in some ways it's smaller, it genuinely doesn't seem like Ma'ar did a lot of deceiving himself for his own benefit or making tradeoffs that changed which tradeoffs he was willing to make and made him lose track of what he was doing or adopting his own completely insane philosophy that justified everything he was doing. He wanted peace. He wasn't careful enough, but - she often hasn't been careful enough, and she had more allies, more resources, in many ways an easier job. This assessment here isn't one she wouldn't make of herself, under some circumstances. You learn from it and you do better; you don't stop.

 

Permalink Mark Unread

This does not really make Ma'ar any less miserable but there's - more clarity at least, maybe. 

He can't just open his shields to her, in return, she isn't actually a Mindspeaker, but he can push across the unformed thoughts rather than wrestling to get everything into words. 

Ma'ar does not at all think of himself as someone who just wants to win arguments? He's not surprised Urtho saw it that way, but - from his own perspective, he wants to figure out what's true and he wants to figure out what plans will accomplish his goals, and really it's always been more satisfying when other people came up with a new and compelling argument that surprised him or changed his mind, because those are the times that he's learning something new, seeing new paths or at least closing off bad ones. 

He doesn't think he did much deceiving himself, he certainly made mistakes shaped like not making time to step back and try to learn about the unknown unknowns, because he was impatient, because it felt like an ongoing emergency that people were still dying. He doesn't think he's lost track of what he wanted, here, which is for everyone in Predain to be okay, and someday for everyone in the world to be okay, and he - hadn't quite put it in those terms before, it wasn't a concept he had crystallized so clearly, but this world should have afterlives, someday. He isn't going to stop and he isn't going to give up and it - should be hopeful, that Iomedae is here now to advise him, even if it hurts very badly that she wasn't here twenty years ago, and part of him wants to be angry that she's - asking him to have somehow magically already known all of the things she does but it obviously won't help. 

Separately he’s frustrated because the entire way that Iomedae thinks and communicates feels deeply incompatible with Predain, no one is going to believe her claims about what she wants, unless Ma’ar spends endless candlemarks figuring out how to translate it - there’s something so devastatingly lonely in that, and the fact that he doesn’t expect pointing it out to Iomedae will do anything to help…

 

- he's in agonizing emotional pain and would probably be able to reason about all of this in a more productive way if he could figure out how to stop that, but noticing this fact is not, in itself, enough to prompt him to stop that. 

Permalink Mark Unread

- she does not remotely expect that he would have figured this out last week. That seems like it would have required an unrealistic and ludicrous degree of caution or good luck. She is trying to explain it to him now because that's the only way he might possibly know.

 

She doesn't understand him well enough to guess what he needs to hear to not be in agonizing emotional pain. She'd say it, if she did; she doesn't want to hurt him, even more strongly than she doesn't want to hurt anybody. She wants to give him as much context as possible as quickly as possible so next time he'll have it and be able to use it for decisionmaking.

 

She thinks she can translate for Predain, with time. He can probably help her do it faster, but it's her job, to make herself understood, and if it seems to him like it'd be unpleasant work for him then he is probably better suited for other parts of the enormous work of making Predain safe and rich and good.

Permalink Mark Unread

He can do the translation, and - probably with more difficulty but it’s worth doing anyway - explain the disconnect so she can cross that gulf herself. Once he's rested some it probably won't even feel like the worst thing in the world.

Mostly he thinks Iomedae is leaning on a shared cultural context that she takes for granted in her world, and he suspects it’s one that he very badly wants this world to have, but it’s not something that exists in Tantara and he’s not sure it exists in Predain either. 

…right now it feels like he needs several impossible or incoherent things in order for anything to be okay, like — like for Urtho to just not have been the sort of person who would build superweapons just to see if it worked, fail to do any kind of advance planning on when it would be justified to use them, and then use them without any kind of sane cost-benefit analysis, on Predain, as soon as he got desperate enough. It doesn’t feel like the world can be okay if that’s a thing that could have happened and was only averted by luck. 

Probably he is just going to be not very okay for a while, and then eventually he’ll figure out how to exist in that world without it hurting all the time, which is after all the only reality he has to interact with and he doesn’t even have a good justification for why it hurts this much.

Permalink Mark Unread

Well, maybe it'll help when he gets an apology from Urtho and they can talk it through? She knows Urtho is his mentor, a person he trusted, a person whose approval he once very much wanted.

Permalink Mark Unread

Urtho is the first person he ever met who - seemed to be actually trying to build something better, in a way that wasn't just self-deception, or happening by accident because it was in some other way the path of least resistance. Urtho wanted there to be a Tower where anyone and everyone could go to learn, even if they were poor, even if they were from another country, and so he just went and built it and then it existed. ...It sounds stupid to say this, now, to someone like Iomedae who he can't imagine ever lacked that concept, but even though Ma'ar thinks that had always been the thing that mattered most to him, he couldn't quite name it and thus make it clear enough to aim for, not even in his own head, until he saw that example. 

It shouldn't - undo the value of Urtho's work, make it fail to count, that if a handful of things had gone differently then Urtho's net contribution to the world would have been dominated by wiping out hundreds of thousands of lives, even though Urtho was - trying to be the sort of person who didn't reach too far or try things that were too hard and so should have been safe, or at least safer than Ma'ar, to exist around. But it still hurts. 

Permalink Mark Unread

It's a beautiful place, the Tower. She hopes it will stand for thousands more years, and teach millions more children. It'll be hard to arrange for things to be stable so that that will happen, but - not impossible.

Permalink Mark Unread

It would be good. And if the Tower falls then someday they can build another. It feels impossibly hard right now but Ma’ar is not very much trusting any of his emotional reactions right now. 

Possibly he should just sleep.

Permalink Mark Unread

Iomedae should probably also sleep, actually. It is in fact impairing to be exhausted and in agonizing pain. Her own emotions are mostly not online yet, it doesn't feel safe enough, but she doubts they'd be any more fun than Ma'ar's.

 

She'll close her eyes again and try to rest. 

Permalink Mark Unread

The Healers will try very hard to let her rest and avoid doing anything to disturb her. A couple of them are still holding energy-links to her, trading off on it and taking turns resting, but with Need’s ongoing attention she seems to be making a remarkably quick recovery even without any of that.

Permalink Mark Unread

Ma’ar sleeps less well. He’s running a fever and keeps having confused incomprehensible nightmares, half-aware that he’s dreaming but too foggy-headed to shake himself out of it. Also he’s still getting woken every candlemark or so, on average, with reports on the state of things elsewhere in Predain and from the front, or alternately with the Healers making him drink water, because even though his skin is much more intact than Iomedae’s was, he’s not healing as fast and he‘s quickly getting dehydrated. 

Also he literally did not sleep last night, and does not have a Ring of Sustenance. 

He is, as a result, still going to be sleeping restlessly and looking pretty much just as terrible as he did earlier, whenever Iomedae next wakes.

Permalink Mark Unread

If she had any healing she could fix this. It's very annoying how she doesn't have any healing.

 

 

She is, herself, on track to be wholly recovered within a day, aside from some really impressive burn scars on her arms and chest. She sleeps almost three hours, which is an eternity for her, but wakes feeling much better.

Permalink Mark Unread

:Hey, sleepy. …If you’re up for drafting a message to Urtho about what happened and how you and Ma’ar are doing, I imagine he’s fretting terribly and Ma’ar hasn’t been up for any communications to him, he’s barely coping with being the point person for getting his people’s updates, which inconveniently I’m not sure any of them trust you to cover for yet: 

Permalink Mark Unread

:Understood.: She can dictate a message to Urtho, if anyone can write it, confirming that Urtho's healers arrived and that she's recovering swiftly, has confidence in Urtho, and intends to ensure that both Tantara and Predain can have justified confidence in the ceasefire etcetera etcetera. She'd prefer to take the rest of the day off to recover but can return if there are any problems that she needs to stick a sword in.

Permalink Mark Unread

One of the Tantaran Healers can definitely take down a letter for her, and they have enough mages on-site to arrange for it to be transported, though it’ll still be at least fifteen to thirty minutes for it to actually reach Urtho.

They don’t expect Iomedae to be urgently needed for any fighting today, though of course if that changes it’ll change on very short notice. 

Permalink Mark Unread

Ma’ar stirs unhappily in his sleep, but doesn’t fully wake.

Permalink Mark Unread

:Still not sure I know what to make of him: Need sends, conversationally, when it seems like no one is going to make any other urgent demands on Iomedae’s time. :He seems - very confused:

Permalink Mark Unread

:Yes. It seems incredibly important, to understand him, and I don't feel like he's particularly far off from a kind of person I know and can work well with. And he saved my life. But - I'm frequently confused by which parts of things I say land with him and which don't. I don't know exactly what distressed him so badly. Probably will make more sense when I can think clearly.:

Permalink Mark Unread

:Predain sounds like a dangerous place. Somewhere you - don’t get far, by claiming you’re trying to help people and do the right thing, and so he - doesn’t do that the way you’d expect. And Urtho is trying, because it’s the right thing to do, but he’s an oblivious idiot who would’ve gotten himself killed within a week in Predain, and Ma’ar knows that. …Dunno, just - feels like he’s trying to build the pieces of - the thing you do - but he hasn’t got the raw materials for it, or anyone to talk to?: 

Pause. Mental chuckle. :Until you. No wonder he’s falling for you so hard:

Permalink Mark Unread

:I guess I owe more of a debt than I realized, to the Good churches which just do random nice things but do manage to establish for people that that is a common and real human motivation.:

Permalink Mark Unread

:…I reckon that’s a lot of what was distressing for him. That you had that, and he feels like you think badly of him because he hasn’t, and he— I figure he’s scared you’ll give up on working with him: 

Permalink Mark Unread

: - If I thought badly of him I would not have given him an irreplaceable strategically important magic item of mine!:

Permalink Mark Unread

:I’m sure he would remember that if he were thinking more clearly! But when you tell someone straight up that the world would be better off if they’d never tried to accomplish anything of the things they care about most, and they could have noticed that themselves if they’d been less of an idiot, I think it’s not very surprising if they feel like you think badly of them: 

Permalink Mark Unread

:...yes,: she concedes immediately once she's thought about it. :I suppose I could apologize for saying that.: Not because it's false, which it obviously isn't, but she has an entire kind of practiced apology for 'that was a true thing I should've given you more support in coming to grips with'.

Permalink Mark Unread

:I don’t think he expects an apology. It is a true thing, that he needed to know: 

A thoughtful pause. 

:I reckon it’s a sore spot for him. That he comes from an awful shithole, that’s the game he had to learn to survive, and I figure Urtho does look on him badly for - everything that comes of not having grown up all innocent and sheltered in a nice safe rich place where the grownups could be trusted. - and the part where you’ve got a god on your side, too, reckon he feels like the gods here have only ever helped people They liked better than Predain:

Mental shrug. :I know you’re not doing that, but I wouldn’t be surprised if it’s why he’s sensitive about it: 

Permalink Mark Unread

Iomedae tries to imagine thinking of Golarion as a nice sheltered rich place where the grownups could be trusted. It's - false, of course, but it might not be clearly false from the very limited pieces she's chosen to share with Ma'ar so far. It does seem closer to true of Tantara. 

And of course there is a sense in which Good is often a - luxury, a thing many people only try to purchase once they have the things they need today and know they will tomorrow.

Ma'ar may be making the same mistakes that solidly a tenth of her paladins would make if she let them but he's not making them by trying to out-zealous everyone else or getting very singleminded about Hell and taking the ruthlessness a little too far, he's making them in the course of trying to invent the entire concept of Good himself. Similar outcomes, but a different internal generator, and accordingly a different set of lessons and takeaways, probably, at least on a level more nuanced than 'try not to provoke wars with powerful archmages'.

 

She sits up, scowls at some dizziness. Dizziness is almost as annoying as searing torment, as far as sheer impairment goes, though she acknowledges that most humans have a stronger dispreference for searing torment etcetera etcetera.

 

The healers offer some water, which she takes even though in principle the ring should just be handling that.

 

They've carefully removed most of her armor, which is completely reasonable and also nervewracking. It's intact; metal doesn't mind being boiled much. She starts checking over the leather straps to see which ones need replacing.

:I admire Ma'ar, I think he's a deeply unusual person and the best person Predain could possibly have, and I think he needs to grow up very fast if he wants to try to execute things as ambitious as he apparently does. I think he can do it.:

Permalink Mark Unread

Also he definitely wants to worship Iomedae even though she is not actually technically a god yet, and Need is aware that Iomedae disapproves of some aspects of this but it’s still ADORABLE. And makes for highly entertaining viewing. When you’re a sentient sword relying on your bearer for having senses or being able to move, you learn to find amusement where you can, and Need is smug about this.

Permalink Mark Unread

Iomedae seems to be continuing to recover at a shocking pace, but the Healers are still kind of stressed about her moving around unaided. They’re going to hover.

Permalink Mark Unread

Iomedae is not used to this characteristic of Healers. The kind where she's from just scowl at you, slap you with an astonishing amount of magic healing, and then shoo you. She will be politely bemused at the hovering. She's practically recovered! She couldn't specifically take another superweapon but she could handle pretty much anything else! (All of her skin is shiny, raw and red, and some of it is still oozing, but she's confident it'll get over that sooner or later.)

Permalink Mark Unread

They hover slightly less once it's clear that Iomedae isn't about to collapse. They can get her materials to repair the straps on her armor, if that would be useful?

And they're going to leave at least once person within range to catch her if she does suddenly collapse, but it's been candlemarks and even spread across twenty Healers it was a lot.

...Also Ma'ar is seeming more concerning at this point? He wasn't injured nearly as badly, but he also doesn't have impossible self-healing powers or whatever it even is - he might actually be recovering more slowly than usual, given that he was exhausted going into this and also keeps using magic, and they're now really pushing the limit of just how much Healing they can throw at him before his body can't take any more. They're not worried that his life is in danger, he's young and was healthy going into this, but they are a bit worried that maybe he shouldn't be making important tactical decisions for Predain. 

(They are obviously not going to say this out loud in front of Iomedae, but they're visibly hovering around Ma'ar even more than they are around her.) 

Permalink Mark Unread

This is still mostly cute and hilarious but it will perhaps at some point become less funny. 

Permalink Mark Unread

At some point Iomedae clinks one piece of armor into another, and Ma'ar startles awake at the sound and tries to sit up.

...This mostly works, but he's so lightheaded and he starts to topple sideways. One of the Healers catches him before he can actually fall off the bed. 

 

- where is he, what's happening - 

 

:- Iomedae?: His mindvoice is surprisingly coherent. 

Permalink Mark Unread

:I'm here. I ...think you're supposed to be resting, they're worried about you. Nothing's gone wrong.:

Permalink Mark Unread

Ma'ar is pretty sure that he was trying to rest but things keep happening, including - whatever thing just happened that woke him - maybe it's fine actually, no one except Iomedae is talking in his head. If it were an emergency elsewhere in Predain then probably five people would be hitting him with the communication-spell at once. 

:...Is Urtho all right - is he up to date -?:

Permalink Mark Unread

:I think so. I wrote a letter; I'll write another if anything changes. Are you all right.:

Permalink Mark Unread

That is such an unreasonably underspecified question. 

:I am not going to die of this: Probably. It sort of depends on who tries to kill him, with what timing, and how competently they attempt it. 

:...cannot think very well. are we safe here? ...suspect I am too impaired to - make strategic decisions. is someone else doing that: 

Permalink Mark Unread

:Depends on how good your defaults for you being injured or impaired are. I can't do it, they rightly don't trust me.:

Permalink Mark Unread

...Mindspeech is hard and thinking is also hard and Ma'ar is going to just open his shields to Iomedae and shove across as much as he can. 

 

The fallback protocols, for if he were impaired or incapacitated or dead, are ones he worked hard on. He thinks they would have been adequate, in any of the contingencies he actually had reason to predict. Those did not involve anything nearly as weird as Iomedae showing up. 

So. Everything he planned before last week is going to be wildly out of date, because Iomedae did show up and she transformed the strategic landscape. ...He probably delegated thinking about that to some of his people (who he doesn't necessarily trust but who he thinks are clever), to make new contingency-plans - but almost no one can do that quickly, or well, and especially not both - and also they don't understand Iomedae's goals...

 

- he is pretty sure he had some plans more recent than that, things he delegated in the last few candlemarks, but - he would have to trust his past self to have been making reasonable and non-stupid decisions, because he cannot actually remember any of it very well. And he's not inclined to put a lot of weight, right now, on assuming that his past self wasn't being incredibly stupid. 

Permalink Mark Unread

- she takes off her headband, and hands it to him. This is not really the ideal solution but it should make up for a fair bit of impairment. :Can you explain to everyone that it's a magic item that should let him momentarily focus better to figure out delegation of responsibilities while he's incapacitated.: And, really, she should give him the belt too; it's not as relevant in the moment but it should dramatically improve his recovery. Her own recovery is at this point not really in question.

Permalink Mark Unread

Ma'ar stares blankly at the headband. …After a few moments, he concludes that he’s not going to get anything useful off mage-sight, and he’s already trusting Iomedae with so much more than this, it would be silly to worry that she’s lending him her powerful magical artifacts in order to harm him.

He puts it on.

 

 

….Wow.

This is one of the strangest experiences of Ma’ar’s life. He is not really any less tired; if anything, he's more aware of his body yelling at him very loudly that he should not be trying to do any things, including thinking. Trying to think anyway feels like dragging himself over sharp rocks while partly underwater. Staying awake at all continues to take an ongoing deliberate effort of will. 

But somehow there's space to think anyway, or at least a lot more of it. He can hold onto a coherent thread of thought, and even manage to juggle more than one concept at a time. His situational awareness is back – he hadn’t realized the extent to which it hadn’t been working, before, he had mage-sight open and he would have noticed and reacted to, say, an unexpected Gate, but he wasn't really processing anything. Which says some not-very-reassuring things about his physical condition; it takes a lot to leave him that unable to orient to his surroundings. 

 

...he can suddenly notice, much more clearly, the extent to which he hasn't been thinking, not just since the injury but since Iomedae arrived, and in some ways not since the start of the war. He's been reactive, running on learned patterns, never feeling like he could afford to step back and reassess those habitual decision-making processes, except that it's suddenly very clear that he couldn't afford not to. Whatever magic this is, it's definitely making him - smarter? - and it seems very unfair that the result is feeling this stupid

His emotions are...not exactly louder, but he's suddenly vastly more aware of what they are, including the ones that are piled-up towers of internal reactions to other emotions. Which in a way feels like them taking up more mental space even though, in hindsight, before this nearly all of his mental capacity was allocated to intense misery and pointless flailing attempts to avoid looking at the misery, with the half-formed justification that it's not safe and he can't afford to be having emotions. Under normal circumstances, 'noticing that it's not a good time to be having emotions' is a mental habit that works, because he's reasonably in control of his own mind and where his attention goes, but it's now very obvious that he hasn't been. One of the layers of emotional unpleasantness is intense frustration with himself about this, he hates being out of control and he hates it even more when the thing he's out of control of is himself. 

 

- ugh, right, that is not helpful, can he - decide to stop being frustrated - no he apparently cannot do that, which is ALSO FRUSTRATING - can he look at and acknowledge and let go of that reaction...? Wow he really does not want to be self-aware about his own feelings right now, it feels like the entirety of his mind is made up of mental flinches and thoughts that hurt to notice. This is incredibly stupid not helpful, notice and let go, and then also notice and let go of the part where it feels incredibly unfair that he has to be emotionally mature about this. He doesn't WANT to have to be emotionally mature about this. There is a very intense unattached-floating desire to run away, to hide, to be left alone, to never take any actions again.

Even with more space in his head it feels overwhelming, too big and tangled to face head-on, but...he can notice the flinch and lean toward it rather than away, he can acknowledge that he desperately wants to stop being responsible for any of these problems, and - that's okay, it makes sense to feel that way right now because he is not in very good shape to be solving problems, his mind isn't wrong to be pointing that out. 

...He wants to beg Iomedae to make the problems go away but she cannot actually do that, she was right to point out that his people don't trust her. Which is so frustrating, because Ma'ar trusts her, and he thinks he's right to– catch onto that thought, look at it some more, okay no he actually does mean it and he thinks he's justified in believing it, Iomedae may or may not be very angry with him but she's not going to take it out on his country, and she keeps lending him her powerful magical artifacts which is quite a strong signal of friendliness. He still can't magically make all of his subordinates trust her– ...it's really tempting to try to do exactly that with mind control but compulsions don't even do that. 

No running away. He's struggling to find a mental motion that isn't running away inside his own head, but - okay. One thought at a time. "Fix all the problems in the world" feels like an impossible mental motion because it is, that is not just a thing he can do, the things he can do are - specific things, one at a time. It feels absolutely ridiculous how much he's needing to walk his brain through all of that explicitly, as though leading a small child by the hand, but - repeatedly yelling at himself in his own head is also not helping, is it. It's okay. He doesn't have to do that. It's...not actually true that if he fails to be sufficiently angry with himself then Iomedae will be angrier with him, why does it feel like that's true - 

- he's really scared of Iomedae and it's so strange for that feeling to coexist in his head with the part where he very firmly trusts her with his life and his kingdom - 

He feels like crying, and trying this hard not to cry may or may not be a good use of his very limited mental resources, but he doesn't actually want the predictable consequences of crying in front of the Healers and his guards, which is that they'll be very worried about him. 

Permalink Mark Unread

It's possibly taken him an entire five minutes to drag his brain through all of that. Is this whole exercise in unpacking his feelings actually what he should be prioritizing right now? 

...does he have a choice? 

Actually, it feels like the answer to that question is now a yes, it wasn't five minutes ago but he's untangled enough of the emotional pile-ups and internal flinches to have some amount of metaphorical freedom of movement. He could probably, theoretically, manage to use his brain for something more externally focused than 'experiencing all of his emotions'. 

 

It's still a 'theoretically' because, however well the magic artifact is boosting his ability to think, he continues to be having some kind of baffling and unusual difficulty with motivation. He can clearly introspect on all of the component pieces of what's going wrong, but that does not, in itself, change the fact that he still desperately doesn't want to work on delegating his responsibilities. He wants to curl up and feel sorry for himself. He wants to go to sleep and not wake up until the world stops being terrible. He wants Urtho to apologize and say that he forgives him and say that he's proud of everything Ma'ar has accomplished. He wants Iomedae to hold his hand– what, that's weird and confusing, why in the world does he expect that to help. 

Permalink Mark Unread

Okay. Sitting here staring at the fact that his ability to want to do things is broken: not productive. Unfortunately he doesn't have an existing mental habit for how to respond to this, because this is...not a problem he usually has. 

He should - figure out why he's having this problem, what's different now - this is hard to think about because his mind is bouncing away from even looking at the details of the thing he's supposed to do but obviously he's not going to succeed at doing it without thinking about it. 

Break it down into smaller pieces. The thing he's supposed to do is figure out whether he's delegated his responsibilities adequately - which he almost certainly hasn't - and then patch the gaps. The reason he should do that is, one, so that he can make it clear who his various commanders should talk to instead of him when they want to make a report, and then they'll stop talking to him and he'll be able to sleep. Which is something he does want. He should...be able to backchain from wanting that to wanting to cause the prerequisites for it to happen. This is how wanting things is supposed to work. 

Also, they might not be safe right now. That would be very bad. Usually, not being safe is very motivating, but instead he's just...scared, and feeling helpless, and still observing himself not managing to think about responsibility-delegation and contingency plans that would result in being safer. 

 

- being safe feels like it isn't a real thing. It definitely feels like something he can't achieve by his own actions. What if he takes the wrong actions and actually it makes them less safe. His brain seems to be assigning very high odds to any actions he takes being the wrong ones. 

 

 

 

...yeah, all right, that does seem like a belief that would result in having trouble convincing himself to do things. 

Permalink Mark Unread

(Ma'ar has, at this point, been lying perfectly still for almost ten minutes.) 

 

 

:...Iomedae?: he sends, privately. :I think I - need your advice - I am having trouble trusting my judgement enough to make decisions based on it, and I– there must be a different way I could think about it where I would not be - stuck - but I am having trouble figuring it out on my own and I - need help -: 

Permalink Mark Unread

:You are by all accounts a tactical genius, you currently have tactical problems, I see no reason to doubt that you can handle them perfectly well with the approaches you've already been employing. You don't have to rethink everything right now, I can lend you the headband again later for that.:

Permalink Mark Unread

How can he be a genius at anything when he's such an idiot still not helpful. He mentally stares at the feeling until it goes away and then has to effortfully replay Iomedae's answer in his head again. 

:Oh: 

It seems really obvious, put like that! He feels even stupider, now, for having completely failed to figure that out on his own– ...it continues to be deeply unhelpful to keep yelling at himself for being stupid. He should stop that. Ugh. It's really irritating that stopping that is not an atomic mental motion and he has to handhold himself through it every time. 

...It still feels too big to think about. He's - pretty sure he's making the same mistake as before, pointlessly mentally flailing at trying to - decide to already have a plan as a single motion - instead of doing the actual process of planning, which involves thinking about specific things like "I should pass orders for this commander to take this precaution." 

He feels way too disoriented to think about specifics; it feels like his entire mental map is unrecoverably contaminated with unknown unknowns. But - he's pretty sure that is actually just a feeling, and that he does know some specific things, like - ugh, retrieving facts from memory is effortful - but he can, pushing himself through it one grinding step at a time, generate a mental list of all his major troop deployment locations and who is in command of each. Is that even the thing he wanted to make a list of. He's not sure. It would be really nice if Iomedae's artifact could do twice as much of the thing where it gives him more working memory, and much less of the thing where it makes him intensely self-aware of everything his mind is doing and all the ways that the thing it's doing is incorrect, but presumably it's not actually something you can pick and choose like that. 

 

It takes him a while, during which a really obnoxiously high fraction of his total cognitive capacity is going toward being aware of all of his emotions at all times and also flagging the various fascinating and horrifying failure modes his brain is falling into. (Does Iomedae feel like this all the time? Maybe it's less - like this - if you're not also massively exhausted and in pain and upset about having made terrible mistakes. Maybe Iomedae makes fewer terrible mistakes and thus has fewer regrets to end up dwelling on. Maybe you just eventually stop being insane in various ways if you spend long enough being this self-aware about it.) 

...also he should really not be using the communication-spell, he was able to push through before without paying attention to how it felt to use his Gifts, but the way it feels is 'very awful' and there is apparently a limit to how many awful things he can cope with at the same time. He should...do a different thing instead...it takes him a frustratingly long time to walk himself through noticing that he should ask someone else to do it, and then actually asking them, and then managing to tell them specific, coherent sentences that he would like passed along, and who he would like them passed along to. 

He asks Iomedae for advice about every thirty seconds, usually in the form of 'does this make sense?' and then an extremely reasonable proposal, which is nonetheless tagged with terrifying uncertainty and feelings of doom because everything is right now and the ratio of cognitive enhancements that the headband provides is overall intensifying this rather than easing it. Ma'ar can work around it and account for it but it's hard and slow and it's way faster to just use Iomedae as a reassurance-provider. Hopefully she isn't too annoyed about it. 

Permalink Mark Unread

She doesn't mind at all. She's not going to touch him, she doesn't know what the local cultural norms are around that and the last thing they need are bizarre rumors, but she is happy to be close and tell him every thirty seconds that his ideas seem reasonable.

Permalink Mark Unread

This is very exhausting but the reassurance helps, and eventually Ma'ar has, by process of elimination, concluded that probably nothing is on fire that he's missed and probably he has not left any gaping holes in their precautions, and the reason he's so scared that he's forgetting something has more to do with his emotional state than the tactical realities. 

He would like to work on the problem where his people don't trust Iomedae and they should, but that sounds like something best done with in-person meetings, and also best done when he can succeed at speaking in coherent sentences. 

 

 

It's very unfair that he isn't, really, any less scared than he was before he did all of that. Making plans usually results in feeling better about the situation he's in. But he feels slightly less like he wants to run away and hide and never take actions again. 

He should probably offer Iomedae the headband back but that requires a decision. Ma'ar has used up all of his decisions and now there are no more. Also he's kind of falling asleep. 

Permalink Mark Unread

She lets him keep it, even once he's asleep. She doesn't need it back that urgently; all she's doing is resting and waiting and talking with Need. 

 

 

Permalink Mark Unread

It gives him incredibly weird and intensely vivid dreams! ...It also gives him a much more reliable ability to catch himself and notice when he's dreaming, which doesn't necessarily mean he can wake himself up or decide that a given dream should stop being a nightmare, but it mitigates it a little. 

Ma'ar does not usually talk in his sleep nearly this much, but he's doing it a lot, though not very comprehensibly. Urtho's name can sometimes be picked out. 

Permalink Mark Unread

Need is happy to keep Iomedae company while she's awake, though she's running low on conversation topics. 

Permalink Mark Unread

The Healers will try to let Ma'ar sleep uninterrupted for a good long while, he badly needs it. Eventually they're going to need to nudge him awake and get him to consume some actual calories, Healing burns a lot of energy. 

Permalink Mark Unread

Yeah. He's not hungry, exactly, but he feels very weak and lightheaded. Which doesn't actually make eating any more appealing. He has to SIT UP. How is that reasonable. 

...complaining about how basic facts of reality are unfair is not helpful - being annoyed with himself for it is also not helpful - why is he oh right he's still wearing Iomedae's magic headband and that's why all of his thoughts are like that. 

:You can have the artifact back: he tells Iomedae. Not having it will probably mean he's even more impaired at taking actions including eating, but the Healers are going to make him do it anyway, and at least he won't be overthinking it the entire time. 

Permalink Mark Unread

Then she'll take it back, and smile reassuringly at him.

Permalink Mark Unread

Everything is terrible but Iomedae smiling at him is NOT terrible. Ma'ar smiles back, and despite the fact that his head has gone back to feeling full of glue, manages to dig up a scrap of motivation to aim at eating and drinking. 

...it's probably not surprising that giving his body some nourishment to work with makes him feel better, but Ma'ar is nonetheless pretty surprised by the slight-but-noticeable lightening in the endless everything-is-terrible. A lot of things are pretty terrible, but the situation is in fact kind of under control, and it's probably a good sign that it's been a while now and nothing else has exploded. Arguably he should check in with his people but he does not actually super want to do that and - it seems like he can probably afford not to, for the moment. 

:How are you feeling?: he asks Iomedae. 

Permalink Mark Unread

: - worried about you, worried about the ceasefire, mad at Vkandis, moderately irritated with Urtho but also considering if he'll give me a couple of those to take home.:

Permalink Mark Unread

He had more meant to ask about her physical condition but she actually looks much better. 

She wants some of Urtho's superweapons to take back to her world??? ...probably not a useful argument to have right now. 

 

:Is there any point in being mad at gods? It feels like being mad at - the weather, or something. ...What are you worried about for me?: 

Permalink Mark Unread

:You have serious injuries and your Healers seem concerned, so I think I ought to be as concerned as they are, not knowing anything they don't. 

It's entirely reasonable to be mad at gods! In many ways it's more reasonable than being mad at people! People mostly have limited resources and are often doing their best! Gods have lots more resources and sometimes have stupid evil goals! ...I owe Bastet my life, obviously, and the Nameless Flame goddess seems lovely.:

Permalink Mark Unread

:I have been injured much worse than this before and recovered fine, I am not sure why the Healers are so worried! I admit the timing is inconvenient: 

Permalink Mark Unread

(The Healers are a lot more worried than they would be just going off what's visible to Healing-Sight, because Ma'ar is obviously miserable and not very functional, which is unusual for him - he's been injured worse than this before on the battlefield and kept fighting - and they're nervous that it means they're missing the early stages of something more serious. An infection in his bloodstream wouldn't necessarily be very visible to Healing-Sight until it was more advanced.) 

Permalink Mark Unread

:I am going to continue being as worried about you as your Healers are: she says. :They have more information than you do just like they have more information than I do!:

Permalink Mark Unread

Ma'ar makes a face at her. 

Permalink Mark Unread

The Healers think he should eat more than that. 

Permalink Mark Unread

FINE if the alternative is that they're going to WORRY at him. It's possible that some of the awful helpless feeling of disorientation and being out of control was literally just physical dizziness that he was mistaking for an emotion, and the food is helping with that. 

:I am considering whether I should request a situation report from my people: he tells Iomedae, because Mindspeech conveniently doesn't interfere with eating. :I cannot actually tell if I am - functioning well enough to be making important decisions - I think the problem there is not because of my injuries, it is some other kind of problem I have not had before: 

Permalink Mark Unread

:I apologize. It was a bad context in which to push you about the events that led to the war with Tantara. I admire you and the work you've done for Predain and it is deeply unfair, how badly it could have gone. It should have been a conversation for us to have at some later date with less immediate pressures.:

Permalink Mark Unread

He looks puzzled. :I...am not actually sure what you are apologizing for: 

Permalink Mark Unread

:I pointed out that things would predictably have gone very badly, in our earlier conversation, and it has not actually escaped me that since then you have been very convinced you cannot make important decisions.:

Permalink Mark Unread

:...You pointed out some things which are true and that I could have noticed on my own much sooner if I had - been asking the right questions. I - do not think it would actually be better to have gone on being wrong about important things, just because being wrong about things is upsetting!: 

Permalink Mark Unread

:Right, which is why I should have pointed it out to you while you were not recovering from serious burn injuries and trying to hold a ceasefire together. There's no such thing as a harmless lie but there are definitely facts one might prefer to learn at a later time.:

Permalink Mark Unread

Iomedae is probably trying to be reassuring and it's rude to argue with her instead of being reassured. Ma'ar sighs. 

:If you think it is unhelpful to be convinced I cannot make important decisions, you - are probably right but I am not sure what you think the alternative is: 

Permalink Mark Unread

:Well, do you think that you actually cannot make important decisions?:

Permalink Mark Unread

Ma'ar starts to answer, and then stops and makes himself actually think about it. 

:...Obviously I can make important decisions, that is - mostly a fact about who will listen to me if I give them orders, and I think my people are - not any less inclined to listen to me than before. I am worried that I am...missing other things which are just as big as Urtho's superweapons, and so I will make the wrong decisions and they will make things worse. ...I suppose I want there to be an alternative where someone else is better at making decisions and will do it while I figure out what went wrong and how to avoid making the same mistakes again. I am not sure that is an alternative that actually exists, it - is compatible with reality for me to be very bad at making the right decision and for everyone else to be worse, but it is terrifying to be in the position of having to make decisions I feel this uncertain about and I am - very tired of being scared: 

Permalink Mark Unread

Does he want the kind of reassuring smile that makes it very very easy to choose not to be scared? Because she can do that all day.

Permalink Mark Unread

It feels like being back in Urtho's Tower.

Ma'ar can't think of any better way to describe it. It feels - not like everything in the world being all right, so many things are so far from all right, but - like he's come home. Like he has a home to come back to. Like there's safety in the world that isn't what he personally built, and he's not alone, and the work will be very hard and very long and - it's not even that he thinks they're definitely going to win, whatever Iomedae did hasn't changed his beliefs, but...

...but he can be okay. Lots of specific things aren't okay and he's sad about it, there are people he was already too late to save and there are going to be more of them, because this is going to take a long time, but some kind of desperate internal pressure is easing. It's as though he was trying to hold a bridge together while dangling in midair, nothing below him to catch him if he fell, and he's only just realized that he can set his feet down and find solid ground. 

 

 

(It is very obvious to Iomedae, from the change in Ma'ar's body, that he has almost never, in his entire life, felt safe or not been afraid.) 

Permalink Mark Unread

Permalink Mark Unread

This is fascinating. He's not sure it's going to make it easier to think, overall, but it's - at least going to mean he has different thoughts. Maybe more useful ones. 

 

...He's also still very tired. Among other things, it's been a long time since he was regularly getting enough sleep. 

:Thank you: he sends. :I - think that if no one has contacted either of us with an emergency, things are stable for the moment, and I should try to get some more rest: 

Permalink Mark Unread

Sounds good.

Permalink Mark Unread

Ma'ar gets himself comfortable, or as comfortable as he realistically can given how much of his skin is still raw and tender, and closes his eyes and sleeps. 

Permalink Mark Unread

Need watches through Iomedae's eyes. Smugly. 

:You know, you really aren't discouraging him from falling in love with you. Did you see his face? ...I approve of him, I think. He's a weird person but he's - trying so earnestly - don't meet many men like that: 

Permalink Mark Unread

:He is a very unusual sort of man: she agrees absently. :I don't really know what you're rooting for here. I have a peace to negotiate and it'd be very disruptive to it if I were inappropriately invested in one side's commander.:

Permalink Mark Unread

…It’s mostly that negotiating peace is boring and Need is bored, and it’s not really something where she has skills to contribute, and teasing Iomedae gives her something to do with herself. Also Ma’ar’s enormous crush on Iomedae is, in her opinion, hilarious.

Iomedae can decide to be all duty-bound and responsible if she wants, but maybe she should also consider someday having fun. Probably Aroden would approve of that.

Permalink Mark Unread

Iomedae has lots of fun! In peacetime!

Permalink Mark Unread

Well, they should definitely work on making it peacetime, then.

Permalink Mark Unread

Ma’ar sleeps. 

The Healers are going to notice that he’s responding substantially better to their Healing-efforts than he was before.

Permalink Mark Unread

…Well, probably having now eaten literally anything in the last day is helping? And the fact that he’s not using his Gifts constantly, they didn’t exactly have standing to order him to stop that but it all comes from the same underlying energy-reserves. They were definitely considering a theory that Ma’ar was recovering more slowly just from sheer exhaustion. 

That being said, they do also have questions about what Iomedae did, immediately before he went back to sleep. It really looks like she did something and it wasn’t just giving him the right reassuring platitudes.

Permalink Mark Unread

She did do something. Paladins cannot be frightened, and they can make it easier for other people to also not be frightened. It's a choice, by the other person, if they don't want to let a paladin's aura affect them then it won't, but it makes it easier to decide not to be scared. In Golarion it is disputed if this is mind-affecting magic or just the same sort of thing as a hug, the reassuring touch of an allied mind; she doesn't know. She won't do it during negotiations, obviously, but at the moment it seems to be helping him sleep.

Permalink Mark Unread

Well, it’s a known observation that sometimes being under intense strain, even purely emotional strain, affects how well people respond to Healing as well as how quickly they recover naturally. Helping him be less stressed seems to be helping, maybe quite a lot. 

Permalink Mark Unread

She'll keep it up, then, if that's all right. She doesn't want to make them nervous. She understands the many reasons no one in Predain would particularly trust her.

Permalink Mark Unread

(Actually two-thirds of these Healers are Tantaran! It was a bit awkward at first, especially for the outnumbered Predain Healers, but - really, it seems like Healers are mostly the same everywhere. And treating a terrifyingly critical patient, like Iomedae was not that many candlemarks ago, is a very efficient way for Healers to end up being friends. It also helps that she recovered so absurdly fast; it feels like winning against a common enemy.)

Anyway, yes, they would appreciate it if she kept doing the thing as long as she’s able. Ma’ar was clearly under a LOT of pressure and it was probably hurting his recovery. 

Permalink Mark Unread

Understood. She can do it for the rest of the day.

 

She rests herself, though she doesn't sleep (that would interfere with her aura of courage). She looks almost normal by nightfall; she should be wholly recovered by morning.

Permalink Mark Unread

Ma’ar sleeps nearly straight through the day. He wakes a little before sunset, ravenously hungry and in urgent need of relieving himself. He's able to stand up and walk to use the nearest privy without incident, though the Healers are definitely hovering, and then will get to work shoving food into his face with much more energy than before. 

Permalink Mark Unread

(The Healers will offer Iomedae food as well; she doesn't seem to need it but it can't hurt, and probably warm soup is just comforting and nice even if you're someone as absurdly powerful as Iomedae. They've been staring at her still-brightening life-force with kind of a lot of awe.) 

Permalink Mark Unread

She eats the soup. She went through a period of not eating because she couldn't benefit from it and there were starving people, but these days she only does that if there is some way to cause the starving people to have the food. Good isn't about sacrifice, it's about things being better than they'd be otherwise. And food is an important way that societies communicate hospitality and shared humanity. And maybe she's only partially sharing in that humanity, these days, but she can still appreciate the taste of soup. 

:At this point I should plausibly return to Tantara,: she says to Ma'ar once he seems to be very plainly on the mend. :We have a peace settlement to arrive at.:

Permalink Mark Unread

Ma'ar nods. 

(He doesn't want her to leave. Right now he feels - okay, stable, like everything that could happen is something he could bear - but he is pretty sure this is mostly if not entirely because of whatever magic or not-even-magic Iomedae is doing. He...can manage it, he thinks, it'll probably be unpleasant and awful but his head is mostly clear and he thinks he can stay in control and make reasonable decisions, or at least no-more-impaired-than-usual decisions, even with that foundation of feeling-safe gone.

He doesn't want to, but - that matters a lot less than the future of Tantara and Predain. And right now, while he's not scared, he can think about that without flinching.) 

:I think that makes sense. I am somewhat surprised you have not heard more from Urtho, but - I suppose he might want to avoid bothering you, if he is not sure how fast you are recovering: 

Permalink Mark Unread

:I'm hoping that is all it is but I should probably check.: She meets his eyes. :I have confidence in you. You want this peace, you know it's good for Predain, and your people trust you.:

Permalink Mark Unread

Aaaaaaaaaaaaand she is definitely saying that because she feels badly for having expressed her completely-true-and-valid complaints to him in what might be argued was an overly harsh way. 

It...still helps. He really doesn't think she would lie. 

:I do want peace, very badly. I want Tantara to be all right. And I - think that I can continue to hold my people's trust for long enough to make this work, even if I am sure they think I am making some baffling choices lately: He REALLY needs to sit down and properly speak with the King. Honestly he wishes he could have Iomedae there, but it's going to take some work first before the King would even be willing to let Iomedae do the be-less-afraid effect to him, even though it would really help. He's pretty sure that they could de-escalate this twenty times faster and more smoothly if no one were terrified. 

:...You had wanted to at some point speak to the Tantaran prisoners we are still holding: he muses, after a moment. :Once you felt safer being in Predain. I somewhat suspect that concern is alleviated, now, though I am not sure you still feel the need to speak with them: 

Permalink Mark Unread

:Let's actually see if we can get the prisoner exchange through tomorrow and obviate it. I'd be very surprised, at this point, to learn you're mistreating the prisoners except insofar as you're running out of food.:

Permalink Mark Unread

Nod. :The food and supply situation is...really not good. No one is literally starving yet, but - it is making my logistics people very nervous and I worry that increases the risk of misunderstandings. ...Also it is not going to be a one-to-one prisoner exchange anyway, they have far fewer of our people. I am not actually complaining, it works out better for us to hand all of them back, but - it might make things look more fair, to my side, if Tantara exchanged other goods for the excess prisoners: 

Permalink Mark Unread

:I'll see what I can do.:

Permalink Mark Unread

Ma'ar closes his eyes, for a moment. Tries to memorize the feeling that's sort of like being in Urtho's Tower and sort of like having solid ground under his feet for the first time in years. 

:My people can send word ahead and then Gate you to the border: Which means at least one extra hop, to get all the way back to Urtho, but they still really shouldn't be raising Gates directly into Tantaran territory. 

Permalink Mark Unread

:Thank you. We'll speak again soon.:

Permalink Mark Unread

And, after a message is passed and its receipt confirmed, Ma'ar's mages Gate her back to the border, where they can hand her off to the Tantaran escort. (Most of the Tantaran Healers are coming back as well; they really don't need twenty people around anymore.) 

 

Ma'ar's people are acting subtly differently toward her. There's less fear, and - kind of a lot of protectiveness, not so much in the sense that they seem worried anything will happen to her - though they're a little worried about Tantara, where the superweapons are - but in the sense that if someone did try to pick a fight with her they would be very offended on her behalf. 

Permalink Mark Unread

It's hard to predict things like that, how you'll be parsed in a foreign country. She's relieved, though. It'll make everything much easier. 

 

She thanks them and then off she goes.

The fear effect is gone once she's out of range of Ma'ar, of course.

Permalink Mark Unread

...He slightly wishes he had asked her to stay for thirty minutes so he could think through his next steps while less distracted.

It wouldn't have been actually worth the delay, not when she's been mostly out of contact with Urtho for a night and day. He probably wants the full night's rest anyway, before he throws himself fully back into his responsibilities; he's mostly clearheaded but he still doesn't have a lot of energy to spare, and his body hurts too much to move normally, which is the sort of thing people notice and react to. 

He'll make some notes, and check in with a few people via communication-spell, and then have a much harder time sleeping than he did when Iomedae was there. 

Permalink Mark Unread

It's completely dark by the time Iomedae is actually back at Urtho's Tower. The hertasi who greet her inform her that Urtho is ready to meet whenever is convenient for her, and the senior priest of Vkandis would also like to see her whenever she can manage it. 

Permalink Mark Unread

Now's good. (She looks almost entirely recovered, at this point, and isn't moving any slower than normal.)

Permalink Mark Unread

Urtho will meet her in his office. He looks frazzled, and if anything less recovered from his poisoning adventure several days ago than she is from having all of her skin boiled off twelve hours ago. 

"Iomedae." He stands to greet her. "Are you actually all right - is Ma'ar all right, my people reported he was injured -"

Permalink Mark Unread

She's pretty sure it's useful if rumor has it she's literally invincible. "He has some injuries. Not severe ones, but he Gated in to get me and Need out and was burned. I should have made plans to be Gated out after the weapon went off, among several other oversights in retrospect. How are you doing?"

Permalink Mark Unread

He makes a vague hand gesture. "I am - not very good at this. I suppose I'm unlikely to be worse at negotiating a peace than I was at fighting a war, but - it feels so much more complicated." 

 

And he ducks his head. "....I owe you an apology for what happened. You deserved better of our world and its people." 

Permalink Mark Unread

- nod. "Durable peace, in particular, is hard. Easier with people on both sides who are invested in maintaining it, but - still hard. You'd expect countries like Tantara and a prosperous, developed Predain to fight every few decades, if they weren't doing an unusually good job. That's what we have to beat - not just this war, but all the reasons for wars with a long border and different cultures and some mutual resentment and no shared church. I want to do a prisoner exchange -

- and maybe I can get you some details in the morning. You don't look good, and if I'm honest I too could use some sleep. I don't like being hit by superweapons.

 

You don't - owe me an apology. You might owe all of Velgarth an apology, I think Ma'ar would really benefit from an apology, but I had of Tantara the only thing I've ever wanted, which is - space to fix things. "

Permalink Mark Unread

Apologizing to Ma'ar sounds so much worse than apologizing to Iomedae she does probably have a point. 

"- The girl is fine. The one you left with the temple of Bestet at very short notice. I have some of my hertasi on teaching her to read and she's apparently a very quick and eager student." 

Permalink Mark Unread

" - thank you. Very much thank you."

Permalink Mark Unread

"She's a good kid. Smart as a whip. I think she would like a longer explanation of what happened from you, but - it can wait for tomorrow." 

Permalink Mark Unread

Need shuffles mentally at Iomedae's side. :And - I'd best get back to her before she finds a way into trouble. But that can wait for tomorrow as well. Reckon you could use one more night of Healing: 

Permalink Mark Unread

"I probably could. I'll return Need and issue some of my own apologies - at dawn."



And she'll spend most of the night drafting the prisoner exchange agreements. Someone has to. Actually, specifically she has to.

Permalink Mark Unread

Need can provide Healing, company, and snarky commentary. It's not that useful but it might help Iomedae stay focused, at least. 

Permalink Mark Unread

At dawn she has several new messages, relayed by polite helpful hertasi. In addition to the priest of Vkandis, the priests of the Nameless God want to talk to her, and the shamans of the Star-Eyed Goddess, and Marlana hasn't specifically asked but she's still at the Tower and would probably find it a huge relief to see for herself that Iomedae is all right. 

Also the young girl from the River Kingdoms is in the library, but interruptible if Iomedae wants to talk to her first. 

Permalink Mark Unread

- she'll take the other meetings first, actually, it doesn't seem fair to rush Need's reunion unless Need insists that's what they should do. She'll talk to the priest of Vkandis first. 

Permalink Mark Unread

Nah, if Shayeen isn't currently setting anything on fire it can probably wait a few candlemarks. 

Permalink Mark Unread

The hertasi will quickly usher her to a conference-room where the priest is waiting. 

He, too, rises immediately, though with some difficulty. He looks like if anything he's had an even worse last day than Urtho. 

Permalink Mark Unread

She bows. She may not respect Vkandis at all but she does respect this man. He was trying to - do something better than everyone's worst option, and she always respects that.

"I heard the result of the council's negotiations. I was very glad to hear it."

Permalink Mark Unread

"You have our deepest apologies that it went as far as it did. It - could have been so much worse, if not for your courage - nobody died and I cannot help but call that a miracle." 

His hands are shaking, though, and his eyes look haunted. 

"I," and he hesitates, ducks his head, "I have been trying to understand the true will of our Sunlord, here, and - the church of Vkandis is not your enemy, I swear, but..." Helpless shrug. "I am afraid." 

Permalink Mark Unread

 

 

 

 

 

"What does it mean to you, to serve a god? One could serve a god as they serve a King, in exchange for his good kingship. As they serve a husband or wife, unto death but with the knowledge that sometimes to love someone is to hold them back from their worst excesses. One could serve a god because there is trust, for as long as there's trust, or because there is love, for as long as there is love.

 

If Aroden asked me, once, to do something that my conscience cried out was a terrible mistake, and He could not tell me why, I would do it for Him. Once.

 

 

And the second time, it would be easier, and that is why I'd never do it twice, why I'd shatter all I've built on Aroden's foundation before I did it twice."

Permalink Mark Unread

Whatever response he was expecting from her, apparently it wasn't that. He blinks at her and, after a moment, sags back down into the armchair where he was seated before. 

"I have - tried to pray for guidance, for Vkandis to counsel me on what I should do, and - I do not know. Only that I dreamed of - darkness, and fog, and a wall across the future. I cannot fathom what He sees. Maybe it is not something a mortal mind could hold. But - I am very afraid that He looks on the world and on you in it from a higher vantage point, and - sees something. Something bad." 

Permalink Mark Unread

Vkandis might be lying. 

 

She doesn't say that; she said it about as directly as she can. "It's my desire to bring this peace, make it durable, and then go home. I have other wars to fight. But - I think I see how this one would have ended, if I hadn't arrived, and I cannot imagine it would have served  the people of Vkandis." 

Permalink Mark Unread

The priest leans forward, resting his elbows on his knees and supporting his chin on his fists, as though he's abruptly too exhausted to hold up his head. He closes his eyes. 

"That - is certainly what it looks like on the surface. Perhaps Vkandis or the other gods had a different plan to end it. Or - perhaps it was just good, and the danger is elsewhere, further in the future - maybe a less direct result of your presence, maybe - the result of contact with your world and its other gods? ...I am not sure. I believe Vkandis would have told me, if He could and if it would - make things better..." 

 

A long pause. 

"- I wish I knew more of your Aroden. It - I am not sure what question it is the answer to, but it feels important." 

Permalink Mark Unread

 

"I'm happy to tell you about him. He was mortal, once, like you and I, but he discovered the secret to immortality, and spent many lifetimes exploring the universe. I've wondered occasionally if he ever came here. He wrote of some of his travels, but one got the sense it was a filtered set of them. He wanted us to grow up to build - civilizations. Places that were always growing and improving and discovering. Places in the stars, places made out of the stars, infinite worlds, our own Creation greater than the one that birthed us. He wanted no child to ever go hungry, no building to ever be cold in winter, no law to ever be unjust, and he thought of it as something we could build ourselves, in time. He would love Tantara, I think."

Permalink Mark Unread

"That sounds beautiful. And - very ambitious -" He's frowning, hunting for the right words. "If you want to plant a lovely garden for your village, there are - fewer things that can go badly wrong, fewer things you can trample or break, if you misstep or are confused? Then if you want to make infinite cities among the stars. Gods are gods, of course, but - I am not sure I wouldn't be frightened, of a mortal who claimed to have that goal. I think mortals are not meant to be that - big. There is a point where it would frighten me even from a god, to try something so vast.”

Permalink Mark Unread

"That seems very fair. I think that was - part of Ma'ar's mistake, being ambitious, not understanding the things he was trying to build and trying to build on. 

Golarion is filled with horrors. The question that I was obsessed with, as a child, was why the gods did nothing about them. I am not a god," yet, "but I have always been a - narrower shape, than Aroden. I have hoped to create space in which other people can build their dreams. And some of their dreams will probably be stupid, or dangerous, and I will trust the gods, in managing that danger, but my own aims have never stretched out beyond ending war and slavery and the torments to which people are made subject." Probably some other sort of being will be the right Lawful Good god, once that is done.

Permalink Mark Unread

He nods. Fidgets with the hem of his robe. 

"The world is filled with horrors. It grieves me as well. As a - fellow mortal - I have nothing but the utmost respect for your mission, and - our world does need it." 

He bows his head. "...I wish you could reach your god. It does seem - dangerous, to have your god's power and not His advice. But since this may not be possible..." A slight shrug. "Be very careful. That is all I can ask." 

Permalink Mark Unread

"Of course. I will consult with you and with your church whenever I can, if I'm doing something that might go wrong, and I'll keep praying for Aroden's guidance, which I still think He would offer me at great need."

(It would in fact be perfectly characteristic of Aroden, if it's incredibly expensive to contact her here and things were going to go along the trajectory they've gone so far, to ignore her entirely even if He can see and hear her just fine. She wouldn't be taking substantially different actions if she had assurance of His involvement.)

Permalink Mark Unread

He nods. He doesn't look happy about it, but it also doesn't seem like his unhappiness is mostly with her. "I suppose that is all I can ask." 

Permalink Mark Unread

"I'm very grateful for the advice. Please let me know if you hear any more."

Permalink Mark Unread

"Of course." Sigh. "I wish I could - make you more promises, of friendship and safety with our church. Not knowing what the danger is that Vkandis fears, I - am not sure I can promise that. But I can at least give you my word that if - things change - I will speak to you first." 

He thanks her again. The hertasi mutter something about how he clearly needs to rest, and usher him out of the room. 

Permalink Mark Unread

Need stirs grumpily at Iomedae's side. :Poor man deserves a better god: 

Permalink Mark Unread

:Yep. I tried to tell him so but it's not an easy thing to hear.: Next meeting?

Permalink Mark Unread

The high priestess of the Nameless God can meet with her now. 

Permalink Mark Unread

Iomedae is honored to meet with her.

Permalink Mark Unread

Thaliss looks intensely relieved to see Iomedae alive and intact. She seems less frazzled and upset than the priest of Vkandis, but she does not look like someone who has enjoyed the last day. 

"- I have so many questions," she says, the moment they're in the same room. "The weapon went off - we heard it, even from here - and then you were...in Predain, for the last day? How did that come about?" 

Permalink Mark Unread

"I was injured in the explosion. Ma'ar had been scrying the explosion site and Gated me out - I should probably have made arrangements for that beforehand, but I was very unsure what to expect the situation to be after the weapon went off, what I'd be asking people to do if I asked them to get me. It was in fact fairly dangerous, he was badly burned during the operation to extract me. He brought me to some Healers in Predain, and wrote to Urtho asking for Tantara to send help as well." She smiles thinly. "I'm fine now."

Permalink Mark Unread

"I can see that, and I am very glad of it! ...I am confused. About the last day. We have received no guidance from the Eternal Flame - not that I was particularly expecting it - and I am not sure the church of Vkandis has any idea what is happening either. ...It seems like a good sign. That Ma'ar chose to help you – unasked, it sounds like, and - at substantial risk to himself. I am curious to hear more of him, if you - have further thoughts now." 

Permalink Mark Unread

 

"I would expect your god and your faith to find a lot of common ground with him, actually. I am - not always myself inclined to see the world primarily through the lens of the potential for redemption of its most dangerous actors, but I think it's just the right lens to see Ma'ar. Many of the terrible things that he's done, I think he did out of the desire to save his people, and with - more than the usual amount of mindfulness that it is always a tragedy to take a life. He Gated in to tell his men to surrender, the night of the assault on the fifth division, and he did that expecting I'd kill him - but be occupied, I suppose, from killing them. I see how he won the loyalty of the people of Predain; he genuinely cares for them, and they for him. 

I am very afraid of the final results of many of the policies he adopted. I think Tantara would be worse, if blood-magic and widespread compulsions were accepted here. I think he agrees, but he didn't know how to build Tantara, and was - very impatient - he wrote Urtho all these letters, about how many fewer children were dying under his rule. 

I am glad he is the other party to these peace talks."

Permalink Mark Unread

She nods, seriously. 

"It troubles me that - I feel the people of Predain already considered themselves to have been ill-treated, or at least neglected and ignored, by the gods. I am not sure it will be of much reassurance that the church of Vkandis disavows the actions of its mages. There is a great deal of aid that our temple order could offer, I think, if they wanted it, but helping people who did not ask for it and do not want it is...fraught." 

Permalink Mark Unread

"I think that the people of Predain don't trust the motives of people who are doing apparently-friendly things. It'll go better, I suspect, to feed them this winter as war reparations than as an act of generosity because we don't want their children to starve. But I do expect you could set up an operation to feed them, so long as you said it was war reparations, and once they know you maybe they're less suspicious if the operation does not cease."

Permalink Mark Unread

She looks down. "It is really not the worst tragedy here, I suppose, but - it does feel like a tragedy, whatever history is behind that suspicion. I will speak with Urtho about our temple helping Tantara with war reparations, we are - good at that. ...And I would like to meet Ma'ar, but we should not rush him, he has more reason than most to doubt the gods' goodwill." 

She hesitates. 

"...I am reluctant to ask too much of you, when you are here mostly without the support of your own god, but I believe our world benefits greatly from you. If there is anything our church can do, to help you in - anything you want to do - I would like to know." 

Permalink Mark Unread

 

"I may want to found a religious order in Tantara. That is a matter in which I would be relying greatly on your advice, and it's entirely possible it ought to be an order that serves your god rather than mine. It seems a tragedy, to me, that Tantara has no power to hold mages accused of serious crimes, and so is left with only the options of killing them or leaving them to flee. It's a decision I have faced several times since I arrived here, and been unhappy to have no better options. It strikes me as a context in which, despite the problems, Predain's use of compulsions seems sensible to me - but it would have to be done by people sworn not to use their power for anything else, and separate from any political power structure that might overlook their doing so or try to use them for it. This would be a project of many years, and I'd want to talk to many people, but it's - something I am thinking about and would appreciate your churches's counsel on."

Permalink Mark Unread

...Nod. 

"I - I need to think on it. It would be a change, and a frightening one, but - it is certainly a tragedy when anyone dies." 

She frowns. "...Predain uses compulsions in other ways as well, no? As a sort of oath of service. Are you planning to put a stop to that, or convince Ma'ar to end the practice himself?" 

Permalink Mark Unread

"I don't like it but I want to - learn more about Predain, how they think about it, what problems they're trying to solve with it, what the alternatives are - before I do more than express concern. A corrupt guard is a really big problem for people, and it wouldn't surprise me if everyone in Predain sees this as a big improvement, which would make it very hard to change without offering something else that solves their problems. And I want to be able to point Ma'ar at examples of the things I'm worried about - the manipulative use of compulsions to hurt people or preserve power over them - I'm sure there are some, but I want to actually find them so it doesn't seem like philosophizing."

Permalink Mark Unread

"That makes sense. ...Our church operates in the Ceej Empire, in a limited capacity. I can write to those local temples and ask for such examples, if it would help." 

Permalink Mark Unread

"That would be very useful. Guessing where some habit will lead you is never as good as actually checking."

Permalink Mark Unread

Nod. "...Does your own god's church have teachings on this, or examples of where it can go wrong?" 

Permalink Mark Unread

Oh boy, do they ever! Iomedae would be happy to give a compressed version of the standard accounting from Aroden's life and holy books of things that go terribly wrong when you set up an empire and don't pay close enough attention to how the incentives will be sustainable without very virtuous people showing up periodically to make everyone stop being awful. This particular lecture series is mostly a scathing critique particularly of Taldor (without getting Taldor to stop funding her crusade, so it has to be slightly subtle) but a lot of it is more broadly applicable. 

 

She's only going to give the compressed version, though, because there are other people she owes a meeting, this morning, and she also wants to get the prisoner exchange requests sent off.

Permalink Mark Unread

The priestess of the Nameless God will hang raptly onto every word of her compressed version, and express very emphatically that she would like to speak again later once the immediate emergencies are dealt with. 

 

The shamans of the Star-Eyed can meet with her next? 

Permalink Mark Unread

She is, again, honored and appreciative.

Permalink Mark Unread

...It's actually just Ravenwing, this time, and Lionwind to translate. Ravenwing bows deeply to Iomedae. 

"I apologize for Silverhorse's absence. He spent much of the last day on the Moonpaths, petitioning for Her advice." 

She hesitates, as though not quite sure how to say the next part. 

Permalink Mark Unread

Permalink Mark Unread

Ravenwing shuffles, then lifts her chin and meets Iomedae's eyes. 

"This is - not something we have ever done before, for someone not of our people. I...would not have known before today that it was possible at all. But Silverhorse says that She would speak to you, on the Moonpaths, if you are willing." 

Permalink Mark Unread

" - I am. This - permits us to be more visible to your goddess, and receive her guidance more directly?"

Permalink Mark Unread

"...Yes. It is - rarely done, it is costly both for Her and for the mortal facing it, but it seems She cannot speak to you directly in any other way - Silverhorse's understanding is that She can barely see you, even in Foresight. Which I suppose makes sense given that you serve another god, but it is - still worrying, especially given how powerful you are and how little you know of our world." 

Permalink Mark Unread

"I understand. I would be honored to meet with her, on the understanding that this is a peaceful meeting for the purpose of mutual comprehension, to which I will bring no weapons and am assured of no betrayal."

Permalink Mark Unread

Solemn nod. "I am glad to hear it. ...Do you want to plan a future time for this? It is - generally very exhausting to speak with Her face to face, I would not wish to ask this of you before you have dealt with especially urgent needs." 

Permalink Mark Unread

"I can only imagine. Speaking to Aroden is the same way. Perhaps after the prisoner exchange, which I'm trying to get done by tomorrow."

Permalink Mark Unread

"That makes sense. Tomorrow, then." 

 

The hertasi will escort Iomedae out of the room. Does she want to talk to Shayeen next, or Marlana of the temple of Bestet, or could they perhaps arrange for both of them to be in the same room so Iomedae can speak with them at the same time? 

Permalink Mark Unread

Same room sounds good! Iomedae obviously owes both of them an explanation of recent events, considering she imposed on both of them.

Permalink Mark Unread

The hertasi can make that happen! They're so good at making things happen. 

Permalink Mark Unread

Shayeen is in the library! (Well. One of many libraries in Urtho's Tower. No one has specifically informed her that they have more than one library.) 

Permalink Mark Unread

Marlana has been finding lots of things to do - it's never hard to find lots of things to do - but none of them are the combination of urgent and high-context that she cannot either pause or hand off on two minutes' notice. She will also be in the library by the time Iomedae reaches it. 

 

- wow. Correction: she will be in the library and staring in awe at the number of shelves of books here. 

Permalink Mark Unread

It's a really nice library! Iomedae will wave them both over so she can apologize to them and explain the whole ridiculous sequence of events from her perspective. And hand Need back to Shayeen. "I doubt I would have survived without her."

Permalink Mark Unread

"Yeah, I know, I wouldn't've survived without her either."

Shayeen hasn't forgotten how it felt, in the moment when Iomedae smiled at her, and suddenly she just had (no, she must've always had that option, she'd just never noticed it before) the option of...deciding not to be scared...

And, sure, it was harder, it was a lot harder, once Iomedae wasn't right there. But Shayeen isn't stupid and she isn't a coward. And although she's been doing a lot of other things over the last day – like learning how to read, which is incredible, actually – she's had plenty of time to metaphorically fling herself at - at the feeling she experienced once, briefly, of being as brave and strong as Iomedae is. 

She doesn't think she's very good at it, yet. Obviously she's got a long way to go. Maybe Iomedae can teach her, if she seems worth teaching. 

Deep breath. Gather her courage. 

"- You didn't really tell me anything before. About what you and Need were doing. I - want to know more." 

Permalink Mark Unread

"Some followers of Vkandis decided to kill me, though the church has denounced this decision of theirs. They stole a powerful weapon of Urtho's in order to do it. It does immense damage across a fifty mile range, so I wanted to be far away from civilization when they tried to use it on me. They told me I had until dawn, for which I genuinely am immensely grateful. So Need and I went up very far north and waited."

Permalink Mark Unread

"....Is Vkandis usually that stupid? - I mean, uh. I still don't know anything. But it seems like it'd be stupid to try to kill you." 

Permalink Mark Unread

"I don't know very much about Vkandis. The representatives of the Star-Eyed goddess suggested I was making prophecy noisy, which ....makes sense, if I'm so far from where I'm supposed to be, and would make any god nervous - but it's an astonishingly irresponsible handling of that nervousness, I'm surprised someone else didn't pay Him to not do that and it seems like a bad sign about how things work around here.

 

It seems possible that Vkandis can see that I'm going to act against His interests enough it was in fact not stupid to try to kill me."

Permalink Mark Unread

"- Can gods pay each other to do things or not do things? I wouldnt've thought gods would care about money." 

Permalink Mark Unread

"They don't pay each other in money, but yes, gods at least where I'm from can pay each other to do or not do things, not with money but the way people bargain at market when they each have something the other wants, or with an abstraction of that which I suppose is sort of similar to money but doesn't involve minting any physical coin."

Permalink Mark Unread

That sounds like it should make sense and is probably really important but also it's so confusing.

 

"...Um. I don't know whether or not that means I should work on plans to fight Vkandis? Someday when I'm more powerful, I mean, it'd be dumb to do that now." 

(And there are other things she wants to do, of course, but she doesn't particularly expect Iomedae to care about the River Kingdoms, and it does seem like Iomedae is a good source of advice and she'll get more of that advice if she figures out how to help Iomedae with her plans.) 

Permalink Mark Unread

"I don't think you need to work on plans to fight Vkandis. If He needs fighting, and I can't handle it, I'll build a church that can carry on the work for me. It sounded like you were quite busy already."

Permalink Mark Unread

"...Yeah." 

She will try very hard not to be insulted about the fact that Iomedae doesn't need or want her help. It's just true that Shayeen isn't powerful or clever or experienced enough to be useful – and also she has a lot of problems she feels personally responsible for that she has to deal with before she can reasonably go fight any gods, however much those gods deserve to be fought.

"Thank you." She can't quite bring herself to bow but she'll nod with more respect than she usually does. 

Permalink Mark Unread

"Thank you. Did you find what you were looking for, in Urtho's Tower?"

Permalink Mark Unread

"I didn't know I was going to be in Urtho's Tower! I'd heard of it in ballads but I didn't even know it was a real place until - this happened. Um. I - the thing I wanted was to learn how to fight battles but it seems like it's important to know how to read, and I didn't before, and they've been teaching me here. So I think that's– I wasn't looking for that but I think it's good. I guess." 

Permalink Mark Unread

"Knowing how to read is very helpful for winning battles! There should be accounts in books of lots of battles that have happened, and who won and lost and why, and you can learn a lot that way that you'd otherwise have to learn on the field with a lot of people dead. Now, not everyone who tells how a battle went is telling the truth, either to their audience or to themselves, but there are some bare facts of the matter - like who won - that you can fill in missing pieces of the picture from."

Permalink Mark Unread

"...Oh. I - think I understand. I - don't want to make stupid mistakes if I - could've learned from books how to do better than that."

She is maybe slightly clinging to Need. Insofar as one can cling to a sword. 

Permalink Mark Unread

"We all make mistakes. It's impossible not to. But the more you know, the faster you can fix your mistakes, and the more you can learn from them."

Permalink Mark Unread

"- Yeah. ...The hertasi I talked to said people made a lot of mistakes, in the war that happened here. That Ma'ar did and Urtho did too." 

Permalink Mark Unread

"Yes. I think knowing more history would have helped both of them to better guess where their choices were taking them and decide more carefully if it was where they wanted to go."

Permalink Mark Unread

She nods, very seriously. 

"...There's gonna be a war. Where I'm from. But there are lots of wars, it just - keeps happening - I think maybe going back and winning the war wouldn't stop there from being wars again later? Is making there be fewer wars that start at all the sort of thing you can learn how to do from history?" 

Permalink Mark Unread

It is! It's in fact something she's thinking about a lot right now, because she's working to make the peace between Tantara and Predain a lasting one instead of just a 'until the next provocation' one. Marriages across the border help, trade relationships help, border lords who won't gain in status and power by war, and who have a lot to lose by it, help. Religious orders dedicated to the cause of peace help, as do religious orders with churches in both countries but a common administration, ideally outside either of them, which has an interest in its people not killing each other. The commitments of specific powerful people to the peace - which is to say mostly not to lend themselves to a war that their side started - helps. Larger, more consolidated countries can help, if they have good lines of communication internally and a good administration and aren't thrown together sloppily. They can also make things much worse if they make lots of borders disputed that didn't need to get into that state. She's not considering merging Tantara and Predain, because Tantara is big already and they do loathe each other, but she'd be contemplating it, in a place with a lot of scattered small kingdoms whose borders had moved a lot in living memory anyway.

She has a lot of examples, some of them examples of the thing she just said and some of them counterexamples. 

She thinks that wiser leaders go to war less often even accounting for everything else, and has occasionally contemplating arranging Wisdom for rulers as a matter of course. Some magic favors defense over offense -- protective spells that make fortresses much easier to hold than to take, that sort of thing -- which is good for creating conditions where wars rarely are to anyone's advantage. And then there are things that keep wars small, skill at peace negotiations and agreed-upon laws of war and trusted third parties and so on.

 

Permalink Mark Unread

Shayeen listens to this very intently. 

"I think maybe the River Kingdoms have the problem where there are a lot of small kingdoms and the borders change a lot? ...Um. I don't actually have any idea what you mean by arranging wisdom for rulers? I though being wise was the sort of thing where you just had to - be old and have seen lots of things - and I don't know if it's good for all the rulers to be old since then they'll die soon?" 

Permalink Mark Unread

"In my world there's magic for wisdom, which is what I was contemplating giving rulers. I think it is actually often worth rulers being old, even if it means more frequent transitions of power, because young people are very much more reckless, and have worse judgment in their advisors and less time to have formed justified confidence in anyone." 

 

She has examples of this, too.

Permalink Mark Unread

Shayeen listens and looks thoughtful, and maybe also kind of frustrated.

(She wants to be Queen! And she doesn't want to wait until she's old, even if several people now have given her convincing pitches that she should wait until she's older than she is now.) 

She will continue to have lots of questions and want to poke more at all the examples Iomedae is bringing up; if Iomedae wants to do anything else today, she's going to have to extract herself at some point. 

Permalink Mark Unread

She will regretfully eventually extract herself to check if the prisoner exchange proposals have been reviewed and if everyone is comfortable with them.

Permalink Mark Unread

They've been reviewed! By a lot of different people, including Urtho and all of Urtho's generals and some of Urtho's other trusted advisors and several hundred of his hertasi (who have surprisingly helpful and well-informed comments) and Skandranon of the gryphons (who has mostly very unhelpful comments) and High Priestess Thaliss, who has been working with Urtho on plans to have the temple of the Nameless God provide and transport food and supplies as war reparations. 

Urtho would be comfortable moving ahead now and sending the proposal to Predain. 

Permalink Mark Unread

Iomedae loves it when other people are useful. It's not at all the kind of thing you can rely on. She is very grateful for the suggestions and they can send the proposal off at once.

Permalink Mark Unread

Urtho's people are so happy to have been useful! Especially the hertasi.

 

They will get the proposal sent off to Predain. 

Permalink Mark Unread

And they will quickly and efficiently - within the candlemark - have confirmation that Predain accepts the agreement. Ma'ar only requests one modification to the recommendations, which is that he would like Tantara to either provide mages for security when they're picking up the gryphons, or else agree that Predain can leave their compulsions in place and have Urtho's mages remove them once they're back on Tantaran soil. He would prefer the latter but somewhat doubts that Urtho will agree to it or that Urtho's mages are actually very familiar with removing compulsions. 

Permalink Mark Unread

They're not but it's not like compulsions have very much power or explode if taken apart clumsily.

 

Urtho would like Iomedae's advice on this question, just in case she thinks it's obvious in one direction or another. 

Permalink Mark Unread

She'd honestly prefer that Urtho's people remove the compulsions. They will need to be checking all of the released prisoners for compulsions anyway, right, and - she does get the sense that some gryphons might engage in an incredibly ill-advised attack on their former captors while being released.

Permalink Mark Unread

Urtho had not actually thought about this but they would

...Ma'ar didn't express the same concern about the mages that Predain is holding, and probably none of his people are very likely to try to Final Strike - and anything short of a Final Strike is probably not that much of a problem when all of Ma'ar's people have protective talismans and presumably the Tantaran mages don't - but on reflection Ma'ar may have just not felt like he had the leverage to ask for it? 

Permalink Mark Unread

It would probably be taken well if Urtho responded that Tantara will of course have to check all the released prisoners for compulsions and does not require Predain to remove them before the transfer.

Permalink Mark Unread

That makes sense and Urtho will send that message, and start assigning mages to compulsion-checking-and-removing duty. 

Permalink Mark Unread

Predain appreciates it. They are still planning to remove compulsions on un-Gifted soldiers who have less ability to cause problems when their captors have weapons and magic and they don't. (They understand that Tantara will of course still have to check, but it still seems more polite to the soldiers in question, given that there are nearly two thousand of them and having to wait around under restrictive compulsions while technically free is probably upsetting.) 

Permalink Mark Unread

Understood. It's going to take a while to move that many people through Gates, but it sounds like they can get started? 

 

Urtho feels like he should be worried about something going wrong but he's not actually sure what specifically to look out for. Can Iomedae advise him on that? 

Permalink Mark Unread

She's not that worried, unless a hostile god is interfering on purpose for some reason. They have lines of communication. They have Gates so the whole thing can be over quickly. The site could be ambushed, but there's no one with obvious incentive to do that unless, again, there's a god who doesn't want a peace. Predain could have mixed some spies in with the released prisoners, or just turned some of them, though she'd bet Ma'ar didn't and it's not that big of a problem as long as the ceasefire holds. The gryphons and mages will not have the option of being stupid. The numbers might not precisely match what was communicated, because counting people is in fact hard. The locations might not precisely match what was communicated, because location is also in fact hard. But - the things that tend to make a prisoner exchange fail are not, in fact, at play here.  They can be paranoid while also largely predicting that things will go smoothly. (This is important for how reactive you want your guards to be.)

Permalink Mark Unread

That makes sense, and it's a good point that telling his people to be on high alert for potential problems might not, in fact, reduce the likelihood of problems. 

Permalink Mark Unread

It does, in fact, go smoothly. Predain seems to be pretty good at counting people. Tantara is not perfectly good at counting people, and is finding out that they have somewhat incomplete information on which prisoners are where, but this can be sorted out over communication-spell with the monitors. Gryphons are very upset and would probably like to cause problems but are limited to shouting insults. (None of the Predain guards threaten to duel them over it.) 

Permalink Mark Unread

One thing at a time, one little bridge of trust. 

 

She starts drafting the peace talks. 

 

She has a self-imposed deadline of morning. She noticed that the representatives of the Star-Eyed goddess did not, in fact, guarantee her her safety. She is sympathetic to the fact that a god is suspicious of her for interfering with prophecy while they were presumably watching the war very closely to prevent superweapon use, but she wants to make very very sure that everything here holds if something goes wrong tomorrow. 

Permalink Mark Unread

Urtho's people - and particularly the priestess of the Nameless God - will make themselves as helpful as possible to Iomedae's work. 

Nothing goes terribly wrong overnight. 

Permalink Mark Unread

Then in the morning she will pray for guidance, find the usual silence, and go meet with the Star-Eyed's representatives.

Permalink Mark Unread

The hertasi will again set them up with a room – a very comfortable sitting-room, this time, with sofas where they can stretch out in a comfortable position before projecting their minds to another plane.

Silverhorse is apparently recovered enough to join Ravenwing, this time, though he looks very drained and doesn't stand up to greet her. 

"Do you know of the Moonpaths?" he asks her, once she's seated. "I am not sure if your world's people know how to access the spirit world." 

Permalink Mark Unread

"We know how to access...various places that might be translated that way. I don't know if this is one of them, or something else."

Permalink Mark Unread

He can describe it to her; it looks like a mostly-empty void, with distant purple nebulas or dust clouds, and glowing mist closer at hand. It's not the most dangerous of the known planes but it's certainly not safe. The Moonpaths look like, well, paths, made of moonbeams, and it's fairly safe if you stay on them. The mist is thought to perhaps be souls of the dead, and there are legends that some past shamans knew how to talk to them - or that their Goddess could choose to allow mortals to talk to them - but he has no personal experience of it. 

With an apprentice shaman, he would usually teach them how to center their mind and concentrate in the right way to step into the spirit world, but it usually takes people days or weeks to get the hang of it. For Iomedae, he can just take her hand and lead her there. 

Permalink Mark Unread

- all right. 

Permalink Mark Unread

She should arrange herself comfortably, in a position where she definitely won't fall, and take his hand. This is probably going to be very disorienting. 

 

 

- it's pretty much exactly as described. A silent void, with the dusty baleful light of distant nebulas shining down on them, and slowly shifting golden mist on either side, and moonbeams-made-solid under her feet. It feels half like she's weightless, or falling, and half like she isn't physically embodied at all. 

Silverhorse is there with her, and Ravenwing, both of them looking oddly younger in the golden light, and apparently wearing clothes that look sort of - half-finished, like a painting without the final details added. 

"I will call to Her," Silverhorse says quietly. "We may have to wait, but - I think it will not be long." 

Permalink Mark Unread

"It's beautiful," she says softly, and waits.

Permalink Mark Unread

It's not long. 

 

There's no one else there, and then abruptly there is someone else there, in a way that feels oddly as though She was always there and Iomedae just somehow failed to notice. 

She's dressed from head to toe in black robes that seem to swallow the light. Her features are the same ethnicity as Silverhorse and Ravenwing. 

...Her eyes are - starry sky, without pupil or iris, somehow more disorienting than anything else about this place. 

 

"Iomedae," she says. 

Permalink Mark Unread

Iomedae bows, which from Iomedae only means that this is in a context where it is probably formally appropriate to bow. 

Permalink Mark Unread

"You are a long way from home," the goddess says. "Yet the traces of your god are still on you, and cast a shadow on your future. Curious.

 

- What are you planning to do." 

Permalink Mark Unread

"I did not anticipate that in being here I would shadow prophecy. I did not intend that." If she knew how to get that effect at home she'd definitely use it to surprise Asmodeus but here the situation was in fact not that meriting of massive disruption, and also unusually delicate, and she is sincere in regretting having perhaps made it harder to navigate safely. 

"I want to build a lasting peace between Tantara and Predain, and then commence research on how I can return home." She could really use some of the local mages in her crusade, if a lasting form of transit can be developed, and she needs to go home even if it cannot. 

Permalink Mark Unread

The goddess - makes a facial expression, or something sort of like a facial expression, that is maybe intended to be a frown but mostly just comes across as alien. 

"If you find a way to return to your home, then so might others. And then your god will intervene here, if He has a way to reach this world. I can see little of him, but - that shape, yes." 

It's a statement, not a question; it's not at all clear how the goddess wants Iomedae to respond. 

Permalink Mark Unread

She cannot in fact deny that if there's a good channel of travel between the worlds, it'd get cheaper for Aroden to intervene here, and He might. "I do not expect Aroden to act in a way that's unwelcome to existing peoples, in a place like Tantara. Maybe in places that are ruled by Evil."

Permalink Mark Unread

"Tell me of how He would try to intervene. And of what He would mean by Evil." 

Permalink Mark Unread

"He is a Lawful god, and would communicate Himself with you. I would expect Him to oppose gods who send their followers to afterlives of torment and suffering, by inviting His church to oppose theirs, by toppling governments they control. Without the afterlives of torment and suffering, I'd expect Him to be willing to leave things to humans to work out, if that is the preference of the local gods."

Permalink Mark Unread

The goddess takes a step forward. 

"Leave us," she says to Silverhorse and Ravenwing, and - she isn't touching Iomedae in any noticeable way, but Iomedae is still going to notice that she is being very very firmly held in place. 

...Ravenwing looks startled, and then worried, and like she wants to say something. Silverhorse looks - resigned, and tired. He takes her hand, and a moment later both of them are gone. 

The Star-Eyed looks at Iomedae. It feels, suddenly, oddly as though her insides are transparent, and the Star-Eyed is seeing through her, every thought she's ever had, every choice she's ever made, every tradeoff she's ever reasoned her way through. 

Every way in which Aroden has ever touched her, which is quite a lot of ways. 

 

"You," she says, in a tone that's impossible to read as any human emotion but might be most closely adjacent to sad, "are a very inconvenient pattern. The line will not bend. ...For what it is worth, I am sorry." 

 

 

 

- and something is happening. It doesn't seem like the sort of thing that should be possible, for any force to reach into Iomedae and peel apart her layers and pull out the parts of her that are belonging to Aroden.

But it seems to be what's happening. 

Permalink Mark Unread

Permalink Mark Unread

You probably cannot, as a practical matter, fight a god with a sword. Even if you could, you couldn't do it in their own domain.

She's going to attempt it anyway. For all she knows, this thing isn't even a god, just a spooky wizard with a Mindscape. Paralyzed? How about instead she isn't paralyzed. She has this sword, and she can call a celestial spirit to fill it with magic, and there's a monster in front of her that she will simply try to Smite. 

 

 

- also cry out to Bastet, or the Nameless god, or ArodenArodenArodenAroden - she doesn't have time to be angry, or betrayed, and she doesn't know how to be afraid, but she does know that there's something before her that needs to die and that might be beyond her power to kill, and that's what one has allies for, and friends, and Iomedae has both of them -

Permalink Mark Unread

It doesn't hurt. It - has some sort of qualia that feels like it should be searing torment and the absence of actual pain is somehow an even deeper wrongness. It feels like there is a thread being pulled and pulled and pulled, and there should be something on the other end of it but it's so very far away, and the parts of her that could reach for it are being unravelled and it does not, at this moment, feel at all obvious that once everything that makes her a paladin of Aroden - which is a lot of things, it's taking what feels like a very long time to unweave - there will be anything left of Iomedae to cohere. 

 

 

...attempting to fight a god with a sword does, it turns out, hurt. 

Permalink Mark Unread

HOPEFULLY

 

IT

 

 

ALSO

 

 

HURTS




THE



GOD

Permalink Mark Unread

There's nothing reaching back to her. 

 

 

...and then, suddenly, there is

It doesn't feel like the previous times Aroden spoke to her. Then, it was like reaching for and then falling into something very big and very fast-moving and very magic, all around her, and being caught, held and sheltered from a force that would otherwise destroy her.

This is different. Aroden is far away; His power is weak, here, actually significantly weaker than the goddess he is trying to fight, and the fight is happening in Iomedae's head and while it's obvious that He is trying very hard to be gentle, it is not in fact a fight He can win while being gentle. 

But Iomedae is His and He does, actually, have a claim on Her that the Star-Eyed does not, and the shape of her mind is one He knows and the Star-Eyed doesn't. 

 

He's trying to communicate something to her – probably, it's hard to tell if it's communication or not, He is in too much of a hurry to particularly shape the god-concepts involved into human concepts, it might be reassurance aimed at her or it might just be the metaphorical equivalent of yelling MINE at the Star-Eyed Goddess, while doing the metaphorical equivalent of attempting to knock away the Star-Eyed's grip with a very long stick. 

This ALSO hurts a lot but in a very different way. 

Permalink Mark Unread

The Star-Eyed Goddess was in fact not expecting this to happen and is abruptly very distracted, and no longer actively peeling Iomedae apart, and instead entirely focused on trying to push Aroden's faltering grasp away. 

...it feels like maybe kind of a lot of Iomedae is already shredded. Not the part of her that can fight, but the parts of her that are everything else. 

Permalink Mark Unread

clumsily, but shaped at least slightly into human concepts: 

 

it's okay it's okay she isn't alone she does have allies but Aroden cannot, actually, do all of the work of winning this fight, he needs her to [something that does not come across as an understandable concept at ALL.] 

Permalink Mark Unread

Hopefully it's 'kill the Evil thing in front of you', because that's what you get when she's running on instinct.

 

Iomedae hasn't been trying to kill people, here.

When she is trying to kill people, they die.

When she's trying to kill powerful ancient undead beings, they, too, generally die.

(The problem with Tar Baphon is not that she can't kill him, it's that it doesn't stick.)

So long as there's anything here in front of her then she will fling herself into destroying it, and Aroden is beside her, and if He wants something other than smiting Evil from her then He might have a problem.

Permalink Mark Unread

Aroden doesn't need her to fight. He needs her to do a different thing.

 

...distant frustrated shuffling...

He needs her to hold herself together - He needs her to be intact enough and herself enough that He can hold onto her surfaces, that she can be a vessel for Him to reach through - He needs her to be coherent enough that she can push the Star-Eyed out of her head - 

 

- this does not at all feel like a motion that is possible to just do but Aroden will keep attempting to communicate this. He is not going let her be lost, here, that is definitely never going to happen, and He could probably pull her soul out mostly intact and put Her in the river of souls, from here - if Iomedae thinks she can't do this, He will pull her out - but then she will be dead, and also not in Velgarth anymore, and it actually seems very important and urgent that He have someone in Velgarth who can speak for Him, and fight for Him, and maybe more importantly than that, rebuild for Him - He can't see yet what the side effects of this fight are going to be, on the material plane, but this fight is going to take a very long time and be very messy and He probably can't intervene directly after this, this is very expensive. 

(Though it is, in fact, worth it.)

Can Iomedae do that. 

Permalink Mark Unread

Be herself. Yes, of course. 

- if that results in the EVIL DYING -

 

Permalink Mark Unread

 

 

 

 

It's - not actually true- that the thing you would have, if you pulled Aroden out of her, wouldn't be her.

 

She's not His.

 

They're allies.

 

The thing you would have, if you pulled Him out of Her, would be a very experienced crusade commander who knows what she wants and it's peace and prosperity and the end of Evil and the blossoming of hope. She didn't have Aroden, in her work in Tantara. She didn't need Aroden, until an evil demon decided to fuck with her. Because she's not, in fact, made out of Him. They are both instead made out of a secret third thing, that lives everywhere, that they would both possess if the other had never existed. 

Towers, and children playing, and libraries, and Gates, and treaties, and every impulse in every person for something better than this -

Permalink Mark Unread

Exactly. 

If you pulled all of the Him out of Iomedae, you would still have Iomedae. There is a bedrock of Iomedae that can't be destroyed, and it's not quite the same as the bedrock of Aroden, but it can't be destroyed – it's too simple, too atomic, you can't take it apart because it's only one thing, that is itself by definition, the reaching for something better than this.

But, also, that is not going to happen. 

 

 

(For all that Aroden is very far away, this is the closest in contact Iomedae has ever been with His emotions, or the god-equivalent of them. There's - something bigger and stranger than love, something bigger and stranger than pride.

There is also incandescent fury.) 

 

 

- and the Star-Eyed is less in her, though still all around her, and then Aroden reaches through her, as she fights with something that isn't actually her literal physical sword (still in a room in the material plane), and He starts to pull apart the pieces of a god. 

Permalink Mark Unread

The goddess is abruptly trying very hard not to be all around Iomedae. It is clearly a bad place to be. 

Permalink Mark Unread

She isn't going to have a lot of luck with that. Aroden intends to finish this fight. And this is approximately Her divine domain, which on the one hand means She has the homeground advantage and this is even more spectacularly costly than it would already be, but on the other hand means that it's not obvious where She would run to, if She wanted to run. Everywhere else she will be weaker. 

 

 

 

...is Iomedae all right, she is in some sense fighting directly with her own life-force and she has a lot of that but at some point that well will run dry - 

 

- also Aroden is worried about her physical safety in the material plane - it's very fuzzy but He thinks there is maybe going to be, or already being, a very bad problem - does Iomedae have allies here who She trusts and who might be aligned enough with Aroden for Him to contact them at a cost He can afford - 

Permalink Mark Unread

Iomedae wants this thing to DIE and her okayness is not something she particularly has access to, right now. If she dies in the killing of this thing that presently seems like a very good trade.

 

Aroden won't be able to reach Urtho, or Need, or Marlana, or Urtho's administrative staff. 

- he could maybe reach Ma'ar. Iomedae is in too much pain to think through the geopolitical concerns there.

Permalink Mark Unread

(It would be a trade worth making. But not a good trade. He loses a lot, if Iomedae is no longer in Velgarth. Aroden thinks they can get a better deal.)   

 

- shuffle through Iomedae's head - who is Ma'ar, from a god's-eye view, what would make his mind stand out among millions of others that He can only see dimly and can only spare a fraction of His attention - 

 

(- some clerics are going to be failing to get spells right now, nearly all of Aroden's attention is here, and this is already massively exceeding His intervention budget, and it's not disallowed by godagreements mostly because why would it come up that the gods of another world would try to steal your very high level paladin -)

Permalink Mark Unread

Ma'ar is the one who invented the concept of child mortality statistics to try to convince his mentor that his conquests were a good idea. Ma'ar Gated in to the site of a battle to order his men to stand down even though he thought she'd kill him. Ma'ar told her he'd save her life if he could afford to and then did it. Ma'ar is definitely one of those people whose intelligence is dangerously higher than their wisdom but Iomedae likes him very much, and he is the type Aroden would choose at home.

Permalink Mark Unread

- yeah, that's enough. Ma'ar is...like Iomedae, like Him, there's a simple irreducible core there, and once Aroden is trying to look for that, in this world, it's not hard to pick out. This is a mind that He would choose. ...Shouldn't, even though it would be very useful to have a second foothold in this world...

 

He can still only spare a tiny tendril of His attention, not enough to pull Ma'ar into a mindscape, and He needs to be very careful. 

 

 

Reach - 

Permalink Mark Unread

Permalink Mark Unread

Permalink Mark Unread

Permalink Mark Unread

Ma'ar has absolutely no idea what just happened, but he...seems to be sprawled on the floor of the room where he was in the middle of a meeting, his head really hurts, and - when he manages to get his eyes to focus - someone is kneeling beside him looking panicked. 

 

 

 

Also his entire mind is ringing with a single word, or rather a name: Iomedae Iomedae Iomedae.

Permalink Mark Unread

That's - what - 

 

 

- Iomedae is in danger. 

Someone just - warned him that Iomedae is in danger? And it's definitely a capitalized Someone. Iomedae's god - they hadn't thought Iomedae's god could reach her, here...what do They want him to do, Iomedae is in Tantara and probably not in a scryable location and if he Gates into Urtho's Tower there is an awfully high chance that this starts the war again. 

- if she's in serious enough danger that her god contacted him about it, they quite possibly have a problem that's a lot worse that the war. 

 

He struggles up into a sitting position, despite the hands gently trying to restrain him, and manages not to immediately fall over again but it's a near thing.

 

 

"Not injured. Iomedae - trouble -" He starts to raise a Gate, and has to stop to throw up on the floor, which is really spectacularly inconvenient. 

Permalink Mark Unread

His people are so worried! Ma'ar just collapsed on them for no reason, which was startling enough that several different contingency-orders have already gone out, and he's apparently conscious now but he looks terrible and doesn't seem very coherent, and they are strongly suspecting an assassination attempt, though they didn't see anything including any magic and have no idea how it was done. 

He should really not be trying to Gate right now??? They're getting a Healer. 

Permalink Mark Unread

"No - Iomedae - danger -" 

Can he reach Urtho with the communication-spell. 

Permalink Mark Unread

No. 

Permalink Mark Unread

That could just be because he's behind shields, but - the most likely explanation is enemy action. 

 

 

 

...can he reach the magic sword with the communication-spell. 

Permalink Mark Unread

It takes a couple of tries to figure out the targeting, but: yes! 

<- About time. We're a little busy here> 

Permalink Mark Unread

That is not actually helpful! 

<What happened> 

Permalink Mark Unread

<Iomedae was meeting with the bloody shamans. Stupid idea. Got a call, found her alone in their meeting-room, she's out cold and having some kind of fit - screaming like someone set her on fire - oh, and the shaman tried to slit her throat before we got here but that's fine> 

Permalink Mark Unread

Ma'ar doesn't actually have the slightest idea what to make of that! For one, who would possibly think that slitting Iomedae's throat would kill her! ...He's not complaining, if they had tried a Final Strike and she couldn't dodge it that might have been enough. 

 

...He very badly doesn't want to set off a war with Tantara again, when they've fought so hard for these tentative steps toward peace.  

It sounds like...possibly...a war is already happening. He's not sure with who

 

<Can you reach Urtho> 

Permalink Mark Unread

<No. Haven't the faintest idea what's wrong, I don't get calls for men in danger.> 

Permalink Mark Unread

Why do people gods keep doing this. It's not like it's going to work, it's just horrible and stupid and wasteful and pointless, and people get hurt for nothing, and Ma'ar is so tired. 

 

<I am going to Gate to where you are and try to get Iomedae to safety. I hope Urtho was smart enough to make sure that followers of gods were not involved in the superweapon guard roster but I am - not sure - this is probably going to set off a large number of alarms and I need you to try to reach Urtho and explain.> 

Permalink Mark Unread

<We'll chase the shaman. Make him explain to Urtho.> 

Permalink Mark Unread

Can he anchor a search-spell on Need - apparently yes, but his concentration is shaky and it's taking him longer than usual to the a Gate-threshold stable and Iomedae Iomedae Iomedae - his heart is thumping in his chest, he's pretty sure he's having some kind of panic attack which is also very inconvenient - Gating to the Tower feels terrifying, for all he knows all the gods are waiting for is for him and Iomedae to both be there at the same time - 

 

 

- Gate. 

 

 

...and he stumbles and falls and barely catches himself with his hands in time to avoid smashing his face into the floor.

 

He really wishes Iomedae's god had warned him in a way that wasn't incredibly incapacitating. 

Permalink Mark Unread

Iomedae is in lying on a sofa, with Shayeen standing above her looking terrified, both hands white-knuckled around Need's hilt. She is, in fact, convulsing, and screaming, though at this point she's been screaming for long enough that her voice is mostly gone.

There's a lot of blood. It does look like the bleeding has already stopped, somehow, even though her throat is laid open almost to the bone. You would expect this to interfere more with the screaming, or with breathing, than it seems to be doing. 

Permalink Mark Unread

- also there are absolutely countermeasures on this room against unauthorized Gates, several of which are now triggering, and Ma'ar is now paralyzed by several trap-spells at once. 

Permalink Mark Unread

This is very annoying and the levinbolt that just zapped him straight through his shields is also very annoying - it feels like his heart is maybe having some kind of new worse problem now - but it is not, technically, going to stop Ma'ar from raising another Gate-threshold under both of them. 

<Find. Urtho.> he manages. <Keep him - safe -> 

 

 

 

- and this is possibly a very bad idea to attempt, but does he actually get anything off Iomedae if he tries to read her mind? Usually she has very impregnable shields but whatever is wrong with her might be compromising that as well. 

Permalink Mark Unread

- oh. Aroden had not actually been able to see whether this was going to work - everything is so fuzzy at this remove - 

 

 

He could definitely stop Ma'ar from reading Iomedae's mind but it actually seems like it might be helpful for Ma'ar to get some more context. He can instead hold Himself out of the way. 

Permalink Mark Unread

Indeed, Iomedae's kind of shielding doesn't work at all when she's unconscious! 

 

 

- the contents of her head are an incomprehensible hurricane of pain and conviction and anger and SMITE EVIL.

Permalink Mark Unread

Ma'ar half-involuntarily flinches away from the Mindspeech contact before he can get more than the shallowest glimpse, but 

 

 

 

- it's all right, she's still in there - in some kind of incomprehensible danger, but she's alive and fighting. 

 

 

It seems like anonymity is a lost cause. He'll take her to the Citadel, in the capital of Predain, the best-shielded place he has access to. And a place where there are plenty of Healers on hand nearby. 

There isn't time to worry about Urtho. He completes the Gate-threshold, and they fall. Iomedae is still wearing her armor, and probably not going to be (additionally) injured.

Ma'ar is not, and is still completely paralyzed. His head bounces off the floor and the world goes hazy red-and-black for a moment, and then he's lying facedown on stone. 

Permalink Mark Unread

He tries to reach out with Mindspeech for the nearest person, and is distantly puzzled when this fails to work.

It feels like something is crushing his chest, even though he doesn't think any heavy masonry just fell on them. He should...check that...Iomedae can't defend herself...would be bad if the ceiling fell on them. He can't figure out why the ceiling would have fallen on them - maybe a superweapon? - but it would explain why he can't breathe...also why everything is dark and seems to be getting darker and further away... 

Permalink Mark Unread

The countermeasures on Urtho's Tower aren't meant to be lethal, but even an Adept-strength mage can get very unlucky, especially if seconds earlier they had direct mental contact with a god and most of their shields are down. Ma'ar's heart is not currently succeeding very well at pumping blood. 

He's already unconscious by the time the first Healers reach them. 

Permalink Mark Unread

THEY HAVE NO IDEA WHAT JUST HAPPENED BUT IT'S PROBABLY TANTARA'S FAULT

Permalink Mark Unread

Ma'ar's generals have a contingency-plan for invading Urtho's Tower directly.

 

Someone just tried to assassinate Ma'ar and Iomedae at the same time and they are seriously considering using it. 

Permalink Mark Unread

Ma'ar's orders were very very emphatic that they should use any means available to avoid this, if they possibly can. They will, instead, send an urgent and VERY SCATHING note. If Urtho has an explanation for them within the next ten minutes they they can consider resolving this diplomatically. 

 

 

Iomedae...seems stable, actually, despite all the blood and screaming. 

Ma'ar isn't breathing. His heart is technically beating but not in a way that is particularly resulting in any circulation. They are trying very very hard to fix this but it's not a trivial problem to solve with Healing. 

Permalink Mark Unread

This was not part of the plan. Aroden just can't see what He's doing very well. 

 

 

 

He doesn't have remit to grab that particular soul. Unopposed, maybe He could do it anyway, but not if the Star-Eyed– 

...huh. That is genuinely surprising. And - fascinating - pieces fitting together... 

 

 

He will present it to Iomedae as clearly as possible, in between fighting the Star-Eyed Goddess in her head, which is probably pretty distracting. 

 

She is in Predain and, He thinks, relatively safe.

Ma'ar isn't. Ma'ar is probably dying. 

Ma'ar - is not going to die permanently, because, like young Aroden, he has an immortality method, a way of preventing this world's impressively terrible gods from seizing his soul. Also like young Aroden, he doesn't yet know for sure if it's going to work, but Aroden can see that it will. 

Not instantly, though. And if he dies, even temporarily, Foresight shows something very bad. Probably. It's not a certainty but it would be hard to avoid, and it doesn't look like killing the goddess would prevent it. He isn't going to invest energy in figuring out what, when His sensory input is so fuzzy, and then communicating it in human-legible concepts to her. Iomedae presumably has context to figure it out with ordinary human-level reasoning.

 

 

He can refill one of Iomedae's spells - it'll be so expensive but He could - and then Ma'ar will not die, and Foresight looks much less doomy.

What he cannot do, if he does that, is also kill this god here and now. And he also can't throw her mind back to her physical body in the material plane without her active cooperation.

Which means that she would have to make an active decision to stop fighting the Evil god. (Also that the evil god will still be around until Aroden figures something else out. He isn't actually worried about this, especially; He will figure something out, and She is going to be significantly weakened and has exhausted most of Her avenues to cause trouble for Iomedae directly.) 

Iomedae is a shape that chooses things being better instead of things being worse. Iomedae is also a shape that destroys Evil. Aroden is observing that these two things are in conflict. Aroden is observing that he doesn't know if Iomedae can be a shape that will walk away from this fight. 

 

 

 

...also this is not exactly a strategic consideration but it's an observation that may or may not be relevant context for Iomedae: Ma'ar reminds him kind of a lot of his younger self. His much younger self, who did, in fact, have the sort of problem you get with much higher Intelligence than Wisdom. He is, ultimately, going to be a shape that can and will pursue their shared goals even if he has to do it alone. He - isn't that shape yet. Very young Aroden wasn't either. Very young Aroden was prone to setting off enormous disasters by accident, by being impatient and desperate about the fact that the problems of the world weren't already fixed, and then moving too fast and trying things too hard for him. Very young Aroden was incredibly lonely and afraid all of the time, because he was never a paladin and the only way he knew to not be afraid was to be ten steps ahead of everyone at all times. (He solved this, eventually, by learning to in fact be ten steps ahead of everyone at all times.) Very young Aroden could badly have used more allies - especially allies with higher Wisdom than him - and, in a sense even more badly, he could have used friends

Permalink Mark Unread

This is way too many godconcepts for the middle of a fight. 

 

 

- the peace. The thing that goes wrong if Ma'ar dies is the peace. 

 

She wanted that peace.

 

The fucking Evil demongod -

- they are going to kill it, right, not today but someday soon, once Aroden has a church here, once he can work here more cheaply -

Permalink Mark Unread

They're definitely going to kill the Evil god. (He is not sure She would actually read as Evil to Golarion spells, that is maybe not a thing here, but this is an irrelevant-for-Iomedae's-purposes side point that Aroden isn't going to try to communicate.) Even apart from the strategic considerations, which are that She is going to keep causing problems, you have to be a shape that retaliates for that, in sufficient thoroughness to have made it not worth trying in the first place. Even with gods who aren't Lawful and wouldn't even have been deterred. 

Permalink Mark Unread

- okay. 

 

 

 

The peace, then. She chooses the peace. 

 

 

It's very, very difficult.

Permalink Mark Unread

Aroden can't do anything to make it an easier choice to make; it's not an easy choice, it's an awful tradeoff. But He can keep the goddess distracted enough that She won't interfere, and he can be proud of Iomedae. And faintly apologetic that it's not worth the intervention budget to give her two Lay On Hands so she can heal herself too, it is not in fact worth it but He does hope to find a way to get her spells here at reasonable cost. The simplest way to do that will probably involve negotiating with one of the local gods but even the ones who aren't trying to steal his paladin are so frustrating

Permalink Mark Unread

Having made the very hard decision does not, by itself, make it incredibly obvious how to get back to her body, but with some persistence Iomedae will be able to figure it out. 

Permalink Mark Unread

 

 

THe pain gets worse, and that's how she knows she's found it. 

 

She can't really operate it. She's spoken with gods too long, and nothing in this world feels real.

 

Ma'ar. Ma'ar is here, and - the peace - needs Ma'ar -

Permalink Mark Unread

She lurches abruptly to her feet, in one motion, and looks around for him - where is he -

Permalink Mark Unread

It hasn't been very long, in the material plane. Ma'ar is still on the floor, a few feet away from her, his face grey and slack, with a crowd of Healers around him. 

Permalink Mark Unread

Someone put a blanket over her, but the Healers have mostly not been focused on her injuries, since it didn't look like her life was in danger. They're incredibly startled when she wakes up but are not going to interfere with her trying to stand.   

Permalink Mark Unread

She is in unfathomable pain and can barely see but she has a mission and it's Ma'ar. She walks over to him and crumples on him and does a Lay On Hands and

-

 

- she really hopes that worked because she is only still conscious by sheer force of will and she can't think over the pain and she can't remember if there was anything to do after that or not.

Permalink Mark Unread

It worked! 

 

In a single instant, Ma'ar transitions from very very deeply unconscious to in perfect health. Physically in perfect health, at least; even Iomedae's healing doesn't especially fix the aftereffects of Aroden contacting him while very distracted and in a hurry. 

...His instinctive reaction to suddenly waking up, and not knowing where he is or why he was unconscious, is to Gate somewhere else and then figure it out. Usually he has more of an opportunity to catch himself, because usually if something knocked him out at all, he's waking up still substantially impaired in his ability to use magic. 

 

 

He does not in fact manage to override the reflexive response, which is to shove away whoever is lying on him and Gate out. 

Permalink Mark Unread

UM?????????

Permalink Mark Unread

The Healers are very concerned about this! Someone should get in comms-spell contact with him right now! 

 

...They're also pretty concerned about Iomedae, who seems to be conscious but, like, not very conscious. They'll get the blanket on her again and someone's wadded-up cloak under her head - moving her very carefully - and get a link to her, and try to ask her if she can open her eyes or squeeze this Healer's hand. Her head looks fine on Healing-Sight but the apparent symptoms are definitely closest to those of a very severe head injury. 

Iomedae's sensory processing is not really working. One of the Healers will try to Mindspeak her, which is somehow even MORE agonizingly painful even though it really seemed like she was already experiencing the maximum possible amount of agonizing pain. 

Permalink Mark Unread

She will attempt to Smite them. Luckily this doesn't do anything unless you also attack the person which she is not capable of.

Permalink Mark Unread

They'll stop doing that! They have very little idea what's wrong with her but they can, at least, throw a lot of Healing-energy at her in case that helps.

Physically she is actually in...reasonably okay...shape? They can probably safely move her and at least get her to somewhere more comfortable while they attempt to diagnose the problem; they're not really sure what else to try, Healing-Sight normally just tells you. 

Permalink Mark Unread

Ma'ar is now alone in an underground secure location nearish but not in the capital, trying to piece together his surprisingly jumbled recent memories. 

 

Iomedae. 

 

Did he...? 

- where was he just before this, he didn't have a chance to open his eyes or even really assess the situation with mage-sight. ...Probably the Citadel, he vaguely remembers glimpsing the right kind of shields and it seems like a plausible location he would have decided was safe. Relatively safe. Being anywhere on this planet doesn't feel entirely safe, right now. 

 

He is INCREDIBLY WORRIED about Iomedae - and he should probably be worried about other things, like the state of the ceasefire, but that's a distant afterthought right now - but he's still going to scry the Gate-room in the Citadel before he Gates back in there. 

Permalink Mark Unread

The Healers are getting Iomedae onto a litter to carry her.

 

 

She looks incredibly not okay, but she's at least no longer convulsing or trying and failing to scream. 

Permalink Mark Unread

He's so scared. His head feels...weird...not exactly foggy but like everything is distant and too bright and is probably happening to someone else, and there's a sensation that is probably a headache but isn't pain so much as wrongness. It's especially odd given that he otherwise feels completely healthy, and also very annoying, he has things to do. 

 

 

He Gates back to the Citadel, and promptly has to fend off extremely worried Healers who need several minutes of examining him to be reassured that he is not, in fact, dying. 

 

There are an enormous number of things he should be dealing with, and he continues to have no idea what actually happened, or how to protect Iomedae from it happening again, which makes it feel impossible to plan.

...Not actually impossible to plan. He has tactical problems and he can address them with his usual strategies. The first priority is to figure out what his people's reaction has been to - recent events - and the second priority is to figure out what Tantara's reaction was to him Gating directly into the Tower, and - actually maybe his first priority is to send a message to Urtho. If he can reach Urtho at all.

(scaredscaredscared not productive need to focus) 

 

He can do that via Mindspeech and communication-spell from Iomedae's bedside. He isn't sure she has any idea he's there, and he's so worried, but according to the Healers she isn't even slightly responding to verbal requests let alone able to talk, and under those conditions he's not going to be able to get an explanation from her. 

...He will, very so often, tell her out loud that he's here and they're in Predain and she's safe, just in case she's able to understand and just not answer, or becomes able to understand at some point. 

Permalink Mark Unread

The Healers are still really confused and suspicious that they're failing to spot a very serious problem. It looks a bit like someone knocked unconscious by a very strong Mindspeech blow, but there are things they can check to rule that out. The symptoms also look a bit like very severe backlash, but she's not even Gifted, though her life-force is dim (especially for her) in a way that doesn't not hint at being incredibly low on reserves. That, at least, they can fix. 

Permalink Mark Unread

...They should get a Mindhealer in. 'Non-functional, but without physical injuries that explain why' is a Mindhealer sort of problem. He still can't think what would have caused it but they can at least check if she's improving or deteriorating. 

Permalink Mark Unread

They can work on that. Predain doesn't have very many Mindhealers, and things have been, uh, pretty chaotic, so it might take a while to locate one who's available. 

 

Ma'ar can also get a situation report compiled for him. The situation is that Predain saw what looked like an assassination attempt on Ma'ar, and he was not-very-coherently expressing that Iomedae was in danger and then Gated out, and a very brief interval later Gated back with Iomedae, both of them seriously injured, which looked even MORE like a deliberate assassination attempt by Tantara. 

They've sent a message demanding an explanation. They haven't gotten one. Their monitors are in contact with Tantara's monitors on the front, who are professing ignorance and trying to convince them that Tantara didn't have any assassination plans, but of course they would do that. Communications do not particularly seem to be entering or leaving Urtho's Tower right now, at least not from Urtho. 

 

They've been getting everything into position so that they can proceed with plan: capture Urtho's Tower. They're ready to go whenever Ma'ar gives the word. 

Permalink Mark Unread

Permalink Mark Unread

They should ABSOLUTELY NOT DO THAT. 

 

 

...He's not sure what they should do. Try to reach Urtho, probably, but he's worried Urtho is...in serious trouble...and if they were slightly more thoroughly not at war then maybe Predain could respond to this by helping but they cannot, at this point, do that. 

He thinks they should have their monitors tell the Tantaran monitors that they're still committed to the ceasefire, and don't blame Tantara for the recent escalation, and in fact it's not clear that the attempt on Iomedae really counts as violating the ceasefire. It's of course completely unacceptable, but no one in Predain was hurt except for Ma'ar, who was expecting this as the predictable result of Gating into a restricted military area. He should...write some kind of apology about this, probably, he'll work on that.

In order to proceed with peace talks, they're going to have to come to an agreement on Tantara's response to the shamans of the Star-Eyed Goddess, who probably are the ones responsible. Starting with arresting them, ideally, or at least locating them – which may or may not have already happened. He isn't sure what response would be adequate, and most of that needs to be done on Tantara's end. He would really like to have Iomedae's advice and has no idea how long it's going to be before she's functional.

They should suggest to the Tantaran monitors that being out of communication with Urtho at this particular moment is very bad, given that whether or not this was a ceasefire violation it was very very escalatory and unacceptable and they need a resolution urgently. 

(He feels some reluctance to advise anyone other than himself to Gate to Urtho's Tower, given the unknown danger, but they do need to establish what's happening there.) 

 

 

 

Any update on the Mindhealer? 

Permalink Mark Unread

They have located a Mindhealer who is technically available and hasn't already been awake for more than eighteen candlemarks! Shakat is elderly, but this does at least mean 'experienced'. He'll be there in ten minutes. 

Permalink Mark Unread

Ma'ar starts working on a formal written apology for his unauthorized Gate into Tantara's territory during a ceasefire, and the fact that this is the second time he's done it, and that he wasn't able to warn anyone first except for the magic sword. And FRETS. 

Permalink Mark Unread

Shakat may not have been on duty for the last eighteen candlemarks, but he's been working fourteen candlemarks a day for months and he is not, in fact, delighted to be hauled urgently to the capital for a problem that was not particularly explained to him aside from "probably an assassination attempt" which really doesn't sound like it should be a Mindhealer sort of problem. And also sounds dangerous to be in the vicinity of. Also his back hurts. 

His Sight-metaphor is oil paintings. He'll ease himself into a chair next to Iomedae's bed, and have a look. 

Permalink Mark Unread

This woman appears to have a lovely and remarkably intricate and structured oil painting of a mind, all built around a central blindingly white pillar.

 


Recently someone definitely dunked the entire thing in water and then tried to scrub as much of it off as possible and she tried to rip it out of their grasp and ripped a bunch of the edges and then someone else tried to paint it back on and also a lot of glue and acetone got spilled in the fighting and someone may have fired a cannon and gotten the ash and smoke and scorch marks all over her oil painting as well.

Permalink Mark Unread

Metaphorically speaking.

Permalink Mark Unread

Uh. That is! in fact! pretty concerning! 

 

It definitely looks like something incredibly mentally violent was done to her. It does not look like the kind of thing any magic he's aware of can do. 

His diagnosis is that he has absolutely no idea what happened to her but it was very bad, and it's not at all surprising that she's semiconscious and not very responsive, and they should ABSOLUTELY NOT MINDSPEAK HER, wow, there's a lot of structural damage there and it's surprising that things are holding together as well as they are. 

Permalink Mark Unread

Oh. 

 

 

...Is she going to recover. 

Permalink Mark Unread

What part of "he's never seen this problem before and has no real idea what's going on" did they not hear the first time? Gah. 

 

 

- he's actually pretty reluctant to touch anything, but he'll sit quietly and watch her mind for the next ten minutes, and can at that point at least tell them whether he's noticing any ongoing deterioration? 

Permalink Mark Unread

There is not obviously ongoing deterioration. Some things might be getting a bit better? The water is drying? Some other things do not look likely to improve on their own. A lot of those shredded bits are just shredded.

Permalink Mark Unread

...He's probably going to have to figure out a way to fix that part, isn't he. Ugh. 

He does kind of want to wait for the metaphorical paint to metaphorically dry out some more and not be so soggy, things look incredibly fragile right now and he's pretty worried that any wrong step will set off a horrible cascade of more things falling apart.

Also he's pretty sure that she's in appalling pain right now, and unable to really process what's happening, and she's probably going to find it confusing and terrifying as well as painful to have someone doing anything to her mind, and you cannot very effectively fight a Mindhealer doing things to your mind but she's probably going to try and possibly cause herself more damage in the process. Can they get her some very strong painkillers or something? It'll make some things harder to see, but he doesn't enjoy torturing people. 

Permalink Mark Unread

Oh no. They should definitely give her something for pain, then, given that it sounds like she's not going to be very lucid for a while anyway. 

 

 

(Ma'ar is finding himself surprisingly distressed by knowing that Iomedae is in pain and not even alert enough that he can reassure her. This is not a thing that should be happening. Iomedae should be okay, and also he is kind of blindingly furious with whoever - or whatever Power - did this to her.) 

Permalink Mark Unread

It's not clear to the Healers if Iomedae is even conscious enough to safely swallow, but they'll attempt to get some strong painkillers and a sedative into her. They're at least much less worried about the physical side effects of a higher dose, given her bizarre toughness. 

Permalink Mark Unread

Painkillers do seem to push her into a slightly less tense and miserable unconsciousness.

 

 

 

Permalink Mark Unread

Can someone at some point please tell him they have word from Urtho's Tower. If they don't get anything soon he's going to try for the magic sword directly; he's been reluctant in case they're in the middle of a fight for their lives where a god or gods might be able to turn a moment of badly timed distraction into a lethal misstep. 

Permalink Mark Unread

Uh, the Tantaran monitors have been updated and it sounds like someone is headed there. They are, understandably, treading carefully. They seem at least reasonably convinced that whatever is pretty clearly wrong there wasn't Ma'ar or Predain's doing. 

Permalink Mark Unread

...He's going to bother the magic sword again. 

Permalink Mark Unread

They have been wandering around for what feels like candlemarks in Urtho's INCREDIBLY CREEPY BASEMENT. Which, according to Need, at least doesn't contain any superweapons anymore, but it probably has lots of OTHER scary things that Urtho made for fun in his free time, and also it's spectacularly confusing to navigate and full of secret passages. Which would be a very cool adventure, honestly, if not for everything else about the situation. 

Shayeen is so worried about Iomedae and honestly also pretty worried about Ma'ar, who is supposedly basically responsible for this war but who seemed nice? In the three seconds she actually saw him, most of which he spent collapsing on the floor. 

Permalink Mark Unread

<Ma'ar! Whatever took you so long. We're doing all the work over here.> Pause. <...Urtho's alive. Found him collapsed in his workshop, the Healers think it's just overwork and stress, and he wasn't fully over the being poisoned. Most suspicious timing I can imagine, but it might not be enemy action.> 

Permalink Mark Unread

It's almost certainly enemy action in the sense that a goddess, with Foresight, who wanted to take Iomedae out without interference, might have rather a lot of leeway to pick the time most convenient for Her. 

<He's getting Healing?> 

Permalink Mark Unread

<Mm-hmm. Healers are banning him from any meetings today.> 

Permalink Mark Unread

Which is ALSO unfortunate timing, but - probably they can manage to navigate this. Maybe. 

<The shamans?>

Permalink Mark Unread

<Leading us on a merry chase through Urtho's basement. I think Shayeen should be having more fun with this, honestly, it's just like an adventure out of ballads.> 

Permalink Mark Unread

....Ma'ar tenses. 

<Who else knows. Do you have help to subdue them - if they Final Strike too close to the wrong artifact...> 

Permalink Mark Unread

<Urtho's people are guarding the exits. Offered to send in a search party but I declined, they're terrible at sneaking. ...I wouldn't say no to Iomedae's help, if she's any shape for it?> 

Permalink Mark Unread

He looks down at Iomedae's unconscious body. <No. I - she is not going to be able to help with any operations for - I have no idea how long. I think that I can keep her safe while she recovers> if she recovers <but I– just find the shamans. Please. And - Urtho has guards, right - he should plausibly not be in the Tower at all...> 

Permalink Mark Unread

<You'll have to negotiate that with his people, sweetie, they're not about to listen to a foreign teenager's magic sword. I think he'd protest leaving, but - you do have a point.> 

The mental sense of a gentle cuff at his hair. <And let a woman concentrate, will you, I did say we're busy.> 

Permalink Mark Unread

It's not the answer he wanted but it's an answer, and now Ma'ar has a lot of other people to update. He wants confirmation via the Tantaran monitors that Urtho is, in fact, alive and not dying and has Healing attention and is ideally somewhere else out of a Final Strike radius. ...Were either of the shamans actually mages? He can't remember if Iomedae mentioned... 

He's trying to stay focused on the tactical details rather than being pointlessly upset about Iomedae's condition, but it continues to be very upsetting. He's bothering the Mindhealer kind of often for updates. 

Permalink Mark Unread

The water is mostly dried. It's leaving behind an oil painting that has been brutalized but is recognizable, even in its details. The shredded edges of the painting have - tied themselves off, or something, there's no retrieving the information that was lost but the mind can begin repainting there. 

It's not happening all that fast, though that'd probably only be concerning to someone who saw how fast she recovered from anything else. The slit throat, for comparison, has knitted itself up entirely. 

 

 

Permalink Mark Unread

Once it looks a little less like anything he touches will come apart like wet paper, Shakat will risk reaching in and trying to, as a start, clean away the residue of metaphorical soot and ash and smoke. There’s a lot of damage, but that in particular seems like it might be contributing to her being so out of it, and he would honestly feel much better about his life if he didn’t have to do fiddly, delicate, and probably quite uncomfortable mental work on someone who could trivially kill him if sufficiently startled. 

He’s being as gentle as he can, and Iomedae should be pretty heavily sedated still, but it’s still likely to hurt.

Permalink Mark Unread

She will make the occasional agonized sound. She still doesn't seem to be tracking anything that's going on.

Permalink Mark Unread

It's slow going, and actually quite a tiring application of his Gift, and way more nervewracking than Mindhealing work usually is; the substrate of her mind is still more fragile and malleable than it should be, and keeps not behaving quite like he expects to in response to his Gift. He'll try to get all of the soot and smoke, and then even more carefully clean up the metaphorical spilled glue and acetone. He didn't even know you could have that kind of foreign-feeling corrosive mess in someone's mind. Mindhealing Sight is often hard to interpret, especially with patients who can't talk and answer questions about what they're experiencing, but he has even less idea than usual what's actually happening there. 

(The glue doesn't want to 'come off' without tearing up strips of what's left of Iomedae's mind along with it, and the 'acetone' has actually disintegrated a lot of what's beneath it, concealing even worse damage than was apparent at first. He's noticed the fact that her physical injuries are entirely healed and he's still made barely any progress. He...is not quite at the point when he feels like he can give Ma'ar an estimate of whether she'll recover her full faculties at all, let alone how long it's going to take, but it's hard to feel optimistic.) 

It's probably going to take multiple candlemarks. He's not really expecting to get multiple candlemarks without interruptions, given how there is apparently an entirely separate emergency happening and both Iomedae and Ma'ar are prime targets for whoever caused the first disaster. 

 

...They probably shouldn't give her more painkillers even though it's pretty distressing to be hurting her so badly. He is at some point going to want to be able to check if his work here is actually resulting in Iomedae being any more lucid. 

Permalink Mark Unread

Ma'ar is so tired of feeling helpless. Of watching problems slowly cascade into disasters, and not actually having any way to gain control of the situation. He still doesn't know what happened, which means he isn't sure whether Iomedae is still being affected directly by whatever force did this to her.

She's at least not getting worse, so - that's one tiny note of hope. 

 

He is also really not expecting to go that much longer without news, good or bad. 

Permalink Mark Unread

He will, in fact, be contacted within the candlemark by a very unhappy Need. 

 

<Still no dice on getting Iomedae over here?> 

Permalink Mark Unread

He feels like crying. <No. - what's happening -> 

Permalink Mark Unread

<We seem to have landed ourselves in a situation that could use some diplomacy, and I am not the right person. Neither's my bearer, despite her many lovely traits. And, don't take this the wrong way, sweetie, but it's not you either.> 

Permalink Mark Unread

Why does she keep calling him 'sweetie'. It's weird and uncomfortable. 

 

...Diplomacy. That - sounds better than some of the alternatives. Probably? He hasn't heard about any diplomatic disasters with Tantara's generals or the monitors or the gryphons or anyone else in Urtho's forces, so it's - probably in reference to the shamans. 

<Explain?> 

Permalink Mark Unread

<We had them cornered and then the old guy stabs himself in what I swear to all the gods is some kind of bloody horrifying dark magic ritual. I don't know what the point was and I doubt I'll enjoy finding out. ...The woman's alive and she's more or less in hysterics, which is hard to blame her for but it's really cramping my style what with trying to interrogate her.> 

Permalink Mark Unread

Um. 

 

 

 

Probably Ma'ar should be able to think of...something...to do about that. Having complete thoughts is mostly not happening right now, because Iomedae is making that awful whimpering sound again and it's so distracting and also. What. 

<...Don't touch the body. Seal the basement. Urtho might know what he could have been doing, ask him if he is conscious. Obviously secure the other shaman, she - may genuinely be upset but I would not assume she is incapacitated - is she a mage...?> 

His hands are shaking. He looks at them with puzzled irritation. 

Permalink Mark Unread

<Yes. Adept, but just barely. Shayeen and I together have her outmatched in a straight-up fight, doubt she's combat-trained at all what with the being a shaman and all, but - she might not use it to fight...> 

Permalink Mark Unread

Ma'ar grits his teeth. 

:If she gets off a compulsion on either of you, you - at least have the advantage that the other will notice.> 

But Shayeen isn't a Mindspeaker, isn't trained, she won't know the communication-spell – the smart thing to do would be to hit Need first...

<Is she shielding? I would - I know Tantara has ethical qualms with this but would be reading her mind constantly.> 

Permalink Mark Unread

A burst of mental laughter, without much humor. <I'm not Urtho. If it's the only warning we get, I'll take it. ...And we'd best get out of this basement, Shayeen's having a panic attack at me and it's tedious.> 

Permalink Mark Unread

Presumably Need has already considered that getting the untrained fourteen-year-old out of this situation is a priority, and Ma'ar repeating it will not be adding any new information. 

<Make sure Urtho is aware. ...Make sure all of Urtho's people are aware, we need to be communicating updates and things are - very chaotic - I will update people from my side.> 

Permalink Mark Unread

<Thaaaaaat sounds like diplomacy and, as I said.> A mental...sarcastic head-toss, or something, it's not exactly clear how Need is managing to convey body language along the communication-spell, which doesn't normally have much in the way of side-channel content. <I'll do my bloody best.> 

Permalink Mark Unread

<Question her as soon as possible. There may have been others involved.> 

And Ma'ar drops the connection, and fights the urge to put his head down on his knees. He doesn't want this to be the thing that's happening. He wants a different better thing to be happening instead, he wants to be in a world where Iomedae is bouncing back from every injury with impossible superhuman speed, barely inconvenienced by a fifty-mile-wide fireball, not...semi-comatose and helpless, just barely conscious enough to hurt. He would like not that

...Also his own head continues to feel - off - in a way he hasn't had a chance to poke at and is kind of scared to investigate further but should probably think about. He's functional - he's good at that - but he's almost certainly impaired.

It would be tempting to borrow Iomedae's headband, except that one, it was deeply unpleasant the last time, and two, he is not actually sure if that's the only thing still holding her mind together at all. It certainly seems like a pretty bad idea to disrupt anything right now. 

Permalink Mark Unread

They're not fighting. 

 

That's the only thing that matters. Everything is awful, something precious might have been destroyed forever for no reason, and yet, his people and Tantara's people are on their sides of the lines, and no one is throwing fireballs at each other, and that - does matter, it's the most important thing here, even if right now the world feels far away and not quite real. He has tactical problems and can make tactical decisions and if he just keeps holding this together long enough, then maybe someday the bigger picture will start to make sense again. 

If he keeps Iomedae safe and does everything in his power to help her, then maybe someday she can look into his eyes again and show him how to stop being scared

 

He closes his eyes, and reaches out with the communication-spell to update his commanders. He should really meet with the King but - he can't. Not right now. 

Permalink Mark Unread

Shakat will grumble and sigh and demand a different chair and a pillow for his back, and generally make it clear that he is very unhappy at the sudden unexpected multi-candlemark Mindhealing marathon, but he does actually want to clean up the - foreign matter, or whatever it is - enough that he can get a better assessment of the underlying damage. 

 

 

The painkillers are going to be wearing off now. He's gotten all of the metaphorical smoke and soot, and nearly all of the metaphorical acetone, and the metaphorical spilled glue is an enormous hassle but he's figuring out a strategy to scrape away at it one layer at a time without causing too much additional damage in the process. 

Her mind looks spectacularly horrifying, but there's been a real and significant improvement since he got started. Is Iomedae actually showing any signs of increasing responsiveness as a result? 

Permalink Mark Unread

With the painkillers wearing off, she'll be - conscious. Talking, even, in her own language none of them speak.

Permalink Mark Unread

...Well, that's something.

Heeeee doesn't think it's a good idea to actively Mindspeak her, but if she's not shielding then someone can try to read her surface thoughts and figure out what she's attempting to say? 

Permalink Mark Unread

Absolutely shielding. She started that the second she became conscious. 

 

 

Permalink Mark Unread

...Yeah, that's about what Ma'ar expected, usually she's spectacularly well shielded and utterly impossible to read. He had wondered if the damage would impair that but apparently not enough. 

They could try having one of the Healers put her under, briefly, and see if he can get through then? It did seem earlier like her shielding relied on her being conscious, and maybe if he can get through at all, he can maintain that link while they let her wake up just enough to actually have any thoughts. 

Permalink Mark Unread

Sure, they can try that, though Iomedae is back to having vastly more life-force than a human person should and the Healers aren't sure if this will make that correspondingly harder, or if she's going to try to fight them about it. 

Permalink Mark Unread

It does make it much harder, but not impossible, and her shields do crumble once they push her under.

Permalink Mark Unread

Ma'ar will take her hand - physical contact helps, more with weak Mindspeakers but he wants every edge here. (And maybe once she's conscious again, she'll be tracking her surroundings enough to find it comforting?) 

 

- there. He's not getting anything off her, her surface mind is a still dark pool, but he thinks he has contact. 

They can try very slowly easing back on the Healing-pressure keeping her unconscious. 

Permalink Mark Unread

 

Then eventually she's conscious.

 

 

- pain -

 

 

-  so much pain  -

 

 

- she tries to Lay on Hands, and it doesn't work -

 

 

 

- maybe she's in Hell -

 

 

Permalink Mark Unread

And he can't even tell her otherwise, because he doesn't speak her language and Mindspeaking her will just cause her more pain and possibly cause actual damage, and he's not sure she would actually be capable of processing words at all, let alone remembering the not-being-in-Hell part for more than five seconds. 

He squeezes her hand, not that he expects her to notice, and tells the Healers they can ease off all the way, it - feels like an awful thing to do to her, she shouldn't have to be experiencing this, but he wants to try to check if she was actually saying anything more coherent before. Trying to talk to people nearby while in Hell doesn't make a lot of sense. And she may have information about what's happening here that they very badly need to know. 

Permalink Mark Unread

She claws her way to more lucidity than that. 

 

Godheadache. 

 

 

 

She thinks - not Aroden. Or not just Aroden, she remembers scraps of Aroden but she doesn't think he'd have done this to her and she thinks there was someone - Someone - else. 

 

That means -

 

- there's a protocol for if she suspects she's compromised. It's to kill her and consult with Heaven from there.

 

She is attempting to instruct - her staff, the people she'd expect to be around her, all names Ma'ar does not recognize - to do it.

Permalink Mark Unread

So it was Aroden. And...probably the Star-Eyed Goddess, given whose shamans Iomedae was with when this happened - he doesn't have more guesses than that but it's a start

 

 

Does the Mindhealer think Mindspeaking her - not much, just enough to tell her that she's in Velgarth - will cause actual damage, especially irreversible damage, or just be painful? Iomedae...can probably take the pain, and his sense of her is that she would prefer to be in more pain and also getting a situation report. 

(Of course there's a protocol. ...Possibly there is an argument that they should worry she's compromised, but - Aroden clearly tried very hard to keep her from dying, so probably it's a good thing that she isn't dead?) 

Permalink Mark Unread

It probably won't cause new irreversible damage. If he tells Ma'ar to stop then he should do that right away, though. 

Permalink Mark Unread

All right. 

 

Very very gentle mindtouch. :Iomedae?: He'll give her a moment to see if she can actually recognize his mindvoice, in which case he can skip the additional words of telling her 'this is Ma'ar.' 

Permalink Mark Unread

She does recognize it. Ma'ar. That suggests a bunch of important questions none of which she can successfully think of right now, and she's straining herself trying.

Permalink Mark Unread

She shouldn't be doing that! Shakat would put in a block but he's not actually sure her mind-substrate is stable enough yet for that not to be more trouble than it's worth. 

Permalink Mark Unread

What can he actually tell her which is true and reassuring and also the absolute bare minimum number of words. 

:In Predain. Secure here. Ceasefire holding: Pause. Give her some time to absorb that. :You met with shamans. Star-Eyed attacked you: Pause. :Dead and captured, respectively: He will leave out the weird blood-magic ritual, it's important but if he can't make any sense of it than he doubts Iomedae can. :Interrogation happening. Not - over - but no immediate emergency: 

 

He'll wait a while to see if she seems to be able to work with that, and also if gauge the Mindtouch is actually bearable for her or if the additional pain is pushing her back to not being able to think at all. 

Permalink Mark Unread

 

She can think through pain, slowly, but she also knows that with a godheadache one really shouldn't, and this is a godheadache from a different god's meddling. 

 

 

 

 

take the headband

 

 

There's something more but she can't think of it. 

 

Effortfully: you'll do a good job.

Permalink Mark Unread

Ma'ar desperately wants to know what the other thing is, and also does not need the Mindhealer to tell him that he absolutely shouldn't push Iomedae any harder right now. 

He...is also not sure if taking the headband will be a terrible idea! Iomedae does at least seem to have substantially more context on the problem happening to her, though, and she was the one who suggested it. 

 

What does the Mindhealer think? 

Permalink Mark Unread

It's a powerful magical artifact he's never seen before, how is he supposed to have a professional opinion lined up here. 

 

 

...if the thing it does is make her smarter (wow) it probably won't rip her head apart to remove it now. It might actually ease some of the pressure, if she's having fewer thoughts. 

Permalink Mark Unread

He will very carefully take the headband. 

Permalink Mark Unread

The Mindhealer is hovering, ready to ask him to put it back immediately if it looks like it's setting off a destructive cascade. 

What does it in fact look like? 

Permalink Mark Unread

- a lot less strain, a lot less stubbornly trying to weave thoughts through all the acetone and emptiness.

But also quite evidently some thought-patterns that don't complete any longer, that were relying on something that's no longer there.

 

She's settled down anyway, to some very simple thought-patterns that work just fine. Endure. Endure. Endure. Endure so you can fight another day.

Permalink Mark Unread

...This seems fine. It's one of the weirdest things he's ever seen but it does easier on her overall, more restful for her mind, better for her recover.

Also the Mindhealer is not sure what else he can do right now, and like with normal Healing, there's sort of a maximum limit for how much Mindhealing you really want to throw at someone in one day and he's arguably exceeded it already. (And is definitely exceeding his own limits for heavy Gift-use. He has a headache. Not nearly as bad as his poor patient's headache but he's still cranky about it.) 

 

He wants to ask her more about this 'godheadache' condition and if there are known treatments for it or at least predictions of how long it lasts and how complete a recovery she can expect without extra help, but that's a very stupid thing to ask her about right now. She should rest, and do as little as possible, and if they're lucky then by tomorrow morning she'll be better off enough that they can have a conversation. 

Permalink Mark Unread

He's going to put the headband on after he's sure Iomedae is settled and won't urgently need anything in the next few minutes. What if the explosion of feelings happens again.

:Keeping you safe: he promises her. :Rest. ...Can put you to sleep?: Healers always complain that Healing-enforced sleep is less restful than natural sleep but it's got to be more restful than lying there enduring horrible agony. 

(He's so angry with the Star-Eyed Goddess, and - probably unfairly - kind of angry with Aroden for letting this happen.) 

Permalink Mark Unread

:Sleep.: she agrees.

Permalink Mark Unread

Then the Healers can nudge her back to a deeper-than-natural sleep, where her mind is still and quiet and nothing is putting strain on any of the still-damaged areas. 

Permalink Mark Unread

Ma'ar only lets go of her hand once Thoughtsensing tells him that she's not experiencing much at all. 

 

 

...He is definitely going to put on the headband, but. In a moment. They should send the Mindhealer off-duty to rest until tomorrow morning, at which point there will probably be more to do, but first he wants as complete a report as possible. 

Permalink Mark Unread

Shakat is not just going to tell Adept Kiyamvir Ma'ar to go away, however tempting it is. He's still going to be grumpy about it. 

 

Iomedae seems to recognize what's happening to her, and seems to expect to recover, or at least doesn't seem to expect to be in permanent agonizing pain. It...sounds like in this case, possibly a god deliberately tried to break her mind; before, he was struggling to think what could cause such catastrophic mental damage, but actually if a god tried to break her, they're probably lucky it's not worse. She's capable of speaking and of at least very basic reasoning, which is a good sign. Various things are improving even without intervention, albeit very very slowly; that's also a good sign. 

 

What's less of a good sign is that - he's pretty sure some of the damage is going to be irreversible. With her mind barely working and without having known her before this, it's hard to tell what the long term consequences will be. It might just be memory loss, but it might be the loss of other more critical faculties. He would be worried about it hitting emotional regulation, that's particularly easy to disrupt, but she...actually seems to be coping with this with remarkable grace and composure, so that's also a good sign. And whatever the damage turns out to be, it's probably something that she'll be able to learn to work around, especially given her POWERFUL MAGICAL ARTIFACT THAT MAKES YOU SMARTER; people can be remarkably good at learning to work around impairments. 

He does think they're looking at weeks of recovery time. Maybe months. 

Permalink Mark Unread

Permalink Mark Unread

...Instead of having pointless emotions about this, Ma'ar is going to grit his teeth and put on the stupid headband and hopefully have emotions that are at least more productive. 

 

 

It feels pretty different from the last time. Possibly because he was substantially less impaired without it, and it's a different kind of impairment, it's not that he was foggy-headed or forgetful, it's just that everything felt fake. 

Everything abruptly feels very very real and up-close. It's jarring, and he has to spend a few moments focusing on not crying in front of a Mindhealer who will be really annoying about it. It's not actually impairing. Everything that felt distant and hard to care about is suddenly sharp, in-focus, and it once again viscerally feels like the world is a thing he can affect and not just a story playing out somewhere else with a plot that he doesn't like. The awareness-of-his-own-thoughts is there, but it's much less spiraling off into random emotional pits. There are probably a lot of emotional pits he has yet to walk into but right now he has more urgent priorities. 

 

Priorities:

Maintaining the ceasefire. And pushing ahead with peace talks is a high priority, actually, though it's frustrating that Iomedae won't be available for it. He thinks they were close, though; Iomedae had a draft. He can build on her work. If he needs her counsel, he can try having conversations with imaginary Iomedae in his head, rather than bothering actual Iomedae, whose highest priority right now needs to be resting and not hurting herself any more. And he feels like he's starting to grasp at a much better understanding of what Iomedae would say and how she would reason about various situations... 

Peace talks, then. And unravelling the plot with the shamans, if it turns out there was any additional plot, and not just a couple of people receiving a direct revelation and trying their best to fulfill Their goddess' will. 

....he's upset about that. He's pretty angry about it, actually, even separately from being angry about Iomedae's injuries. The people of the Star-Eyed  deserved a better goddess

They'll find a way to build one, then. 

Permalink Mark Unread

The dead shaman is an unanswered question. ...With the headband's enhancement, he is at least managing to produce guesses - he really knows very little about the various temple orders, that's an issue and also it was clearly a mistake, even if he's right - because he's right - that the gods of his world seem to mostly be the enemies of people who want a flourishing civilization. 

It was probably some way of increasing his goddess' power, whether by literally gifting Her with the blood-magic release of his death or something more complex. She might be planning something else to throw at Iomedae, or She might just have been very badly weakened or exhausted by whatever happened with Iomedae. Since apparently Aroden showed up and, among other things, provided Ma'ar with the warning that may well have saved Iomedae's life. 

- ohhhhhh, and Aroden gave Iomedae access to Healing again, that explains it. Ma'ar had somehow at no point considered explicitly what happened, in the jumbled gap between when he scooped Iomedae out of Urtho's Tower and when he woke up on the floor and panic-Gated out, he didn't have time for the Healers being incredibly worried at him, but they thought he was dying. Presumably he was dying, up until the point when Iomedae healed him - he must have gotten unlucky about how hard Urtho's countermeasures hit, but of course he was unlucky, this entire operation was orchestrated by a goddess with Foresight. 

Permalink Mark Unread

What were the goals of the Star-Eyed Goddess, in doing this at all, and did She achieve them

 

It...looks like not, mostly? Unless Iomedae is permanently and irrecoverably damaged, but she's Iomedae. She might need weeks, is all, and that's okay, because the headband might make it deeply annoying to be a human mortal who experiences emotions, but he...does, actually, feel like he can regain control of the situation. 

Is the plan incomplete, with some final step looming in their future? Or was it just...miscalculated? It doesn't seem impossible it was a straight-up unforced error, by a goddess trying to combat someone She didn't understand. Maybe She hadn't known that Aroden could or would intervene? 

This is a question where he probably just lacks the information to confidently come to a conclusion. Can he...get that information and if so how. He should probably arrange to be in contact with the religious officials who Iomedae did get along with, which he thinks are at this point the temple orders of Bestet and of the Nameless God of Eternal Flame. He's not looking forward to it but they've probably earned an update on Iomedae's condition. ...And the church of the Nameless God was involved in the prisoner exchange efforts, though not openly, but - it's still evidence that they aren't necessarily enemies and might even be friends. 

 

Other loose ends include Conn Levas, who may or may not even have been a godplot. Probably was, but the man clearly doesn't consider himself a servant of any gods, or of anyone at all save himself. He's free right now. Urtho's people probably were trying to keep an eye on him but...things are chaotic. 

 

- he needs to make sure the fourteen-year-old girl with the sword attached to her is all right. That entire situation is very confusing but the magic sword has been a surprisingly key player, recently, and - seems both aligned with at least some of the gods, and also aligned with the mission of Iomedae's survival and a successful peace treaty. 

Permalink Mark Unread

Understanding what happened and why, and dealing with the aftermath, is an important step to cover here. It's not a first step; it will be a lot easier to negotiate something around Tantara's handling of the rogue shamans once they're more officially and stably not at war. 

...If 'rogue shamans' is even the story they're going to go with. If instead the temple order of the Star-Eyed Goddess backs them, which doesn't seem impossible after their Goddess committed to the strategy She apparently did, then that's a new and exciting mess and he doesn't know what happens next. 

Not useful to speculate now. Stay on top of communication channels, get more information, get peace talks scheduled, and the thing he wants to work up to is for he and Urtho to meet face to face. It'll be so much easier to resolve some of these pieces, then. He desperately wishes Iomedae could be there too, but it can't wait weeks. And he shouldn't in fact conduct sensitive negotiations while under a mind-altering magical effect that shuts down fear. 

Permalink Mark Unread

One thing he definitely can't afford to do is to stay in this room at Iomedae's side for the next week. This is - actually pretty upsetting, it turns out! He wants to be closeby enough at all times that he can on an instant's notice Gate her somewhere else. 

But, realistically, other people can guard her almost as well as Ma'ar can, and other people cannot run diplomatic talks anywhere near as effectively on his behalf, and it makes sense for him to focus on the things that only he can do. And getting Tantara and Predain to a state of peace will, actually, make Iomedae safer in expectation, probably by a much greater margin than the difference between a guard who can Gate her out in one second versus half a second. 

'She might be lonely' is also not a compelling reason to stay. Iomedae knows other people, here, and many of them are also going to be very busy, but he can leave a note with the Healers to, when she's next awake, ask her who if anyone she would like to stay with her.

...He sort of doesn't expect her to ask for it, not if it comes at any cost whatsoever to the peace efforts, which it would, since nearly everyone Iomedae knows is themselves an important player in the war and the prospective peace. 

 

 

Ma'ar lingers for a few more minutes, watching Iomedae sleep and turning over all the pieces in his mind. 

And then he leaves, to arrange to obtain a copy of Iomedae's draft proposal on peace talk and discuss it with his King. 

Permalink Mark Unread

The Healers are very very gentle with Iomedae. The sleep technique isn't safe to use for that long at a stretch, so they need to let her wake up at least briefly every candlemark, at which point they help her her roll over because the Healing-sleep mostly prevents tossing and turning, and offer her top-up doses of painkillers unless she starts protesting this. She is physically most of the way back to perfect health, by now, and only very debatably needs Healing attention at all, but if they're going to keep giving her unreasonably high doses of drugs they should be monitoring her, and even though her injuries aren't physical in nature, they aren't going to assume she feels well enough to do anything unaided. 

They don't have a language in common with her right now, and have no way of talking to her that doesn't cause her additional pain, and no way of understanding her while she's awake. They'll arrange for a Thoughtsenser to start reading her just before each time they let her wake, since otherwise her shields snap back into place as soon as she's conscious and then they have no way of understanding her if she wants to ask them for something or convey a worrying symptom. They're trying pretty hard to avoid Mindspeaking her extraneously, 

Ma'ar is arranging peace talks with Urtho, they let her know when it seems like Mindspeech might not be too awful. Ma'ar offered that she could suggest other people she's met in Velgarth, if she would rather not be among strangers right now. They won't offer other updates spontaneously if Iomedae seems content to rest and not do any things. 

 

 

The afternoon passes. 

The ceasefire continues to hold. 

Permalink Mark Unread

When Iomedae wakes she wearily reconstructs that a hostile god tampered with her brain and tells them to kill her. When they don't do that she settles in to endure. She asks for people, sometimes, but people from her own world, her friends and allies. Her memories of everything since she came to Velgarth are much fuzzier than her memories of home. She's ...pretty sure there's a war. With the Star-Eyed Goddess. Ma'ar is winning, probably. 

Permalink Mark Unread

They can figure out what she's asking for from her surface thoughts. They can't fulfill that request, but they can keep her as comfortable as possible in the meantime. They're pretty worried about the apparent memory loss but at least she's calm, and Shakat can have a look tomorrow and see if he can figure out what would help. 

Permalink Mark Unread

It's a wearying afternoon. Ma'ar is having some trouble convincing his King that Urtho is still even in a position to negotiate for peace on behalf of his country, seeing as it definitely looks like his country's major decisions are instead mostly being made by random cultists of various gods. This is kind of hard to argue with, especially given that Urtho himself is still resting and mostly not a point of contact for them. 

But, by the time he finally drags himself to bed, they have an agreement on a place and a time for both sides to meet, and an agenda to discuss. Neither Ma'ar nor Urtho will be there in person, yet; one of the things they need to discuss, and come to agreement on, is what precautions Tantara will be taking against rogue god-followers showing up and ruining everything again. 

 

He spends some time visiting the recently-freed Predaini prisoners of war. Most of them spent months, some over a year, in terrifying and confusing conditions of captivity and with very little information on whether their kingdom was winning or losing, but his people are used to hardship. They'll be fine. 

 

 

He manages to sleep well, somehow, which is surprising. 

In the morning, he checks for updates, confirms that nothing exploded and nobody died overnight, and then heads to see Iomedae. At least for the first half of today, he probably can do quite a lot of his ongoing work from Iomedae's bedside. 

Permalink Mark Unread

The Mindhealer is also arriving, yawning and with tea. Iomedae is still in Healing-and-sedative-assisted sleep; he'll have an initial look before they try to wake her. 

Permalink Mark Unread

She's still in terrible shape! (Well, perfect physical condition, but oil-tapestry terrible shape). The distortions that seem related to the headache might be starting to get a bit better, but they're still pretty bad.

Permalink Mark Unread

Yeah. This is about what he was coming to expect – there's a lot of acute damage, the mental equivalent of the swelling and pain around a broken bone, that seems likely to subside by itself, though far slower than he would prefer. She's eventually going to be in less pain and (hopefully) less impaired as a result. 

A lot of the other disruptions don't look like they're going to heal back to their previous state, or to any kind of healthy state. A broken bone that isn't set will heal wrong, and poorly-treated injuries can cripple someone for life. 

 

 

The last dose of sedatives should be starting to wear off; Iomedae's body burns through the drugs fast. He thinks they should let her wake up fully - with Ma'ar reading her, unless he's too busy remotely running peace talks, but he was better at it than the other Healers with Mindspeech - and see if she can be nudged into explaining what her world knows about the problems caused by gods messing with your head. 

Permalink Mark Unread

He's not that likely to be interrupted urgently in the next candlemark, unless of course the Star-Eyed Goddess or Vkandis send someone to sabotage the peace talks. Ma'ar takes Iomedae's hands, and slips into her mind while her shields are down, and waits for her to wake up. 

Permalink Mark Unread

Pain. 

 

 

Godheadache.

 

 

Not Aroden. Someone else. 

Permalink Mark Unread

He Mindtouches her, still as gently as he can manage, though the Mindhealer thought that she might now be getting to the point where receiving Mindspeech isn't going to cause more pain than the baseline. 

:Hey. This is Ma'ar. You are in Predain. Peace talks are starting - your draft was good. Star-Eyed and Vkandis have not tried anything yet. ...How much do you remember?: 

Permalink Mark Unread

Agony and horror and Aroden and she needs to kill the Star-Eyed goddess. Immediately. They were interrupted. She needs to finish it -

- hostile god in her brain, she needs to not do things -

- they should kill her -

Permalink Mark Unread

So more or less what he thought; he would like to have more detail but he doesn't need to, most of what they need to know is conveyed perfectly well in the mess that was left of Iomedae's mind. 

:Aroden went to significant lengths to keep you alive and I trust His judgement: Contacting Ma'ar, not even one of His worshippers, is probably the sort of thing that was very costly even on top of the sheer distance. 

(Figuring out how to Gate between planes or between worlds or whatever it would take to reach Golarion is not a top priority right now, however badly he wishes he could make that happen, arrange for Iomedae to wake up with her actual friends and colleagues around her. He can add it to the list of reasons why a peace treaty is the highest priority, really; if he and Urtho are allies then he can request Urtho's help and do it that much faster.) 

:You might be compromised. We have you under guard: albeit mostly not because he was worried about her suddenly turning into a puppet of the Star-Eyed Goddess, she can barely move. :We are not going to let you do any things. ...We have a Mindhealer, we can fix it: 

Permalink Mark Unread

 

 

She thinks very very slowly, but mostly clearly.

 

 

If she's dangerous there's not all that much a guard can do. At home under some circumstances they'd dump her in a demiplane, paladins do not have a way to stab their way out of demiplanes. 

 

 

She thinks she is not dangerous to her guards. She is - not reliable to make the kinds of high stakes decisions it is net good for her to make when she can trust herself. Different category of problem.

 

She should not make decisions like to kill a god.

 

 

Aroden thought the god needed killing, though.

 

There should be a church of Aroden here so He has more visibility and can help more cheaply - no, that's the kind of high stakes decision it is bad to make when she can't trust herself.

 

 

This is straining her oil painting pretty badly; she pushes through it. She needs to tell Ma'ar he is doing a good job so he'll keep working on the peace talks.

Permalink Mark Unread

Ma'ar definitely has some sort of feeling about the fact that Iomedae apparently considers his...self-confidence, or something? to be one of the key limiting factors in the peace talks working.

 

He also has some sort of feeling about the fact that she's not wrong. This is...now moving into the realm of decisionmaking where he doesn't feel like he has long-established heuristics and mental habits, such that proposing a problem immediately results in his mind generating a plan. 

- it's not some kind of entirely new and mysterious realm, though. It is, fundamentally, understanding Tantara's side of things, and figuring out what costly signs of goodwill they need that will actually reassure them that Predain wants peace. And then talking to Urtho. Mostly this is going to be talking to Urtho. He...has never exactly been good at that, but it's familiar, and - the advice he's gotten from Iomedae, even in the little time they had, resolved a lot of things he had somehow never figured out despite years of debates and letters. 

He wants Iomedae BACK it's not fair, Gating into Urtho's Tower to rescue her was supposed to mean that he would still have her help 

 

He takes a deep breath. :We are figuring out all of that, it is not on you. The only thing we need from you right now is to help us figure out what the Star-Eyed did to your head so that our Mindhealer can fix it: 

Permalink Mark Unread

 

 

 

She thinks.

 

 

 

She doesn't remember. Except that whatever She tried made Aroden very very angry.

Permalink Mark Unread

Yeah. Ma'ar himself also doesn't remember anything about Aroden contacting him - including whether or not it was definitely Aroden, but he's inferring that it was just based on the context, it certainly seems unlikely it was the Star-Eyed. But 'angry' seems right. 

 

:You recognized your symptoms as a godheadache before you remembered the events. Has this happened to you before?: 

Permalink Mark Unread

Talking to gods is always excruciatingly painful and if the god isn't very careful and the conversation short can also cause dissociation and memory loss. 

 

(When she is a god she plans on being better at it.)

Permalink Mark Unread

How long does the pain usually last afterward? It's been about a day, should they be worried that she's still in this much pain? ...Probably this was neither a short conversation nor one where Aroden could be particularly careful, and so maybe it's entirely to be expected that it's worse. 

 

Does the memory loss get better over time? Is there anything that might help, like going through a written timeline of everything that's happened since she landed in Velgarth to help jog her memory and put the fragments she does recall in order?

(He's pretty sure they can do that, once he's working closely with Urtho, between the two of them and the magic sword they should be able to compile a list of all of Iomedae's activities and choices, and even if she can't retrieve the original memory of it, she'll at least know what should have been in those gaps. It's what he would want to do, if he woke up missing a lot of memories.) 

 

- he's also not sure how much it's actively damaging for her to be trying to think and talk, right now. They don't have to figure out all of this today, if she needs to rest and only try to communicate in very brief chunks. 

Permalink Mark Unread

She has no idea how much godheadache to expect for gods warring over your soul. She'd really expect that to just kill you, actually. 

 

The memory loss is sometimes permanent even if gods weren't warring over your soul. Probably once the headache has gone away it will be helpful to reconstruct everything.

Permalink Mark Unread

It does seem like the sort of thing that would kill most people! Iomedae is, as has been previously demonstrated, extremely hard to kill. Maybe it will at least discourage the stupid local gods from trying over and over again, that it keeps not working. 

She should focus on resting, then, and the Healers can keep giving her huge doses of painkillers so she can be as comfortable as possible. 

...Do they have her permission for the Mindhealer to keep fixing obvious problems in her head, even when she's not really with it enough to consent case-by-case? He can't retrieve information that was totally destroyed, but there are probably still a lot of things where it'll be obvious to him what broke and how to put it back. 

Permalink Mark Unread

She doesn't know what Mindhealing is. If he trusts it, sure.

Permalink Mark Unread

(It would be convenient if they had at some point found time to explain it to her, but - then again, she probably wouldn't remember it anyway. He would hate having things done to him that he didn't understand, but...if she's willing to trust his assessment of it...it does seem like it might be a faster way to get enough of Iomedae back that they can properly orient her to everything...) 

 

Yes. He trusts his people, and the Mindhealer who's been working with her is very experienced and very careful. He may not be able to fix everything but he's not going to slip up and make things worse. 

Permalink Mark Unread

Iomedae is among allies. That is not enough for things to go well, but it is good and she is grateful. 

 

She is also really really struggling to string her thoughts together, at this point.

Permalink Mark Unread

She is among allies! One of whom is currently in possession of her incredibly powerful magic headband that makes you smarter, and also got an entire full night's sleep last night, and is actually feeling relatively hopeful and in control. 

 

(The headband helps a weirdly large amount with meetings, which is not at all what Ma'ar had expected after his first experience of it, when he was way too lost in endless rabbitholes in his own head to particularly hold a conversation. Maybe it's just that his baseline is better right now, but it absolutely seems to be making him more persuasive. Last night he was vastly better than usual at flagging all of the places where the King is uneasy, exactly what he's uneasy about, where his understanding diverges from Ma'ar's and what sequence of words would bring him over to Ma'ar's viewpoint. 

...he has mixed feelings about this, honestly, it seems potentially dangerous to be supernaturally convincing when he isn't necessarily supernaturally correct. But he did actually try to consider it, and - he does still think that he's more likely to be correct, on most questions, than anyone in this entire world except for Iomedae. When she's not damaged.

But right now he's looking out for both of them, and his whole world, and - it might not be enough, but he thinks he's the best person for it, and Iomedae seems to think he's the best person for it, and so he's not going to turn down anything that makes him more effective at accomplishing his goals.) 

 

The Healers want to give Iomedae painkillers and then let her fall asleep on her own, they've been doing more Healing-enforced sleep than is really ideal. Ma'ar sits with her and holds her hand until she's definitely asleep, and then leaves, because he theoretically can work from here but he's better at it if he can be somewhere with the rest of the King's advisors and a lot of tablespace for maps. 

Permalink Mark Unread

Shakat stays with Iomedae.

 

He's not going to try to reconstruct anything that was shredded badly enough to be left unrecognizable, but he's on the lookout for places where pathways were interrupted, by metaphorical glue or acetone or water-damage, and where as a result areas of her mind are mostly not linked up to the rest like they should be. He thinks he can make some headway on that. 

Permalink Mark Unread

It is, overall, an efficient and productive day. 

 

They plan the withdrawals of Predain's troops back to their pre-war borders. (Agreeing on exactly where the pre-war border was takes a surprisingly long time. Maps are hard.) It's going to take days to actually execute, but they do now have a plan and a timeline. 

Ma'ar's current strategy is that, in exchange for being very very cooperative on the question of pre-war borders, Predain is going to push hard on concessions related to the religious cultists. They do not think that the temple order of Vkandis should be left to its own devices on disciplining the priests involved in the superweapon attack on Iomedae. Dropping a superweapon on one of their allies is incredibly unacceptable and they cannot sign off on a peace treaty with Tantara until it's verifiably the case that Tantara can commit to that peace on behalf of all of its citizens.

(The priest who had been at General Movat's camp is still in custody, under guard by Urtho's people, recovering from the injuries sustained during his arrest, and hasn't tried to Gate out but they don't really have a plan to stop him. This is, in the long run, not an acceptable state of affairs, especially given that the other mages involved seem to have...fled to another country? Can Tantara perhaps figure something out with the Ceej Empire that will result in having custody of them too?) 

Permalink Mark Unread

The immediate danger is reduced, because all of Urtho's superweapons have now been, if not fully dismantled, at least disabled thoroughly enough that it would require Urtho's personal attention to repair them enough to use

(Urtho is sad about this.) 

Permalink Mark Unread

Yes, but Vkandis has been known to miraculously set battlefields on fire sometimes. Also some of His worshippers are mages, with combat training, who can personally act as explosive weapons if they're willing to die for it, and they are officially under the Tantaran chain of command but Tantara currently has no control over their movements. Do they see why this is a problem. 

Permalink Mark Unread

The church of Vkandis has temples in the Ceej Empire; they haven't previously worked closely with the temples in Tantara, it's far away and the two regions speak different languages, but the Tantaran senior priests currently speaking for their church are in agreement that what happened was unacceptable, and they can do their own investigation and track down the culprits. 

Permalink Mark Unread

Ma'ar wants some of Urtho's non-religious trusted advisors involved, and he wants regular updates and the option to check up on their work in more detail - he's very worried that they still don't have any official answer on whether Vkandis, separate from His church, wanted Iomedae dead, and after the recent events with the Star-Eyed Goddess he expects the answer is yes - but he'll take it. 

 

 

Speaking of the Star-Eyed Goddess. Predain also does not really have the sense that the shamans of the Kaled'a'in tribes are...actually meaningfully a church, let alone a government body that can sign a treaty and be trusted to keep to it. Silverhorse was a clan elder.

It's unclear if any of the other clan elders were involved, or even aware – in fact, after Ravenwing's interrogation, it's pretty unclear whether she and Silverhorse, when they stepped into the room with Iomedae that morning, had the slightest idea what was going to happen next. But it remains the case that sometimes Her shamans will, apparently, if She orders it, do things like abandon their ally in the spirit world and slit her throat while she's unconscious, and their people's clan structure does not even in principle seem to be one that can commit to not that.

He doesn't expect Urtho to be happy about this plan, but Ma'ar thinks that anyone of the Kaled'a'in people - unless they are willing to renounce Their goddess, which would be incredibly understandable after this - should not be allowed in Urtho's Tower or within a five-mile perimeter of it. Ma'ar is aware that these are people Urtho considers close allies, even friends, but - it's a temporary measure, just until they have a longer term solution. 

 

(His longer term solution is that Aroden is going to kill the Star-Eyed Goddess. This is not exactly a de-escalatory thing to bring up, under the circumstances, and he also doesn't want to spread around too many details of what happened to Iomedae, just in case it gives someone the brilliant idea that she's been very inconvenient and is probably much easier than usual to kill right now.) 

Permalink Mark Unread

There are some specific people who Ma'ar does think have the right to know. Including - and he's thought about this back and forth and sideways, and repeatedly come to the same very surprising conclusion - some servants of the gods. 

Bestet in particular. Iomedae prayed to Her for aid, and She answered. ...Possibly the church of the Nameless God can be trusted as well, but it's less clear there that the god was involved, as opposed to just individual followers of Her who happen to be good people. 

Still. The sort of people who, in the absence of specific divine revelations from their god, will quietly and without taking any credit for it do the legwork to make sure no one in Predain will starve this winter, are...probably also the sort of people who will at least hesitate if their god orders them to do something awful. 

 

The entirety of the first day is spent on negotiating troop withdrawals and temporary solutions to their god-followers problem. It goes well enough that Ma'ar is, not exactly comfortable, but willing to come out in person. Next up, they need to discuss any commitments that Predain is or isn't willing to make on the use of blood-magic and/or compulsions. Ma'ar also wants to bring up Iomedae's idea, of bringing in one of the more trustworthy temple orders to serve as independent enforcers, with sworn oaths to use compulsions only in the very specific cases of, for example, holding a mage who Vkandis might at any moment give a divine order to explode. 

He would like to meet Marlana, the priest of Bestet who Iomedae seemed to approve of, and with a representative of the church of the Nameless God. 

Permalink Mark Unread

They can both be available for that. 

(Marlana should probably not take the fourteen-year-old girl who has attached herself to her like a limpet. She'll make plans for that tomorrow.) 

Permalink Mark Unread

Good. 

 

Ma'ar checks up on all of the things that need checking-up on and delegates overnight duties and then goes to bed early and sleeps like a rock for nine candlemarks straight. He has, as usual with the headband, very vivid dreams. 

In the morning he goes to see Iomedae again. He's not going to give her a situation report unless she asks; he just wants to see how she's doing, and get a report from the Mindhealer on any changes over the last day. 

Permalink Mark Unread

The godheadache is much more manageable now. She probably could do things, but she probably shouldn't. She has no idea how to check that she's thinking correctly. This situation is very  complicated. Trying to act like herself-not-brain-damaged and solve problems that would be hard for herself-not-brain-damaged while in fact brain damaged would be silly. 

 If she's lastingly brain-damaged she'll figure out new strategies appropriate to that, but that will be a grindingly slow process and she shouldn't try it on high stakes things. 

She still doesn't remember any of the events of the day where the Star-Eyed tried something; she remembers more of the previous weeks. 

Permalink Mark Unread

Ma'ar will give her a very minimal update, then, in simple words.

Urtho's superweapons are all disabled; even if the ceasefire falls apart, which he thinks is very very unlikely at this point, the continent won't be destroyed. Peace talks are proceeding. Predain is now in the process of withdrawing their troops from Tantaran territory. It's going smoothly.

(There are all the usual hiccups that happen when you try to move very large numbers of people long distances and also a lot of those people are very tense and not entirely happy about the ceasefire or the withdrawal. But they are tactical problems and he can handle them and Iomedae doesn't need to worry about it.)

They don't yet have a comfortable long-term solution for containing the mages who take orders from gods, but they're working on it. He doesn't need Iomedae to try to make any decisions. For one thing, he has her headband. '

(He is seriously going to miss it once she wants it back.) 

 

He's going to represent Predain in person at the next round of peace talks, today, so he won't be here. But he trusts his people and their precautions, and he thinks she's safe here.  

(He's arranged around-the-clock scrying surveillance, to ensure that they find out right away if anyone involved in previous attacks on Iomedae, or closely adjacent to people who were involved, is suddenly unaccounted for, even if Tantara doesn't pass this along. If that happens, they have a contingency-plan to immediately get Iomedae out of Predain, and additional plans to, if it comes to that, track down the mage(s) and detain them using compulsions. He's not going to jump to that without warning Tantara first; he's pre-written multiple letters to Urtho and the temple of Vkandis and the temples of Bestet and the Nameless god and one addressed to 'the clan elders of the Kaled'a'in' even though they aren't exactly an organization. That's a lot of detail that Iomedae doesn't need to think about, though.) 

 

Anyway, he thinks that she should rest and listen to the Mindhealer, and it's okay if she needs a long time to recover. 

Permalink Mark Unread

She relaxes very noticeably, hearing that. She doesn't try to formulate her thoughts into words and it's not clear if she realizes she's being mindread but she's very impressed with Ma'ar, and glad he's here, and she doesn't expect him to do anything horrible because she wasn't there to stop him, and she has always hated being incapacitated but this is much better than it could be. 

Permalink Mark Unread

Shakat thinks that at some point it will start to be necessary for her to push herself a little, to try to complete thoughts even with her very badly damaged mind, so he can see what's going wrong and patch it.

Now does not quite seem like that time, not yet. He'll do some slow and careful work on patching the remaining glue-and-acetone-damaged pathways where it is obvious what needs to link up. 

 

The Healers will keep offering her painkillers at regular intervals, but start to ease down on the dose. With anyone else, they would be trying to coax her to get out of bed before the days of bedrest weaken her muscles too badly, but Iomedae doesn't actually seem to be having that problem. If she starts to seem alert enough to be bored, they can have someone play music or something, as a distraction that she doesn't actually need to think about. 

Permalink Mark Unread

And negotiations over the use of blood-magic and compulsions! 

 

...Predain's default here is that they do not agree to any changes in their laws on internal use of blood-magic. This isn't an expression of intent – Ma'ar will confirm that they haven't, in fact, killed anyone for blood-power since the beginning of the ceasefire – but they are reluctant to add any further restrictions on their kingdom's ability to defend itself, when there are servants of gods running around exploding things. 

They will of course happily commit to following Tantara's laws while in Tantara's territory. They will commit to aggressively subduing and punishing anyone caught using blood-magic illegally; here is some thorough documentation on the protocols around legal use of blood-magic. While these are relatively new laws - replacing a previous baseline of no particular legal enforcement - and were likely not perfectly followed in practice, Predain will commit to following them stringently, and will agree to have Tantaran observers. 

There are actually very few legal uses of blood-magic while not actively at war (and not actively working on any large infrastructure projects, but they aren't). The subjects need to have been convicted in a criminal court of one of these capital crimes, and the purpose for the blood-magic use needs to have been approved by the King. This is not a commitment, but as a general prediction, Ma'ar thinks that if they reach a peace treaty with Tantara - and aren't under attack by rogue elements from within Tantara - then Predain will probably not be approving any such projects in the next year.

(Predain does want to obtain Tantara's aid with post-war reconstruction. Tantara is wealthier, and they had more mages to begin with and then far fewer deaths; Predain just returned a few hundred mages in the prisoner exchange. Anyway, Ma'ar has this as one of the agenda items for later.) 

 

What they are definitely not willing to do is ban the use of blood-magic in wartime. Yet. 

Tantara can have very thorough documentation of the laws there as well. Mages have to be specifically approved for the right to use blood-magic in combat at all, and to have orders that approve its use in this particular battle, and these are the requirements around asking for volunteers, and this is the process for investigating if, after the fact, anyone raises the concern that the process wasn't followed, or that it was but the blood-magic wasn't strategically justified and so the process ought to be updated. Tantara can have documentation of five such investigations. Ma'ar was only personally responsible for flagging four of them.

They will never ever use the citizens of another kingdom that bans blood-magic, like Tantara.

(For the sake of full honesty, here are four cases where Ma'ar suspects this rule was broken, during the war. There may be more that he doesn't know about - though the aura of blood-magic use is quite recognizable, and there are clear reporting processes for someone showing up as having used blood-magic when they shouldn't have. None of them would have made the difference between a Tantaran soldier living or dying, it was all in cases where they were fatally injured already and a Predaini mage was frustrated about the power going to waste. It was still definitely against their laws and the mages in question were removed from their positions and stripped of their rank.) 

 

It's not something Ma'ar is unwilling to budge on ever, to be clear. They can and should plan further diplomatic talks about the subject. Predain just - wants a lot more security than they currently have in Tantara's ability to police itself, and a lot more confidence in stable relations with the various gods and their various temple orders. Ma'ar thinks that the initial peace treaty with Tantara is time-sensitive, and doesn't want it held up on Tantara solving all of its problems, or on things that aren't even within Tantara's control. 

Permalink Mark Unread

This is definitely a topic where any discussion would predictably turn into a disaster, back in Urtho's Tower. But Ma'ar is older now and at least slightly wiser, he's had more practice in working with other people even though those people weren't Tantaran and Predain is different. He's met Iomedae, who explained a lot of things that he really should have noticed sooner but was too much in a hurry to think through.

And he has her headband. It's very noticeable that, in conversation, he's reliably several steps ahead of the other participants, able to anticipate their reactions, to imagine trying out different arguments and guessing what will land best before he actually says it. 

...Ma'ar continues to be less than perfectly comfortable with this, especially because he thinks that Iomedae would have counterarguments that no one here is able to think of, because they don't have her world's history and her god's teachings. But they'll have Iomedae for the diplomatic talks later on, and she can argue then that Predain is setting off down a path that leads to ruin. Ma'ar isn't taking that option away from her, but he is, he hopes, decreasing the odds that, say, Vkandis will notice in Foresight that Predain is going to be hard-pressed to hold off another attack. 

Permalink Mark Unread

Urtho isn't there in person, but he's receiving regular updates. 

 

Ma'ar did not used to be this good at, well, this. He's changed; he's grown. Urtho has some kind of emotion about that. 

...the clearest piece of that emotion is that he desperately wants the war to be over.

Tantara will accept Predain's proposal. They're definitely taking them up on sending observers to make sure Predain isn't lying about their use of blood-magic. 

Permalink Mark Unread

Compulsions, then. 

 

Predain is not going to be willing to ban voluntary compulsions as a professional requirement for jobs that people can just...not do...if they would rather not be under any mind control. The voluntary compulsions are very specific; they ban a handful of actions that he is pretty sure everyone agrees are bad, like rape and murder. They don't force you to obey orders, or alter your motivation to be loyal to Predain's current King. 

(This is mostly because positive compulsions are much harder than negative compulsions to set up right and without loopholes and Ma'ar does not have infinite access to well-trained mages, but also his shoulder Iomedae has some loud complaints about the horrible incentives that might lead to. ...His internal Iomedae has kind of a lot of complaints. Ma'ar isn't yet convinced that voluntary compulsions are necessarily horrible, but...he sort of predicts that Iomedae will change his mind as soon as they can speak properly about it, and arguably that means he should change his mind in advance. It's still not something to mess around with in the middle of a war, though; for one, there's kind of a lot of anger and resentment on the Predain side, a lot of people didn't want the ceasefire, and it would be incredibly awkward if some of them went and raped some Tantaran villagers.) 

 

He's also not willing to phase out involuntary compulsions for the purpose of holding prisoners. Again, Tantara can have such thorough documentation of their protocols for this, and when it's considered legitimate; it's still illegal to throw people in prison under compulsions for things that aren't actually crimes, and there are systems for reporting violations of that.

(Even if perhaps most of the reports, and most of the impetus to finish those investigations and punish the lawbreakers, came from Ma'ar personally. It's really annoying how he keeps trying to make there be actual laws and processes and then finds himself still doing 90% of the work himself. ...His shoulder Iomedae has a reaction to that, too, but even with the headband he can't quite imagine Iomedae in realistic enough detail to figure out what it is. Frustrating. He should practice.) 

Anyway, Tantara is of course welcome to ask to see documentation of future investigations, and report any violations they become aware of. And he does want to move toward a system where a neutral body can do this type of enforcement for both kingdoms, rather than Predain's government having that power; he has an agenda note to discuss that next. But from Ma'ar's perspective, Tantara is right now discovering the downsides of not having any system that lets you reliably hold very dangerous people. It's important to Predain that, while they're not currently interfering with Tantara's handling of the priest-mages of Vkandis or the shamans of the Kaled'a'in, if one of the apparently-hostile gods decides to send an assassination attempt into Predain's territory, then they can protect themselves and also have a living prisoner to question. 

 

Setting up a neutral organization to handle this is going to take a while. It's not just agreeing to do it at all; they'll need to recruit, vet people, train people, and set up all of their own processes, including for catching and stopping any enforcers who aren't following the rules agreed on. Ma'ar is thinking that six months would be optimistic. Once they have a plan for such an organization, Predain will sign a treaty committing to changing their laws as soon as the organization is actually running. But not before then. 

Permalink Mark Unread

The Tantaran negotiators on site are unhappy, but Urtho isn't actually inclined to argue with this.

 

It...meant a lot, that several hundred of their people who he never expected to see again are now home safely. 

Permalink Mark Unread

Meeting with Marlana of the temple of Bestet, then. 

Permalink Mark Unread

...She's bringing the kid. The kid has been shadowing her for the last couple of days while she tries to make herself helpful to Urtho's people, and she's learning a lot. Which she's going to need, if she wants to go back to the River Kingdoms and, not just win a war, but make there stop being so many wars. 

 

(Also she's very easily bored and has clearly never respected the rules told to her by an adult in her entire life and this is not a situation where she needs to be running around getting into trouble.) 

She'll be very quiet and won't interrupt. 

Permalink Mark Unread

Ma'ar is very nervous about this, actually. He's not showing it in the slightest. In general it hasn't felt like the talks today called for the same kind of confident, invincible body language that goes over well in Predain, but here it seems appropriate. 

 

He puts up a dozen varieties of shield on the wall before nodding deeply to her. "Marlana, right?" 

Permalink Mark Unread

Ooooooooooooh shiny. He's SO good at magic. Maybe he'll agree to teach her how to do magic like that and then she can win wars with MAGIC instead of with doing a lot of figuring about where her troops are. (Marlana has been making her learn her numbers properly. She's picking it up very quickly but it's still boring.) 

 

...he's also pretty cute. For a man who's kind of old. He's probably not that old...? 

(Shayeen has rather recently begun to notice boys and now she can't stop.) 

Permalink Mark Unread

Mental cuff on the ear. <Down, girl. He's definitely too old for you. ...And he fancies Iomedae, but that's a secret.> 

Permalink Mark Unread

Oooooooooooooh shiny a secret. She's only very very slightly jealous that she obviously can't compete with Iomedae. 

 

 

(This is also perhaps not likely to remain that much of a secret for very long.) 

Permalink Mark Unread

Need was fully aware of that. This is going to be so entertaining. 

Permalink Mark Unread

All right. Focus. They can sit down, and they can talk, and this is a step toward his goals, and particularly importantly, it's a step toward figuring out how Iomedae can be safer. 

 

"First, I wanted to thank you," Ma'ar says to her. "...And Bestet, I suppose, but I have less idea how to thank Her directly. But I think Iomedae would not have survived without either of your help." 

Permalink Mark Unread

Nod. "It's - really something - when our prayers are heard. Not something I ever expected to happen to me, but - Iomedae's not like most people, is she." 

 

She bows her head. "Is she - what happened - is she going to be all right?" 

Permalink Mark Unread

"Yes."

Because if she isn't going to be all right, then Ma'ar will figure something out, no matter how hard it is. It's a lot easier to be confident in his ability to solve impossible problems while he's wearing the headband, but - it's magic, not politics. He was always good at solving impossible problems with magic. 

(He hasn't had a lot of time to think about next steps, the diplomacy is kind of all-encompassing, but he's already mused a little on his research with other planes. He's already done several impossible things. If there's any way to reach Iomedae's world through the other planes - and there must be, she got here somehow - then he thinks he and Urtho together can do it. Urtho's smarter than him, too, not by a huge margin but definitely smarter. Urtho with the headband and an interesting research project in front of him will be unstoppable.) 

He switches to Mindspeech, because he doesn't at all trust the discretion of the teenage girl watching them. :Eventually: he admits. :She was badly hurt, in a way her healing does not help with.:

Permalink Mark Unread

:Oh no: Marlana keeps her expression controlled, though. :I - does she want visitors?: 

Permalink Mark Unread

:...She does not remember recent events very well. She has been asking for her friends from home, not any of us. ...I think she knows how to endure this, and she would rather you work toward the peace.: 

Permalink Mark Unread

Nod. 

"Do I understand right that you're considering working with the temple of Bestet, in some capacity?" 

Permalink Mark Unread

Nod. 

"Our people have little trust in gods. And it seems many of them are - indeed not worthy of our trust - but not all. From what I know of your order's work, you are people who share goals I care about, and - separately, after what She did, I do not expect your Goddess to send you with divine orders to kill anyone important to me. ...It might be a better idea to work with the temple order of the Nameless God for the compulsions, they are - more pacifist, and more widely trusted - but we need allies." 

Permalink Mark Unread

"Of course." A brief smile. "Schools for girls? We can do schools for girls. I know Predain is a suspicious place, and you're not even wrong to be, but - might go over better than most things, showing up and offering to teach farmers' daughters to defend themselves." 

Permalink Mark Unread

...It's interesting what the headband does. He has a much better read on the woman than he would have expected to be able to pick up in a couple of minutes of conversation. 

 

Can they trust her? 

...Yes. He's not absolutely confident in that, but this also isn't a case where a huge amount of harm is done by asking, there's a secret but it's loosely held. 

 

He switches to Mindspeech again. 

:Iomedae needs allies. I am afraid she is still in danger. Her god is far away: Pause. :...They fought. The Star-Eyed and Aroden. Iomedae had been meeting with the shamans, and - I am not sure what the Star-Eyed tried to do but it nearly tore her mind apart. Aroden must have fought back. Iomedae thinks that He intended to kill the goddess, but - did not have a chance to finish. He sent Iomedae back with the power to heal me, I - would have died, otherwise - perhaps He could not do that and also kill a goddess at the same time: 

Permalink Mark Unread

:That does sound like a lot for even a god to handle. Especially from another world. ...So what are you planning?: 

Permalink Mark Unread

Ma'ar meets her eyes, steadily.

 

:To finish this peace treaty. To - help her to recover in any way I can, we have a Mindhealer with her now but there must be other things we could try. And then I want to work with Urtho on finding a way to travel to and from her world. So that she can haver her allies and friends with her, and so that Aroden can reach us more easily: 

Permalink Mark Unread

A brief huff of laughter between pinched lips. :You don't think small, do you. Honestly, I'm not sure what a simple goddess of war can do. Except fight other gods, maybe. And Iomedae is a woman in danger. Bestet doesn't like that: 

Permalink Mark Unread

Nod. :Could you pray to her? I am not sure that She would hear me, if I tried, and Iomedae is– I am not going to ask her to attempt it: 

Permalink Mark Unread

:Of course. - Oh, and I had another idea. I heard of a priestess with the temple of the Nameless God. She's a Mindhealer, and it's - there are at least rumors that she is sometimes a vessel for miracles. If you and Iomedae are willing to trust their temple and their god, then...that might be worth trying: 

Permalink Mark Unread

:Oh. 

 

 

- I - 

 

...I need to think about it. But. Thank you: 

Permalink Mark Unread

What are they taaaaaaaaaaaaaaaalking about. Shayeen is BORED and CURIOUS and she was supposed to be getting practice at diplomacy here. 

Permalink Mark Unread

They have some less secret matters to discuss out loud! Who in Predain needs to be on board with it before they can open any temple-schools under the church of Bestet. What kinds of worries they're likely to have, and how to assuage them. If Marlana is willing, they should definitely have Predain sent some visitors to see her own school. 

They're not going to be able to do it right away but it's a start. 

(Ma'ar was at no point visibly tense, or anything other than confident and in control, but he's noticeably happier, now.) 

Permalink Mark Unread

And does he still want to speak to a representative of the Nameless God, after this? 

Permalink Mark Unread

.....It's already evening and Ma'ar is actually getting pretty tired, even with the headband. But he doesn't think he's tired enough to be impaired. Yes. 

 

He wants to float the idea of a small order of priests within their temple, authorized to use compulsions only when it saves lives and gives criminals a chance to redeem themselves. (He's been reading up on their teachings.) If this is something they would be open to at all, here are so many notes on his ideas for implementing it. 

(Ma'ar has discovered that Iomedae's headband makes it ridiculously fast and easy, even enjoyable, to write up formal proposals for various things. It's not that he generally finds writing hard, but this particular subject matter is generally less appealing.) 

Permalink Mark Unread

High Priestess Thaliss thinks that this is, of course, a decision to be made carefully, discussed with the temple's leadership and then, probably, voted on by anyone involved in the temple in any capacity who wants to have a say. She's in agreement with Ma'ar that six months is a reasonable if optimistic timeline for that. They'll want to pray for guidance, though the Nameless God is unlikely to provide it if things will otherwise go basically fine. 

If they agree to it, the priest-enforcers should be trained in - a lot of things, not just compulsions. You could maybe get it down to a year, if you were taking candidates who were already apprentices, but it's going to be a very different kind of responsibility than being a village priest or the matron of a school or the leader of a monastery, and require correspondingly different skills. 

...They should have Iomedae's input. It was Iomedae's idea, and it sounds like her world has many more, and better, institutions of that type. And she is herself a religious leader. 

How...is Iomedae doing? Pretty much all Thaliss knows is that there was another assassination attempt and she's currently staying out of Predain and is not going to be involved in the peace talks. 

Permalink Mark Unread

Ma'ar likes this woman. He's not sure he would have without the headband, he might have been - too caught up in questioning her motives and second-guessing his read on her, rather than, at least given that he already had Iomedae's positive assessment, basically just confident in his judgement of her character. 

She's very, very, very Good, as they would call it in Iomedae's world. She's very - careful - not exactly along the lines Iomedae is careful, he wouldn't choose her to run a war effort or, honestly, a peace effort like this one. But she's careful about all of the ways that people can hurt each other, she's so aware of the balance of different considerations - there are clearly a lot of bright lines she won't cross, and it used to drive him wild when Urtho was like that, but - some part of him feels like she's earned it. 

(Part of it is that he doesn't think she would be indignant, or offended, if he started defending Predain's blood-magic policies to her. She would be sad, for the people dead and the people bearing that on their conscience, but she doesn't see the world in black and white. She wouldn't take that and decide that no one in Predain is the kind of person you can trust to show up at peace talks and negotiate in good faith.) 

She wants things to be better than they are now, and she's not going to be an idiot about it. There are a lot of side questions, and he's pretty sure there are a hundred arguments they could have over particulars, but at the core of it those are the only two things that matter. 

...at least, this is what his shoulder Iomedae thinks. Ma'ar without a headband would be so suspicious, and - there is, actually, a corner of Ma'ar right now which is terrified. 

Iomedae wouldn't be afraid. Iomedae is never afraid, and - that doesn't make her careless, like Ma'ar might have worried a lack of fear would, if anything it makes her more careful than he's ever managed to be. Because she's not flinching, not fighting desperately for safety and control, not - fundamentally assuming in some dark corner of her mind that no one can be trusted and anyone might try to kill her. She can just...look at a situation, and make an assessment, and do the math, and then commit to her decision. Including when that means trusting an ally who really hasn't proved themselves in completely watertight ways. 

(She trusts Ma'ar. She thinks he's the best person to be doing this. He - has some kind of feeling about that - but she gave him the headband and she was right, he's doing this, and it's partly because she entrusted it to him...) 

He thinks he likes Iomedae's way better, and he is at least moderately confident that it's what they need for the peace. 

 

 

That's an assessment of the people, not of their god. He knows rather little of the Nameless God of Eternal Flame. But it has to mean something, that Their temple is like this. And one of the things it does mean is that he really doubts there is any possible circumstance under which High Priestess Thaliss would drop a superweapon on Iomedae's head. Even if her god sent a divine vision that the world was in danger otherwise. He really doesn't see her crossing that line. 

 

 

 

He switches to Mindspeech. :I want this to stay secret, for her safety, but. She is - very unwell. I am afraid for her: 

Permalink Mark Unread

:Oh. 

 

 

...is there anything we can do - what happened...?: 

Permalink Mark Unread

Ma'ar explains, yet again, the little they know or can infer of what happened. 

Permalink Mark Unread

:That's awful. I'm so sorry: Does Ma'ar want a hug? 

Permalink Mark Unread

Permalink Mark Unread

....not the response he expected at all but Ma'ar would not turn down a hug. 

Permalink Mark Unread

Hug. 

:And I mean it. Is there anything we can do to help? ...I would offer to shelter her but I expect she's safer with your people, right now - I can pray, of course...: 

Permalink Mark Unread

This part IS terrifying. 

Iomedae wouldn't be scared. He reminds himself of that. Iomedae would anticipate that if she had judged it wrong, bad things might happen, but she wouldn't be scared. 

 

:I - the priestess of Bestet said that your temple order might have a Mindhealer? I don't - I need to think about it, and of course I need Iomedae's permission, but - if your temple would be willing...?: 

Permalink Mark Unread

:Of course. If she is not worsening, you should take the time to think about it. ...If you decide to try it, our god's power is greatest at the natural shrines. I don't expect you to trust that fully, of course, and these are such uncertain times - we do not normally allow guards with weapons, but - if she cannot defend herself... I think we could allow it this time. We should speak of it tomorrow: 

Permalink Mark Unread

They can speak tomorrow, yes. 

 

It's somehow nearly midnight. Ma'ar is exhausted. It's tempting to head over right away to ask Iomedae, but she's in fact not deteriorating, she's probably asleep, and if anything another night's rest will give her more time to get over the headache. 

He Gates back to the palace, heads to his quarters without actually swaying with fatigue in front of everyone, and collapses into bed. 

(Downside of headbands that make you mentally much stronger: it's apparently way easier to push the limits of your physical stamina. He thinks Iomedae might have an artifact for that, but he's pretty reluctant to take that one too.) 

 

 

At some point his past self arranged to not be needed for the first half of today's agenda. His past self had good ideas. Ma'ar is going to sleep through until late morning. 

And then head to see Iomedae. How is she? 

Permalink Mark Unread

The headache is not entirely gone. She is worried it might take a Heal to make the headache entirely gone. She still feels kind of fuzzy-headed, and also started crying at one point, which isn't dangerous but is profoundly uncharacteristic. 

 

She thinks being in bed is no longer doing her any favors and is discussing the matter with her Healers. She thinks she should chop firewood or something. Yes, she can do it with the magic sword. Magic weapons don't lose their edge even when used for chopping firewood.

Permalink Mark Unread

They don't...actually need any firewood chopped? They mostly use magical heating. It seems good for Iomedae to be up and moving if she feels up for it, though. They can take her for a walk. 

 

The Mindhealer is still pretty worried. The rate of things improving on their own is trailing off, he's already done most of the obvious fixes - which did help, look at her taking actions and starting conversations, but not enough, and there's still a lot of deeper structural damage that he has NO IDEA how to put back. 

Permalink Mark Unread

Iomedae is out of bed! She...looks mostly fine, physically, though she's still moving as though dazed. She's probably not going to let him read her mind when she's starting out awake, but it seems like she's with it enough to respond in deliberate Mindspeech. 

:Iomedae: He...sort of wants to offer her a hug, he's just discovered that hugs are reassuring, but also he thinks he doesn't want people touching him when he's feeling unwell in some way. He'll just sit fairly close beside her, and offer another very heavily simplified situation report on yesterday's progress: they have agreements on Predain's use of compulsions and blood-magic, and the tentative beginnings of alliances with the temple orders of Bestet and the Nameless God. The latter will be be willing to carry out Iomedae's idea, of having a neutral organization that can use compulsions to hold mages, and he thinks they'll do it well. They're likely to take six months thinking about it but Tantara won't object to Predain continuing its current practices in the interim. 

Permalink Mark Unread

:'s good.: Her Mindspeech doesn't usually have much in the way of overtones but right now it's warm and full of pride. :Really good, better than I think I expected.:

Permalink Mark Unread

He's just going to hug her, actually, unless she indicates that she doesn't want to be hugged, which he is unusually certain he would notice because of the headband. He is fairly sure that she at least won't be upset. 

:I - think I could only do it because you thought I could. ...Not sure if that makes any sense. I can try to explain later when you are better: 

He thinks he could explain it to healthy Iomedae with the headband just fine, but it's actually quite noticeable that Iomedae without the headband - and presumably with a lot of additional impairment - is a lot slower at juggling concepts than he is, and there are certain pathways she probably can't follow at all. He wants to talk about it mostly because it feels like it will help him put his head in order in a way that he can still work with once he gives the headband back. 

:- I might have a plan to help you get healing. But we would need to trust the Nameless God and Their church: 

Permalink Mark Unread

:'f Aroden has to bail me out again from trusting a god who turned out to be a demon lord He's going to be so annoyed.: She isn't making a strategic evaluation, here. She would need to think through what has gone wrong in Velgarth so far and change some rules she uses for decisions and she knows her brain isn't working well enough for that.

Permalink Mark Unread

:Mmm-hmm. I - think we can trust Them. I am more sure than that we can trust Their temple, and - They would be working through a mortal, there is a Mindhealer who sometimes gets miracles - I am not sure but I suspect it is at least harder for gods to make their followers do things against their will, and the church seems to teach - following one's conscience - much more than the Star-Eyed's religion: 

He's making some effort to go slowly and use simpler words but he's not particularly expecting Iomedae to actually have strategy thoughts, here, he just - feels better thinking about it when she's right there. 

:I asked Marlana to pray to Bestet for guidance. I think we do have strong reason to believe we can trust Bestet. She intervened for you with Need - twice, maybe, if She helped make sure that Shayeen would reach you before the shamans actually killed you. I think She would warn us if we were about to try something catastrophic: 

Sigh. :And I should ask to speak to their priestess-Mindhealer, before I agree to bring you. The headband helps with - assessing people's character - it is very useful. I am...nervous...it would mean going to one of the holy sites. I think I am not actually scared for a good reason, just - habit: 

Permalink Mark Unread

:I think we can trust Bestet: she agrees, after some effortful thought. :I think it is worth some risk. The other option is to get a church of Aroden here good enough he can choose priests, and give one of them Heal, which will fix me.:

Permalink Mark Unread

Ma'ar frowns. :I am not sure what Aroden would need, to do that. Or how to contact Him, honestly, and I - am very worried about you trying it again:

Sigh. :If we had a way to Gate to and from your world, we could bring you to His church there. I am planning to ask Urtho's help on researching how to Gate through the other planes. I think we can do it but it might take many months and I - I know you can survive that but I am worried about you: 

Permalink Mark Unread

:Oh, that'd be really good. Show them up, too, because I bet they're also doing a research project to derive Even Greater Teleport. And maybe we could put Urtho's terrifying talents to work on - I should not be planning good uses of Urtho's terrifying talents right now. 

I will also put myself together in time. You do not need to treat it as an emergency. I figured out how to be myself once and I can do it again.:

Permalink Mark Unread

:I know. And I can hold things together in the meantime, I think, I had your advice for long enough. I am not going to - make bad strategic decisions - because I want you to be all right. But I do very badly want you to be all right: 

Permalink Mark Unread

:I too am in favor of that. ...you did not really have my advice for very long, unless I am forgetting a lot.:

Permalink Mark Unread

:It was very dense advice! And I, I think sometimes all you need is to know that something could be different, and then you - ask different questions - and find better answers: Helpless shrug. :I think it would be hard to explain to you right now. I want you to be recovered so I can try and you can tell me what I am still missing. ...It is still definitely not an emergency, I - the headband helps, I think I would be incredibly overwhelmed otherwise but I can keep up. Even if I am trying to figure it out as I go by imagining what you would say: 

Permalink Mark Unread

She leans her head on him. :That's very sweet and I am too brain damaged to figure out if it's a bad idea to say so. 'm not pursuing a romantic relationship while impaired, obviously. I'm just not sure if that applies to saying that's very sweet or not.: After having said this she looks moderately surprised to have said it.

Permalink Mark Unread

Permalink Mark Unread

Ma'ar is more than just moderately surprised that she said it! 

 

...Probably he does not actually have to figure out what she meant or all the implications of it right now, and can just be calm and safe and definitely not make Iomedae explain what in the world that means to him. 

:I am not bothered you said it. I think you should not worry about whether or not things are a bad idea to say if it feels hard. I can account for you being impaired, and - everything else can wait.: 

He doesn't mind at all if she leans on him. For a bit. He does have things to do, and then a priestess to go talk to (aaaaaaaaaah) (but Iomedae wouldn't be scared). He can stay for five more minutes, though, and hold her, and mostly not say anything. 

Permalink Mark Unread

That sounds nice. She'll try trusting him and not worrying about it.

Permalink Mark Unread

This is also kind of overwhelming and almost frightening, but - all he has to do is be someone trustworthy. He can't be trustworthy in all ways but he can be someone who won't hurt Iomedae or let her make terrible decisions while brain damaged. 

 

 

...he really wants Iomedae who isn't brain damaged back. 

After five minutes he hugs her again and tells her to rest and try not to worry about anything and listen to the Mindhealer here, and then he Gates back to the agreed-upon location for the peace talks, where they can hammer out more details on the various agreements. 

Permalink Mark Unread

The temple of Vkandis under the current senior priesthood has managed to successfully locate the priests, and collaborate with one of the local governors in the Ceej Empire. Apparently the fact that they stole a powerful magical weapon, and tried to use it to assassinate the powerful priestess trying to set up peace talks with the country that had been, until days earlier, in the middle of conquering theirs – well, apparently this is a convincing reason for this particular governor for why he does not want these men in his province at ALL. 

 

The temple of Vkandis doesn't use compulsions but the provincial Guard of the Ceej Empire totally does and they have not actually made the decision to remove the compulsions keeping these mages from running away or trying to harm anyone. 

Permalink Mark Unread

Predain is fine with this temporary solution if Tantara is! They do still want some non-followers-of-Vkandis involved in guarding them. 

Permalink Mark Unread

Urtho is so tired. He really does not any more unexpected and terrifying complications right now. Tantara will agree that the mages in question can stay under their current compulsions until they negotiate something else. 

(Which, realistically, will probably be getting Predain's mages to do it. He can at least demand that they do it under the direct supervision of the temple of the Nameless God, but it feels less horrific - and, he can admit, leaves more option value for questioning them later if something else happens - than having them executed.) 

 

 

The Kaled'a'in have been at least temporarily expelled from the environs of his Tower. (Urtho is upset about this but it can go join the very long list of things he's upset about, which honestly starts with the fact that he betrayed Ma'ar.) The surviving shaman involved in the attempt against Iomedae has been pretty cooperative except for all of the time she spends crying. Urtho's people are...sort of starting to get the sense that she didn't know what either the Star-Eyed Goddess or her clan elder were planning to do, and to the extent she went along with it at all she was probably mostly in shock. 

Permalink Mark Unread

Sometimes gods aren't worthy of their people, and then sometimes things happen that are very, very hard to move on from. It won't even be the first time in their history that the temple of the Nameless God of Eternal Flame has taken in someone who felt betrayed by their previous god or their previous religious leaders (which can often be hard to distinguish.) 

They would be happy to take Ravenwing. Once they've come to an interim arrangement on compulsions, because they're not equipped to hold dangerous prisoners and there are other vulnerable people at all of the holy sanctuaries that would actually be good places for this. They can keep her out of trouble, and maybe help her find a way to heal. 

Permalink Mark Unread

The disadvantage of making that agreement is that several of his advisors will make a lot of faces about it. The advantage is that Ravenwing will stop being a baffling and terrifying problem on his plate. ...And maybe be okay. He does, actually, want her to be okay. He's known her since she was a child. 

 

They can hammer out an agreement on individually approved one-off use of compulsions by a handful of approved mages from Predain while being directly supervised by a mage from the church of the Nameless God. It might not even take the entire rest of the day. Predain is being very efficient about withdrawing their troops and this is doing a lot to ease the tensions. 

Permalink Mark Unread

They ARE being so efficient about it. It turns out that being suddenly significantly better at spatial reasoning is great for extremely optimized movement plans.

Permalink Mark Unread

That...was probably the last thing that needed to be fully sorted out before Urtho and Ma'ar can meet face to face and actually finish and sign their peace treaty? 

 

 

Which won't mean it's over, of course, or that all the damage is repaired. Urtho is pretty sure he'll feel less terrible about it, though. And also it will no longer be against the conditions of the ceasefire for Ma'ar to show up through unannounced Gates to solve problems. It's - taken him a while to settle on this - but Urtho is actually just going to be relieved once he knows that Ma'ar can and will rescue anyone important to the peace who needs rescuing. 

Permalink Mark Unread

He needs to actually pick mages and send them to the temple of the Nameless God, and Ma'ar is not at all sure that they're past the point when something could unexpectedly explode, but they can plan a time to meet tomorrow. 

He has a priestess to meet, after that. He's hoping they can move the other things along fast enough to get to that before midnight; he can still think just fine but he isn't not tired. 

 

 

(Ma'ar is slightly worried that he's going to run headfirst into some kind of very unpleasant emotional reckoning when all of this is over, where by 'over' he basically means 'Iomedae is healed and fine.' It's not the kind of emergency where you cut out sleep or push yourself to the point of backlash casting a hundred Gates in a day, but it's still a heightened state of alert, he's sleeping fine but he can't fully relax

...he's going to worry about that after this is, in fact, over. He spends an entire five minutes thinking about whether that's a mistake, it's definitely sometimes been a mistake in the past to put off taking a step back and doing processing about his recent decisions, but - he thinks he's okay, for right now. The headband is buying him a lot of slack.) 

Permalink Mark Unread

The priests of the Nameless God who are working with Predain and Tantara on this are aware that Ma'ar has a huge number of demands on his time, and will try their best to take up the bare minimum of it. 

Permalink Mark Unread

Ma'ar appreciates it. He appreciates them a lot, and it doesn't come naturally to be demonstrative about his gratitude but he will, actually, try to convey it. He's honored to be working with them. 

 

He's going to Mindspeak Thaliss privately and get her alone, because he still doesn't quite trust the entire rest of the senior priesthood knowing about their problem. 

Permalink Mark Unread

That's perfectly understandable. Thaliss was hoping he would come and so they arranged for their priestess-Mindhealer to be making a tour of the other holy sites, so he can meet her (privately, in a shielded room) without having to do another Gate. Gates are tiring and he must have had a long day. 

Permalink Mark Unread

Gates are quite a bit less tiring when one is both an unusually powerful Adept and also really, really good at them, but Ma'ar is still very appreciative.

He bows respectfully to the priestess, when he's ushered to the room with her. "Thank you for coming. I am Adept Kiyamvir Ma'ar - I am not sure if Thaliss explained -" 

Permalink Mark Unread

"Kariasha." The woman is younger than Ma'ar might have expected, maybe only in her mid-twenties. She's wearing simple linen robes, her thick coal-black hair pulled back in a tail. "She told me you were coming. She did not say why." 

:I do have Mindspeech, if you would rather use that. Matters for a Mindhealer are almost always private, and it sounds like this one is something of a state secret as well: 

Permalink Mark Unread

Ma'ar is going to raise extra privacy-shields anyway, but yes, after that he would still be more comfortable conversing in Mindspeech. 

 

...The Mindhealer is hard to read. She's very - level. His instincts aren't flagging any hostility but he's less sure than he would like that he would be able to tell.

- hopefully Bestet knows that if this is actually a terrible idea, now would be a very good time to warn him of that - 

 

 

...He'll explain their problem. Again. 

Permalink Mark Unread

She listens solemnly. 

 

:...It was brave of you to come: she says, when he's finished. :When you are so afraid of me, and of Them: 

Permalink Mark Unread

Is that really the most important priority to discuss right now. 

Ma'ar doesn't say this. He...nods, and tries and fails to think of anything else that would be a better idea to say. 

Permalink Mark Unread

She shifts her weight, leaning forward to prop her chin on her hands. 

:I kind of hate that I could make people trust me, if I wanted. I never do want to, that is not what trust is for, but it - still makes it feel hostile to ask for it, that I could: 

She looks steadily into his eyes. :I am certain I can ease her suffering. I am not sure if I can heal her, not in the sense of - making what happened be as though it never was. The Eternal Flame has come to me a few times, but it is really not at the times when you would think the stakes were highest. I think it would help her either way, to come to the holy sanctuary, it is in itself a place that eases pain. ...Knowing what I do of her, I think she would choose the risk, if it were her choice, but she would not be afraid. You are, and she entrusted the choice to you, and - I am not going to ask you to go against your conscience: 

Permalink Mark Unread

This conversation is so confusing, even with the headband. It doesn't quite feel like talking to a person, and - who knows, maybe he is in some sense talking to a fragment of a god. Maybe people are like that, when they've themselves been touched by a god enough times.

Iomedae might know what to make of it but he can't ask her. 

 

 

...if they could trust the Nameless God, even partially, they would have another ally here. This is not at all the sort of thing that one can count as evidence of the Nameless God's trustworthiness, it's just - wanting it to be true.

There are so many things Ma'ar wants to be true, and maybe he could trust his thinking more if it were unbiased, but the thing is, sometimes he wants things to be true and he makes them be. He's not nearly as good at it as Iomedae is but it's the thing that he's reaching for. 

 

He's so tired of being afraid and he probably COULD ask the Mindhealer to make him stop being afraid and also he absolutely shouldn't do that. 

Permalink Mark Unread

:Are there questions I can answer that would help? I could - I am not very good at this, usually people come here because they already follow and trust the Eternal Flame, and I should know why but I - it is at least hard to convey in words: 

Permalink Mark Unread

Ma'ar blinks. 

:Why do you trust your god?: 

Permalink Mark Unread

Kariasha takes a deep breath. 

:I am from a village a long way south of here. When I was a young woman, riders who worshipped Atet came to raid our village. My brothers were killed, my male cousins were killed, and my mother and sisters and female cousins were - taken. I was - I cried out to something, to whatever Power could hear me, and I am still not sure how I did it, how I knew where to step and when to hold still and could find the places to hide, but I escaped. I ran for a long time, and reached a temple. To the Nameless God of the Eternal Flame, which is fitting enough since I knew no name I was willing to cry out to. They took me in and Healed my wounds and told me some things of their god's teachings. But they could not help me ride out and fight to rescue my family, they were - this order does not do battle: 

She closes her eyes. 

:I - had a vision, I think, a dream, where I followed a spark and rode in alone. It ended when I reached the camp where my family was held captive. They were taking them to the Ceej Empire to sell as slaves. I - the vision did not actually show if I would succeed, or if I would die trying, but I had to try. I stole a knife from the kitchens and I rode out without telling anyone. I feel guilty about that, they would not have stopped me, just - looked sad - but I suppose I was not ready to bear that yet. I followed the path that the spark had showed me. 

 

- and I reached the camp and - there were children, among the bandits, I know they saw themselves as tough men but some were younger than me and my sisters, and I - it felt like I could only fix this one unbearable wound in the world by tearing open another, by taking other people's children away from them. ...I prayed to Eternal Flame that there could be a different way, and - suddenly everything was light and there were wings of fire in my mind... 

 

She makes a brief huff, half a snort, not quite a laugh. :And then I woke up in my mother's arms with an awful headache and literally no idea what had just happened, and they told me the bandits had let all of us go and left for no reason.

We went home, but nobody in the village looked at me the same, I was - strange, touched by a god - and also I kept almost doing things to people's heads by accident. So I came back to the temple and had to give some very awkward explanations and apologize for stealing the knife, and have my Gifts tested and then learn how to use Mindhealing the hard way: 

Permalink Mark Unread

It's such a baffling story! Is that the kind of thing that just happens sometimes??? 

 

It's not what he would do. It's not even what Iomedae, who's a lot more Good than he ever dared to aim for, would do. It's not calculated, it's not the most lives saved bought for the lowest price. It's not - legible and predictable and the kind of action that sets the precedents you want everyone to keep, Iomedae would probably not approve of mind-controlled an entire troop of bandits into freeing their prisoners. (Iomedae would solve this problem with a sword. Oh, she would try calm ultimatums and the cautious dance of negotiation concessions, she just wouldn't hesitate to use the sword if the negotiations predictably failed.) It's not destroying Evil, particularly, it may or may not have done anything to protect the next village over, it definitely didn't destroy the most evil possible at the lowest cost...

It's just - a little piece of Good, a little piece of something being better than the alternative, that spiraled outward. And even though gods swim in Foresight it can't possibly have been part of the plan that someday the girl who got a random miraculous Mindhealing Gift, when she pleaded with her god to give her a way not to kill the children, would heal Iomedae. But here they are. 

 

 

...or maybe it's a lie shaped to be as convincing to him as possible. (Are gods good at that? It really doesn't sound like Vkandis was, with Iomedae, and of course he has no idea what was actually discussed with the Star-Eyed Goddess, if they spoke.) 

He's so tired. 

Iomedae is also probably very tired of her brain not working. Which isn't a reason to rush, she said she can endure it and he believes her, it's mostly just a reason why he shouldn't whine about that. 

Permalink Mark Unread

Kariasha bows her head. :You do not need to decide, right now. It makes sense to be afraid. The world has been very cruel to your people, and someone you care about was just hurt very badly after taking the risk of trusting a god: 

Permalink Mark Unread

This feels like a Mindhealer-y conversation again and do they have to do this. 

 

(...He should flag that as a sign that there probably is some kind of unpleasant emotional reckoning to deal with but he's still going to try to schedule it, for a time that is not now.) 

Permalink Mark Unread

:You can take the night to consider it. Speak to Thaliss, she can tell you where to direct your Gate. I will set tomorrow aside: A crooked smile. :If you choose not to come, I am not going to complain about a day off, it has been a very busy year: 

Permalink Mark Unread

No wonder, her country has been at war. Ma'ar winces. (He could hide it but he doesn't. It feels more honest.) 

Permalink Mark Unread

Kariasha ducks her head. :I am not blaming you for it. Urtho attacked first, and speaking as someone who once stole a knife from a temple to the Eternal Flame so I could go protect my people, I cannot blame you at all. It must have been very awful for you, and it cost both of our peoples a great deal. Now it is nearly over, and that was your doing more than Urtho's, for which I am grateful: A slight shrug. :I just - I wish you had time to rest. If you do bring Iomedae here, I am going to tell her to make you: 

Permalink Mark Unread

What are you even supposed to say to that. 

 

Ma'ar thanks her politely for her willingness to help, while only half aware of what he's saying, and he speaks to Thaliss, and gets a location on a map and an image off Thoughtsensing and a more explicit agreement, in writing, of how many guards he can bring, and then he Gates back to the Citadel.

It's late again and Iomedae is hopefully asleep, and won't actually be annoyed if he tells her in the morning that he's made a decision and they're going. Ma'ar is tired but he's not quite sleepy, yet, so he's still going to go hover for a while. 

Permalink Mark Unread

Iomedae is asleep and doesn't mind anything.

Permalink Mark Unread

Ma'ar kind of wants to sleep here, especially if he's about to haul her off to the temple of a god he only probably trusts, but probably this is the sort of thing where Iomedae will be confused about whether or not it's a bad idea given that she's very impaired and they shouldn't have a romantic relationship. Ma'ar hasn't been in a lot of romantic relationships but he can still tell that sleeping beside someone (when it's not for reasons like 'they're both badly injured and he might need to unexpectedly Gate them out) is at least adjacent.

Normally he would be way less self-aware about this, probably, but the headband is making it hard not to notice things and now he's confused. Does he have romantic feelings? Kind of a lot of the things he wants are Iomedae-related but even with the headband-self-awareness he has no idea if he wants to kiss her...actually this is possibly a case where the headband-self-awareness is doing the opposite of help. 

Either way, this can definitely wait for later. Ideally when Iomedae is functional. 

 

 

 

He goes to bed, in his own bed. 

Permalink Mark Unread

He wakes up well before dawn, his heart rate faster than he would prefer. He lies awake for a little while, thinking. 

 

What's the actual range of possible outcomes, if he takes Iomedae to the sanctuary and asks Kariasha to heal her mind, with or without a divine miracle that she doesn't command?

The median case here is probably that Kariasha is a lovely person and tries very hard and they don't get a divine miracle, if only because miracles are presumably costly and they're very likely to be able to solve this eventually without one. The best case is that they do, and Iomedae is fine, and maybe Aroden has a god-ally in Velgarth and that makes it much cheaper for Him to finish murdering the Star-Eyed Goddess. 

The worst case is – what, that the Nameless God is also going to turn around and try to destroy Iomedae? It...feels really unlikely, on a gut level that Ma'ar can't fully unpick but he's been trusting his gut a lot, lately, and at least with the headband it hasn't let him down. But if it happens, then what? 

...Then Aroden will have to intervene again (and probably will be annoyed about it) and Iomedae will be - left much worse off than she is now, for sure, but it seems very unlikely that Aroden would give up on her, when He didn't the first time. And Urtho and Ma'ar will go research Gates, trading the headband back and forth, until they find a way back to Iomedae's world, and they'll bring whatever is left of her back to Aroden's church and the powerful magic of her god will fix her. 

It's possible that the Nameless God could intervene to stop them, or that another god could. But it's not obviously more likely, either that They'll try at all or that They'll succeed, if he takes Iomedae to the temple. He won't be making himself especially vulnerable; it's a place in the material plane where the Nameless God is a little bit more present, but it's not literally the spirit world where They live

 

- tragically this implies he shouldn't be around when Iomedae is being healed, but that was sort of already implied by the fact that he scheduled the competing commitment of peace talks with Urtho. 

 

Ma'ar sighs, and gets up and writes down every consideration he can think of, because whether it turns out to be the right or the wrong decision, someday he still wants to ask eventually-healed-Iomedae whether he was missing anything. 

Permalink Mark Unread

It's still not quite dawn - but probably past dawn further south, where the holy site is - he heads to Iomedae's room. 

Permalink Mark Unread

She's awake and talking with her Healers about their small children. People like talking about their small children and it doesn't strain her head to think about them.

Permalink Mark Unread

Iomedae is wonderful and Ma'ar appreciates her so much. Is that a romantic feeling still not a question he needs to answer right this moment. 

 

:I think we should go to the Mindhealer at the holy site of the Nameless God. I spoke to her and - liked her - not going to try to explain why when you are impaired. I think the case where it goes catastrophically wrong is very unlikely, probably still recoverable even if Aroden is annoyed with us, and - corresponds to worlds where we are likely to have problems even if we do not take you there: 

Quite probably hypothetical comparisons like that are too complicated for Iomedae right now but he can't read her mind, and - the operative thing is that she's decided to trust him, it just also seems to sometimes be reassuring if he makes it clear that he's tracking a lot of considerations. 

Permalink Mark Unread

She nods. :I should pray to Aroden first, in case it's cheaper for Him to look ahead and see a problem and tell us not to do it, but if He has no objection we'll go.:

 

And she closes her eyes and makes her intent clear in her mind.

Permalink Mark Unread

:I did also confirm that Marlana prayed to Bestet and has not been warned off, and - oh, I should alert Need and tell her where you are, in case she gets a pull that you need rescuing: 

He'll do that with Mindspeech - he tells her to get the location from Thaliss rather than say it over an insecure comms spell - and wait with her while she prays, and then raise a Gate - to a few minutes' walk outside the sanctuary, which it turns out is a lovely peaceful temperature rainforest. He waits ten seconds in case this is what shows up to Aroden or Bestet in Foresight as a problem. And then resists the urge to pick her up and carry her through, because Iomedae can actually walk fine right now. He offers his hand in case the Gate-crossing is disorienting for her. 

 

(It kind of is, not in a direct magically-damaging sense but just because it's a sudden and unusual change in her surroundings at a time when she isn't processing things very fast.) 

Permalink Mark Unread

Sure, she'll take his hand. 

Permalink Mark Unread

They need to walk through the forest for a few minutes. Ma'ar scried ahead, though, and picked a spot where there's a path. 

Permalink Mark Unread

And then they emerge onto the holy site of the Nameless God of Eternal Flame. 

 

It's incredibly beautiful. It's - not very Aroden-flavored, not very Axis-flavored, it's far more the sort of place you might find in Elysium. There's a path under a waterfall leading to a natural cave.

(The path is paved with flat, even stones, and there's a permanent mage-barrier to keep the mist from spraying it and getting it wet, so it's not slippery. The cave has a rough, unaltered ceiling of hanging crystallized-dripping-water rock formations, but the floor is smoothly finished. It has permanent mage-lights.) 

Permalink Mark Unread

Kariasha is waiting at the mouth of the cave to meet them. She nods to Ma'ar. Smiles at Iomedae. Doesn't say anything immediately. 

Permalink Mark Unread

Iomedae is enjoying the beauty of this place.

Permalink Mark Unread

There's a reason why, in Kariasha's opinion, it's good for people to be here when they need time to heal. "You can come in as well," she says to Ma'ar, and gestures for both of them to follow her inside. 

 

There are some other people inside, and a quiet murmur of conversation. An elderly woman in priestess' robes is teaching a lesson to some children between ages seven and eleven; some older children in what are probably apprentice robes are mopping the floor. A couple of young men are making breakfast. 

At the very back of the room is a fire. It's not in a fireplace; it seems to be coming directly out of a crack in the stone, and looks like a natural formation. (It's mostly natural. You still don't usually get leaks from underground reservoirs of flammable gas that are, one, safe, and two, last for decades, unless you're applying some magic to the problem.) 

There are several pieces of furniture somewhere between sofas and beds, with furs draped over them. 

:You can sit: Kariasha says to Iomedae, in Mindspeech since she doesn't speak the language. 

Permalink Mark Unread

...she'll sit. She can't feel nervous but she can feel - a lot of uncertainty over how good the next thing to happen is going to be..

Permalink Mark Unread

Ma'ar is very capable of feeling nervous! 

...He's not actually going to be late for his meeting-time with Urtho for another candlemark. And - there's an argument he should leave, minimize the risk to himself and thus make it more likely that if this does go wrong he can still work with Urtho to get a Gate to Iomedae's world and call on Aroden's aid. But there's also an argument that if he stays, and something does start to go wrong, he has a chance of getting Iomedae out of here. And then there's the third thing, which isn't actually an argument and is just that he doesn't want to leave her. 

Permalink Mark Unread

Kariasha smiles at him. :You can stay for a while if Iomedae wishes it: she includes Iomedae in the Mindspeech as well, :- and if you are not distracting. I need to put my mind in the right state to let the Nameless God in, or else I have a bad time about it afterward, though presumably not as bad a time as you did: 

Does Iomedae seem comfortable with Ma'ar staying for a while? 

Permalink Mark Unread

She already decided to trust him about being here at all! Of course he can stay! 

Permalink Mark Unread

:You can make yourself comfortable: Kariasha tells Iomedae. :In a position where you can see the fire, please, I am going to be rude and ask you to stay awake and stare at it for a while and try not to think of anything else. It helps me see better: 

Permalink Mark Unread

Ma'ar is trying very hard not to be visibly tense because it won't help and it might upset Iomedae. 

Permalink Mark Unread

She waits until Iomedae is comfortably positioned and following her instructions. 

:May I look?: 

Permalink Mark Unread

She experiences a rare and delightful kind of slight brief confusion, confusion because someone was being Lawful-or-Good-they're-both-only-elements-of-the-true-thing-anyway in a way she has not actually contemplated herself as a direction to stretch in, checking in the context of an entire interaction where they're supposed to Mindheal her if it's all right for them to start.

In this case she didn't contemplate this direction of the-true-thing because she doesn't have invasive mindscape-reading powers, but still. 

:Yes of course.:

Permalink Mark Unread

She looks for a long time without saying anything. Makes a couple of very thoughtful noises. 

 

:Someone: she sends eventually, :was very rude. Are you in much pain?: 

Permalink Mark Unread

:Only a little. It's been getting better. We're pretty sure it was the Star-Eyed goddess. I don't remember what she was trying to do.:

Permalink Mark Unread

:It looks like some stubborn dogs got into a game of tug-of-war over your mind: Kariasha's judgement is that Iomedae is not going to be squeamish about hearing her problem described, and Ma'ar might be but he can cope. :And one of them was being more rude than the other. Was the politer one the god you serve, do you think?: 

Permalink Mark Unread

:Yes. Well, I assume so. He's generally polite.:

Permalink Mark Unread

:I have to say, I would have some concerns about why you still serve Him if you told me He had done all of this to you: 

She sighs, slightly. :I am not sure if this a case where my god will choose to help. And either way I need to start the work myself. It looks like whoever you saw before had a Sight-metaphor that was good for detail work but not so much the deeper damage to the overall shape, and they may not have been strong enough anyway, I am - stronger than almost anyone. ...I want to try something. This is probably going to be unpleasant, I apologize for that, but try to think at me if the pain is too bad so I know to slow down: 

She is venturing a guess that Iomedae has an absurd pain tolerance, but she never takes that for granted, and for most people it helps to be in control of it. 

Permalink Mark Unread

Iomedae nods, and braces herself.

Permalink Mark Unread

Kariasha's village, when she was a small child, mostly didn't use writing. There were peddlers who came sometimes, with books alongside their cheap brass jewelry and other novelties, but paper was expensive and would get ruined in the damp. But they had good fiber for twine, from the inner pith of the tall rushes in the river and from the bark of some trees and from the tall flowering shrubs with fibrous stems, and twine could be made tight and strong and, usually hung from the rafters, last for years before the moths got at it. So the household accounts, and the records of births and deaths and marriages, and even some of their histories, were recorded in knotwork. 

And there were nets, and rope-baskets, and traps to weave out of lianas, in general Kariasha spent kind of a lot of her childhood making things out of rope and rope-like things, but it was the knotwork records that always captivated her. Kariasha remembers being a very small child and sitting, fascinated, in her mother's lap, watching her mother's clever hands move with perfect confidence, twist and knot and pull and tie off and twist again... 

 

 

She sees minds as knotwork, gorgeous and intricate and often physically impossible in their structure, but always something she can learn to decipher and understand. 

Iomedae's mind is almost more beautiful in its simplicity as in its detail. Its core is a loop of, not twine, but thick strong rope, made of silk so its surface is almost perfectly smooth, and somehow woven in place as a ring with no interruptions or weak spots, supporting a perfectly balanced circular swirl of knotwork patterns. 

Or it should be. 

Permalink Mark Unread

But Someone, and she knows Who now, tried very very hard to rip that unbreakable circle open. The Star-Eyed didn't succeed even in fraying its surface, Iomedae is not that fragile, but the ring at the center of her is very much pulled out of its normal shape. The mental force exerted - not just by Her, but by whatever her own god did, metaphorically, to pull her back to Him - must have been incredible, something a less stable and self-stabilizing mind couldn't have survived for an instant.

 

And her center is impossibly strong, but the rest isn't. Strings that should have been knotted together in complex patterns are torn apart; often the twine itself is half-unraveled. That part of the damage isn't worsening, everything where a piece was torn off entirely and left a disintegrating half-twine has been tied off so it can't fall apart any further. There must at the start have been fiber-dust and fragments everywhere, like the haze in the air in summer when the trees with fluffy seedpods open them, but that has at least been cleaned up. There are also signs of...things that aren't rope, sticky tree-sap and slimy residue, but that too has been mostly very painstakingly scraped off.

Iomedae's mind is trying to repair itself, some of the knotwork is recently retied and wasn't done from the outside, but she's reached a limit. With the center out of alignment, a number of places that should be able to touch and retie the pattern are instead way too far apart. Bits of Iomedae that aren't quite shredded entirely have nonetheless been flung in all directions, including directions that don't exist, and they're staying in those disrupted positions, drifting slowly if at all, as though the whole structure is weightless or underwater. (That part is normal, the Mindhealing Sight-metaphor doesn't especially bother to include gravity, you just don't normally see it exploded like that.) 

 

 

The central ring is, not rigid, but stiff, like heavy riverboat-ropes impregnated with wax to be waterproof. It's going to be really annoying to get it into an actually circular shape again. Ugh. 

Permalink Mark Unread

:Look at the flame: she says again, and waits until almost nothing is moving, at least, and then...push, with undirected Mindhealing-energy, mostly aimed at the central area but it's not very tightly targeted and she's not trying to move anything yet, just loosen it. 

 

 

...it is not softening. 

She pushes harder. Not like the warmth of a hot sun, but like the heat rising from a blacksmith's forge. 

Permalink Mark Unread

To Iomedae: it isn't actually painful, and it doesn't have the same awful not-pain quality of when the Star-Eyed tried to peel her apart, but it is VERY VERY INTENSE. Her senses mostly stop working; the world explodes into rainbow shards that melt and drip, she can taste the sound of the fire crackling, it is completely unclear what's going on with her proprioception but it feels like she might be...a field, or a river, or something that isn't a human body at all. 

 

Kariasha is paying so much attention to any of Iomedae's surface thoughts that she tries to push out past her shields, and if there is any internal screaming she'll ease off. A bit. 

Permalink Mark Unread

She DOES NOT LIKE THIS AND SHE IS TRYING VERY HARD TO REMEMBER THAT SHE THOUGHT IT WAS A GOOD IDEA

Permalink Mark Unread

...That indeed looks like probably Mindhealing and not a murder attempt. 

 

Ma'ar did not actually think to check with the Mindhealer whether it was okay to touch Iomedae or talk to her while this was happening, so he's going to sit here on the other sofa-thing being very stressed. 

Permalink Mark Unread

It lasts about fifty seconds, which to Iomedae is going to feel like a very long time, and then Kariasha eases off. Not all the way, she keeps it up just enough to keep things malleable. She gives Iomedae five seconds to slightly reorient before expecting her to process language. 

(Iomedae is going to notice that, one, the actual pain of the headache is gone, but two, she feels like she's floating in the liquid that everything in the room has turned into, and also - a feeling sort of like when your leg has fallen asleep and it doesn't hurt yet but it's numb and its ability to support your weight is dubious and if you try to get up and run you're going to end up falling on her face. Except the feeling is in her mind, and it's her - ability to try to do things, more or less.) 

 

:Are you hurting?: Kariasha asks, because this is the important question and Iomedae is obviously not go to answer 'yes' to 'are you okay'. 

Permalink Mark Unread

 

 

:...no.: She does not sound super appreciative.

Permalink Mark Unread

Kariasha would absolutely not expect her to be appreciative. 

:I can make you unconscious for this if you prefer. It should not be painful exactly but it is going to be at least as disorienting as the last part, for at least a few minutes. If you can bear it I would rather have you awake, so you can tell me if it does hurt: 

She says it very slowly and then waits patiently for an answer. Iomedae should already be less impaired in specifically the way where a god left fiber-dust residue all over, maximum strength Mindhealing is a great way to burn that off, but she's going to be differently impaired right now.  

Permalink Mark Unread

Mostly she just doesn't feel very equipped to make these decisions. She's flagged herself as not trustworthy and she isn't in ongoing distress about that but it's not a state from which she's decisive. 

 

:I can tell you if it hurts.:

Permalink Mark Unread

All right. Time to - 

- PUT.

THAT.

BACK. 

 

(Kariasha is not actually sure she can do that. She's exceptionally strong, but the force that shoved it that way in the first place was not just one but two literal gods. She is exceptionally sure that if two literal gods didn't even fray it, nothing she could do even if she were trying could cause any real harm to the visual-metaphor equivalent of Iomedae's core motivation structure.) 

Permalink Mark Unread

The displaced not-waxed not-rope moves. A little. She's having to put in a lot of effort. 

 

 

It has a lot of the same quality where most of Iomedae's sense are coming apart into random synesthetic noise. There's also a deeply-unnerving sense of...things moving, that shouldn't do that. 

...What it doesn't feel like is being torn apart. If anything it feels like being pushed back together - like there are edges and corners of her that were completely out of reach, and are now only mostly out of reach, and she could probably strain and reach for them if it felt less like everything in her mind was half-liquid. 

Permalink Mark Unread

Okay. It's okay. This is - not hostile. She trusts the Nameless flame, and she trusts this woman, and Ma'ar is here, and Aroden won't let anything happen to her.

Permalink Mark Unread

It's a lot of effort but Kariasha gets about a third of the circle back into a circular instead of a weirdly squashed shape. And then - there's - something - in - the - way - 

 

- she doesn't try to call out to the Eternal Flame. That never works. The thing that works is a mental move that's hard to describe but that she calls 'getting herself out of the way.' 

There is no Kariasha. There's only a perfect loop of thick unbreakable rope encased in half-melted wax, and that rope is a person who matters who should be all of herself and it's not right that she isn't and it has to go back

Permalink Mark Unread

That does look like something that could be better. 

 

Lots of things could be better. The world is full of sparks that are mortal souls, and usually it's by far simplest to just swirl the patterns of them in eddies, there are so many mortals who will do so many things if they're close enough and they have air, and they're so much closer to each other, usually that's a better angle... 

This looks very very difficult to set right from the angle that the other sparks can reach. Also it's an exceptionally bright spark, which is interesting. The god of eternal flame has been paying some corner of attention to the very bright spark for - it isn't exactly an interval of time, in Foresight, but either way it's more salient. 

 

It's difficult to do things with sparks and it's going to make all the other eddies noisier but... 

Permalink Mark Unread

Iomedae is no longer in the cave. 

It doesn't feel like she abruptly shifted location. It feels more like she's been here, wherever here is, for an indefinite time, and was daydreaming about a cave and a flame and Ma'ar and unpleasant things happening to her senses, and then she blinked and remembered where she actually was. If anything it's the opposite of disorienting. 

 

Where she is: does not really have any features. It's foggy and bright at the same time, bathed in warm light that comes from nowhere in particular. 

It feels like she hasn't been using her head to have any thoughts, but at least at this moment it feels perfectly clear. 

Permalink Mark Unread

Hopefully this helps! The Nameless God can also communicate with sparks but it's difficult, it buffets them around and this spark probably needs less rather than more of that. 

Permalink Mark Unread

 

What?

 

 

Her mind does feel clear, though.

 

Okay. 

This is another god intervention. A friendly one; it isn't even hurting. It's just - giving her a place, where she can think, and where she can probably reconstruct the damage so that when she's back in the damaged mind she knows which parts of her can be relied on.

Thank you, she prays briefly, and then starts trying to pace through all her thoughts and memories to figure out how bad the damage is and how it can be introspectively identified if she can trust herself to do that. 

 

 

Permalink Mark Unread

It's confusing to explore! 

 

For one, it's hard to access most of her memories, except some very core ones - she can remember Aroden just fine. It's as though the part of her that thinks, the thread of moment-to-moment consciousness, is entirely here, and - entirely not impaired, her emotions are level and she can hold onto as many complex thoughts at once as she could when she wasn't brain-damaged and was wearing her the headband - but, unless she does some kind of other motion, a lot of the content of what she's trying to look at feels like it isn't, quite, here. 

She can find it, with a specific effort of will, but it's a lot more like looking at it than like experiencing it. The her that's looking isn't pulled in. 

 

That being said: her mind is a mess! Her core motivation is...off, not exactly weakened but somehow not quite lined up...that might actually just be the not-trusting-herself thing, undamaged-Iomedae is very much a person who takes actions to solve her problems and damaged-Iomedae doesn't risk it. 

A lot of her habitual thought patterns, around orienting to new situations and forming assessments of people and laying out considerations for an against a plan, are there but randomly hard to get to from a lot of the usual angles, the mental pattern of 'if this happens, pull up this mode of thinking' disrupted. Her emotional regulation is a mess, though somewhat less of a disastrous one in practice since she continues to be incapable of fear. 

A bunch of her memories, particularly of recent days in Velgarth, are still just missing. Her interpretation of events seems to be better retained than the actual events; she can draw on names and faces and character assessment of Ma'ar, of Urtho, of Marlana and Thaliss and the priest of Vkandis, even though she is having a very hard time tracking down memories of specific conversations. 

 

...weirdly, she can remember the conversation with Aroden, insofar as it can be called that when it was mostly not-very-human-legible godconcepts, significantly better here. It's - pretty clearly not stored in a way that would be easy to get to from normal modes of thinking - but here it's no harder to get to than anything else. She even has enough mental capacity to unpack the godconcepts rather more than she usually could. 

Permalink Mark Unread

Oh, that's useful. 

 

She doesn't want to start trusting herself unless the person that would be doing that is trustworthy. Is she? Did any of the pulling out of shape interfere with her ability to have it actually be a good idea to try to ambitiously fix things?

Permalink Mark Unread

It depends how much she needs to trust? 

 

She absolutely can't trust that she would remember a specific event that happened, or a specific fact she knew before, and a lot of that lost information is probably important for planning purposes. She definitely can't trust her current emotional reactions to things to be ones she would endorse as useful. Enough of her minute-to-minute reasoning habits are disrupted that she probably can't trust herself to make quick judgement calls correctly, or decide on a tradeoff based on an intuitive sense of the better option rather than by explicitly reasoning through it, and her explicit reasoning is going to be slower because there are a lot of holes to fall into. She should almost certainly not be getting into fights that involve relying on her reflexes, that's actually more intact than memory - it's deeper - but falling into an unexpected pit would be pretty bad. 

It doesn't seem like she's missing the key elements for self-awareness of this, for having a calibrated sense of what she can and can't try and expect to have it work. And from this angle, at least, it doesn't feel like the things she wants, or how deeply she wants them, have changed at all. 

Permalink Mark Unread

Like being a teenager all over again. She had all the principles, and was missing a lot of details of execution. But it's different than being untrustworthy to herself. 

 

She looks at it closely until it feels like it all makes sense, until it feels obvious where all the errors are.

Permalink Mark Unread

She is not particularly running within normal time here. She can spend as long as she wants thinking. 

 

If and when she's done, there is also an obvious mental motion to go back. A lot more obvious than what she had to do to extract herself from the Moonpaths. This place feels - friendlier, in general, like it's meant for her to be safe here. 

Permalink Mark Unread

She's very grateful. She doesn't think that the nameless flame wants repayment, exactly, but she'll remember the kindness, and have it be part of her, which is to her a form of repayment and to the nameless flame is hopefully something it recognizes and wants.

Permalink Mark Unread

It looks like something is indeed better than it could have been, now, and it wasn't very expensive. 

 

(It was much more obvious once the spark was apart from the others, that there's a thread of - something, not a mortal life but a god's influence - stretching to somewhere very far away. That's intriguing But it would be expensive to follow, and to the Nameless God, swimming in Foresight, it doesn't look especially better than just waiting.) 

Permalink Mark Unread

There was an impossible weight of resistance and then there were wings of flame in her head, and now she has a headache and her Sight is full of metaphorical afterimages like she stared too directly at the sun. Great. 

...Iomedae's mind is back in the right shape, at least the center of it, and that's brought a lot more parts back into positions where a lot of it is likely to heal on its own in time, which takes a lot longer and is more work for the patient but certainly less work for the Mindhealer. 

 

:How are you feeling?: she manages. 

Permalink Mark Unread

Iomedae doesn't have a headache. She's very very tired, but that seems to be the main source of fogginess. She feels...like herself, mostly, her thoughts are still slow and effortful but she can have them and they're definitely hers. 

Permalink Mark Unread

:I think your goddess intervened, to let me see the damage clearly so I could know - what I could put weight on. 

 

Thank you.:

Permalink Mark Unread

:...Good. Very good. ...I think - I would recommend you stay here for a time. You will be safe here, and you need to rest, Mindhealing is exhausting and I pushed you very hard and having miracle happen to you is even more exhausting than that. ...You are very strong. But I would still prefer to monitor you for a day or two. I will of course not stop you if you would rather leave immediately: 

Permalink Mark Unread

Ma'ar will get Iomedae out of here immediately if she gives any indication of wanting to leave, but for the moment he's going to wait until Iomedae stirs, and then pull her into his arms and hug her very tightly. That was only maybe five minutes but it was an incredibly stressful five minutes - he didn't think they were trying to harm her, Mindhealing just is unpleasant, but she was so clearly in distress and he wasn't sure. 

Permalink Mark Unread

She leans into him and tries to find her thoughts. :The peace?:

Permalink Mark Unread

:I am meeting with Urtho in - about a candlemark, I suppose, I will have to go soon. We are not - done - with everything we need to negotiate an agreement on, but I think we have enough of the pieces that - if nothing goes wrong, but I feel fairly on top of all the things that might have gone wrong - we can probably finalize a peace treaty today: 

Permalink Mark Unread

:That is very good news.:

Permalink Mark Unread

Squeeze. :I hope so. I - wish we had done it sooner - but at least there is still enough left that we can repair it:  He sighs. :I am nervous about seeing Urtho again but - I think I am looking forward to it as well. It keeps feeling as though - I would expect to be angry but I am not, actually. I think he was - approaching it badly, in how and what he communicated to me, but I was being stupid too, and he was trying his best: 

Permalink Mark Unread

:It is a hard mistake to anticipate when you haven't made it before, or seen people make it. On both of your sides, I'd expect. 

You want peace agreements to be overcommunicated and to specify lots of things that seem obvious, you want to actively think about the most obnoxious anti-Tantaran person you know and how they'd try to get around the agreement to hurt their enemies, you want to imagine what it'll look like from your end if the other side has the same thing going. And you want to not walk away from the table hating each other; that matters, too, for how things shape up in the long run. Tantara's goodwill is worth a lot to Predain.:

Permalink Mark Unread

:Mmm. I think I have been doing better on overcommunicating everything, in general - I am definitely cheating with the headband - but I definitely need to make sure everything is specified just as clearly in the actual treaty - I have a draft but I left a number of clauses blank or unfinished because I want Urtho to feel that he has equal input to me. I think it would be easy to make him feel by accident like I am making all of the decisions for him, I - am just a lot faster at writing things up with the headband: 

(He's also cheating as hard as he can in other ways, for example by tracking down some merchants who had diplomatic connections in the kingdoms south and west of the Ceej Empire and sending them to go ask for copies of past peace treaties. ...He's not sure why he never tried doing things like that before. ...Possibly because under any other circumstances he would not possibly have time, or energy, to pick through old documents with his rusty knowledge of the Ceej Empire main trade-tongue, but he's also pretty sure he wouldn't have thought of the option at all.) 

Permalink Mark Unread

:I'd offer to get you one of your own once we make contact with Golarion but it's actually the only one of its kind on the planet. When it's on the planet.: It was commissioned for an unfathomable amount of money, from the one person in the world who could do it, by Taldor on the condition that it'd be the emperor's once the crusade was over.

If it improves the emperor a tenth as much as it's done for Ma'ar she would give it to him before the crusade's over, but somehow she suspects it won't.

Permalink Mark Unread

He leans against her. :I am not surprised, it is a spectacularly impressive artifact. I will manage. It helps for - improvising, when I have no existing habits and cannot even ask your advice, and getting it right, or...at least right enough...on the first try. But in the long run I just need to have the right habits, I think. And I hope that once I return it to you I will have your advice again: 

Permalink Mark Unread

:Of course. Rather more of it, even, once it's peace and we can just talk about things.:

Permalink Mark Unread

:...I would like that.: 

And now continues to not be a good time to talk about Ma'ar's weird and confusing feelings that may or may not be romantic and may or may not be a good idea regardless of how impaired Iomedae is, which - right now he's pretty sure is still 'a lot.' 

:Do you need anything? Before I go?:

Permalink Mark Unread

:Do you have those notes on a timeline of what happened when since I arrived?:

Permalink Mark Unread

:Not with me, and not finished - I was reluctant to nag Urtho to write down all of his interactions with you, I think he already lacks the energy to keep up with his workload: (and unlike Ma'ar he is not possessed of a headband that lets him keep track of fifty priorities at once almost effortlessly task-switch to make use of every spare moment, that in particular isn't a critical skill it just lets him get more things done faster but he is nonetheless going to miss it SO MUCH) :but I can have someone bring over what I do have: 

Permalink Mark Unread

:I think it'd be useful. The god intervention wasn't very good for putting specific details back together.:

Permalink Mark Unread

:Mmm. What - actually happened?: 

Permalink Mark Unread

:A good question! It was as if I was - outside of time, and safe, and had myself, and could look and see and - check if I could trust myself or not, from a lot of different angles -:

Permalink Mark Unread

:...Fascinating. That does sound incredibly useful. I - had no idea it was the kind of thing a god could do.: 

Permalink Mark Unread

:It's not a kind of miracle I'd heard of at home, either, but I think there are some different constraints on intervention here. I'm very glad we have allies among the gods; some of them seem very dangerous and willing to move quite openly about it.:

Permalink Mark Unread

Ma'ar shivers. :I think I am glad to know, at least. I - had not been including as a consideration, for my work in Predain, that the gods will apparently sometimes send priests with superweapons after you if they dislike what you are doing for mysterious god-reasons. And it is helpful to know that maybe we have allies among Them too: 

 

He closes his eyes. :There are so many things I - had no idea of, and was not even aware I was missing. It makes it– I am not going to stop trying to fix things but I am much less sure it will work: 

Permalink Mark Unread

:Aroden spent thousands of years looking before He was satisfied He hadn't missed anything and didn't have a better plan than ascending.:

Permalink Mark Unread

:...He must have been very patient. It - sounds hard - to wait and watch there keep being problems that you could solve if you moved faster: 

Permalink Mark Unread

:Most important things are hard, I think. And many of them involve witnessing terrible things it would be inefficient to oppose.:

Permalink Mark Unread

:That makes sense: Sigh. :I....

 

 

- at least I am not going to be doing it alone. That - means a great deal to me. I would like to find a way to repay it.: 

Permalink Mark Unread

:If you'd like. But payments are for - things you value that your counterparty doesn't, or not as highly, and I'm not actually sure what those are, between you and I.:

Permalink Mark Unread

:Maybe: Ma'ar doesn't know how to think about that, and - for some very confusing reason it's an upsetting thought, a feeling like being on abruptly unstable ground, to notice that he's still confused about Iomedae even now. 

Emotional reckoning continues to be scheduled for later. :I need to go prepare for speaking to Urtho. I will have someone bring you my notes on the timeline, and - we should speak again later: 

Permalink Mark Unread

:Of course.: She misses the headband for the first time, at his disconcerted expression. Usually people find it comforting to realize that they're not repaying favors which in wartime rapidly grow too large to substantially repay but just lending their strength to their and their friends' common cause, and there are lots of reasons one might not feel that way about it but she doesn't know which one applies.

Permalink Mark Unread

(Ma'ar also doesn't know which one it is. He's pretty sure he could figure it out - with the headband, he can even see what thought-paths he might want to follow and what nameless feelings he might want to tug into the light - but it's not a good time, and his enhanced self-awareness seems to agree that it's not urgent. It's not the kind of bottomless pit of uncertainty that risks leaving him abruptly unable to make himself do things, and it's also unlikely to lead to any gaping blind spots in his tactical judgement. He can wait. He expects it to feel a lot - safer, to have that conversation, once Iomedae once again feels to his hindbrain like she's invincible and unbreakable and can do anything.

...the headband-self-awareness is going to poke him about that, too, but it can go on the list for later too.) 

 

He hugs Iomedae again, and thanks Kariasha very warmly, and respectfully leaves the cave-sanctuary before Gating out. 

Permalink Mark Unread

Kariasha gives Iomedae a couple of minutes, and then brings her some sweet tea. 

:Is there anything you want to talk about? You do not have to - you do not have to agree to me doing anything else to your head, either, even if you stay a day or two - but I am here if you do: 

Permalink Mark Unread

She suspects that'd be very valuable once she has her notes but she doesn't want to do policy-setting, where she evaluates the rules she was using for decisionmaking and how they worked out and if there are different rules that would have worked better, until she can reconstruct what happened. They can talk about other things if Kariasha would like but that's the main processing ahead of her. 

Permalink Mark Unread

Kariasha will engage in light conversation with her about the temple order's work here, then, and stop when she seems tired. Mindhealing is generally intensely exhausting and she doesn't expect having vastly more life-force than normal people to help Iomedae with that as much as it helps her with standard Healing-fatigue. Iomedae can also take a nap, if she wants. 

Permalink Mark Unread

Probably a good idea, after a little while.

Permalink Mark Unread

Ma'ar manages to arrange to have the notes delivered within a couple of candlemarks, the holdup being that he didn't really want to give the location to one of his mages while the peace treaty isn't yet finalized, and so just had someone bring them from his office in the Citadel to the peace talks location and then handed the notes to Thaliss, who then had to arrange a Gate separately. 

 

It's a thick package. He's written down his own recollection of every interaction they had, which with the memory-reconstruction-boost of the headband is nearly word-perfect except for the period when he was badly injured. (There, he mostly remembers his own reactions rather than what Iomedae said, but he wrote it down for her anyway in case that still helps.) 

Apart from that, he has notes on his indirect guesses, based on spying and from later conversations with Tantara's people during the treaty negotiations, on everything she did while she was in Tantara. He's sketched out a calendar of when she probably met with who, underlining the conversations with various god-representatives since those were presumably especially important. He interviewed Marlana on her meetings with Iomedae and noted down what she said they talked about, but hasn't had a chance to ask Thaliss and does not really intend to personally interview the surviving shaman or the mages who worship Vkandis. 

Permalink Mark Unread

The main policy she intends to reconsider, she tells the priestess after she's napped and read all the documents, is the one about - trusting unvetted prospective-allies she has reason to be suspicious of. It's the policy that led her to let Ma'ar go when he warned her about Sheiknam, and that led her to meet with the representatives of Bastet and the Nameless Flame and Vkandis and the Star-Eyed Goddess. It nearly got her killed, obviously. It is also the reason the priests of Vkandis were able to warn her about the superweapon and she could be far away when they dropped it. You can craft detailed policies that get one of those right but not the other, but - she suspects that doing this is in some sense cheating, trying to use prophecy rather than describe a policy that'd work in the next world she was dropped on. But on the other hand, cooperating with the Star-Eyed was ludicrously costly and it'd be very surprising if it weren't in fact a mistake. 

 

This would of course be much easier if she remembered how she'd made the decision to go see the Star-Eyed, but she can guess, because she does know her current decision procedures for that sort of thing, and she knows where precisely she would have done something different if she'd been following a different rule. (Often, that's the hard part.) 

Permalink Mark Unread

Kariasha listens to all of this, thoughtfully. 

:It seems to me that you are - used to being one of the most powerful mortals in your world, with a god who can protect you from the dangers of other gods. And because of that, you can afford to take risks where the upside is - more cooperation, more people working together to help each other. I think we both agree that is important, and beautiful, and a way the world can have more good in it than otherwise. ...Also it seems to me like you were reasoning that your death would not be especially costly to you personally or your allies back home, though it might lead to many deaths here: 

She frowns. :I am - not sure you were entirely wrong. But it does seem like what happened with the Star-Eyed Goddess was much more costly to you and to Aroden than if you had simply been killed, and I - am not sure if it was one of the kinds of danger you were weighing: 

Permalink Mark Unread

:I don't know. I wish I did. I suspect not? I would not have guessed it would have been either possible or - obvious as a thing to do - She could've killed me, I'm sure I'd accounted for that risk, but -

- I don't in fact understand why it was to Her advantage to do this instead.:

Permalink Mark Unread

Kariasha makes a soft huff that could be a snort, not of laughter but of something darker.

:It seems it did not actually work out to Her advantage. So - maybe even gods can be wrong and make mistakes, if other worlds are involved? ...Maybe she wanted to keep your soul, if She saw that simply killing you would just mean that Aroden's church brought you back and eventually figured out how to intervene here again, and maybe it would have worked if Aroden had not expended the effort to stop it: 

Sigh. :I am not sure I exactly have the feeling that She would spend that effort for Her own people: 

Permalink Mark Unread

:To be fair neither would Aroden, for most of His, He couldn't afford to. But also He's lawful and not using us against our interests, and She - very much isn't, as I can tell.:

Permalink Mark Unread

:...I would be curious to hear more of what you mean by Lawful, there. It - seems important - and I am not sure it matches to anything in our temple's teachings: 

Permalink Mark Unread

She can attempt to explain. There are a lot of accounts of Law, and most of them are imperfect in varying ways, but the key thing is that Law is a thing for aliens and for enemies, the core of it doesn't depend on general goodwill-towards-the-other or the preference not to harm the other too much and it fact it works even when you prefer to harm the enemy as much as possible. Law is about making sure that it's possible to do better than outcomes no one wants, making sure that there's more tradeoffs and fewer tragedies.

She's not sure Vkandis cared at all whether the superweapon killed everyone in a fifty mile radius; when she swore to spend some time vulnerable and away from everyone, she was ensuring he could see in Foresight that he would lose nothing by ordering her attacked during those hours, because she didn't want to rely on his willingness to trade anything for that outcome. She doesn't know if He was Himself being lawful, she suspects not, but gods can see Law, because a lot of it is about predictable regularities in your conduct, and it was her study of Law that made that response obvious from her perspective; Good would have inspired her to flee to a depopulated area, but Law inspired her to commit to doing that and not taking addiitional precautions there  - or maybe you could get that just with Good if you knew Vkandis was a god and could see ahead in prophecy, but Law works among entities that have imperfect prophecy, and in a sense all intelligent beings have imperfect prophecy. 

Permalink Mark Unread

Kariasha listens closely. And then thinks for a while. 

 

:It sounds like - a way to be clear to the gods, who see us only from a distance in Foresight, but - maybe also to be clear to other mortals, in all the usual mortal ways? Where even if people cannot trust each other, they can still - make agreements with an enemy, and expect their enemy to keep it because the alternative is worse for both of them?: She tilts her head. :My sense of Ma'ar is that he wants this very badly, and has been searching for it his whole life, and - found little of it, even in places where people were trying to be good to one another. Until he met you, and he would love you very much for that, if you let him:

 

- she cuts herself off. Makes a face. :- Also I have barely met the man and you might prefer not to have this conversation at all. I - sometimes I just say things like that. It seems to come of having had a god in my head so many times: 

Permalink Mark Unread

:Need also pointed it out. I think I do want him, but once I'm sure I'm back to ordinary function and have vetted him more thoroughly. I haven't actually known him for very long and sometimes you fall in love with people and : you come to suspect they're pursuing lichdom :they turn out to have a lot going on.:

Permalink Mark Unread

Kariasha isn't reading Iomedae's mind and wouldn't even if her shields were less utterly impregnable, and so has no way of picking up on that aside. :That makes sense, and I think it would be wiser to consider it once he has returned the headband that empower's one's thinking. I doubt he would mind - I think he would prefer it, actually, he - feels badly about having important conversations where he thinks too much faster and more clearly than you: 

Her lips twitch. :Though my guess - this part is not as a Mindhealer touched by a god, just, I have met men in his position - if you decide to speak with him about it, and you want him to have any emotional awareness at all, it will probably go better if you let him have the headband for that part: 

Permalink Mark Unread

:I will take your advice on it, I haven't actually attempted many romantic assignations. I would mostly have wanted the Wisdom, to counter the thing where it's harder to consider whether you should kill someone if you're in love with them.:

Permalink Mark Unread

:...I have to say that is not a problem I have had. ...In fairness I have had zero romantic assignations and you ought probably take my advice less seriously for it. But I would be very surprised if it were ever in your interest to kill Ma'ar: 

Permalink Mark Unread

: - I don't know, sometimes people get Dominated by a vampire! Or brain-shredded by a god! You don't want to make plans in which a crucial assumption is 'I will never need to kill this person'!:

Permalink Mark Unread

:I have no idea if it would actually help to have a conversation with Ma'ar about this, but I expect he would agree that it was reasonable of you to kill him if he were being - Dominated by a vampire - I am not even sure what that means but I assume it would result in a lot of people dying -: 

Permalink Mark Unread

:Yes, it would.:

Permalink Mark Unread

Nod. Sigh. 

:...I think I got us off track, sorry. I did not really mean to take a stance on whether you and Ma'ar should have a romantic relationship, I really have no idea if you should. Just that I think you have showed him a way that things could be better, and he will follow that further than most – if you offer him a rope he will climb it as high as it goes...: 

She shakes herself a little. :That was definitely the sort of thing I say because the Eternal Flame shaped my head. I have no idea if that means you ought trust it more or less: 

Permalink Mark Unread

:I really don't mind it. 

- can Mindhealing reproduce the effects of a headband on a mind? Could you look at me with the headband on and then keep it that way?

Permalink Mark Unread

She blinks. :What a good question. My guess is - a little, not entirely - where exactly in between would depend on what the headband is doing, and so far I have not seen that up close at all, let alone the same person with and without it - I was not going to look at Ma'ar without his permission:

(Though she was very very curious.) 

Permalink Mark Unread

:It seems very valuable. I probably won't want you to try it on me but I expect you'd have volunteers if you ever wanted to try to figure it out.:

Permalink Mark Unread

:How hard is it to make something like the headband, in your kind of magic?: 

Permalink Mark Unread

:Very, very hard. There are one or two people alive who could do it, and one nation that could afford the materials.:

Permalink Mark Unread

:Well. I was going to say that strong Mindhealers are rare and it sounds like it would take any of us a long time if it worked at all, but there are more than two of us. ...What are the materials it needs, I have no idea what could possibly be that expensive: 

Permalink Mark Unread

:Magic item crafting requires what we call alchemical silver, a very rare metal, at a purity that does not occur in nature and is not easily achieved.:

Permalink Mark Unread

:Huh. I am not sure how purifying rare metals works in your world but I think Urtho has mage-techniques for it: 

Permalink Mark Unread

: - you know, that should really have been higher on my list of priorities. Unless I did ask, and then forgot. Same with the fate of souls in this world, though ending the war was a good priority almost regardless of the answer.:

Permalink Mark Unread

:We know little of what happens to people's souls here after they die. Our temple teaches that the Nameless God will take in Their people after death, but I am reluctant to bring that up as a reason to worship Them, because I am very unclear on what it means and I am not sure how anyone who - quite reasonably - distrusted my word could check: 

Permalink Mark Unread

She nods. :My world's magic allows learning more but I don't myself possess the relevant skills. It's - important. In our world some people go to terrible afterlives when they die.:

Permalink Mark Unread

 

 

 

 

 

:That sounds awful. And for - what - worshipping the wrong god…?: 

Permalink Mark Unread

:For being Evil. Which isn't precisely - but is related to - being a person who does harm to others willfully, who would create a bad world for others left to their own devices. It doesn't mean they deserve it.: This is not a matter where she expects to have any differences in perspective with the church of the Nameless Flame.

Permalink Mark Unread

Kariasha closes her eyes. 

(Her reaction isn't exactly the one that a hypothetical Iomedae who had just learned about the existence of Evil afterlives would have, in her place. Her expression is sad and resigned and tired and...not giving up, at all, but also not really considering fighting it, or striving to find another way to fix it.) 

:...I am not sure if the Eternal Flame would have been able to tell us, if that were also true here. They would have tried if They could. But it - seems very important to find a way to check, if we could learn of one from your world.: 

Permalink Mark Unread

:Ma'ar thinks he and Urtho can figure out a way to get back, once there's peace, and I expect they're right, and then we'll have people in who can see, and trade spells with one another, and perhaps some people of this world will have some ideas for taking down Tar-Baphon, and it'll be - good. Really good. Abundantly worth even all this trouble and Aroden's expenditures.

I can see why the Star-Eyed and Vkandis didn't like the look of it.:

Permalink Mark Unread

:...Do you think either of Them will - try again to stop it? I am– I believe that the Nameless God would see the thing you think is good, and agree it is worth having and worth protecting, but I do not want to assume that They can protect us. It is not in our temple's teachings to rely on the Eternal Flame for safety.: 

Permalink Mark Unread

:It seems quite likely that they will, yeah. I don't know what to do about it. I .. am not confident in this given how muddy the memories are but I think Aroden thought the Star-Eyed couldn't do much in the short term.:

Permalink Mark Unread

:It seems likely Ma'ar is thinking about the risk as well. He is the right person if you need someone - alert and cautious and paranoid, I think, especially about gods.  

- he was terrified, when he came to speak with me, before he decided to trust us and bring you here. He hid it very well, but - I am not sure if he could have done it at all, if he had not seen you do objectively terrifying things and still not be afraid. I suppose there are downsides to being the sort of person who is cautious and paranoid.: 

Permalink Mark Unread

There are tradeoffs to everything. I wouldn't've walked into a war with Tantara but he wouldn't've walked the Moonpaths and gotten ripped apart by a demon lord.: She's aware that that's forcing a Golarion categorization on the Star-Eyed that doesn't quite fit, and that at some point she should take a closer look at why it's tempting to do that, but it seems maybe worth waiting for the rest of her reconstruction of what happened.

Permalink Mark Unread

:There are. ...The Eternal Flame gives us little guidance, on that, I think They seek a world where it is unnecessary and either way cannot guide us in it. I - wish I could have reassured him, but it is difficult to reassure people who are afraid for good reason.: 

Permalink Mark Unread

She's never found it difficult, but she is aware her method is only employable by paladins. She nods. 

- notices she's once again dizzy with exhaustion.

:If it's all right, I think I'll rest. Wake me if there's news of the peace, please.:

Permalink Mark Unread

:Yes, of course: And Kariasha will leave her alone to get some rest. 

Permalink Mark Unread

They meet. 

Urtho doesn't especially feel like he has any idea what he's doing, but he is actually pretty prepared, albeit almost entirely thanks to his hertasi. Ma'ar is more prepared than that. They're mostly not making decisions, at this point, just going through a long list of decisions that have already been made and making sure that every single point is excruciatingly clear, in writing. 

(It's not interesting work. Which isn't new; since the war started, Urtho has spent most of his waking hours on work that wasn't interesting. But at least this has the virtue that, once it's done, they will officially no longer have a war, and then maybe things can go...back to normal. Or whatever normal is going to look like, going forward.) 

 

He spends most of the time that they're speaking being spectacularly impressed with Ma'ar. Not that Ma'ar wasn't always impressive, but this is...something else entirely. Ma'ar is calm and patient and in control and bringing up the answers to all the questions Urtho has before Urtho even realizes he has them, and - he's learned so much - it's probably not the right mood for official diplomatic negotiations, to be so proud of his former student that it hurts -

Permalink Mark Unread

Ma'ar is calm and patient and in control, and - none of it feels real, it hasn't since the moment he stepped through his Gate and saw Urtho's face for the first time in so many years. It feels like a game he's playing on behalf of someone else's life, and he's playing it very very well but - surely it won't stick, this isn't actually something he can just do, surely tomorrow he's going to wake up still at war with Tantara, or maybe back in the Kiyam clan lands. 

 

They finalize a peace treaty. They sign it. He agrees on a time to see Urtho tomorrow to start researching the problem of how to find Iomedae's world and Gate to it; Urtho would pretty clearly be eager to start now but is equally clearly exhausted.

He Gates back to the palace in Predain to inform his King that the war is over. 

Permalink Mark Unread

It's only midafternoon. Ma'ar...can't actually think of anything else very urgent that has to happen today. There are almost certainly important things he could do, but it feels sort of like he's forgotten how to take actions in situations that aren't emergencies. 

He should tell Iomedae. Then he should - something - he can't quite make it line up in his head to make plans for the future, right now. The only thing he has on his schedule is working with Urtho tomorrow and that especially doesn't feel like the sort of thing that can be real. 

The headband-self-awareness keeps quietly informing him that this is a worrying thought pattern, and he abruptly doesn't want to be wearing the headband anymore. Possibly because it doesn't feel very safe to have emotions here in Predain, which is also kind of concerning but he's not sure it's surprising. He wants - he needs - maybe Iomedae can help him figure out the answer to that question, because he certainly can't. Or maybe not, she's still recovering, but possibly now that peace talks are over and it's less of a dubious idea to let her use mind-affecting magic or whatever it is on him, he can ask her to do the thing that makes him not afraid. 

 

 

...He tells the King that he's taking the rest of today and tonight off, and he Gates to outside the holy site of the Nameless God and heads in. 

Permalink Mark Unread

Kariasha meets him at the mouth of the cave. She doesn't seem especially surprised to see him again. :Ma'ar. Is it done? Iomedae is sleeping but she asked me to wake her if there were news of the peace. I assume you want to tell her yourself?:

Permalink Mark Unread

:Yes: He follows her in. 

 

Iomedae is lying on the sofabed-furniture with a blanket tucked around her. He watches her sleep for a minute, and then breathes out, in a way that feels like letting go of the rope he's dangling from and finding himself somehow not falling, and sits down beside her. He nudges her shoulder.

Permalink Mark Unread

- she wakes immediately, relaxes on recognizing him. :

 

Peace?:

Permalink Mark Unread

:Yes. Arranged to meet with Urtho tomorrow to research how to Gate to your world.: 

He's trying to smile at her but it's not an especially convincing smile. His expression is that of someone who has problems, has no idea how to deal with them and doesn't have the resources or emotional equilibrium to figure it out right now, and is not going to ask Iomedae to provide a solution but is kind of desperately hoping she might do it without his having to ask. 

Permalink Mark Unread

Kariasha doesn't have to use Mindhealing Sight to notice that one of Ma'ar's problems is that he's dissociating wildly, and probably another is that he's been pushing himself very hard through emergencies for a long time and now he's run out of emergencies. It's pretty common, for people to find that adjustment difficult, and also be confused about it because it seems like a lack of emergencies should just be a good thing. 

She stays out of their way, though. 

Permalink Mark Unread

She smiles at him and sits up. :Tomorrow? It seems possible that you and Urtho should both take a few weeks off.:

Permalink Mark Unread

:I...am concerned that some of the gods who dislike you are going to try something and I would rather not give them several extra weeks to set that up: 

Also the concept of taking several weeks off feels confusing. What would he do. None of the things he can think of to spend that time doing feel real, except for working on Gates through other planes, which also doesn't feel real but he can at least convince his mind that it's important anyway, and it's likely to be interesting. He hasn't done anything just because it was interesting in...years, probably. 

Permalink Mark Unread

:One thing they might try is pushing everyone very hard while they're tired and recovering from serious injuries, and then making the injuries catch up with them at the wrong instant. ...already did try that, actually.:

Permalink Mark Unread

Obviously Iomedae should take several weeks off, but Ma'ar had - not actually been conceptualizing himself as recovering from serious injuries? He was only injured the one time and it wasn't that badly and it was a number of days ago and he got a lot of Healing-attention about it– ....fine, he was also technically injured another time when he rescued Iomedae again, but then Iomedae immediately healed him and her kind of healing doesn't actually involve any recovery time, which is why he nearly forgot about that. He's physically in perfect health and he's been getting enough sleep and he doesn't think there's a reason to expect himself to be impaired right now. 

He...supposes he does feel tired, and he isn't entirely sure why, today wasn't even a long day. 

Permalink Mark Unread

:Look, far be it from me to tear a wizard away from his fascinating magic research, but - there'll be parades, yes? The soldiers will go home to their families? The food shipments will arrive? WIld accountings of the whole thing will spread through every tavern in every city? Are you planning to miss all that?:

Permalink Mark Unread

...Ma'ar had in fact not thought to put that on his mental calendar. He considers it for a moment, and makes a face. :I probably do owe it to my people to be there for some of it, but - I am really not in the mood: 

Permalink Mark Unread

:What mood are you in?:

Permalink Mark Unread

That is indeed the question that Ma'ar has been having a bizarrely difficult time answering! It's probably a good question to try to answer! 

:I...think I have been expecting that I would have a lot of emotions about the war and everything that has happened, once it was - safer - it was obviously not a good time before and so I was mostly trying to schedule it for later. I guess now is later but I - do not actually seem to have introspective access to what my emotions are, right now? I am not sure why, usually the headband makes me extremely aware of it.:

Shrug. :Possibly it still does not feel safe, the war with Tantara is over but we are still ambiguously at war with the Star-Eyed Goddess and maybe with Vkandis. It would be easier to tell if I had introspective access to my emotions. I suppose I could try taking the headband off and then putting it back on, maybe that will make it go back to doing the usual thing? ...I would probably like it if you did the thing that makes people not be scared but I am not sure if that is too difficult right now: 

Permalink Mark Unread

She smiles at him, in the relevant maybe-magical sense. :It's actually just what happens any time if I don't suppress it. I try to be intentional about it but it's not effortful.:

Permalink Mark Unread

Ma'ar leans into it, and - 

 

- he's - 

 

 

He's going to just open his shields and shove it at Iomedae in Mindspeech, actually. 

- he feels like a river-boat cascading down through rapids, in a storm, and it's not a very good boat and he can't see what's ahead, there might be waterfalls, and it feels like it's been taking all of his effort just to keep the boat right-side-up and bail out the rainwater, he can try to steer but it doesn't matter because the river will go where it goes and even if he could see ahead he couldn't reshape the river's path. There are so many things that aren't all right, and there's only one of him, and - he's not alone, he knows that, but he feels alone, even with Iomedae right there, it's a groove worn deep into his mind, that he can't trust anyone but himself. And he's recently learned a lot about the ways that he can't even trust himself.

He's angry, with - himself, mostly, but maybe that just feels safest to look at, like the only part that's a legitimate or productive emotion, because one of the things about being alone is that you don't get to demand that other people be a certain way and you don't get to be angry when they let you down, and certainly he doesn't want to be angry with Iomedae, who has been trying so hard to avert the consequences of his own mistakes, who's paid such a high cost for it, she just went through something unimaginably awful (and he couldn't help, couldn't do anything but be there watching her suffering, and there's a lot of very strong emotions there which he's barely looked at) and she's still impaired and it's so spectacularly unfair to be angry at her for, what, not being invincible, not being impossible to damage, not actually being able to do whatever arbitrary things are necessary to solve his world's problems so he can maybe finally stop–

- and it's a really upsetting realization, to notice that some part of him does want to stop, because he can'tcan'tcan't he made a vow, on one of the high balconies of Urtho's Tower, decades ago, he looked at the stars and he promised to himself and to the world that he wasn't ever going to stop until everything was fixed. He's not sure he's a shape that is actually capable of deciding to stop, it's just that he's not in control and never has been and he's - not scared, which does make it easier to look at, but also leaves a lot more space to notice the other ways he feels.

Which are that he's not sure if he's actually a shape of person who will reliably succeed at making things better rather than worse, because Iomedae said that people make very scary mistakes when they try to make the whole world their responsibility, and he's - not a pattern that can not do that - but he's not capable of just deciding not to make mistakes. He nearly made a mistake that destroyed his kingdom and Urtho's. He doesn't know if it's a good thing, for a world to contain a person like him, and that's awful, it's a deep unbearable pain that he can't even name as a more specific emotion. 

He wants - 

 

 

- he has absolutely no idea what he wants, actually, just. Probably not this. 

Permalink Mark Unread

 

:I think it'd be entirely reasonable to be angry with me: she says, after a moment of not really saying anything. :It was stupid to go to the Moonpaths without more backup and planning, and to do it at all before the peace was done and signed. It's not trivial to design a better rule which would've not failed in a spectacularly costly way in a different recent situation, but that doesn't mean it's an unfair thing to be angry about. 

 

Do you think that I collected all these notes on what goes wrong when people try to make the whole world their responsibility in order to talk people out of doing that?:

Permalink Mark Unread

It's hard to think about that question, because being in this much emotional pain and aware of it is so distracting. He can still manage it, with the headband, but slowly. 

:I - suppose probably not. ...I notice I seem to keep predicting you are going to be angry with me for - trying to do things - even though this does not at all accord with how you have actually been acting toward me: 

Permalink Mark Unread

:I admire you for trying to do things. I'd much rather have you as an ally than have someone who wasn't trying to do things.

One of the most important competencies a commander can have is the ability to look at a battlefield and go 'oh, we're almost certainly going to lose this'. You don't necessary want to announce that to everyone within earshot, but you need to know, because if you know what's going to happen you can change what's going to happen, and take only the chances that are actually worth taking. Doing ambitious things that actually make the world go better is hard. You are outnumbered, on that battlefield; the forces arrayed against you are stronger than you thought they were. This is not the claim 'only foolish people try to win battles' . It is the claim that you will not start winning consistently until you can predict what is going to happen and do different things when what is going to happen is something bad.:

Permalink Mark Unread

:...That makes sense. I definitely need to get better at predicting what is going to happen, especially with gods.: 

He has to spend a while unpacking why that's such a painful thought.

:...I think I am feeling very stuck between the fact that it - feels unacceptable that I have not already made progress on improving at this - and the fact that right now trying to think about it so I can improve at it feels...very hard and bad. Which is - maybe because I am tired, and not fully recovered from...something...and it would be more efficient overall if I rested for a while and then tried to make progress on it. I just - I am not managing to figure out an angle where it feels like - a thing I can do - to put it off: 

Permalink Mark Unread

:Most improving at planning and decisionmaking does not come via sitting in your room thinking endlessly about planning and decisionmaking, it comes when you do things you wanted to do. It's not putting off improving at planning and decisionmaking to do things, it's how you improve.:

Permalink Mark Unread

:...Maybe the other half of the problem I am having is that I also do not really want to do things right now, it just - feels unacceptable and not okay that they are not done yet: This feels like an incredibly stupid problem to be having. 

Permalink Mark Unread

:What things?:

Permalink Mark Unread

:Mostly the fact that we do not have a way to reach your world or a way for Aroden to intervene cheaply here. I want to figure out a way to Gate there and take you to Aroden's church so they can use your world's magic to fix the rest of what the Star-Eyed did to you. I think once we have that I will feel better about - not going as fast as I can, on everything else. - I do think magic research is probably not the sort of thing that is that bad for me to do when part of me would rather not be doing things: 

Permalink Mark Unread

: - Ma'ar. Urtho can figure it out. He's got to have wildly higher spellcraft. If you're itching to help him do it, then fine, but if you've got an elaborate explanation of how it probably won't be that bad for you and it will make you feel better about not going as fast as you can on everything else - 

- it's peacetime! That's not how to make decisions in peacetime!:

Permalink Mark Unread

Ma'ar is deeply unsure that he has a different mode of making decisions– well, aside from the fact that feeling like doing things is costly and bad for him is not a problem he usually has. He thinks. Probably. He's not entirely sure he would have noticed when he didn't have the headband-self-awareness. 

The headband-self-awareness is helpfully informing him that this is probably not an ideal way to have his head set up, and he's probably spending a lot of wasted mental motion and emotional energy on arguing with himself over it, and he might be less tired if he stopped that.

...The headband-self-awareness is getting pretty tiring in itself, Ma'ar is starting to suspect that the headband is very good for getting a lot of things done quickly and...makes it harder to actually get his mind to be in a resting state. 

 

 

Separately his emotions absolutely do not buy that it's peacetime but that seems like a separate conversation. 

Permalink Mark Unread

:Imagine that at some point in the near future Aroden contacted us and said we can use Urtho's superweapons for an assault on Hell itself and Asmodeus won't see it in prophecy and we just need to coordinate with all the forces of Heaven to do it. Would you be delighted, or would you wish very dearly it hadn't happened quite that soon because you aren't ready to embark on that?:

Permalink Mark Unread

That feels hard to predict in the abstract.

Ma'ar tries to stare at it anyway. ...It's hard to think about, and Ma'ar is suspicious that's in itself an answer to the question of whether he feels ready for it. 

:...I think it would help with not wanting to do things, I was not having this problem yesterday when there were still urgent deadlines. I - do not feel actually ready for it, I think, though it is hard to tell, but - probably part of that is being tired, and part of it is - wanting to have more time to figure out what my mistakes were and practice not making them while I work on problems that have slightly less enormous stakes: 

 

Permalink Mark Unread

:That makes sense. That is - in significant part what peacetime is for, to me, getting myself into a state where if I got news like that I could turn my whole self over to it immediately. Which is to say, not being tired, not forcing myself to do things that don't really matter anywhere near as much as being ready for that could matter, doing things that are not high stakes but that I can learn from, enjoying myself, feeling complete and whole and human...:

Permalink Mark Unread

:...That makes sense. I am not sure how to use time when there are not emergencies to do that but I can figure it out, I have figured out harder things before: 

He closes his eyes. Notices that he's very tense, and makes a deliberate effort to try to relax. 

:I think I want to take off the headband. It makes my emotions much louder and it makes it much harder to just...have them...instead of doing a lot of sanity-checking whether they are useful or emotions I endorse, and - it is very useful but right now I am finding it unpleasant, so you can have it back if you want. - I suppose there is an argument that we should give it to Urtho once he is ready to work on Gate-research, if you think that is a good idea, but you can have it for now and decide on that?: 

Permalink Mark Unread

:I would like it back, yes, thank you.: Wow, he's - really not okay, is he, that was kind of a disjointed and concerning way for him to express that compared to the expected and usual 'would you like your headband back'. She isn't upset, and doesn't let surprise into her mind-voice, it wouldn't help.

Permalink Mark Unread

Ma'ar is expecting to be even less okay once he takes the headband off, at least in the short run, he's not sure what's going to happen but it's been long enough that he's definitely built some new mental habits that are about to suddenly stop working. He...should probably warn Iomedae about that, actually. 

:If something about the geopolitical situation or the god situation explodes, I am trusting you to figure out which of us is actually less impaired and can make the best use of the headband to fix it. I am - predicting I will be quite impaired until I get used to not having it again.: 

 

...He's not looking forward to this at all but he grits his teeth - catches himself and tries to stop, it'll give him a headache - and takes the headband off and offers it to Iomedae. 

Permalink Mark Unread

Iomedae puts it on. She usually doesn't have a lot of her self-concept tied up in how much enhancement she happens to be running at the moment - she lends the headband out a lot, so everyone in the Knights's leadership has had the chance to really think about key decisions - but in this specific moment she's really looking forward to finding Ma'ar less confusing.

Permalink Mark Unread

It is, as expected, intensely unpleasant. A lot of the structures in his thoughts immediately collapse, which would probably be kind of panic-inducing if he were capable of experiencing fear, and he isn't but it's still upsetting in other ways. It feels like all of the emotions he was in the middle of having, which he was mostly able to lay out and name and make some sense of, are now being violently compressed into less space and merging into a pit of incoherent awfulness. He tries to - react to this in some way - but it's a mental habit that doesn't work anymore. He can't remember his previous train of thought at all, including why he thought now was a remotely good time to take off the stupid headband. 

He is holding himself very still because it feels like the only other action available is to collapse and start sobbing and he really cannot deal with a concerned Mindhealer right now. 

Permalink Mark Unread

- well, that's less confusing but only in the direction of narrowing her guesses down on 'he is having a total breakdown'.

 

Does he want a hug?

Permalink Mark Unread

It's very frustrating how he can't figure out why he's so intensely miserable, because it's apparently related to thoughts he can't retrace anymore. It seems like a baffling and pointless emotional reaction to be having to the fact that they just signed a peace treaty. It's not a good time to be having a total breakdown, because there are - other problems - he's pretty sure there are problems - but it's also just confusing to react this way to a success. He's trying to calm down and the 'try to calm down' mental motion isn't doing anything or at least isn't doing very much very fast. 

He would very much like a hug. 

Permalink Mark Unread

Someday everything in all the worlds will be all right.

It isn't this day.

She does not expect to live to see it, not really. 

 

But humans need to be all right more often than that. She holds him and doesn't say anything. 

Permalink Mark Unread

Ma'ar leans into her arms and focuses on breathing and trying to calm down, and after about a minute of that is close enough to calm that he can actually hold a thread of thought, and try to reconstruct which part of what they were just talking about was upsetting. 

They were talking about...researching Gates to Golarion...Iomedae was surprised, said he should take several weeks off, said - something about the gods, something about it being bad to make decisions while recovering from injuries, which doesn't make sense because Ma'ar isn't injured and neither is Urtho - he said he wasn't in the mood to be at parades - she asked what mood he was in and it was hard to answer and he asked her to do the no-fear effect for him and...then he was upset? He's so confused about why that was upsetting. 

He's so tired. Not in a way where he wants to sleep, but in a way where it feels like he feels the mental equivalent of having carried an incredibly heavy load up a mountain and now his muscles are exhausted and trembling and trying to move at all hurts. He pushed ahead so hard through so much and it's not even over and he - he isn't scared now, but somehow that only makes it more obvious how much of the last week he's spent being terrified, and how much effort it took to keep doing things anyway, not just any things but the right things, that would make them safe, that would keep Iomedae safe, over and over and he was the only person who could do it, and the fact that he did it somehow doesn't make that - feel more all right -

 

 

He should...probably try to talk to Iomedae. Talking to Iomedae usually helps. 

:Was so scared: he sends, shakily and not very coherently. :Trying to, to get it right - had to keep you safe, no one else could - was so scared it would go badly, bringing you here...: It's feeling hard to breathe, which is a really stupid problem for emotions to be causing. :M'so tired. Want to be safe. Want things to stop happening.:

Permalink Mark Unread

:You did very well. There's peace, and you're safe, and nothing is particularly happening, and I don't expect it to.:

Permalink Mark Unread

It does help, to hear that. Ma'ar is finally starting to relax. It doesn't actually lessen the feeling of immense shaky exhaustion. He's becoming aware that his entire body aches, physically, from holding himself tense. But something in his thoughts hurts a lot less. He isn't sure what. 

:...Not alone: he manages, finally. :S'better. Thank you: 

Permalink Mark Unread

:Aroden didn't particularly expect the Star-Eyed to be able to act again this soon. I mostly expect that we'll have some quiet and maybe another clumsy Vkandis move. They can't see very well, is the thing. We are in unusually little danger.:

Permalink Mark Unread

It seems like, again, this was the right thing to say. Ma'ar is nearly all the way to actually relaxed, now. Having compelling reasons to believe that they're safe definitely wouldn't be enough on its own, and the feeling of safety probably wouldn't be enough if there were reasons to intellectually believe they were in danger, but - both together, and probably also the being hugged part, is enough. He's still very tired, and he's still sad - for the dead, for the living who lost people they loved, for all the other damage of the war that a peace treaty doesn't undo - but he mostly isn't actively upset. 

:...I think I am all right now: he sends after a few minutes, once it seems clear that his mind is going to continue not throwing more unexpected deeply unpleasant emotions at him. 

He's not going to pull away from the hug for a while, though. 

Permalink Mark Unread

 

:Would I guess correctly that it'd be bad for your credibility with your King and your staff, in Predain, if you were visibly - weak or scared or in doubt -:

Permalink Mark Unread

:- Oh, definitely. I am usually good at hiding it. I...think I am okay enough now to succeed at that, though it was definitely easier with the headband, but - that is probably one of the reasons I do not really want to have to be present at a parade right now: 

Permalink Mark Unread

:I'll go with you, if you end up feeling like you have to go. It sounds - very lonely, having to hide all doubt from everyone close to you for a whole war. It seems like it'd make it harder to even feel it.:

Permalink Mark Unread

He's not sure anyone is really close to him, not even in Predain. 

:I would like that. I suppose it is lonely. I have to think about my uncertainty by writing about it in cipher, and - it probably did mean that I was less able to notice my doubts.: 

Permalink Mark Unread

:You should come back with me, once we find a way. I think you'll like many of the people in the crusade command. I've been - trying to build a whole organization of people like me, people I can trust, people I can weep with, people who'd notice if I was being an idiot...:

Permalink Mark Unread

He looks torn. :I - would like to. I am not sure it is a good idea to leave Predain while we are still rebuilding, but I suppose I could afford a visit for a week or two: 

Permalink Mark Unread

:It does seem like a lot of how Predain is run is...genuinely a big improvement over the way things were before but not in a state that'll stay that way without your active intervention.:

Permalink Mark Unread

...Nod. :I built an entirely new legal system and all these processes for reporting violations of it, and then hardly anyone uses them to report things except for me! I think it will be better when people are - more used to it, when more of our citizens grew up in Predain as it is now. And - I was wondering if it would help if we could start a church of Aroden there - I do want the temples of Bestet to operate there, and probably also the temple of the Nameless God, but I think my people will be - more easily convinced that a god cares about them if that god gives them magical healing powers: 

Permalink Mark Unread

:And clean water! The value is really very straightforward. I want to set up a church of Aroden in Predain and in Tantara, but I don't know how established it'll have to be for Aroden to start granting miracles. I'll work on it while Urtho works on the Gate, I guess, because it's good groundwork even if it's not usable until we have interworld contact.:

Permalink Mark Unread

:That seems very worthwhile. He would also need people to be - aligned with Him, right? Which I think is more feasible for people in Predain than it would be for most other gods, His goals are going to appeal to people, but it might still take time for them to get used to and fully understand His teachings enough to work with Him: 

Permalink Mark Unread

:And it'll take me time to learn how to translate the principles into a form that's compelling to people in Predain. There's not a lot of rush, though.:

Permalink Mark Unread

:I suppose not: It's a strange feeling. He...thinks it's a good one. 

Permalink Mark Unread

:I don't know how costly to expect interworld transit to be once it can be done at all, but if it were inexpensive I would want to see you often.:

Permalink Mark Unread

Ma'ar is - weirdly confused, he doesn't really know how to interpret that or respond to it. 

:I appreciate that. I - think I will continue finding your advice valuable for a long time. ...I would not want to take too much time away from your work, it sounds like you were very busy in Golarion: 

Permalink Mark Unread

:A bit. But, if you want to be someone who could at any moment march on Hell with some superweapons if presented with the opportunity, that means you can't be running at that pace all the time, and so I make time for myself to be human. ...at least for the five to ten years before I plan to ascend.:

Permalink Mark Unread

He looks thoughtful. :I suppose that makes sense. I think I - might have made fewer of the mistakes that led up to the war, if I had made time for - normal human things: He makes a bit of a face. :I think I have never been good at that: 

He kind of wants to ask her more about the whole 'becoming a god' thing but that seems like it might be a bigger conversation than he's really feeling up to right now. 

Permalink Mark Unread

:It's very hard. There's so much going wrong, right, and once you make yourself aware of it it's hard not to take each minute spent in peace or happiness or comfort as - theft, from the people who have never been offered it, who will never be offered it unless you get it to them. Maybe one can justify precisely the amount of time off each day necessary to be in peak mental and physical condition the next day, but certainly not - happiness, wonder, love -

- and yet, as you have observed, as a predictable regularity humans who are trying to be angels are just worse at making the world better than humans who are trying to be whole and happy humans.:

Permalink Mark Unread

:Honestly, trying to be a whole and happy human sounds, in some ways, harder than winning a war. I have no idea how to solve it by being good at tactics. But it - has obvious upsides even apart from probably making fewer stupid mistakes:

Also he’s still very tired. :…I would like to stay here, I think, if you do not mind, but I maybe want to take a nap or something:

Permalink Mark Unread

:Of course.:

Permalink Mark Unread

Ma’ar shifts himself into a more horizontal position on the sofa-furniture. If Iomedae doesn’t seem to mind, he’s definitely going to use her shoulder as a pillow. She can presumably do the no-fear effect as long as he’s just in the same room, but it still feels safer, somehow, to be in direct physical contact.

Permalink Mark Unread

Kariasha is watching them from across the room, though discreetly.

She makes eye contact with Iomedae. :Do you need anything?:

Permalink Mark Unread

:Could you maybe get him a blanket?:

Permalink Mark Unread

She can do that. She’s watching him with some concern, but doesn’t seem inclined to ask questions unless Iomedae says something first.

:Is the headband helping with the problems you were still having?: she asks once she’s gotten Ma’ar cosily tucked in, which she manages to do without directly touching him at all. She doesn’t think he would appreciate it.

Permalink Mark Unread

:It is.: She doesn't get negative side effects from vastly boosting herself, all the realizations there are to have have been had and it's just fine-tuning remaining. :I'm annoyed at the missing memories, and I want to do some sparring - with no one alive in Velgarth, probably - and see if my reflexes are normal, but I think I feel confident I'm myself, and making decisions for my normal reasons, and about as good at doing that as usual, adjusting for how far out of context I am.:

Permalink Mark Unread

Nod. :I would be curious to look and see the difference it makes, but - I am not sure there is any real justification for how it would help you, just my curiosity — I was also intensely curious what it would have looked like when he took it off, but I was not going to look without asking and I think interacting at all would have been unpleasant for him.:

Permalink Mark Unread

:Go ahead! It could be useful for some other patient, and I was just explaining to Ma'ar that it's actually all right just to have life be fulfilling and good, sometimes.:

Permalink Mark Unread

She looks. What are the kinds of changes that stand out? 

Permalink Mark Unread

In substantial part it seems like what the headband does for her is make her mind more compact, its priorities closer to each other and more interconnected, like there is some underlying thing she's trying to approximate and when all the pieces are pulled in tightly together she can traverse the ground to get to it much faster. Her mind is also more - alive? More vibrant? And in the place where there's damage, it's regrowing a little faster.

Permalink Mark Unread

That’s fascinating. She isn’t sure she’s ever seen a mind that was reaching so hard for coherency and clarity. It’s beautiful. 

She can describe some of it to Iomedae if she wants, though Sight is always hard to convey in words. Many people don’t really like to hear the nitty-gritty details of how their heads look like to her, but Iomedae strikes her as someone who considers nearly all information useful.

Permalink Mark Unread

She does!

 

:It's because I'm planning to ascend, I suspect. My guess has been that the more you know what you want, going in, the easier it'll be to preserve it through ascension, so I have to get everything right, if I want to end up with my priorities the way I'd have grown up into them and not just some god-priorities that are a possible extrapolation of my own. I don't urge the Knights to try all that hard to be perfectly coherent, if it doesn't come naturally to them.:

Permalink Mark Unread

:I have no idea how ascending to become a god - works - but that sounds plausible. And you want to have priorities that mortals can understand and make sense of?:

She frowns thoughtfully at Ma’ar. :I think he would want to be coherent like that, if he knew how - I think he was already trying harder than most people, even without knowing it was possible to become a god. But it is very hard, and I think this world offers less advice for it. …And it probably helps a great deal, for you, that you are never afraid.:

Permalink Mark Unread

:And never alone. A mortal acting alone to try to fix the world has to adopt very different habits than a person who has been surrounded by friends and allies her whole life. I think naturally in - strategies I would want the people around me to emulate, because they will. Ma'ar doesn't.:

Permalink Mark Unread

Nod. :I - think he wants to have that, and it would be better if he had it. And I think he is going to find it very, very hard - he will learn the rules of the game quickly, I am sure, but it will take him a long time to trust it and feel safe in putting weight on it. He has spent his whole life shaping himself to be someone who counts on nothing from others, and I suspect there are many things he would not have conceptualized as hurting him because he could not afford to be in pain, that he is going to have to reconsider. It can be very destabilizing for people, when it becomes safe to be hurt by bad things happening.: 

Permalink Mark Unread

:Are we talking abstractly about human nature or are you trying to warn me that I specifically shouldn't ask him to my bed until he's had months more time to process.:

Permalink Mark Unread

Kariasha laughs, delightedly, and manages to slap her hand over her mouth before she makes enough noise to risk waking Ma'ar. 

:I think it would be good for him. I do not have a very good read on whether he would think so, at this point, but if you decide you want it, I think it would mean something to him just to know that, and he is entirely competent to say no or 'maybe later' if that is what he prefers: 

Permalink Mark Unread

:If I decide I want it? Obviously I decided that! It wasn't really a very difficult decision!:

Permalink Mark Unread

Crooked smile. :Even though he might someday be mind-controlled by a vampire such that you have to kill him?: 

Permalink Mark Unread

:Oh, I still think that might happen and would be very upsetting if it did.  Or the more upsetting version where it's not mind-control, it's him being dangerous to the world and my not being able to fix it.

But I'm not thirty anymore, it's not my first time, my headband does Wisdom these days, it's not going to compromise my judgement to be in love any more than it compromises my judgment to have friends.:

Permalink Mark Unread

:That would also be my assessment.: She looks down at Ma'ar, sleeping peacefully with his head on Iomedae's shoulder. :And I think he is less dangerous to the world, not just if he has good advice, but also if he is - happy. ...Also he is very adorable right now. He would probably be uncomfortable if I said it to his face but I am right.: 

Permalink Mark Unread

:He's very cute! Every human is intrinsically of extraordinary worth and importance and inner beauty etcetera but this one is also very cute!:

Permalink Mark Unread

:He is! I am very pleased for you.: She's smiling broadly. :And I should leave you be, now. I am mostly intending not to interact with him, he finds me stressful and did not in any capacity agree to be here so a Mindhealer could do Mindhealing things to him, but if he is upset later and you could use help figuring out what is going on with him, I am around.: 

Permalink Mark Unread

:I'll let you know.:

Permalink Mark Unread

She nods, and wanders off to attend to other duties. 

Permalink Mark Unread

Ma'ar sleeps for a couple of candlemarks, occasionally shifting position and sometimes murmuring words in his own language without fully waking. 

 

When he does wake up, he's warm and cozy and he knows immediately that he's with Iomedae, not by extending his Othersenses but because the no-fear effect is very distinct, and he stays relaxed and doesn't open his eyes yet. 

Assessment of how he feels: ...still not especially enthused about parades and speeches in Predain. Still definitely not in a mood such that he would be eager and excited if Urtho invented Gates between worlds in a single day and by tomorrow night they were planning with Aroden how to conquer Hell. Still definitely noticing that thinking feels slower and muddier than he had gotten used to, and writing up more diplomatic communications would feel actually effortful.  

But...fine, otherwise? He suspects he would be less fine anywhere other than here and with Iomedae, but at the moment he's not feeling especially inclined to start crying or hate himself. 

He opens his eyes, but otherwise stays where he is. :Hey: 

Permalink Mark Unread

:Hey.: She's been reviewing her notes. She finally mostly feels like she knows what happened over the last few weeks. 

Permalink Mark Unread

He shifts so he can actually see her face, without breaking contact. :I had wanted to at some point go through all of the decisions I made while you were incapacitated, so I can check if you think I missed any important considerations. ...Also I think I do like being here, it is - very peaceful - but if you also wanted to stay a while longer, I am inclined to find out if they have guest rooms or something, I do not feel the need to sleep literally next to the holy fire.: 

Permalink Mark Unread

:You'll have to ask about guest rooms, my Mindspeech is very short-range. And then we can go through all your decisions, though you're cleverer than me, you shouldn't expect I'll catch all your mistakes.:

Permalink Mark Unread

:I really do not feel like I am necessarily cleverer than you in the relevant ways! I am probably better at math and writing speeches but I think you are better at - knowing when to second-guess your decisions, and what directions to be careful in, and that was even when had the headband and you did not!: 

He'll Mindspeak the priestess-Mindhealer to ask if they have any kind of private rooms here, and if so whether they have room to spare for himself and Iomedae to stay the night here. (Surely the apprentices and such have to sleep somewhere, he didn't see any sleeping arrangements in the main space.) 

Permalink Mark Unread

They do! The alcoves are very small, with the exception of the one where all the orphaned children currently being fostered here sleep together, and separated from the main area with curtains rather than doors. Usually the apprentices double up two to a room. They have one of the alcoves unclaimed but he and Iomedae will have to share. 

(Kariasha is being very disciplined and avoiding looking smug or satisfied about this at all.) 

Permalink Mark Unread

The two sleeping pallets take up nearly the entire floorspace, with a narrow aisle down the middle so that either of them could duck out without actually stepping on the other. There are crisp sheets and beautifully-patterned woven blankets and extra furs, and no other furniture whatsoever. 

Ma'ar sits down on one of the pallets. It's not as comfortable as the sofabed-furniture, and the straw stuffing rustles. 

He looks at Iomedae, and tries to think where to even start.

Permalink Mark Unread

She will just pleasantly continue the conversation they were having before logistics intervened. :Cleverer but not wiser, in the Golarion accounting of these things. There are separate spells that enhance each, so we think of them as separate parts of genius. I am definitely better at knowing when to second-guess my decisions, I have both directly lost more battles than you and learned from more books about battles other people lost. And I think you should really read Aroden's holy books, you'd get a lot out of them on the - how to notice your mistakes - front.:

Permalink Mark Unread

:I would like to! I was assuming we would need to reach your world before we can obtain a copy: And of course it's going to be in her language which he doesn't speak, but he's guessing her world has a magic solution to that. 

:I - should probably start with the first decision, which was to rescue you, and which I did not put very much thought or preparation into at all. I - collapsed in the middle of a meeting, which obviously alarmed my people, and when I woke up I just - all I really had was your name, but the natural inference was that you needed help. I thought it had probably been Aroden but I do not remember anything except - you.:

He frowns. :I knew that Gating into Tantara was a violation of the ceasefire, and it was the second time. I also knew that Urtho's Tower has dangerous countermeasures against unauthorized Gates. If I had known where you were, I would probably have Gated in without communicating at all, as it is I failed to reach Urtho and tried for Need and learned she had interrupted the shamans in attempting to murder you, and I - did not actually think about it much, I just went in and grabbed you. And then nearly died - the countermeasures are not intended to be lethal but I must have gotten unlucky, or my shields were down after Aroden contacted me - I took a levinbolt badly and the Healers said it stopped my heart. They were amazed I managed a return Gate at all, I suppose two or three seconds is just not actually long enough to die.: 

A pause, while he tries to think. 

:..There are justifications I can think of now for why it was worth the risk, or why not rescuing you was actually more likely to destabilize the ceasefire. Rescuing you almost did. My people understandably assumed an assassination attempt by Tantara on both of us. They were going to use the contingency-plan to invade Urtho's Tower if they did not get a reply from him in a small number of minutes - which they would not have, he was taken ill - and if I had not been miraculously healed and able to explain, I think they would have moved on it.: 

Permalink Mark Unread

:I wouldn't've done it but I treat violating a ceasefire as much more of a - bright line - something no god arranging any series of coincidences could reasonably get me to do - than you do or than it probably makes sense for you to. There are advantages both to being the kind of person who can't be manipulated into that and to being the kind of person who will act sensibly when they think the other side would on the whole endorse the intervention, leave promptly, and apologize. 

What would've happened, if you hadn't grabbed me?:

Permalink Mark Unread

Nod. :Urtho did endorse the intervention, I think, and it - caused fewer problems on the Tantaran side than my Gating back with both of us injured did on my side. ...If I had not gone in then, hmm. Need was there, and guarding you, but it came at the expense of chasing the shamans. Who were in Urtho's basement. I...am not sure what they were looking for, none of the actual superweapons were there anymore...but they might have known of other magics he has. So - maybe it would have been fine, I could have still delegated through Need to send someone else looking, but maybe not. It depends what they were planning, but - the obvious outcomes are that they would have returned with an artifact Need could not hold off, and killed you and possibly a large number of other people, or that they would have escaped. And of course we would have had less information on what happened, without being able to interrogate Ravenwing: 

Pause.

:Notes should have said but we found Silverhorse dead by his own hand. It looked like a sacrifice for blood-magic, but we are not sure what it was meant to accomplish, the mage-power it would have released was certainly not there. Do you have any ideas?:

Permalink Mark Unread

: - maybe to help the Star-Eyed, as we were in the middle of trying to kill her? We should expect something similar to perhaps be commanded next time we try to kill her.:

Permalink Mark Unread

Ma'ar winces. :Oh. Yes.: 

He pulls his knees in to his chest. :And of course you would still have been in Urtho's Tower, while Urtho himself was unwell - I doubt anyone else would have agreed to Gate you to Predain voluntarily. I - am not sure if I should be as bothered by that thought as I am? But - I do not actually trust Urtho or Urtho's people to have kept you safe.: 

He looks thoughtful. :I - did not at the time really think about it as though I had a choice? It felt like - Aroden had warned me, and so obviously Aroden had already judged it was worth it? But Aroden did not specifically tell me to Gate into the Tower, or if He did I have no memory of it. If I had...trusted someone else in Tantara...I could have kept you safe and avoided provoking Urtho's people or terrifying my people. And in hindsight I took a very big risk, with the countermeasures, if Aroden had not given you the magic to heal me then I would almost certainly have died, and I am not sure there would have been any way of retrieving the ceasefire then even if you were functional to argue with them.: 

Permalink Mark Unread

:My memories are fuzzy but I think it looked to Aroden like the only way was to save your life. Which - makes sense. 

That's why we didn't kill the Star-Eyed. Because He couldn't afford to do that and to heal you in time.:

Permalink Mark Unread

He winces again. 

:I am not sure I could have had any way of knowing it, but - that sounds like the trade I made, then. More assurance of your survival, in exchange for the Star-Eyed not yet being destroyed. ...Though I think there is a high chance you would have died if it had gone on any longer, even if your physical body was safe.: 

He closes his eyes. :I - I think that not trying to rescue you would have felt like crossing a bright line, and I should - probably think about why - it might or might not be the wrong way to think about it but I should at least be aware I am doing it. ...I think it felt the same way when I was deciding to Gate into the Fifth Army's camp to tell my people to surrender? It was not an incredibly reasoned decision, I was under time pressure and did not have a pre-existing heuristic for it. I did - compare it to the other options I could think of, and could not on the spot think of another path where we had a higher chance of maintaining the ceasefire. All the other ways of communicating a surrender order would either be too slow or - not convincing enough, to soldiers under attack by a terrifying enemy, and even if you had convinced Tantara not to escalate, I do not think I could have convinced my King again, not once you had slaughtered several hundred of our men. It was hard enough talking everyone into it the first time.: 

He closes his eyes. :But it was also a tactically stupid decision in many ways. I knew that General Shaiknam had been trying to corner me into escalating, by putting me in a position where the alternative was to leave my people to die, and I still - could not actually decide to stand back and watch.: 

(And he wasn't going to die forever. That's a key part of it, and the decision must make very little sense to Iomedae, not knowing that. He's still - well, he can't be scared right now, of the consequences if he tells her, but he can still notice that he doesn't want to.) 

Permalink Mark Unread

:The ceasefire would most definitely have fallen apart if I'd killed you, which I would have done if I'd possessed a ranged weapon.

In your place I'd have let my soldiers die, though under some circumstances it would have been - very very difficult. And of course my soldiers wouldn't have believed I ordered them to attack during a ceasefire; that's an important sort of advantage to preserve, when it's attainable.:

Permalink Mark Unread

:It is possible it was something I misjudged because I am - not used to there being anyone or anything in the world that can kill me that trivially. I - think I expected you to try, and that you might succeed, but that I would have - more time - I am not sure. It was mostly a decision I made on instinct. 

 

...I am glad it did not go that way.: And it's easier to be calm about the thought, with the no-fear effect in place, but he...maybe still wants a hug about it, actually. 

Permalink Mark Unread

Hug. :I'm very glad it did not go that way. I have thought about whether I should - be more careful, be less someone who predictably might try to kill you under the circumstances I arrived in. It would have been - an extraordinary loss.:

Permalink Mark Unread

Less of a loss than she thinks, for him - a disaster for Predain, but less of one than if they had won the war and gotten as far as trying to capture Urtho's Tower... 

He should tell her. It's actually very relevant information for her to have, if she's going to be in the position of having to decide whether to rescue him at some risk to herself. He should tell her and he's not scared because he can't be, he just - doesn't - 

:It must have seemed incredibly reasonable to kill me, given the information you would have learned about me from Tantara's side.: 

It is at this point fairly obvious in his body language that he's holding something back, and he can't exactly be stressed about it but he's definitely deeply conflicted. 

Permalink Mark Unread

:I was worried it'd make it hard to rebuild Predain after the war. Because the prisoners I spoke to admired you so much, and I suspected would never trust or forgive me or Aroden if I killed you in the war. I wasn't thinking about it as a loss beyond - that, and the way every death is a loss - but I think I wasn't giving you enough credit. The thoughts in your letters to Urtho - I had them all read to me - they would only have been mildly impressive in my world but here you were inventing the whole underlying framework from scratch -:

Permalink Mark Unread

Ma'ar doesn't really know how to respond to that. :I was not very good at it - I was so confused about basic things... I suppose that is easier to see in hindsight, and after having had the headband for a while, but I am not surprised you were not especially impressed.: 

Permalink Mark Unread

 :I would have been very impressed, if I'd done enough background reading to realize how much of it you were developing for yourself without examples to reason from. In our world, it's work Aroden did, or got from lost Azlant, and so no one who wants to think about it has to start from nothing. I was impressed even without that, but less so.:

Permalink Mark Unread

He leans on her shoulder. :...I wish I had grown up in a world that had an Aroden. I - think I would not have been me, especially, if I were born somewhere that already had very powerful people and gods working toward - the sorts of things I care about. I would have been something different, but - it seems better.: And maybe something that hurts less to be. 

Permalink Mark Unread

:Well, it's not like they're doing an adequate job of it. But - it makes sense that it'd be very different to feel entirely alone.:

Permalink Mark Unread

He lets out his breath, slightly shakily. :I suppose not. ...Anyway I was talking about my decisions. After we got you out and you healed me, I was trying to stay on top of the situation by communication-spell while also guarding you, I was very afraid someone else would come after you and I am the fastest in the kingdom at Gating out. I am not sure I made obvious mistakes, but I was less on top of things than I might have been if I were in a proper meeting room with maps and my advisors, and I am not entirely sure that was the right allocation of priorities. ...I was also impaired, I think, the healing did not entirely fix whatever Aroden did to my head by contacting me. I think I was reacting mostly on instinct and using pre-existing contingencies up until the point when you gave me the headband. I was very overwhelmed, and - spending a lot of mental energy trying to deal with feeling overwhelmed and scared, rather than on the actual concrete decisions. That is...definitely a skill I want to improve at but I am not sure it is exactly a decision I could have made any differently.: 

Permalink Mark Unread

She nods. :I usually try to ground a failure analysis out in a thought I had that I should have responded differently to having. Anything else is wishing for a miracle, in a sense.:

Permalink Mark Unread

He frowns. 

:...I thought about taking the headband while you were still unconscious. I think if I had done that, I would have been more on top of things, and - in fact not being on top of things did not result in any horrible disasters, but it certainly could have if we had been less lucky. ...My prediction is that you would not have minded, but we - I did not feel that we had the kind of alliance where it was an acceptable thing to do unilaterally without asking you. And also the Mindhealer and I were unsure if it was the only thing holding your head together, but it seems like in fact removing it it helped a bit, and - I am not sure if he could have concluded that in advance if I had pushed him harder on it. - Also I was scared of putting on the headband because the previous time it immediately caused me to spend ten minutes being very upset about all of my past mistakes, and I am not sure if that was distorting my judgement.: 

Permalink Mark Unread

:I wouldn't have been angry if you'd done that, it wouldn't've been useful to be angry about. I might've - dispreferred that you had done it, depending on how carefully I thought you'd been thinking about it. 

It seems pretty reasonable to not put it on if you suspect it'll be incapacitating? It's - not supposed to do that.:

Permalink Mark Unread

:It was not actually incapacitating the most recent time? It might just be that I was injured before.: Shrug. :I think I endorse the decision I in fact made, and - endorse having put the headband on once you did offer it to me.:

Permalink Mark Unread

:That seems reasonable.:

Permalink Mark Unread

Nod. 

:After I put on the headband, I - thought about all of the important considerations, I did not take  - and concluded that making progress on the peace talks was the highest priority. I was confused about the goals of the Star-Eyed in what happened, and the dead shaman, and whether there were likely to be further incidents, but I decided the best way to be in a good position to handle further incidents would be if we were officially at peace with Tantara and I could just - work with Urtho on it. ...I met with my King and had a very exhausting conversation where I had to convince him that we could even meaningfully negotiate with Urtho at all, his perspective was that Urtho was clearly not actually in charge and most of the major strategic decisions were being made by random cultists of various gods. Which is...not even really wrong...it was just not going to help if we were additionally still at war with Urtho.: 

Permalink Mark Unread

:Indeed not. And it matters a lot how Tantara regards the god-interventions, whether the people see these actions as having been done in their service or not.:

Permalink Mark Unread

:I think they mostly do not. I already thought so at the time, perhaps with less justification. I did push very hard for Urtho to - take measures to make sure they were contained - before we proceeded further with peace talks. I think that went fine.: 

He thinks. :- A part where I would have asked your advice, if you were available for it, is on negotiating the level of restriction Predain would accept on our internal use of blood-magic and compulsions. I am not actually intending to use any blood-magic in the near future, and expect we will eventually negotiate an agreement where we make it illegal, but - I was very very reluctant to weaken our position, in case it made it look more tempting in Foresight for the gods to attack us. And it felt important to me that while we still do not have a trusted religious order to hold mages with compulsions, which will take a long time to set up, Predain can still capture any mages of Vkandis or shamans of the Star-Eyed if they actually enter our territory. It felt like we would be giving up a major avenue in keeping our people - and you - safe, if we made a formal agreement to stop. I...think I expect you to disagree with some part of that reasoning but I am not sure where exactly.: 

Permalink Mark Unread

:That seems reasonable to me. I might have committed not to no use but to some kind of formal international accountability process on each occasion of use, so you can do it whenever it's worth the hassle and headache of convincing the churches of Aroden and the Nameless Flame, and some Tantaran representatives, and so on, that you were acting reasonably in response to a threat.:

Permalink Mark Unread

Nod. :I - think I worried it would take too long, and I did not want to delay the peace treaty on building new institutions that do not actually exist yet in this world - the temple of the Eternal Flame is probably willing to administer your idea of having a neutral order of priests who can use compulsions, but they have never done something similar before. I imagine the church of Aroden has, and if they were here I would have been more comfortable working with them on it.:

Permalink Mark Unread

:Yes, I think it's very reasonable to say you'll continue your present policies while whatever you want to manage things in the long run hasn't yet been established.

And right to contemplate whether you will have any - vulnerabilities visible in prophecy. It's sometimes worth expending a lot of resources in a situation where harm has already been done, to make it obvious in prophecy that that approach won't work - it's sort of why Aroden's killing the Star-Eyed - but it's a very dangerous line of reasoning, one that often results in bad mistakes.:

Permalink Mark Unread

Blink. :I am not sure if you mean that the decision I made is the - thing that leads to very bad mistakes, or if you mean a different thing we could have done instead.:

Permalink Mark Unread

:The thing you did was very reasonable! The dangerous thing is - deciding that you'll kill the Star-Eyed if She attacks you, so that She'll see She shouldn't. For example. Aroden can do that but I wouldn't myself.:

Permalink Mark Unread

:It is a mistake I might be more tempted to make if we had anything like the capabilities we would need to retaliate after the fact! Most of why it matters to me to avoid any vulnerabilities, right now, is that we incredibly cannot afford any more serious losses.:

Permalink Mark Unread

:That makes sense. 

For what it's worth, a lot of my worries about the blood-magic and compulsions are not about what will come of it in your time, but what will come of it after your time.:

Permalink Mark Unread

Nod. :I think I want to better understand the experience and intuitions that make that concern obvious to you, but not as a priority right now.:

He’s relieved that Iomedae doesn’t think he was being obviously stupid, in what he negotiated for Predain. He…wishes that were more deeply convincing to his emotions that he actually hasn’t been making a terrible mistake that will be embarrassingly obvious in hindsight at some later point.

:I think the next major decisions were around negotiating with the temple orders, and - the only one that was really high risk, where I was putting sone thing at stake such that a betrayal would be cost more that we could recover from, was bringing you. I had a very confusing conversation with Kariasha about it. …It turned out well, obviously, I am very glad I took that gamble, but - I am still not sure if I was tracking the right considerations. It is a type of decision where I have very few existing heuristics.:

Permalink Mark Unread

:It would've been very bad if the nameless god also wanted to eat me: she agrees. :The upside was - my being competent before we return to Golarion?:

Permalink Mark Unread

:And knowing that we have an ally among the gods here. It - I was putting weight on it, that we had such a firm piece of evidence that Bestet the god, and not just Her temple, is, well, at least more on our side than on the side of Vkandis. ...I am not sure if that was actually an important consideration, it felt important at the time but I may just have - wanted to feel safer.: Shrug. :I do think having you functional sooner is a major upside. It might take months for Urtho to reach your world, though I am hoping for weeks, and - there are a large number of problems you are well equipped to solve or head off.: 

He closes his eyes, trying to remember. :I talked to Her priestess, Thaliss. About the request that their temple set up a priest order with permission to use compulsions, but - trying to get a read on her - not sure if I would normally have found it useful but the headband is very helpful for trusting my sense of someone's character. I concluded that she is someone who cares very much about - things being good - and she careful, not exactly in the way I am, but - careful about tracking things which hurt people, or which have indirect effects that might cause more people to be hurt later. I was very scared, I am not used to trusting people based on trusting their - motivation to do the right thing, as opposed to their incentives.: 

It feels very hard to talk about, for some reason, he's grasping for concepts that he doesn't have words for. Maybe he had them before with the headband.

:...I remember thinking that in my position you would not be scared, and - that would not mean you would fail to be careful enough or miss warning signs, it would actually just mean that you could make a better assessment of the evidence you had, you would not be exaggerating the risk in your head because it felt scary, or only paying attention to the upsides and not the risk of betrayal... I think I thought about your decision to trust me, and how that - meant something good could happen that could not have happened otherwise.: 

 

...Honestly right now he is very badly wishing that Iomedae was a Thoughtsenser, and he could just shove it at her. 

Permalink Mark Unread

:You will, in fact, get betrayed sometimes, when you trust people. But - it's worth it, I think. For - yes, for the chance to notice if an enemy general is someone brilliant and careful who you want on your side, the chance to do the kinds of things that can't be done alone.:

Permalink Mark Unread

He leans on her shoulder. :That...is basically what I was thinking, to the extent I can recall it accurately.: 

And then he explained the situation to High Priestess Thaliss and she offered him a HUG and he hadn't realized how badly he needed it, hadn't really thought of it as the sort of thing that could help at all. He...sort of wants to talk to Iomedae about that, too, but he isn't sure what he's confused about and it sounds like a different conversation. 

:I decided it was worth it to ask her about the Mindhealer. She must have been aware of how worried I was - she was willing to let us bring guards, with weapons, even though that is normally against the rules at their holy sites. - I ended up deciding against that, it is really not the sort of thing that would help if the Nameless God had decided to eat you, and would mostly just result in a lot of other people dying. Anyway. I agreed to speak to her later, and came back and we talked. I am not sure if you remember much of it, you were still fairly impaired.: 

(It's the same conversation where he said...something, he can't remember exactly which of the things it was...and she had the baffling response about thinking it was sweet and not being sure it was okay to say it when it was clearly irresponsible for them to have a romantic relationship. He - sort of has questions about that too, actually, but he's not sure if this is a good time for it, yet.) 

Permalink Mark Unread

:I don't remember it. Do you have it in your notes?:

Permalink Mark Unread

It should be in the timeline notes he gave her, but heavily summarized, it wasn't really one of the major decisions Iomedae made and so he didn't focus on it. He does have more on it in his own notes - he was taking a lot more personal recordkeeping notes when he had the headband, it made it so easy - and he has those on him, and with that prompt can pull more of his recollection of it.

 

He gave her an update on the recent peace treaty negotiations. She seemed pleased with his progress, said it was better than she had expected. He said it helped that she believed he could do it, they didn't talk about that further. He explained that he might have a plan to get better healing for her; she said Aroden would be annoyed if she needed rescuing from an evil god trying to destroy her mind a second time. Ma'ar explained that he was very confident they could trust the temple order of the Nameless god, and - less confident, but still positive, that they could trust the god as well. He said it seemed like Velgarth's gods often need to act through mortals, and so it felt somewhat reassuring that he was fairly sure none of the mortals involved in the church would be okay with horribly betraying them. 

He said he had asked Marlana to pray to Bestet for guidance, and why he was inclined to believe that Bestet was on their side. Iomedae thought about it, to the best of her ability, and agreed with that assessment. She brought up that a particular healing spell from her world would probably do it, if Aroden had a church here and could grant it. Ma'ar wasn't sure what Aroden would need to do that; he explained that he planned to ask Urtho for help on researching interworld Gates, but was worried about how long this would take. Iomedae said she was probably too impaired to be thinking about good uses of Urtho's terrifying talents, and also expressed that it wasn't an emergency and she would be able to put herself together eventually.

Ma'ar agreed that it wasn't an emergency and that he'd had enough past advice from her to follow it and probably avoid very stupid mistakes. She said it hadn't been very long. He said it had been very high quality advice and that, at least with the headband, he could get by for now by imagining what she would have said. She said it that was sweet of him to say that, and also that she wasn't sure if it was a good idea for her to tell him that. He tried to reassure her that it was fine and she shouldn't worry about things being a bad idea to say, because he was aware she was impaired and would account for it. 

Permalink Mark Unread

She reads through it, nodding thoughtfully like everything she said makes perfect sense to her (which it does). 

Permalink Mark Unread

(Ma'ar is still confused about the whole 'romantic feelings' part of the conversation, but that's a separate conversation and doesn't seem as high-priority.) 

 

After that he went back to for further peace talks. Followup with the temple of Vkandis confirmed that the other mages involved in the superweapon attack had been tracked down. They had been in the Ceej Empire, which does use compulsions for capturing mages, and used them when they were helping capture said mages. The temple of Vkandis, Urtho speaking for Tantara, and Ma'ar speaking for Predain, all agreed that not removing said compulsions was reasonable as an interim solution. 

The temple of the Nameless God offered to take custody of Ravenwing, the surviving shaman of the Star-Eyed, who is apparently extremely distressed after recent events; they thought they could maybe help her come to terms with what happened. They weren't comfortable (yet) about their ability to hold potentially dangerous prisoners, so Ma'ar and Urtho figured out an interim agreement on having one of his mages put compulsions on her, so that she wouldn't be dangerous to the priests of the Nameless God. 

Permalink Mark Unread

:I really think you handled all of this very well. And I'm glad there are alternatives to just killing people.:

Permalink Mark Unread

Ma'ar leans on her for a moment. 

:After that I went to interview Kariasha, to - see if I could get any more information on whether it was a good idea to bring you to her.: 

He's going to lean pretty heavily on his notes, for this, because for some reason he still doesn't want to think about that conversation in too much depth. With his notes, though, he can recount it almost word for word. 

It was brave of you to come, when you are so afraid of me, and of Them. I kind of hate that I could make people trust me, if I wanted. That is not what trust is for, but it still makes it feel hostile to ask for it, that I could.

I am certain I can ease her suffering. I am not sure if I can heal her. The Eternal Flame has come to me a few times, but it is really not at the times when you would think the stakes were highest. I think it would help her either way, to come to the holy sanctuary. Knowing what I do of her, I think she would choose the risk, if it were her choice, but she would not be afraid. You are, and she entrusted the choice to you. I am not going to ask you to go against your conscience.

Are there questions I can answer that would help? I could - I am not very good at this, usually people come here because they already follow and trust the Eternal Flame, and I should know why but it is hard to convey in words.

He - it's not quite right to say that he liked her, at that point, but he had an overall positive impression, even if mostly he was very confused. His question for her was: why did she trust her god? 

And she told him the very baffling story of how, apparently, the Nameless God gave her miraculous Mindhealing powers. 

Permalink Mark Unread

:This really does continue to sound like probably Sarenrae. The ancient gods are more baffling because they're - paying attention on weird levels, to weird features of situations.:

Permalink Mark Unread

:It was very baffling! I, just... It did feel like evidence that the Nameless God was - at least not the sort of god who would use Their people to betray and kill someone who was trying to act in good faith.:

Permalink Mark Unread

:Yes.:

Permalink Mark Unread

:Anyway, I thought about the various ways it could go. I did not actually expect a miracle to be very likely, since apparently they are expensive, but the worst scenario - where They also tried to break you, which I think Kariasha would have needed to willingly facilitate. And - even then, I thought that Aroden would probably intervene and - at the very least be able to grab you if you died and find a way to fix it. Which would still be very bad! But not…bad on a level where it destroyed all of our options to fix things, forever. Probably. And the upside seemed - worth reaching for.:

Permalink Mark Unread

: - even bigger upsides than you probably imagined, actually, because I have some - ambitious plans I need to be really really sure of myself to go ahead with, and that probably must be laid before we contact Golarion. I'm glad you did it.:

Permalink Mark Unread

He nods, slowly. :...I admit I am curious what plans. I am not going to - press you to tell me, if you are worried about operational security - or about how will react to it showing up more clearly in Foresight than you do alone, which might be a reasonable concern, it seems like our gods cannot see you as well as usual and this is much of why they were so alarmed. But it seems likely it would be - something where I want to help.: 

Permalink Mark Unread

 

 

So she tells him about Hell. 

 

She hates telling people about Hell. It's necessary, even in Golarion, because most people don't really think about it, don't really want to think about it, if you put up an illusion in the town square they scurry away, it's not good for them to know. She feels like Pharasma's instrument, when she lectures people on how they need to stop being Evil so they aren't horrendously tortured; it's impossible not to feel like Hell's beneficiary, when people moved to terror for their immortal souls give her money for her crusade.

But it's true, and they will make less stupid decisions, if they know.

 

 

Permalink Mark Unread

 

:One of Urtho's superweapons - it's a self-sustaining magical chain reaction, it eats magic and spreads from there. It's partially disassembled, only Urtho can fix it, but I expect he will, if I ask him to, which I haven't because - because this is in fact the kind of plan where the downside is almost without bounds -

- I think prophecy will be messy at home, too, if people from your world show up, the same way it was messy here when I arrived. I think that Asmodeus won't be able to see what I've done until I've done it. And what I want to do is send someone to Dis with it and trigger it. Avernus is too sparsely populated, but we could get nearly all of Dis, I expect, and if local mages can Gate there from here they'll have difficulty seeing us coming. 

It is the kind of spectacularly horrifying suicide mission where I don't know what would happen to the soul of the person doing it and they might in fact end up in Hell. 

 

- to be clear, what will probably happen is that Aroden will tell Asmodeus this and bargain for the release of some enormous number of souls, or some other thing as good as that, and we won't in fact use a contagious magic superweapon to eat a plane of Hell. But if Aroden doesn't call it off at the last second I do uncomplicatedly intend to do it.:

Permalink Mark Unread

Ma'ar listens calmly. It's not productive, to be upset about horrible things when you're still in the middle of hearing about them and don't yet know how far to update, how much worse the world is than you previously realized. 

(And he's not personally afraid. One, because he can't be afraid right now, and two, because even if it turns out that this affects the people of Velgarth - which he suspects not - or will affect the people of Velgarth in future once there's contact between the worlds, it's not going to be applicable to him.) 

He's impressed. It is, in fact, a blindingly ambitious plan. He's not sure he would have thought to propose it. 

 

:That - makes sense. Is there any way the person's soul could be retrieved from Hell - by Aroden, or by your world's magic, or if I develop a new kind of Gate? ...I suppose it would be difficult to be sure, and so that is still an enormous thing to ask: 

(It's possible one or more of his immortality contingencies would survive that. But it's also possible none of them would, and - the one that seems most likely to work even if he's in another plane entirely is also the one he hates.) 

:I think I would want us to study the weapon directly, I - am not sure I trust Urtho to have thought through all of the potential side effects, especially those involving setting it off in other planes, it seems - not entirely guaranteed to me that it would only affect the plane of Hell. But I suppose that might be apparent to Aroden in Foresight. And if He negotiates an agreement then it will not need to be set off at all.: 

Permalink Mark Unread

:We should not assume Aroden can see anything; if He can, Asmodeus probably can too, and we're deliberately trying to benefit from the fact that this interworld travel has apparently been hard for the gods to account for. We're going to have to figure out all of the expected side effects ourselves. And while the most likely outcome is that we won't have to set it off, we should make all our plans on the assumption that we will have to set it off. You never want to be in a position where Aroden doesn't call it off and you realize you weren't actually expecting to have to do it. 

Obviously I'll arrange an attempted resurrection for the person who carries the attack out, but I don't want to count on it working - and no, it absolutely should not be you. If I ask this of my Knights I will have hundreds of volunteers.:

Permalink Mark Unread

Nod. :I think I see why you said that I would find to valuable to meet the people from your organization. They sound incredibly admirable.: 

He has to take a moment to close his eyes and retrieve his previous train of thought, because he's not actually sure he was done debriefing all of his decisions with Iomedae. 

:- Right. In that case I am very glad I made the decision I did, even if your plan is not information I had at the time. ...I am trying to think what else. I brought you here. I decided to stay with you until I was actually due for my meeting with Urtho, which - might or might not have been a mistake in expectation in the scenario where the Nameless God did turn out to be an enemy, and - which was a decision I made mostly because I felt very reluctant to leave, as opposed to on strategic grounds. In practice it went fine, obviously, and I am very glad I stayed, but I am not sure if the decision process was one I endorse.: 

Permalink Mark Unread

:It seems possible that you are having the problem where being in love with someone compromises your judgment. When I was young I found that quite hard to compensate for.:

Permalink Mark Unread

Permalink Mark Unread

What are you even supposed to say to that. 

:I - should - probably try to figure out if I am having that problem and if so how to compensate for it: Ma'ar manages, even though this feels like a very inane response, because he's pretty sure he can't just sit here not saying anything.

(And he's separately confused about why he feels so put on the spot and like he has no reasonable response to this lined up. He...had in fact thought to wonder about it, before.) 

Permalink Mark Unread

:You can have the headband back to think about it, if you like. It - takes a lot of practice - I'm happy to try to show you how I do it, but it's not something I am wildly experienced with either.:

Permalink Mark Unread

:Mmm.:

Is putting the headband back on going to be terrible. Iomedae said it wasn't supposed to be terrible, so the fact that it's often kind of terrible probably points at some different kind of mistake he's making. He's pretty sure it's a separate mistake from the - maybe having his judgement compromised because he's maybe in love with Ioemdae?? That does not seem like a problem that should cause him to be miserable. At least he doesn't think so. 

Focus. :I - think I would like to know how you do it. It might help to have the headband but - I am slightly worried about the thing where both putting it on and taking it off seem to be...difficult transitions...which you said is not really supposed to happen. ...Um. I cannot actually tell if you are - bothered if I feel this way - and that is probably going to factor in to whether I end up concluding that I did something wrong and then analyzing it in an exhausting way.: 

Permalink Mark Unread

:Of course I'm not bothered! That would be wholly unreasonable of me no matter who you were but you saved my life and ended the war and I'm quite in love with you myself so I really wouldn't call myself inconvenienced by it! I just want you to be able to think about what you want, here, what rules you think should guide you, instead of having feelings and then looking back on them and wishing you had walked away instead.:

Permalink Mark Unread

Oh. 

 

 

That's...a thing. Which he has positive, if confusing, feelings about. Which should probably not actually be incredibly surprising? He's replaying the actual things Iomedae has said to him over the last few days and...this is not especially surprising. He just - hasn't been looking at it straight-on, for some reason, probably because it kept repeatedly not feeling like a good time. 

It's peacetime. They're as safe as they're ever likely to be in Velgarth. There is really no reason, at this point, not to look at it. 

He takes a deep breath. :I think borrowing the headband would be useful, and we definitely need to have this conversation before we - decide anything. ...I think it is possible I might get upset for some completely unpredictable reason, I think that is happening a lot right now and I am not entirely sure what is going on, it is not - about you.: 

Permalink Mark Unread

:You've been enduring a lot for a long time.: And she takes the headband off and offers it to him.

Permalink Mark Unread

He puts it on. 

 

 

It's starting to become a familiar experience, the way his mind - opens up, a sudden new spaciousness, the sense he could pick any of a dozen lines of thought he wasn't even consciously aware of a moment ago and follow them. The sense of - transparency, in his own thoughts, of having space not just to have them but to be an observer of them. And the emotions - intensifying, some, but mostly just spreading out, as though his emotions were previously a dozen different shades of paint, present in various ratios but all mixed together, are now neatly separately into swatches of emotional color that he can pull at one at a time and name and examine. 

...He is not currently too upset or overwhelmed to easily form his thoughts into Mindspeech, but it feels like it might be more useful to Iomedae to just see it, so he opens his shields further and offers a deeper Mindspeech link to her, if she wants to take it. 

 

 

He's happy. It actually takes a few entire seconds to figure out what the feeling is, because apparently it's been a very long time - flag that observation, it...probably explains some things about his recent confusing reactions to things - and it's a different flavor of it from the happiness he had, in hindsight so briefly, at Urtho's Tower. There's safety there, and separate from it - though it's easy to fail to distinguish them when he isn't the headband - the feeling of not being alone. Which, again in hindsight, he had such a bare taste of at Urtho's Tower, it never felt like he was one of them), but it's so much more than just that flavor. 

It's more than just that. He admires Iomedae, possibly more than he's ever admired anyone, and he thinks he basically endorses that, who could possibly disagree that Iomedae is one of the more impressive people in the world, but it's a distractingly warm and bright feeling and he could definitely see how it could - block out other quiet notes of dissatisfaction, make it hard to notice if in any given case he actually disagrees with Iomedae's decision or Iomedae's reasoning. 

(He appreciates her so much -) 

He wants her to be proud of him. This is not an entirely unfamiliar emotion - he wanted it very badly from Urtho, and over years learned to ignore the itchy pain of not having that - but the way it feels when she is proud of him (happyhappyhappy) is....a different flavor of the thing. ...He thinks this is actually fine, to the extent that the kinds of thing Iomedae will be proud of him about basically just match the kinds of action he endorses doing anyway, though it maybe shifts the relative weighting on things and he should keep that in mind. 

It feels very good having saved her life. It especially feels very good when she thanks him for it. 

He wants to be around her. Now that he's staring at it, he thinks he wants it even apart from wanting her advice or her reassurance or for her to make him not afraid, or wanting to be nearby enough that he can have her out of a dangerous situation and through a Gate in less than a second, or wanting to be nearby where she could protect him from an attack and so he could coax his mind to relax and stop obsessively tracking all of the potential threats. But even if it weren't any of those things, it feels - warm and happy and good to be where she is. Though he doesn't completely blame himself for not noticing the distinction before, since most of the time either one or the other of those conditions did hold. 

He wants her to be safe and happy and achieve everything she wants. Which is something he wants for everyone, and the combined emotional force of wanting it for everyone still feels like it's probably stronger, overall, when he's focusing on it - but Iomedae is right here and she's very very salient to his mind and it's easy to mostly focus on the Iomedae-related feelings at the exclusion of all the others. Though this is mitigated by the fact that, as far as he can tell, one of the most important facts about Iomedae is that she too wants everyone to be safe and happy and have everything they need and want, to the extent that probably this is most of what it means for her to be achieve everything she wants. And he thinks he - probably endorses to some extent focusing on what he can do personally for Iomedae's safety and wellbeing more than what he can do personally for the wellbeing of a randomly selected peasant in Predain, because she can do so much with it, but - not infinitely. And not always, because Iomedae faces greater dangers than most people but she's also far more equipped to protect herself against them. 

 

- remembering the awful feeling of that not being true, the moments when Iomedae was severely injured and helpless and Ma'ar desperately wanted her advice and the only way he was ever going to have her advice again was if he could manage to stay in control of the situation, on his own, without her advice. And he was scared for a lot of reasons, the future of Predain looming high among them, but - yeah, to a significant extent he was scared because losing Iomedae, specifically, felt like one of the worst things that could happen. It would in fact have been pretty bad for a whole range of reasons! But probably not all of the strength of that fear was for strategic reasons. 

 

He gets a lot more out of her hugs than with most people, and - can appreciate her touch from a much wider range of emotional states? Normally, when he's in the mode of - orienting toward threats, even very abstract threats like faraway troops that definitely aren't about to attack him back in the Citadel, often even non-agentic threats like storms and droughts and plagues - this is fairly incompatible with finding it comfortable to be touched, let alone actively wanting it. He can barely remember being young enough that his parents ever cuddled him, even when they were still alive - older children were more likely to be whacked with sticks for misbehaving, not that this particularly bothered him - and after that was a journey of months that (actually he is definitely not going to think about with the headband on.) It took multiple years after he reached the safety of Urtho's Tower before he learned to really ever be in the right headspace for physical intimacy, though he did eventually put a lot of effort into that for...reasons...but since the beginning of the war, he suspects he's mostly fallen back on much older habits. With Iomedae, it's - well, probably a lot of it is just the no-fear effect, but he thinks it isn't just that, she's also - given him some very costly demonstrations that she wants him to stay alive, and is competent to achieve that, and that he can afford to feel safe in her arms. 

...Ma'ar doesn't especially think this aspect is a problem. He thinks he's just right about the implicit factual claim that Iomedae isn't going to hurt him. It's a good thing, that he hasn't had in a long time, and - never really had alongside all of the other good things, like Iomedae being one of the most objectively impressive people in the entire world. 

 

(There is definitely an undercurrent of thinking that it would be very enjoyable to kiss Iomedae right now, but Ma'ar is mostly not focused on that, it seems - not unrelated to, but mostly downstream of, the other things that are actually likely to be compromising his judgement.) 

Permalink Mark Unread

This seems like a totally reasonable analysis along the lines she herself did the first time she fell in love with someone and she approves wholeheartedly! She's not going to interrupt him with commentary, that would be rude. In general she's trying not to - be persuasive, here, about anything, he should figure out for himself what he wants and how he'll know if that changes, and until he knows that she should mostly stay out of his way.

Permalink Mark Unread

He lets her see, but thinks through all of it in silence without saying anything. 

 

...He doesn't want to decide to stop having the feelings that are plausibly going to compromise his judgement in some situations. He wants - the thing they can have if they both love each other. It feels like a step toward being a whole and happy human, it's not - unbiased - but it feels like at least some of the time it might be the kind of thing that biases him in directions that are better than the ones he was biased in before. Maybe. 

He thinks he can reason around it, at least well enough not to accidentally make decisions that are very bad for his other goals, and he thinks he's - willing to accept that sometimes his priorities will be slightly shifted around. The obvious path is just to write down all the cases where he has strong feelings about something Iomedae-related, and invest in building some very firm mental habits to catch himself in those patterns, that will work with or without the headband. He should make a regular habit of keeping his private notes up to date, that's one of the best ways he has to replicate the headband effect of being able to observe his own thoughts and emotions, he's just - had less time, lately. But it's peacetime now. He can afford it. 

He plausibly also wants Iomedae's help to notice if he's in a situation of the type where his judgement might be compromised by being in love with her, and reminding him to think about it. And he maybe wants to borrow the headband for a few minutes every day, at least until he has non-headband-reliant mental habits really solidly down. 

Both of those are things Iomedae should get to have input on, so - what does she think? 

Permalink Mark Unread

:I will definitely let you know if I think your judgment might be compromised, and I think borrowing the headband every day is a good idea. We share it around for major decisions in council, at home.:

Permalink Mark Unread

:That makes sense. It is incredibly useful once you are - used to it.: 

...He's not sure where this conversation goes from here. 

Permalink Mark Unread

Well, she's not going to rush him on the thinking-through-everything.

Permalink Mark Unread

He'll spend a while mulling on it, turning over the various thoughts and emotions and looking at them from different angles, but he...feels like he's poked at most of the main considerations here? 

 

...The part he's now confused about is that he's never actually had a romantic relationship of a kind that - feels like what he would want with Iomedae? He's slept with plenty of people, sometimes on a recurring basis, on one occasion over a period of years.

He's assiduously avoided any kind of intimate relationship with people in his chain of command. This was not a preexisting norm in Predain, but Predain before his time mostly just didn't have women in political let alone military positions, and it's a norm that Tantara has that, after years of watching his fellow students at Urtho's Tower making baffling decisions in the pursuit of romance, he decided he approved of. It didn't feel like much of a sacrifice; he can't think of a time where he would have romantically pursued someone, or more likely allowed himself to be pursued by them, if not for the fact that it was against the rules. 

He's generally liked the women he courted, or who courted him. Respected them, even. But it's...different...it was always at least a bit the case that they lived and moved in different worlds, and he thinks that mattered to him, that it usually didn't feel like anything really important was at stake. 

 

Right now it feels like something very important could be at stake. It's...scary, actually, though of course he doesn't feel scared right now. 

(He continues to hold all of these thoughts open to Iomedae.) 

Permalink Mark Unread

:'no one in your chain of command' is a good rule. You should definitely stick to it. It can be inconvenient, for example if every single person who believes in your cause and your vision joins your paladin order, but it's in fact worth it. 

I don't know what you want. I can tell you what I want, if you don't think it'll distract you from figuring out what you want.:

Permalink Mark Unread

:...I suppose I should not join your paladin order, then.: He shakes his head a little. :Assuming you would even have me. ...I think it would be helpful, and not distracting, to know more of what you want.: Just so he can get a wider sense of the space of things people might want at all, if it's neither the thing he had before nor, what, getting married in a temple and raising children, which feels faintly ridiculous as a concept applied to him and more ridiculous than that applied to Iomedae. 

Permalink Mark Unread

:I want to spar at whatever the appropriate handicap turns out to be and figure out the logistics and side effects of using Urtho's contagious magic-eating weapon on a plane of Hell and invent interworld Greater Teleport and have sex and smile knowingly at each other and build the Church of Aroden in Predain and pet your hair and so on, for about the next decade, until I ascend and become a god who I guess I should warn you won't - I love human things, I'm human, I'm not ashamed of that, but I'm not planning to keep it. I'm going to be the god that we need to fix the world, and I won't be like Shizuru, I won't have - love, I won't have weaknesses.:

Permalink Mark Unread

:That makes sense. I would not expect you to be that kind of god, I cannot see how you could be. It is not - really the thing about you that is important to me, that you love me, though I - it does make me happy. All of those things sound - good. And–: 

 

He considers it for a while. 

:I want to understand how you think. As much as I can, in the time that we have. I want - your world has so much history to build on, and you have - built so much on it - I know it will still be there but I want to learn it from you. I want to know all the stories of your life and meet your friends and see the organization you built. I want to do something completely ridiculous like built a nice cabin in the literal Void and have sex with you there. ...Also I would really like to kill the Star-Eyed for you but I am unlikely to be able to pull that off.: 

Permalink Mark Unread

: - only because we will probably kill her before you grow that strong! I would bet on you getting it done eventually.:

Permalink Mark Unread

Heeeeee kind of wants to kiss her for saying that! And also currently has headband-supercharged powers of noticing what Iomedae wants purely from body language. Does it seem like she would be on board with this plan? 

(He's so happy. It's a confusing dizzy kind of happiness that almost hurts, he's so happy.) 

Permalink Mark Unread

Yes, absolutely she would enjoy that! She's felt that way for a while and not especially been concealing it except while he was thinking about whether his judgment was being compromised.

Permalink Mark Unread

Ma'ar kisses her. 

(He's kissed a lot of people. Insofar as there's a generalizable skill there, he's good at it. Most of the times, he even wanted to be there kissing whoever it was, though he's not sure he's ever been quite this thoroughly delighted about it.) 

 

This is really not what he was expecting when he Gated here today, but it's peacetime, and he is explicitly taking at least today off, and they're as safe as they can reasonably be and Iomedae is okay. And he...is probably not entirely okay, not really, Iomedae is right that he's spent a very long time enduring a lot of things, and Predain is still waiting for him with its parades but also its unsolved problems. But for right now, he's deciding not to use any of his headband-boosted faculties on thinking about that. 

Permalink Mark Unread

Iomedae is okay. She has a terrifying assault on Hell to plan but honestly she absolutely loves that kind of thing, and she has allies, and she has friends, and she has peace, and she has someone who would try, with or without her, to make the world better, who conceives of himself as someone who could never stop, and he's not in her chain of command for once, and she is human and yearns for human things.

She is not particularly good at kissing. She has spent precisely eight days of her life trying out a romantic relationship and it was several decades ago. If you could kiss with a sword she would probably be much better at it.

Permalink Mark Unread

...That's adorable. Also kind of entertaining. Ma'ar is not at all bothered, and if anything is going to enjoy the one time he is better than Iomedae at anything that isn't, like, Velgarth Gates. Iomedae did admit to being not particularly experienced at romance, but she was so incredibly poised and in control and helpful when they were talking about what they would want out of a relationship. 

 

He's pretty confident in his ability to tell whether Iomedae would want to take it further than kissing, but he is somewhat less sure whether the temple order of the Nameless God has opinions about that sort of thing happening in the guest rooms at their holy site. He's not in a rush. They probably have a decade. (Also, he continues to actually be pretty tired.) Maybe they can just kiss for a while, until Iomedae seems to be getting the hang of it, and then cuddle. 

Permalink Mark Unread

That sounds like the kind of opinion you'd have about this if it hasn't been thirty years since you last had sex. 

She doesn't push it.  She'll just hold him and share-to-his-mindspeech warmth and fondness and pride and admiration.

Permalink Mark Unread

(It's been, like, three years for Ma'ar, which is long enough. But he's going to be so much less distracted if they aren't doing it with only a curtain between them and an entire holy site full of orphans and apprentice priests, while trying to fit onto a straw-stuffed pallet that is noisy and honestly not wide enough for both of them but shoving the two together leaves an awkward gap. What if the Mindhealer decides to check on her patient. Also there aren't enough shields here that he feels comfortable folding away his mage-sight, and he's kind of way too tired to figure out logistics for Gating somewhere else.

...and there's at least one conversation they definitely still need to have, first, though this is only a quiet background note.) 

He snuggles against her and closes his eyes and...he doesn't normally fall asleep with a Mindspeech link still half-open to someone but he's very relaxed. 

Permalink Mark Unread

She really has no reason to be tired, at this point, she has a ring of sustenance and napped quite recently, but it's nice to fall asleep holding someone, and she'll sleep too. 

Permalink Mark Unread

Ma'ar sleeps very soundly, with Iomedae right there; he has mage-sight open and would still wake up to anything unexpected, but nothing unexpected happens. It's peaceful. 

 

He does not have a Ring of Sustenance and is going to sleep awkwardly longer than her, though they went to bed early enough that he'll still be awake by dawn, not that dawn is incredibly obvious from deep inside a cave. 

Permalink Mark Unread

She prays, when she wakes up earlier than him. She has a lot of gods to thank for their assistance, and it's good for her to spend some time organizing her mind. 

Permalink Mark Unread

(The gods don't answer, but they almost certainly wouldn't anyway.) 

Ma'ar stirs, wakes up - extends mage-sight and Thoughtsensing to check his surroundings, instinctively, before even opening his eyes - and then rolls over and reaches for Iomedae. Iomedae is so pretty, he concludes, smiling sleepily at her. 

:Sleep well? - If you are feeling fine and expect not to need any more Mindhealing, I think it makes sense to return to Predain today.: Which has the important amenities of, for example, a SHIELDED ROOM and a COMFORTABLE BED. 

(...He definitely has to tell her about the thing. He is going to do that. He hasn't told anyone else about the thing before sleeping with them, but this feels - different. He's just. His prediction on 'will Iomedae be angry' is very uncertain right now.) 

Permalink Mark Unread

:That works for me. I want to notify Tantara that I am going, but I don't expect it to be a problem. I told Urtho that after the war I suspected Predain would need me more, and also I suspect it'll have less hostile god interference.:

Permalink Mark Unread

Nod. :How do you want to do that? We could in theory just Gate to the receiving area by Urtho's Tower, that is not against any agreements now.: 

He frowns for a moment, the headband making him catch onto an edge of unease that he might otherwise have plowed past. :...I think I feel reluctant to go with you, in that case, but I am not sure why and I am going to have to do it sooner or later, to meet with Urtho about the interworld Gate research.: 

Permalink Mark Unread

:Have you been back to the Tower since you left as a student?:

Permalink Mark Unread

:…Well, the one time, when the Star-Eyed was attacking you. For about three seconds.: And he wasn’t exactly invited.

Permalink Mark Unread

:Then it makes sense that going back would be - momentous. Maybe something to save for later and not an errand.:

Permalink Mark Unread

:...That makes sense. I can Gate you there from Predain and stay behind, or just pass it on via communication-spell.: 

Permalink Mark Unread

:The spell seems sufficient. 

 

Are there - things we should be cautious of, in Predain - I don't know your customs, I don't want to undermine you among your people, or spark rumors you don't want -:

Permalink Mark Unread

He considers it thoughtfully. 

:It might have confused or worried people during the war, when it was far less clear whether - you were basically acting as a pawn for Tantara - but I really think that coming home having gotten us peace and seduced the absurdly powerful warrior woman from another world, by rescuing you from the horrible gods - and presumably convincing you in the process that Tantara is bad and we are better, people will assume that - is not exactly going to undermine me with them. There are some cultural expectations around how I will act with you in public - people are not generally demonstrative in their affection in front of others - but I think it will not be that confusing for you.:

He frowns. :I need to think a bit more about how it will affect how they see you. It will - have an effect - I think mostly it will make it more salient that you are a woman. I doubt anyone whose opinion you care about will think worse of you as a result, unless you start shouting at me in public about some romantic slight, which I cannot imagine you doing. ...People will assume it is casual because I have made it fairly obvious at this point that I have no intention of getting married. If you talk about me in ways that make it sound like you are expecting marriage then people will question your judgement but I also really do not expect you to do that.: 

Permalink Mark Unread

:I indeed do not! - I like the people of Predain, from what I have encountered of them. They are very unsentimental and reasonable.:

Permalink Mark Unread

:They are! And - straightforward - people say what they mean, if someone feels wronged you will definitely find out from them - people might rob you in the street but they would generally not smile at you to your face and then betray you. I think there are some problems with it, but I like it too, it - makes sense to me.:

He makes a face. :Urtho's Tower was so confusing. I spent the entire first year reading everyone's mind most of the time, when they were not shielded, and this only made it slightly less confusing. I think I understand them better now but honestly there were some parts I was still confused by right up until I spent days in negotiations while wearing the headband.: 

Permalink Mark Unread

:That was what I eventually pieced together when I figured you out, that you could not be relied upon to make any ordinary social inferences that weren't derivable from mindreading.:

Permalink Mark Unread

Ma'ar is making such a face. 

:I...suppose that is a reasonable summary if you are considering me from Tantara's perspective, or your world's. I think I am fine at social inferences in Predain! ...I suppose I do read people's minds, sometimes, if it is important. Nobody would expect me not to be doing that, though, if they objected they would - obtain a shield-talisman, or a powerful ally, or maybe challenge me to a duel over it but only if they expected to win and no one has done that in fifteen years: 

Permalink Mark Unread

 

 

:I have a  - better, more detailed - understanding of you, now. But at the time it was helpful to make sense of why you had such a mix of apparent genius and apparent unforced errors, which was one of the big puzzles I was trying to make sense of. You lean on the mindreading a lot.:

Permalink Mark Unread

:....Huh. Was I really that confusing? I am aware I made a lot of stupid mistakes because I was - not considering the right context - but obviously from the inside it feels like it was all just the same way of making decisions. ...I do not think I am particularly a genius at anything except maybe experimental magic, and even there I think I am mostly just very stubborn. Urtho is a genius. And terrible at most things that are not magic and teaching students, I suppose.: 

Permalink Mark Unread

:It's much harder coming from entirely out of context, right, there was so much that anyone who knew you could have ruled out but I couldn't have. Rapidly rising to be the national hero and King's heir was - well, the obvious explanation was mind control, and a degree of political astuteness that didn't sit well with having been taken by surprise when Tantara attacked.

I think I reached my peak degree of confusion about you when you Gated in to rescue your men, and then the picture started to resolve.:

Permalink Mark Unread

:It is reasonable to be confused about that! It was a confusing thing to do even to people who do know me. It probably seems - I mean, it plausibly was a stupid decision that happened to go well, because of facts about you as a person I had no way of knowing, but it seems even stupider without - 

 

 

- I want to Gate us back to Predain and alert Urtho and then there is a conversation we...really should have.: He's not tensing up, but even with the no-fear effect it's taking some effort. 

Permalink Mark Unread

- she isn't going to try to guess, get worked up about things that might not even be true. It's not the best use of her time, for something she will learn shortly. 

 

She just nods. :All right.:

Permalink Mark Unread

Ma'ar has a very brief conversation to thank Priestess-Mindhealer Kariasha, in which he is mostly not consciously aware of what he's saying. He Gates them back to the Citadel, and while they walk from the Gate-room to his suite, he uses the communication-spell to contact Urtho and update him that Iomedae has made a full recovery, or as close to it as they're expecting before they make contact with Golarion and can fully access its healing magic, and she's planning to spend some time in Predain getting to know their King and court and probably helping with reconstruction. 

Permalink Mark Unread

Urtho is so delighted to hear this! He wishes Iomedae good health and a pleasant visit to Predain! 

Permalink Mark Unread

Ma'ar passes this on to Iomedae. He doesn't otherwise make conversation. 

(Iomedae hasn't seen very much of the Citadel, only the infirmary where they were caring for her there and a bit of hallway when the Healers took her for a walk. It's noticeably smaller and darker and generally less fancy than Urtho's Tower, but it's at least heated to a comfortable temperature.) 

 

They reach Ma'ar's suite. It's spacious, inside, but not very decorated. He has furniture that he hasn't bothered thinking about in a decade. There's a rug by the fireplace - not lit, the magical heating is just recent enough that they haven't redone the fireplaces - that he bought in a marketplace in Tantara, on his way back to Predain as a young man graduating from Urtho's Tower. It's the closest thing he has to sentimental keepsake. 

He sits down. 

:I– ...can you undo the no-fear effect, actually. I am going to be scared but it feels like - lying to my brain - to not feel scared just because you are there.: 

Permalink Mark Unread

She does that. 

 

Permalink Mark Unread

Yeah, he's terrified. It doesn't show much in his body language; this is Predain, whether or not anyone but Iomedae can see him in his unscryable personal quarters.

(He moves differently in general, here, Iomedae will have noticed. He's more guarded, and also - more deliberately confident, taking up more space. It doesn't not suit him, but it's an odd contrast to having recently had him fall asleep on her.) 

 

They're already behind an obscene number of specialized shields, literally every technique he ever learned to put into a permanent set-spell, but he casts a few more anyway. 

:A number of years ago, I invented several forms of magic for immortality. As far as I know I am the first person in Velgarth to do this. I have never told anyone but you.: 

 

(His body language is calmcalmcalm stillstillstill and his emotions are some combination of 'internally screaming' and everything feeling like it's somehow happening in a different plane.) 

Permalink Mark Unread

That makes it a very bad time to burst out laughing which is in fact her first reaction, for complicated personal reasons. 

 

(She's pretty sure that the only other person she ever loved also has some secret immortality arrangements, though the person in question did not tell her.)

 

She keeps her face calm, level. :I understand. I won't tell anybody.:

Permalink Mark Unread

That...could probably have gone worse? There is in fact less internal screaming, seeing Iomedae's level expression, though Ma'ar still kind of feels like he's having this conversation from another plane. 

:It was going to take too long. More than a lifetime even just to fix Predain, and then there would still be everywhere else, and - I wanted to make everyone else immortal, too, someday, or I might eventually have had the idea of making afterlives - I am fairly sure we do not have them, I...part of my research was offering to help out at the Healers' station, I - followed people's souls when they died...: 

He shakes his head. :Urtho would be very angry if he knew. I - think you will understand why I did it. I am not sure how angry to expect you to be about...one of the backup methods.: He is not gritting his teeth even though it's very tempting. :Which would involve killing people. To take over their bodies. ...Specifically my blood descendants. The first-line methods did not do that and I think it was very unlikely to be necessary unless a very determined enemy tried to destroy all of the others, or if there was a - magical catastrophe - but there might have been if you had not come here -: 

Permalink Mark Unread

:Does it change you?:

Permalink Mark Unread

:I - do not obviously see why it would? I mean. Aside from being in a different body, and - probably very upset about it. If I am right about how our souls work, and wrong about how well the additional measures I took will - carry over extra information that would not be carried across in ordinary reincarnation - then I might lose a lot of memories. I took thorough notes, hid somewhere I might retrieve them later even if I do not remember exactly where it was. And - I very much think the core things about me and what I want do not rely on remembering very much about my life. ...I have tried to shape a lot of my mind around the parts I most want to remember. Urtho's Tower, mostly, and - making a vow to the stars to fix everything. I am very sure I would not forget that.: 

Permalink Mark Unread

:The - forms of magical immortality available in my world mostly - distort you. Set you in stone, so you can't learn, or - just make you not care about other people -

 

- I do, to be clear, still think you shouldn't do it. Even if it doesn't do that. But - 

- it's, uh, a much more complicated call, if it'd just work.:

Permalink Mark Unread

:I ruled out some methods. For the - setting in stone, reason, more than the distortion reason, though I was in fact worried about methods that would involve - partially sharing a body with someone else who might have different priorities.: 

He closes his eyes. :I suppose you are planning to just avoid the whole problem of mortality by becoming a god first.: 

Permalink Mark Unread

:Yes. I would aim to be unaging, if I thought I couldn't ascend in time, but - not to come back, I don't think. I can do my work from Heaven.

But - every version I've ever seen of this thing was horrendous and twisted, and created monsters who the original people would barely have recognized, or stunted people who couldn't operate in a changed world, or blooddrinkers who bought their life with steadily growing numbers of sacrifices. And that probably affects how I think about it. If it were common and safe I'd have probably done it. Even - even with a backup plan that took another life. I'd have volunteers. 

 

...I would not do it to my children, I think, even in that world.:

Permalink Mark Unread

Permalink Mark Unread

He wouldn't have had volunteers. 

In the scenario he wanted this final contingency for at all - the scenario where all of the other plans, that he likes much better, fail, the scenario where he can assume something worse than he can imagine happened, probably not just to him but to a lot of the world - he wouldn't have necessarily had anyone. He couldn't rely on any steps that required someone else to make a decision to complete the process. He wouldn't even be able to assume that any spell he had cast in the material plane, or any artifact he had crafted, would have survived. He needed something hidden and indestructible, a that would play out its inevitable logic no matter what else happened. 

 

It was important to him, in that worst case scenario, to have something that no enemy, no matter how powerful - not even the gods - could take away from him.

 

And this is what he came up with. He would also have preferred it wasn't his children or grandchildren. (It doesn't actually help, not really, that he doesn't know them. It feels like trying to cheat on the personal grief, when the real cost is so much bigger than that.) 

 

He so incredibly does not feel like having an argument with Iomedae over it. 

Permalink Mark Unread

She doesn't really want to argue either. She's - mostly trying not to want too many things, right now, that seems like it might quickly get out of control.

 

:Thank you for telling me.:

Permalink Mark Unread

Ma'ar doesn't know what he would want, if wanting things - wanting things from Iomedae, especially - felt like a coherent concept, which it mostly doesn't. He can't really tell what his emotions are, which is possibly related to why he can't seem to get a read on Iomedae's reaction despite still wearing the headband. He's going mostly off the prior that it would be a very logical reaction for her to be angry. 

- the headband-self-awareness is obnoxiously pointing out that this is probably not at all a helpful way to be relating to this conversation - that it's unfair to Iomedae, who may or may not be angry but almost certainly doesn't want to hurt him even if she is, and he's not giving her anything to work with on what will or won't hurt him. 

...he'll probably figure out how to respond productively in a moment. Right now it still feels like there's something in the way. 

 

:Thank you for agreeing not to tell anyone: he sends, his mindvoice almost devoid of overtones, because he can't thank her for not being angry but that part at least is factually true. (Assuming she hasn't changed her mind since he said the rest, but - he doesn't think she would, even if she regrets making that offer in the first place now.) 

Permalink Mark Unread

:

Are you all right? What do you need right now?:

Permalink Mark Unread

He was in the process of trying to figure that out and it feels very unfair to be rushed on it. She disrupted his train of thought, which shouldn't even be a thing that happens when he's wearing the headband but he's clearly using most of his head for something that isn't thinking, right now. 

 

:...I think what I want is for you to - say that you understand and it makes sense to you why I did it, even if you would not have. I want you to not be angry. I want you to - not do the no-fear effect yet: 

He kind of hates the thing his emotions do when he's mostly not feeling them, on priors because he's terrified and it doesn't feel safe to have any weaknesses, and then Iomedae makes him feel safe, and he definitely doesn't want her doing that if it's maybe a lie.

:I want you to say it makes sense to be scared, but that we are going to find a better way that does not involve killing anyone but also does not involve dying forever and breaking a promise I made. ...I am having very mixed feelings about whether I want you to hug me or to definitely stay over there, I - think I want to try to feel a way where hugs would help.: 

:I am not going to ask you to do that if it is - not actually how you feel - and so it feels silly to say it is what I need.:  

Permalink Mark Unread

 

: - I'm not angry. I'm not at all angry, what would be better in the world if I were angry.

- I think I do understand. It's - very different from the world I grew up in, but I think it is my job to try to account for that and when I do I mostly understand. 

We're going to get you lots more options, lots of better options. I don't want you to die forever.:

Permalink Mark Unread

That probably helps? It continues to be hard to tell. Ma'ar is trying to drag himself back to actually feeling fully present in the room, but even with the headband it's not trivial. 

:...I think it will maybe take a while before that feels - real in the way that my own plans feel real - when you are not doing the no-fear effect. ...Still would rather you not, yet, trying to - figure this out -: 

 

And he's going to try to explain what he was thinking, what trade he actually thought he would be making, there, and how it could possibly be justified. He has other contingencies - they were easier, for the most part - and if his work in Predain succeeded, if he lived through to the end of his natural lifespan and died in a stable and prosperous kingdom, if not a perfect one, it should have been enough. He would have had allies, maybe not people who understood what he's trying to do as deeply as Iomedae does, but people who cared enough to put in the effort and pay the costs to get him back. 

On his journey through Predain to Tantara and Urtho's Tower, he was alone. He had almost nothing. He was fourteen, with no magical training save what he had figured out himself. Things went wrong, over and over. The only time things went right was when he had been enough steps ahead to ensure it. The only reason he was enough steps ahead not to have died, on that journey, is that he spent a year miserably living in the plains so he could practice his defensive magic, with his parents dead and his people starving, mostly shunned by them because he refused to go on pointless wasteful cattle-raids but his magic meant they weren't going to go as far as kicking him out of the camp, and he could mostly feed himself. He knew it was going to be dangerous and it was more dangerous than he expected and he only survived it because he had decided to be more prepared than he thought he needed to be. 

He hasn't been that powerless in a long time, now. But it's still what sets his baseline. If something won't still work in a hostile world, it doesn't work. It's - very important to him, to have a backup plan that he can still count on even if he can't count on anything or anyone else in the world. 

 

He wasn't preparing for anything specific, he didn't know what the dangers would be. Just suspected that in any situation where the danger was that bad, a lot of other people would be in trouble, and a lot of problems would need to be fixed. 

But he suspects that, in fact, his spell in the Void - almost impossible to find, even more impossible to destroy, self-powering and self-stabilizing, tied to not just his own life-force but, by tiny invisible threads, the life-force of several hundred children he's fathered - would have survived even the vast destruction of one - or all - of Urtho's weapons. The Void is a seething sink of all the magic in all the planes anyway, it would hardly notice the difference. And he doesn't think the gods could have destroyed it even if They had thought to try. 

(He doesn't really think it matters, whether it's his biological children or not, aside from the part where it bothers him somewhat more and he wishes magic worked more conveniently.) 

 

It would obviously have been a terrible mistake, to have caused that disaster that wiped out everything even slightly good he had ever built. Maybe in the world where Iomedae never came, it would have been better for Velgarth if there hadn't been a Kiyamvir Ma'ar, but there was. And - at least this is how he feels about it, he thinks - in the world where Ma'ar moved on the Tower and Urtho used his weapons, he thinks it - would have been better than the alternative, for Kiyamvir Ma'ar, who had magic and context and would at that point presumably have had a very hard-earned lesson in politics and carefulness, to also be around to deal with the aftermath.

Iomedae wouldn't have done it, and that's - a better shape of person to be, he wants to try to be that shape if he can - but he doesn't think Iomedae could really have existed, in Predain, and certainly he doubts that, without a god backing her, she would have made it off the clan lands alive. 

Permalink Mark Unread

That all seems right. She doesn't know that she couldn't have lived in Predain, but she thinks she would have been a very different person if she had.

 

:It makes sense, to have an ultimate last resort that would survive everything. Especially given what nearly happened. And - I think more of you, for learning you had some plan for Predain which wasn't 'hope your successor is a nice person'.:

Permalink Mark Unread

:I did want to eventually get it to the point that I could count on - not individual rulers being nice people, but the whole system being strong enough to steer in the right direction anyway. If I was going to get to the rest of the world I would need to be able to leave Predain in a stable state. ...I realize Predain right now is not that, and I am not sure how to build that, but I think I could have figured it out, eventually.: 

Ma'ar feels almost fully present in his body, after putting kind of a lot of effort into this, and it does help him read Iomedae's reactions and believe more viscerally that she isn't angry and does understand, but he's also much more aware that he is, in fact, pretty upset. Honestly, less because of anything to do with Iomedae's reaction, and more because he really hates thinking about the year after his parents' deaths or the journey to Urtho's Tower. This is the first time he's ever really talked about it as more than a single-line summary.

He...probably does, at this point, want a hug. 

Permalink Mark Unread

She can offer a hug. 

:I think you could have figured it out eventually. 

I'm sorry that - you needed to do that. That you were so alone and so afraid. I want you to live forever.:

Permalink Mark Unread

It means a lot. 

It's going to be a very long time before he entirely trusts it. Maybe never. It doesn't seem likely, that something could take out Iomedae and Aroden and yet leave Ma'ar's little pocket in the Void alone, probably in all the worlds where he woud lose allies that powerful he would, himself, also be dead, but - it's a thing that could happen. As they've recently proven, even gods aren't immune to being killed.

(Ma'ar is mostly not bothering with coherent Mindspeech, at this point, he's clinging to Iomedae and shoving half-formed thoughts at her.) 

 

...He probably doesn't endorse quite as much uncertainty as he feels about it right now, though, he thinks that's - a holdover of past circumstances, probably to some extent past circumstances that already haven't been the case in decades. He doesn't want to lean too heavily on using Iomedae's no-fear effect to cheat at that, but - maybe right now it's all right. 

Permalink Mark Unread

He can be unafraid, if he wants, then. 

 

:I'm sorry I can't give you - more than that, right now, concrete advice or anything. I - don't want to countenance something I normally wouldn't just because I like you, or decide something is bad because things that look like it are bad. I need to think. And you have the headband.:

Permalink Mark Unread

Being unafraid kind of makes Ma'ar want to collapse in a heap on the rug - why is he so exhausted, it's still morning, he slept a full night - and then maybe cry, but he manages to refrain from doing this. 

:I think what you said was - was better than how I had imagined anyone would respond, I am mostly upset about the situation. You can have the headband back. I think I am - not going to be having productive thoughts right now. I - I need to lie down for for a few minutes right now, I think, I would like it if you stayed but if you need space to think then I would rather you do that.: 

Permalink Mark Unread

:I can think here. You can lie down. You're - safe, you know that, right, I am not going to hurt you -:

Permalink Mark Unread

Well, he feels safe with her right now, because no-fear effect.

He - mostly believes it on an explicit level. At least, he's fully convinced on the level of logical arguments and evidence and the remainder is probably just...habits...and he suspects he'll get there all the way at some point. He...at least doesn't have enough uncertainty that he wants Iomedae to stop doing the no-fear effect because it feels like lying to his mind about whether he's in danger.

(If he didn't think he was safe with Iomedae, he would be...making different life choices. Such as not inviting her into his living room. It's just...maybe a little harder to feel entirely unconflicted, when Iomedae is powerful enough to kill him, nearly has killed him once before, and he...basically just told her what she would need to do to kill him permanently...and he doesn't expect her to, he believes her that she isn't angry and doesn't want him dead and in fact wants to give him a non-horrible way to live forever, and he still wouldn't expect her to kill him even if she was absolutely furious with him about the children thing, if she wants him to stop she so clearly has better options than killing him about it. It's just, his gut apparently still finds it stressful, for anyone to have this information.

Ma'ar is still approximately just letting Iomedae through his shields, but this part is a quiet note in his thoughts, mostly held back.) 

 

He's going to make his way to his bedroom mostly without looking at his surroundings, and collapse on his bed, and Iomedae can stay or not depending on what she wants to do. 

Permalink Mark Unread

She'll stay. Quietly, by his side, with an arm around him if he wants that.

Permalink Mark Unread

Yeah. Quiet is good. Iomedae holding him is also good. A lot of things feel terrible right now and he's having more trouble peeling them apart without the headband, and mostly isn't trying, just...breathing, being here, focusing on the part of this which is definitely good. Trying not to be distracting to Iomedae, if she's thinking. 

Permalink Mark Unread

She's thinking. She doesn't know everything, she doesn't have all of morality figured out, and a lot of it - for humans - doesn't have a single obvious answer, just tradeoffs which are very hard to evaluate.

She is not inclined to say that people should have backup immortality plans that involve possessing their descendants because morality is complicated.

But it does matter, that it was a last resort of a last resort, that the probability of ever having to use it was quite low, and that it'd be necessary conceivably mostly in worlds where something had gone truly horrendously wrong -

- that they don't, as far as they know, have afterlives here -

- how willing would she be, to do her work for one human lifetime and then be gone forever - 

 

 

It seems like the kind of thing you do only if you are very very careful and good at accounting for a lot of unknowns and complexity. And she can complain Ma'ar isn't good enough at that, if she wants, but - he knows that. She already told him. And the stakes of this are honestly smaller than the stakes of wars of conquest. She already knew he was willing to kill innocent people when it seemed like the right thing to do. Is it coherent, to treat this kind as different from other kinds?

 

Can she turn her general doubt into specific questions to which she could in principle find a specific answer? 

Did Ma'ar have justified confidence that his immortality method wasn't going to distort him or create a monster.

Did Ma'ar have a good rule for deciding when to kill innocent people? Are there modifications to it that she thinks would perform better.

Was Ma'ar trying to act on his best guess of the right thing, or lying to himself about that. She thinks she knows the answer to that one.

If more people used Ma'ar's decision rule, would things be better, or would they be worse.

Is there some identifiable subset of people who should use Ma'ar's decision rule. 

 

She doesn't speak any of the questions, for now.

Permalink Mark Unread

Lying in the dark and quiet with Iomedae beside him, Ma'ar calms down fairly quickly, enough that aren't just reactions to this being one of the most stressful conversations of his entire life. 

 

He's not, he thinks, upset about discussing this with Iomedae, or about whatever Iomedae is going to say after she finishes thinking about is ready to give concrete advice. He knows her. He could have predicted far more confidently than he did that she wouldn't be angry, because of exactly what she said when asked: what would possibly be better about the situation if she was angry? And Iomedae is, fundamentally, someone who chooses the options that make things better rather than worse. He trusts her to do that and he trusts her to be good at it, and not reacting reflexively or emotionally. She's been doing this for a long time. 

...realistically he's still too emotional about other things for having that conversation just yet to go well or be a good idea. That's fine. He'll poke at the pieces until he's actually calm. 

He's upset about what would have happened if the war had continued. This is reasonable! It's an upsetting prospect! Also it didn't happen and it's not going to and his mind doesn't need to be tracking it as an ongoing threat, just a hypothetical lesson in what can go wrong if you aren't careful enough. 

He's upset that someone knows, and to his hindbrain this makes it feel much less true that this is - something no one and nothing could take away from him. Iomedae isn't a mage, and he doesn't think she has a way of dismantling it herself with a sword, but she could tell someone. She won't, he's very confident of that, but he's - not used to putting weight on people's goodwill like that.

She might tell him he has to do something else. That's fine. If she does then she's almost certainly right, and - he meant what he said, that he wants to learn how Iomedae thinks, because he thinks taking on more of that will make him stronger. He wants to do something else, half of why he's upset is that he also hates this particular backup plan. He - does feel a lot more unambiguously positive about making additional plans rather than dismantling this one, but - he thinks Iomedae will understand that, and understand that even if it's never going to be used, having it as a fallback currently feels very loadbearing to him. Maybe that will change, someday. It might not even take very long. 

 

He's glad she's here. He...is overall glad that she knows. It felt like the last remaining major barrier between them. In particular, it felt like something he absolutely had to talk through with her before they had sex. He thinks he can talk about it more, now, with the no-fear effect and as long as he doesn't poke at memories of his childhood. What an annoying problem to have. 

He rolls over toward her. :Iomedae?: 

Permalink Mark Unread

:Mmmhmm?:

Permalink Mark Unread

:I think I am all right now. I have - I think I have the mental habits associated with being scared of powerful people who know of ways they could hurt me very badly, even when I am not at the moment able to experience fear, and even though I do trust you not to - use that information against me. But I - I think we can talk about it now, if you have thoughts.: 

Permalink Mark Unread

:I've been trying to turn my questions into - specific questions, that have answers, or at least could have answers. I can - tell you the questions I've come up with so far, though you don't have to answer them - I'm really not trying to answer the question 'did you do something wrong', I'm trying to figure out - a rule that I would follow, or tell my people to follow, or teach in my church, that gets good results and not bad ones.: And she'll send him the questions: 

 

Did Ma'ar have justified confidence that his immortality method wasn't going to distort him or create a monster.

 

Did Ma'ar have a good rule for deciding when to kill innocent people? Are there modifications to it that she thinks would perform better.

 

Was Ma'ar trying to act on his best guess of the right thing, or lying to himself about that. She thinks she knows the answer to that one.

 

If more people used Ma'ar's decision rule, would things be better, or would they be worse.

 

Is there some identifiable subset of people who should use Ma'ar's decision rule. 

Permalink Mark Unread

Ma'ar...feels like he's in the middle of re-evaluating a lot of things, and is not sure his cached thoughts on the tradeoff he was making are going to end up being ones he still endorses. 

He thinks he had reasonably justified confidence that his method wouldn't distort him and certainly wouldn't do so in the direction of 'not caring about other people' - he doesn't think he keeps 'caring about other people' in a place where losing a lot of memories, or half-inheriting someone else's procedural memory and emotions, would alter it - but the information he had may or may not be convincing to Iomedae. They were starting from different priors; he didn't have a large number of examples of people trying for immortality and ending up distorted. 

 

He does have a higher standard for when it's reasonable to kill innocent people by direct action than for when it's reasonable to kill enemy combatants attacking his country, because this seems like an important policy to have, and because he's significantly been trying to set policies that others in Predain can follow. He - overall isn't sure how much it makes sense to think about it differently from innocent people dying because he failed to act. A lot of innocent people die. He wouldn't, in fact, kill one innocent person - or one convicted criminal - in order to save two or even ten others in expectation, because the math is hard and there's huge uncertainty and so he wants bigger numbers than that. But in any case where his final backup immortality came into play, there were likely to be thousands of innocent children dying, and it - doesn't, really, feel like an incomparably worse thing, for a child to die of being kicked out of their body by their immortal ancestor than to die of starvation. 

(Also, the trigger is set for around when a child's mage-gift is activating. Thirteen or fourteen. Plenty of thirteen or fourteen-year-olds cannot entirely be described as innocent. ...This is possibly a Predain-flavored opinion. Ma'ar doesn't bring it up.) 

 

He doesn't think he was lying to himself, and he spent a lot of time and ink and paper on pinning down all of the considerations where he couldn't quietly fudge them in his head, but it's probably a good idea to sit down later and think about it with the headband, which makes it much harder to lie to himself. 

 

...Probably most people should not use Ma'ar's decision process here. That does seem like a major strike against it. In a world like Iomedae's, arguably nobody should. In a world like his...well, the outside view is that most people who want to attempt it are going to be wanting to do so for bad reasons, probably?

Ma'ar does not generally make ethical choices based on what things look like, or what policies would generalize well, or whether from a god's-eye view most of the people who want to do something should do it. He knows what he cares about, and he's mostly trusted his inside-view reasoning on the tradeoffs. Significantly less, right now, because he just made some major updates, but - his goal is to reach a place where he can put weight on that again, not to replace his own internal sense of right and wrong with a set of policies that he would be happy for everyone to follow. He expects to make very different decisions if he's working with Iomedae and her people, but - mostly because it changes the tradeoffs he faces, the resources available to him and the costs he pays for doing things that most people would find horrifying, it's - not a change on a deeper level than that. 

 

He feels like there might be a category here. He would tentatively include 'hypothetical Iomedae born in Predain' in that category. He's not sure how else to define it. 

Permalink Mark Unread

:I think a lot about - who I would want using a given decision process. It's okay if the answer is 'literally just me, I'm better at it than they are', that's sometimes the answer. The set of people I'd want trying to unleash a superweapon in Hell is relatively small. But it's - important for noticing how much the plan relies on my own judgment and what bad things will happen if I'm emulated by people who only mostly understand.:

Permalink Mark Unread

:...I think you have a higher expectation than I do that - people will try to follow you, including in - trying to figure out your underlying decision process, including the parts that are not obvious?  - For the immortality contingency plan in particular, I had not expected anyone would or could emulate me, given how you are the first person I told of it and that - as far as I know this is magic I invented for the first time. At least here in Velgarth.: 

Permalink Mark Unread

:And that is relevant to - how much you have to worry 'foolish people emulating you' will be a problem! But - 

- you want people to emulate you, in the long run. That's how you get - allies, enough help to actually fix the worlds. And that means teaching them your decision processes.:

Permalink Mark Unread

That seems right.

It's not something he's thought about it that much detail before. Because it hadn't felt a real option, yet, to find those allies, and it hadn't felt like the lack of it would be his main bottleneck for a long time. Ma'ar is pretty sure that he's thought about some of those same considerations, but - for a hypothetical future that he's not sure his gut believed would ever happen, and that's exactly the sort of place where self-deception is easiest. 

Permalink Mark Unread

:I know a lot of secrets, but none of them are secrets that would change my allies' assessment of my character or decision processes, if they came out. It would - feel a bit like betraying people, to have their trust wrongly because I had a secret that would change how they saw me.

I don't think any of this would necessarily have been a reasonable priority for you, to be clear. I'm just- describing why I do it.:

Permalink Mark Unread

:That makes sense. ...I think Predain is different? I am used to thinking that keeping secrets - separate from telling lies, which is much worse - is not the kind of thing that anyone would consider a serious betrayal. I - think everyone I have ever worked with would have assumed I was keeping secrets, because it would be stupid not to.:

Permalink Mark Unread

:No one at home would be surprised to learn that I was - keeping military secrets, or that I was keeping something secret because it had been told to me in confidence, no matter what the secret was, or that I had done something the reasons for which were secret and didn't want the fact it had happened spread around without the context. But they - 

- would be very surprised and, I think, meaningfully betrayed, if I were pursuing lichdom.:

Permalink Mark Unread

Lichdom. The concept conveyed in Mindspeech isn't one that fits clearly into anything known in Velgarth's magic, but - the pieces are there, from his conversation with Iomedae a few minutes ago. Standard and widely known methods of immortality, that are also known to distort you. Golarion has that history and that concept. Velgarth doesn't. Velgarth's magic works differently, such that immortality is - either it's harder or they've just had less time to develop it, he's not sure - and also the obvious methods, the ones that would come before his final contingency, are very unlikely to distort one's values. 

Would his people feel betrayed, if they learned that Kiyamvir Ma'ar had figured out how to live forever, to come back and keep leading their kingdom, but only by stealing the bodies of his own children? He's not sure. Opinions would be mixed. It would probably depend a lot on how well and how quickly he succeeded at - whatever he would have been planning to do and how obviously it strengthened Predain, in his hypothetical next life. 

- he's not sure how to feel about that. Urtho's people would feel betrayed, if Urtho did something like that. 

Permalink Mark Unread

:I think that matters, but - it's not the only thing that matters. It's all considerations to weigh, kinds of trust you want to have and kinds you can't reasonably aspire to have - there are some paladin orders that would never order their soldiers on a suicide mission, and I would, because that's not a kind of trust I decided was worth the costs of losing the option.:

Permalink Mark Unread

...It feels like the entire concept of a suicide mission must be different, in a world that has afterlives, and where presumably anyone Iomedae is giving orders will be going to the non-horrible one. 

That's probably missing the point.

Permalink Mark Unread

And he's abruptly not in the mood to keep having this conversation, which is frustrating and confusing and probably very useful and productive and he can think about it sometime later. Maybe when he's wearing the headband again. 

:- Iomedae. I– is this, the thing I told you, going to - change things with us. How you feel about me.: 

Because they're currently in a safe shielded room - his bedroom, even - and despite everything he's noticing that this is perhaps a good opportunity for having sex. Thought it would be very reasonable on Iomedae's part to not be in the mood. 

Permalink Mark Unread

: - I haven't thought through how I think about my general principles here, but I -

 - honestly I sort of thought there might be something like this. Not because of anything to do with you. Just - general starting assumptions. So I don't - feel differently about you than when I guessed there was maybe something like this.:

Permalink Mark Unread

:...Do you want a minute to think about your general principles? Before - well, I very much want to start kissing you, and we are not currently at a holy site of the Nameless God, and - probably the main reason I wanted to wait to - go further than kissing - was because we really needed to have this conversation first. But. Now we have done that.:

Permalink Mark Unread

:Ah. - yes, I think I want a minute to think about my principles, just to feel like I laid that to rest instead of getting distracted from it. And then I'm all yours, insofar as that's a romantic thing people say which carries only romantic implications and not broader strategic ones; I remain all mine in every broader context.:

Permalink Mark Unread

Ma'ar likes Iomedae so much and appreciates so many things about her, including her dedication to her principles, and he will give her a minute. Very patiently. It's taking some effort and restraint but these are both things he's already decided he should work on for other reasons. 

Permalink Mark Unread

She thinks until she's - not done thinking, it's a big topic, but until there are no immediate implications to her remaining confusions. It's probably only about a minute. She's enjoying Ma'ar's quiet impatience, beside her. 

 

Permalink Mark Unread

:All right,: she says, turning to him. :Now you'll have to tell me, because I've never had the slightest chance to find out, are men built the same as women, or are there any differences relevant to lovemaking?:

 

It's a joke but she delivers it very persuasively and maintains a straight face for as long as she can bear it.

Permalink Mark Unread

Iomedae is adorable and Ma'ar is amused.

(He would perhaps be slower to catch on that it was a joke if he hadn't heard almost exactly the same line before. He's slept with a lot of women, including some who were mostly in it for the option of a mage-gifted child and weren't sexually attracted to men at all.) 

...He is pretty sure that Iomedae is - well, he has no idea who she's attracted to in general, but he's pretty sure she wants him.

He can show her some of the relevant differences for lovemaking. 

Permalink Mark Unread

Iomedae continues to be very incompetent but very cheerful and possessed with truly remarkable stamina.

Permalink Mark Unread

It continues to be adorable.

(Mindspeech is very useful for giving prompts and hints without having to pause anything else, but Ma'ar mostly doesn't, he is kind of enjoying the cheerful and enthusiastic incompetence. It's very her. He likes her. A lot, actually.) 

 

...Iomedae probably has more stamina than Ma'ar does. 

Permalink Mark Unread

Oh definitely. There is probably no one who can match her in either of two worlds. She doesn't seem upset about this. She kind of just seems uncomplicatedly happy in general. 

 

:I am very glad I met you, Ma'ar.:

Permalink Mark Unread

:Mmm-hmm. Glad I met you too. ...and that I did not join your paladin order, since then I would be in your chain of command.:

Not that he could have, since he was here in Velgarth and not Golarion, and also probably too Evil for them, given his policy choices and the war and his immortality backup –

(not the mood right now)

He thinks he's going to like and appreciate her people a lot, and he's looking forward to working with Urtho on inter-world Gates so he can meet them and Iomedae can see her colleagues and friends again, and that's also not a topic he wants to discuss right now - really he just wants to flop on Iomedae and be as uncomplicatedly happy as he can manage. 

:M'happy. ....I think it has been a long time. Since I was as happy as I am now.: 

Permalink Mark Unread

:I'm also not usually this happy! It's good! It's good to get glimpses of -: She gestures expansively at the room or maybe the world or maybe all of Creation. 

Permalink Mark Unread

Snuggle. Iomedae without armor is so snuggle-able. (He wonders if it bothers her not to be wearing it, the same way it would bother him to take down all of his shields.) 

:I want you to have this. It - seems important. If you are going to be the god of - winning the war against Evil forces. That - this is one of the kinds of thing we are trying to win, for everyone.: 

Permalink Mark Unread

:I try to be very careful to keep track of - what all the fighting is for. It's a - risk of being a narrow kind of god, that you won't be equipped to notice when a different thing is called for. And gods gain a lot from specialization, so I'd be sacrificing a lot, if I try to maintain - the whole of human values in my remit. But I can't afford not to know it, or I'll make the wrong trades.:

Permalink Mark Unread

:Mmm. ...I think I was making that mistake, despite not being a god, being - too narrow -: 

Permalink Mark Unread

:It's a really easy mistake to make.:

Permalink Mark Unread

:It really does not seem to be for most people! Unless you are counting the thing Urtho does as a different kind of narrowness, but - I am not sure I would, it feels different. I suppose it is an easy mistake to make for...people like us: 

Permalink Mark Unread

:- yeah.  People who are trying to actually win at incredibly difficult problems. Most people aren't doing that but - the people I meet mostly are, so the mistakes I see are mostly - mistakes flavored from that.:

Permalink Mark Unread

:I am not sure I had ever really met - anyone, like that - before I met you: He snuggles up closer to her. :- You know, I think I am actually excited, now, to work on Gates to your world, not just - feeling like it is important and I should care and it will probably not hurt too badly. I want to meet your friends: 

Permalink Mark Unread

: - that'll be interesting.

I want it too.:

Permalink Mark Unread

Sigh. :I do still feel nervous about working with Urtho, I think. It is just - it has been such a long time - and honestly I am not sure I was ever comfortable with him, even though I admired him very much. I am not - predicting anything going badly, I think, just - stressed: 

Permalink Mark Unread

:The headband might help with - successfully communicating with him.:

Permalink Mark Unread

:It does help, I think, just - it helps less with feeling safer? I suppose I could beg you to come with me and do the no-fear effect the whole time. ...Anyway I was planning to let Urtho use it for most of the work.: 

Permalink Mark Unread

:I can sit around and make you unafraid if you want. Speeding up our return is worth quite a lot to me.:

Permalink Mark Unread

:I would appreciate that. I expect it to be mostly the first time, that is hard, and after that I will be all right. And I am sure Urtho would be delighted to see you as well.: 

 

Maybe they can do that tomorrow, though. Today, he really should report to his King - he doesn't need the no-fear effect for that, it'll go fine, though he can probably make it go a lot better than fine if Iomedae is willing to lend the headband for it - and then, yeah, there are probably parades. For that part he kind of would like if Iomedae came with him. 

Permalink Mark Unread

Iomedae is willing to lend the headband. She needs it for thinking through the details of the assault on Hell, but other than that her highest priority now is getting home and that clearly requires Ma'ar and Urtho, not her, to have the headband.

Permalink Mark Unread

Well, in this case he's technically using it for politics, not Gate-research. But it's politics that, if it goes better, should give him more leeway to be away from Predain, and thus focused on Gate-research instead. 

 

 

And afterward is the parade. It's kind of miserably grey outside, not actually drizzling but the capital does not currently have mages to spare for weather-working that will get it all the way to sunny. The important people can still have weather-barriers, though, and there are mage-lights, and it definitely seems like half the population of the entire city has bundled up and come outside to celebrate. 

Permalink Mark Unread

Iomedae sincerely enjoys parades, if they are in celebration of battles that were rightly fought, and in this case they are in celebration of battles rightly averted! She's delighted.

Permalink Mark Unread

Ma'ar mostly does not enjoy parades, but he appreciates Iomedae enjoying it, and the no-fear affect helps; half of why he doesn't normally like public events is that he's always jumpy in crowded outdoor spaces. 

Then there's a court dinner. Court dinners in Predain, it turns out, are not incredibly formal, especially not when everyone is bursting with excitement about the end of a war. There's no assigned seating, and most of the attendees seem to be there with the aim of getting drunk. There are a lot of toasts. There's dancing. There are some fights, though not serious ones, more just sparring for fun. It's incredibly loud and, after a candlemark of the hall being crammed full of dancing people, quite overheated. 

 

Ma'ar mostly mills around talking to various people, and seems much more comfortable here than he did at the more formal - and outdoor - parade. Though he does try to stay close enough to Iomedae for the no-fear effect to stick. 

Permalink Mark Unread

Iomedae is immune to poisons, which means she can drink but not get drunk; she does. She's happy to stick by Ma'ar except if there's sparring for fun she definitely wants in on that.

Permalink Mark Unread

This will make Iomedae very popular! A number of people would like to spar with her, though mostly mages who don't fight with swords. 

 

 

Iomedae is definitely keeping in mind that all of these people are commoners and half of them are drunk, yes? 

Permalink Mark Unread

Of course! She will not use a sword at all. (They can have one if they want.) Also she'll be blindfolded.

 

It's still not going to be a fair fight.

Permalink Mark Unread

It’s still fun even for the losers! And hilarious for the audience! 

Iomedae should fight Ma’ar! There are dares!

Permalink Mark Unread

- sure. Not blindfolded, though.

Permalink Mark Unread

Ma'ar is not immune to poison and has had several drinks, but this has not noticeably slowed him down. He gets up, to cheers. 

He grins at her. :I can't tell if that means you think if you were blindfolded I could take you.: He kind of doubts it. At the very least, Iomedae never gets tired and he eventually would. 

Permalink Mark Unread

:Of course you couldn't! But I don't want to make you look bad in front of your people.:

Permalink Mark Unread

:Awww: It is, in fact, very sweet of her - 

 

- and she can definitely take him but he's hoping to at least slightly make her work for it. Also they should go outside. It'll be way more fun if he doesn't have to worry so much about setting a table on fire. 

 

 

He is very very good at shields, and he can overpower a force-net harder than most people casting one in a fraction of a second - even so they won't hold up for very long at all against Iomedae's strength, but she doesn't have her sword to cut them and he can pin her feet and delay her slightly by making her have to wrench them free. 

Also, on the scale of 'within a single room', he can throw himself around through unscaffolded Gates that take a tenth of a second to come up and are down by the time he's through. This - especially when dropping himself through a horizontal Gate to a destination terminus which is vertical - is pretty useful for dodging someone who moves inhumanly fast, by instead semi-instantaneously being on the other side of the room, or ten feet above her. 

(This is actually almost useless on a battlefield in Velgarth, it's very stupid to Gate unnecessarily in active combat when the other side also has mages who can blast your Gate. Ma'ar learned it mostly because it's a good way to practice unscaffolded Gates a lot in very little time, and because 'winning duels' is a completely different skill than fighting for real and is a surprisingly important component of political success in Predain. And Iomedae can't throw fireballs; her sword is probably magical enough to wreck a Gate-terminus but she's not using it.) 

Meanwhile, he is vastly less worried about actually hurting her than anyone in the room, because most people don't really propagate the implications of things like 'Iomedae survived a superweapon.' He is not especially holding back on his levinbolts, though he is being very careful not to risk hitting anyone in the audience. (They're standing well back. Also shouting and cheering raucously. This is spectacular entertainment.) 

Permalink Mark Unread

Can he at least manage not to lose to Iomedae for, like, thirty seconds? (He can't keep this up much longer than that anyway and is going to be exhausted and it's going to be worth it.) 

Permalink Mark Unread

Yes absolutely! She's faster than him even with the flash-Gating and the force-nets, but with her bare fists she can't actually take him down instantly when she does catch up to him, just hammer his shields down in the space of a few seconds, and also she does need to pause to put up Resist Energy about the levinbolts after a few hits, and that means this will last until he can no longer put up a full-strength shield every time he manages to get out of range of her.

Permalink Mark Unread

It is completely absurd how fast Iomedae can move and one of the best things about this is that now everyone else is getting to see it. Also for someone without mage-sight, she has ridiculous senses and reflexes and a resulting ability to anticipate where he's about to start dropping out of a Gate and head there to intercept him. He can get shields up in half a second, if he doesn't have longer, but they're not efficient shields, nor the kind he can reabsorb when they break, and that means a lot of energy lost every time Iomedae smashes them. If he gets her feet briefly stuck where she can't reach him, he can buy more than half a second and add a second layer of shield, but he is not consistently getting that time. 

He's an unusually powerful Adept who can do unusually efficient Gates, but he's not drawing on node-energy aside from topping up his reserves at the start, this would suck up a lot of it rather quickly and it's rude to disrupt the weather just for sparring. He can manage almost thirty-five seconds before he's too low on reserves to mount a strong enough shield the next time she hits him. 

Permalink Mark Unread

Then he'll go down, hard, and she'll pick him up instantly with a Burst of Glory (it's temporary health, but it'll mean he can avoid being visibly unconscious the instant she got a hit in), and give him a hug, and tell him over Mindspeech they have about a minute and a half of Ma'ar having an absurd amount of life force glued to him.

Permalink Mark Unread

With a lot of temporary life-force glued to him, Ma'ar feels great, and that was exhilarating. He hugs her back and beams and - yeah they should definitely arrange to not be in front of his people when that wears off. 

The audience is yelling and chanting and stamping their feet and someone is proposing a toast and shoving a vial of fortified spirits in Ma'ar's face, which he accepts because you can't not do that even though this perhaps a dubious idea when he's likely to collapse soon, and Predain in the daytime is not really a place where people are affectionate in public but Predain well after midnight when one's audience is drunk is different and there is definitely a chant of "kiss her! kiss the lady!" rising between the less understandable cheers, and Ma'ar is not going to deny his audience the satisfaction. 

(One gets the sense that, in Predaini culture, there is a definite and very specific flavor of romantic subtext in this kind of public sparring.) 

 

And then he can make a suitably dramatic exit by unscaffolded Gate with his arm around Iomedae's waist, with fifteen seconds to spare, which may or may not be long enough to make it from his living room to somewhere he can be horizontal when he finds out how much he's about to regret this. 

Permalink Mark Unread

.....yeah he's going to be unconscious once it wears off. Not dying, just - like he ripped every last bit of mage-energy out of himself casting something, except without the backlash. 

Iomedae will apologetically cuddle him and defend him from harm, not that she's expecting harm.

Permalink Mark Unread

There is, indeed, no one and nothing showing up to try to harm Ma'ar in his private suite well after midnight when he just took a girl home after a spectacularly romantic fight. Who would do that. 

 

 

He's unconscious for a candlemark, intermittently shivering; the spell didn't put previously broken bones back, when it wore off, but he had already pushed himself past the point of backlash even before the end of the fight, and not all aspects of backlash count as injuries to Golarion magic. It takes a while to rebuild any internal reserves while he's still too unconscious to eat or drink. 

- eventually he wakes up, disoriented and dizzy and incredibly thirsty but not actually in any pain, which - once he manages to piece together where he is and how he must have gotten here - is already an improvement on what he was expecting. He's clearly not injured, just - he feels like he just threw a lot of fireballs around after not having eaten in three days. (Speaking from previous experience.)

He can't really figure out Mindspeech right now, or...move...but Iomedae is there so it's okay. 

Permalink Mark Unread

Iomedae is there! Would-be assassins will have a bad day, not that there have been any. She can get him food and water, if there's any in his suite. 

Permalink Mark Unread

She can find food and water in his suite! Ma'ar flops on her and is going to be very incompetent at feeding himself until he's a little more with it (which food and water will help with fairly quickly, at least.) 

He's not at all tense or stressed. Predain is his, the war is over, and he trusts Iomedae.

He smiles drowsily at her, and eventually decides he has enough strength for Mindspeech. :S'very romantic, yknow: he manages, somewhat slurred. :To beat someone in a fight: 

Permalink Mark Unread

:Yes,: she agrees contentedly. :Especially a close fight.:

Permalink Mark Unread

Ma'ar does not especially think it was a close fight, unless she's counting the fact that he could have Gated out and survived it, which is only true because she wasn't using her sword and he was using his magic. It's sweet of her to say, though. He would kiss her about it except for how he totally cannot sit up yet. 

Permalink Mark Unread

Maybe once he's had some more food and water they can kiss about it.

Permalink Mark Unread

They can do that! Ma'ar is having trouble regretting any of tonight's decisions, even if they mean he's unlikely to be up for heading to meet with Urtho until at least noon. 

He is probably going to fall asleep involuntarily before they can go any further than kissing, but he is nonetheless very very happy right now. 

Permalink Mark Unread

Being happy is really important for humans! She and Ma'ar are both humans and the happiness is clearly very good for them.

 

And also she does want to buckle down, when Ma'ar wakes, and get the interworld Gate work started as early as possible. 

Permalink Mark Unread

Ma'ar sleeps until noon. But he's young and resilient; he wakes up feeling basically fine and ravenously hungry. He's already informed the King of his the upcoming research plans with Urtho. 

 

If Iomedae is there with the no-fear effect, he feels - basically just ready to pass a communication-spell message warning of their impending arrival, and then Gating to the receiving area outside the Tower. 

Permalink Mark Unread

She'll go with him.

Permalink Mark Unread

Urtho would be delighted to receive them at the Tower! He's been looking forward to seeing Iomedae again face to face for days. ...And slightly dreading it, because he owes her some apologies for what happened with the shamans. But he also owes her a great deal of gratitude, and he'll be there. 

Permalink Mark Unread

The receiving area outside Urtho's Tower looks much like in did twenty years ago in Ma'ar's time. The hertasi have changed up the flowerbeds and garden plots, and there are some new statues and fountains. Until quite recently the difference would have been more marked - there were a lot more guards, and a lot fewer carefree children, and the hertasi were mostly too busy to putter and gossip together in the gardens - but the war is over, and the gardens are cheerful and occupied by boisterous mage-students and chattering hertasi, who apparently all know Iomedae and call out to her. 

 

A couple of gryphons are having an aerial play-fight overhead. 

Permalink Mark Unread

Ma'ar doesn't flinch, but only because Iomedae is holding the no-fear effect. He reaches out and squeezes her hand tightly. 

Permalink Mark Unread

Iomedae is glad to be back, though she won't be too expressive about it if Ma'ar is busy having Profoundly Mixed Feelings. 

 

The hertasi will presumably know where they should go?

Permalink Mark Unread

He manages a tense smile at her. :I am all right. Just - unpleasant associations with gryphons. Maybe someday I will be able to enjoy watching them fly.: 

Permalink Mark Unread

The hertasi were expecting them and will delightedly escort them to one of the four enormous entry doors to one of the four enormous entry halls in the Tower, where Urtho is waiting to meet them. 

Permalink Mark Unread

Permalink Mark Unread

Permalink Mark Unread

This is not a situation where hugging his former student is at all appropriate but Urtho isn't sure what other response is. He settles for nodding his head several times and smiling widely. 

Permalink Mark Unread

Ma'ar isn't nervous, because he can't be afraid, but he can apparently still feel overwhelmed. 

Permalink Mark Unread

He manages to collect himself first, though. 

"Urtho. It is good to speak to you again, and - I look forward to working together." 

He glances at Iomedae. 

Permalink Mark Unread

Urtho is also looking at Iomedae. Smiling, but it's a less uncomplicatedly relieved and happy smile. 

Permalink Mark Unread

It is honestly very convenient for her if he feels like he owes her several favors, but - Iomedae doesn't like to be less straightforward with people than they are with her. She smiles at him. "Urtho! I hear that now we can get to the part you were looking forward to all along, where the mages do unfathomable magic research!"

Permalink Mark Unread

"I hope so!" He beams at Ma'ar again. "And we will find a way to get you home soon, I know you must be missing your own people - and probably needed badly there!" 

 

...He pauses. Bows his head a little. Doesn't quite shuffle his feet but it's close. 

"- I owe you an apology. And - a deep debt of gratitude to Ma'ar, for keeping you safe when I failed to. I am sorry." 

Permalink Mark Unread

"I'm not angry with you, and I'm very glad I came here. I - regret that you had to learn like this that people you'd trusted were not trustworthy, and I regret that you had to disassemble some of your very impressive research. - some of it might actually be usable, to do the most good that has ever been done in the history of my world."

Permalink Mark Unread

.....He stares at her.

 

 

 

For kind of a long time. 

Eventually he clears his throat. "To do - what?" 

Permalink Mark Unread

 

 

So Iomedae explains the existence of Hell. It is not one of her favorite things to explain to people. It is pretty apparent, if you know her reasonably well, that at least half the reason is deep personal shame at not having destroyed it yet.

Permalink Mark Unread

Urtho, unlike Ma'ar, is NOT stoic in hearing about Hell. He's so so so unhappy about it! He will gasp and make horrified noises about it! 

 

And, "- yes, if you can - I mean ideally we would get everyone out, first, but if that's - not possible - what would it take to destroy it?" 

Permalink Mark Unread

"Ideally we'll get everyone out first," she confirms. "Aroden will negotiate with Asmodeus for me, when I take the weapon to Hell - try to convince Asmodeus to, in exchange for my not using the weapon, reform Hell and let us save people. I don't know if Asmodeus will agree or not, but we'll try talking before fighting.

 

The weapon that - eats spells and magic, and spreads itself - can you tell me more about it -"

Permalink Mark Unread

He can definitely tell her all about it! So many things! 

Permalink Mark Unread

...The hertasi will nudge him to, perhaps, consider doing this while they walk to the elevator and relocate to an actual conference room. Have Ma'ar and Iomedae eaten? Should they be brought lunch? Afternoon snacks? Tea? 

Permalink Mark Unread

Iomedae would love some of their tea! (She doesn't need it, but that's not the point of tea.) 

 

 

And she wants to know if Urtho thinks his superweapon would unravel Dis bit by bit and what it would leave behind if it did.

Permalink Mark Unread

He would be more sure of this if he had seen their magical artifacts. But if they're only as alien as Iomedae's, then - yes, it ought to unravel them. If the density of set-spells and artifacts and other stable permanent magic is high, it would start a chain reaction that would likely amplify itself to far outside just the city. ...If the entire plane is in some way inherently ambiently magical, like the ethereal plane or spirit world is said to be, then he's not sure exactly what would happen and is more worried it would disrupt the boundaries-between-planes in some messy unpredictable way. 

It would leave behind...a lot of craters and slagged ground, from the energy released into heat, and a lot of magical residue. He's not sure what exact properties the magical residue would have, but - different from just distributed nodes, he thinks. It would be more chaotic, more...corrosive to structured magic...it might cling rather than flowing, like blood-magic residue. He has for obvious reasons never actually run this test. But he suspects it would leave Hell...not especially habitable or possible to build anything or work any magic reliably within, for a very long time. 

Permalink Mark Unread

 

 

"Hopefully Aroden and Asmodeus will be able to negotiate something better. But - if not - 

 

I would like that weapon. I want to cut off the lower reaches of Hell, and destroy Dis, and then - Heaven can conquer Avernus, and no one will go to Hell again."

Permalink Mark Unread

Nod. Urtho looks unhappy about it, but resolved. 

"What do you - need from me, if anything? Other than a Gate home, of course." 

Permalink Mark Unread

"Is the weapon - deadly to the person who sets it off? Can that be done remotely?"

Permalink Mark Unread

"It cannot be done remotely. It - could, probably, be set to trigger on a short delay, time enough to Gate out." 

Permalink Mark Unread

" - I don't think that's worth it, but I appreciate knowing the option. The big challenge will be that we need to get someone to Dis to deliver the weapon. One way to do that is to fight through the guarded entrances in Avernus, that's the only way with my world's magic, but it's possible that by the time you've developed a powerful interplanar Gate it'll also be possible to use the powerful interplanar Gate to get from Avernus to Dis, in which case - I would ask someone to do that. The less warning Hell has, the better."

Permalink Mark Unread

"Does the planar boundary block your world's form of transport magic? You have one, right?" 

Permalink Mark Unread

"Yep. You can only - using our magic - get to the second layer of Hell via locations on the first layer which are guarded. Heaven works the same way."

Permalink Mark Unread

Nod. "It sounds unfortunately difficult to study, or - check in advance - unless the first layer can be infiltrated without being caught?" 

Permalink Mark Unread

" - not impossible but I'd rather not risk it without good reason to hope it'd work; we probably lose everything, if Hell suspects too soon."

Permalink Mark Unread

Nod. "I assume the same barrier would prevent us from scrying it from here, or from the ordinary material plane of your world? If there is anyone who has memories of Dis, that could be shared with Thoughtsensing, a reasonably experienced mage could test it quickly at the time - if we do not have that specific to aim for, I think I could still do it, or Ma'ar could, but it sounds - risky."

Sigh. "And that is probably getting ahead of ourselves, when we do not have interplanetary Gates yet at all." 

Permalink Mark Unread

"Once we have them there are additional researchers I can bring in. And - maybe someone with memories of Dis, maybe worth a True Resurrection to get someone who has those - but I think none of this changes that our first priority is interworld Gates and contact with our world."

Permalink Mark Unread

"- You can do that? I - how -" 

Urtho catches himself. "Right. Of course." 

Permalink Mark Unread

Ma'ar has some initial ideas to try to explain - he'd rather do it while he's wearing the headband, it makes it a lot easier to turn wordless intuition into explanations - and then they can head to a Work Room and Urtho can take the headband before running some tests on planar interactions.

It's not spectacularly safe, but Iomedae is very close to indestructible and it's probably not an issue for her to be in the room (though their discussion is very quickly going to become incomprehensible to her.) Ma'ar appreciates having her there. As long as he has the no-fear effect, he is basically not stressed about working with Urtho, and hopefully that lack of stress will stick later. 

Permalink Mark Unread

Iomedae is happy to do her thinking-through-assaults-on-Hell in the room where the wizards are doing magical testing.

Permalink Mark Unread

The headband is GREAT and Urtho is going to use it entirely for magic research, which is fun and exciting, and not for thinking about his life, which is much less fun and exciting and is something he can do after they have a plan to destroy Hell, which is a lot more important. 

 

They make some progress! Not a lot of progress, it's going to be at least another week of work, but Urtho has some promising theories on interplanar routing. 

Permalink Mark Unread

And Ma'ar has some ideas for routing the search to look for artifacts like Iomedae's. Are any of hers ones that would be standard and common in her world? 

Permalink Mark Unread

Most of them, actually! Not the headband, and not the armor, but most of what she's wearing is the ordinary equipment of extremely scary people.

Permalink Mark Unread

Then those seem like promising search-spell targets! 

 

 

...The naive approaches, unsurprisingly, do not work. Iomedae's world is very far away. But with a headband to trade between them, and Iomedae's artifacts to study directly, and Iomedae right there to consult on some kinds of questions - to the extent she knows anything about, say, how summoning elementals behaves in Golarion - they can make steady progress most days, in between juggling their other responsibilities to their respective countries. 

Permalink Mark Unread

It takes nine days, and a couple of false starts until they figure out where their models of planar interactions were wrong or incomplete, and then they have a scrying spell!

 

Urtho thinks it should probably work. The power requirement will be very high, it's going to have to be a concert-ritual the first time, but once they confirm they've found the right world, he can refactor the routing and get it down to something an Adept can cast alone. 

 

Does Iomedae want to be there? (Urtho isn't a Mindspeaker and can't share what he's seeing directly, but it's not that much extra work to set up a visible illusion and show everyone.) Also, is there anything he should be particularly careful of? 

Permalink Mark Unread

Yeah, they want to not scry Tar-Baphon, though he shouldn't be a valid search-target because he has a Mind Blank and she's picked magic items he doesn't wear. They also probably want to not startle Iomedae's allies, for the same reason, but she expects that the typical wearer of a Ring of Sustenance like hers is a well-to-do noble or retired adventurer, and importantly definitely isn't undead.

Permalink Mark Unread

(She'll have a Magic Circle Against Evil up while they're casting just in case. This will protect against Domination by Tar Baphon and....proooobably also protect against it from Alfirin.)

Permalink Mark Unread

Great! Then Urtho will summon a dozen of his best concert-trained Adepts to a specialized Work Room, where they can use the more flexible (if much less power-efficient) scrying artifact he's thrown together for this purpose. He'll do a better one later. 

Ma'ar is not really trained in concert work up to Urtho's standards but is invited to participate, he's a Mindspeaker and can probably pick it up fine? 

Permalink Mark Unread

Taking down enough of his shields to join a meld with, not just Urtho, but a random subset of the mages directly loyal to Urtho, is actually super nervewracking! He can do it if Iomedae is there and can do the no-fear effect so he doesn't keep flinching about it. 

Permalink Mark Unread

Iomedae will absolutely do the no-fear effect, in addition to her Greater Angelic Aspect which does Magic Circle Against Evil and a Lesser Globe of Invulnerability, and a Prayer to give everyone good luck, and also her she's-not-even-sure-if-it's-magical ability to just make her allies succeed at whatever they're doing.

 

 

Permalink Mark Unread

In that case Urtho will get his scry through on the first try! 

 

It's going to land on a semi-random instance of someone wearing a Ring of Sustenance, though weighted toward whoever also has the most total spellsilver and artifacts on or near their person. 

Permalink Mark Unread

Then it'll land on a lead spellsculptor - not important enough to be under a Mind Blank but important enough for a ludicrous amount of magic jewelry - in the Empire of Shu, actually!

 

He doesn't observably notice; he's working on magic item crafting, it looks like.

Permalink Mark Unread

That is the most beautiful thing Urtho has ever seen in his entire life!!!!!!!! Urtho is maybe tempted to hold the spell until everyone's reserves are drained, just to watch more of the crafting. 

...Does Iomedae think it looks like the right world, if it's somehow the wrong world with similar magic then they should drop it now to try again. 

Permalink Mark Unread

Looks like the right world to her.

Permalink Mark Unread

(And she hasn't been feeling impatient but she suddenly is - the crusade will be suffering without her, and - the crusade does not, actually, much matter, alongside what she is about to do, but Iomedae is not entirely made of that logic, and her people who trust her and love her are alone and she's close enough, now, to reach out and -

- and she has to be so, so careful that the gods don't see her -)

Permalink Mark Unread

…He‘s still going to hold it for five minutes, it gives him and the other Adepts longer to get a feel for the routing, and he can try to memorize the magical signature of all the additional artifacts he's suddenly getting a look at... 

 

- and then he reluctantly takes it down, and tells his Adepts they can have twenty minutes to rest and grab a snack, they're not individually very drained from it but they may want to hold future scries a lot longer. 

Permalink Mark Unread

Ma'ar wants to give Iomedae a hug, and there isn't actually a reason not to do it in front of Urtho, so he does. 

 

"Is there anyone specific we should try to scry?" he asks her. "To figure out what we would be Gating into, or - whether there are any time-sensitive situations with your people and your war?" 

Permalink Mark Unread

"Gating to that continent is actually - probably a good idea. Tar-Baphon isn't going to have many spies there. I want to do all the planning for this operation in this world, where we know it's really expensive for the Golarion gods to see what's going on, but I can buy a Sending somewhere in Tian Xia - uh, if I can have some gold or gemstones, I suppose I shouldn't presume - and ask my people to come to me, and we should escape Tar-Baphon's notice that way."

Permalink Mark Unread

She can definitely have gold and gemstones! A lot of kinds of gemstones are fairly easy to mine with Velgarth mage-work - which ones would sell for especially high prices on that continent? 

Permalink Mark Unread

“Definitely most valuable is diamonds, we burn them for resurrection and miracles.”

Permalink Mark Unread

They do WHAT with them. How does that even work???? 

Permalink Mark Unread

"...It sounds as though we might have a very favorable exchange rate on diamonds, then, they are not very magically useful for us." 

Permalink Mark Unread

"Well, that will be really useful for retrieving the crusade if this succeeds. Maybe we can - leave some with them - so they stand a chance even if this fails.

 

And - maybe we can retrieve the dead here too, once we can get in contact with the gods, which I don't want to do until after the attack on Hell lest Aroden's obligated to report new plane-destroying magics or something."

Permalink Mark Unread

Urtho has a lot of feelings about that! Which he is not going to process right now when Iomedae and a lot of his Adept researchers are waiting on him! 

 

...He'll scry for a nice uninhabited area on that particular continent, where a Gate seems likely to slip by mostly undetected. 

Permalink Mark Unread

Does Iomedae want someone from Velgarth to come with her, or does that increase the risk of drawing the gods' attention to another world and maybe causing Them to learn of her plans somehow? 

Permalink Mark Unread

It's - probably worth the slightly added risk for the greatly added magical flexibility. 

 

Does he want to come.

Permalink Mark Unread

If Iomedae thinks it's not unduly risky, then - yes, he would very much like her not to be alone on this mission. And he may not be nearly as tough as her, but he's reasonably competent at defending himself, and can do local Gates if they need to quickly get out of a situation, and once Urtho has a more efficient routing - they should in fact wait for that - he can get them back to Velgarth too, though he's not going to be able to cast that one in under a second. 

Permalink Mark Unread

...Urtho wants another few candlemarks for the Gate-routing, actually, if Ma'ar needs a more optimized Gate-search that he can cast alone. He can definitely load Ma'ar up with protective Velgarth artifacts, though, and he can borrow the Adepts for concert-work if he wants to do a lot more scrying during that time period so he knows what to expect. 

Permalink Mark Unread

She'd like to find a temple of Abadar, which will definitely possess and sell scrolls of Sending and which probably, if she takes off some of the shiniest gear, won't think that much of a foreign adventurer arriving to buy it.

Permalink Mark Unread

...Do temples of Abadar have any magical properties that could be targeted with Velgarth scrying, or does he mostly want to just look for cities and then for a particular temple appearance? 

Permalink Mark Unread

She would not expect them to have predictable magical properties beyond 'lots of protective spells' and 'lots of riches'. Abadar's the god of banking and trade.

Permalink Mark Unread

Once he's gotten a look at some of the protective spells Golarion uses on buildings as opposed to people, he can target a search on those well enough to at least narrow it down. By the time Urtho has a Gate-routing he's happy with - it's more like five candlemarks, Urtho is prone to getting very focused on research and losing track of time and the headband does not help this problem - he's pretty sure he has the location of a couple of temples to Abadar, one in a big city and one in a medium-sized town. The medium-sized town is probably easier if they want the initial Gate to be somewhere no one will see it up close?

...He's not sure what he should be picturing in terms of mage-sight range or detection wards, in her world, Velgarth mages can detect a Gate at a distance of miles but not see any detail, and most places won't have area-affect wards in random forests or fields but it's not impossible. 

Permalink Mark Unread

"There won't be many wards for dimensional transit magic even in a big city, and adventurers teleporting in won't be that strange anyway. I'd rather do the big city, much likelier they'll have the spell we need."

Permalink Mark Unread

Then maybe Urtho can aim his concert-Gate for this particular patch of trees beside a creek on the outskirts of the big city? (Ma'ar has the new version of the routing, but would still rather not cast it for the departure, multiple candlemarks of scrying is a little tiring even done as a concert-meld.) 

Permalink Mark Unread

And he has all of Urtho's best protective artifacts, many of which are undetectable to mage-sight or at least not recognizable as powerful talismans - this is something of a specialty of Urtho's - though he's not sure whether that holds for detection magic in Golarion. 

 

Is there anything else they need to figure out before they go? Urtho will plan to watch them via scrying, in case it looks like they need an urgent Gate home and Ma'ar is incapacitated. 

Permalink Mark Unread

She's expecting one or two other people to show up shortly after she uses the scroll, at which point they'll want a Gate back, though ideally Ma'ar can do it. It's possible those people will be temporarily hostile while they determine Iomedae isn't mind-controlled and isn't otherwise untrustworthy, and it's possible that will entail Plane Shifting her away or something. It shouldn't take long to resolve.

 

If something goes more dramatically wrong than that, they should expect her back anyway in not all that long; with the diamonds, it could be done with Golarion magic. If anything happens to Ma'ar she'll want to raise him on Golarion before coming back to Velgarth. 

...she really doesn't expect anything to go wrong. Just better to prepare for the worst. 

Permalink Mark Unread

...If she gets Plane Shifted somewhere else, he'll lose the scry on her. Should he in that case try to find her again, or wait for her to show up back where she was, or something else? 

Permalink Mark Unread

Probably if that happens just wait for her to show up again. If that happens it's because her allies are feeling very prickly and scrying them might be ill-advised.

Permalink Mark Unread

Noted. Urtho is pretty tense, but - it seems like something they have to do sooner or later, and Iomedae knows what she's doing.

Iomedae can have a magically shielded jewelry-box containing all of the diamonds that one can acquire on short notice, if one is Urtho and is absurdly wealthy, owed a number of favors by a lot of important people, and also has a highly capable and organized hertasi staff. Does she, uh, want to bring all of these diamonds on this trip, or leave some here for safekeeping while she figures things out, it seems like it would be awkward if she got robbed. 

 

(By Golarion standards, it's a truly unreasonable quantity of diamonds! 21 of them are big enough for Wish, or bigger - some are substantially bigger.) 

Permalink Mark Unread

Permalink Mark Unread

Permalink Mark Unread

Permalink Mark Unread

Instead she's going to take five, well-hidden in the gauntlets or in one case swallowed, plus a smaller one to trade for the Sending, and if she doesn't make it back they should drop the rest on Aroden's church in Absalom with a note she will write right now. Going around with that many diamonds is insane and also they may need to not intend to use the diamonds widely or Abadar will notice.

Permalink Mark Unread

...He should probably delay to make sure he can find Aroden's church in Absalom? He's not sure what to look for. If she can draw approximately where Absalom is on a map relative to this continent, he might be able to at least get the city with a few minutes of trial and error, and then she can tell him how Aroden's temple is decorated or something and he can show her the scry-image illusion to make sure he's targeting the right one? 

Permalink Mark Unread

Yeah, she's happy to give him detailed Church-of-Aroden-in-Absalom-finding instructions.

Permalink Mark Unread

It takes him about half a candlemark of concert-scrying to find it and double-check with her. 

Permalink Mark Unread

This is arguably convenient, in that it gives Ma'ar a bit of time to rest and eat something, and get back to 'not noticeably drained.' 

 

(He would probably be terrified if not for the no-fear effect, but...he trusts Iomedae. Probably nothing will go wrong, and if even if things go very catastrophically wrong and also his more convenient immortality methods don't work in Golarion, she can and will make sure he doesn't stay dead.) 

Permalink Mark Unread

All right. He has the note and the remaining diamonds and a place to Gate-drop them if Iomedae doesn't safely make it back. He can scry her at a distance, unless she gets Plane Shifted elsewhere by the allies she contacts, in which case he'll wait and see. If something goes very disastrously wrong and he can't get her out by Gate, she can probably get herself back eventually with the diamonds. 

 

Is there anything else to finalize before he goes ahead and Gates them over? 

Permalink Mark Unread

Iomedae is going to leave behind the most distinguishing of her possessions. Wearing most of the treasury of Taldor into the Church of Abadar will attract attention; unarmored and without her headband, she could just be any powerful adventurer. 

 

And - nothing else. They should go.

Permalink Mark Unread

And Urtho raises the first Gate ever cast to another world. 

 

(This is great!!! He's so excited!) 

Permalink Mark Unread

Ma'ar cannot say that excitement is most of what he's feeling, but at least he isn't - can't - be afraid. He still grips Iomedae's hand rather tightly, as he steps across with her. 

Permalink Mark Unread

She smiles at him, grips his hand back. She wants to show him Oppara, show him Absalom, show him the whole world - but, later. If there's a later. She's not even going to think of her plans while she's in this world; she will just singlemindedly execute on them, with Ma'ar at her side, both of them unafraid.



The Church of Abadar makes it uncomplicated to walk into any Church of Abadar anywhere in the world with anything of economic value and exchange it for a reasonable fee for common necessities which include emergency scrolls of sending. She is so grateful to the Church of Abadar. 

 

They leave the Church and go somewhere clear of people.

 

And, three weeks after Iomedae vanished from the Shining Crusade, its archmage, Alfirin, gets a Sending in Iomedae's voice. 

"Regret abrupt departure. Legitimately up to something more important. Need to avoid attention, come here with any backup you want. Worth losing crusade," she says, and then stops instinctively defending herself against being scried, because usually Alfirin can't in fact beat that.

Permalink Mark Unread

What.

 

...She should respond, before the brief sending response window closes. "Acknowledged."

Where's Marit, she needs to find Marit.

Permalink Mark Unread

Out fighting. He's very rarely not out fighting, these days.

Permalink Mark Unread

Well she can run up to the front long enough to get him in a telepathic bond.

:Contact from supposedly Iomedae. I'm pretty sure it's not a trap but if it is a trap things are also going to start going horribly wrong here as soon as I trigger it. I'm going to do some checks from here and then investigate in person. Secrecy might be a concern, I wrote down her message and my plans in a sealed packet and left it with Yemet, open it if I'm out of contact for more than fifteen minutes.:

Permalink Mark Unread

Discern Location shows that Iomedae is back on Golarion. In Tian Xia. Protection from evil for herself, then greater scrying... goes through. Iomedae, in a park. Looks like it could be Tian Xia. One (visible) person with her, unfamiliar.

Permalink Mark Unread

Invisibility, greater teleport, to three hundred forty one feet above and to the northeast of the point she scried, fly closer, and -

Disjunction. Quickened limited wish for an invisibility purge and no mind-blanked invisible devourers are suddenly visible and nobody's trying to kill her so maybe this is not in fact a trap.

Permalink Mark Unread

Ma'ar cannot actually panic about having all of his shields suddenly down and all of his talismans no longer working! 

 

- he can still be very very unhappy about it, and try to throw up a new shield over himself and Iomedae - probably it's fine and it's just her allies who are understandably alarmed but STILL - at least he can, apparently, still raise a fresh shield, and his reserves are in good shape - 

 

- should he not be doing that, is it going to be interpreted as escalation - he's not sure -? :Iomedae should I not be shielding: 

Permalink Mark Unread

:It's okay: she thinks at Ma'ar, :that's almost definitely friendly but it's still fine to shield: If it were Tar-Baphon the quickened followup would have been lethal.

Permalink Mark Unread

- and there she is in the sky. "Alfirin!"

Permalink Mark Unread

(Someone is scrying them but he's doing it from very very very far away and seems more likely to be Iomedae's ally than a servant of Tar-Baphon, and accordingly does not get a feeblemind yet.)

:I think we're OK. Plane shifting for a private conversation. I'll be back on the material or send a sending within fifteen minutes if everything is in fact OK.:

She can land on the ground and hold out both hands. "Iomedae! Wonderful to see you again." Plane shift?

Permalink Mark Unread

"I don't know if you have anywhere sufficiently private, and I do."

Permalink Mark Unread

...

:Belay that, this may in fact be a trap.:

"I have somewhere more private than our usual meeting places and would like to go there and at least hear an explanation of why more privacy than that is required."

Permalink Mark Unread

She nods, levelly. 

To Ma'ar: :I don't expect us to be gone for more than ten minutes. I won't be contactable. I'd appreciate it if you waited and were ready to Gate us back, once I've persuaded her I'm myself.:

Permalink Mark Unread

...He nods. :I will wait. ...If you are not back in a candlemark, or if anything else happens, I am going to Gate back to inform Urtho, but - I will try to return and wait for you even then: 

Permalink Mark Unread

:That sounds good. Thank you.:

And now she'll permit Alfirin's Plane Shift.

 

Permalink Mark Unread

And rather than in her gardens, they will be floating weightlessly in an orb of force suspended in the middle of a torrent of positive energy, which fouls prophecy and more ordinary divinations alike.

 

"Explain."

Permalink Mark Unread

There's - a lot that Iomedae would like to say to her friend and also ex who has presumably been under extraordinary strain without Iomedae who just showed up across the planet with a boyfriend and a mysterious plan.

It's not the time for any of that.

"First thing, prophecy does not work well across interplanetary distances of the type we're talking about. The local gods in Velgarth, where I landed, pretty much couldn't see at all and it caused them a lot of problems and also me a lot of problems. I'm reasonably confident it'll work the other way, and the gods here will have enormous difficulty with visibility for plans conceived and developed in Velgarth.

Is that enough that you'll agree to come with me to Velgarth for the rest of this briefing or do you need more."

Permalink Mark Unread

"Did you get here with a wish or do they have longer-ranged teleportation on Velgarth?"

Permalink Mark Unread

"They have a longer-ranged Gate. Ma'ar, who accompanied me, can take us back."

 

And, with a sigh, she pulls a Wish diamond out of her gauntlet. "- and you can leave without their assistance, if you need to, though they are my allies and I trust them."

Permalink Mark Unread

This is, if it's a trap, a very well-baited one. She will take the diamond.

 

...She is having a sinking realization that, when the Crusade leadership had arranged a commune with Aroden, He had told them not to try to wish her back, even in an emergency. And that they had not, at the time, thought to ask whether this was because Iomedae was doing something extremely important, as they had assumed and as her recent sending implied, or for some other reason. Dou-Bral wandered to distant places once and came back changed.

 

"Are you hiding your activities from Aroden in particular, or just other gods."

Permalink Mark Unread

"Aroden would approve if He knew, but it is possible that He would be - bound to stop me."

Permalink Mark Unread

How incredibly inconvenient (for Good Iomedae)/convenient (for Evil Iomedae)

 

"Do you predict it would cause problems if we asked Him, with no other context, whether you are Fallen."

Permalink Mark Unread

 

"- I think, had Aroden withdrawn His backing, I would no longer be consistently able to beat your magic, or immune to any of it that might touch my mind. Also the sword still works." She makes it glow. "I don't, in fact, want you to ask Him to look closely at me right now."

Permalink Mark Unread

Permalink Mark Unread

"Don't resist." Greater bestow curse. Bestow curse. Dominate Monster. Dominate Person. Dominate Person. Threnodic Dominate Monster.

 

Permalink Mark Unread

--

 

 

 

It is, in fact, very very unpleasant, to let a curse touch her. 

 

She can see what Alfirin is checking, though. If Iomedae is immune to mind-affecting magic, no Dominate will touch her no matter how badly Alfirin has battered her ability to resist. If Iomedae is - whatever in the Outer Reaches Alfirin fears Iomedae is -

 

- well, one of those should really have worked. 

 

None of them did. 

Permalink Mark Unread

"...OK. Let's go. I'll prepare a lot of break enchantments tomorrow." Plane shift. Teleport.

:OK, I did some more checks. Not a trap. I'm going to the other planet with Iomedae, the telepathic bond probably won't reach.:

Permalink Mark Unread

And they reappear in front of Ma'ar, Iomedae looking like she has been cursed - which is to say, not much different from usual, but there's a bit of strain in the way she's carrying herself, if you're attentive to that, and also some obvious spells active on her.

:We're ready to go.:

Permalink Mark Unread

He notices. The spells, of course, they're incredibly obvious and not ones he recognizes, but also the strain. Iomedae isn't acting like her ally just betrayed her, but - she might not be allowed to, if they gambled wrong here - 

- he can't actually read her mind to check unless she lets him, and he probably shouldn't just try to snip those spells, they'll come apart destructively and Iomedae will survive it because it's much less bad than a superweapon but it will look very escalatory

 

He ends up just taking a step closer to her, his body language shifting to - not exactly angry, but definitely dangerous, and protective. :Are you all right: he sends, privately. 

Permalink Mark Unread

:Yes. I just have very suspicious allies, which I appreciate about them. You can dispel the curses if you want, we're no longer using them.:

Permalink Mark Unread

She's just going to ignore that.

Permalink Mark Unread

It's understandable to be grateful and appreciative for suspicious allies! This is not actually going to get Ma'ar to the point of feeling or acting warmly toward Alfirin, but he is slightly less hostile. 

:I would prefer to do that here first - cutting them with my magic will be somewhat destructive, I think it will not injure you very much because you are hard to injure but - is that all right -?: 

Permalink Mark Unread

:Yes, yes, go ahead.:

Permalink Mark Unread

Then he'll snip the spells. As carefully as he can, and laying shields on her first where it looks like it might help, but it's still definitely a level of backlash that would kill a normal Velgarth human on the spot. (It gives Ma'ar some backlash, just via being the one who laid the shields, though not an amount of backlash that will interfere with Gating.) 

Permalink Mark Unread

She does not, perceptibly, startle to see that.

Permalink Mark Unread

Iomedae can take a Wail of the Banshee to the face when she has not made her save from it and does not much care about the spell-snapping damage, though she smiles appreciatively at Ma'ar.

 

 

Permalink Mark Unread

And he'll fling out his mage-sight first, to check that no one is nearby enough to see a Gate, before he raises one back to Velgarth.

 

It takes him a while, even with the more efficient routing, and he's not especially close to draining himself unconscious but he's definitely very dizzy by the time the Gate is up. (The other side is, of course, hidden by a milky-opaque barrier.) 

 

He holds out his hand to Iomedae (half because it would be embarrassing if he collapsed immediately after crossing) and then will usher them both across into Velgarth, specifically to Urtho's very well shielded Work Room. 

Permalink Mark Unread

Urtho is very relieved! 

 

...He's been scrying from a different Work Room, and will drop it and switch to scrying the room they just Gated into for a few seconds before he walks over to meet them. Paranoia does not at all come naturally to him but he's learned some of it, over the course of the war. 

Permalink Mark Unread

- he's not going to collapse but he's definitely leaning on Iomedae while he takes down the Gate. 

Permalink Mark Unread

Where she'll exhale, very heavily. "Alfirin, this is the tower of the Archmage Urtho, and this is Kiyamvir Ma'ar. ...Urtho made a weapon that I think can be used to destroy a plane of Hell."

Permalink Mark Unread

Permalink Mark Unread

"Pleased to meet you" she says half-automatically because she's still processing the phrase 'destroy a plane of Hell'

Permalink Mark Unread

"i'm - really sorry for putting you through that. And there is, actually, an outside chance I'm substantially impaired, a godlike entity did try fundamentally manipulating my soul and Aroden had to intervene and then maybe-Sarenrae had to put me back to rights. But - I'd do it again, obviously, because - 

- we've got to, and I'm not sure Aroden can let us."

Permalink Mark Unread

:Urtho thought it might be able to hit multiple planes if we could somehow have active Gates open between them at the time: Ma'ar manages, :it would kill the mage casting it, obviously - did not bring it up before not sure it is worth it -: 

There's a chair but it's all the way at the other side of the Work Room, he's not steady enough on his feet to make it there without it being obvious how tired he is, and he's very reluctant to show visible weakness in front of Iomedae's impressively paranoid ally. 

Permalink Mark Unread

(Iomedae will carry him. Not like he's weak, just like she's strong.)

Permalink Mark Unread

(He's not sure this is better from the perspective of visibly showing weakness but he's...fine with it, actually, Iomedae wouldn't if it was going to make things worse.) 

 

:Should I call Urtho in to introduce himself?: 

Permalink Mark Unread

(She is not mindspeakable. Probably related to how she's not showing up to mage-sight.)

 

"Yes, that follows.

 

Do you have a plan to hit something deeper than Avernus."

 

Under normal circumstances Alfirin would probably be feeling something about Iomedae's soul being attacked and molded by multiple gods, or about - other things - but right now the part of her that feels things about things seems to be busy pretending not to exist.

Permalink Mark Unread

;Alfirin can't hear you because she's got Mind Blank up: she tells Ma'ar. :I think not Urtho quite yet.: Because Alfirin is obviously having a terrible time, mostly in ways that are not entirely in Iomedae's power to fix but they can give her a couple minutes before introductions.

 

"It needs to be Dis. It's a magical chain reaction that spreads to nearby magical targets, Avernus is too sparse. Ma'ar was just saying - you're blocking his Telepathy - that we could maybe spread it from there with Gates, if it's possible to Velgarth-Gate between planes of Hell, which we don't know and which will be hard to test. 


Urtho also thought it'd be, uh, bad for all nearby planes, to use it at that scale."

Permalink Mark Unread

"If he says a word or two my tongues will be able to pick it up -

What measure of planar distance are we talking about here?"

Permalink Mark Unread

(He had noticed that he couldn't read Alfirin but wasn't sure if non-directional Mindspeech was or wasn't getting through.)

Urtho is probably very alarmed. The Work Room shields block Mindspeech but not the communication-spell, which is more tiring right now but doable now that he's sitting down. 

<We are fine> he sends. <Wait a few minutes, we will call you in soon.> 

Permalink Mark Unread

:Alfirin has Tongues, if you speak she'll understand you.: Iomedae won't but they can probably make it work with a Tongues/Telepathy combination. 



"You will be able to get wildly more useful explanations out of Urtho than I can," she answers Alfirin. "I mostly just sit in the corner having an aura of courage while the two of them go at it -" gesture at Ma'ar and at the door which will be taken as metaphorically at Urtho. 

Permalink Mark Unread

"Classically speaking when archmages are experimenting with plane-destroying weapons they do not need more courage."

Permalink Mark Unread

"But you see, when I arrived they were at war, and I talked them down, and then they needed a bit of supervising to go back to a functional working relationship."

Permalink Mark Unread

She would not expect courage to help there either but Iomedae's the expert.

"Hopefully not a war where weapons like that one were used?"

Permalink Mark Unread

" - one of them in fact was! It tears open an enormous rift to the Elemental Plane of Fire! Boiled the water for fifty miles around! - I dodged the weapon, but it turns out it's hard to dodge a boiled ocean."

Permalink Mark Unread

Iomedae is clearly trying to send her impression of what she and Alfirin are talking about, but she's clearly very distracted and he's following at best a quarter of it and probably not the important parts. Apparently Alfirin has translation magic that will somehow fix this? 

"I can call Urtho in to answer questions once you are ready," he says in Tantaran as soon as there's a pause long enough for it. 

Permalink Mark Unread

She observes that Iomedae being caught in a boiled ocean is also something she would usually have feelings about.

 

"...are there more? Are any unsecured?"

 

And in Tantaran, "I'm ready to talk to Urtho now, I had assumed he was busy."

Permalink Mark Unread

Iomedae will sprout angel wings, actually, so she can keep up with the switch in languages. One angel wing will curl protectively around Ma'ar, because he's still exhausted.

 

"All of them are now partially dismantled and Urtho thinks only he could reassemble them."

Permalink Mark Unread

This is a conversation he would really prefer not to be having while this exhausted, but it seems important and time-sensitive. 

"Urtho was not the one who used the weapon against Iomedae," he manages, because he's pretty sure that was just being talked about though he couldn't understand the words at the time. "A follower of one of the local gods stole it." 

Permalink Mark Unread

Well obviously Urtho didn't use the weapon against Iomedae, because boiled ocean or no Iomedae seems to be in perfect health and Urtho does not seem to be dead or a prisoner.

 

"Mm. An Evil one I assume? Anyone I've heard of?"

Permalink Mark Unread

"The locals don't themselves have Detect spells, though they show up fine to mine, and they don't - think of their gods as possessing alignments, though there is one who sounds a lot like Sarenrae. I - think the one who stole and used the superweapon might've been Lawful? He warned me so I could get out in the ocean, avoid collateral damage."

Permalink Mark Unread

"Polite of him." This is still a very surreal experience but that seems odd, even for a Lawful god.

Permalink Mark Unread

"The gods were - flailing pretty wildly, because they couldn't see anything I touched and I immediately went and - got a ceasefire for the war, interrupted a coup, got the superweapons dismantled - made everything look very fuzzy, and charitably the gods had been trying to watch the war very closely to prevent it destroying the whole continent."

Permalink Mark Unread

"I would not expect a god trying to prevent the war to escalate to superweapon use to try to do that by having their followers use superweapons"

Permalink Mark Unread

"Yeah, the less generous account is that they were pursuing arcane god-things that plausibly included the continent being destroyed, and then I got in the way, so then they tried to kill me, and when that failed tried to soul-manipulate me, and when that failed - gave up? We may not want to count on that."

Permalink Mark Unread

"I am not clear how much it - the warning to Iomedae so that she could go far from any inhabited areas - was on the direct orders of Vkandis, the god involved, versus - just a decision that one of his followers made, for understandable human reasons. ...My own sense is that the gods of this world are mostly pursuing arcane god-things that may or may not be relevant to mortal wellbeing, though I - have since had a better impression of the Nameless God of Eternal Flame, which is the one Iomedae thought might correspond to a Good god in your world." 

The angel wing is very comfortable to lean against. He didn't really have a chance to notice things like that on the previous (highly memorable) occasion she used that particular magic. 

Permalink Mark Unread

She doesn't really have a half-automatic response to that, for some reason. She knows it's a topic she has opinions on.

"Hm."

Permalink Mark Unread

Iomedae kind of feels like Alfirin should not meet Urtho right now and should take a couple of hours to decompress first. But - she doesn't have the right to tell Alfirin that, really, and maybe comparative magic with another genius archmage is just what Alfirin needs. 

 

And it's probably too late, they told Urtho to come in.

Permalink Mark Unread

He hasn't actually called Urtho in, yet, it's just that asking the question was the first non-stupid topical thing that came to mind to say in a conversation he was failing to keep up with at all. He's been waiting for a reasonable-seeming moment to actually ask Iomedae about it. It seems like it might not actually be a good time? 

:I told Urtho it would be a few minutes: he sends to Iomedae, privately, once it seems like there's a pause happening. :Should I tell him to wait longer?: 

Permalink Mark Unread

:I'm not sure.: Which means she should be a mature adult with enough wisdom she could in principle be a priest, and -

"Alfirin? Urtho will be eager to meet you, but I've thrown a lot at you today and - for the last month, I assume - and you don't seem entirely okay - and we could also get you a guest room if you want to process things first."

Permalink Mark Unread

She doesn't seem okay? She thinks she's probably not terribly okay at the moment but that usually would not have very much to do with how she seems, and Iomedae would often be able to tell anyways but - wouldn't usually say anything.

 

"I'm fine. I'd be delighted to meet Urtho." She's not sure why she said that.

Permalink Mark Unread

That's nonsense but - Alfirin has never appreciated anyone trying to protect her from herself.

"We should tell him to come on in, then," she says, "or go meet him, I suppose, there's no reason this has to be in a Work Room."

Permalink Mark Unread

The problem with having it not in the Work Room is that then he has to get up and walk somewhere it's fine. He's had a couple of minutes to catch his breath and he's not on the edge of passing out or anything, he can walk. 

(He...vaguely wants to say something sympathetic to Alfirin, having - recently experienced some overwhelming and disorienting changes in circumstances, that were good news overall but weren't easy to absorb - but he does not currently have the headband that would maybe suggest an actually-helpful thing to say, and in this case he vaguely suspects the headband would just point out to him even harder that he is lacking so much context here and shouldn't try to intervene because he can't expect to do so productively.) 

 

"I will tell him we can meet in a conference room, there is one nearby." Telling him in Mindspeech will be easier but that requires being outside of this room first. He will put in the effort to stand up, though he's leaning kind of a lot of his weight on Iomedae. 

Permalink Mark Unread

Her wing is there to support him. 

 

There are absolutely no supportive actions she can think of that'd be helpful to Alfirin.

Permalink Mark Unread

That's fine she doesn't need supportive actions.

Ma'ar looks tired but she can't cast a restoration about it. Is there anything she can cast about it? Oh, bear's endurance? No, she didn't prepare it and this isn't an emergency. OK, then. She can...get the door at least...

"Sure, a conference room sounds good."

Permalink Mark Unread

Urtho will meet them in a conference room. 

(He's kind of concerned! It's not clear that anything went wrong but Iomedae did get Plane Shifted away and came back with obvious-to-a-scry spells on her, which Ma'ar snipped, and then they just had a conversation in the Work Room which seems...kind of tense, in some way? Urtho is currently wearing the headband and it makes him better at reading people but not amazing at it.) 

 

He's still going to try his best to be welcoming! - and pull out a chair for Ma'ar immediately, he's honestly surprised Ma'ar is still able to walk after doing a solo Gate back from the other world. 

"I am very pleased to meet you!" he says to Alfirin. "You had questions about the weapon-artifacts I made?" 

Permalink Mark Unread

Ah, Urtho is the man she didn't feeblemind.

"Yes! Iomedae briefly mentioned that you thought the one we'd be using on Dis would be bad for nearby planes, but she didn't know which metric of planar distance is applicable for which planes count as 'nearby' - I'm also curious about the others but that's more of an academic curiosity with no immediate strategic implications."

Permalink Mark Unread

"I was not sure at the time how the planes behaved in your world! I have fewer uncertainties now but - I still know very little about the afterlife planes, I was not doing the Gate-routing through them -" 

He can go into a lot of detail on what factors are relevant in Velgarth, in terms of how various other planes would be affected by an enormously disruptive magical discharge in the material plane. It depends partly on active connections. In Velgarth it's rare but not unheard of to summon and bind elemental spirits, for example, which leaves an open connection back to the relevant elemental plane. He's learned from Iomedae that summoning elementals is possible in Golarion, but he doesn't know much about the frequency for it, or whether it even works the same way...

The ethereal plane or spirit world - also where some magical theories say the Velgarth gods have most of their power - likely has a brief link to the material plane every time a mortal dies, and so setting off the weapon in a place that would kill a lot of mortals would...have significant effects...but that probably doesn't apply if they're using it in Hell, which is already an afterlife plane, and might not be relevant in her world at all... 

Open Gates are of course a huge issue, they route through the Void which is in some sense in contact with every plane, but he doesn't think the Golarion form of instantaneous interplanar transport works the same way... 

Permalink Mark Unread

It's very quickly going to be beyond what Iomedae can follow. And also mostly beyond what Ma'ar can follow, when he's this tired. He leans on Iomedae's wing and tries to pay some amount of attention, in case he ends up having anything relevant to add if Alfirin asks questions. 

Permalink Mark Unread

Interesting! A lot of these phenomena rhyme with similar phenomena on Golarion, at the very least, in a way that's probably indicative of a shared underlying nature - the Void sounds fairly analogous to the Astral plane, for example, and of course they have the Ethereal plane too - or at least another plane whose name translates the same as the Velgarth Ethereal plane and seems to have some properties in common -

(She registers in the back of her mind that the Ethereal plane is an unusual place for gods to live, which is some evidence that the Velgarth gods are a different sort of entity than the Golarion ones)

Alfirin can carry on a spirited conversation about planar dynamics and superweapons and follow Urtho into a tangent about notation and mathematical formalizations and is, to almost any eyes, thoroughly recovered from whatever was troubling her earlier.

Permalink Mark Unread

Ma'ar does manage some amount of participation! He wants to hear more about the Astral plane, whatever Alfirin knows of it, he's done an unusual amount of research on interacting with the Void and can help check if it's actually the same.

(The Void is - basically the lowest-energy point among the Velgarth planes, a sink for all interplanar magical discharges, and it's violent and chaotic and nearly impossible to build anything in or safely interact with at all. Also spatial distance behaves unusually, there, and so it's a useful shortcut for Gate-routing, though clearly not enough of a shortcut by itself to reach Golarion, they had to do a lot of additional weird interplanar routing that Urtho will be able to explain better.) 

Permalink Mark Unread

The Astral seems to have similar spatial properties - Almost all Golarion teleportation and planar travel routes through it for this reason - but is much more stable. There's life adapted to the astral plane, and if you plane shift the plane itself is perfectly habitable - or at least not less habitable than the emptiness between planets -

There is variance, though, some parts of the astral plane are quite unstable, and some scholars speculate that the Maelstrom is in fact just a particularly large unstable region of the Astral plane, and if the Astral plane and the Void are in fact the same rather than just having some similar properties, probably the region of the Astral Void "local" to Velgarth is another large unstable region.

The Golarion planes are mostly energy-balanced, but there is a known lowest-energy plane, it's just not the Astral plane. It's, the, uh, "negative energy plane," she's sorry, it was discovered in the middle of a scholastic fad for names that were as purely descriptive as humanly possible.

Permalink Mark Unread

Urtho doesn't think they know of that one! What are its properties aside from the obvious?? 

 

...In Velgarth there are known energy gradients between the planes, that can be exploited by opening a channel between two of them - for example, the Elemental Plane of Fire has a higher density of mage-energy than the Elemental Plane of Earth, and you can open something like a Gate between the two and siphon off some of the mage-energy downflow and this is...perhaps related to the design on the superweapon that caused an enormous explosion and nearly killed Iomedae except that Ma'ar Gated in to rescue her and nearly died. 

Permalink Mark Unread

The negative energy plane does not actually have very many interesting known properties besides the obvious, partly because the obvious properties make it kind of hard to study and partly because studying it is discouraged. Negative energy is damaging to a living creature's lifeforce and is restorative to undead, so it mostly winds up used for sinister purposes. You can cause an energy flow between another plane and the negative energy plane, though it's a pretty advanced technique to do on a large scale. On a smaller scale, that's how a lot of magic items are powered.

 

After a couple of mental self-nudges, her brain manages to produce some words to the effect that she's very glad Ma'ar was there to save Iomedae, Iomedae does not need saving very often but it's very good and important to have someone who can step in in those cases where she does.

Permalink Mark Unread

It is good and important, and it's also good and important that Iomedae has her powerful ally from her own world back. Ma'ar smiles at Alfirin. 

Permalink Mark Unread

"It actually happened twice in the space of three days, it was very embarrassing. - anyway, if we're lucky, Hell's most importantly adjacent planes are more of Hell. If we're maximally unlucky, and they border Axis - conceivably it's worth burning a lot of diamonds - Tantara has a lot of diamonds - to get to Erebus and use it there. I figure - the farther in we go, the worse our individual odds of ever getting out including by True Resurrection, Miracle, etcetera, and the worse our odds of pulling it off., but I'd expect it to minimize damage elsewhere."

Permalink Mark Unread

(Yes, well, Iomedae wouldn't have needed saving if Urtho had been...better at things...and now he's reminded of that and internally cringing. He tries to hide it.) 

 

Is there enough travel between the afterlife planes that there might be documentation on which are more closely adjacent? What's Erebus?

...Also, they don't as far as he knows have 'undead' here, how does that work? And is there an opposite of the negative energy plane, here the highest-energy of the known reachable ones is the Elemental Plane of Fire. This is more in the category of general curiosity than likely to be that relevant to afterlife plane adjacency but he's so curious. 

Permalink Mark Unread

Ma'ar is smiling at her, so she'll have a mildly positive facial expression back and try to figure out what that means later.

 

"My first inclination is to say that we should stick to Dis, I'd need to actually check Urtho's numbers but Erebus is much, much larger and I don't think it has correspondingly more magic in it - it might not be dense enough - Erebus is the next level of Hell, after Dis, it's where Hell keeps its treasury - Phlegethon or Stygia would probably be dense enough if Erebus isn't but it's going to be even harder to get there and -

Dis is small, comparatively speaking. Unless we're talking Caina or Nessus, there's not that much to choose between when it comes to which layer of Hell we'd most prefer destroyed, as long as we get one, any one, Asmodeus is blocked off from Avernus. I'm sure He'll find a way to route around eventually but -

My point is, for any level of Hell the main thing we achieve by destroying the whole thing is the same, and destroying nine-tenths of it is much much less valuable than destroying the whole thing, and it seems much more certain that we can get all of Dis than all of any other level."

 

"...Yes, there is a - " sigh "- Positive Energy Plane. Energy from that plane - in small doses - heals the living and harms undead. Undead are corpses animated by negative energy and by, typically, the tormented spirits or parts thereof of their former occupants. It's a lot more complicated than that, some don't have bodies and are just tormented spirits, but I think the whole Apprentice Necromancy lecture isn't the most important conversation for us to be having right now."

 

Permalink Mark Unread

"If you think we stand a better shot at getting all of Dis then that settles it to my mind. At some amount of destruction external to Hell, it's - probably worth at least asking if Aroden can promise us confidentiality, despite the small risk He'll notice when considering the question, and then having more comprehensive harm-reduction in place. And under weaker assumptions than that it's worth, at the last minute, notifying Him, when He can only stop us by communicating that Asmodeus has offered something better to us conditional on our not doing it."

Permalink Mark Unread

Gods can promise confidentiality? Urtho is very surprised about this! 

Permalink Mark Unread

"What kind of harm reduction would Aroden be able to help with, if He had more warning to set it up?" Ma'ar asks. 

Permalink Mark Unread

" - if we're going to damage Axis then with warning the Lawful Neutral gods could probably shore it up, cut off their forms of transit with Hell, evacuate affected segments, etcetera, and will be justifiably very angry with us if we don't let them. If we're going to damage the Elemental Planes - people live there, I don't know if they could be feasibly evacuated or if divine intervention could protect them, but it's more likely if the gods had time to plan. If we're going to damage Abaddon or the Abyss I don't really care, if we're going to damage the Boneyard I - expect there to be a bunch of weird complicated considerations, but also the Boneyard's probably hard to damage..."

Permalink Mark Unread

Urtho has no context on the afterlife planes! He wants to know everything about their magical properties. Are they easier or harder to access from the elemental planes than the material plane is? For example, does summoning elementals work in afterlives, and if so is it easier or harder? 

Permalink Mark Unread

Harder! It's still possible, but around Golarion the elemental planes are clustered fairly close to the Material, whereas the afterlife planes are farther. The afterlife planes are all similarly distant from each other, Axis or Abbadon wouldn't be in meaningfully more danger than Elysium - The Boneyard and the Abyss would be the non-Hell non-Astral planes at the greatest risk, the Boneyard because it links to all the others for distributing judged souls and the Abyss because it's in the nature of the Abyss to just kind of get everywhere - she can restate that more formally, actually, that might be important even if Iomedae and Ma'ar are probably not going to follow the formal statement very well -

Permalink Mark Unread

Urtho finds this helpful! He would lend the headband back to Ma'ar to make it easier to follow, but Ma'ar still looks exhausted. (Ma'ar should arguably not be sitting through this whole conversation at all, but Urtho-with-headband-perceptiveness can pick up that he very much doesn't want to leave.) Urtho can catch him up later. 

 

...His tentative conclusion is that, in the absence of Gates - either open ones, or permanent termini even if they aren't at that moment active - the complete destruction of everything in Dis would cause ripples in other planes, maybe quite disruptive ripples, but probably not propagate the chain-reaction there? The Abyss is going to be the most at-risk of the non-Hell afterlife planes but it sounds like they aren't as bothered by that. 

It sounds like there are installations vaguely like permanent Gates between Dis and Avernus, though, so Avernus will be at higher risk, though if it's not magically dense enough the chain reaction would die out before hitting all of it. Is Dis going to have any other permanent-Gate-like links to different planes? Especially the elemental planes, which he thinks are otherwise at relatively lower risk? 

Permalink Mark Unread

Well, Erebus. But other than that, no, Efreeti wanting to deal with Hell have to go through the gates in Avernus like everyone else. (Well, they go through the nice gates for foreign dignitaries rather than the petitioner gates) Avernus might have some permanent or semipermanent gates to other planes, that might be inconveniently close to gates to Dis.

Permalink Mark Unread

It wouldn't be surprising if the gates between Avernus and Axis were convenient to the gates between Avernus and Dis, and it's really quite important not to let the chain reaction spread to Axis.

Permalink Mark Unread

Ma'ar drags himself to more alertness. 

"We are going to have to invade via Avernus anyway, right? At which point it will already be - not especially discreet. Can we bring enough people to shut down the permanent Gates between Avernus and Axis? ...Ours can be destroyed without magic, just by smashing the archway, I am not sure how your kind works." 

Permalink Mark Unread

"We're going to invade via Avernus but we're going to have to try to do that very very fast, so Hell doesn't have time to react, anything that adds two rounds probably isn't worth it. Anything simultaneous might be."

Permalink Mark Unread

"If they are magically distinctive enough to target with scrying, I may be able to destroy them without actually being there. Assuming that Avernus does not categorically block attempts at scrying or something." 

Permalink Mark Unread

"Some powerful beings can reach back through a scry and crush your mind, you should be careful about it, but Barbatos might not be one of them and most of Avernus is more than forty feet from Barbatos at any given time so it should be possible."

Permalink Mark Unread

"I've been hanging out with them while they scry with a Magic Circle Against Evil up, except for the interval where I was in Golarion."

Permalink Mark Unread

"...If we get unlucky and Barbatos - is that a god? - is in range, and your protections are not enough, then - is it fixable? If it is not then - I think Urtho should not be the one doing this. I am not sure if it is something where...others might volunteer." 

Permalink Mark Unread

"That would stop someone as powerful as me, though I wouldn't trust it against Dispater if you happened to scry him. It is fixable, though."

Permalink Mark Unread

"- Then I am willing to risk it. It seems - very important to get right - and I am much more confident that can figure out how to destroy the thresholds from a different plane, than I am that I could teach someone else how." 

Is there anything else that Alfirin thinks they need to go over now? 

Permalink Mark Unread

No, she thinks they've covered all the most important points - obviously they should be collaborating more and checking each other on the details but there's no reason that has to happen now even if she would prefer to spend more time talking about magic instead of having feelings or thinking about things.

Iomedae was worried about her and

She should figure out what's up with that, Iomedae never worries about her anymo-

She's kind of worried about Iomedae too, what with how a god tried to shred her -

Clearly something is wrong, because -

She's fine, really, but -

She's kind of worried about Iomedae too -

She should talk with Iomedae about that, it seems -

She's kind of worried about Iomedae -

- maybe she could use a couple hours of sleep and a hot bath and some privacy. Are those things that exist here?

Permalink Mark Unread

Yes, of course! They should probably all sleep on this, and come back to it tomorrow to go over everything again and make sure they're not missing anything, before they make any decisions. 

He'll summon the hertasi staff to escort Alfirin to a nice guest room. ...Ma'ar has usually been Gating home at the end of the day but does not seem incredibly up for that right now, do he and Iomedae want a guest room as well? 

Permalink Mark Unread

...Yeah that's probably a good idea, Ma'ar does not feel like Gating anywhere right now. 

Permalink Mark Unread

(The guest rooms are very nice. Alfirin's is ten storeys up, with a floor-to-ceiling window that can be made opaque with magic but by default shows a gorgeous view. It has a large sitting-room area, a kitchen with magical refrigeration and a magical stove available, a bathroom with an enormous tub and both hot and cold running water, and a bedroom with an enormous curtained four-poster bed. The hertasi will be on hand to bring her anything else she might need.) 

Permalink Mark Unread

('A guest room for Iomedae and Ma'ar' probably does not convey to Alfirin anything she hadn't already inferred; Alfirin's very perceptive and Iomedae was not hiding anything and Ma'ar is not particularly given to subtlety. Iomedae nonetheless wishes she'd, uh, told Alfirin, in words, first, except that they wanted to get out of Golarion as quickly as possible and the stakes were too high for things like that to feel like the right tradeoff for either of them.)

Permalink Mark Unread

If there was anything new to her in those words she gives no indication of it.

She follows the hertasi to get room and asks them to bring her something to eat - something grounding, bread and butter and bean stew and cold water - and then to go away and stop trying to be helpful.

Permalink Mark Unread

(Ma'ar is not generally inclined to subtlety, no, but he might have attempted it if he knew some background facts that he does not in fact know, or if he had the headband and enough energy to try to read more of the subtext. He's picked up that Alfirin is not incredibly okay, but there are so many reasons for that, it doesn't exactly feel like a mystery. He goes with Iomedae. ...He does want to ask her for more background on Alfirin and their work together, he feels like he's missing something, but - maybe after he's slept.) 

Permalink Mark Unread

The hertasi bring Alfirin the food requested and make sure she knows how to call for one of them if she needs anything else, and then leave her alone. 

Permalink Mark Unread

She eats, and she bathes, and she cries a bit without really understanding why, and sleeps for two hours and then a whole extra fifteen minutes because she did not see any rings of sustenance and people were talking about the morning rather than the middle of the night, so probably their new allies in fact need eight hours like typical mortals.

When she wakes she's able to, uh, feel things, which she had not been doing the evening before. And she's got five and a half hours to herself to sort out what she's feeling and why.

 

...So first of all, they have a weapon that can destroy Dis. That's. Big. She thinks she'd normally be feeling more excited about that than she is right now. Come back to that later.

The fact that they are planning to destroy Dis means that Iomedae in fact has a good reason to be hiding everything she's doing from Aroden. And it's - detailed, and the details hang together. It would be hard to fake on short notice. It's reason to think that Iomedae did not, in fact, put on a zon-kuthon helm, especially when that was already quite unlikely. That is a relief. A huge relief. She checks, a couple times, whether she's just choosing to believe that because it's so much more pleasant than the alternative, but she's pretty sure it's actually just where the evidence points.

Alright, back to that first point -

Permalink Mark Unread

THEY HAVE A WEAPON THAT CAN DESTROY DIS!!!!!!!!!!!!

She giggles, and cackles, and leaps about the room, because they are going to destroy Dis and she will never see the look on Asmodeus' face but she can imagine it. (She cast a private sanctum last night, she's not disturbing anyone in nearby suites)

(OK they might not literally destroy Dis but if not that's only because they are going to get something even better - by Aroden and Iomedae's lights, at least, maybe it won't be as good by hers but - that's a small thing - )

They are going to destroy Dis.

Permalink Mark Unread

...OK, anything else.

 

Marit, who can still feel fear, might be having a panic attack right about now. Sorry Marit, at this point she's pretty sure there's not anything she can do to help with that.

...Marit, in the middle of having a panic attack, might ask Aroden whether Alfirin and/or Iomedae have been dominated/zon-kuthoned/evil-all-along and are up to something nefarious. Probably she should talk with Iomedae and see if there's a way to head that off at the pass, but - if Marit thinks the two of them might be working against the crusade's interests it's not like there's anything they can say to him to prove otherwise. Oops.

Permalink Mark Unread

Iomedae has new allies. That's - good news. Great news. Even leaving aside the plane-destroying superweapon that's great news. Why does she not feel like that's great news.

 

- Well, Iomedae's sleeping with Ma'ar, but - that's probably not it. She and Iomedae were involved for one week, and it was thirty years ago, and she's definitely over that. It's good for Iomedae to have someone who's important to her and also not sworn to her order of paladins.

...Probably it's because with another archmage around, plus however many non-arch mages are involved, Alfirin is no longer indispensable. It's great news for the Crusade, assuming the Crusade holds out until they're done DESTROYING DIS and can turn their attention to a mere lich-king. Less good news for Alfirin personally. This is fine, because there's still this whole new planet and even if her relative importance is lower she still wants the known world to have access to this other planet and all these other mages. OK. This is fine. She's not as happy about it as she could be but her feelings aren't really an important consideration here.

Permalink Mark Unread

OK. That might be it? Anything else?

 

...Iomedae was worried about her. That... makes a lot of sense, Alfirin was clearly not in her best state of mind yesterday. It was a very stressful day following a moderately stressful month and she wasn't sure if Iomedae had turned Chaotic Evil. She's better now.

She's kind of worried about Iomedae, too, what with how a god tried to shred her soul. The other events of the past month also don't sound like they were great, but - manageable, for Iomedae. The god trying to shred her soul sounds really bad though! Alfirin should ask her about that later, see if there's anything she can do to help.

Permalink Mark Unread

...aaaaanything else.

 

 

No? OK, great, she's Had Feelings now, and they're all nicely explained and processed, and she can work on planar math for a few hours before everyone else is awake, figure out how they can test for the Astral plane and the Void being the same, et cetera.

Permalink Mark Unread

Iomedae, when she wakes somewhat later than Alfirin because of having gone to sleep somewhat later than Alfirin, has the hertasi pass a note that says that the locals don't have Rings of Sustenance and Iomedae is available now if Alfirin has any questions for her.

Permalink Mark Unread

...Yeah that also seems like a way she could spend her morning. She should just - double-check that she doesn't have any more feelings she missed and hasn't dealt with -

 

Nope! No more feelings! She can go meet Iomedae, uh, wherever the hertasi recommend?

Permalink Mark Unread

The hertasi can provide a very nice conference room. And...breakfast...if they want it? It's kind of still the middle of the night and they are confused by these people who apparently only need two candlemarks of sleep. 

Permalink Mark Unread

Iomedae would like a few different varieties of spicy teas, and maybe cakes that go with those? The hertasi tend to appreciate it when Iomedae has fairly specific tea requests. 

"As servitor races made by archmages go I think hertasi are my favorite," she says. "Tantara would've lost the war much sooner if Urtho hadn't had them to do all his military logistics, which he is dreadful at. ...how are you doing."

Permalink Mark Unread

Well, they are powerful adventurers from another planet, of course they have some surprising properties! Just tea for her. Green.

 

"I'm - better. Great, actually, I keep remembering that we're planning to destroy Dis - I realize I was doing quite badly yesterday, I think - When you said you had to hide your plans from Aroden I wasn't sure you hadn't stumbled into a zon-kuthon helm or something like it - And you said Aroden would approve if he knew but - You've never lied to me but if you weren't Good, or Lawful you might and - I couldn't really make trustworthy judgements about that while you were there. And there was a lot of new information and - "

"And I'm better, now. I'm sorry I cursed you. Are you okay, a god attacked your soul...? I realize I'm missing a lot of context on what you've been doing the last few weeks, and we have a few hours, but - the god attacking your soul thing seems important, maybe we should start there?"

Permalink Mark Unread

"I think we should start there. I - that we should destroy Dis, given that we can, seems so overdetermined that even if I'm in fact a little bit twisted somewhere, I'm very sure the proper shape of me does it. But I think I ought to not have ruled out that I'm a little bit twisted somewhere, and I can't have Aroden check for me yet, and so I'd appreciate it if you did.

 

They call Her the Star-Eyed Goddess, Her followers explained to me that they had - concerns about how I was fogging up prophecy - this was just after Vkandis's followers had stolen a superweapon, so under the circumstances I was sympathetic to the prophecy concerns, though I'm also just - always more sympathetic than you, right - and Her followers asked me to come with them to walk the Moonpaths in what sounded like the astral plane, and meet Her in a vision. They couldn't promise me safe passage. That's not how the locals understand their gods to work; their priests' words don't bind the gods and the gods don't themselves make promises to mortals.

I should probably have refused. I was being an idiot, because I'm used to - because I'm used to dying, and I really like being strong enough I can give everyone the benefit of the doubt about whether they're trustworthy, and then only kill them if they aren't, and because Ma'ar and Urtho had agreed on terms and I'd survived the superweapon and - you'd have told me I was being an idiot. Marit would've told me I was being an idiot. 

The Star-Eyed goddess tried to - rip Aroden out of me - and when that didn't work, tried to make my soul a shape that wouldn't be His paladin. He intervened. They - fought. I don't actually remember any of it except that it was astoundingly painful and Aroden is really something when He's angry.

Permalink Mark Unread

 

 

"...I'm so sorry. What happened after that, you said maybe-Sarenrae helped you, was that then or did other things happen first?"

Permalink Mark Unread

"That was a while later. Aroden - wanted to kill the Star-Eyed, I think, but - but could see that if we did that the peace would fall apart - I'm reconstructing a lot of this from what Ma'ar told me afterwards - Aroden warned Ma'ar I was in danger. Ma'ar broke the ceasefire to grab me out of Urtho's Tower where the Star-Eyed's servants had slit my throat while I was in the trance with their goddess, Urtho's Tower's countermeasures had Ma'ar dying, Ma'ar's people were blaming Urtho, the Star-Eyed had intervened directly to incapacitate Urtho -

- I healed Ma'ar, and - realized I was very badly damaged, and told them to kill me while that got sorted out. They didn't. They don't have resurrection, here, and Ma'ar didn't think it was what Aroden had intended when Aroden briefly communicated with Ma'ar. So I physically recuperated, but I was - confident I was compromised, and didn't see a way to fix that, so I didn't really do anything. Ma'ar - went to the temple of the nameless god of the eternal flame, and decided to bring me there for the most powerful magical healing this world has available, and then their goddess - approximately the same portfolio as Sarenrae, and a similar operating style from the examples I heard -

- anyway, the nameless god did a miracle. It was like I was outside myself, and could see the shape I'd been twisted into, but because I was outside it I could check it and be confident in the results of the checks, and I could see that - well, I had a lot of memory loss and habit-damage and motion-damage and so on - I could use a Heal - but most of the irrecoverable damage to the core of who I was was in fact a result of my not being sure I was myself, the way even when I was fifteen I was sure I was myself. And I could sit there outside myself and check piece by piece until I was sure.

Which I did, and since then I've been operating on the assumption I'm basically competent and myself, and introspectively it seems true but this doesn't sound like the kind of process that definitely works, right -"

Permalink Mark Unread

"Yes, I should - get someone to tell me about the Star-Eyed's theology - and the nameless god's - and go over any major decisions you've made since, just to double-check in case it's a subtle influence but - "

"Dis is overdetermined, probably, even if They gave you that idea to get you to take out some of their rivals - "

"But, also." Heal.

Permalink Mark Unread

She doesn't need a Heal badly enough to burn a Wish on it, and Limited Wish doesn't do cleric spells of the sixth circle, and she's ...not sure that what she just saw was either of those.

- setting that aside a moment.

Iomedae -

- feels notably better, for one thing, like the difference between being half awake and all the way awake, like there had been something twisted deep inside her that's now untwisted, though not in a way that changes her priorities -

 

- and two, blinks stupidly at Alfirin, trying to decide whether to bring that up or not. 

 

" - thank you very much," she says after a moment. "Dis continues to seem very overdetermined. If you can teach other people how to do that, it'd be wildly useful here, since they have no divine spellcasting." There, that's bringing it up but not in a way that suggests she should've been told sooner or anything. 

Permalink Mark Unread

"...OK let's actually have that conversation now rather than leaving it for later. I imagine you're thinking I could've been saving lives with this, if I weren't keeping it hidden.

Then I'm going to say, 'There have been precisely two occasions where I had spare spell slots at the end of the day that I could have used for healing and where the Crusade's healers were sufficiently overwhelmed that the marginal spell would actually save a life. One one of those occasions I put on a different face and pretended to be a cleric. On the other you kept me up all night with strategy meetings that were, in fact, the right use of my time.'

Then you will say, 'OK, but there was still no reason for you to keep it secret,'

To which I will say, 'By default I keep surprising new capabilities of mine secret because the more people know the more ways there are for our enemies to learn them, and also because it's useful to have capabilities that you don't know about in case, for example, I have reason to suspect you might have put on a zon-kuthon helm.'

And you'll say, 'But if you could teach other wizards that does, actually, have a big impact not just on the crusade but on civilization everywhere,'

And I'll say, 'Yes, but I can't, and I probably can't teach the local mages either,'

You'll ask 'Why not?' and I will tell you that if I could give you or a junior wizard a satisfying and comprehensible explanation I wouldn't be unable to teach other wizards. You will say this answer isn't very satisfactory and I will shrug apologetically.

Did I miss anything."

Permalink Mark Unread

" - I - appreciate knowing your reasons. But I wasn't, actually, going to push you for them, because -

 

 - gods, Alfirin, this right here may be the most important decision a mortal has ever made or ever will, and I trust you to help me make it. You can defend yourself to me, but you don't have to, because I'm not actually here to scold you. Even if the spells would've saved lives, the scoldings sure wouldn't. You have your reasons, and they're probably good ones, and if a world with no divine magic doesn't change them, then it doesn't change them. I'm not Pharasma. I'm not interested in measuring you against - well, me."

 

Permalink Mark Unread

"I know you weren't going to push. But you were going to wonder and - if I weren't willing to explain as much as I did I wouldn't have cast it in the first place. And you can take it on faith that I have good reasons but I'd rather, when I can explain my reasons, just do that so that you don't have to take quite as much on faith."

"I can also do raise dead and resurrection and prepared one of each this morning, in case we do need any while we're hiding things from Aroden and can't bring any clerics in on that."

Permalink Mark Unread

" - good to know. I have no shocking secret magical capabilities at all, myself, so we'll have to get by with my non-shocking non-secret ones.

 

Do you want - a rundown of the rest of my adventures here -"

 

Permalink Mark Unread

"Please."

Permalink Mark Unread

So she'll go through it. She arrived on the battlefield, was evacuated off it with the retreating Tantaran forces, offered to heal on their word they wouldn't send the recovered men back to the front or in exchange for an account of the war which made it seem good for Tantara to have more soldiers, got one under Zone of Truth. Neighboring kingdoms united under brilliant conquering warlord mage who is winning the war, by a large margin, thanks to his penchant for mind control and blood sacrifices plus the fact Urtho's not really a tactical genius -

"- so that was my first introduction to Ma'ar, who I actually think you'll like a lot - the blood sacrifices were probably a bad idea but a really comprehensible bad idea -"

Permalink Mark Unread

"What does blood sacrifice even do, I assume he wasn't - making a pact with a demon lord or something - "

Permalink Mark Unread

"Local sorcerers can just directly refill approximately all their spell capacity for the day, plus some, by killing people! I don't know if this is a technique Golarion never invented or something specific to their kind of sorcerer. I hope it's the latter because it's obviously an enormous asymmetric advantage for Evil."

Permalink Mark Unread

If she says "Wizards can't" Iomedae will read true things into it. And probably some false things.

 

"There are legends of blood sacrifice letting a wizard recover their spells but I think those legends are false or misleading and spread by demons who think it's funny. I did look into them."

Permalink Mark Unread

"Probably good. Obviously if you can pick it up from Ma'ar there'd be days where it was worth the diamond or the volunteer, but - I wouldn't like, at all,  the effects it'd have on the world were it widespread," and she wouldn't really like the fact that Alfirin'd go on forever knowing how to do it, but it's not, actually, sufficient reason to not bring Alfirin in on the Dis plan, or even close. 

"Anyway, Ma'ar had consolidated the northern territories and invaded one small kingdom and some disorganized tribal lands, there was a taboo on blood sacrifices, he was ignoring it, Tantara got nervous, they invaded - they had ten times the forces, maybe more than that, and were wildly richer, they've got permanent Teleportation Circles everywhere, this place is incredible - but their army hadn't been at war in anyone's lifetime, and Predain's had hardly known peace, and Ma'ar is a genius, and Tantara was losing.

I told them I'd see what I could do. They still had vastly better numbers, I'm not useless on a battlefield, Urtho was delighted for me to take over the parts of his job that involved commanding armies and not studying magic - it'd fallen to him after Ma'ar took the capital with a planted artifact that drove most of Tantara's senior leadership to flee their posts in abject terror and in some cases die of it -" See, she really does think Alfirin's going to like this man.

Permalink Mark Unread

OK at this point this is not an accident. Surely every single thing he does isn't like this, which means Iomedae is, what, deliberately emphasizing the ways her new lover is exactly Alfirin's brand of Evil??? Why????

(That confusion can go sit somewhere away from her conscious thoughts along with the rest of her feelings about Ma'ar)

"Impressive. I look forward to getting to know him better."

Permalink Mark Unread

She's emphasizing how much they have in common so they can be friends! (Urtho still has her headband. You can blame this on that, if you want, or on what could be characterized as an emotional blind spot). 

"Anyway, I presumed that if I wanted prewar borders I'd have to win some fights first, but I sent over a request for a ceasefire immediately, you know, on principle, and Ma'ar accepted, sent back a bunch of nitpicks about our proposed maps, we signed.

And then some of his soldiers were caught surrounding a Tantaran camp unambiguously on our side of the border. We had approved monitors, they told them to stand down, they started shooting instead, I went out there to take them all down ideally nonlethally though without divine healing the locals are really fragile -

- and Ma'ar Gated in to tell them to surrender, and surrendered himself. I was very confused." 

Permalink Mark Unread

Ah, see, that's much less confusing, this seems like the sort of trait Iomedae would find admirable. Alfirin would never do something like that.

"To preserve the peace, I assume? That's very noble, especially if he didn't know your reputation and wasn't expecting an afterlife."

Permalink Mark Unread

Iomedae is sworn to secrecy and is the kind of person who takes being sworn to secrecy incredibly seriously and will to the best of her very good ability react as if that's exactly what was going on. "I don't think he expected to survive it, no. We had a fairly predictable conversation while I held him at swordspoint about why I think that ideally one wouldn't run their country on mind control and blood sacrifices though I did not intend to pursue the war with the objective of stopping those things, and then he notified me that his spy-network notified him that a disloyal Tantaran general who'd been working for Ma'ar, and who'd orchestrated the ceasefire violation, was on the move and probably attempting a coup."

 

And she will relay events from there, up through Urtho's near assassination and discovering the superweapons and promising that she would propose to Urtho's government that Conn Levas get a duchy and the superweapons getting stolen and getting Bestet's help with surviving the superweapon and giving Ma'ar her ring of evasion and being rescued by Ma'ar from a boiling ocean -

"I remember thinking, while boiling, that if I had a single Teleport-capable ally in the world I'd be fine, and I did, and I was, so -" She shakes her head. "It was a fairly unpleasant recovery because they don't have good magical healing. And then the Star-Eyed's people wanted to talk to me..."

Permalink Mark Unread

And then she recovered thanks to maybe-Sarenrae's divine intervention and they got to work on interworld Gates and "I'm sorry I scared you so badly.

 

And - I'm sorry I didn't tell you about Ma'ar before you met him. I meant to, and then we were having a very high stakes conversation about whether I was an inverted horror that could maybe kill you if it gave up on trapping you and it didn't seem the right moment."

Permalink Mark Unread

"It is entirely forgiven. There was no good time for it, and it wasn't the most important thing - I mean - obviously he is very important to you. But, the particulars of your relationship aren't - strategically important."

Permalink Mark Unread

"Not strategically important," she agrees. 

 

"But - when I was younger - I was an idiot, in ways that hurt you, and I never really apologized, because - because it wasn't an adjustment to my decision procedures, it wasn't a lesson I could learn, I just wasn't a good enough person to not hurt one of the two of us. And I think I am, now, thirty years later, and in your place I'd be a bit miffed about that, and so I meant to warn you."

Permalink Mark Unread

"We were both idiots and if you're telling me now that we weren't both hurt that's news to me."

'I didn't leave because I was hurt, I left because I was afraid,' she wants to say, but she can't because if she did she would have to explain what she was afraid of and - she's not ready to do that now. She's never going to be ready. Maybe if things had gone differently, but - Iomedae will be the goddess of defeating evil. And Alfirin is no longer indispensable.

"It was - a surprise. To see you with him. But I'm not upset, you deserve someone who makes you happy and isn't sworn to your service."

Permalink Mark Unread

And she shouldn't push on 'you'll like him too', that's just not going to work from this starting point. So she just smiles vaguely and looks down. "All right. Dis planning - a Time Stop would be ludicrously helpful but I don't want to push you on being directly present if you aren't sure, it's - obviously if this goes badly enough the people present aren't getting out of Hell -"

Permalink Mark Unread

"I'll be there." She doesn't want to, she did not - do everything she did, to stay alive, just so that she could throw herself into Hell, but -

She doesn't know how that thought finishes, other than that she'll be there.

Permalink Mark Unread

Iomedae had been entirely sure of that. "The best option for getting from Avernus to Dis may be a Wish but - I don't know if there's something we should expect to specifically go terribly wrong, using a Wish for transit into Hell -"

Permalink Mark Unread

"It's probably rare enough that Hell is looking out for it. I don't know if Dispater could interfere with the wish personally. I suspect Asmodeus could, if it got escalated to His attention.

 

...This is a terrible idea but I'm going to say it anyways - we might get less interference with an inter-hell transit wish if we contracted it carefully enough from a pit fiend."

Permalink Mark Unread

"I am worried that if I try to contract anything with a pit fiend then they will be moderately suspicious, and you are a known associate. ...though, a Lawful Evil known associate who might be desperate now that the crusade is without me...

....it's probably not worth it, but perhaps we shouldn't entirely rule it out.

The alternative to a Wish is of course to just blast through a fortress of Avernus, presumably while Time Stopped as much as possible. I...don't know a ton about whether they're in fact set up to stop that, or just to raise an alarm about it in time to close the portal -"

Permalink Mark Unread

"Yes obviously when I said 'we could contract with a pit fiend' I meant 'I, personally, could contract with a pit fiend' - If we do go with this plan, you should check, first, that I'm actually lawful evil -

- You do realize that when History and Future mentions Aroden freezing time for eight hours to hold negotiations in the middle of a pitched battle that that's - not a thing normal wizards can do, right. We'd be lucky if I got half a minute. And everyone but me would be frozen too."

Permalink Mark Unread

"Well, we'd be in your bag. I have spent fairly little time thinking about Hell's security because it was always an exercise in making myself utterly miserable to no benefit so I have no idea if half a minute would be enough. I guess if I were designing the security I'd specifically try to have it be the case that archmages couldn't force it in the duration of a Time Stop. Unless they were Aroden."

Permalink Mark Unread

"Extended, maximized I could do a full minute. Except that as far as I know that's impossible. And I know they say every archmage can do two impossible things but that's not one of mine."

"...How available are diamonds on this planet? I bet with some time, and at least one diamond to test, I could figure out a wish wording to pull someone else into my time stop. And maybe a time-stopped Velgarth mage would be able to gate to Dis, from Avernus. Maybe with another wish enabling that."

Permalink Mark Unread

"There's a lot of diamonds. No resurrection, they don't use them for anything. Urtho was happy to bring me a couple dozen as soon as I mentioned they're useful.

 

Multiple novel Wish wordings sounds terrifying, but if - and I suppose you can afford to enhance yourself, first, too....

 

I....think I might be able to do the Commune with Aroden for negotiations once we're there while borrowing Aroden's Time Stop powers, so we have time for that part. Don't - ask me why I think I can do that. I just have ever since the fight with the Star-Eyed had a vague sense I can Commune with Aroden now and that it wouldn't - take any time.

 

Arazni could."

Permalink Mark Unread

Permalink Mark Unread

"If this works - 

 

- gods, Alfirin, I've been trying not to - distract myself too much, get carried away, but if this works - "

Permalink Mark Unread

"I know. I was - confused, obviously, when you said it was acceptable to lose the crusade, but -"

Permalink Mark Unread

" - Oh, right. In the spirit of not getting carried away when there's still work to be done. Marit is probably going to order a commune to ask about our plans soon. The last thing I said to him was that this didn't seem to be a trap, but - I don't think I gave him enough information to be sure I hadn't been dominated or something. I think it's too late to do anything about that, almost certainly if we make contact to tell him not to ask Aroden about what we're doing that will make things worse, but I thought I should tell you, in case you had any bright ideas. Might want the headband back from Urtho when he's awake."

Permalink Mark Unread

"Oh, hmmmm. ...there's plenty of things I think I could say to him, but they would in fact require me showing up in person, and - it's probably not worth the risk of anyone being curious.

We could Wish-nap him, especially if you know when he usually sleeps.

I do -

- it's worth losing the crusade, but it would grieve me very deeply to lose the crusade, and if we steal Marit now we do lose the crusade, in a - very horrendous way - unless we send him right back. I guess maybe I could persuade him that everything is fine and then send him right back.

I definitely want the headband if I'm going to try to evaluate under what math that tradeoff would be worth it."

Permalink Mark Unread

"If you need it for math and not the words for convincing people you can borrow mine, but -

Wishnapping Marit doesn't just lose us the crusade, it won't even help, Karnelius is less paranoid but he's going to want a commune too if first you, then me, then Marit vanish. Especially if he's been read in on your original sending to me, which was not the least concerning sending you could have sent."

Permalink Mark Unread

"Right but if we send Marit back with a soothing explanation he can handle Karlenius. This assumes we can successfully soothe Marit without the whole truth, but I'm optimistic if I can talk to him. I guess someone might notice him vanishing first - 

- I think if they Commune with Aroden He'll say 'she's really far away but busy and full of determination'. I think He has to look quite hard to see more than that from here."

Permalink Mark Unread

"Wishnap Marit in his sleep - which will be hard, he's been moving his sleep hours around again and obviously hasn't told a soul what his schedule is - convince him we're acting in Aroden's interests but have to do it without Aroden knowing, ideally without telling him everything because he's going to be back on Golarion and observable - and send him back half an hour later and hope nobody noticed."

 

"That's better than my plan of 'Do nothing and pray it works out, but with the praying cut for information security reasons.' "

Permalink Mark Unread

"I think I can convince him. The other parts seem sketchier - 

- actually, no. Urtho can scry him, we can time it right."

Permalink Mark Unread

"That'll do it. Hm. Assuming Urtho sleeps a normal human amount at normal human times we should probably ask him to check as soon as he's up, and then hourly? And I'll...prepare another two wishes today. And five tomorrow."

"I'd also like to go back to Golarion to pick up some things - books, mostly, but I've also got a map of Dis which should be up to date like every other map of Dis - for planning purposes."

Permalink Mark Unread

"Should be fine. I tried not to think about it while I was there, but that may have been excessively cautious."

Permalink Mark Unread

"We should be fine as long as we don't make too many decisions there, but yes I'm not planning to think about what I'm doing, just grab every book on Hell that I own and maybe buy some more that I don't - probably buy out a couple booksellers' entire collections on the planes, which doesn't involve evaluating how useful the contents will be until I'm back here."

Permalink Mark Unread

"If I were a god, I don't think anyone could have the thought 'I'm going to destroy a plane of Hell' anywhere on Golarion without my noticing like they cried out my name in desperate prayer. ...probably I should figure out how to avoid having that capability, actually. I think buying the books is a worthwhile risk, and I think kidnapping Marit is too if Urtho can confirm for us that he's alone. I want to go back to my rooms, actually," to be there when Ma'ar wakes in Urtho's Tower for the first time in a very long time, "but I can come get you when they're ready to Gate us?"

Permalink Mark Unread

"Of course." And she can return to her own rooms to prepare two more wishes.

Permalink Mark Unread

Then when Ma'ar wakes Iomedae will be looking out at the beautiful view and thinking about the destruction of Hell. 

 

"Good morning."

Permalink Mark Unread

He opens his eyes, yawns and stretches and - 

 

- oh, right, he's here. He doesn't tense up, Iomedae is there and so it's all right, but he does go very still for a moment. 

"Good morning," he says. "I - are there things I should have context on, with - your world, Alfirin - before we go back to work?" 

Permalink Mark Unread

- yeah.

"I'm sorry. I think I had - a bit of a blind spot there, after a fashion.

Alfirin is the most powerful living wizard in Golarion. She has been essential to the Crusade, and I've worked alongside her since I was in my twenties. I think very highly of her.

We - were lovers, briefly, thirty years ago. I think both of us would have said, asked a month ago, that we learned from that and grew from that and are not still particularly affected by that, but actually I think we would have been wrong.



She's very like you, see."

Permalink Mark Unread

"Oh. That...makes sense." And sounds - complicated. He vaguely wishes for the headband. "...Like me in what sort of ways? Presumably in wanting to be allied with you, but - also in being ruthless and the sort of person who would use blood-magic for infrastructure projects?" The sort of person who would become immortal because one lifetime isn't enough, but he isn't going to speak of that in Urtho's Tower. 

Permalink Mark Unread

"The sort of person who - a lot of the disagreements we'd have would be her saying 'we'll lose fewer soldiers if we do this incredibly Evil thing' and me saying 'I think we'd be shredding something complicated and immeasurable and maybe even more important and I'll pay a hundred lives for the immeasurable thing, though not five hundred."

Permalink Mark Unread

"...I think I usually end up just agreeing with you on those? When you - convince me that the complicated immeasurable thing is possible and that it - exists in your world as something of value -" 

Permalink Mark Unread

"Well, I often also convince her! Though not always. And - I was worse at explaining when I was younger."

Permalink Mark Unread

"...That makes sense. I suppose that - having known her for decades - would give you a great deal of practice." 

He leans on her shoulder. "It - sounds like we would get along. If she were comfortable with me. I did not incredibly get the impression that she is comfortable with me." 

Permalink Mark Unread

"She's not easily impressed but you'll get there, I have total confidence." She too is not going to even Mindspeak about the thing Ma'ar did that would impress Alfirin the most - that Alfirin may in fact want to copy, and Iomedae has a sick twisted feeling in her stomach about that but it's much much better than lichdom. "She wants an interworld Gate back this morning so she can pick up some books and notes for us, and then if you want to watch a Wish we're kidnapping a colleague whenever he sleeps."

Permalink Mark Unread

(Ma'ar is thinking, behind the privacy of his shields, that Alfirin is older than him and he figured out his immortality by the time he was thirty, she'll definitely have done it already if she was going to at all.) 

"Kidnapping - is that a good idea? It sounds like it might draw attention. And - not make a good first impression, for him."  

Permalink Mark Unread

"We think we can do it without drawing attention. He will definitely be furious at me but - once satisfied that I am free and in my right mind, he will obey me, even though the thing I'm asking of him is very unfair and difficult."

Permalink Mark Unread

He trusts Iomedae's judgement. He kind of doesn't have a choice, when it's about her world, he has so little context. "All right. I can do an interworld Gate for her, though - all else being equal I would prefer to wait for Urtho's Adepts and do it in concert, it is tiring." 

Permalink Mark Unread

"Should be fine, I don't think this is urgent." Does he want a hug? And maybe a massage about all this tiring magic he's been doing?

Permalink Mark Unread

He's going to Mindspeak one of the hertasi he was introduced to, first, to convey a message to Urtho and work on assembling Adepts for a Gate, but after that he would absolutely not turn down a hug and a massage! 

 

It'll be about half an hour to get a reasonable cohort of Adepts ready. Ma'ar should probably also eat breakfast before doing more magic, he didn't really eat dinner yesterday, but he seems inclined to forget. 

Permalink Mark Unread

Iomedae will remind him, and will summon Alfirin only once he's eaten something. 

Permalink Mark Unread

"Good morning. I have the additional wishes prepared but not the diamonds to cast them."

Permalink Mark Unread

Iomedae has diamonds! She can give Alfirin two of them. "Urtho's not up yet, so I think you should proceed with your shopping trip and we'll catch Marit whenever he next sleeps."

Permalink Mark Unread

"Very well. I assume it'll just be myself and Ma'ar?" More people would be a security risk.

Permalink Mark Unread

"Yes. If you'd rather he can stay here and we can do the return Gate at a planned time and location."

Permalink Mark Unread

"I have no objection to him coming along if he wants to see a very limited slice of our planet, unless he's going to have trouble not alerting the gods." Under normal circumstances that would be reason enough for Alfirin to go alone, out of an excess of caution, but Iomedae wants her to like Ma'ar, and so she should not do things that might look like taking any possible excuse to avoid him.

Permalink Mark Unread

"I - am not sure what I need to be careful of to avoid alerting the gods? Aside from praying to them, I can definitely avoid doing that." 

Permalink Mark Unread

"Predain doesn't really go in for religion."  :- you know what would probably be safest, actually, would be a compulsion to not think directly about the plan, if you know how to do that safely.:

Permalink Mark Unread

"Iomedae was concerned about thinking too carefully about our plans - which might be noticeable to gods who have similar interests - I think it will be harder for the gods to see our plans through prophecy if we don't make any significant decisions where their prophecy functions."

Permalink Mark Unread

:...I can do that. It will have some weird side effects if I need to do any - novel strategic reasoning - but I think I can just put that off until we return. I need a couple of minutes.: 

"I can avoid that," he says. "All else equal, I would like to see more of your world." 

Permalink Mark Unread

"Ready when you are. The same location as last time should be fine."

Permalink Mark Unread

He's ready a couple of minutes later, a tidy compulsion in place. (That won't be incredibly obvious to Golarion Enchantment Sight, compulsions are very low powered.) 

 

The Gate goes up. With eight Adepts in a meld with him, Ma'ar isn't even tired. He steps across and takes it down. 

Permalink Mark Unread

She had a plan and will execute on it. First, the local scriptoria; she doesn't know Tien, she only Comprehends it, and has not yet had the chance to visit the continent much, and so does not have very many tien works on the outer planes at all. She would be pleased to purchase one of every tome, leaflet, or scroll they have on the planes or planar magic. No, she will not commission any additional works. No, she does not wish to provide ongoing patronage. No, she does not wish to speak with the senior monk at this time, perhaps another. Now, please. She has a bag, yes.

She's sorry she can't show Ma'ar the sights here; even if they weren't trying to minimize time spent this is her first time in this city if you don't count the two minutes yesterday. She's going to teleport them elsewhere now. He will need to take her hand.

Permalink Mark Unread

Ma'ar is enjoying looking at absolutely everything that can be looked at with mage-sight, and thinking of nothing but that and how interesting the city is. 

 

He'll take Alfirin's hand for the transport. He's very curious to see Teleport cast. 

Permalink Mark Unread

To mage-sight, it bears very little superficial similarity to a gate, though this is more due to the basic forms of Golarion magic being different than those in Velgarth. As the spell completes, it unfolds across Alfirin and down her hand and across him and there's the briefest tiny moment where he might catch the spell searching for its destination before it's gone and they are standing in Indapatta. Alfirin follows approximately the same routine here, then they teleport again to Oppara where she can, in fact, show him the most interesting parts of the city and tell him things about its inhabitants.

Oppara is the seat of Taldor, the empire which controls the inner sea region. Taldor funds Iomedae's crusade, and her most powerful magic items are on loan from the Empire. It has an effective bureaucracy, if not the most efficient one. The Emperor lives here, and most of the nobility, because if the nobility lived elsewhere they might amass independent power bases and start civil wars. It's not entirely clear whether this strategy actually works to prevent civil wars, there are still occasional civil wars, it's just that they get started by ambitious appointed generals. The city has a lot of artisans, and merchants, and wizards, and unskilled laborers, all rather more numerous and less industrious than the city really needs because the Empire provides a grain dole to the residents of its capital. And an extra stipend for wizards who live in the city.

Alfirin pretty clearly does not approve of Taldor.

Permalink Mark Unread

It's not as good as Tantara. It's...arguably better than Predain, even now, which absolutely couldn't afford to hand out free grain. Urtho feeds the students of his Tower for free, but he's the top Archmage in the world, and however big his Tower, it's not the population of a city. Tantara's King couldn't have afforded that in the capital. 

 

...He's going to comment on that, actually, because it's mildly confusing that Taldor is apparently so wealthy despite being suboptimally run. 

Permalink Mark Unread

There is a lot of Taldor; the capital is a relatively small proportion of the empire's population, and the emperor can levy taxes elsewhere to prop up the imperial core. There are other prosperous cities, but Oppara is the one with the best-off residents, because the Emperor takes gold from them to buy grain from the other provinces to keep the people of his capital happy.

Permalink Mark Unread

Oh. 

"I - can see the incentives that would produce that. It is not how I would - choose to run an Empire if I wanted to run it well - but I can see how it would happen. Even if many people want the Empire to be run well."

Sigh. It's a beautiful city. He appreciates the tour. 

Permalink Mark Unread

"A fact about empires that last much longer than a single human lifetime is that there is almost never one person who gets to choose how they are run."

Next up is Absalom, which is despite Oppara's best efforts a larger city, and by some metrics a richer one, if much less beautiful. Absalom is an independent city-state, despite literally everyone else's best efforts over the last 3700 years. The tour here is much briefer and seems to avoid large swathes of the city.

(It seems prudent, at the moment, to avoid too much discussion of the gods, do you know how hard it is to give a comprehensive tour of Absalom while avoiding anything too closely related to Aroden, Norgorber, or Cayden Cailean? It's quite hard. Comprehensiveness is a casualty.)

Permalink Mark Unread

Ma'ar follows her around from bookstore to bookstore and looks at the sights - Absalom is incredible to mage-sight - and, thanks to the compulsion he placed on himself, does not think about Aroden at all even though, otherwise, quite a lot of things might prompt him to think about Aroden. 

It does make the conversation more stilted. He can comment on particularly interesting permanent spells or artifacts he notices? 

Permalink Mark Unread

She can describe them! That magical door there leads to an extradimensional house, you don't see a ton of those anywhere but more in Absalom than anywhere else, because lots of people want to live here and lots of powerful wizards don't want to deal with neighbors on the same plane as them. That's a ring of regeneration, if you're wearing it and a body part gets cut off it will grow back, unless it's the hand or finger you were wearing the ring on in which case you're out of luck. That's a necklace of netted stars, a wizard can use it to recover some of their used minor spells or it can catch an incoming spell and let the wearer reuse that energy for a larger spell.

The last stop is Alfirin's own tower (much smaller than Urtho's). Alfirin leads him in (disabling traps and wards as needed) and tells a fox to pack all her books on the planes.

"He'll be just a few minutes doing that and then we can gate back. Can I get you anything while we wait? Tea? Food?"

Permalink Mark Unread

"Tea would be lovely." He's staring at the fox. It certainly looks intelligent. "I - did you create a new species -?" 

Permalink Mark Unread

"No, there's only one of him and he is I believe still interfertile with normal foxes."

Permalink Mark Unread

"No idea, myself, I like a vixen with, you know, a personality."

Permalink Mark Unread

...She'll translate that, sure.

Permalink Mark Unread

Blink. "...All right, then I am at a loss here. You did specify he is not a normal fox, how does that work?" 

Permalink Mark Unread

"He's a familiar, an animal magically bonded to me; the bond grants him intelligence, among other things. It's fairly common for wizards to have one."

Permalink Mark Unread

Ma'ar is fascinated and not even sure what questions to ask in what order! How does that even work, magically speaking? You can increase animals' intelligence, in Velgarth, but usually only over multiple generations and starting with the embryos still in the womb or egg, and it usually requires both mage-gift and Healing, and a lot of skill, and it doesn't always breed true. Urtho's gryphons are an unusually high-effort attempt, as are the hertasi. Ma'ar has also done it but - not as well - he was rushed. 

(He's not going to let his curiosity delay the departure, if they end up ready to depart.) 

Permalink Mark Unread

She can start an explanation, but not finish it before the books are all packed. It seems as though Golarion magic can enhance mental capabilities much more easily than Velgarth magic, and familiars are just one example of this phenomenon. Back to Velgarth now?

Permalink Mark Unread

Back to Velgarth! Urtho is going to be so excited about the books. Ma'ar assumes they have translation magic to let him read them. 

 

The return Gate is not a concert-Gate, and Ma'ar is distracted and not paying attention to the fact that the last couple of candlemarks weren't not tiring. He at least makes it across first before his legs stop working. 

Permalink Mark Unread

She'll be there as soon as she's notified that the Gate is up. "No problems?"

Permalink Mark Unread

Ma'ar is sitting on the floor, and managing to mostly make it look like this was on purpose. "Not that I noticed, at least." 

Permalink Mark Unread

"Nor that I did. I think we're clear. Any word on Marit?"

Permalink Mark Unread

"Just went to sleep, actually. I was thinking about getting you a message if you weren't back in an hour, but as you are, you can probably take some preparatory time, if you want, first." Because Marit's going to be incredibly suspicious and that interaction is going to be stressful and he will want to hear from Alfirin about why she thinks Iomedae isn't secretly evil. Iomedae really does a lot of things on the comfortable presumption that people can easily rule out 'Iomedae is secretly evil'.

Permalink Mark Unread

...Ma'ar is not especially needed for this, he thinks? He's curious to meet Marit, but it might not even help for him to be there, and either way he could use a nap. Can Iomedae help him be somewhere else that is not this floor. 

Permalink Mark Unread

Yes, she can, quite cheerfully. How about a couch where he can be fed more snacks. "You should meet Marit, but - after it's done, I think. Today - it's not really fair to him, to add an additional piece of the picture to keep track of."

Permalink Mark Unread

He flops on Iomedae's shoulder and munches snacks. "I would like that. I look forward to being able to meet all of your people, when - this is over." One way or another. 

Permalink Mark Unread

Well, if it goes badly they'll be in Hell, and probably won't meet.

(Unpleasant question that is suddenly important enough to actually warrant spending several hours thinking about, when previously it wasn't: could Asmodeus break her into something useful to Him? How bad should she be treating that outcome as, exactly, is it in fact more like losing everything or more like inverting everything she'd otherwise achieve?)

"I'd like my headband back," she mentions to a hertasi. Urtho doesn't really need it nearly as much anymore.

Permalink Mark Unread

Ma'ar can tell that Iomedae is thinking about something less happy, and - he can guess what - but he's mostly not been dwelling on it. He leans on her and eats sweets (the hertasi are pretty sure they know what tired mages need, and keep delivering him more of them.) 

Permalink Mark Unread

The hertasi will also fairly promptly deliver Iomedae's headband back to her! 

Permalink Mark Unread

She's about as ready as she expects to be. Iomedae seemed confident she could convince Marit that they have legitimate reasons to be hiding their activities from Aroden, and if Alfirin can't see how that might be - well, she's Iomedae. She can be very persuasive.

Permalink Mark Unread

Shielded work room, then?

Permalink Mark Unread

Shielded work room. And she can cast the spell, wishing for Marit to be here instead of comfortably ensconced in a rope trick.

Antimagic field.

"Marit? Wake up, it's me it'sAlfirinandifyoustabmetodeathrightnowthatwillbeveryinconvenient!"

Permalink Mark Unread

- Iomedae will dive in between Marit and Alfirin. 

 

Permalink Mark Unread


Marit does, in fact, hesitate to stab her. " - explain."

Permalink Mark Unread

"Alfirin and I are operating from the other world to which I was involuntarily sent. We can't return. You're going to satisfy yourself that I am me, and then I'm going to promise you that this is the best thing to do and that once I explain you'll think it's worth it, and then I'll send you home with orders you hate. I'm sorry."

Permalink Mark Unread

 

 

"You - used a Wish to - bring me here."

Permalink Mark Unread

"Yes. And we'll use another to send you back before you're missed."

Permalink Mark Unread

" - without the two of you the crusade is lost the minute Tar Baphon realizes you aren't just going to show up at great need. He will crush us. We have nowhere to run. We've fallen back most of the way to Urgir and the men are a wreck and he'll decapitate us, trivially, and then mop up all the men."

Permalink Mark Unread

"How long, in your best guess."

Permalink Mark Unread

"Before he notices that Alfirin's gone too? A day or two. Before he acts on it? I don't know, a week or two, I'd be surprised if it were a month. I don't know what's so important, here, but you don't wrap it up fast, you're going to come back to all of us fighting for the other side. If you have some Wish diamonds -"

Permalink Mark Unread

"I'm not giving them to you. I need us to not come to the attention of the gods, any of them, and a diamond you didn't have will be disruptive to prophecy. So will the making of any plans for the Crusade that you didn't have when you went to sleep. Marit, can you please attempt to satisfy yourself that I am myself, so that I can make you promises you'll actually believe."

Permalink Mark Unread

"What convinced you?" he asks Alfirin, though he's not actually taking his eyes off Iomedae.

Permalink Mark Unread

"She's still chosen by Aroden. Has her sword and her aura and - I disjoined her and cursed her and hit her with every enchantment I had prepared, and none of them held. They would have, if she weren't. And then she told me what we're not telling you and it does in fact justify this and there's too much detail for her to have faked it and - Look, you can tell we're in an antimagic field now, just so you wouldn't wake up with a fireball and so you can tell we're not under any enchantments at this moment - "

And she can unravel it, and then, slower than normal so that Marit can definitely follow what she's doing, cast a limited wish replicating an unholy blight.

Permalink Mark Unread

 

 

Marit starts coughing, and shivering. 

 

Then he shrugs. "I could be in a mindscape."

Permalink Mark Unread

"Then you're still in it with us, Tar-Baphon doesn't know all our codes." Iomedae does. She'll go through them until Marit motions impatiently for her to stop.

Permalink Mark Unread

Her skin isn't falling off even a little bit, so apparently she is in fact Evil.

She can arcane mark a piece of paper and hand it to him.

"If you still have this when you're wished back you're either still in the mindscape or never were. I can't really offer better than that, since anything I say about mindscapes that you didn't already know could be a lie."

Permalink Mark Unread

"I was going to propose you give me a diamond," he says. "Yes, yes, I know, I can't use it. But if I have it - then I really spoke to you, in the other world, where you're up to something that's at least several Wish diamonds of important."

Permalink Mark Unread

"Iomedae? Your call."

Permalink Mark Unread

"Your oath that you won't use it or tell anyone you have it or to the best of your ability make plans differently from how you would if you didn't have access to it."

Permalink Mark Unread

"That may well mean it ends up in Tar-Baphon's hands. You want me to chuck it into the ocean?"

Permalink Mark Unread

"That'd work, actually."

Permalink Mark Unread

 

"Earthfall, Iomedae, what is this?"

Permalink Mark Unread

"I swear to you," says Iomedae, "that I have the same goals I have always had, and always told you about; that if you knew what I knew, you would want me to be doing precisely what I am doing; that it is and will be worth it by your own lights. I swear to you that I do not see a better way at an acceptable cost and if I did I would take it. 

 

I need you to go back, and do exactly what you were doing, except don't authorize any Communes with Aroden or any other god about me or about Alfirin. You can talk Karlenius and Arnisant out of it somehow. Just fight the Crusade, to your last if necessary, and have a very good means of destroying yourself if it comes to that because Tar-Baphon shouldn't know about this either. 

I will tell you more as soon as I can. You'll agree that it is worth it. - please don't think too hard about what could possibly be worth it."

Permalink Mark Unread

"Marit, please, if we told you you'd agree that it's the right call and you'd agree that, knowing, you'd have to stay here, and you know what that would mean for the crusade. I know that's unbelievable. I know it's completely outside of anything we thought might ever happen. But please don't push us on the details. Not at that cost."

Permalink Mark Unread

 

 

 

He thinks for a while, several minutes, longer than it really takes to think about any particular question when you have the grandest kind of intelligence headband.

 

He studies the diamond, in a light he summons to the tip of his fingers. 

"I acknowledge your orders, Knight-Commander," he says eventually, his lips barely moving, "and will obey them."

Permalink Mark Unread

"Thank you," she says, and - certainly can't give him a hug, or tell a funny irrelevant story, after that.

Permalink Mark Unread

And she can wish Marit back to his bedroll.

 

"...I did not realize until Marit pulled a knife on me but I really should go back to Golarion again to pick up some clones. I don't know if they'll work normally from this far away, and there's nobody here who can raise me."

Permalink Mark Unread

"- yes, you should definitely do that. And then -

 

- how much do we risk, in terms of odds of success at the plan, if we - rush, if we try to do this before the Crusade is lost -"

Permalink Mark Unread

"...A lot, I think. We don't have a plan, yet, my plan was to - spend as long as it took, with you, going over possible plans for getting into dis - and I thought that might take months because it would be worth months, to be sure. If we come up with something sooner than that that seems like it'd work - we could act within a week. If. And - we'd want to be very sure, that it was actually a good plan, that we weren't rushing it just because - "

Permalink Mark Unread

"Yeah. It's not - it's not worth even a small chance it goes worse because we weren't ready."

 

She's sent lots of people to their deaths before. If this hurts more, that's a comprehensible fact about how humans work but it's not at all a fact about how Iomedae's values work; she knows Marit, and she doesn't know anyone in Hell, and that doesn't matter to her. 

Permalink Mark Unread

(She is not Iomedae. It matters to her. Just not enough to make a difference.)

"Ok. I think I do actually need - half an hour. Here, the books are in my bag if you want to get started, the ones in Taldane are near the top - We'll probably want Ma'ar for this, if he's recovered, a strategic genius will be more help than a magical one - "

Permalink Mark Unread

"Mmmhmm. I'll go get him."

 

Though she, too, might need a little bit of time to herself, first, to grieve.

Permalink Mark Unread

Ma’ar has had a brief semi-accidental nap on the couch where Iomedae left him, and is now back to feeling basically functional, if not exactly in the mood to throw a lot of magic around just yet. He’s ready to join them whenever Iomedae decides to seek him out.

Permalink Mark Unread

"Alfirin and I are just going to mope about probably sending all our friends to a fate worse than death, for a bit, and then we're ready to start planning."

Permalink Mark Unread

"...Oh." 

He closes his eyes. "I - the war in your world is going badly? I - suppose it would, losing both of you. I am very sorry." 

Permalink Mark Unread

She sits down, heavily. "Marit thinks that as soon as Tar-Baphon guesses that Alfirin and I won't swoop in to the rescue, he'll expend a great deal on crushing the crusade before we get back, and succeed. He's probably right. And - we could trivially win the crusade, right, with the resources of Velgarth to aid us, we could save all our soldiers, but - I think there's at least a one in ten chance, probably more like one in three, that going back to fight the crusade would mean the gods noticed what I'm planning in Dis. And that's not worth it. It's not even close. So I told Marit to go back and die for me and make sure no one asks Aroden why."

Permalink Mark Unread

"I am so sorry. I– do you think there is a way we could - fix it, afterward - I suppose it might in fact be an unworkable number of diamonds, to resurrect an army, but - if they are taken as undead, is there a way we can at least get them to afterlives..."   

Permalink Mark Unread

"If we survive Hell or can be resurrected from it, then yeah. We can go in, with the help of Predain and Tantara's people, and at least send them all on. I'm not - counting on it - but obviously it'll be my priority, if Hell goes well."

Permalink Mark Unread

Nod. 

Does Iomedae want a hug? 

Permalink Mark Unread

Yeah, she really would.

 


"You'd like him too. Marit, I mean."

Permalink Mark Unread

Hug. So much hug. 

"I am sure I would. I - all we can do is come up with a very good plan, I think, that will be - safer, and more likely to work and not trap us in Hell -" 

Permalink Mark Unread

"Yep. Alfirin wanted you for our planning session, in half an hour once we've both decompressed. We just need to - come up with the best possible plan, that's all it comes down to."

Permalink Mark Unread

"Of course." 

Does Iomedae want him to stick around for that half-hour? It's fine if she wants time alone for decompression, but he's also happy to stay and hug her and not say very much, because what is there to say, when you've just made the decision that letting your closest colleagues lose a war and be turned into animated corpses in an evil necromancer's army is worth it

Permalink Mark Unread

She does not really want to be alone. She wants hugs, and occasionally to say inane things about Marit like that he is a swordmage and the only Knight other than Iomedae who Alfirin doesn't really have particular friction with - "they don't trust each other, but that's a different matter" - and that his lifelong ambition has been to hang sixth circle spells so he can cast and fight in his own antimagic field, which he thinks he would be ludicrously good at.

Permalink Mark Unread

Ma'ar can stay with her, and offer hugs, and make sympathetic listening noises. He would be better at this with the headband, probably, but - it's not like any amount of enhanced perceptiveness and skillful reassurance will make the situation better. The situation is just. Bad. And it feels like just - being with Iomedae, staring at it beside her, is - what she needs, right now. 

 

And after a while they can go meet up with Alfirin to discuss plans. 

Permalink Mark Unread

In half an hour Alfirin's books are unpacked and her tears are prestidigitated away.

"We should get Urtho, actually, I think - if diamonds are sufficiently abundant here we should all get wished up over the next few days and he'll know things about diamond availability and I'll need to give him The Talk."

Permalink Mark Unread

Ma'ar is very curious about The Talk, and can alert Urtho with Mindspeech and summon him to the room. 

 

(A twinge of - some sort of feeling - noticing that he no longer finds this anxiety-inducing at all...) 

Permalink Mark Unread

Urtho will be right there! He greets Alfirin cheerfully and then stares in delighted awe at the many, many books. 

Permalink Mark Unread

"I've got a share language spell for you that should help you read them, but first you're going to have to listen to me tell you something very important."

Permalink Mark Unread

But BOOKS about MAGIC she sounds very serious.

Urtho nods, and sits down. "I am listening." 

Permalink Mark Unread

"So in our world there are a lot of - parables, stories, sayings - about people, especially powerful wizards, who are much too Clever and not Wise enough. From what I can tell, there are three people in this room of the type that those stories are meant to speak to.

And I'm about to propose making that much worse."

Permalink Mark Unread

"We have magic that can make people cleverer, or wiser, or more persuasive. You've tried Iomedae's headband. I have one that is much better at cleverness in particular. We can pass it around, get everyone's best thoughts on our problem. Beyond that, one of the things we can use large diamonds for is just - directly and permanently making someone much smarter. If we have the diamonds for it, I would like to do that to all of us, one each day. We're going to be sitting here, trying to come up with the very best possible plans to solve a very hard problem, and it will help if we are all better at this than we are now."

Permalink Mark Unread

"And you, in particular, I expect to have some brilliant idea about how we can tear a rift between planes and punch straight through the gates of Hell all the way down to Nessus and set off our antimagic bomb there and ruin Asmodeus' eternity."

Permalink Mark Unread

"And before you so much as start to write it down, let alone build it, I want you to stop and think. Whether it could ever possibly go off by accident, and what would happen if it did. Or whether it could be stolen by someone with some evil agenda. And then, if you're very very sure that neither of those will ever happen, and even if they do it won't cause very much damage -"

Permalink Mark Unread

"I want you to still not fucking build it."

Permalink Mark Unread

"I want you to come to me, I'm quite clever but also reasonably wise, and can check your work. And then we can both go to Iomedae, who is very wise and will be able to tell us if we're being reckless archmages."

Permalink Mark Unread

"Ma'ar, the same goes for you, and for me. It's an important lesson for all of us, and your world doesn't seem to have it, and Urtho only gets special attention in this lecture because he's the only one who's boiled an ocean this month."

 

"OK, that's it. Do we in fact have enough diamonds that that was necessary. We'll want at least twenty."

Permalink Mark Unread

Permalink Mark Unread

"Can we not...also make one of us more wise?" Ma'ar makes a face. "I realize cleverness is also going to be very important, here, but - if I was going to try to increase one of my - mental traits, in the way you break them down - I think I would want more wisdom, actually." 

Permalink Mark Unread

Urtho clears his throat and manages to find his voice. "We have at least twenty diamonds, yes. We can get more if necessary, the Ceej Empire will sell us to them even if we run out of diamonds available in Tantara." 

Permalink Mark Unread

"Oh Iomedae's getting wisdom first, someone's got to keep the rest of us in check. You can too, if you want. I can only do one each day but if we have the diamonds for it we can each get both, eventually."

Permalink Mark Unread

Nod. 

Permalink Mark Unread

Urtho still looks kind of shaken. "I - will be careful. And ask Iomedae for advice. I have recently had a great deal of reason to be grateful for Iomedae's excellent advice." He only looks a little bit sheepish as he says it. 

Permalink Mark Unread

"I'm just glad I could help, and consider myself already abundantly repaid."

Permalink Mark Unread

Urtho ducks his head. His smile is surprisingly shy, for an archmage who is over a hundred years old and approximately in charge of a country. 

 

Permalink Mark Unread

Ma'ar is smiling at Iomedae. "I am looking forward to seeing what you are like with even more Wisdom." 

Permalink Mark Unread

"I'm holding out hope I'll go 'oh, no, wait, there's totally a sensible way to protect the Crusade' - or 'oh, I'm confident I can safely ask Aroden for confidentiality -"

Permalink Mark Unread

"I hope so!" Glance at Alfirin. "Are we getting Iomedae more Cunning as well, or - I suppose that is not the top priority, but it seems like it would help with strategic reasoning." 

Permalink Mark Unread

"Yes, I was imagining it'd be - Cunning for you or myself, then Iomedae's wisdom, then cunning for Urtho and the other of us, then Cunning for Iomedae. And then, I suppose, Wisdom for the mages, if we have the diamonds."

Permalink Mark Unread

"I'm not going to keep up with any of you on the planar math no matter what we enhance but sometimes I can outthink Alfirin about a battlefield just by breaking all my thoughts down until they can fit in my distinctly less cunning head."

Permalink Mark Unread

"Also I just really dislike it when I am noticeably being held back because I cannot track enough concepts at once? Especially when I am managing to have the Wisdom to notice that I am - not putting together all of the pieces right."